Contents

Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual PDF

1 of 700
1 of 700

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual PDF

Introduction

This manual describes the various signal interfaces and functions required when creating sequence

program of PLC CPU to operate C70.

Read this manual thoroughly before programming.

Thoroughly study the "Safety Precautions" on the following page to ensure safe use of this CNC unit.

Details described in this manual

For items described in "Restrictions" or "Usable State", the instruction manual issued by the machine

maker takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the specifications

issued by the machine maker before starting use.

Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the CNC version.

CAUTION

Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and

attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure

correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.

This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION" may lead to major results depending on the situation. In

any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.

The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.

There are no "Danger" items in this manual.

When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if

handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage could occur if

handling is mistaken.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

CAUTION

CAUTION rotated

object

CAUTION HOT

Danger Electric shock

risk

Danger explosive

Prohibited

Disassembly is

prohibited

KEEP FIRE AWAY

General instruction

Earth ground

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

DANGER

1. Items related to prevention of electric shocks

Do not operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.

Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this may lead

to electric shocks.

1. Items related to product and manual

For the items described in the "Restrictions" and "Usable State", the instruction manual issued by the

machine maker takes precedence over this instruction manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".

This manual has been written on the assumption that all options are provided.

Check the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.

Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the CNC system version.

2. Items related to connection

When using an inductive load such as relays, always contact a diode in parallel to the load as a noise

measure.

When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to

suppress rush currents.

3. Items related to design

Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before chucking both ends of the

workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle. If the spindle phase synchronization signal is

turned ON when both ends of the workpiece are chucked to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle,

the chuck or workpiece could be damaged by the torsion that occurs during phase alignment.

If the temperature rise detection function is invalidated with the parameters, the control could be

disabled when the temperature is excessive. This could result in machine damage or personal injuries

due to runaway axis, and could damage the device. Enable the detection function for normal use.

In order to prevent illegal transfer of bit data, use data update program.

WARNING

CAUTION

Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-

users and Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and

components which can be recycled and/or reused.

This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of

separately from your household waste.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the

battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as

follows:

Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)

In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.

Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/

recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, CC-Link IE

are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other

countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Microsoft, Windows are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the

respective companies.

( /Japanese)

( A)

Handling of our product

(English)

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the

user may be required to take adequate measures.

( /Korean)

(A )

.

CONTENTS

1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 System Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 3

2.1 Flow of Signals....................................................................................................................................... 5 2.1.1 Flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU Data.......................................................................................... 5 2.1.2 Handling of Devices....................................................................................................................... 6 2.1.3 Data update program with NC ....................................................................................................... 7 2.1.4 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table ...................................................... 10

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller ............................................................................................. 13

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)..................................................................................................... 16 3.1.1 System State................................................................................................................................ 16 3.1.2 Axis State..................................................................................................................................... 20 3.1.3 Part System State ........................................................................................................................ 22 3.1.4 Spindle State ............................................................................................................................... 26

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC) ................................................................................................. 28 3.2.1 System State................................................................................................................................ 28 3.2.2 Part System State ........................................................................................................................ 30 3.2.3 Axis State..................................................................................................................................... 33 3.2.4 Spindle State ............................................................................................................................... 34

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC).................................................................................................. 35 3.3.1 System Command ....................................................................................................................... 35 3.3.2 Axis Command............................................................................................................................. 39 3.3.3 Part System Command................................................................................................................ 42 3.3.4 Spindle Command ....................................................................................................................... 49

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC) .............................................................................................. 51 3.4.1 System Command ....................................................................................................................... 51 3.4.2 Part System Command................................................................................................................ 53 3.4.3 Axis Command............................................................................................................................. 56 3.4.4 Spindle Command ....................................................................................................................... 57

3.5 Each Application .................................................................................................................................. 58 3.5.1 PLC Axis State............................................................................................................................. 58 3.5.2 PLC Axis Control.......................................................................................................................... 60 3.5.3 Window Result Information .......................................................................................................... 62 3.5.4 Window Command....................................................................................................................... 65 3.5.5 Data Registered to Magazine for M System ................................................................................ 72 3.5.6 Tool Life Management (M System).............................................................................................. 74 3.5.7 Safety Observing ......................................................................................................................... 76 3.5.8 PLC Constants............................................................................................................................. 78 3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection ......................................................................................................................... 80 3.5.10 PLC Axis Indexing Interface....................................................................................................... 81

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals............................................................................................................ 82 3.6.1 Special Relay ............................................................................................................................... 82 3.6.2 Special Register........................................................................................................................... 84

4 Explanation of Interface Signals............................................................................................................... 89

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .......................................................... 91 4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .............................................................. 103 4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) ................................................ 117 4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) ......................................................... 146 4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)..................................................... 156 4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)........................................................... 173 4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU) .............................................. 177 4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)...................................................... 195 4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ............................................. 197 4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................................ 213 4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................... 229

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ........................................... 292 4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)........................................ 307 4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)............................................. 321 4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU) ................................. 323 4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)........................................ 341

5 Explanation for Each Application........................................................................................................... 345

5.1 PLC Axis Control................................................................................................................................ 346 5.1.1 Specifications............................................................................................................................. 346 5.1.2 Detailed Explanation .................................................................................................................. 347 5.1.3 Interface with PLC...................................................................................................................... 348 5.1.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data ............................................................................ 350 5.1.5 Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 358 5.1.6 Timing Chart .............................................................................................................................. 358 5.1.7 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection....................................................................... 365 5.1.8 Handle Feed Axis Selection....................................................................................................... 365 5.1.9 Buffering Mode........................................................................................................................... 366 5.1.10 Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 369 5.1.11 PLC Axis Monitor ..................................................................................................................... 371 5.1.12 Absolute Position Detection ..................................................................................................... 371 5.1.13 Rotary axis ............................................................................................................................... 371 5.1.14 Position switch ......................................................................................................................... 371 5.1.15 Usage Example........................................................................................................................ 372

5.2 PLC Window ...................................................................................................................................... 373 5.2.1 Details ........................................................................................................................................ 373 5.2.2 Read window ............................................................................................................................. 377 5.2.3 Write window.............................................................................................................................. 380 5.2.4 Operation Details ....................................................................................................................... 383 5.2.5 Usage Examples........................................................................................................................ 385 5.2.6 Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 389

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System) .................................................................................................... 390 5.3.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function ................................................................................ 390 5.3.2 Tool Life Management Methods ................................................................................................ 391 5.3.3 Procedure when Tool Function Command is Executed............................................................. 392 5.3.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed................................................................................. 393 5.3.5 Tool Life Management II Method ............................................................................................... 394 5.3.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools................................................................................... 394 5.3.7 Tool Data ................................................................................................................................... 395 5.3.8 Usage Time, Work Count........................................................................................................... 397 5.3.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register) ...................................................................................................... 398 5.3.10 User PLC Processing............................................................................................................... 399 5.3.11 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 400

5.4 Tool Life Management (L System) ..................................................................................................... 405 5.4.1 Interface with PLC...................................................................................................................... 405

5.5 External Search.................................................................................................................................. 409 5.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation........................................................................ 416 5.7 Safety Observing................................................................................................................................ 417

5.7.1 CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals................................................................................... 417 5.8 GOT Window...................................................................................................................................... 429

5.8.1 GOT Window Interface .............................................................................................................. 430 5.8.2 How to Obtain Window Data...................................................................................................... 433 5.8.3 Details of Command .................................................................................................................. 436 5.8.4 Automatic setting window ......................................................................................................... 451 5.8.5 Error code for each command code.......................................................................................... 454

5.9 PLC Constants ................................................................................................................................... 455 5.10 PLC bit selection .............................................................................................................................. 456 5.11 Chopping......................................................................................................................................... 457

5.11.1 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 458 5.11.2 Chopping command from PLC................................................................................................. 465 5.11.3 Chopping operation.................................................................................................................. 466 5.11.4 Interrupt operation during chopping ........................................................................................ 466

5.11.5 Changing the peformance parameter during the chopping start state..................................... 467 5.11.6 Chopping compensation operation .......................................................................................... 468 5.11.7 Chopping feedrate ................................................................................................................... 471 5.11.8 Usage example ........................................................................................................................ 473

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing............................................................................................................................ 474 5.12.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................. 474 5.12.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface..................................................................................................... 476

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis ........................................................................................... 496 5.13.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................... 496 5.13.2 Specification............................................................................................................................. 496 5.13.3 Combined Functions................................................................................................................ 499 5.13.4 Parameter settings................................................................................................................... 503 5.13.5 Interface with PLC.................................................................................................................... 506

6 Spindle Control ........................................................................................................................................ 509

6.1 Related Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 510 6.2 Connection Method............................................................................................................................ 510 6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data .................................................................................................................... 511

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions............................................................................................................ 513

7.1 Command Format .............................................................................................................................. 514 7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish........................................................................................................... 514

7.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command)............................................................. 515 7.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command)............................................................. 516 7.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command) ................................................ 517

7.3 M Code Independent Output.............................................................................................................. 518 7.3.1 Operation Sequence.................................................................................................................. 518

7.4 Axis Movement and M Commands .................................................................................................... 520 7.5 Precautions ........................................................................................................................................ 521

8 Exclusive Instructions............................................................................................................................. 523

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction .................................................................................................................. 525 8.1.1 Outline of ATC Control............................................................................................................... 525 8.1.2 ATC Operation ........................................................................................................................... 525 8.1.3 Explanation of Terminology ....................................................................................................... 526 8.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines............................................... 526 8.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions ............................................................................................. 527 8.1.6 Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction.......................................................................................... 528 8.1.7 Functions ................................................................................................................................... 530 8.1.8 Operation Outline....................................................................................................................... 532 8.1.9 Errors ......................................................................................................................................... 533 8.1.10 Program Example .................................................................................................................... 533 8.1.11 File Register Allocation and Parameters for ATC Control........................................................ 534 8.1.12 Details of Each Instruction ....................................................................................................... 536

8.2 ROT Instruction.................................................................................................................................. 547 8.2.1 Instruction List............................................................................................................................ 547 8.2.2 Format of ROT Instruction ......................................................................................................... 547 8.2.3 Functions ................................................................................................................................... 549 8.2.4 Operation Outline....................................................................................................................... 550 8.2.5 Errors ......................................................................................................................................... 551 8.2.6 Program Example ...................................................................................................................... 551 8.2.7 Details of Each Instruction ......................................................................................................... 552

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction..................................................................................................................... 556 8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction...................................................................................................... 557 8.3.2 Operation when executing the DDWR instruction...................................................................... 559 8.3.3 Error contents ............................................................................................................................ 560 8.3.4 Calculation error......................................................................................................................... 560 8.3.5 Interlock using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC ................................................................. 561 8.3.6 Program example....................................................................................................................... 562

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction....................................................................................................................... 563 8.4.1 Format of DDRD Instruction....................................................................................................... 564

8.4.2 Operation when executing the DDRD instruction ...................................................................... 566 8.4.3 Error contents ............................................................................................................................ 567 8.4.4 Calculation error......................................................................................................................... 567 8.4.5 Program example....................................................................................................................... 568

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables...................................................................................................... 569 8.5.1 Instruction Format ...................................................................................................................... 569 8.5.2 CNC Side Devices to be Specified ............................................................................................ 569 8.5.3 Common Variable Control Data ................................................................................................. 570

8.5.3.1 Data Type .......................................................................................................................... 571 8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data..................................................................................... 571 8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection ................................................................................................ 572

8.5.4 Error Contents............................................................................................................................ 572 8.5.5 Program Examples .................................................................................................................... 573

8.5.5.1 Write Data to Common Variables ...................................................................................... 573 8.5.5.2 Read Common Variable Data ............................................................................................ 573 8.5.5.3 Change the Common Variable Control Data ..................................................................... 574 8.5.5.4 Read Common Variable Data, Calculate and then Write the Data to Common Variables 575

8.6 Precautions ........................................................................................................................................ 576 8.6.1 Transmitting Exclusive Instructions between CPUs................................................................... 576 8.6.2 Executing NC Exclusive Instructions ........................................................................................ 579 8.6.3 Completion Status Information................................................................................................... 579

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data ....................................................................................................... 581

Appendix 1.1 Section No. List .................................................................................................................. 590 Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List ........................................................................................................... 591 Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data......................................................................................... 606

Appendix 1.3.1 How to refer to the data ............................................................................................. 606 Appendix 1.3.2 Data unit system ........................................................................................................ 607 Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details......................................................................................... 608

1

1

Outline

1 Outline

MITSUBISHI CNC

2

This manual is prepared to assist you to understand the various control signals necessary for creating the sequence

program.

The manual is composed as shown below. Refer to related sections as necessary to gain the maximum benefit from the

manual.

Please note that the specifications referred to in the text represent the maximum specifications which include also those under development.

Handling of M, S, T and B functions

Spindle control

Explanation of interface signals

Device Input signals Output signals Each application

Table for input/ output signals with controller

System configuration

PLC Interface Manual

(cover)

3

2

System Configuration

2 System Configuration

MITSUBISHI CNC

4

MITSUBISHIMITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI

(USB/Serial)

Q J71 E71 -100 Q Xxxx x

MITSUBISHI

Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x Q Xxxx x

Q172DNCPU-S2

MITSUBISHI

PLC CPU module CNC CPU module(s) Communication, I/O module(s)

HMI with touch panel (For GOT/CNC exclusive use)

Machine operation panel

Servo/Spindle drive unit

sensor

PLC program development tool GX-DEVELOPER installed

Personal computer

(Optical communication)

Power supply

Manual handle

Switches, coils, etc.

(Display interface)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

2.1 Flow of Signals

5

2.1 Flow of Signals 2.1.1 Flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU Data

The flow of PLC CPU and CNC CPU data is shown below.

(1) The data PLC CPU wrote into G device is automatically transmitted to each CNC CPU by the high-speed bus.

(2) The CNC data (state signal) is automatically written into the read area corresponding to each CNC CPU of PLC

CPU by the high-speed bus.

(3) For the writing area of PLC CPU (G device), the writing area (G device) is different depending on the signal for

which CNC CPU.

(4) Writing area 1 and 2 are the same data structures.

(5) Read area 1 and 2 are the same data structures.

(6) When one CNC CPU is used, writing area 1 and read area 1 are used.

(7) When two CNC CPUs are used, writing area 1 and read area 1 are used for CNC CPU#1, writing area 2 and read

area 2 are used for CNC CPU#2.

(8) Note that the head address of G device in writing area 2 corresponding to CNC CPU#2 and the head address of G

device in writing area 1 corresponding to CNC CPU#1 is different. In "3 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS TABLE WITH

CONTROLLER", this is indicated like "Sharing G+1234".

(9) It is possible to change the head address "U3E0\G13072" for a writing area 2 to "U3E0\G14000" to start from a

round number.

(Y,R)

(X,R)

(Y,R)

(X,R)

Write area

No.1

The devices shared between CNC CPU-#2 (No.3)CNC CPU-#1 (No.2)PLC CPU (No.1)

U3E2\G10000

U3E1\G10000

U3E0\G13072

U3E0\G10000

multi-CPU (G)

Write area 1

Write area 2

Read area 1

Read area 2

No.1

No.2

No.3

Write area

Read area Read area

Write area

Control signal Control signal

State signal State signal

2 System Configuration

MITSUBISHI CNC

6

2.1.2 Handling of Devices

X Y

(QnUD CPU)

[MOV Dn Rn]

[MOV Dn Rn]

CNC CPU#1

(Y)

(R)

(X)

(R)

(b)

(d)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(a)

Bit data

Word data

MELSEC IO input

MELSEC IO output

Lamp

Relay, etc.

Relative of switches

Bit data

Bit data

Word data

Word data

(A transfer program is indispensable.)

(A transfer program is indispensable.)

X device Y device

(Note1) Transfer "G device" to "device in PLC CPU" by sequence program when using a bit device. (Similarly, transfer "device in PLC CPU" to "G device".) (When writing/reading is executed directly into "G device", correct operation might not be executed according to timing with CNC.)

(Note2) A word-data can be written/read directly into "G device". However, we will recommend using the device after a word-data is transferred into "device in PLC CPU". For a word-data not so used, directly access "G device". For a word-data often used, use the device after a word-data is transferred into "device in PLC CPU". However, do not use BMOV command to copy between "G device" and PLC device.

Bit data

Word data

PLC CPU

Bit data

Word data

Bit data

Word data

Transferred by sequence program

Transferred by sequence program

Transfer

Transfer

The devices shared between multi-CPU (G)

Internal device in CNC

Bit data (Note 1)

Transferred by sequence program

Word data (Note 2)

Writing area 1

Read area 1Bit data (Note 1)

Transferred by sequence program

Word data (Note 2)

Example for control signal (Bit data (a)) $1 abbrev. Signal name

<- Sharing G Jog mode Handle mode Incremental mode Manual arbitrary feed mode Reference position return mode Automatic initialization mode

Example for control signal (Word data (b)) $1

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name

1st cutting feedrate override 2nd cutting feedrate override Rapid traverse override

Manual feedrate

1st handle/incremental feed magnification

Example for state signal (Bit data (c)) $1 abbrev. Signal name

G10048 <- Sharing G In jog mode In handle mode In incremental mode In manual arbitrary feed mode In reference position return mode In automatic initial set mode

Example for state signal (Word data (d)) $1

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name

External search status

M code data 1

M code data 2

M code data 3

The examples of devices shared between multi-CPU (G) and internal device in CNC tables are shown below.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

2.1 Flow of Signals

7

2.1.3 Data update program with NC

In this manual, inputs to CNC (Y***), outputs from CNC (X***), and registers for data register (R***) are described as

device addresses in the CNC.

Thus, use the PLC internal device later than X300 for transferring from the G device to the PLC internal device and use

the PLC internal device later than Y300 for output in order to have better correspondences with this manual.

It is necessary to avoid using the same names of the devices of I/O units mounted to the PLC.

Same conditions apply when transferring R*** to the PLC internal device and use it.

[Data update program]

If input/output signals with CNC and PLC programs for machine control are separately programmed, the PLC

program for machine control will be processed at every process cycle, whose advantage is high-speed processing.

In order to prevent illegal transfer of bit data, use data update program.

G10048 X600 JO X601 HO X602 SO X603 PTPO X604 ZRNO X605 ASTO X606 X607

CNC CPU

Common device

G

PLC CPU

$1 abbrev. Signal name

In jog mode In handle mode In incremental mode In manual arbitrary feed mode In reference position return mode In automatic initial set mode

<- Sharing G

In PLC Interface Manual, explained in the form of CNC internal device address.

Data is used by transferring the same device address in the PLC.

Automatic transfer

[BMOV U3E1 /G10048 K4X600 Kn]

CAUTION

[EI]

SM402 M1000

[MOV K4X0 D200]

[SET M1000]

[CJ P100]

[> D200 K300]

[> D200 K200]

[> D200 K100]

[FEND]

[RST M1000]

[END]

[IRET]

SM400

P100:

I45: M1000

Processes not related to the data transfer timing with the CNC. (Not related to CNCs input/output.)

Synchronized program: Sequence process is skipped until the interrupt response. M1000 is an arbitrary device.

Processes in which data transfer timing matching is necessary. (Such as sequence processing by using CNC status output signals, or turning ON/OFF CNC control input signals)

Data transfer cycle interrupt program: Between the CNC CPU, bit type interface transfer will be executed. For the interrupt pointer, designate "I45". (Note 1) It is recommendable to transfer only necessary data

considering the scanning time. (Note 2) For transferring data between the common devices,

do not use BMOV command except this example. (Note 3) Do not add any more program to the interrupt

program (I45).

Allowing execution of interrupt program

Processes to be executed continuously

SM400:Always ON SM402:After RUN, turned ON by only 1 scan

Sequence program

[MOV D0 U3E0\G10200]

[MOV U3E1\G10200 D100]

[BMOV K4Y300 U3E0\G10000 K183]

[BMOV U3E1\G10000 K4X300 K125]

2 System Configuration

MITSUBISHI CNC

8

(1) Do not buildt the process to multi-CPU synchronous interrupt program other than bit data transfer program. The

execution time exceeds the interrupt cycle as it is executed in about 1ms cycle, so it may not operate normally.

(2) The word data can read and write to the shared device at the arbitrary positon of the PLC program, however do not

transfer the data by BMOV (block transfer) command. To transfer to the internal device, use MOV (16 bit) or DMOV

(32 bit) command.

(3) Although the shared device is the word device, a bit expression that designated the bit position is enabled.

(The example indicates bit 7 of U3E0/G10321.7 No.1 CPU shared device G10321.)

Note that if the multi-CPU synchronous interrput occurs during the two or more bit process, it may not operate

normally as it might be transfered to the CNC CPU in the middle of process. Do not use the bit expression to write

to the shared device.

(4) The processing time to read and write in the shared device takes longer conpared with the internal device. Thus,

when reading and writing to the same address of the shared device a number of times, process it in the internal

device. So that the number of read or write times to the shared device will be reduced and the scanning time can be

shorten.

(5) For the process of the device that turns ON only one scan at the completion, program it to the position where the

scan takes place each time ("processes not related to the data transfer timing with the CNC" of the data update

program).

(6) When the timer is not executed for each scan

Do not jump OUT T1 command with CJ command while the coil of the timer (e.g. T1) has been turning ON.

When OUT T command is jumped, the current value for the timer will not be updated.

Precautions

C70 PLC Interface Manual

2.1 Flow of Signals

9

(7) Following signals used to be set to "1" by CNC at power ON for C64 but not for C70. So make sure to execute PLC

processing depending on necessity.

(Note) Even though ABSn is not a B-contact signal, it used to be set to "1" for safety as it is usually used without the

manual interruption amount offset.

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Abbreviation Signal name

+016 +019 +022 +025 +028 +031 +034 +037 <- Sharing G

Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551 *SVFn Servo OFF

Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553 *+EDTn External deceleration +

Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554 *-EDTn External deceleration -

Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555 *+AITn Automatic interlock+

Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556 *-AITn Automatic interlock-

Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557 *+MITn Manual interlock+

Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558 *-MITn Manual interlock-

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis Abbreviation Signal name

+040 +043 +046 +049 +052 +055 +058 +061 <- Sharing G

Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1 *SVFn Servo OFF

Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3 *+EDTn External deceleration +

Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4 *-EDTn External deceleration -

Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5 *+AITn Automatic interlock+

Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6 *-AITn Automatic interlock-

Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7 *+MITn Manual interlock+

Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8 *-MITn Manual interlock-

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

Abbrevi- ation

Signal name

+065 +079 +093 +107 +121 +135 +149 <- Sharing G

Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51 *SPn Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)

Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53 *BSLn Block start interlock

Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54 *CSLn Cutting block start interlock

Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B *CDZn Chamfering

Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68 ABSn Manual absolute

Y760 Y840 Y920 YA00 YAE0 YBC0 YCA0 *FV11n Cutting feedrate override 1

Y762 Y842 Y922 YA02 YAE2 YBC2 YCA2 *FV14n Cutting feedrate override 4

Y764 Y844 Y924 YA04 YAE4 YBC4 YCA4 *FV116n Cutting feedrate override 16

Y774 Y854 Y934 YA14 YAF4 YBD4 YCB4 *JV16n Manual feedrate

Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop

2 System Configuration

MITSUBISHI CNC

10

2.1.4 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table

Input signal (CNC CPU -> PLC CPU)

Type Shared device (G) CNC device Points (Word) Total (Word) Detail

Bit type

G10000 X300 16

125

Interface used in part systems

G10016 X400 32 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)

G10048 X600 56 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)

G10104 X980 21 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)

G10125 - 75 75 Vacancy

Word type

G10200 R0 100

960

Interface used in part systems

G10300 R100 700 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)

G11000 R800 160 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)

G11160 R1600 210 210 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)

G11370 R1900 80 80 Interface used in PLC axis (7 axes)

G11450 R4700 770 770 - M system ATC data - L system Tool life management 1 (1st and 2nd part system)

G12220 R6724 48 48 M system Tool life management

G12270 R9000 200 200 PLC window response interface

G12470 R2150 50 50 Safety observing data

G12520 R4500 96 96 PLC constant parameter setting value

G12616 R4600 24 24 PLC bit selection parameter setting value

G12660 R1980 8 8 Interface used in PLC axis (8 axes)

G12668 - 12 12 Vacancy

G12680 R2000 47 47 PLC axis indexing interface

G12728 - 173 173 Vacancy

Vacancy G13020 - 52 52 Vacancy

C70 PLC Interface Manual

2.1 Flow of Signals

11

Output signal (PLC CPU -> CNC CPU)

(Note 1) GOT window command interface is stored in D register.

Type Shared device (G) CNC device Points (Word) Total (Word) Detail

Bit type

+0 Y300 16

183

Interface used in part systems

+16 Y400 48 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)

+64 Y700 98 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)

+162 YD20 21 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)

+183 - 17 17 Vacancy

Word type

+200 R2300 100

960

Interface used in part systems

+300 R2400 700 Interface used in each part system (7 part systems)

+1000 R3100 160 Interface used in each axis (16 axes)

+1160 R3900 210 210 Interface used in spindle (7 spindles)

+1370 R4200 80 80 Interface used in PLC axis (7 axes)

+1450 R6720 4 4 M system Tool life management

+1454 - 6 6 Vacancy

+1460 D4300 (Note 1) 640 640 GOT window command interface

+2100 R8500 480 480 PLC window command interface

+2580 R4450 50 50 Safety observing data

+2638 - 22 22 Vacancy

+2660 R4280 8 8 Interface used in PLC axis (8 axes)

+2668 - 12 12 Vacancy

+2680 R4300 47 47 PLC axis indexing interface

+2728 - 173 173 Vacancy

Vacancy +3036 - 36 36 Vacancy

2 System Configuration

MITSUBISHI CNC

12

13

3

Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

14

The followings are the types of input/output signals tables to be used.

For common devices used in part systems (Sample)

For devices used in each axis (Sample)

For devices used in each part system (Sample)

For devices used in each spindle (Sample)

(Note 1) Signals marked with "*" in the "Abbrev." column are handled as B contacts. Signals marked with "*" in the

"Abbrev." column are handled as B contacts.

(Note 2) Signals marked with "" are reserved for the system.

Types of Input/Output Signals Tables

X320 X328

X321 X329

X322 X32A

X323 X32B

X324 X32C

X325 X32D

X326 X32E

10002

X327

10002

X32F

INCH

DROPNS

SPSYN1

FSPRV

FSPPH

SPCMP

BATWR

BATAL

MA

SA

Common Common

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name

Controller ready completion In inch unit selection

Servo ready completion Door open enable

In spindle synchronization

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion

Spindle phase synchronization completion

Chuck close confirmation

Battery warning

Battery alarm

G10016 G10018 G10020 G10022 G10024 G10026 G10028 G10030

X400

X402

X403

X404

X405

X406

X407

X401

X420

X422

X423

X424

X425

X426

X427

X421

X440

X442

X443

X444

X445

X446

X447

X441

X460

X462

X463

X464

X465

X466

X467

X461

X480

X482

X483

X484

X485

X486

X487

X481

X4A0

X4A2

X4A3

X4A4

X4A5

X4A6

X4A7

X4A1

X4C0

X4C2

X4C3

X4C4

X4C5

X4C6

X4C7

X4C1

X4E0

X4E2

X4E3

X4E4

X4E5

X4E6

X4E7

X4E1

RDYn

MVPn

MVMn

ZP1n

ZP2n

ZP3n

ZP4n

AXn

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

<- Sharing G

Servo ready

Axis selection

In axis plus motion

In axis minus motion

1st reference position reached

2nd reference position reached

3rd reference position reached

4th reference position reached

G10048 G10056 G10064 G10072 G10080 G10088 G10096

X603

X604

X605

X600

X601

X602

X683

X684

X685

X680

X681

X682

X703

X704

X705

X700

X701

X702

X783

X784

X785

X780

X781

X782

X803

X804

X805

X800

X801

X802

X883

X884

X885

X880

X881

X882

X903

X904

X905

X900

X901

X902

PTPOn

ZRNOn

ASTOn

JOn

HOn

SOn

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

<- Sharing G

In jog mode

In handle mode

In incremental mode

In manual arbitrary feed mode

In reference position return mode

In automatic initial set mode

G10105 G10108 G10111 G10114 G10117 G10120 G10123

X990

X991

X992

X993

X994

X995

X9C0

X9C1

X9C2

X9C3

X9C4

X9C5

X9F0

X9F1

X9F2

X9F3

X9F4

X9F5

XA20

XA21

XA22

XA23

XA24

XA25

XA50

XA51

XA52

XA53

XA54

XA55

XA80

XA81

XA82

XA83

XA84

XA85

XAB0

XAB1

XAB2

XAB3

XAB4

XAB5

CDOn

VROn

FLOn

ZSOn

USOn

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

<- Sharing G

Current detection

Speed detection

In spindle alarm

Zero speed

Spindle up-to-speed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

15

There are 1-bit unit, and 16-bit or 32-bit unit controller input/output signals, which are classified as shown below.

When designing, refer to the section indicated below and make allocations according to the table in the respective

section.

Classification of Input/Output Signals with Controller

Signal type Explanation Reference

Input

DI

(1) Allocated to device X. (2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a principle. (3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are common for all part systems or all spindles.

3.1

Data (1) Allocated to device R. (2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as a principle.

3.2

Output

DO

(1) Allocated to device Y. (2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a principle. (3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are common for all part systems or all spindles.

3.3

Data (1) Allocated to device R. (2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as a principle.

3.4

Each application

Devices are classified under the usage purpose. 3.5

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

16

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC) 3.1.1 System State

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10000

X300

10000

X308

X301 X309

X302 X30A

X303 X30B

X304 X30C

X305 X30D

X306 X30E

X307 X30F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10001

X310 CNOP 24 hours continuous operation

10001

X318 SKIP1C SKIP1 Input signal state

X311 SSUCHK Dual signals unconfirmed after compare error

X319 SKIP2C SKIP2 Input signal state

X312 NOFFCHK Output OFF check not complete X31A SKIP3C SKIP3 Input signal state

X313 *PSDNTF Power shutoff notification X31B SKIP4C SKIP4 Input signal state

X314 X31C

X315 X31D

X316 X31E

X317 X31F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10002

X320 MA Controller ready completion

10002

X328

X321 SA Servo ready completion X329 DROPNS Door open enable

X322 X32A SPSYN1 In spindle synchronization

X323 X32B FSPRV Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion

X324 X32C FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization completion

X325 X32D SPCMP Chuck close confirmation

X326 X32E BATWR Battery warning

X327 X32F BATAL Battery alarm

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10003

X330 AL1 NC alarm 1

10003

X338 WNG In door interlock

X331 AL2 NC alarm 2 (Servo alarm) X339 MSON Macro single valid

X332 X33A PARACHG Power OFF required after parameter change

X333 X33B EDITDO Edited data in processing

X334 X33C EDITERR Edited data error

X335 X33D

X336 X33E SMPFIN NC data sampling completed

X337 X33F ATS ATS valid

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

17

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10004

X340

10004

X348

X341 X349

X342 X34A

X343 X34B

X344 X34C

X345 X34D

X346 X34E

X347 X34F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10005

X350 DLOAD0 Download in progress

10005

X358

X351 DLDFIN Download completed X359

X352 DLDERR Download error X35A

X353 X35B

X354 X35C

X355 X35D

X356 X35E

X357 X35F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10006

X360 PSWP1 PLC axis position switch 1

10006

X368 PSWP9 PLC axis position switch 9

X361 PSWP2 PLC axis position switch 2 X369 PSWP10 PLC axis position switch 10

X362 PSWP3 PLC axis position switch 3 X36A PSWP11 PLC axis position switch 11

X363 PSWP4 PLC axis position switch 4 X36B PSWP12 PLC axis position switch 12

X364 PSWP5 PLC axis position switch 5 X36C PSWP13 PLC axis position switch 13

X365 PSWP6 PLC axis position switch 6 X36D PSWP14 PLC axis position switch 14

X366 PSWP7 PLC axis position switch 7 X36E PSWP15 PLC axis position switch 15

X367 PSWP8 PLC axis position switch 8 X36F PSWP16 PLC axis position switch 16

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10007

X370

10007

X378

X371 X379

X372 X37A

X373 X37B

X374 X37C

X375 X37D

X376 X37E

X377 X37F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10008

X380 APLCIN1 APLC input signal 1

10008

X388 APLCIN9 APLC input signal 9

X381 APLCIN2 APLC input signal 2 X389 APLCIN10 APLC input signal 10

X382 APLCIN3 APLC input signal 3 X38A APLCIN11 APLC input signal 11

X383 APLCIN4 APLC input signal 4 X38B APLCIN12 APLC input signal 12

X384 APLCIN5 APLC input signal 5 X38C APLCIN13 APLC input signal 13

X385 APLCIN6 APLC input signal 6 X38D APLCIN14 APLC input signal 14

X386 APLCIN7 APLC input signal 7 X38E APLCIN15 APLC input signal 15

X387 APLCIN8 APLC input signal 8 X38F APLCIN16 APLC input signal 16

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

18

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10009

X390 APLCIN17 APLC input signal 17

10009

X398 APLCIN25 APLC input signal 25

X391 APLCIN18 APLC input signal 18 X399 APLCIN26 APLC input signal 26

X392 APLCIN19 APLC input signal 19 X39A APLCIN27 APLC input signal 27

X393 APLCIN20 APLC input signal 20 X39B APLCIN28 APLC input signal 28

X394 APLCIN21 APLC input signal 21 X39C APLCIN29 APLC input signal 29

X395 APLCIN22 APLC input signal 22 X39D APLCIN30 APLC input signal 30

X396 APLCIN23 APLC input signal 23 X39E APLCIN31 APLC input signal 31

X397 APLCIN24 APLC input signal 24 X39F APLCIN32 APLC input signal 32

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10010

X3A0

10010

X3A8

X3A1 X3A9

X3A2 X3AA

X3A3 X3AB

X3A4 X3AC

X3A5 X3AD

X3A6 X3AE

X3A7 X3AF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10011

X3B0

10011

X3B8

X3B1 X3B9

X3B2 X3BA

X3B3 X3BB

X3B4 X3BC

X3B5 X3BD

X3B6 X3BE

X3B7 X3BF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10012

X3C0

10012

X3C8

X3C1 X3C9

X3C2 X3CA

X3C3 X3CB

X3C4 X3CC

X3C5 X3CD

X3C6 X3CE

X3C7 X3CF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10013

X3D0

10013

X3D8

X3D1 X3D9

X3D2 X3DA

X3D3 X3DB

X3D4 X3DC

X3D5 X3DD

X3D6 X3DE

X3D7 X3DF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

19

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10014

X3E0

10014

X3E8

X3E1 X3E9

X3E2 X3EA

X3E3 X3EB

X3E4 X3EC

X3E5 X3ED

X3E6 X3EE

X3E7 X3EF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10015

X3F0

10015

X3F8

X3F1 X3F9

X3F2 X3FA

X3F3 X3FB

X3F4 X3FC

X3F5 X3FD

X3F6 X3FE

X3F7 X3FF

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

20

3.1.2 Axis State

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

G10016 G10018 G10020 G10022 G10024 G10026 G10028 G10030 <- Sharing G

X400 X420 X440 X460 X480 X4A0 X4C0 X4E0 RDYn Servo ready

X401 X421 X441 X461 X481 X4A1 X4C1 X4E1 AXn Axis selection

X402 X422 X442 X462 X482 X4A2 X4C2 X4E2 MVPn In axis plus motion

X403 X423 X443 X463 X483 X4A3 X4C3 X4E3 MVMn In axis minus motion

X404 X424 X444 X464 X484 X4A4 X4C4 X4E4 ZP1n 1st reference position reached

X405 X425 X445 X465 X485 X4A5 X4C5 X4E5 ZP2n 2nd reference position reached

X406 X426 X446 X466 X486 X4A6 X4C6 X4E6 ZP3n 3rd reference position reached

X407 X427 X447 X467 X487 X4A7 X4C7 X4E7 ZP4n 4th reference position reached

X408 X428 X448 X468 X488 X4A8 X4C8 X4E8 NRFn Near reference position

X409 X429 X449 X469 X489 X4A9 X4C9 X4E9 ARRFn NC axis up-to-speed

X40A X42A X44A X46A X48A X4AA X4CA X4EA ZSFn Zero point initialization set completed

X40B X42B X44B X46B X48B X4AB X4CB X4EB ZSEn Zero point initialization set error completed

X40C X42C X44C X46C X48C X4AC X4CC X4EC ZSn In zero point initialization

X40D X42D X44D X46D X48D X4AD X4CD X4ED ZLSn Zero point initialization incomplete

X40E X42E X44E X46E X48E X4AE X4CE X4EE ILIn In current limit

X40F X42F X44F X46F X48F X4AF X4CF X4EF ILAn Current limit reached

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

G10017 G10019 G10021 G10023 G10025 G10027 G10029 G10031 <- Sharing G

X410 X430 X450 X470 X490 X4B0 X4D0 X4F0 UCLPn Unclamp command

X411 X431 X451 X471 X491 X4B1 X4D1 X4F1 INPn In-position

X412 X432 X452 X472 X492 X4B2 X4D2 X4F2 MSOEn In multi-step speed monitor

X413 X433 X453 X473 X493 X4B3 X4D3 X4F3 MSOMO1n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1

X414 X434 X454 X474 X494 X4B4 X4D4 X4F4 MSOMO2n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2

X415 X435 X455 X475 X495 X4B5 X4D5 X4F5

X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6 AXCHGISn Axis switching invalid status

X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7 PLCMODn In PLC axis control

X418 X438 X458 X478 X498 X4B8 X4D8 X4F8

X419 X439 X459 X479 X499 X4B9 X4D9 X4F9

X41A X43A X45A X47A X49A X4BA X4DA X4FA

X41B X43B X45B X47B X49B X4BB X4DB X4FB

X41C X43C X45C X47C X49C X4BC X4DC X4FC

X41D X43D X45D X47D X49D X4BD X4DD X4FD

X41E X43E X45E X47E X49E X4BE X4DE X4FE

X41F X43F X45F X47F X49F X4BF X4DF X4FF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

21

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name

G10032 G10034 G10036 G10038 G10040 G10042 G10044 G10046 <- Sharing G

X500 X520 X540 X560 X580 X5A0 X5C0 X5E0 RDYn Servo ready

X501 X521 X541 X561 X581 X5A1 X5C1 X5E1 AXn Axis selection

X502 X522 X542 X562 X582 X5A2 X5C2 X5E2 MVPn In plus motion

X503 X523 X543 X563 X583 X5A3 X5C3 X5E3 MVMn In minus motion

X504 X524 X544 X564 X584 X5A4 X5C4 X5E4 ZP1n 1st reference position reached

X505 X525 X545 X565 X585 X5A5 X5C5 X5E5 ZP2n 2nd reference position reached

X506 X526 X546 X566 X586 X5A6 X5C6 X5E6 ZP3n 3rd reference position reached

X507 X527 X547 X567 X587 X5A7 X5C7 X5E7 ZP4n 4th reference position reached

X508 X528 X548 X568 X588 X5A8 X5C8 X5E8 NRFn Near reference position

X509 X529 X549 X569 X589 X5A9 X5C9 X5E9 ARRFn NC axis up-to-speed

X50A X52A X54A X56A X58A X5AA X5CA X5EA ZSFn Zero point initialization set completed

X50B X52B X54B X56B X58B X5AB X5CB X5EB ZSEn Zero point initialization set error completed

X50C X52C X54C X56C X58C X5AC X5CC X5EC ZSn In zero point initialization

X50D X52D X54D X56D X58D X5AD X5CD X5ED ZLSn Zero point initialization incomplete

X50E X52E X54E X56E X58E X5AE X5CE X5EE ILIn In current limit

X50F X52F X54F X56F X58F X5AF X5CF X5EF ILAn Current limit reached

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name

G10033 G10035 G10037 G10039 G10041 G10043 G10045 G10047 <- Sharing G

X510 X530 X550 X570 X590 X5B0 X5D0 X5F0 UCLPn Unclamp command

X511 X531 X551 X571 X591 X5B1 X5D1 X5F1 INPn In-position

X512 X532 X552 X572 X592 X5B2 X5D2 X5F2 MSOEn In multi-step speed monitor

X513 X533 X553 X573 X593 X5B3 X5D3 X5F3 MSOMO1n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1

X514 X534 X554 X574 X594 X5B4 X5D4 X5F4 MSOMO2n Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2

X515 X535 X555 X575 X595 X5B5 X5D5 X5F5

X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6 AXCHGISn Axis switching invalid status

X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7 PLCMODn In PLC axis control

X518 X538 X558 X578 X598 X5B8 X5D8 X5F8

X519 X539 X559 X579 X599 X5B9 X5D9 X5F9

X51A X53A X55A X57A X59A X5BA X5DA X5FA

X51B X53B X55B X57B X59B X5BB X5DB X5FB

X51C X53C X55C X57C X59C X5BC X5DC X5FC

X51D X53D X55D X57D X59D X5BD X5DD X5FD

X51E X53E X55E X57E X59E X5BE X5DE X5FE

X51F X53F X55F X57F X59F X5BF X5DF X5FF

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

22

3.1.3 Part System State

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10048 G10056 G10064 G10072 G10080 G10088 G10096 <- Sharing G

X600 X680 X700 X780 X800 X880 X900 JOn In jog mode

X601 X681 X701 X781 X801 X881 X901 HOn In handle mode

X602 X682 X702 X782 X802 X882 X902 SOn In incremental mode

X603 X683 X703 X783 X803 X883 X903 PTPOn In manual arbitrary feed mode

X604 X684 X704 X784 X804 X884 X904 ZRNOn In reference position return mode

X605 X685 X705 X785 X805 X885 X905 ASTOn In automatic initial set mode

X606 X686 X706 X786 X806 X886 X906

X607 X687 X707 X787 X807 X887 X907

X608 X688 X708 X788 X808 X888 X908 MEMOn In memory mode

X609 X689 X709 X789 X809 X889 X909

X60A X68A X70A X78A X80A X88A X90A

X60B X68B X70B X78B X80B X88B X90B DOn In MDI mode

X60C X68C X70C X78C X80C X88C X90C

X60D X68D X70D X78D X80D X88D X90D

X60E X68E X70E X78E X80E X88E X90E

X60F X68F X70F X78F X80F X88F X90F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10049 G10057 G10065 G10073 G10081 G10089 G10097 <- Sharing G

X610 X690 X710 X790 X810 X890 X910

X611 X691 X711 X791 X811 X891 X911

X612 X692 X712 X792 X812 X892 X912 OPn In automatic operation "run"

X613 X693 X713 X793 X813 X893 X913 STLn In automatic operation "start"

X614 X694 X714 X794 X814 X894 X914 SPLn In automatic operation "pause"

X615 X695 X715 X795 X815 X895 X915 RSTn In "reset"

X616 X696 X716 X796 X816 X896 X916 CXNn In manual arbitrary feed

X617 X697 X717 X797 X817 X897 X917 RWDn In rewind

X618 X698 X718 X798 X818 X898 X918 DENn Motion command completion

X619 X699 X719 X799 X819 X899 X919 TIMPn All axes in-position

X61A X69A X71A X79A X81A X89A X91A TSMZn All axes smoothing zero

X61B X69B X71B X79B X81B X89B X91B

X61C X69C X71C X79C X81C X89C X91C CXFINn Manual arbitrary feed completion

X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D ETSEn External search finished

X61E X69E X71E X79E X81E X89E X91E

X61F X69F X71F X79F X81F X89F X91F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

23

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10050 G10058 G10066 G10074 G10082 G10090 G10098 <- Sharing G

X620 X6A0 X720 X7A0 X820 X8A0 X920 RPNn In rapid traverse

X621 X6A1 X721 X7A1 X821 X8A1 X921 CUTn In cutting feed

X622 X6A2 X722 X7A2 X822 X8A2 X922 TAPn In tapping

X623 X6A3 X723 X7A3 X823 X8A3 X923 THRDn In thread cutting

X624 X6A4 X724 X7A4 X824 X8A4 X924 SYNn In synchronous feed

X625 X6A5 X725 X7A5 X825 X8A5 X925 CSSn In constant surface speed

X626 X6A6 X726 X7A6 X826 X8A6 X926 SKIPn In skip

X627 X6A7 X727 X7A7 X827 X8A7 X927 ZRNNn In reference position return

X628 X6A8 X728 X7A8 X828 X8A8 X928 INCHn In inch unit selection

X629 X6A9 X729 X7A9 X829 X8A9 X929

X62A X6AA X72A X7AA X82A X8AA X92A F1DNn F 1-digit commanded

X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B TLFOn In tool life management

X62C X6AC X72C X7AC X82C X8AC X92C

X62D X6AD X72D X7AD X82D X8AD X92D

X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E TLOVn Tool life over

X62F X6AF X72F X7AF X82F X8AF X92F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10051 G10059 G10067 G10075 G10083 G10091 G10099 <- Sharing G

X630 X6B0 X730 X7B0 X830 X8B0 X930

X631 X6B1 X731 X7B1 X831 X8B1 X931

X632 X6B2 X732 X7B2 X832 X8B2 X932 AL3n NC alarm 3 (Program error)

X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933 AL4n NC alarm 4 (Operation error)

X634 X6B4 X734 X7B4 X834 X8B4 X934

X635 X6B5 X735 X7B5 X835 X8B5 X935 SSEn Search & start (error)

X636 X6B6 X736 X7B6 X836 X8B6 X936 SSGn Search & start (search)

X637 X6B7 X737 X7B7 X837 X8B7 X937 ASLEn Illegal axis selected

X638 X6B8 X738 X7B8 X838 X8B8 X938 F11n F 1-digit No. code 1

X639 X6B9 X739 X7B9 X839 X8B9 X939 F12n F 1-digit No. code 2

X63A X6BA X73A X7BA X83A X8BA X93A F14n F 1-digit No. code 4

X63B X6BB X73B X7BB X83B X8BB X93B

X63C X6BC X73C X7BC X83C X8BC X93C Waiting between part systems

X63D X6BD X73D X7BD X83D X8BD X93D

X63E X6BE X73E X7BE X83E X8BE X93E VAMODOn In hypothetical axis command mode

X63F X6BF X73F X7BF X83F X8BF X93F HSST In high-speed synchronous tapping

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

24

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10052 G10060 G10068 G10076 G10084 G10092 G10100 <- Sharing G

X640 X6C0 X740 X7C0 X840 X8C0 X940 DM00n M code independent output M00

X641 X6C1 X741 X7C1 X841 X8C1 X941 DM01n M code independent output M01

X642 X6C2 X742 X7C2 X842 X8C2 X942 DM02n M code independent output M02

X643 X6C3 X743 X7C3 X843 X8C3 X943 DM30n M code independent output M30

X644 X6C4 X744 X7C4 X844 X8C4 X944 MF1n M function strobe 1

X645 X6C5 X745 X7C5 X845 X8C5 X945 MF2n M function strobe 2

X646 X6C6 X746 X7C6 X846 X8C6 X946 MF3n M function strobe 3

X647 X6C7 X747 X7C7 X847 X8C7 X947 MF4n M function strobe 4

X648 X6C8 X748 X7C8 X848 X8C8 X948

X649 X6C9 X749 X7C9 X849 X8C9 X949 MMSn Manual numerical command

X64A X6CA X74A X7CA X84A X8CA X94A

X64B X6CB X74B X7CB X84B X8CB X94B TCPn Tool change position return completion

X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C TCRQn New tool change

X64D X6CD X74D X7CD X84D X8CD X94D

X64E X6CE X74E X7CE X84E X8CE X94E

X64F X6CF X74F X7CF X84F X8CF X94F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10053 G10061 G10069 G10077 G10085 G10093 G10101 <- Sharing G

X650 X6D0 X750 X7D0 X850 X8D0 X950 TF1n T function strobe 1

X651 X6D1 X751 X7D1 X851 X8D1 X951

X652 X6D2 X752 X7D2 X852 X8D2 X952

X653 X6D3 X753 X7D3 X853 X8D3 X953

X654 X6D4 X754 X7D4 X854 X8D4 X954 BF1n 2nd M function strobe 1

X655 X6D5 X755 X7D5 X855 X8D5 X955

X656 X6D6 X756 X7D6 X856 X8D6 X956

X657 X6D7 X757 X7D7 X857 X8D7 X957

X658 X6D8 X758 X7D8 X858 X8D8 X958 SF1n S function strobe 1

X659 X6D9 X759 X7D9 X859 X8D9 X959 SF2n S function strobe 2

X65A X6DA X75A X7DA X85A X8DA X95A SF3n S function strobe 3

X65B X6DB X75B X7DB X85B X8DB X95B SF4n S function strobe 4

X65C X6DC X75C X7DC X85C X8DC X95C SF5n S function strobe 5

X65D X6DD X75D X7DD X85D X8DD X95D SF6n S function strobe 6

X65E X6DE X75E X7DE X85E X8DE X95E SF7n S function strobe 7

X65F X6DF X75F X7DF X85F X8DF X95F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

25

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10054 G10062 G10070 G10078 G10086 G10094 G10102 <- Sharing G

X660 X6E0 X760 X7E0 X860 X8E0 X960 PSW1n Position switch 1

X661 X6E1 X761 X7E1 X861 X8E1 X961 PSW2n Position switch 2

X662 X6E2 X762 X7E2 X862 X8E2 X962 PSW3n Position switch 3

X663 X6E3 X763 X7E3 X863 X8E3 X963 PSW4n Position switch 4

X664 X6E4 X764 X7E4 X864 X8E4 X964 PSW5n Position switch 5

X665 X6E5 X765 X7E5 X865 X8E5 X965 PSW6n Position switch 6

X666 X6E6 X766 X7E6 X866 X8E6 X966 PSW7n Position switch 7

X667 X6E7 X767 X7E7 X867 X8E7 X967 PSW8n Position switch 8

X668 X6E8 X768 X7E8 X868 X8E8 X968

X669 X6E9 X769 X7E9 X869 X8E9 X969

X66A X6EA X76A X7EA X86A X8EA X96A

X66B X6EB X76B X7EB X86B X8EB X96B

X66C X6EC X76C X7EC X86C X8EC X96C DLWAITn Waiting for data to be downloaded

X66D X6ED X76D X7ED X86D X8ED X96D TRVEn Tap retract possible

X66E X6EE X76E X7EE X86E X8EE X96E PCNTn No. of work machining over

X66F X6EF X76F X7EF X86F X8EF X96F ABSWn Power shutoff movement over

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

G10055 G10063 G10071 G10079 G10087 G10095 G10103 <- Sharing G

X670 X6F0 X770 X7F0 X870 X8F0 X970 PSW9n Position switch 9

X671 X6F1 X771 X7F1 X871 X8F1 X971 PSW10n Position switch 10

X672 X6F2 X772 X7F2 X872 X8F2 X972 PSW11n Position switch 11

X673 X6F3 X773 X7F3 X873 X8F3 X973 PSW12n Position switch 12

X674 X6F4 X774 X7F4 X874 X8F4 X974 PSW13n Position switch 13

X675 X6F5 X775 X7F5 X875 X8F5 X975 PSW14n Position switch 14

X676 X6F6 X776 X7F6 X876 X8F6 X976 PSW15n Position switch 15

X677 X6F7 X777 X7F7 X877 X8F7 X977 PSW16n Position switch 16

X678 X6F8 X778 X7F8 X878 X8F8 X978

X679 X6F9 X779 X7F9 X879 X8F9 X979

X67A X6FA X77A X7FA X87A X8FA X97A

X67B X6FB X77B X7FB X87B X8FB X97B

X67C X6FC X77C X7FC X87C X8FC X97C

X67D X6FD X77D X7FD X87D X8FD X97D

X67E X6FE X77E X7FE X87E X8FE X97E

X67F X6FF X77F X7FF X87F X8FF X97F

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

26

3.1.4 Spindle State

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

G10104 G10107 G10110 G10113 G10116 G10119 G10122 <- Sharing G

X980 X9B0 X9E0 XA10 XA40 XA70 XAA0

X981 X9B1 X9E1 XA11 XA41 XA71 XAA1

X982 X9B2 X9E2 XA12 XA42 XA72 XAA2

X983 X9B3 X9E3 XA13 XA43 XA73 XAA3

X984 X9B4 X9E4 XA14 XA44 XA74 XAA4 SIGEn S command gear No. illegal

X985 X9B5 X9E5 XA15 XA45 XA75 XAA5 SOVEn S command max./min. command value over

X986 X9B6 X9E6 XA16 XA46 XA76 XAA6 SNGEn S command no gear selected

X987 X9B7 X9E7 XA17 XA47 XA77 XAA7

X988 X9B8 X9E8 XA18 XA48 XA78 XAA8

X989 X9B9 X9E9 XA19 XA49 XA79 XAA9

X98A X9BA X9EA XA1A XA4A XA7A XAAA

X98B X9BB X9EB XA1B XA4B XA7B XAAB SUPPn Spindle speed upper limit over

X98C X9BC X9EC XA1C XA4C XA7C XAAC SLOWn Spindle speed lower limit over

X98D X9BD X9ED XA1D XA4D XA7D XAAD GR1n Spindle gear shift command 1

X98E X9BE X9EE XA1E XA4E XA7E XAAE GR2n Spindle gear shift command 2

X98F X9BF X9EF XA1F XA4F XA7F XAAF

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

G10105 G10108 G10111 G10114 G10117 G10120 G10123 <- Sharing G

X990 X9C0 X9F0 XA20 XA50 XA80 XAB0

X991 X9C1 X9F1 XA21 XA51 XA81 XAB1 CDOn Current detection

X992 X9C2 X9F2 XA22 XA52 XA82 XAB2 VROn Speed detection

X993 X9C3 X9F3 XA23 XA53 XA83 XAB3 FLOn In spindle alarm

X994 X9C4 X9F4 XA24 XA54 XA84 XAB4 ZSOn Zero speed

X995 X9C5 X9F5 XA25 XA55 XA85 XAB5 USOn Spindle up-to-speed

X996 X9C6 X9F6 XA26 XA56 XA86 XAB6 ORAOn Spindle in-position

X997 X9C7 X9F7 XA27 XA57 XA87 XAB7 LCSAn In L coil selection

X998 X9C8 X9F8 XA28 XA58 XA88 XAB8 SMAn Spindle ready-ON

X999 X9C9 X9F9 XA29 XA59 XA89 XAB9 SSAn Spindle servo-ON

X99A X9CA X9FA XA2A XA5A XA8A XABA

X99B X9CB X9FB XA2B XA5B XA8B XABB SSRNn In spindle forward run

X99C X9CC X9FC XA2C XA5C XA8C XABC SSRIn In spindle reverse run

X99D X9CD X9FD XA2D XA5D XA8D XABD SZPHn Z-phase passed

X99E X9CE X9FE XA2E XA5E XA8E XABE SIMPn Position loop in-position

X99F X9CF X9FF XA2F XA5F XA8F XABF STLQn In spindle torque limit

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.1 Bit Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

27

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

G10106 G10109 G10112 G10115 G10118 G10121 G10124 <- Sharing G

X9A0 X9D0 XA00 XA30 XA60 XA90 XAC0

X9A1 X9D1 XA01 XA31 XA61 XA91 XAC1

X9A2 X9D2 XA02 XA32 XA62 XA92 XAC2

X9A3 X9D3 XA03 XA33 XA63 XA93 XAC3

X9A4 X9D4 XA04 XA34 XA64 XA94 XAC4

X9A5 X9D5 XA05 XA35 XA65 XA95 XAC5

X9A6 X9D6 XA06 XA36 XA66 XA96 XAC6

X9A7 X9D7 XA07 XA37 XA67 XA97 XAC7

X9A8 X9D8 XA08 XA38 XA68 XA98 XAC8

X9A9 X9D9 XA09 XA39 XA69 XA99 XAC9 SMSOEn In spindle multi-step speed monitor

X9AA X9DA XA0A XA3A XA6A XA9A XACA SMSOMO1n In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 1

X9AB X9DB XA0B XA3B XA6B XA9B XACB SMSOMO2n In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 2

X9AC X9DC XA0C XA3C XA6C XA9C XACC

X9AD X9DD XA0D XA3D XA6D XA9D XACD

X9AE X9DE XA0E XA3E XA6E XA9E XACE

X9AF X9DF XA0F XA3F XA6F XA9F XACF

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

28

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC) 3.2.1 System State

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10200 R0 10210 R10 1st handle pulse counter

10201 R1 10211 R11 2nd handle pulse counter

10202 R2 10212 R12 3rd handle pulse counter

10203 R3 10213 R13

10204 R4 10214 R14

10205 R5 10215 R15

10206 R6 10216 R16

CRT display information 10207 R7 10217 R17

10208 R8 KEYIN 10218 R18

10209 R9 SMODEN Speed monitor door open possible 10219 R19

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10220 R20 10230 R30 User macro output #1135 (Controller -> PLC)10221 R21 Emergency stop cause 10231 R31

10222 R22 10232 R32

CNC software version code 10223 R23 10233 R33

10224 R24 User macro output #1132 (Controller -> PLC)

10234 R34

10225 R25 10235 R35

10226 R26 User macro output #1133 (Controller -> PLC)

10236 R36

10227 R27 10237 R37

10228 R28 User macro output #1134 (Controller -> PLC)

10238 R38

10229 R29 10239 R39

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10240 R40 Battery drop cause 10250 R50

10241 R41 Temperature warning cause 10251 R51

10242 R42 10252 R52

10243 R43 10253 R53

10244 R44 10254 R54

10245 R45 10255 R55 Spindle synchronization phase error output

10246 R46 10256 R56 Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor

10247 R47 10257 R57 Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (lower limit)

10248 R48 Spindle synchronization phase error 1 10258 R58 Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (upper limit)

10249 R49 Spindle synchronization phase error 2 10259 R59 Spindle synchronization Phase offset data

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

29

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10260 R60 APLC input data 1 10270 R70

10261 R61 APLC input data 2 10271 R71

10262 R62 APLC input data 3 10272 R72

10263 R63 APLC input data 4 10273 R73

10264 R64 APLC input data 5 10274 R74

10265 R65 APLC input data 6 10275 R75

10266 R66 APLC input data 7 10276 R76

10267 R67 APLC input data 8 10277 R77

10268 R68 APLC input data 9 10278 R78

10269 R69 APLC input data 10 10279 R79

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal name

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

10280 R80 NCVERR

ZR device No. at occurrence of NC exclusive instruction (DDWR/DDRD) error

10290 R90 GOT window Data changeover completion10281 R81 10291 R91

10282 R82 ZRECVN

O Common variable No. at occurrence of ZR device error

10292 R92

10283 R83 ZRECVF

C Error cause at occurrence of ZR device error

10293 R93

10284 R84 10294 R94

10285 R85 10295 R95

10286 R86 10296 R96

10287 R87 10297 R97

10288 R88 10298 R98

10289 R89 10299 R99

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

30

3.2.2 Part System State

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10300 R100 10400 R200 10500 R300 10600 R400 10700 R500 10800 R600 10900 R700 External search status

10301 R101 10401 R201 10501 R301 10601 R401 10701 R501 10801 R601 10901 R701

10302 R102 10402 R202 10502 R302 10602 R402 10702 R502 10802 R602 10902 R702

10303 R103 10403 R203 10503 R303 10603 R403 10703 R503 10803 R603 10903 R703

10304 R104 10404 R204 10504 R304 10604 R404 10704 R504 10804 R604 10904 R704 M code data 1

10305 R105 10405 R205 10505 R305 10605 R405 10705 R505 10805 R605 10905 R705

10306 R106 10406 R206 10506 R306 10606 R406 10706 R506 10806 R606 10906 R706 M code data 2

10307 R107 10407 R207 10507 R307 10607 R407 10707 R507 10807 R607 10907 R707

10308 R108 10408 R208 10508 R308 10608 R408 10708 R508 10808 R608 10908 R708 M code data 3

10309 R109 10409 R209 10509 R309 10609 R409 10709 R509 10809 R609 10909 R709

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10310 R110 10410 R210 10510 R310 10610 R410 10710 R510 10810 R610 10910 R710 M code data 4

10311 R111 10411 R211 10511 R311 10611 R411 10711 R511 10811 R611 10911 R711

10312 R112 10412 R212 10512 R312 10612 R412 10712 R512 10812 R612 10912 R712 S code data 1

10313 R113 10413 R213 10513 R313 10613 R413 10713 R513 10813 R613 10913 R713

10314 R114 10414 R214 10514 R314 10614 R414 10714 R514 10814 R614 10914 R714 S code data 2

10315 R115 10415 R215 10515 R315 10615 R415 10715 R515 10815 R615 10915 R715

10316 R116 10416 R216 10516 R316 10616 R416 10716 R516 10816 R616 10916 R716 S code data 3

10317 R117 10417 R217 10517 R317 10617 R417 10717 R517 10817 R617 10917 R717

10318 R118 10418 R218 10518 R318 10618 R418 10718 R518 10818 R618 10918 R718 S code data 4

10319 R119 10419 R219 10519 R319 10619 R419 10719 R519 10819 R619 10919 R719

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10320 R120 10420 R220 10520 R320 10620 R420 10720 R520 10820 R620 10920 R720 T code data 1

10321 R121 10421 R221 10521 R321 10621 R421 10721 R521 10821 R621 10921 R721

10322 R122 10422 R222 10522 R322 10622 R422 10722 R522 10822 R622 10922 R722

10323 R123 10423 R223 10523 R323 10623 R423 10723 R523 10823 R623 10923 R723

10324 R124 10424 R224 10524 R324 10624 R424 10724 R524 10824 R624 10924 R724

10325 R125 10425 R225 10525 R325 10625 R425 10725 R525 10825 R625 10925 R725

10326 R126 10426 R226 10526 R326 10626 R426 10726 R526 10826 R626 10926 R726

10327 R127 10427 R227 10527 R327 10627 R427 10727 R527 10827 R627 10927 R727

10328 R128 10428 R228 10528 R328 10628 R428 10728 R528 10828 R628 10928 R728 2nd M function data 1

10329 R129 10429 R229 10529 R329 10629 R429 10729 R529 10829 R629 10929 R729

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10330 R130 10430 R230 10530 R330 10630 R430 10730 R530 10830 R630 10930 R730

10331 R131 10431 R231 10531 R331 10631 R431 10731 R531 10831 R631 10931 R731

10332 R132 10432 R232 10532 R332 10632 R432 10732 R532 10832 R632 10932 R732

10333 R133 10433 R233 10533 R333 10633 R433 10733 R533 10833 R633 10933 R733

10334 R134 10434 R234 10534 R334 10634 R434 10734 R534 10834 R634 10934 R734

10335 R135 10435 R235 10535 R335 10635 R435 10735 R535 10835 R635 10935 R735

10336 R136 10436 R236 10536 R336 10636 R436 10736 R536 10836 R636 10936 R736 Tool No.

10337 R137 10437 R237 10537 R337 10637 R437 10737 R537 10837 R637 10937 R737

10338 R138 10438 R238 10538 R338 10638 R438 10738 R538 10838 R638 10938 R738 Group in tool life management

10339 R139 10439 R239 10539 R339 10639 R439 10739 R539 10839 R639 10939 R739

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

31

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10340 R140 10440 R240 10540 R340 10640 R440 10740 R540 10840 R640 10940 R740 No. of work machining (current value)10341 R141 10441 R241 10541 R341 10641 R441 10741 R541 10841 R641 10941 R741

10342 R142 10442 R242 10542 R342 10642 R442 10742 R542 10842 R642 10942 R742 Near reference position (per reference position)10343 R143 10443 R243 10543 R343 10643 R443 10743 R543 10843 R643 10943 R743

10344 R144 10444 R244 10544 R344 10644 R444 10744 R544 10844 R644 10944 R744 Tool life usage data

10345 R145 10445 R245 10545 R345 10645 R445 10745 R545 10845 R645 10945 R745

10346 R146 10446 R246 10546 R346 10646 R446 10746 R546 10846 R646 10946 R746 No. of work machining (maximum value)10347 R147 10447 R247 10547 R347 10647 R447 10747 R547 10847 R647 10947 R747

10348 R148 10448 R248 10548 R348 10648 R448 10748 R548 10848 R648 10948 R748

10349 R149 10449 R249 10549 R349 10649 R449 10749 R549 10849 R649 10949 R749

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10350 R150 10450 R250 10550 R350 10650 R450 10750 R550 10850 R650 10950 R750

10351 R151 10451 R251 10551 R351 10651 R451 10751 R551 10851 R651 10951 R751

10352 R152 10452 R252 10552 R352 10652 R452 10752 R552 10852 R652 10952 R752

10353 R153 10453 R253 10553 R353 10653 R453 10753 R553 10853 R653 10953 R753

10354 R154 10454 R254 10554 R354 10654 R454 10754 R554 10854 R654 10954 R754

10355 R155 10455 R255 10555 R355 10655 R455 10755 R555 10855 R655 10955 R755

10356 R156 10456 R256 10556 R356 10656 R456 10756 R556 10856 R656 10956 R756

Error code output10357 R157 10457 R257 10557 R357 10657 R457 10757 R557 10857 R657 10957 R757

10358 R158 10458 R258 10558 R358 10658 R458 10758 R558 10858 R658 10958 R758

10359 R159 10459 R259 10559 R359 10659 R459 10759 R559 10859 R659 10959 R759

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10360 R160 10460 R260 10560 R360 10660 R460 10760 R560 10860 R660 10960 R760

Error code output extension 10361 R161 10461 R261 10561 R361 10661 R461 10761 R561 10861 R661 10961 R761

10362 R162 10462 R262 10562 R362 10662 R462 10762 R562 10862 R662 10962 R762

10363 R163 10463 R263 10563 R363 10663 R463 10763 R563 10863 R663 10963 R763

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10364 R164 10464 R264 10564 R364 10664 R464 10764 R564 10864 R664 10964 R764 S code data 5

10365 R165 10465 R265 10565 R365 10665 R465 10765 R565 10865 R665 10965 R765

10366 R166 10466 R266 10566 R366 10666 R466 10766 R566 10866 R666 10966 R766 S code data 6

10367 R167 10467 R267 10567 R367 10667 R467 10767 R567 10867 R667 10967 R767

10368 R168 10468 R268 10568 R368 10668 R468 10768 R568 10868 R668 10968 R768 S code data 7

10369 R169 10469 R269 10569 R369 10669 R469 10769 R569 10869 R669 10969 R769

10370 R170 10470 R270 10570 R370 10670 R470 10770 R570 10870 R670 10970 R770 User Macro output #1132 (Controller -> PLC)10371 R171 10471 R271 10571 R371 10671 R471 10771 R571 10871 R671 10971 R771

10372 R172 10472 R272 10572 R372 10672 R472 10772 R572 10872 R672 10972 R772 User Macro output #1133 (Controller -> PLC)10373 R173 10473 R273 10573 R373 10673 R473 10773 R573 10873 R673 10973 R773

10374 R174 10474 R274 10574 R374 10674 R474 10774 R574 10874 R674 10974 R774 User Macro output #1134 (Controller -> PLC)10375 R175 10475 R275 10575 R375 10675 R475 10775 R575 10875 R675 10975 R775

10376 R176 10476 R276 10576 R376 10676 R476 10776 R576 10876 R676 10976 R776 User Macro output #1135 (Controller -> PLC)10377 R177 10477 R277 10577 R377 10677 R477 10777 R577 10877 R677 10977 R777

10378 R178 10478 R278 10578 R378 10678 R478 10778 R578 10878 R678 10978 R778

10379 R179 10479 R279 10579 R379 10679 R479 10779 R579 10879 R679 10979 R779

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

32

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10380 R180 10480 R280 10580 R380 10680 R480 10780 R580 10880 R680 10980 R780 Chopping status

10381 R181 10481 R281 10581 R381 10681 R481 10781 R581 10881 R681 10981 R781 Chopping error No.

10382 R182 10482 R282 10582 R382 10682 R482 10782 R582 10882 R682 10982 R782 Chopping axis

10383 R183 10483 R283 10583 R383 10683 R483 10783 R583 10883 R683 10983 R783

10384 R184 10484 R284 10584 R384 10684 R484 10784 R584 10884 R684 10984 R784

10385 R185 10485 R285 10585 R385 10685 R485 10785 R585 10885 R685 10985 R785

10386 R186 10486 R286 10586 R386 10686 R486 10786 R586 10886 R686 10986 R786

10387 R187 10487 R287 10587 R387 10687 R487 10787 R587 10887 R687 10987 R787

10388 R188 10488 R288 10588 R388 10688 R488 10788 R588 10888 R688 10988 R788

10389 R189 10489 R289 10589 R389 10689 R489 10789 R589 10889 R689 10989 R789

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

Sharing G

Inter- nal

10390 R190 10490 R290 10590 R390 10690 R490 10790 R590 10890 R690 10990 R790

10391 R191 10491 R291 10591 R391 10691 R491 10791 R591 10891 R691 10991 R791

10392 R192 10492 R292 10592 R392 10692 R492 10792 R592 10892 R692 10992 R792

10393 R193 10493 R293 10593 R393 10693 R493 10793 R593 10893 R693 10993 R793

10394 R194 10494 R294 10594 R394 10694 R494 10794 R594 10894 R694 10994 R794

10395 R195 10495 R295 10595 R395 10695 R495 10795 R595 10895 R695 10995 R795

10396 R196 10496 R296 10596 R396 10696 R496 10796 R596 10896 R696 10996 R796

10397 R197 10497 R297 10597 R397 10697 R497 10797 R597 10897 R697 10997 R797

10398 R198 10498 R298 10598 R398 10698 R498 10798 R598 10898 R698 10998 R798

10399 R199 10499 R299 10599 R399 10699 R499 10799 R599 10899 R699 10999 R799

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.2 Data Type Input Signals (CNC->PLC)

33

3.2.3 Axis State

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal nameShar-

ing G Inter- nal

Sha- ring G

Inter nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

11000 R800 11010 R810 11020 R820 11030 R830 11040 R840 11050 R850 11060 R860 11070 R870

Thermal expansion compensation amount

11001 R801 11011 R811 11021 R821 11031 R831 11041 R841 11051 R851 11061 R861 11071 R871

11002 R802 11012 R812 11022 R822 11032 R832 11042 R842 11052 R852 11062 R862 11072 R872 Machine position n-th axis11003 R803 11013 R813 11023 R823 11033 R833 11043 R843 11053 R853 11063 R863 11073 R873

11004 R804 11014 R814 11024 R824 11034 R834 11044 R844 11054 R854 11064 R864 11074 R874 Feedback machine position n-th axis11005 R805 11015 R815 11025 R825 11035 R835 11045 R845 11055 R855 11065 R865 11075 R875

11006 R806 11016 R816 11026 R826 11036 R836 11046 R846 11056 R856 11066 R866 11076 R876

11007 R807 11017 R817 11027 R827 11037 R837 11047 R847 11057 R857 11067 R867 11077 R877

11008 R808 11018 R818 11028 R828 11038 R838 11048 R848 11058 R858 11068 R868 11078 R878

11009 R809 11019 R819 11029 R829 11039 R839 11049 R849 11059 R859 11069 R869 11079 R879

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal nameShar-

ing G Inter- nal

Sha- ring G

Inter nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

11080 R880 11090 R890 11100 R900 11110 R910 11120 R920 11130 R930 11140 R940 11150 R950

Thermal expansion compensation amount

11081 R881 11091 R891 11101 R901 11111 R911 11121 R921 11131 R931 11141 R941 11151 R951

11082 R882 11092 R892 11102 R902 11112 R912 11122 R922 11132 R932 11142 R942 11152 R952 Machine position n-th axis11083 R883 11093 R893 11103 R903 11113 R913 11123 R923 11133 R933 11143 R943 11153 R953

11084 R884 11094 R894 11104 R904 11114 R914 11124 R924 11134 R934 11144 R944 11154 R954 Feedback machine position n-th axis11085 R885 11095 R895 11105 R905 11115 R915 11125 R925 11135 R935 11145 R945 11155 R955

11086 R886 11096 R896 11106 R906 11116 R916 11126 R926 11136 R936 11146 R946 11156 R956

11087 R887 11097 R897 11107 R907 11117 R917 11127 R927 11137 R937 11147 R947 11157 R957

11088 R888 11098 R898 11108 R908 11118 R918 11128 R928 11138 R938 11148 R948 11158 R958

11089 R889 11099 R899 11109 R909 11119 R919 11129 R929 11139 R939 11149 R949 11159 R959

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

34

3.2.4 Spindle State

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

11160 R1600 11190 R1630 11220 R1660 11250 R1690 11280 R1720 11310 R1750 11340 R1780 SRPMIN n

Spindle command rotation speed input11161 R1601 11191 R1631 11221 R1661 11251 R1691 11281 R1721 11311 R1751 11341 R1781

11162 R1602 11192 R1632 11222 R1662 11252 R1692 11282 R1722 11312 R1752 11342 R1782 SRPMn

Spindle command final data (Rotation speed)11163 R1603 11193 R1633 11223 R1663 11253 R1693 11283 R1723 11313 R1753 11343 R1783

11164 R1604 11194 R1634 11224 R1664 11254 R1694 11284 R1724 11314 R1754 11344 R1784 SBINn

Spindle command final data (12-bit binary)11165 R1605 11195 R1635 11225 R1665 11255 R1695 11285 R1725 11315 R1755 11345 R1785

11166 R1606 11196 R1636 11226 R1666 11256 R1696 11286 R1726 11316 R1756 11346 R1786 SREALn Spindle actual speed

11167 R1607 11197 R1637 11227 R1667 11257 R1697 11287 R1727 11317 R1757 11347 R1787

11168 R1608 11198 R1638 11228 R1668 11258 R1698 11288 R1728 11318 R1758 11348 R1788

11169 R1609 11199 R1639 11229 R1669 11259 R1699 11289 R1729 11319 R1759 11349 R1789

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

11170 R1610 11200 R1640 11230 R1670 11260 R1700 11290 R1730 11320 R1760 11350 R1790

11171 R1611 11201 R1641 11231 R1671 11261 R1701 11291 R1731 11321 R1761 11351 R1791 Spindle motor temperature

11172 R1612 11202 R1642 11232 R1672 11262 R1702 11292 R1732 11322 R1762 11352 R1792

11173 R1613 11203 R1643 11233 R1673 11263 R1703 11293 R1733 11323 R1763 11353 R1793

11174 R1614 11204 R1644 11234 R1674 11264 R1704 11294 R1734 11324 R1764 11354 R1794

11175 R1615 11205 R1645 11235 R1675 11265 R1705 11295 R1735 11325 R1765 11355 R1795

11176 R1616 11206 R1646 11236 R1676 11266 R1706 11296 R1736 11326 R1766 11356 R1796

11177 R1617 11207 R1647 11237 R1677 11267 R1707 11297 R1737 11327 R1767 11357 R1797

11178 R1618 11208 R1648 11238 R1678 11268 R1708 11298 R1738 11328 R1768 11358 R1798

11179 R1619 11209 R1649 11239 R1679 11269 R1709 11299 R1739 11329 R1769 11359 R1799

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

11180 R1620 11210 R1650 11240 R1680 11270 R1710 11300 R1740 11330 R1770 11360 R1800

11181 R1621 11211 R1651 11241 R1681 11271 R1711 11301 R1741 11331 R1771 11361 R1801

11182 R1622 11212 R1652 11242 R1682 11272 R1712 11302 R1742 11332 R1772 11362 R1802

11183 R1623 11213 R1653 11243 R1683 11273 R1713 11303 R1743 11333 R1773 11363 R1803

11184 R1624 11214 R1654 11244 R1684 11274 R1714 11304 R1744 11334 R1774 11364 R1804

11185 R1625 11215 R1655 11245 R1685 11275 R1715 11305 R1745 11335 R1775 11365 R1805

11186 R1626 11216 R1656 11246 R1686 11276 R1716 11306 R1746 11336 R1776 11366 R1806

11187 R1627 11217 R1657 11247 R1687 11277 R1717 11307 R1747 11337 R1777 11367 R1807

11188 R1628 11218 R1658 11248 R1688 11278 R1718 11308 R1748 11338 R1778 11368 R1808

11189 R1629 11219 R1659 11249 R1689 11279 R1719 11309 R1749 11339 R1779 11369 R1809

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

35

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC) 3.3.1 System Command

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+000

Y300

+000

Y308

Y301 Y309

Y302 Y30A

Y303 Y30B

Y304 Y30C

Y305 Y30D

Y306 Y30E

Y307 Y30F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+001

Y310 MCT Contactor shutoff test

+001

Y318 *KEY1 Data protect key 1

Y311 CHKTRG Dual signals check start Y319 *KEY2 Data protect key 2

Y312 OFFCHK Output OFF check Y31A *KEY3 Data protect key 3

Y313 Y31B

Y314 RHD1 Integration time input 1 Y31C

Y315 RHD2 Integration time input 2 Y31D CRTFN CRT changeover completion

Y316 Y31E DISP1 Display changeover $1

Y317 Y31F DISP2 Display changeover $2

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+002

Y320

+002

Y328 DOOR1 Door open I

Y321 SMPTRG NC data sampling trigger Y329 DOOR2 Door open II

Y322 HISAVE Saving operation history data Y32A

Y323 EDITOK Edited data recovery confirmation Y32B PABMI PLC axis control buffering mode valid

Y324 Y32C

Y325 Y32D PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid

Y326 Y32E PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid

Y327 QEMG PLC emergency stop Y32F PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+003

Y330 SSYNI Spindle synchronization cancel

+003

Y338 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis

Y331 SPCMPC Chuck close Y339 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis

Y332 SPSY Spindle synchronization Y33A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis

Y333 SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization Y33B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis

Y334 SPSDR Spindle synchronous rotation direction Y33C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis

Y335 SSPHM Phase shift calculation request Y33D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis

Y336 SSPHF Phase offset request Y33E *PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis

Y337 SPDRPO Error temporary cancel Y33F *PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

36

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+004

Y340 PLCAE1 PLC axis control valid 1st axis

+004

Y348

Y341 PLCAE2 PLC axis control valid 2nd axis Y349

Y342 PLCAE3 PLC axis control valid 3rd axis Y34A

Y343 PLCAE4 PLC axis control valid 4th axis Y34B

Y344 PLCAE5 PLC axis control valid 5th axis Y34C

Y345 PLCAE6 PLC axis control valid 6th axis Y34D

Y346 PLCAE7 PLC axis control valid 7th axis Y34E

Y347 PLCAE8 PLC axis control valid 8th axis Y34F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+005

Y350 DLDREQ Download request

+005

Y358

Y351 Y359

Y352 Y35A

Y353 Y35B

Y354 Y35C

Y355 Y35D

Y356 Y35E

Y357 Y35F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+006

Y360

+006

Y368

Y361 Y369

Y362 Y36A

Y363 Y36B

Y364 Y36C

Y365 Y36D

Y366 Y36E

Y367 Y36F

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+007

Y370

+007

Y378

Y371 Y379

Y372 Y37A

Y373 Y37B

Y374 Y37C

Y375 Y37D

Y376 Y37E

Y377 Y37F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

37

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+008

Y380 APLCOUT1 APLC output signal 1

+008

Y388 APLCOUT9 APLC output signal 9

Y381 APLCOUT2 APLC output signal 2 Y389 APLCOUT10 APLC output signal 10

Y382 APLCOUT3 APLC output signal 3 Y38A APLCOUT11 APLC output signal 11

Y383 APLCOUT4 APLC output signal 4 Y38B APLCOUT12 APLC output signal 12

Y384 APLCOUT5 APLC output signal 5 Y38C APLCOUT13 APLC output signal 13

Y385 APLCOUT6 APLC output signal 6 Y38D APLCOUT14 APLC output signal 14

Y386 APLCOUT7 APLC output signal 7 Y38E APLCOUT15 APLC output signal 15

Y387 APLCOUT8 APLC output signal 8 Y38F APLCOUT16 APLC output signal 16

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+009

Y390 APLCOUT17 APLC output signal 17

+009

Y398 APLCOUT25 APLC output signal 25

Y391 APLCOUT18 APLC output signal 18 Y399 APLCOUT26 APLC output signal 26

Y392 APLCOUT19 APLC output signal 19 Y39A APLCOUT27 APLC output signal 27

Y393 APLCOUT20 APLC output signal 20 Y39B APLCOUT28 APLC output signal 28

Y394 APLCOUT21 APLC output signal 21 Y39C APLCOUT29 APLC output signal 29

Y395 APLCOUT22 APLC output signal 22 Y39D APLCOUT30 APLC output signal 30

Y396 APLCOUT23 APLC output signal 23 Y39E APLCOUT31 APLC output signal 31

Y397 APLCOUT24 APLC output signal 24 Y39F APLCOUT32 APLC output signal 32

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+010

Y3A0 PSKIP1 PLC skip 1

+010

Y3A8 PSKIP9 PLC skip 9

Y3A1 PSKIP2 PLC skip 2 Y3A9 PSKIP10 PLC skip 10

Y3A2 PSKIP3 PLC skip 3 Y3AA PSKIP11 PLC skip 11

Y3A3 PSKIP4 PLC skip 4 Y3AB PSKIP12 PLC skip 12

Y3A4 PSKIP5 PLC skip 5 Y3AC PSKIP13 PLC skip 13

Y3A5 PSKIP6 PLC skip 6 Y3AD PSKIP14 PLC skip 14

Y3A6 PSKIP7 PLC skip 7 Y3AE PSKIP15 PLC skip 15

Y3A7 PSKIP8 PLC skip 8 Y3AF PSKIP16 PLC skip 16

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+011

Y3B0 PSKIP17 PLC skip 17

+011

Y3B8 PSKIP25 PLC skip 25

Y3B1 PSKIP18 PLC skip 18 Y3B9 PSKIP26 PLC skip 26

Y3B2 PSKIP19 PLC skip 19 Y3BA PSKIP27 PLC skip 27

Y3B3 PSKIP20 PLC skip 20 Y3BB PSKIP28 PLC skip 28

Y3B4 PSKIP21 PLC skip 21 Y3BC PSKIP29 PLC skip 29

Y3B5 PSKIP22 PLC skip 22 Y3BD PSKIP30 PLC skip 30

Y3B6 PSKIP23 PLC skip 23 Y3BE PSKIP31 PLC skip 31

Y3B7 PSKIP24 PLC skip 24 Y3BF PSKIP32 PLC skip 32

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

38

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+012

Y3C0

+012

Y3C8

Y3C1 Y3C9

Y3C2 Y3CA

Y3C3 Y3CB

Y3C4 Y3CC

Y3C5 Y3CD

Y3C6 Y3CE

Y3C7 Y3CF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+013

Y3D0

+013

Y3D8

Y3D1 Y3D9

Y3D2 Y3DA

Y3D3 Y3DB

Y3D4 Y3DC

Y3D5 Y3DD

Y3D6 Y3DE

Y3D7 Y3DF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+014

Y3E0

+014

Y3E8

Y3E1 Y3E9

Y3E2 Y3EA

Y3E3 Y3EB

Y3E4 Y3EC

Y3E5 Y3ED

Y3E6 Y3EE

Y3E7 Y3EF

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+015

Y3F0

+015

Y3F8

Y3F1 Y3F9

Y3F2 Y3FA

Y3F3 Y3FB

Y3F4 Y3FC

Y3F5 Y3FD

Y3F6 Y3FE

Y3F7 Y3FF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

39

3.3.2 Axis Command

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

+016 +019 +022 +025 +028 +031 +034 +037 <- Sharing G

Y400 Y430 Y460 Y490 Y4C0 Y4F0 Y520 Y550 DTCHn Control axis detach

Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551 *SVFn Servo OFF

Y402 Y432 Y462 Y492 Y4C2 Y4F2 Y522 Y552 MIn Mirror image

Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553 *+EDTn External deceleration +

Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554 *-EDTn External deceleration -

Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555 *+AITn Automatic interlock +

Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556 *-AITn Automatic interlock -

Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557 *+MITn Manual interlock +

Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558 *-MITn Manual interlock -

Y409 Y439 Y469 Y499 Y4C9 Y4F9 Y529 Y559 AMLKn Automatic machine lock

Y40A Y43A Y46A Y49A Y4CA Y4FA Y52A Y55A MMLKn Manual machine lock

Y40B Y43B Y46B Y49B Y4CB Y4FB Y52B Y55B +Jn Feed axis selection +

Y40C Y43C Y46C Y49C Y4CC Y4FC Y52C Y55C -Jn Feed axis selection -

Y40D Y43D Y46D Y49D Y4CD Y4FD Y52D Y55D MAEn Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid

Y40E Y43E Y46E Y49E Y4CE Y4FE Y52E Y55E DTCH2n Control axis detach 2

Y40F Y43F Y46F Y49F Y4CF Y4FF Y52F Y55F

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

+017 +020 +023 +026 +029 +032 +035 +038 <- Sharing G

Y410 Y440 Y470 Y4A0 Y4D0 Y500 Y530 Y560 ILCn Current limit changeover

Y411 Y441 Y471 Y4A1 Y4D1 Y501 Y531 Y561 DORn Droop release request

Y412 Y442 Y472 Y4A2 Y4D2 Y502 Y532 Y562 AZSn Zero point initialization set mode

Y413 Y443 Y473 Y4A3 Y4D3 Y503 Y533 Y563 ZSTn Zero point initialization set start

Y414 Y444 Y474 Y4A4 Y4D4 Y504 Y534 Y564

Y415 Y445 Y475 Y4A5 Y4D5 Y505 Y535 Y565 UCLPFn Unclamp completion

Y416 Y446 Y476 Y4A6 Y4D6 Y506 Y536 Y566 MSORn Multi-step speed monitor request

Y417 Y447 Y477 Y4A7 Y4D7 Y507 Y537 Y567 MSOMI1n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1

Y418 Y448 Y478 Y4A8 Y4D8 Y508 Y538 Y568 MSOMI2n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2

Y419 Y449 Y479 Y4A9 Y4D9 Y509 Y539 Y569

Y41A Y44A Y47A Y4AA Y4DA Y50A Y53A Y56A CNT0n Counter zero

Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B CHGPLCn PLC axis switching

Y41C Y44C Y47C Y4AC Y4DC Y50C Y53C Y56C

Y41D Y44D Y47D Y4AD Y4DD Y50D Y53D Y56D

Y41E Y44E Y47E Y4AE Y4DE Y50E Y53E Y56E

Y41F Y44F Y47F Y4AF Y4DF Y50F Y53F Y56F

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

40

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal name

+018 +021 +024 +027 +030 +033 +036 +039 <- Sharing G

Y420 Y450 Y480 Y4B0 Y4E0 Y510 Y540 Y570

Y421 Y451 Y481 Y4B1 Y4E1 Y511 Y541 Y571

Y422 Y452 Y482 Y4B2 Y4E2 Y512 Y542 Y572

Y423 Y453 Y483 Y4B3 Y4E3 Y513 Y543 Y573

Y424 Y454 Y484 Y4B4 Y4E4 Y514 Y544 Y574

Y425 Y455 Y485 Y4B5 Y4E5 Y515 Y545 Y575

Y426 Y456 Y486 Y4B6 Y4E6 Y516 Y546 Y576

Y427 Y457 Y487 Y4B7 Y4E7 Y517 Y547 Y577

Y428 Y458 Y488 Y4B8 Y4E8 Y518 Y548 Y578

Y429 Y459 Y489 Y4B9 Y4E9 Y519 Y549 Y579

Y42A Y45A Y48A Y4BA Y4EA Y51A Y54A Y57A

Y42B Y45B Y48B Y4BB Y4EB Y51B Y54B Y57B

Y42C Y45C Y48C Y4BC Y4EC Y51C Y54C Y57C

Y42D Y45D Y48D Y4BD Y4ED Y51D Y54D Y57D

Y42E Y45E Y48E Y4BE Y4EE Y51E Y54E Y57E

Y42F Y45F Y48F Y4BF Y4EF Y51F Y54F Y57F

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name

+040 +043 +046 +049 +052 +055 +058 +061 <- Sharing G

Y580 Y5B0 Y5E0 Y610 Y640 Y670 Y6A0 Y6D0 DTCHn Control axis detach

Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1 *SVFn Servo OFF

Y582 Y5B2 Y5E2 Y612 Y642 Y672 Y6A2 Y6D2 MIn Mirror image

Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3 *+EDTn External deceleration +

Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4 *-EDTn External deceleration -

Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5 *+AITn Automatic interlock +

Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6 *-AITn Automatic interlock -

Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7 *+MITn Manual interlock +

Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8 *-MITn Manual interlock -

Y589 Y5B9 Y5E9 Y619 Y649 Y679 Y6A9 Y6D9 AMLKn Automatic machine lock

Y58A Y5BA Y5EA Y61A Y64A Y67A Y6AA Y6DA MMLKn Manual machine lock

Y58B Y5BB Y5EB Y61B Y64B Y67B Y6AB Y6DB +Jn Feed axis selection +

Y58C Y5BC Y5EC Y61C Y64C Y67C Y6AC Y6DC -Jn Feed axis selection -

Y58D Y5BD Y5ED Y61D Y64D Y67D Y6AD Y6DD MAEn Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid

Y58E Y5BE Y5EE Y61E Y64E Y67E Y6AE Y6DE DTCH2n Control axis detach 2

Y58F Y5BF Y5EF Y61F Y64F Y67F Y6AF Y6DF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

41

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name

+041 +044 +047 +050 +053 +056 +059 +062 <- Sharing G

Y590 Y5C0 Y5F0 Y620 Y650 Y680 Y6B0 Y6E0 ILCn Current limit changeover

Y591 Y5C1 Y5F1 Y621 Y651 Y681 Y6B1 Y6E1 DORn Droop release request

Y592 Y5C2 Y5F2 Y622 Y652 Y682 Y6B2 Y6E2 AZSn Zero point initialization set mode

Y593 Y5C3 Y5F3 Y623 Y653 Y683 Y6B3 Y6E3 ZSTn Zero point initialization set start

Y594 Y5C4 Y5F4 Y624 Y654 Y684 Y6B4 Y6E4

Y595 Y5C5 Y5F5 Y625 Y655 Y685 Y6B5 Y6E5 UCLPFn Unclamp completion

Y596 Y5C6 Y5F6 Y626 Y656 Y686 Y6B6 Y6E6 MSORn Multi-step speed monitor request

Y597 Y5C7 Y5F7 Y627 Y657 Y687 Y6B7 Y6E7 MSOMI1n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1

Y598 Y5C8 Y5F8 Y628 Y658 Y688 Y6B8 Y6E8 MSOMI2n Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2

Y599 Y5C9 Y5F9 Y629 Y659 Y689 Y6B9 Y6E9

Y59A Y5CA Y5FA Y62A Y65A Y68A Y6BA Y6EA CNT0n Counter zero

Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB CHGPLCn PLC axis switching

Y59C Y5CC Y5FC Y62C Y65C Y68C Y6BC Y6EC

Y59D Y5CD Y5FD Y62D Y65D Y68D Y6BD Y6ED

Y59E Y5CE Y5FE Y62E Y65E Y68E Y6BE Y6EE

Y59F Y5CF Y5FF Y62F Y65F Y68F Y6BF Y6EF

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev. Signal name

+042 +045 +048 +051 +054 +057 +060 +063 <- Sharing G

Y5A0 Y5D0 Y600 Y630 Y660 Y690 Y6C0 Y6F0

Y5A1 Y5D1 Y601 Y631 Y661 Y691 Y6C1 Y6F1

Y5A2 Y5D2 Y602 Y632 Y662 Y692 Y6C2 Y6F2

Y5A3 Y5D3 Y603 Y633 Y663 Y693 Y6C3 Y6F3

Y5A4 Y5D4 Y604 Y634 Y664 Y694 Y6C4 Y6F4

Y5A5 Y5D5 Y605 Y635 Y665 Y695 Y6C5 Y6F5

Y5A6 Y5D6 Y606 Y636 Y666 Y696 Y6C6 Y6F6

Y5A7 Y5D7 Y607 Y637 Y667 Y697 Y6C7 Y6F7

Y5A8 Y5D8 Y608 Y638 Y668 Y698 Y6C8 Y6F8

Y5A9 Y5D9 Y609 Y639 Y669 Y699 Y6C9 Y6F9

Y5AA Y5DA Y60A Y63A Y66A Y69A Y6CA Y6FA

Y5AB Y5DB Y60B Y63B Y66B Y69B Y6CB Y6FB

Y5AC Y5DC Y60C Y63C Y66C Y69C Y6CC Y6FC

Y5AD Y5DD Y60D Y63D Y66D Y69D Y6CD Y6FD

Y5AE Y5DE Y60E Y63E Y66E Y69E Y6CE Y6FE

Y5AF Y5DF Y60F Y63F Y66F Y69F Y6CF Y6FF

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

42

3.3.3 Part System Command

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+064 +078 +092 +106 +120 +134 +148 <- Sharing G

Y700 Y7E0 Y8C0 Y9A0 YA80 YB60 YC40 Jn Jog mode

Y701 Y7E1 Y8C1 Y9A1 YA81 YB61 YC41 Hn Handle mode

Y702 Y7E2 Y8C2 Y9A2 YA82 YB62 YC42 Sn Incremental mode

Y703 Y7E3 Y8C3 Y9A3 YA83 YB63 YC43 PTPn Manual arbitrary feed mode

Y704 Y7E4 Y8C4 Y9A4 YA84 YB64 YC44 ZRNn Reference position return mode

Y705 Y7E5 Y8C5 Y9A5 YA85 YB65 YC45 ASTn Automatic initialization mode

Y706 Y7E6 Y8C6 Y9A6 YA86 YB66 YC46

Y707 Y7E7 Y8C7 Y9A7 YA87 YB67 YC47

Y708 Y7E8 Y8C8 Y9A8 YA88 YB68 YC48 MEMn Program operation mode (Memory mode)

Y709 Y7E9 Y8C9 Y9A9 YA89 YB69 YC49 FTPn FTP mode

Y70A Y7EA Y8CA Y9AA YA8A YB6A YC4A EDTn EDIT mode

Y70B Y7EB Y8CB Y9AB YA8B YB6B YC4B Dn MDI mode

Y70C Y7EC Y8CC Y9AC YA8C YB6C YC4C

Y70D Y7ED Y8CD Y9AD YA8D YB6D YC4D

Y70E Y7EE Y8CE Y9AE YA8E YB6E YC4E

Y70F Y7EF Y8CF Y9AF YA8F YB6F YC4F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+065 +079 +093 +107 +121 +135 +149 <- Sharing G

Y710 Y7F0 Y8D0 Y9B0 YA90 YB70 YC50 STn Automatic operation "start" command (Cycle start)

Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51 *SPn Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)

Y712 Y7F2 Y8D2 Y9B2 YA92 YB72 YC52 SBKn Single block

Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53 *BSLn Block start interlock

Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54 *CSLn Cutting block start interlock

Y715 Y7F5 Y8D5 Y9B5 YA95 YB75 YC55 DRNn Dry run

Y716 Y7F6 Y8D6 Y9B6 YA96 YB76 YC56

Y717 Y7F7 Y8D7 Y9B7 YA97 YB77 YC57 ERDn Error detect

Y718 Y7F8 Y8D8 Y9B8 YA98 YB78 YC58 NRST1n NC reset 1

Y719 Y7F9 Y8D9 Y9B9 YA99 YB79 YC59 NRST2n NC reset 2

Y71A Y7FA Y8DA Y9BA YA9A YB7A YC5A RRWn Reset & rewind

Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B *CDZn Chamfering

Y71C Y7FC Y8DC Y9BC YA9C YB7C YC5C ARSTn Automatic restart

Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D EXTSSn External search strobe

Y71E Y7FE Y8DE Y9BE YA9E YB7E YC5E FIN1n M function finish 1

Y71F Y7FF Y8DF Y9BF YA9F YB7F YC5F FIN2n M function finish 2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

43

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+066 +080 +094 +108 +122 +136 +150 <- Sharing G

Y720 Y800 Y8E0 Y9C0 YAA0 YB80 YC60 TLMn Tool length measurement 1

Y721 Y801 Y8E1 Y9C1 YAA1 YB81 YC61 TLMSn Tool length measurement 2

Y722 Y802 Y8E2 Y9C2 YAA2 YB82 YC62 SYCMn Synchronization correction mode

Y723 Y803 Y8E3 Y9C3 YAA3 YB83 YC63 SRN Program restart

Y724 Y804 Y8E4 Y9C4 YAA4 YB84 YC64

Y725 Y805 Y8E5 Y9C5 YAA5 YB85 YC65 UITn Macro interrupt

Y726 Y806 Y8E6 Y9C6 YAA6 YB86 YC66 RTn Rapid traverse

Y727 Y807 Y8E7 Y9C7 YAA7 YB87 YC67

Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68 ABSn Manual absolute

Y729 Y809 Y8E9 Y9C9 YAA9 YB89 YC69

Y72A Y80A Y8EA Y9CA YAAA YB8A YC6A

Y72B Y80B Y8EB Y9CB YAAB YB8B YC6B CRQn Recalculation request

Y72C Y80C Y8EC Y9CC YAAC YB8C YC6C PDISPn Program display during operation

Y72D Y80D Y8ED Y9CD YAAD YB8D YC6D BDT1n Optional block skip 1

Y72E Y80E Y8EE Y9CE YAAE YB8E YC6E

Y72F Y80F Y8EF Y9CF YAAF YB8F YC6F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+067 +081 +095 +109 +123 +137 +151 <- Sharing G

Y730 Y810 Y8F0 Y9D0 YAB0 YB90 YC70 ZSL1n Reference position selection code 1

Y731 Y811 Y8F1 Y9D1 YAB1 YB91 YC71 ZSL2n Reference position selection code 2

Y732 Y812 Y8F2 Y9D2 YAB2 YB92 YC72

Y733 Y813 Y8F3 Y9D3 YAB3 YB93 YC73

Y734 Y814 Y8F4 Y9D4 YAB4 YB94 YC74

Y735 Y815 Y8F5 Y9D5 YAB5 YB95 YC75

Y736 Y816 Y8F6 Y9D6 YAB6 YB96 YC76

Y737 Y817 Y8F7 Y9D7 YAB7 YB97 YC77 Mn Reference position selection method

Y738 Y818 Y8F8 Y9D8 YAB8 YB98 YC78 BDT2n Optional block skip 2

Y739 Y819 Y8F9 Y9D9 YAB9 YB99 YC79 BDT3n Optional block skip 3

Y73A Y81A Y8FA Y9DA YABA YB9A YC7A BDT4n Optional block skip 4

Y73B Y81B Y8FB Y9DB YABB YB9B YC7B BDT5n Optional block skip 5

Y73C Y81C Y8FC Y9DC YABC YB9C YC7C BDT6n Optional block skip 6

Y73D Y81D Y8FD Y9DD YABD YB9D YC7D BDT7n Optional block skip 7

Y73E Y81E Y8FE Y9DE YABE YB9E YC7E BDT8n Optional block skip 8

Y73F Y81F Y8FF Y9DF YABF YB9F YC7F BDT9n Optional block skip 9

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

44

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+068 +082 +096 +110 +124 +138 +152 <- Sharing G

Y740 Y820 Y900 Y9E0 YAC0 YBA0 YC80 HS11n 1st handle axis selection code 1

Y741 Y821 Y901 Y9E1 YAC1 YBA1 YC81 HS12n 1st handle axis selection code 2

Y742 Y822 Y902 Y9E2 YAC2 YBA2 YC82 HS14n 1st handle axis selection code 4

Y743 Y823 Y903 Y9E3 YAC3 YBA3 YC83 HS18n 1st handle axis selection code 8

Y744 Y824 Y904 Y9E4 YAC4 YBA4 YC84 HS116n 1st handle axis selection code 16

Y745 Y825 Y905 Y9E5 YAC5 YBA5 YC85

Y746 Y826 Y906 Y9E6 YAC6 YBA6 YC86

Y747 Y827 Y907 Y9E7 YAC7 YBA7 YC87 HS1Sn 1st handle valid

Y748 Y828 Y908 Y9E8 YAC8 YBA8 YC88 HS21n 2nd handle axis selection code 1

Y749 Y829 Y909 Y9E9 YAC9 YBA9 YC89 HS22n 2nd handle axis selection code 2

Y74A Y82A Y90A Y9EA YACA YBAA YC8A HS24n 2nd handle axis selection code 4

Y74B Y82B Y90B Y9EB YACB YBAB YC8B HS28n 2nd handle axis selection code 8

Y74C Y82C Y90C Y9EC YACC YBAC YC8C HS216n 2nd handle axis selection code 16

Y74D Y82D Y90D Y9ED YACD YBAD YC8D

Y74E Y82E Y90E Y9EE YACE YBAE YC8E

Y74F Y82F Y90F Y9EF YACF YBAF YC8F HS2Sn 2nd handle valid

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+069 +083 +097 +111 +125 +139 +153 <- Sharing G

Y750 Y830 Y910 Y9F0 YAD0 YBB0 YC90 HS31n 3rd handle axis selection code 1

Y751 Y831 Y911 Y9F1 YAD1 YBB1 YC91 HS32n 3rd handle axis selection code 2

Y752 Y832 Y912 Y9F2 YAD2 YBB2 YC92 HS34n 3rd handle axis selection code 4

Y753 Y833 Y913 Y9F3 YAD3 YBB3 YC93 HS38n 3rd handle axis selection code 8

Y754 Y834 Y914 Y9F4 YAD4 YBB4 YC94 HS316n 3rd handle axis selection code 16

Y755 Y835 Y915 Y9F5 YAD5 YBB5 YC95

Y756 Y836 Y916 Y9F6 YAD6 YBB6 YC96

Y757 Y837 Y917 Y9F7 YAD7 YBB7 YC97 HS3Sn 3rd handle valid

Y758 Y838 Y918 Y9F8 YAD8 YBB8 YC98 OVCn Override cancel

Y759 Y839 Y919 Y9F9 YAD9 YBB9 YC99 OVSLn Manual override method selection

Y75A Y83A Y91A Y9FA YADA YBBA YC9A AFLn Miscellaneous function lock

Y75B Y83B Y91B Y9FB YADB YBBB YC9B

Y75C Y83C Y91C Y9FC YADC YBBC YC9C TRVn Tap retract

Y75D Y83D Y91D Y9FD YADD YBBD YC9D RTNn Reference position retract

Y75E Y83E Y91E Y9FE YADE YBBE YC9E

Y75F Y83F Y91F Y9FF YADF YBBF YC9F SPOFFM n

Spindle OFF mode

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

45

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+070 +084 +098 +112 +126 +140 +154 <- Sharing G

Y760 Y840 Y920 YA00 YAE0 YBC0 YCA0 *FV11n Cutting feedrate override code 1

Y761 Y841 Y921 YA01 YAE1 YBC1 YCA1 *FV12n Cutting feedrate override code 2

Y762 Y842 Y922 YA02 YAE2 YBC2 YCA2 *FV14n Cutting feedrate override code 4

Y763 Y843 Y923 YA03 YAE3 YBC3 YCA3 *FV18n Cutting feedrate override code 8

Y764 Y844 Y924 YA04 YAE4 YBC4 YCA4 *FV116n Cutting feedrate override code 16

Y765 Y845 Y925 YA05 YAE5 YBC5 YCA5

Y766 Y846 Y926 YA06 YAE6 YBC6 YCA6 FV2En 2nd cutting feedrate override valid

Y767 Y847 Y927 YA07 YAE7 YBC7 YCA7 FVSn Cutting feedrate override method selection

Y768 Y848 Y928 YA08 YAE8 YBC8 YCA8 ROV1n Rapid traverse override code 1

Y769 Y849 Y929 YA09 YAE9 YBC9 YCA9 ROV2n Rapid traverse override code 2

Y76A Y84A Y92A YA0A YAEA YBCA YCAA

Y76B Y84B Y92B YA0B YAEB YBCB YCAB

Y76C Y84C Y92C YA0C YAEC YBCC YCAC

Y76D Y84D Y92D YA0D YAED YBCD YCAD

Y76E Y84E Y92E YA0E YAEE YBCE YCAE

Y76F Y84F Y92F YA0F YAEF YBCF YCAF ROVSn Rapid traverse override method selection

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+071 +085 +099 +113 +127 +141 +155 <- Sharing G

Y770 Y850 Y930 YA10 YAF0 YBD0 YCB0 *JV1n Manual feedrate code 1

Y771 Y851 Y931 YA11 YAF1 YBD1 YCB1 *JV2n Manual feedrate code 2

Y772 Y852 Y932 YA12 YAF2 YBD2 YCB2 *JV4n Manual feedrate code 4

Y773 Y853 Y933 YA13 YAF3 YBD3 YCB3 *JV8n Manual feedrate code 8

Y774 Y854 Y934 YA14 YAF4 YBD4 YCB4 *JV16n Manual feedrate code 16

Y775 Y855 Y935 YA15 YAF5 YBD5 YCB5

Y776 Y856 Y936 YA16 YAF6 YBD6 YCB6

Y777 Y857 Y937 YA17 YAF7 YBD7 YCB7 JVSn Manual feedrate method selection

Y778 Y858 Y938 YA18 YAF8 YBD8 YCB8 PCF1n Feedrate least increment code 1

Y779 Y859 Y939 YA19 YAF9 YBD9 YCB9 PCF2n Feedrate least increment code 2

Y77A Y85A Y93A YA1A YAFA YBDA YCBA JSYNn Jog synchronous feed valid

Y77B Y85B Y93B YA1B YAFB YBDB YCBB JHANn Jog handle synchronous

Y77C Y85C Y93C YA1C YAFC YBDC YCBC

Y77D Y85D Y93D YA1D YAFD YBDD YCBD ILM1n Current limit mode 1

Y77E Y85E Y93E YA1E YAFE YBDE YCBE ILM2n Current limit mode 2

Y77F Y85F Y93F YA1F YAFF YBDF YCBF

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

46

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+072 +086 +100 +114 +128 +142 +156 <- Sharing G

Y780 Y860 Y940 YA20 YB00 YBE0 YCC0 MP1n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 1

Y781 Y861 Y941 YA21 YB01 YBE1 YCC1 MP2n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 2

Y782 Y862 Y942 YA22 YB02 YBE2 YCC2 MP4n Handle/incremental feed magnification code 4

Y783 Y863 Y943 YA23 YB03 YBE3 YCC3

Y784 Y864 Y944 YA24 YB04 YBE4 YCC4

Y785 Y865 Y945 YA25 YB05 YBE5 YCC5

Y786 Y866 Y946 YA26 YB06 YBE6 YCC6 MPPn Magnification valid for each handle

Y787 Y867 Y947 YA27 YB07 YBE7 YCC7 MPSn Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection

Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8 TAL1n Tool alarm 1/Tool skip 1

Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9 TAL2n Tool alarm 2

Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA TCEFn Usage data count valid

Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB TLF1n Tool life management input

Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC TCRTn Tool change reset

Y78D Y86D Y94D YA2D YB0D YBED YCCD

Y78E Y86E Y94E YA2E YB0E YBEE YCCE

Y78F Y86F Y94F YA2F YB0F YBEF YCCF

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+073 +087 +101 +115 +129 +143 +157 <- Sharing G

Y790 Y870 Y950 YA30 YB10 YBF0 YCD0 CX11n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1

Y791 Y871 Y951 YA31 YB11 YBF1 YCD1 CX12n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2

Y792 Y872 Y952 YA32 YB12 YBF2 YCD2 CX14n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 4

Y793 Y873 Y953 YA33 YB13 YBF3 YCD3 CX18n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 8

Y794 Y874 Y954 YA34 YB14 YBF4 YCD4 CX116n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 16

Y795 Y875 Y955 YA35 YB15 YBF5 YCD5

Y796 Y876 Y956 YA36 YB16 YBF6 YCD6

Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7 CX1Sn Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid

Y798 Y878 Y958 YA38 YB18 YBF8 YCD8 CX21n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 1

Y799 Y879 Y959 YA39 YB19 YBF9 YCD9 CX22n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2

Y79A Y87A Y95A YA3A YB1A YBFA YCDA CX24n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4

Y79B Y87B Y95B YA3B YB1B YBFB YCDB CX28n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8

Y79C Y87C Y95C YA3C YB1C YBFC YCDC CX216n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16

Y79D Y87D Y95D YA3D YB1D YBFD YCDD

Y79E Y87E Y95E YA3E YB1E YBFE YCDE

Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF CX2Sn Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

47

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+074 +088 +102 +116 +130 +144 +158 <- Sharing G

Y7A0 Y880 Y960 YA40 YB20 YC00 YCE0 CX31n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 1

Y7A1 Y881 Y961 YA41 YB21 YC01 YCE1 CX32n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2

Y7A2 Y882 Y962 YA42 YB22 YC02 YCE2 CX34n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 4

Y7A3 Y883 Y963 YA43 YB23 YC03 YCE3 CX38n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 8

Y7A4 Y884 Y964 YA44 YB24 YC04 YCE4 CX316n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 16

Y7A5 Y885 Y965 YA45 YB25 YC05 YCE5

Y7A6 Y886 Y966 YA46 YB26 YC06 YCE6

Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7 CX3Sn Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid

Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8 CXS1n Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off

Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9 CXS2n Manual arbitrary feed axis independent

Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA CXS3n Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F

Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB CXS4n Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1

Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC CXS5n Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK

Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED CXS6n Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC

Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop

Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF CXS8n Manual arbitrary feed strobe

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+075 +089 +103 +117 +131 +145 +159 <- Sharing G

Y7B0 Y890 Y970 YA50 YB30 YC10 YCF0 *ZRITn 2nd reference position return interlock

Y7B1 Y891 Y971 YA51 YB31 YC11 YCF1

Y7B2 Y892 Y972 YA52 YB32 YC12 YCF2 RSSTn Search & start

Y7B3 Y893 Y973 YA53 YB33 YC13 YCF3

Y7B4 Y894 Y974 YA54 YB34 YC14 YCF4

Y7B5 Y895 Y975 YA55 YB35 YC15 YCF5

Y7B6 Y896 Y976 YA56 YB36 YC16 YCF6 Inclined axis control:no z axis compensation

Y7B7 Y897 Y977 YA57 YB37 YC17 YCF7

Y7B8 Y898 Y978 YA58 YB38 YC18 YCF8 VAMODn Hypothetical axis command mode

Y7B9 Y899 Y979 YA59 YB39 YC19 YCF9 Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal

Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA CHPSn Chopping

Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB Chopping parameter valid

Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC Compensation method selection

Y7BD Y89D Y97D YA5D YB3D YC1D YCFD

Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE Operation mode selection

Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF Rapid traverse override valid

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

48

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+076 +090 +104 +118 +132 +146 +160 <- Sharing G

Y7C0 Y8A0 Y980 YA60 YB40 YC20 YD00

Y7C1 Y8A1 Y981 YA61 YB41 YC21 YD01

Y7C2 Y8A2 Y982 YA62 YB42 YC22 YD02

Y7C3 Y8A3 Y983 YA63 YB43 YC23 YD03

Y7C4 Y8A4 Y984 YA64 YB44 YC24 YD04

Y7C5 Y8A5 Y985 YA65 YB45 YC25 YD05

Y7C6 Y8A6 Y986 YA66 YB46 YC26 YD06

Y7C7 Y8A7 Y987 YA67 YB47 YC27 YD07

Y7C8 Y8A8 Y988 YA68 YB48 YC28 YD08

Y7C9 Y8A9 Y989 YA69 YB49 YC29 YD09

Y7CA Y8AA Y98A YA6A YB4A YC2A YD0A

Y7CB Y8AB Y98B YA6B YB4B YC2B YD0B

Y7CC Y8AC Y98C YA6C YB4C YC2C YD0C

Y7CD Y8AD Y98D YA6D YB4D YC2D YD0D

Y7CE Y8AE Y98E YA6E YB4E YC2E YD0E

Y7CF Y8AF Y98F YA6F YB4F YC2F YD0F

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+077 +091 +105 +119 +133 +147 +161 <- Sharing G

Y7D0 Y8B0 Y990 YA70 YB50 YC30 YD10

Y7D1 Y8B1 Y991 YA71 YB51 YC31 YD11

Y7D2 Y8B2 Y992 YA72 YB52 YC32 YD12

Y7D3 Y8B3 Y993 YA73 YB53 YC33 YD13

Y7D4 Y8B4 Y994 YA74 YB54 YC34 YD14

Y7D5 Y8B5 Y995 YA75 YB55 YC35 YD15

Y7D6 Y8B6 Y996 YA76 YB56 YC36 YD16

Y7D7 Y8B7 Y997 YA77 YB57 YC37 YD17

Y7D8 Y8B8 Y998 YA78 YB58 YC38 YD18

Y7D9 Y8B9 Y999 YA79 YB59 YC39 YD19

Y7DA Y8BA Y99A YA7A YB5A YC3A YD1A

Y7DB Y8BB Y99B YA7B YB5B YC3B YD1B

Y7DC Y8BC Y99C YA7C YB5C YC3C YD1C

Y7DD Y8BD Y99D YA7D YB5D YC3D YD1D

Y7DE Y8BE Y99E YA7E YB5E YC3E YD1E

Y7DF Y8BF Y99F YA7F YB5F YC3F YD1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.3 Bit Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

49

3.3.4 Spindle Command

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

+162 +165 +168 +171 +174 +177 +180 <- Sharing G

YD20 YD50 YD80 YDB0 YDE0 YE10 YE40

YD21 YD51 YD81 YDB1 YDE1 YE11 YE41

YD22 YD52 YD82 YDB2 YDE2 YE12 YE42

YD23 YD53 YD83 YDB3 YDE3 YE13 YE43

YD24 YD54 YD84 YDB4 YDE4 YE14 YE44

YD25 YD55 YD85 YDB5 YDE5 YE15 YE45

YD26 YD56 YD86 YDB6 YDE6 YE16 YE46 GFINn Gear shift completion

YD27 YD57 YD87 YDB7 YDE7 YE17 YE47

YD28 YD58 YD88 YDB8 YDE8 YE18 YE48 SP1n Spindle override code 1

YD29 YD59 YD89 YDB9 YDE9 YE19 YE49 SP2n Spindle override code 2

YD2A YD5A YD8A YDBA YDEA YE1A YE4A SP4n Spindle override code 4

YD2B YD5B YD8B YDBB YDEB YE1B YE4B

YD2C YD5C YD8C YDBC YDEC YE1C YE4C

YD2D YD5D YD8D YDBD YDED YE1D YE4D

YD2E YD5E YD8E YDBE YDEE YE1E YE4E

YD2F YD5F YD8F YDBF YDEF YE1F YE4F SPSn Spindle override method selection

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

+163 +166 +169 +172 +175 +178 +181 <- Sharing G

YD30 YD60 YD90 YDC0 YDF0 YE20 YE50 GI1n Spindle gear selection code 1

YD31 YD61 YD91 YDC1 YDF1 YE21 YE51 GI2n Spindle gear selection code 2

YD32 YD62 YD92 YDC2 YDF2 YE22 YE52

YD33 YD63 YD93 YDC3 YDF3 YE23 YE53

YD34 YD64 YD94 YDC4 YDF4 YE24 YE54 SSTPn Spindle stop

YD35 YD65 YD95 YDC5 YDF5 YE25 YE55 SSFTn Spindle gear shift

YD36 YD66 YD96 YDC6 YDF6 YE26 YE56 SORCn Spindle orientation

YD37 YD67 YD97 YDC7 YDF7 YE27 YE57

YD38 YD68 YD98 YDC8 YDF8 YE28 YE58 SRNn Spindle forward run start

YD39 YD69 YD99 YDC9 YDF9 YE29 YE59 SRIn Spindle reverse run start

YD3A YD6A YD9A YDCA YDFA YE2A YE5A

YD3B YD6B YD9B YDCB YDFB YE2B YE5B

YD3C YD6C YD9C YDCC YDFC YE2C YE5C WRNn Spindle forward run index

YD3D YD6D YD9D YDCD YDFD YE2D YE5D WRIn Spindle reverse run index

YD3E YD6E YD9E YDCE YDFE YE2E YE5E ORCn Spindle orientation command

YD3F YD6F YD9F YDCF YDFF YE2F YE5F LRSLn L coil selection

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

50

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal name

+164 +167 +170 +173 +176 +179 +182 <- Sharing G

YD40 YD70 YDA0 YDD0 YE00 YE30 YE60

YD41 YD71 YDA1 YDD1 YE01 YE31 YE61

YD42 YD72 YDA2 YDD2 YE02 YE32 YE62

YD43 YD73 YDA3 YDD3 YE03 YE33 YE63

YD44 YD74 YDA4 YDD4 YE04 YE34 YE64

YD45 YD75 YDA5 YDD5 YE05 YE35 YE65 TL1n Spindle torque limit 1

YD46 YD76 YDA6 YDD6 YE06 YE36 YE66 TL2n Spindle torque limit 2

YD47 YD77 YDA7 YDD7 YE07 YE37 YE67 TL3n Spindle torque limit 3

YD48 YD78 YDA8 YDD8 YE08 YE38 YE68

YD49 YD79 YDA9 YDD9 YE09 YE39 YE69 SMSORn Spindle multi-step monitor request

YD4A YD7A YDAA YDDA YE0A YE3A YE6A SMSOMI1n Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 1

YD4B YD7B YDAB YDDB YE0B YE3B YE6B SMSOMI2n Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 2

YD4C YD7C YDAC YDDC YE0C YE3C YE6C

YD4D YD7D YDAD YDDD YE0D YE3D YE6D

YD4E YD7E YDAE YDDE YE0E YE3E YE6E

YD4F YD7F YDAF YDDF YE0F YE3F YE6F ESSCn External axis speed clamp

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

51

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC) 3.4.1 System Command

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+200 R2300 +210 R2310 PLC axis droop release invalid axis

+201 R2301 +211 R2311

+202 R2302 +212 R2312 KEYOUT

+203 R2303 +213 R2313

+204 R2304 +214 R2314

+205 R2305 +215 R2315

+206 R2306 +216 R2316

+207 R2307 +217 R2317

+208 R2308 +218 R2318

+209 R2309 SMOD Speed monitor mode +219 R2319

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+220 R2320 +230 R2330 User macro input #1035 (PLC -> Controller)+221 R2321 +231 R2331

+222 R2322 +232 R2332

PLC version code +223 R2323 +233 R2333

+224 R2324 User macro input #1032 (PLC -> Controller)

+234 R2334

+225 R2325 +235 R2335

+226 R2326 User macro input #1033 (PLC -> Controller)

+236 R2336

+227 R2327 +237 R2337

+228 R2328 User macro input #1034 (PLC -> Controller)

+238 R2338

+229 R2329 +239 R2339

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+240 R2340 1st axis index +250 R2350 11th axis index

+241 R2341 2nd axis index +251 R2351 12th axis index

+242 R2342 3rd axis index +252 R2352 13th axis index

+243 R2343 4th axis index +253 R2353 14th axis index

+244 R2344 5th axis index +254 R2354 15th axis index

+245 R2345 6th axis index +255 R2355 16th axis index

+246 R2346 7th axis index +256 R2356

+247 R2347 8th axis index +257 R2357 Spindle synchronization Basic spindle selection

+248 R2348 9th axis index +258 R2358 Spindle synchronization Synchronous spindle selection

+249 R2349 10th axis index +259 R2359 Spindle synchronization Phase shift amount

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

52

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+260 R2360

PLC version code (method 2)

+270 R2370

+261 R2361 +271 R2371

+262 R2362 +272 R2372

+263 R2363 +273 R2373

+264 R2364 +274 R2374

+265 R2365 +275 R2375

+266 R2366 +276 R2376

+267 R2367 +277 R2377

+268 R2368 +278 R2378

+269 R2369 +279 R2379

Common abbrev. Signal name

Common abbrev. Signal nameSharing

G Internal

Sharing G

Internal

+280 R2380 APLC output data 1 +290 R2390 GOT window Data changeover request

+281 R2381 APLC output data 2 +291 R2391

+282 R2382 APLC output data 3 +292 R2392

+283 R2383 APLC output data 4 +293 R2393

+284 R2384 APLC output data 5 +294 R2394

+285 R2385 APLC output data 6 +295 R2395

+286 R2386 APLC output data 7 +296 R2396

+287 R2387 APLC output data 8 +297 R2397

+288 R2388 APLC output data 9 +298 R2398

+289 R2389 APLC output data 10 +299 R2399

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

53

3.4.2 Part System Command

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+300 R2400 +400 R2500 +500 R2600 +600 R2700 +700 R2800 +800 R2900 +900 R3000 1st cutting feedrate override

+301 R2401 +401 R2501 +501 R2601 +601 R2701 +701 R2801 +801 R2901 +901 R3001 2nd cutting feedrate override

+302 R2402 +402 R2502 +502 R2602 +602 R2702 +702 R2802 +802 R2902 +902 R3002 Rapid traverse override

+303 R2403 +403 R2503 +503 R2603 +603 R2703 +703 R2803 +803 R2903 +903 R3003

+304 R2404 +404 R2504 +504 R2604 +604 R2704 +704 R2804 +804 R2904 +904 R3004 Manual feedrate

+305 R2405 +405 R2505 +505 R2605 +605 R2705 +705 R2805 +805 R2905 +905 R3005

+306 R2406 +406 R2506 +506 R2606 +606 R2706 +706 R2806 +806 R2906 +906 R3006

+307 R2407 +407 R2507 +507 R2607 +607 R2707 +707 R2807 +807 R2907 +907 R3007

+308 R2408 +408 R2508 +508 R2608 +608 R2708 +708 R2808 +808 R2908 +908 R3008 1st handle/incremental feed magnification+309 R2409 +409 R2509 +509 R2609 +609 R2709 +709 R2809 +809 R2909 +909 R3009

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+310 R2410 +410 R2510 +510 R2610 +610 R2710 +710 R2810 +810 R2910 +910 R3010 2nd handle feed magnification

+311 R2411 +411 R2511 +511 R2611 +611 R2711 +711 R2811 +811 R2911 +911 R3011

+312 R2412 +412 R2512 +512 R2612 +612 R2712 +712 R2812 +812 R2912 +912 R3012 3rd handle feed magnification

+313 R2413 +413 R2513 +513 R2613 +613 R2713 +713 R2813 +813 R2913 +913 R3013

+314 R2414 +414 R2514 +514 R2614 +614 R2714 +714 R2814 +814 R2914 +914 R3014 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount+315 R2415 +415 R2515 +515 R2615 +615 R2715 +715 R2815 +815 R2915 +915 R3015

+316 R2416 +416 R2516 +516 R2616 +616 R2716 +716 R2816 +816 R2916 +916 R3016 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount+317 R2417 +417 R2517 +517 R2617 +617 R2717 +717 R2817 +817 R2917 +917 R3017

+318 R2418 +418 R2518 +518 R2618 +618 R2718 +718 R2818 +818 R2918 +918 R3018 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount+319 R2419 +419 R2519 +519 R2619 +619 R2719 +719 R2819 +819 R2919 +919 R3019

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+320 R2420 +420 R2520 +520 R2620 +620 R2720 +720 R2820 +820 R2920 +920 R3020 OT ignored

+321 R2421 +421 R2521 +521 R2621 +621 R2721 +721 R2821 +821 R2921 +921 R3021 Near-point dog ignored

+322 R2422 +422 R2522 +522 R2622 +622 R2722 +722 R2822 +822 R2922 +922 R3022

+323 R2423 +423 R2523 +523 R2623 +623 R2723 +723 R2823 +823 R2923 +923 R3023

+324 R2424 +424 R2524 +524 R2624 +624 R2724 +724 R2824 +824 R2924 +924 R3024

+325 R2425 +425 R2525 +525 R2625 +625 R2725 +725 R2825 +825 R2925 +925 R3025

+326 R2426 +426 R2526 +526 R2626 +626 R2726 +726 R2826 +826 R2926 +926 R3026

+327 R2427 +427 R2527 +527 R2627 +627 R2727 +727 R2827 +827 R2927 +927 R3027

+328 R2428 +428 R2528 +528 R2628 +628 R2728 +728 R2828 +828 R2928 +928 R3028

+329 R2429 +429 R2529 +529 R2629 +629 R2729 +729 R2829 +829 R2929 +929 R3029

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+330 R2430 +430 R2530 +530 R2630 +630 R2730 +730 R2830 +830 R2930 +930 R3030 Tool group No. designation

+331 R2431 +431 R2531 +531 R2631 +631 R2731 +731 R2831 +831 R2931 +931 R3031

+332 R2432 +432 R2532 +532 R2632 +632 R2732 +732 R2832 +832 R2932 +932 R3032 Synchronization control operation method

+333 R2433 +433 R2533 +533 R2633 +633 R2733 +733 R2833 +833 R2933 +933 R3033 Droop release invalid axis

+334 R2434 +434 R2534 +534 R2634 +634 R2734 +734 R2834 +834 R2934 +934 R3034 Each axis reference position selection

+335 R2435 +435 R2535 +535 R2635 +635 R2735 +735 R2835 +835 R2935 +935 R3035

+336 R2436 +436 R2536 +536 R2636 +636 R2736 +736 R2836 +836 R2936 +936 R3036

+337 R2437 +437 R2537 +537 R2637 +637 R2737 +737 R2837 +837 R2937 +937 R3037

+338 R2438 +438 R2538 +538 R2638 +638 R2738 +738 R2838 +838 R2938 +938 R3038 Search & start program No.

+339 R2439 +439 R2539 +539 R2639 +639 R2739 +739 R2839 +839 R2939 +939 R3039

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

54

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+340 R2440 +440 R2540 +540 R2640 +640 R2740 +740 R2840 +840 R2940 +940 R3040

+341 R2441 +441 R2541 +541 R2641 +641 R2741 +741 R2841 +841 R2941 +941 R3041

+342 R2442 +442 R2542 +542 R2642 +642 R2742 +742 R2842 +842 R2942 +942 R3042

+343 R2443 +443 R2543 +543 R2643 +643 R2743 +743 R2843 +843 R2943 +943 R3043

+344 R2444 +444 R2544 +544 R2644 +644 R2744 +744 R2844 +844 R2944 +944 R3044

+345 R2445 +445 R2545 +545 R2645 +645 R2745 +745 R2845 +845 R2945 +945 R3045

+346 R2446 +446 R2546 +546 R2646 +646 R2746 +746 R2846 +846 R2946 +946 R3046 Workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No.+347 R2447 +447 R2547 +547 R2647 +647 R2747 +747 R2847 +847 R2947 +947 R3047

+348 R2448 +448 R2548 +548 R2648 +648 R2748 +748 R2848 +848 R2948 +948 R3048 Selected tool No.

+349 R2449 +449 R2549 +549 R2649 +649 R2749 +749 R2849 +849 R2949 +949 R3049

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+350 R2450 +450 R2550 +550 R2650 +650 R2750 +750 R2850 +850 R2950 +950 R3050

+351 R2451 +451 R2551 +551 R2651 +651 R2751 +751 R2851 +851 R2951 +951 R3051

+352 R2452 +452 R2552 +552 R2652 +652 R2752 +752 R2852 +852 R2952 +952 R3052

+353 R2453 +453 R2553 +553 R2653 +653 R2753 +753 R2853 +853 R2953 +953 R3053

+354 R2454 +454 R2554 +554 R2654 +654 R2754 +754 R2854 +854 R2954 +954 R3054

+355 R2455 +455 R2555 +555 R2655 +655 R2755 +755 R2855 +855 R2955 +955 R3055

+356 R2456 +456 R2556 +556 R2656 +656 R2756 +756 R2856 +856 R2956 +956 R3056

+357 R2457 +457 R2557 +557 R2657 +657 R2757 +757 R2857 +857 R2957 +957 R3057

+358 R2458 +458 R2558 +558 R2658 +658 R2758 +758 R2858 +858 R2958 +958 R3058

+359 R2459 +459 R2559 +559 R2659 +659 R2759 +759 R2859 +859 R2959 +959 R3059

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+360 R2460 +460 R2560 +560 R2660 +660 R2760 +760 R2860 +860 R2960 +960 R3060

+361 R2461 +461 R2561 +561 R2661 +661 R2761 +761 R2861 +861 R2961 +961 R3061 External search device No.

+362 R2462 +462 R2562 +562 R2662 +662 R2762 +762 R2862 +862 R2962 +962 R3062 External search program No.

+363 R2463 +463 R2563 +563 R2663 +663 R2763 +763 R2863 +863 R2963 +963 R3063

+364 R2464 +464 R2564 +564 R2664 +664 R2764 +764 R2864 +864 R2964 +964 R3064 External search sequence No.

+365 R2465 +465 R2565 +565 R2665 +665 R2765 +765 R2865 +865 R2965 +965 R3065

+366 R2466 +466 R2566 +566 R2666 +666 R2766 +766 R2866 +866 R2966 +966 R3066 External search block No.

+367 R2467 +467 R2567 +567 R2667 +667 R2767 +767 R2867 +867 R2967 +967 R3067

+368 R2468 +468 R2568 +568 R2668 +668 R2768 +768 R2868 +868 R2968 +968 R3068

+369 R2469 +469 R2569 +569 R2669 +669 R2769 +769 R2869 +869 R2969 +969 R3069

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+370 R2470 +470 R2570 +570 R2670 +670 R2770 +770 R2870 +870 R2970 +970 R3070 User Macro input #1032 (PLC -> Controller)+371 R2471 +471 R2571 +571 R2671 +671 R2771 +771 R2871 +871 R2971 +971 R3071

+372 R2472 +472 R2572 +572 R2672 +672 R2772 +772 R2872 +872 R2972 +972 R3072 User Macro input #1033 (PLC -> Controller)+373 R2473 +473 R2573 +573 R2673 +673 R2773 +773 R2873 +873 R2973 +973 R3073

+374 R2474 +474 R2574 +574 R2674 +674 R2774 +774 R2874 +874 R2974 +974 R3074 User Macro input #1034 (PLC -> Controller)+375 R2475 +475 R2575 +575 R2675 +675 R2775 +775 R2875 +875 R2975 +975 R3075

+376 R2476 +476 R2576 +576 R2676 +676 R2776 +776 R2876 +876 R2976 +976 R3076 User Macro input #1035 (PLC -> Controller)+377 R2477 +477 R2577 +577 R2677 +677 R2777 +777 R2877 +877 R2977 +977 R3077

+378 R2478 +478 R2578 +578 R2678 +678 R2778 +778 R2878 +878 R2978 +978 R3078

+379 R2479 +479 R2579 +579 R2679 +679 R2779 +779 R2879 +879 R2979 +979 R3079

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

55

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+380 R2480 +480 R2580 +580 R2680 +680 R2780 +780 R2880 +880 R2980 +980 R3080 CHPOVn Chopping override

+381 R2481 +481 R2581 +581 R2681 +681 R2781 +781 R2881 +881 R2981 +981 R3081 Chopping axis selection

+382 R2482 +482 R2582 +582 R2682 +682 R2782 +782 R2882 +882 R2982 +982 R3082 Upper dead point designation (L)

+383 R2483 +483 R2583 +583 R2683 +683 R2783 +783 R2883 +883 R2983 +983 R3083 Upper dead point designation (H)

+384 R2484 +484 R2584 +584 R2684 +684 R2784 +784 R2884 +884 R2984 +984 R3084 Lower dead point designation (L)

+385 R2485 +485 R2585 +585 R2685 +685 R2785 +785 R2885 +885 R2985 +985 R3085 Lower dead point designation (H)

+386 R2486 +486 R2586 +586 R2686 +686 R2786 +786 R2886 +886 R2986 +986 R3086 Number of cycles designation

+387 R2487 +487 R2587 +587 R2687 +687 R2787 +787 R2887 +887 R2987 +987 R3087 Data No.

+388 R2488 +488 R2588 +588 R2688 +688 R2788 +788 R2888 +888 R2988 +988 R3088

+389 R2489 +489 R2589 +589 R2689 +689 R2789 +789 R2889 +889 R2989 +989 R3089

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+390 R2490 +490 R2590 +590 R2690 +690 R2790 +790 R2890 +890 R2990 +990 R3090

+391 R2491 +491 R2591 +591 R2691 +691 R2791 +791 R2891 +891 R2991 +991 R3091

+392 R2492 +492 R2592 +592 R2692 +692 R2792 +792 R2892 +892 R2992 +992 R3092

+393 R2493 +493 R2593 +593 R2693 +693 R2793 +793 R2893 +893 R2993 +993 R3093

+394 R2494 +494 R2594 +594 R2694 +694 R2794 +794 R2894 +894 R2994 +994 R3094

+395 R2495 +495 R2595 +595 R2695 +695 R2795 +795 R2895 +895 R2995 +995 R3095

+396 R2496 +496 R2596 +596 R2696 +696 R2796 +796 R2896 +896 R2996 +996 R3096

+397 R2497 +497 R2597 +597 R2697 +697 R2797 +797 R2897 +897 R2997 +997 R3097

+398 R2498 +498 R2598 +598 R2698 +698 R2798 +798 R2898 +898 R2998 +998 R3098

+399 R2499 +499 R2599 +599 R2699 +699 R2799 +799 R2899 +899 R2999 +999 R3099

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

56

3.4.3 Axis Command

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis abbrev. Signal nameShar-

ing G Inter- nal

Sha- ring G

Intern al

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

+1000 R3100 +1010 R3110 +1020 R3120 +1030 R3130 +1040 R3140 +1050 R3150 +1060 R3160 +1070 R3170

External machine coordinate system compensation data

+1001 R3101 +1011 R3111 +1021 R3121 +1031 R3131 +1041 R3141 +1051 R3151 +1061 R3161 +1071 R3171

+1002 R3102 +1012 R3112 +1022 R3122 +1032 R3132 +1042 R3142 +1052 R3152 +1062 R3162 +1072 R3172

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

+1003 R3103 +1013 R3113 +1023 R3123 +1033 R3133 +1043 R3143 +1053 R3153 +1063 R3163 +1073 R3173

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

+1004 R3104 +1014 R3114 +1024 R3124 +1034 R3134 +1044 R3144 +1054 R3154 +1064 R3164 +1074 R3174

External deceleration speed selection

+1005 R3105 +1015 R3115 +1025 R3125 +1035 R3135 +1045 R3145 +1055 R3155 +1065 R3165 +1075 R3175

+1006 R3106 +1016 R3116 +1026 R3126 +1036 R3136 +1046 R3146 +1056 R3156 +1066 R3166 +1076 R3176

+1007 R3107 +1017 R3117 +1027 R3127 +1037 R3137 +1047 R3147 +1057 R3157 +1067 R3167 +1077 R3177

+1008 R3108 +1018 R3118 +1028 R3128 +1038 R3138 +1048 R3148 +1058 R3158 +1068 R3168 +1078 R3178

+1009 R3109 +1019 R3119 +1029 R3129 +1039 R3139 +1049 R3149 +1059 R3159 +1069 R3169 +1079 R3179

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis abbrev

. Signal nameShar-

ing G Inter- nal

Sha- ring G

Intern al

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

+1080 R3180 +1090 R3190 +1100 R3200 +1110 R3210 +1120 R3220 +1130 R3230 +1140 R3240 +1150 R3250

External machine coordinate system compensation data

+1081 R3181 +1091 R3191 +1101 R3201 +1111 R3211 +1121 R3221 +1131 R3231 +1141 R3241 +1151 R3251

+1082 R3182 +1092 R3192 +1102 R3202 +1112 R3212 +1122 R3222 +1132 R3232 +1142 R3242 +1152 R3252

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

+1083 R3183 +1093 R3193 +1103 R3203 +1113 R3213 +1123 R3223 +1133 R3233 +1143 R3243 +1153 R3253

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

+1084 R3184 +1094 R3194 +1104 R3204 +1114 R3214 +1124 R3224 +1134 R3234 +1144 R3244 +1154 R3254

External deceleration speed selection

+1085 R3185 +1095 R3195 +1105 R3205 +1115 R3215 +1125 R3225 +1135 R3235 +1145 R3245 +1155 R3255

+1086 R3186 +1096 R3196 +1106 R3206 +1116 R3216 +1126 R3226 +1136 R3236 +1146 R3246 +1156 R3256

+1087 R3187 +1097 R3197 +1107 R3207 +1117 R3217 +1127 R3227 +1137 R3237 +1147 R3247 +1157 R3257

+1088 R3188 +1098 R3198 +1108 R3208 +1118 R3218 +1128 R3228 +1138 R3238 +1148 R3248 +1158 R3258

+1089 R3189 +1099 R3199 +1109 R3209 +1119 R3219 +1129 R3229 +1139 R3239 +1149 R3249 +1159 R3259

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.4 Data Type Output Signals (PLC->CNC)

57

3.4.4 Spindle Command

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+1160 R3900 +1190 R3930 +1220 R3960 +1250 R3990 +1280 R4020 +1310 R4050 +1340 R4080 SRPMOTn

Spindle command rotation speed output+1161 R3901 +1191 R3931 +1221 R3961 +1251 R3991 +1281 R4021 +1311 R4051 +1341 R4081

+1162 R3902 +1192 R3932 +1222 R3962 +1252 R3992 +1282 R4022 +1312 R4052 +1342 R4082

+1163 R3903 +1193 R3933 +1223 R3963 +1253 R3993 +1283 R4023 +1313 R4053 +1343 R4083

+1164 R3904 +1194 R3934 +1224 R3964 +1254 R3994 +1284 R4024 +1314 R4054 +1344 R4084

+1165 R3905 +1195 R3935 +1225 R3965 +1255 R3995 +1285 R4025 +1315 R4055 +1345 R4085

+1166 R3906 +1196 R3936 +1226 R3966 +1256 R3996 +1286 R4026 +1316 R4056 +1346 R4086

+1167 R3907 +1197 R3937 +1227 R3967 +1257 R3997 +1287 R4027 +1317 R4057 +1347 R4087

+1168 R3908 +1198 R3938 +1228 R3968 +1258 R3998 +1288 R4028 +1318 R4058 +1348 R4088

+1169 R3909 +1199 R3939 +1229 R3969 +1259 R3999 +1289 R4029 +1319 R4059 +1349 R4089

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+1170 R3910 +1200 R3940 +1230 R3970 +1260 R4000 +1290 R4030 +1320 R4060 +1350 R4090 S command override

+1171 R3911 +1201 R3941 +1231 R3971 +1261 R4001 +1291 R4031 +1321 R4061 +1351 R4091 Multi-point orientation position data

+1172 R3912 +1202 R3942 +1232 R3972 +1262 R4002 +1292 R4032 +1322 R4062 +1352 R4092

+1173 R3913 +1203 R3943 +1233 R3973 +1263 R4003 +1293 R4033 +1323 R4063 +1353 R4093

+1174 R3914 +1204 R3944 +1234 R3974 +1264 R4004 +1294 R4034 +1324 R4064 +1354 R4094

+1175 R3915 +1205 R3945 +1235 R3975 +1265 R4005 +1295 R4035 +1325 R4065 +1355 R4095

+1176 R3916 +1206 R3946 +1236 R3976 +1266 R4006 +1296 R4036 +1326 R4066 +1356 R4096

+1177 R3917 +1207 R3947 +1237 R3977 +1267 R4007 +1297 R4037 +1327 R4067 +1357 R4097

+1178 R3918 +1208 R3948 +1238 R3978 +1268 R4008 +1298 R4038 +1328 R4068 +1358 R4098

+1179 R3919 +1209 R3949 +1239 R3979 +1269 R4009 +1299 R4039 +1329 R4069 +1359 R4099

1st SP 2nd SP 3rd SP 4th SP 5th SP 6th SP 7th SP abbrev. Signal nameSharin

g G Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

Sharin g G

Inter- nal

+1180 R3920 +1210 R3950 +1240 R3980 +1270 R4010 +1300 R4040 +1330 R4070 +1360 R4100

+1181 R3921 +1211 R3951 +1241 R3981 +1271 R4011 +1301 R4041 +1331 R4071 +1361 R4101

+1182 R3922 +1212 R3952 +1242 R3982 +1272 R4012 +1302 R4042 +1332 R4072 +1362 R4102

+1183 R3923 +1213 R3953 +1243 R3983 +1273 R4013 +1303 R4043 +1333 R4073 +1363 R4103

+1184 R3924 +1214 R3954 +1244 R3984 +1274 R4014 +1304 R4044 +1334 R4074 +1364 R4104

+1185 R3925 +1215 R3955 +1245 R3985 +1275 R4015 +1305 R4045 +1335 R4075 +1365 R4105

+1186 R3926 +1216 R3956 +1246 R3986 +1276 R4016 +1306 R4046 +1336 R4076 +1366 R4106

+1187 R3927 +1217 R3957 +1247 R3987 +1277 R4017 +1307 R4047 +1337 R4077 +1367 R4107

+1188 R3928 +1218 R3958 +1248 R3988 +1278 R4018 +1308 R4048 +1338 R4078 +1368 R4108

+1189 R3929 +1219 R3959 +1249 R3989 +1279 R4019 +1309 R4049 +1339 R4079 +1369 R4109

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

58

3.5 Each Application 3.5.1 PLC Axis State

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

11370 R1900 Status 1st PLC axis 11378 R1908 Status 2nd PLC axis

11371 R1901 Alarm details 11379 R1909 Alarm details

11372 R1902 Machine position

11380 R1910 Machine position

11373 R1903 11381 R1911

11374 R1904 Remaining distance

11382 R1912 Remaining distance

11375 R1905 11383 R1913

11376 R1906 Status 2 11384 R1914 Status 2

11377 R1907 11385 R1915

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

11386 R1916 Status 3rd PLC axis 11394 R1924 Status 4th PLC axis

11387 R1917 Alarm details 11395 R1925 Alarm details

11388 R1918 Machine position

11396 R1926 Machine position

11389 R1919 11397 R1927

11390 R1920 Remaining distance

11398 R1928 Remaining distance

11391 R1921 11399 R1929

11392 R1922 Status 2 11400 R1930 Status 2

11393 R1923 11401 R1931

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

11402 R1932 Status 5th PLC axis 11410 R1940 Status 6th PLC axis

11403 R1933 Alarm details 11411 R1941 Alarm details

11404 R1934 Machine position

11412 R1942 Machine position

11405 R1935 11413 R1943

11406 R1936 Remaining distance

11414 R1944 Remaining distance

11407 R1937 11415 R1945

11408 R1938 Status 2 11416 R1946 Status 2

11409 R1939 11417 R1947

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details

11418 R1948 Status 7th PLC axis

11419 R1949 Alarm details

11420 R1950 Machine position

11421 R1951

11422 R1952 Remaining distance

11423 R1953

11424 R1954 Status 2

11425 R1955

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

59

Sharing G

Internal Abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal Abbrev. Signal details

11426 R1956 Status

For buffering mode Data A

11434 R1964 Status

For buffering mode Data B

11427 R1957 Alarm details 11435 R1965 Alarm details

11428 R1958 Mashine position

11436 R1966 Machine position

11429 R1959 11437 R1967

11430 R1960 Remaining distance

11438 R1968 Remaining distance

11431 R1961 11439 R1969

11432 R1962 11440 R1970

11433 R1963 11441 R1971

Sharing G

Internal Abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal Abbrev. Signal details

11442 R1972 Status

For buffering mode Data C

12660 R1980 Status 8th PLC axis

11443 R1973 Alarm details 12661 R1981 Alarm detaiils

11444 R1974 Machine position

12662 R1982 Machine position

11445 R1975 12663 R1983

11446 R1976 Remaining distance

12664 R1984 Remaining distance

11447 R1977 12665 R1985

11448 R1978 12666 R1986 Status 2

11449 R1979 12667 R1987

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

60

3.5.2 PLC Axis Control

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1370 R4200 Axis designation 1st PLC axis +1378 R4208 Axis designation 2nd PLC axis

+1371 R4201 Operation mode +1379 R4209 Operation mode

+1372 R4202 Feedrate

+1380 R4210 Feedrate

+1373 R4203 +1381 R4211

+1374 R4204 Movement data

+1382 R4212 Movement data

+1375 R4205 +1383 R4213

+1376 R4206 Control signals +1384 R4214 Control signals

+1377 R4207

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

+1385 R4215

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1386 R4216 Axis designation 3rd PLC axis +1394 R4224 Axis designation 4th PLC axis

+1387 R4217 Operation mode +1395 R4225 Operation mode

+1388 R4218 Feedrate

+1396 R4226 Feedrate

+1389 R4219 +1397 R4227

+1390 R4220 Movement data

+1398 R4228 Movement data

+1391 R4221 +1399 R4229

+1392 R4222 Control signals +1400 R4230 Control signals

+1393 R4223

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

+1401 R4231

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1402 R4232 Axis designation 5th PLC axis +1410 R4240 Axis designation 6th PLC axis

+1403 R4233 Operation mode +1411 R4241 Operation mode

+1404 R4234 Feedrate

+1412 R4242 Feedrate

+1405 R4235 +1413 R4243

+1406 R4236 Movement data

+1414 R4244 Movement data

+1407 R4237 +1415 R4245

+1408 R4238 Control signals +1416 R4246 Control signals

+1409 R4239

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

+1417 R4247

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1418 R4248 Axis designation 7th PLC axis

+1419 R4249 Operation mode

+1420 R4250 Feedrate

+1421 R4251

+1422 R4252 Movement data

+1423 R4253

+1424 R4254 Control signals

+1425 R4255

External deceleration speed selection/Multi- step speed monitor signal input

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

61

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1426 R4256 Axis designation

1st PLC axis Data A

+1434 R4264 Axis designation

1st PLC axis Data B

+1427 R4257 Operation mode +1435 R4265 Operation mode

+1428 R4258 Feedrate

+1436 R4266 Feedrate

+1429 R4259 +1437 R4267

+1430 R4260 Movement data

+1438 R4268 Movement data

+1431 R4261 +1439 R4269

+1432 R4262 Control signals +1440 R4270 Control signals

+1433 R4263 External deceleration speed selection signal

+1441 R4271 External deceleration speed selection signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal details Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal details

+1442 R4272 Axis designation

1st PLC axis Data C

+2660 R4280 Axis designation 8th PLC axis

+1443 R4273 Operation mode +2661 R4281 Operation mode

+1444 R4274 Feedrate

+2662 R4282 Feedrate

+1445 R4275 +2663 R4283

+1446 R4276 Movement data

+2664 R4284 Movement data

+1447 R4277 +2665 R4285

+1448 R4278 Control signals +2666 R4286 Control signals

+1449 R4279 External deceleration speed selection signal

+2667 R4287

External deceleration speed selection signal /Multi-step speed monitor input

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

62

3.5.3 Window Result Information

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12270 R9000 Read result 1 12280 R9010 Read result 11

12271 R9001 Read result 2 12281 R9011 Read result 12

12272 R9002 Read result 3 12282 R9012 Read result 13

12273 R9003 Read result 4 12283 R9013 Read result 14

12274 R9004 Read result 5 12284 R9014 Read result 15

12275 R9005 Read result 6 12285 R9015 Read result 16

12276 R9006 Read result 7 12286 R9016 Read result 17

12277 R9007 Read result 8 12287 R9017 Read result 18

12278 R9008 Read result 9 12288 R9018 Read result 19

12279 R9009 Read result 10 12289 R9019 Read result 20

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12290 R9020 Write result 1 12300 R9030 Write result 11

12291 R9021 Write result 2 12301 R9031 Write result 12

12292 R9022 Write result 3 12302 R9032 Write result 13

12293 R9023 Write result 4 12303 R9033 Write result 14

12294 R9024 Write result 5 12304 R9034 Write result 15

12295 R9025 Write result 6 12305 R9035 Write result 16

12296 R9026 Write result 7 12306 R9036 Write result 17

12297 R9027 Write result 8 12307 R9037 Write result 18

12298 R9028 Write result 9 12308 R9038 Write result 19

12299 R9029 Write result 10 12309 R9039 Write result 20

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12310 R9040

Read window data 1

1st Read data

12318 R9048

Read window data 2

1st Read data12311 R9041 12319 R9049

12312 R9042 2nd Read data

12320 R9050 2nd Read data12313 R9043 12321 R9051

12314 R9044 3rd Read data

12322 R9052 3rd Read data12315 R9045 12323 R9053

12316 R9046 4th Read data

12324 R9054 4th Read data12317 R9047 12325 R9055

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12326 R9056

Read window data 3

1st Read data

12334 R9064

Read window data 4

1st Read data12327 R9057 12335 R9065

12328 R9058 2nd Read data

12336 R9066 2nd Read data12329 R9059 12337 R9067

12330 R9060 3rd Read data

12338 R9068 3rd Read data12331 R9061 12339 R9069

12332 R9062 4th Read data

12340 R9070 4th Read data12333 R9063 12341 R9071

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

63

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12342 R9072

Read window data 5

1st Read data

12350 R9080

Read window data 6

1st Read data12343 R9073 12351 R9081

12344 R9074 2nd Read data

12352 R9082 2nd Read data12345 R9075 12353 R9083

12346 R9076 3rd Read data

12354 R9084 3rd Read data12347 R9077 12355 R9085

12348 R9078 4th Read data

12356 R9086 4th Read data12349 R9079 12357 R9087

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12358 R9088

Read window data 7

1st Read data

12366 R9096

Read window data 8

1st Read data12359 R9089 12367 R9097

12360 R9090 2nd Read data

12368 R9098 2nd Read data12361 R9091 12369 R9099

12362 R9092 3rd Read data

12370 R9100 3rd Read data12363 R9093 12371 R9101

12364 R9094 4th Read data

12372 R9102 4th Read data12365 R9095 12373 R9103

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12374 R9104

Read window data 9

1st Read data

12382 R9112

Read window data 10

1st Read data12375 R9105 12383 R9113

12376 R9106 2nd Read data

12384 R9114 2nd Read data12377 R9107 12385 R9115

12378 R9108 3rd Read data

12386 R9116 3rd Read data12379 R9109 12387 R9117

12380 R9110 4th Read data

12388 R9118 4th Read data12381 R9111 12389 R9119

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12390 R9120

Read window data 11

1st Read data

12398 R9128

Read window data 12

1st Read data12391 R9121 12399 R9129

12392 R9122 2nd Read data

12400 R9130 2nd Read data12393 R9123 12401 R9131

12394 R9124 3rd Read data

12402 R9132 3rd Read data12395 R9125 12403 R9133

12396 R9126 4th Read data

12404 R9134 4th Read data12397 R9127 12405 R9135

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12406 R9136

Read window data 13

1st Read data

12414 R9144

Read window data 14

1st Read data12407 R9137 12415 R9145

12408 R9138 2nd Read data

12416 R9146 2nd Read data12409 R9139 12417 R9147

12410 R9140 3rd Read data

12418 R9148 3rd Read data12411 R9141 12419 R9149

12412 R9142 4th Read data

12420 R9150 4th Read data12413 R9143 12421 R9151

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

64

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12422 R9152

Read window data 15

1st Read data

12430 R9160

Read window data 16

1st Read data12423 R9153 12431 R9161

12424 R9154 2nd Read data

12432 R9162 2nd Read data12425 R9155 12433 R9163

12426 R9156 3rd Read data

12434 R9164 3rd Read data12427 R9157 12435 R9165

12428 R9158 4th Read data

12436 R9166 4th Read data12429 R9159 12437 R9167

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12438 R9168

Read window data 17

1st Read data

12446 R9176

Read window data 18

1st Read data12439 R9169 12447 R9177

12440 R9170 2nd Read data

12448 R9178 2nd Read data12441 R9171 12449 R9179

12442 R9172 3rd Read data

12450 R9180 3rd Read data12443 R9173 12451 R9181

12444 R9174 4th Read data

12452 R9182 4th Read data12445 R9175 12453 R9183

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

12454 R9184

Read window data 19

1st Read data

12462 R9192

Read window data 20

1st Read data12455 R9185 12463 R9193

12456 R9186 2nd Read data

12464 R9194 2nd Read data12457 R9187 12465 R9195

12458 R9188 3rd Read data

12466 R9196 3rd Read data12459 R9189 12467 R9197

12460 R9190 4th Read data

12468 R9198 4th Read data12461 R9191 12469 R9199

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

65

3.5.4 Window Command

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2100 R8500

Read control window 1

Section No. +2108 R8508

Read control window 2

Section No.

+2101 R8501 Section sub-ID No. +2109 R8509 Section sub-ID No.

+2102 R8502 Sub-section No. +2110 R8510 Sub-section No.

+2103 R8503 Data No. +2111 R8511 Data No.

+2104 R8504 Read method +2112 R8512 Read method

+2105 R8505 Number to be read +2113 R8513 Number to be read

+2106 R8506 +2114 R8514

+2107 R8507 Control signal +2115 R8515 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2116 R8516

Read control window 3

Section No. +2124 R8524

Read control window 4

Section No.

+2117 R8517 Section sub-ID No. +2125 R8525 Section sub-ID No.

+2118 R8518 Sub-section No. +2126 R8526 Sub-section No.

+2119 R8519 Data No. +2127 R8527 Data No.

+2120 R8520 Read method +2128 R8528 Read method

+2121 R8521 Number to be read +2129 R8529 Number to be read

+2122 R8522 +2130 R8530

+2123 R8523 Control signal +2131 R8531 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2132 R8532

Read control window 5

Section No. +2140 R8540

Read control window 6

Section No.

+2133 R8533 Section sub-ID No. +2141 R8541 Section sub-ID No.

+2134 R8534 Sub-section No. +2142 R8542 Sub-section No.

+2135 R8535 Data No. +2143 R8543 Data No.

+2136 R8536 Read method +2144 R8544 Read method

+2137 R8537 Number to be read +2145 R8545 Number to be read

+2138 R8538 +2146 R8546

+2139 R8539 Control signal +2147 R8547 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2148 R8548

Read control window 7

Section No. +2156 R8556

Read control window 8

Section No.

+2149 R8549 Section sub-ID No. +2157 R8557 Section sub-ID No.

+2150 R8550 Sub-section No. +2158 R8558 Sub-section No.

+2151 R8551 Data No. +2159 R8559 Data No.

+2152 R8552 Read method +2160 R8560 Read method

+2153 R8553 Number to be read +2161 R8561 Number to be read

+2154 R8554 +2162 R8562

+2155 R8555 Control signal +2163 R8563 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2164 R8564

Read control window 9

Section No. +2172 R8572

Read control window 10

Section No.

+2165 R8565 Section sub-ID No. +2173 R8573 Section sub-ID No.

+2166 R8566 Sub-section No. +2174 R8574 Sub-section No.

+2167 R8567 Data No. +2175 R8575 Data No.

+2168 R8568 Read method +2176 R8576 Read method

+2169 R8569 Number to be read +2177 R8577 Number to be read

+2170 R8570 +2178 R8578

+2171 R8571 Control signal +2179 R8579 Control signal

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

66

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2180 R8580

Read control window 11

Section No. +2188 R8588

Read control window 12

Section No.

+2181 R8581 Section sub-ID No. +2189 R8589 Section sub-ID No.

+2182 R8582 Sub-section No. +2190 R8590 Sub-section No.

+2183 R8583 Data No. +2191 R8591 Data No.

+2184 R8584 Read method +2192 R8592 Read method

+2185 R8585 Number to be read +2193 R8593 Number to be read

+2186 R8586 +2194 R8594

+2187 R8587 Control signal +2195 R8595 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2196 R8596

Read control window 13

Section No. +2204 R8604

Read control window 14

Section No.

+2197 R8597 Section sub-ID No. +2205 R8605 Section sub-ID No.

+2198 R8598 Sub-section No. +2206 R8606 Sub-section No.

+2199 R8599 Data No. +2207 R8607 Data No.

+2200 R8600 Read method +2208 R8608 Read method

+2201 R8601 Number to be read +2209 R8609 Number to be read

+2202 R8602 +2210 R8610

+2203 R8603 Control signal +2211 R8611 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2212 R8612

Read control window 15

Section No. +2220 R8620

Read control window 16

Section No.

+2213 R8613 Section sub-ID No. +2221 R8621 Section sub-ID No.

+2214 R8614 Sub-section No. +2222 R8622 Sub-section No.

+2215 R8615 Data No. +2223 R8623 Data No.

+2216 R8616 Read method +2224 R8624 Read method

+2217 R8617 Number to be read +2225 R8625 Number to be read

+2218 R8618 +2226 R8626

+2219 R8619 Control signal +2227 R8627 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2228 R8628

Read control window 17

Section No. +2236 R8636

Read control window 18

Section No.

+2229 R8629 Section sub-ID No. +2237 R8637 Section sub-ID No.

+2230 R8630 Sub-section No. +2238 R8638 Sub-section No.

+2231 R8631 Data No. +2239 R8639 Data No.

+2232 R8632 Read method +2240 R8640 Read method

+2233 R8633 Number to be read +2241 R8641 Number to be read

+2234 R8634 +2242 R8642

+2235 R8635 Control signal +2243 R8643 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2244 R8644

Read control window 19

Section No. +2252 R8652

Read control window 20

Section No.

+2245 R8645 Section sub-ID No. +2253 R8653 Section sub-ID No.

+2246 R8646 Sub-section No. +2254 R8654 Sub-section No.

+2247 R8647 Data No. +2255 R8655 Data No.

+2248 R8648 Read method +2256 R8656 Read method

+2249 R8649 Number to be read +2257 R8657 Number to be read

+2250 R8650 +2258 R8658

+2251 R8651 Control signal +2259 R8659 Control signal

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

67

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2260 R8660

Write data 1

1st Write data

+2268 R8668

Write control window 1

Section No.

+2261 R8661 +2269 R8669 Section sub-ID No.

+2262 R8662 2nd Write data

+2270 R8670 Sub-section No.

+2263 R8663 +2271 R8671 Data No.

+2264 R8664 3rd Write data

+2272 R8672 Write method

+2265 R8665 +2273 R8673 Number to be written

+2266 R8666 4th Write data

+2274 R8674

+2267 R8667 +2275 R8675 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2276 R8676

Write data 2

1st Write data

+2284 R8684

Write control window 2

Section No.

+2277 R8677 +2285 R8685 Section sub-ID No.

+2278 R8678 2nd Write data

+2286 R8686 Sub-section No.

+2279 R8679 +2287 R8687 Data No.

+2280 R8680 3rd Write data

+2288 R8688 Write method

+2281 R8681 +2289 R8689 Number to be written

+2282 R8682 4th Write data

+2290 R8690

+2283 R8683 +2291 R8691 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2292 R8692

Write data 3

1st Write data

+2300 R8700

Write control window 3

Section No.

+2293 R8693 +2301 R8701 Section sub-ID No.

+2294 R8694 2nd Write data

+2302 R8702 Sub-section No.

+2295 R8695 +2303 R8703 Data No.

+2296 R8696 3rd Write data

+2304 R8704 Write method

+2297 R8697 +2305 R8705 Number to be written

+2298 R8698 4th Write data

+2306 R8706

+2299 R8699 +2307 R8707 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2308 R8708

Write data 4

1st Write data

+2316 R8716

Write control window 4

Section No.

+2309 R8709 +2317 R8717 Section sub-ID No.

+2310 R8710 2nd Write data

+2318 R8718 Sub-section No.

+2311 R8711 +2319 R8719 Data No.

+2312 R8712 3rd Write data

+2320 R8720 Write method

+2313 R8713 +2321 R8721 Number to be written

+2314 R8714 4th Write data

+2322 R8722

+2315 R8715 +2323 R8723 Control signal

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

68

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2324 R8724

Write data 5

1st Write data

+2332 R8732

Write control window 5

Section No.

+2325 R8725 +2333 R8733 Section sub-ID No.

+2326 R8726 2nd Write data

+2334 R8734 Sub-section No.

+2327 R8727 +2335 R8735 Data No.

+2328 R8728 3rd Write data

+2336 R8736 Write method

+2329 R8729 +2337 R8737 Number to be written

+2330 R8730 4th Write data

+2338 R8738

+2331 R8731 +2339 R8739 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2340 R8740

Write data 6

1st Write data

+2348 R8748

Write control window 6

Section No.

+2341 R8741 +2349 R8749 Section sub-ID No.

+2342 R8742 2nd Write data

+2350 R8750 Sub-section No.

+2343 R8743 +2351 R8751 Data No.

+2344 R8744 3rd Write data

+2352 R8752 Write method

+2345 R8745 +2353 R8753 Number to be written

+2346 R8746 4th Write data

+2354 R8754

+2347 R8747 +2355 R8755 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2356 R8756

Write data 7

1st Write data

+2364 R8764

Write control window 7

Section No.

+2357 R8757 +2365 R8765 Section sub-ID No.

+2358 R8758 2nd Write data

+2366 R8766 Sub-section No.

+2359 R8759 +2367 R8767 Data No.

+2360 R8760 3rd Write data

+2368 R8768 Write method

+2361 R8761 +2369 R8769 Number to be written

+2362 R8762 4th Write data

+2370 R8770

+2363 R8763 +2371 R8771 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2372 R8772

Write data 8

1st Write data

+2380 R8780

Write control window 8

Section No.

+2373 R8773 +2381 R8781 Section sub-ID No.

+2374 R8774 2nd Write data

+2382 R8782 Sub-section No.

+2375 R8775 +2383 R8783 Data No.

+2376 R8776 3rd Write data

+2384 R8784 Write method

+2377 R8777 +2385 R8785 Number to be written

+2378 R8778 4th Write data

+2386 R8786

+2379 R8779 +2387 R8787 Control signal

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

69

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2388 R8788

Write data 9

1st Write data

+2396 R8796

Write control window 9

Section No.

+2389 R8789 +2397 R8797 Section sub-ID No.

+2390 R8790 2nd Write data

+2398 R8798 Sub-section No.

+2391 R8791 +2399 R8799 Data No.

+2392 R8792 3rd Write data

+2400 R8800 Write method

+2393 R8793 +2401 R8801 Number to be written

+2394 R8794 4th Write data

+2402 R8802

+2395 R8795 +2403 R8803 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2404 R8804

Write data 10

1st Write data

+2412 R8812

Write control window 10

Section No.

+2405 R8805 +2413 R8813 Section sub-ID No.

+2406 R8806 2nd Write data

+2414 R8814 Sub-section No.

+2407 R8807 +2415 R8815 Data No.

+2408 R8808 3rd Write data

+2416 R8816 Write method

+2409 R8809 +2417 R8817 Number to be written

+2410 R8810 4th Write data

+2418 R8818

+2411 R8811 +2419 R8819 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2420 R8820

Write data 11

1st Write data

+2428 R8828

Write control window 11

Section No.

+2421 R8821 +2429 R8829 Section sub-ID No.

+2422 R8822 2nd Write data

+2430 R8830 Sub-section No.

+2423 R8823 +2431 R8831 Data No.

+2424 R8824 3rd Write data

+2432 R8832 Write method

+2425 R8825 +2433 R8833 Number to be written

+2426 R8826 4th Write data

+2434 R8834

+2427 R8827 +2435 R8835 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2436 R8836

Write data 12

1st Write data

+2444 R8844

Write control window 12

Section No.

+2437 R8837 +2445 R8845 Section sub-ID No.

+2438 R8838 2nd Write data

+2446 R8846 Sub-section No.

+2439 R8839 +2447 R8847 Data No.

+2440 R8840 3rd Write data

+2448 R8848 Write method

+2441 R8841 +2449 R8849 Number to be written

+2442 R8842 4th Write data

+2450 R8850

+2443 R8843 +2451 R8851 Control signal

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

70

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2452 R8852

Write data 13

1st Write data

+2460 R8860

Write control window 13

Section No.

+2453 R8853 +2461 R8861 Section sub-ID No.

+2454 R8854 2nd Write data

+2462 R8862 Sub-section No.

+2455 R8855 +2463 R8863 Data No.

+2456 R8856 3rd Write data

+2464 R8864 Write method

+2457 R8857 +2465 R8865 Number to be written

+2458 R8858 4th Write data

+2466 R8866

+2459 R8859 +2467 R8867 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2468 R8868

Write data 14

1st Write data

+2476 R8876

Write control window 14

Section No.

+2469 R8869 +2477 R8877 Section sub-ID No.

+2470 R8870 2nd Write data

+2478 R8878 Sub-section No.

+2471 R8871 +2479 R8879 Data No.

+2472 R8872 3rd Write data

+2480 R8880 Write method

+2473 R8873 +2481 R8881 Number to be written

+2474 R8874 4th Write data

+2482 R8882

+2475 R8875 +2483 R8883 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2484 R8884

Write data 15

1st Write data

+2492 R8892

Write control window 15

Section No.

+2485 R8885 +2493 R8893 Section sub-ID No.

+2486 R8886 2nd Write data

+2494 R8894 Sub-section No.

+2487 R8887 +2495 R8895 Data No.

+2488 R8888 3rd Write data

+2496 R8896 Write method

+2489 R8889 +2497 R8897 Number to be written

+2490 R8890 4th Write data

+2498 R8898

+2491 R8891 +2499 R8899 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2500 R8900

Write data 16

1st Write data

+2508 R8908

Write control window 16

Section No.

+2501 R8901 +2509 R8909 Section sub-ID No.

+2502 R8902 2nd Write data

+2510 R8910 Sub-section No.

+2503 R8903 +2511 R8911 Data No.

+2504 R8904 3rd Write data

+2512 R8912 Write method

+2505 R8905 +2513 R8913 Number to be written

+2506 R8906 4th Write data

+2514 R8914

+2507 R8907 +2515 R8915 Control signal

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

71

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2516 R8916

Write data 17

1st Write data

+2524 R8924

Write control window 17

Section No.

+2517 R8917 +2525 R8925 Section sub-ID No.

+2518 R8918 2nd Write data

+2526 R8926 Sub-section No.

+2519 R8919 +2527 R8927 Data No.

+2520 R8920 3rd Write data

+2528 R8928 Write method

+2521 R8921 +2529 R8929 Number to be written

+2522 R8922 4th Write data

+2530 R8930

+2523 R8923 +2531 R8931 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2532 R8932

Write data 18

1st Write data

+2540 R8940

Write control window 18

Section No.

+2533 R8933 +2541 R8941 Section sub-ID No.

+2534 R8934 2nd Write data

+2542 R8942 Sub-section No.

+2535 R8935 +2543 R8943 Data No.

+2536 R8936 3rd Write data

+2544 R8944 Write method

+2537 R8937 +2545 R8945 Number to be written

+2538 R8938 4th Write data

+2546 R8946

+2539 R8939 +2547 R8947 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2548 R8948

Write data 19

1st Write data

+2556 R8956

Write control window 19

Section No.

+2549 R8949 +2557 R8957 Section sub-ID No.

+2550 R8950 2nd Write data

+2558 R8958 Sub-section No.

+2551 R8951 +2559 R8959 Data No.

+2552 R8952 3rd Write data

+2560 R8960 Write method

+2553 R8953 +2561 R8961 Number to be written

+2554 R8954 4th Write data

+2562 R8962

+2555 R8955 +2563 R8963 Control signal

Sharing G

Internal abbrev. Signal name Sharing

G Internal abbrev. Signal name

+2564 R8964

Write data 20

1st Write data

+2572 R8972

Write control window 20

Section No.

+2565 R8965 +2573 R8973 Section sub-ID No.

+2566 R8966 2nd Write data

+2574 R8974 Sub-section No.

+2567 R8967 +2575 R8975 Data No.

+2568 R8968 3rd Write data

+2576 R8976 Write method

+2569 R8969 +2577 R8977 Number to be written

+2570 R8970 4th Write data

+2578 R8978

+2571 R8971 +2579 R8979 Control signal

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

72

3.5.5 Data Registered to Magazine for M System

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks (data type)T4-digit/T8-digit specifications T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit

ATC control parameter G11450

R4700

Number of tool parameter G11460 G11461 G11462

Binary R4710 R4711 R4712

Pointer designation G11465 G11466 G11467

Binary R4715 R4716 R4717

Spindle tool

G11470 G11470 G11471

G11480 G11480 G11481

- -

BCD

R4720 R4720 R4721

R4730 R4730 R4731

- -

Standby 1 tool

G11471 G11472 G11473

G11481 G11482 G11483

- -

BCD

R4721 R4722 R4723

R4731 R4732 R4733

- -

Standby 2 tool

G11472 G11474 G11475

G11482 G11484 G11485

- -

BCD

R4722 R4724 R4725

R4732 R4734 R4735

- -

Standby 3 tool

G11473 G11476 G11477

G11483 G11486 G11487

- -

BCD

R4723 R4726 R4727

R4733 R4736 R4737

- -

Standby 4 tool

G11474 G11478 G11479

G11484 G11488 G11489

- -

BCD

R4724 R4728 R4729

R4734 R4738 R4739

- -

AUX data G11498

Binary R4748

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

73

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine Remarks (data type)T4-digit/T8-digit specifications T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit

Magazine tool data

MG1

G11500 G11500 G11501

G11740 G11740 G11741

G11980 G11980 G11981

BCD

R4750 R4750 R4751

R4990 R4990 R4991

R5230 R5230 R5231

MG2

G11501 G11502 G11503

G11741 G11742 G11743

G11981 G11982 G11983

BCD

R4751 R4752 R4753

R4991 R4992 R4993

R5231 R5232 R5233

MG3

G11502 G11504 G11505

G11742 G11744 G11745

G11982 G11984 G11985

BCD

R4752 R4754 R4755

R4992 R4994 R4995

R5232 R5234 R5235

: : : : : : : :

MG79

G11578 G11656 G11657

G11818 G11896 G11897

G12058 G12136 G12137

BCD

R4828 R4906 R4907

R5068 R5146 R5147

R5308 R5386 R5387

MG80

G11579 G11658 G11659

G11819 G11898 G11899

G12059 G12138 G12139

BCD

R4829 R4908 R4909

R5069 R5148 R5149

R5309 R5388 R5389

Magazine tool data (Aux. D)

DN01 G11660 G11900 G12140

BCD R4910 R5150 R5390

DN02 G11661 G11901 G12141

BCD R4911 R5151 R5391

DN03 G11662 G11902 G12142

BCD R4912 R5152 R5392

: : : : : : : :

DN79 G11738 G11978 G12218

BCD R4988 R5228 R5468

DN80 G11739 G11979 G12219

BCD R4989 R5229 R5469

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

74

3.5.6 Tool Life Management (M System)

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

11450 R6720 T life mgmt Spindle tool No.

PLC -> CNC 11451 R6721

11452 R6722 T life mgmt Standby tool No.

11453 R6723

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

12220 R6724 Spare tool: Group No.

CNC -> PLC

12221 R6725

12222 R6726 Spare tool: Tool No.

12223 R6727

12224 R6728 Spare tool: Tool data flag/status

12225 R6729 Spare tool: Auxiliary data

12226 R6730 Spare tool: Life data

12227 R6731 Spare tool: Usage data

12228 R6732 Spare tool: Length compensation amount

12229 R6733

12230 R6734 Spare tool: Radius compensation amount

12231 R6735

12232 R6736

12233 R6737

12234 R6738

12235 R6739

12236 R6740

12237 R6741

12238 R6742

12239 R6743

12240 R6744

12241 R6745

12242 R6746

12243 R6747

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

75

Sharing G Internal abbrev. Signal name Remarks

12244 R6748 Active tool: Group No.

CNC -> PLC

12245 R6749

12246 R6750 Active tool: Tool No.

12247 R6751

12248 R6752 Active tool: Tool data flag/status

12249 R6753 Active tool: Auxiliary data

12250 R6754 Active tool: Life data

12251 R6755 Active tool: Usage data

12252 R6756 Active tool: Length compensation amount

12253 R6757

12254 R6758 Active tool: Radius compensation amount

12255 R6759

12256 R6760

12257 R6761

12258 R6762

12259 R6763

12260 R6764

12261 R6765

12262 R6766

12263 R6767

12264 R6768

12265 R6769

12266 R6770

12267 R6771

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

76

3.5.7 Safety Observing

CNC -> PLC PLC -> CNC

Device

abbrev. Signal name

Device

abbrev. Signal nameShar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

12470 R2150 SU_NC1 CNC side dual signal Module 1(L) +2580 R4450 SU_PC1 PLC side dual signal Module 1(L)

12471 R2151 SU_NC1 CNC side dual signal Module 1(H) +2581 R4451 SU_PC1 PLC side dual signal Module 1(H)

12472 R2152 SU_NC2 CNC side dual signal Module 2(L) +2582 R4452 SU_PC2 PLC side dual signal Module 2(L)

12473 R2153 SU_NC2 CNC side dual signal Module 2(H) +2583 R4453 SU_PC2 PLC side dual signal Module 2(H)

12474 R2154 SU_NC3 CNC side dual signal Module 3(L) +2584 R4454 SU_PC3 PLC side dual signal Module 3(L)

12475 R2155 SU_NC3 CNC side dual signal Module 3(H) +2585 R4455 SU_PC3 PLC side dual signal Module 3(H)

12476 R2156 +2586 R4456

12477 R2157 +2587 R4457

12478 R2158 +2588 R4458

12479 R2159 +2589 R4459

Device

abbrev. Signal name

Device

abbrev. Signal nameShar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

12480 R2160 SU_NER1 CNC side dual signal error Module 1(L) +2590 R4460 SU_PER1 PLC side dual signal error Module 1(L)

12481 R2161 SU_NER1 CNC side dual signal error Module 1(H) +2591 R4461 SU_PER1 PLC side dual signal error Module 1(H)

12482 R2162 SU_NER2 CNC side dual signal error Module 2(L) +2592 R4462 SU_PER2 PLC side dual signal error Module 2(L)

12483 R2163 SU_NER2 CNC side dual signal error Module 2(H) +2593 R4463 SU_PER2 PLC side dual signal error Module 2(H)

12484 R2164 SU_NER3 CNC side dual signal error Module 3(L) +2594 R4464 SU_PER3 PLC side dual signal error Module 3(L)

12485 R2165 SU_NER3 CNC side dual signal error Module 3(H) +2595 R4465 SU_PER3 PLC side dual signal error Module 3(H)

12486 R2166 +2596 R4466

12487 R2167 +2597 R4467

12488 R2168 +2598 R4468

12489 R2169 +2599 R4469

Device

abbrev. Signal name

Device

abbrev. Signal nameShar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

12490 R2170 SU_NO1 CNC side dual signal output Module 1 +2600 R4470 SU_PO1 PLC side dual signal output Module 1

12491 R2171 SU_NO2 CNC side dual signal output Module 2 +2601 R4471 SU_PO2 PLC side dual signal output Module 2

12492 R2172 SU_NO3 CNC side dual signal output Module 3 +2602 R4472 SU_PO3 PLC side dual signal output Module 3

12493 R2173 +2603 R4473

12494 R2174 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 1 +2604 R4474 SU_POER1 PLC side dual signal output error Module 1

12495 R2175 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 2 +2605 R4475 SU_POER2 PLC side dual signal output error Module 2

12496 R2176 SU_NOER1 CNC side dual signal output error Module 3 +2606 R4476 SU_POER3 PLC side dual signal output error Module 3

12497 R2177 +2607 R4477

12498 R2178 +2608 R4478

12499 R2179 SU_NST2 CNC side dual signal compare status 2 +2609 R4479 SU_PST2 PLC side dual signal compare status 2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

77

CNC -> PLC PLC -> CNC

Device

abbrev. Signal name

Device

abbrev. Signal nameShar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

12500 R2180 SU_NLT CNC side safety compare activity check information

+2610 R4480 SU_PLT PLC side safety compare activity check information

12501 R2181 SU_NST CNC side dual signal compare status +2611 R4481 SU_PST PLC side dual signal compare status

12502 R2182 SU_NGDV CNC side head G No. +2612 R4482 SU_NGDV PLC side head G No.

12503 R2183 SU_NDLY CNC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time

+2613 R4483 SU_PDLY PLC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time

12504 R2184 SU_NDV1 CNC side dual signal head device No. 1 +2614 R4484 SU_PDV1 PLC side dual signal head device No. 1

12505 R2185 SU_NDV2 CNC side dual signal head device No. 2 +2615 R4485 SU_PDV2 PLC side dual signal head device No. 2

12506 R2186 SU_NDV3 CNC side dual signal head device No. 3 +2616 R4486 SU_PDV3 PLC side dual signal head device No. 3

12507 R2187 +2617 R4487

12508 R2188 SU_NNUM No. of dual signal modules on CNC side +2618 R4488 SU_PNUM No. of dual signal modules on PLC side

12509 R2189 +2619 R4489

Device

abbrev. Signal name

Device

abbrev. Signal nameShar- ing G

Inter- nal

Shar- ing G

Inter- nal

12510 R2190 +2620 R4490 SU_POP PLC side safety operation status

12511 R2191 +2621 R4491

12512 R2192 +2622 R4492

12513 R2193 +2623 R4493

12514 R2194 +2624 R4494

12515 R2195 +2625 R4495

12516 R2196 +2626 R4496

12517 R2197 +2627 R4497

12518 R2198 +2628 R4498

12519 R2199 +2629 R4499

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

78

3.5.8 PLC Constants

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12520 R4500 #6301(Low-order side) 12530 R4510 #6306(Low-order side)

12521 R4501 (High-order side) 12531 R4511 (High-order side)

12522 R4502 #6302(Low-order side) 12532 R4512 #6307(Low-order side)

12523 R4503 (High-order side) 12533 R4513 (High-order side)

12524 R4504 #6303(Low-order side) 12534 R4514 #6308(Low-order side)

12525 R4505 (High-order side) 12535 R4515 (High-order side)

12526 R4506 #6304(Low-order side) 12536 R4516 #6309(Low-order side)

12527 R4507 (High-order side) 12537 R4517 (High-order side)

12528 R4508 #6305(Low-order side) 12538 R4518 #6310(Low-order side)

12529 R4509 (High-order side) 12539 R4519 (High-order side)

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12540 R4520 #6311(Low-order side) 12550 R4530 #6316(Low-order side)

12541 R4521 (High-order side) 12551 R4531 (High-order side)

12542 R4522 #6312(Low-order side) 12552 R4532 #6317(Low-order side)

12543 R4523 (High-order side) 12553 R4533 (High-order side)

12544 R4524 #6313(Low-order side) 12554 R4534 #6318(Low-order side)

12545 R4525 (High-order side) 12555 R4535 (High-order side)

12546 R4526 #6314(Low-order side) 12556 R4536 #6319(Low-order side)

12547 R4527 (High-order side) 12557 R4537 (High-order side)

12548 R4528 #6315(Low-order side) 12558 R4538 #6320(Low-order side)

12549 R4529 (High-order side) 12559 R4539 (High-order side)

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12560 R4540 #6321(Low-order side) 12570 R4550 #6326(Low-order side)

12561 R4541 (High-order side) 12571 R4551 (High-order side)

12562 R4542 #6322(Low-order side) 12572 R4552 #6327(Low-order side)

12563 R4543 (High-order side) 12573 R4553 (High-order side)

12564 R4544 #6323(Low-order side) 12574 R4554 #6328(Low-order side)

12565 R4545 (High-order side) 12575 R4555 (High-order side)

12566 R4546 #6324(Low-order side) 12576 R4556 #6329(Low-order side)

12567 R4547 (High-order side) 12577 R4557 (High-order side)

12568 R4548 #6325(Low-order side) 12578 R4558 #6330(Low-order side)

12569 R4549 (High-order side) 12579 R4559 (High-order side)

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12580 R4560 #6331(Low-order side) 12590 R4570 #6336(Low-order side)

12581 R4561 (High-order side) 12591 R4571 (High-order side)

12582 R4562 #6332(Low-order side) 12592 R4572 #6337(Low-order side)

12583 R4563 (High-order side) 12593 R4573 (High-order side)

12584 R4564 #6333(Low-order side) 12594 R4574 #6338(Low-order side)

12585 R4565 (High-order side) 12595 R4575 (High-order side)

12586 R4566 #6334(Low-order side) 12596 R4576 #6339(Low-order side)

12587 R4567 (High-order side) 12597 R4577 (High-order side)

12588 R4568 #6335(Low-order side) 12598 R4578 #6340(Low-order side)

12589 R4569 (High-order side) 12599 R4579 (High-order side)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

79

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12600 R4580 #6341(Low-order side) 12610 R4590 #6346(Low-order side)

12601 R4581 (High-order side) 12611 R4591 (High-order side)

12602 R4582 #6342(Low-order side) 12612 R4592 #6347(Low-order side)

12603 R4583 (High-order side) 12613 R4593 (High-order side)

12604 R4584 #6343(Low-order side) 12614 R4594 #6348(Low-order side)

12605 R4585 (High-order side) 12615 R4595 (High-order side)

12606 R4586 #6344(Low-order side)

12607 R4587 (High-order side)

12608 R4588 #6345(Low-order side)

12609 R4589 (High-order side)

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

80

3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12616 R4600 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6401 12621 R4605

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6411

#6402 #6412

12617 R4601 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6403 12622 R4606

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6413

#6404 #6414

12618 R4602 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6405 12623 R4607

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6415

#6406 #6416

12619 R4603 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6407 12624 R4608

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6417

#6408 #6418

12620 R4604 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6409 1265 R4609

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6419

#6410 #6420

Device abbrev. Contents

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal Sharing G Internal

12626 R4610 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6421 12631 R4615

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6431

#6422 #6432

12627 R4611 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6423 12632 R4616

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6433

#6424 #6434

12628 R4612 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6425 12633 R4617

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6435

#6426 #6436

12629 R4613 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6427 12634 R4618

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6437

#6428 #6438

12630 R4614 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6429 12635 R4619

(High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6439

#6430 #6440

Device abbrev. Contents

Sharing G Internal

12636 R4620 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6441

#6442

12637 R4621 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6443

#6444

12638 R4622 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6445

#6446

12639 R4623 (High-order side) (Low-order side)

#6447

#6448

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.5 Each Application

81

3.5.10 PLC Axis Indexing Interface

Operation command PLC CPU -> CNC CPU (R4300 to R4345)

Operation status signal CNC CPU -> PLC CPU (R2000 to R2045)

PLC indexing axis Abbrev. Signal name

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722 AUXCM4 PLC axis indexing control command 4

R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342

G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723 AUXCM3 PLC axis indexing control command 3

R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343

G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724 AUXCM2 PLC axis indexing control command 2

R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344

G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725 AUXCM1 PLC axis indexing control command 1

R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345

G+2684 G+2690 G+2696 G+2702 G+2708 G+2714 G+2720 G+2726 PLC axis indexing control command position (L)R4304 R4310 R4316 R4322 R4328 R4334 R4340 R4346

G+2685 G+2691 G+2697 G+2703 G+2709 G+2715 G+2721 G+2727 PLC axis indexing control command position (H)R4305 R4311 R4317 R4323 R4329 R4335 R4341 R4347

PLC indexing axis Abbrev. Signal name

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722 AUXST4 PLC axis indexing control status 4

R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042

G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723 AUXST3 PLC axis indexing control status 3

R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043

G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724 AUXST2 PLC axis indexing control status 2

R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044

G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725 AUXST1 PLC axis indexing control status 1

R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045

G12684 G12690 G12696 G12702 G12708 G12714 G12720 G12726 PLC axis indexing control machine position (L)R2004 R2010 R2016 R2022 R2028 R2034 R2040 R2046

G12685 G12691 G12697 G12703 G12709 G12715 G12721 G12727 PPLC axis indexing control machine position (H)R2005 R2011 R2017 R2023 R2029 R2035 R2041 R2047

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

82

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals 3.6.1 Special Relay

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM0 Diagnosis error SM10

SM1 Self-diagnosis error SM11

SM2 SM12 CARRY Carry flag

SM3 SM13

SM4 SM14

SM5 SM15

SM6 SM16 THER Temperature rise

SM7 SM17

SM8 SM18

SM9 SM19

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM20 SM30

SM21 SM31

SM22 SM32 ON Always ON

SM23 QSTOP PLC STOP SM33 OFF Always OFF

SM24 SM34 BSCN Only 1 scan ON after RUN

SM25 SM35 ASCN Only 1 scan OFF after RUN

SM26 SM36 01CLK 0.1-second clock

SM27 SM37 02CLK 0.2-second clock

SM28 SM38 1CLK 1-second clock

SM29 SM39 2CLK 2-second clock

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM40 2NCLK 2n-second clock SM50 (APLC data protect avoidance mode)

SM41 SM51 Battery low latch

SM42 SM52 Battery low

SM43 SM53 AC/DC DOWN detection

SM44 SM54

SM45 SM55

SM46 SM56 Calculation error

SM47 SM57

SM48 SM58 Battery low warning latch

SM49 SM59 Battery low warning

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM60 SM70 (APLC data protect avoidance mode)

SM61 SM71

SM62 SM72

SM63 SM73

SM64 DSPRQ Tool registration and Life screen display request

SM74

SM65 LSTIN Life management data setting prohibited SM75

SM66 SM76

SM67 SM77

SM68 SM78

SM69 (Data protect avoidance mode) SM79

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

83

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM80 SM90

SM81 SM91

SM82 Model judgment code (for GOT) SM92

SM83 Model judgment code (for GOT) SM93

SM84 Version information (for GOT) SM94

SM85 SM95

SM86 SM96

SM87 SM97

SM88 SM98

SM89 SM99

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM100 SM110

SM101 SM111

SM102 SM112 CPU No. 1 reset flag

SM103 SM113 CPU No. 2 reset flag

SM104 SM114 CPU No. 3 reset flag

SM105 SM115 CPU No. 4 reset flag

SM106 SM116 CPU No. 1 error flag

SM107 SM117 CPU No. 2 error flag

SM108 SM118 CPU No. 3 error flag

SM109 SM119 CPU No. 4 error flag

Device abbrev. Signal name

SM120 Cyclic transmission receive error detection flag

SM121 Cyclic transmission receive error detection counter valid flag

SM122

SM123

SM124

SM125

SM126

SM127

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SM240 CPU No. 1 reset flag (same as SM112)

SM241 CPU No. 2 reset flag (same as SM113)

SM242 CPU No. 3 reset flag (same as SM114) SM412 1-second clock (same as SM38)

SM243 CPU No. 4 reset flag (same as SM115)

SM244 CPU No. 1 error flag (same as SM116)

SM245 CPU No. 2 error flag (same as SM117)

SM246 CPU No. 3 error flag (same as SM118)

SM247 CPU No. 4 error flag (same as SM119)

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

84

3.6.2 Special Register

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD0 Diagnosis error SD10

Error common information (continuation)

SD1 Diagnosis error occurrence time Year/Month SD11

SD2 Diagnosis error occurrence time Date/Hour SD12

SD3 Diagnosis error occurrence time Minute/ Second

SD13

SD4 Error information class SD14

SD5

Error common information

SD15

SD6 SD16

Error individual information SD7 SD17

SD8 SD18

SD9 SD19

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD20

Error individual information (continuation)

SD30 Writing translation error step No.

SD21 SD31 Writing translation error No.

SD22 SD32

SD23 SD33

SD24 SD34 1-second counter

SD25 SD35 SCAN Scan counter

SD26 SD36

SD27 SD37 SCTCR Current scan time

SD28 SD38 SCTMI Minimum scan time

SD29 SD39 SCTMX Maximum scan time

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD40 2n-second clock set SD50

SD41 SD51 Battery low latch

SD42 SD52 Battery low

SD43 SD53 AC/DC DOWN detection

SD44 SD54

SD45 SD55

SD46 SD56

SD47 SD57

SD48 SD58

SD49 SD59

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD60 SD70 Cyclic transmission receive error detection counter for CPU No.3

SD61 SD71 Cyclic transmission receive error detection counter for CPU No.4

SD62 Clock data Year/Month SD72

SD63 Clock data Date/Hour SD73

SD64 Clock data Minute/Second SD74

SD65 Clock data Week SD75

SD66 Multi-CPU No. SD76

SD67 Cyclic transmission receive error threshold frequency setting

SD77

SD68 Cyclic transmission receive error detection counter for CPU No.1

SD78

SD69 Cyclic transmission receive error detection counter for CPU No.2

SD79

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

85

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD80 SD90

SD81 SD91

SD82 Model judgment code (for GOT) SD92

SD83 Model judgment code (for GOT) SD93

SD84 Version information (for GOT) SD94

SD85 SD95

SD86 SD96

SD87 SD97

SD88 SD98

SD89 SD99

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD100 SD110

SD101 SD111

SD102 SD112

SD103 SD113

SD104 SD114

SD105 SD115

SD106 SD116

SD107 SD117

SD108 SD118

SD109 SD119

Device abbrev. Signal name

SD120

SD121

SD122

SD123

SD124

SD125

SD126

SD127

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD200 Switch status (without internal device assignment)

SD210 Clock data Year/Month (same as SD62)

SD201 LED status SD211 Clock data Date/Hour (same as SD63)

SD212 Clock data Minute/Second (same as SD64)

SD203 CPU operation status SD213 Clock data Week (same as SD65)

SD204 LED display color

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

86

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD290 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for X

SD291 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for Y

SD292 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for M

SD293 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for L

SD294 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for B

SD295 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for F

SD296 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for SB

SD297 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for V

SD288 Number of points allocated for B (for extension) 1

SD298 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for S

SD289 Number of points allocated for B (for extension) 2

SD299 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for T

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD300 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for ST

SD301 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for C

SD302 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for D

SD303 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for W

SD304 Device allocation: Number of points allocated for SW

SD395 Multi-CPU No. (same as SD66)

Device abbrev. Signal name Device abbrev. Signal name

SD420 Scan counter (same as SD35)

SD412 1-second counter (same as SD34)

SD414 2n-second clock set (same as SD40)

Device abbrev. Signal name

SD520 Current scan time (ms unit) (same as SD37)

SD524 Minimum scan time (ms unit) (same as SD38)

SD526 Maximum scan time (ms unit) (same as SD39)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals

87

3 Input/Output Signals Table with Controller

MITSUBISHI CNC

88

89

4

Explanation of Interface Signals

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

90

The signals are explained in order of the tables of input/output signals with the controller as shown below.

Signal type Explanation Reference

Bit Type Input Signals

System State (CNC->PLC) 4.1

Axis State (CNC->PLC) 4.2

Part System State (CNC->PLC) 4.3

Spindle State (CNC->PLC) 4.4

Data Type Input Signals

System State (CNC->PLC) 4.5

Axis State (CNC->PLC) 4.6

Part System State (CNC->PLC) 4.7

Spindle State (CNC->PLC) 4.8

Bit Type Output Signals

System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.9

Axis Command (PLC->CNC) 4.10

Part System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.11

Spindle Command (PLC->CNC) 4.12

Data Type Output Signals

System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.13

Axis Command (PLC->CNC) 4.14

Part System Command (PLC->CNC) 4.15

Spindle Command (PLC->CNC) 4.16

B *CSLn Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54

How to read the signals

Contact Signal name Signal abbreviation $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK

The device Nos. for each part system

The table form is different depending on the signal.

(Common for part system, axis, spindle)

Types of contact

A : Signal which is valid at ON (A contact)

B : Signal which is valid at OFF (B contact)

(Note) For B contact, "*" is added to the head of the signal abbreviation.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

91

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

This signal notifies that the connector status of the drive power has been ON for over 24 hours.

[Operation]

This signal turns OFF when the contactor shutoff is confirmed by the contactor shutoff test.

Turn the "contactor shutoff test" signal ON to carry out this test.

[Caution]

There is a possibility that the contactor is welded and so your safety may not be secured when "24 hours continuous

operation" signal is output. Thus, under this condition, do not input "speed monitor mode" signal to open the door.

[Related signals]

Contactor shutoff test (MCT)

[Function]

This signal notifies that ON/OFF of the previous error signal is not yet confirmed after a dual signal comparison error.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON at the power ON, after "Y20 Safety observation error 0020" (dual signal comparison error) has

occurred.

When you check the ON/OFF status of the signal to which a comparison error occurred, or input a reset signal, this

signal will turn OFF.

[Caution]

You can turn OFF this signal by inputting a reset signal as well as by checking the previous error signal's ON/OFF status.

If you wish to use this signal after resetting, latch the signal.

[Function]

This signal notifies that the connector status of the dual signal module's output signals are not being all OFF for over 24

hours.

[Operation]

"Output OFF check not complete" signal will turn OFF when the all the output signals turned OFF is confirmed while the

"output OFF check" signal is ON.

[Caution]

Create a PLC program that the operaters cannot touch the moving sections by disabling the door lock while the "output

OFF check not complete" signal is OFF or dropping the power.

[Related signals]

Output OFF check (OFFCHK)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A 24 HOURS CONTINUOUS OP-

ERATION CNOP X310

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DUAL SIGNAL UNCONFIRMED

AFTER COMPARE ERROR SSUCHK X311

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A OUTPUT OFF CHECK NOT

COMPLETE NOFFCHK X312

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

92

[Function]

This signal informs that the power shutoff of the drive section is required.

[Operation]

This signal turns OFF when it enters the emergency stop state so that the drive section can be shutoff.

It turns ON when the error factors are removed and there is no need to shutoff the drive section.

[Caution]

This signal is used to control a contactor at PLC side when there is no dual signal module. When it has a dual signal

module, do not use this signal.

After the error factor of the emergency stop state is released, NC power needs to be turned ON again to turn this signal

ON. However, it is possible to turn this signal ON by resetting if it is the safety observation error which can be removed

by resetting.

[Function]

This signal notifies that the skip signal is in input state. (m = 1 to 4)

[Operation]

It turns ON when the skip signal is input regardless of the setting of skip I/F switch parameter (#1258 set30/bit0).

The device No. will be recorded to the operation history at the rising and falling edge of this signal.

[Function]

This signal indicates that the controller is ready for normal operation.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The controller starts working successfully after it is turned ON or when no off-condition exists.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The controller is turned OFF.

(2) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU, memory, etc.).

(3) "Servo alarm" which cannot be reset without turning OFF the power supply of the controller occurs.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

B POWER SHUTOFF NOTIFICA-

TION *PSDNTF X313

Emergency stop All the axes decelerate to zero speed.

Servo ready completion (SA)

All axes zero speed

Power shutoff notification (PSDNTF)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SKIPm INPUT SIGNAL STATE SKIPmC X318 - X31B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A CONTROLLER READY COM-

PLETION MA X320

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

93

[Function]

This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation.

In other words, the servo system (position control) is not working when the signal is OFF.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The diagnosis on the servo system is completed successfully after the control unit is turned ON.

(2) "Servo alarm", if occurs, is reset. (Resetting may not be possible depending on the servo alarm contents.)

(3) "Emergency stop" input is removed.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "Servo alarm" occurs.

(2) "Emergency stop" is input.

(3) The power supply of controller is turned OFF.

(4) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU or memory).

(Note 1) This signal (SA) cannot be turned OFF only with the "Servo OFF" (*SVFn) signal.

[Function]

This signal notifies the PLC that the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal, or

that the same status is canceled.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal turning

ON.

This signal turns OFF at all axes ready ON and at all servo axes servo ON, due to "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signal

turning OFF.

Release of the door lock is enabled at the rising edge of "Door open enable" signal.

The operation is in a READY status at the falling edge of "Door open enable" signal.

[Caution]

(1) Handling of the PLC axis

Set so "Door open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signals are output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If "Door

open I, II" (DOOR1, 2) signals are input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake

method due to the ready OFF state. The remaining distance will be held in the remaining distance of PLC axis

control information data.

(2) Handling of the analog spindle

When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the

CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.

Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run

and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.

(3) Opening the door during ATC operation

When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.

[Related signals]

(1) Door open I (DOOR1)

(2) Door open II (DOOR2)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SERVO READY COMPLETION SA X321

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOOR OPEN ENABLE DROPNS X329

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

94

[Function]

This signal informs that the spindle synchronous control mode has been entered.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- The G114.1 is commanded, and spindle synchronous control is entered. (Spindle synchronization control I)

- The "spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) signal turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control II)

The signal turns OFF when:

- Spindle synchronous control is canceled with the G113 command. Or, when the "spindle synchronization cancel"

(SSYNI)

signal turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control I)

- When the "spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) signal turns OFF. (Spindle synchronization control II)

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

(5) Spindle synchronization cancel (SSYNI)

[Function]

This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state mode is entered.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- The rotation speed difference of the primary spindle and secondary spindle reaches the value set for the spindle

rotation speed attainment level in spindle synchronization mode. (Spindle synchronization I)

The signal turns OFF when:

- The actual rotation speed of the basic spindle or synchronous spindle, in respect to the spindle synchronous

rotation speed command value, widely exceeds or deviates value set for the spindle synchronization rotation

speed attainment level during the rotation synchronization mode.

- The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZA-

TION SPSYN1 X32A

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED

SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLE- TION

FSPRV X32B

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

95

[Function]

This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state is entered.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- The phase alignment of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is completed during the phase synchronization

mode.

The signal turns OFF when:

- The phase difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle exceeds the value set for the spindle

synchronization phase attainment level during the phase synchronization mode.

- The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.

(Note 1) Temporary turn OFF to change the rotation speed during the phase synchronization.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONI-

ZATION COMPLETION FSPPH X32C

Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before chucking

both ends of the workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle. If the spindle

phase synchronization signal is turned ON when both ends of the workpiece are chucked

to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle, the chuck or workpiece could be damaged

by the torsion that occurs during phase alignment.

CAUTION

Spindle synchronous control (SPSY)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

In spindle synchronous control (SPSYN1)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion ON

Spindle synchronous control ON Spindle synchronous control OFF

Spindle phase synchronous control (SPPHS)

Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

Spindle phase synchronous control ON

Spindle phase synchronization completion ON

Spindle phase synchronous control OFF

(Note1)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

96

[Function]

This signal informs that chuck close (SPCMPC) is input during spindle synchronous control.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is ON.

This signal turns OFF when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is OFF.

This signal turns OFF when the spindle synchronous control is canceled.

(Note) Use "error temporary cancel" signal only when the position error between two spindles still occurs even after

the "Chuck close" signal is turned ON.

[Related signals]

(1) Chuck close (SPCMPC)

(2) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(3) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(4) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(5) Error temporary cancel (SPDRPO)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A CHUCK CLOSE CONFIRMA-

TION SPCMP X32D

Chuck open Chuck close Chuck close

Spindle synchronous control (SPSY)

Error temporary cancel (SPDRPO)

In spindle synchronous control (SPSYN1)

In error cancel

Synchronous spindle chuck

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close Chuck open Chuck close confirmation

Chuck open confirmation

Chuck close (SPCMPC)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

97

[Function]

This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the control unit or the battery supplying to the absolute

position detector has dropped below the battery alarm detection level.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The voltage of the data storage battery, which is checked constantly, has dropped below the battery alarm detection

level (2.7V).

The alarm indicates the system alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0001" at this time.

(2) A fault is detected in the battery voltage (3.0V or less) supplied to the absolute position detector.

The alarms "Z73 ABS. WARNING 0001" and "S52 SERVO WARNING 009F" are displayed at this time.

(Note 1) Even if this signal is ON, starting the automatic operation is possible.

(Note 2) The battery alarm turns the automatic interlock ON even when the interlock has been set invalid.

The signal is turned OFF in the following way.

(1) When the alarm occurred by the cause written in (1) above, the signal is turned OFF by replacing the battery and

then turning ON the "NC reset 1"signal (NRST1n).

(2) When the alarm occurred by the cause written in (2) above, the signal is turned OFF by removing the cause and

then turning the power ON again.

(3) The signal is also turned OFF when the voltage of the data storage battery drops below the battery alarm detection

level, and the battery alarm (BATAL) signal turns ON.

The system alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0003" is displayed at this time.

[Caution]

When this signal (BATWR) turns ON, it is recommended to replace battery as early as possible.

[Related signals]

(1) Battery alarm (BATAL)

(2) Battery drop cause

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A BATTERY WARNING BATWR X32E

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

98

[Function]

This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the control unit or the battery supplying to the absolute

position detector has dropped below the battery alarm detection level.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The voltage of the data storage battery is checked when the power is turned ON and is below the battery alarm

detection level (2.5V).

At this time, the alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0003" will be displayed.

(2) A fault is detected in the power voltage (battery voltage)(2.6V or less) for the speed detector in the absolute position

detector.

At this time, the alarm "Z71 DETECTOR ERR 0001" will be displayed.

(3) The absolute position is lost by the drop in the backup power voltage (battery voltage) in the absolute position

detector.

At this time, the alarm "Z70 Abs posn error(servo alm 25) 0101" will be displayed.

(4) A fault is detected in the battery voltage for the data storage detection circuit.

At this time, the alarm "Z52 BATTERY FAULT 0002" will be displayed.

(Note 1) Automatic starting is not possible when this signal is ON.

(Note 2) This battery alarm signal turns the automatic interlock ON even when the interlock has been set invalid.

(Note 3) The automatic interlock, validated when the battery alarm has been detected, can be set invalid with the

parameter below.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) For alarms caused by ON condition (1)

The signal can be turned OFF with "NC reset 1" (NRST1n) signal after the battery is replaced with new one.

(2) For alarms caused by ON conditions (2) and (3)

The signal can be turned OFF by removing the alarm causes and then turning the power ON again.

[Caution]

(1) If simply turning the control unit power OFF upon occurrence of this battery alarm (especially in the "ON" conditions

(1)), data storing machining programs, etc. will be destroyed. Replace the battery with new one before turning the

power OFF and confirm that this signal is turned OFF.

(2) Make sure to backup the control unit data and keep it in case that data will be destroyed.

If this battery alarm has occurred when the control unit power is ON, take measures, assuming that the data storing

machining programs may have been destroyed. (Confirm the data storing machining programs, etc.)

[Related signals]

(1) Battery warning (BATWR)

(2) Battery drop cause

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A BATTERY ALARM BATAL X32F

# R register bit Item Details

6449 R4624 4 Automatic interlock invalid while battery alarm ON

Validates/invalidates the automatic interlock when the battery alarm is detected. This bit is always "0" (valid) when the power is turned ON. 0: Valid 1: Invalid

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

99

[Function]

This signal informs that system error occurred in the controller.

[Operation]

If "watch dog error", "memory parity check error", etc. occurs on the controller side, the signal turns ON.

The system error can be reset by turning OFF.

(Note 1) "NC alarm 1" (AL1) may not be detected as signal.

(Note 2) For details of system alarms, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller is in servo alarm condition.

If servo alarm occurs, "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns OFF.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Servo alarm occurs. Servo alarms include the following:

- Servo failure 1 (no signal, overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.)

- Servo failure 2 (motor overheat, excessive error, drive unit external emergency stop, etc.)

- Initial parameter error (parameter transferred to drive unit when the power is turned ON is illegal)

- Drive unit not mounted (cable is not connected between controller and servo controller).

- Parameter error (a parameter that will disrupt movement of the control axis was found).

Alarm can be reset by turning OFF the power, or using controller reset, or by setting parameter again, etc., depending on

type of alarm.

For details of alarm resetting, and servo alarm, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.

[Function]

This signal informs macro single is valid.

Macro single is used to stop the user macro command block by block during single block operation.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON by setting "1" in "#8101 MACRO SINGLE".

[Related signals]

(1) SINGLE BLOCK(SBKn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A NC ALARM 1 AL1 X330

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) AL2 X331

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A MACRO SINGLE VALID MSON X339

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

100

[Function]

This signal informs that the set parameter is not valid without turning the power ON again.

[Operation]

When the following operation is executed, the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal is output, and the

alarm "Z20 Power ON again" will be displayed in the alarm display area.

(1) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are set from CNC monitor screen.

(2) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are input via EZSocket.

(3) The parameter data (ALL.PRM) is input.

(4) The backup data (SRM.BIN) is input by the SRAM backup function.

(5) The backup data/restore data are restored.

(6) The parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are changed with G10 L70 command.

(7) The standard parameters are set by setting "#1060 SETUP" to "1".

When the power is turned ON again, this signal will turn OFF and the message "Z20 Power ON again" will disappear.

This signal will not be cleared with NC reset.

[Caution]

A warning message and signal will be output when the parameters to be valid after turning ON the power again are

changed. However, interlock, such as for operation startup, will not be executed until the power is turned ON again.

Therefore, execute the interlock with PLC program.

[Function]

This signal informs that the compression process for the edited data is being executed.

[Operation]

Turn this signal ON when changing the machining program by editing or inputting the program.

This signal will turn OFF after the edited data compression process is completed.

[Caution]

The data being edited might corrupt if the controller's power is cutoff while this signal is ON.

[Related signals]

(1) Edited data error (EDITERR)

(2) Edited data recovery confirmation (EDITOK)

[Function]

This signal informs that an error has occurred in the edited data.

[Operation]

This signal will turn ON if the alarm "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR" occurs

This signal will turn OFF when the alarm "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR" is all cleared.

[Caution]

Refer to the Setup manual on how to release the alarm.

[Related signals]

(1) Edited data error (EDITERR)

(2) Edited data recovery confirmation (EDITOK)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A Power OFF required after param-

eter change PARACHG X33A

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A EDITIED DATA IN PROCESS-

ING EDITDO X33B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A EDITED DATA ERROR EDITERR X33C

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.1 Bit Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

101

[Function]

This signal informs that the NC data sampling is completed (executed).

[Operation]

(1) This signal turns ON when "#0 sampling startup" is changed from "1" to "0" where the sampling data exists (Note).

(Including when "9" is set to perform a force-quiet.)

(Note) When it entered into in sampling state even once after sampling is started.

(2) This signal turns OFF when "#0 sampling startup" is changed from "0" to "1".

The sampling data will be cleared if either the number of channels, buffering capacity or process configuration is

changed. In this case, this signal will turn OFF.

[Function]

This signal informs that download from FTP server is started.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- Downloading a file from FTP server is normally started.

The signal turns OFF when:

- Download is completed.

- Download is interrupted as the data transfer error occurred during the download process. If it happens, the error

code will be stored.

[Related signals]

(1) Download request (DLDREQ)

(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)

(3) Download error (DLDERR)

[Function]

This signal informs that a download from FTP server is successfully completed.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- Downloading a file from FTP server is started.

The signal turns OFF when:

- "Download request" (DODREQ) is turned OFF

[Related signals]

(1) Download request (DLDREQ)

(2) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

(3) Download error (DLDERR)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A NC DATA SAMPLING COM-

PLETED SMPFIN X33E

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS DLOAD0 X350

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOWNLOAD COMPLETED DLDFIN X351

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

102

[Function]

This signal informs that an error occurred when download is requested to FTP server.

This signal informs that an error occurred while downloading from FTP server.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- An error occurred when requesting download to FTP server but download cannot be started.

- Download is interrupted as an error occurred while downloading from FTP server.

- Download is requested when option is set as no setting. (In this case, the alarm for communication error will not

occur simultaneously.)

The signal turns OFF when:

- "Download request" (DODREQ) is turned OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Download request (DLDREQ)

(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)

(3) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

[Function]

This is the position switch for the PLC control axis.

This signal notifies that the machine position is within the area set by the parameters.

[Operation]

It operates the same as the NC axis position switch PSWmn.

[Related signals]

(1) Position switch m (PSWmn)

[Function] [Operation]

This signal is an interface for sending a signal from APLC C language module to PLC device.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOWNLOAD ERROR DLDERR X352

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC AXIS POSITION SWITCH n PSWPn X360 - X36F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A APLC INPUT SIGNAL n APLCINn X380 - X39F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

103

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the drive section of the nth axis is ready for operation.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The power supply of the controller is turned ON and the diagnosis on the servo system has been completed

successfully.

(2) Servo alarm has been reset.

(3) Emergency stop has been reset.

(4) "Servo off"(*SVFn) signal is reset.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Servo alarm occurs.

(2) Emergency stop is issued.

(3) "Servo off"(*SVFn) signal is input.

[Operation sequence]

[Related signals]

(1) Servo ready completion (SA)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A SERVO READY RDYn

X400 X420 X440 X460 X480 X4A0 X4C0 X4E0

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X500 X520 X540 X560 X580 X5A0 X5C0 X5E0

Controller power supply Controller ready completion

Servo ready n-th axis

3s 0.5s

0.7s 0.5s 0.5s 0.7s 0.7s

In reset

Emergency stop

Servo alarm

Reset & rewind

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

104

[Function]

This signal indicates that motion command is issued to the control axis.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON and OFF as follows:

(1) Automatic operation

The signal is ON while the motion command is issued to the end of movement, or to when automatic operation

pause turns ON.

(2) Manual operation

(a) For JOG mode

The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal is ON.

(b) For HANDLE mode

When "1st to 3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) and "Handle valid" signal (HS1Sn, HS2Sn,

HS3Sn) have been selected, the "Axis selected" signal for the axis specified by the "1st to 3rd handle axis

selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) signal is ON.

(c) For INCREMENTAL mode

The signal turns ON when "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the

specified motion is completed.

(d) For MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode

The signal turns ON when "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the

specified motion is completed.

(e) For REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode

The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal is ON. After "Reference position return

near point detection" signal is detected, and the motion speed changes to approach (creeping) speed, the

"Axis selected" signal remains ON until the motion stops at the reference position, even when "Feed axis

selection +/-" (+Jn and -Jn) signal turns OFF.

(3) Other conditions

(a) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock (Z-axis is in cancellation). However, it does not turn ON during

machine lock in manual operation mode.

(b) The signal remains on even when motion stops due to feedrate override set at 0%, manual control feedrate set

at 0 mm/min, or 0 inch/min.

(c) Interlock does not affect status of this signal (the signal remains ON, or turns ON).

(d) "Servo off" signal does not affect status of this signal.

(e) The signal cannot be turned ON by G04 and G92.

(f) The signal turns OFF with "controller Reset & Rewind", or "Emergency stop".

(Example)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A AXIS SELECTION AXn

X401 X421 X441 X461 X481 X4A1 X4C1 X4E1

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X501 X521 X541 X561 X581 X5A1 X5C1 X5E1

Axial motion

Feed axis selection

Axis selected

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

105

[Function]

This signal indicates that the specified axial motion is in plus (+) direction.

This signal is available per control axis, and the last number of the signal name indicates the control axis No.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The specified axial component starts moving in the plus direction or when moving.

The signal turns OFF when:

(2) The specified control axis stops moving or moves in the minus direction.

An example of the timing chart for the jog mode is shown below.

(Note 1) This signal operates regardless of the operation mode.

(Note 2) The real movement direction is indicated.

(Note 3) The signal does not turn ON during machine lock.

[Related signals]

In axis minus motion (MVMn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the control axis is moving in the minus direction

[Operation]

This motion direction is the reverse of the plus motion, and the operation is the same as IN AXIS PLUS MOTION +

(MVPn).

[Related signals]

In axis plus motion (MVPn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN AXIS PLUS MOTION MVPn

X402 X422 X442 X462 X482 X4A2 X4C2 X4E2

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X502 X522 X542 X562 X582 X5A2 X5C2 X5E2

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN AXIS MINUS MOTION MVMn

X403 X423 X443 X463 X483 X4A3 X4C3 X4E3

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X503 X523 X543 X563 X583 X5A3 X5C3 X5E3

Feed axis selection- (-J1)

1st axis motion [+]

Feed axis selection+ (+J1)

1st axis motion [-]

In axis plus motion (MVP1)

In axis minus motion (MVM1)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

106

[Function]

This signal indicates that the axial component of the nth axis is ON the 1st reference position.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

(1) The signal turns ON when:

- "1st reference position reached" is attained with reference position return mode in manual operation.

Refer to the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (ZRNn) section for details on returning.

- "1st reference position reached" is attained with G28 command in automatic operation.

(Note 1) If "1st reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the signal

does not turn ON.

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.

- "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.

(3) Reference position return operation pattern

[Related signals]

(1) 2nd reference position reached nth axis (ZP2n)

(2) 3rd reference position reached nth axis (ZP3n)

(3) 4th reference position reached nth axis (ZP4n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A 1ST REFERENCE POSITION

REACHED ZP1n

X404 X424 X444 X464 X484 X4A4 X4C4 X4E4

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X504 X524 X544 X564 X584 X5A4 X5C4 X5E4

(Note) Reference position return will be the high-speed return when the basic machine coordinate system is established (2nd time and following).

When basic machine coordinate system is not established.

When dog-type return is selected with setup parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063 mandog" in the manual mode.

Dog-type reference position return

Near-point dog

Reference position

High-speed reference position return

Near-point dog

Reference position

When basic machine coordinate system is not established.

When high-speed return is selected with setup parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063 mandog" in the manual mode.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

107

[Function]

This signal indicates that the axial component of the nth axis is on the 2nd reference position.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

(1) The signal turns ON when:

- "2nd reference position reached" is attained with G30 command (G30 P2 X_ Y_ ...) in automatic operation.

- "2nd reference position reached" is attained with reference position retern mode of automatic operation

(Reference position selection code 1, 2).

(Note) If "2nd reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the signal

does not turn ON.

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.

- "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.

[Related signals]

(1) 1st reference position reached nth axis (ZP1n)

(2) 3rd reference position reached nth axis (ZP3n)

(3) 4th reference position reached nth axis (ZP4n)

(4) Reference position selection code m (ZSLmn)

[Function][Operation]

This signal informs that the control axis is on the 3rd reference position.

Function and operation are the same as the 2nd reference position reached, but the reference position and G command

are different.

- Reference position: 3rd reference position

- G comand: G30 P3

[Function][Operation]

This signal informs that the control axis is on the 4th reference position.

Function and operation are the same as the 2nd reference position reached, but the reference position and G command

are different.

- Reference position: 4th reference position

- G comand: G30 P4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A 2ND REFERENCE POSITION

REACHED ZP2n

X405 X425 X445 X465 X485 X4A5 X4C5 X4E5

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X505 X525 X545 X565 X585 X5A5 X5C5 X5E5

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A 3RD REFERENCE POSITION

REACHED ZP3n

X406 X426 X446 X466 X486 X4A6 X4C6 X4E6

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X506 X526 X546 X566 X586 X5A6 X5C6 X5E6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A 4TH REFERENCE POSITION

REACHED ZP4n

X407 X427 X447 X467 X487 X4A7 X4C7 X4E7

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X507 X527 X547 X567 X587 X5A7 X5C7 X5E7

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

108

[Function]

This signal indicates that the control axis is near the 1st reference position in the absolute position detection system.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the control axis is in the range of the parameter set using the 1st reference position as a base

point, and turns OFF when the range is exceeded. The parameter is set with #2057 (nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the

[ABS. POSI PARAM] screen.

(Note 1) The "Near reference position" signal is output even while the axis is moving, but there may be a slight

deviation with the actual machine position.

Rapid traverse: 4.8mm

Cutting feed: 2.4mm

(Note 2) This signal is valid only with the absolute position detection system.

(Note 3) When 0 is set for #2057 (nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen, it will be same as when

the grid width is set.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A NEAR REFERENCE POSITION NRFn

X408 X428 X448 X468 X488 X4A8 X4C8 X4E8

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X508 X528 X548 X568 X588 X5A8 X5C8 X5E8

+ direction - direction

#2057 setting value

1st reference position

#2058 setting value

Near reference position (NRFn)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

109

[Function]

This signal indicates that the actual axis feedrate has reached the feedrate commanded for each axis.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the difference of the speed commanded for each axis and the motor feedback feedrate is

within a set range (approx. 15%).

This signal turns OFF when the speed difference exceeds the set range.

[Related signals]

(1) In axis plus motion (MVPn)

(2) In axis minus motion (MVMn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED ARRFn

X409 X429 X449 X469 X489 X4A9 X4C9 X4E9

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X509 X529 X549 X569 X589 X5A9 X5C9 X5E9

15%

Axis start

Axis feedrate

NC axis up-to-speed

In axis plus motion/

In axis minus motion

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

110

[Function]

This signal notifies that the basic machine coordinate system has been set (established) during zero point initialization

set using the marked point alignment method in the absolute position detection system I/II.

[Operation]

This signal is valid when "#2049 TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4", and turns ON when the

basic machine coordinate system is set (established).

This signal will turn OFF if initializing is carried out again or if the power is turned ON again.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION

SET COMPLETED ZSFn

X40A X42A X44A X46A X48A X4AA X4CA X4EA

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50A X52A X54A X56A X58A X5AA X5CA X5EA

[Time chart] ( (a) to (e) in the figure correspond to (a) to (e) above)

(a)

(b)

(d)

(e)

(c)

(e)

(c)

(e)

(a) (b)

[Outline of zero point initialization set method]

Start point Machine basic position

Completion

(Note) The axis movement for (b) and (d) is carried out with jogging or handle operation.

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

Zero point return parameter

(d)

Grid point (absolute position basic point)

Screen [TO END] display value

Either one is [ZERO] value set on the screen.

Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

In initialization (R574)

Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)

Initialization incompletion

([#2037 G53ofs])

Reference position

(When #2059 zerbas=1)

(When #2059 zerbas=0)

Coordinate

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

111

[Related signals]

(1) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)

(2) In initialization

(3) Initialization incomplete

(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

(d)

(a) (d)

(d)

(b) (c)

(a)

(b)

(c)

[Time chart] ( (a) to (d) in the figure correspond to (a) to (d) above)

[Outline of zero point initialization set method]

Start point

Machin basic position

Completion

(Note) The axis movement for (b) and (d) is carried out with jogging or handle operation.

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

Zero point return parameter

Grid point

Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

In zero point initialization set

Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)

Zero point initialization incomplete

(#2037 G53ofs)

Reference position

#2 Zero point

The parameter "#2059 zerbas" does not influence the "#2 Zero point".

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

112

[Function]

This signal is output when initializing is not possible during the marked point alignment method of the absolute position

detection system I/II.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the initializing is not possible at the rising edge of the "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn)

signal.

This signal is invalidated in the following cases:

- During emergency stop

- During reset

- When "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point initialization set mode"

(AZSn) signal

- When grid has not been passed even once after the power has been turned ON. (Depends on the detector type)

[Related signals]

(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)

(2) In initialization

(3) Initialization incomplete

(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

[Function]

This signal is output when zero point initialization is being carried out in the absolute position detection system.

[Operation]

The axis for which "1" is set in #0 INIT. SET on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is set to "1", and is held until the power

is turned OFF.

The stored stroke limit and stroke end signals are invalid while this signal is set to "1", and the current limit during

initialization is valid.

This signal is also set to "1" when the zero point initialization mode (AZSn) signal is ON.

[Function]

This signal is output when the absolute position is not established in the absolute position detection system.

[Operation]

This signal indicates that the zero point initialization has not been established once or that the absolute position has

been lost.

The stored stroke limit of the axis for which this signal is set to "1" in the absolute position detection system is invalid.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION

SET ERROR COMPLETED ZSEn

X40B X42B X44B X46B X48B X4AB X4CB X4EB

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50B X52B X54B X56B X58B X5AB X5CB X5EB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN ZERO POINT INITIALIZA-

TION ZSn

X40C X42C X44C X46C X48C X4AC X4CC X4EC

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50C X52C X54C X56C X58C X5AC X5CC X5EC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION

INCOMPLETE ZLSn

X40D X42D X44D X46D X48D X4AD X4CD X4ED

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50D X52D X54D X56D X58D X5AD X5CD X5ED

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

113

[Function][Operation]

This signal turns ON during the current limit.

[Related signals]

(1) Current limit reached (ILAn)

(2) Current limit changeover (ILCn)

(3) Droop release request (DORn)

(4) Current limit mode 1 and 2 (ILMmn)

(5) Current limit changeover

[Function][Operation]

This signal turns ON when the current reaches its limit during the current limit control.

[Related signals]

(1) In current limit (ILIn)

(2) Current limit changeover (ILCn)

(3) Droop release request (DORn)

(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)

(5) Current limit changeover

[Function]

This signal is output when movement of the axis selected as the index table indexing axis is commanded.

[Operation]

When this signal turns ON, the index table indexing axis clamp is released by the ladder, and the "unclamp completion"

(UCLPFn) signal is set.

This signal turns OFF when movement of the index table indexing axis is completed.

The signal turns ON when:

- Movement of the indexing axis is commanded during automatic operation.

This signal turns OFF when:

- Movement of the indexing axis is completed during automatic operation.

- The axis movement is forcibly ended with reset or emergency stop, etc.

(Note 1) The index command will not turn OFF if the axis movement is interrupted with an interlock or automatic

operation pause, etc.

(Note 2) This signal is turned ON and OFF when the index table indexing axis acceleration/deceleration has completed.

Thus, if the in-position has to be confirmed during the clamp/unclamp operation, confirm with the PLC.

[Related signals]

(1) Unclamp completion (UCLPFn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN CURRENT LIMIT ILIn

X40E X42E X44E X46E X48E X4AE X4CE X4EE

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50E X52E X54E X56E X58E X5AE X5CE X5EE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A CURRENT LIMIT REACHED ILAn

X40F X42F X44F X46F X48F X4AF X4CF X4EF

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X50F X52F X54F X56F X58F X5AF X5CF X5EF

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A UNCLAMP COMMAND UCLPn

X410 X430 X450 X470 X490 X4B0 X4D0 X4F0

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X510 X530 X550 X570 X590 X5B0 X5D0 X5F0

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

114

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC that the control axis is in the in-position state.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when:

(1) The control axis' acceleration/deceleration delay is zero, and the servo error (droop pulse) is within the range set with

the parameters.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) The control axis' acceleration/deceleration delay is not zero.

(2) The servo error (droop pulse) is not within the range set with the parameters.

[Function]

This signal indicates that the axis is in multi-step speed monitor.

In multi-step monitor, when the speed of axis exceeds the monitor speed the safety observation error will occur.

[Operation]

After the "Multi-step speed monitor request" (MSORn) is turned on, the speed of axis becomes less than monitoring

speed, and both NC and drive unit start executing the speed monitor function, this signal will be turned ON.

When "Multi-step speed request" (MSORn) signal is turned off, this signal too will be turned off.

[Related signals]

(1) Multi-step speed monitor request (MSORn)

(2) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)

(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN-POSITION INPn

X411 X431 X451 X471 X491 X4B1 X4D1 X4F1

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X511 X531 X551 X571 X591 X5B1 X5D1 X5F1

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN MULTI-STEP SPEED MONI-

TOR MSOEn

X412 X432 X452 X472 X492 X4B2 X4D2 X4F2

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X512 X532 X552 X572 X592 X5B2 X5D2 X5F2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

115

[Function]

This signal notifies which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-step

speed monitoring.

[Operation]

When the monitor speed of drive unit is switched to the safety monitor speed of the mode which is designated by "Multi-

step speed monitor mode input" (MSOMImn), this signal is also switched to the designated mode.

[Related signals]

(1) Multi-step speed monitor request (MSORn)

(2) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)

(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)

[Function]

This signal informs that the switching between NC axis and PLC axis cannot be executed.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the following conditions apply to the axis which is valid for switching between NC axis and

PLC axis. When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while this signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/PLC

axis switch illegal 1250" will occur.

- While the axis is in motion

- During the Servo OFF

- While removing the axis

- While the axis is stooped with interlock

- While the axis is stopped for override

- During the current limit

- During the droop release

- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command

- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the

program

- During the H/W OT, soft limit

[Related signals]

(1) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR

MODE OUTPUT m MSO- MOmn

X413 - 414

X433 - 434

X453 - 454

X473 - 474

X493 - 494

X4B3 - 4B4

X4D3 - 4D4

X4F3 - 4F4

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X513 - 514

X533 - 534

X553 - 554

X573 - 574

X593 - 594

X5B3 - 5B4

X5D3 - 5D4

X5F3 - 5F4

Multi-step speed monitor mode output Speed monitor mode to be used

MSOMO2n MSOMO1n

0 0 1

0 1 2

1 0 3

1 1 4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A AXIS SWITCHING INVALID

STATUS AXCHGISn

X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

116

[Function]

This signal informs that the mode is PLC axis control for NC axis/PLC axis switching function.

[Operation]

This signal turns OFF during the NC axis control and turns ON during the PLC axis control.

[Related signals]

(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)

(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN PLC AXIS CONTROL PLCMODn

X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

117

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

This signal indicates that JOG mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed to JOG mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (TSMZ) (command acceleration/

deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that HANDLE mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed to HANDLE mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (TSMZn) (command acceleration/

deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN JOG MODE JOn X600 X680 X700 X780 X800 X880 X900

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN HANDLE MODE HOn X601 X681 X701 X781 X801 X881 X901

JOG mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In jog mode (JO)

Handle mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In handle mode (H0)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

118

[Function]

This signal indicates that INCREMENTAL mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed to INCREMENTAL mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/

deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed to MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command

acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN INCREMENTAL MODE SOn X602 X682 X702 X782 X802 X882 X902

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

MODE PTPOn X603 X683 X703 X783 X803 X883 X903

Incremental mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In incremental mode (SO)

Manual arbitrary feed mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP0)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

119

[Function]

This signal indicates that REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed from other mode to REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode after "All axes smoothing zero"

(command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed over from other mode to IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE mode after "All axes smoothing zero"

(command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN REFERENCE POSITION RE-

TURN MODE ZRNOn X604 X684 X704 X784 X804 X884 X904

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET

MODE ASTOn X605 X685 X705 X785 X805 X885 X905

Reference positon return mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In reference position return mode (ZRN0)

Automatic initial set mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In automatic initial set mode (ASTO)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

120

[Function]

This signal indicates that MEMORY mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed from other mode to MEMORY mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/

deceleration delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that MDI mode is selected.

[Operation]

Mode is changed from other mode to MDI mode when "All axes smoothing zero" (command acceleration/deceleration

delay is zero) is verified.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN MEMORY MODE MEMOn X608 X688 X708 X788 X808 X888 X908

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN MDI MODE DOn X60B X68B X70B X78B X80B X88B X90B

Memory mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In memory mode (MEMO)

MDI mode Other mode Mode input

All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ)

Other mode

In MDI mode (DO)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

121

[Function]

This signal indicates that the controller is in automatic operation caused by "Auto operation "start" command" signal.

[Operation]

This signal stays ON from when automatic operation starts with the "Auto operation "start" command" (STn) signal in the

memory or MDI mode, until the operation is reset.

(1) Reset conditions include the followings:

- "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) is input.

- "Emergency stop" signal or "Servo alarm" signal is input.

(2) Signals that indicates status of automatic operation are "In automatic operation "start""(STLn) and "In automatic

operation pause" (SPLn) besides "In atuo operation "run""(OPn).

The ON/OFF state of these signals in each state are shown below.

The outline of each condition is as follows:

- Reset condition

Automatic operation is stopped by one of reset conditions described above.

(All states not in automatic operation are this state.)

- Auto operation stop condition

Automatic operation is stopped after completion of one block.

(This state is entered during single block stop.)

- Auto operation pause condition

Automatic operation suspended in the course of execution of one block.

(This state is entered when the "Auto operation "pause" command" (*SPn) signal is OFF.)

- Auto operation start condition

Automatic operation is being executed.

[Related signals]

(1) In automatic operation "start" (STLn)

(2) In automatic operation "pause" (SPLn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION

"RUN" OPn X612 X692 X712 X792 X812 X892 X912

In automatic operation"RUN"

(OPn)

In automatic operation"START"

(STLn)

In automatic operation"PAUSE

" (SPLn)

Reset condition 0 0 0

Auto operation stop condition

1 0 0

Auto operation pause condition

1 0 1

Auto operation start condition

1 1 0

Automatic operation start command (ST) In automatic operation run (OP)

Reset conditions

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

122

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC that the controller is started by automatic operation and motion command or M,S, T, B

processing is in execution.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON by the "Auto operation "start" command" (STn) signal in memory or MDI mode, and OFF when auto

operation pause, block stop or reset condition occurs.

The "In automatic operation "start"" (STLn) signal timing chart, including automatic operation "pause" and block stop, is

shown below.

(Note 1) For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn).

[Related signals]

(1) In automatic operation "run" (OPn)

(2) In automatic operation "pause" (SPLn)

(3) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION

"START" STLn X613 X693 X713 X793 X813 X893 X913

Automatic operation "start" command (ST)

STL is OFF after the block was completed.

In automatic operation "run" (OP)

In automatic operation "start" (STL) In automatic operation "pause" (SPL)

Automatic operation "pause" command (*SP)

Single block (SBK)

Reset conditions (Reset & rewind (RRW))

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

123

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller operation has been stopped due to the "Auto operation "pause" command" signal,

etc., during motion command or miscellaneous function command.

[Operation]

The "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) signal turns ON with the following factors during automatic operation using

the memory or MDI mode.

(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal turns OFF.

(2) When mode changes to manual operation mode (jog, handle, incremental, reference position return mode,

etc.).

This signal turns ON even during machine lock or a miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command.

This signal turns OFF in the following cases.

(1) When "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal turns OFF from ON. However, this will be invalid if

the "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is not turned back ON or if the mode is

not automatic operation (memory, MDI).

(2) When reset conditions are input.

The timing chart for the "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) signal is shown below.

(Note 1) Refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) for the rest conditions.

[Related signals]

(1) In automatic operation (OPn)

(2) In automatic operation "start" (STLn)

(3) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

(4) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller is in reset condition.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON:

(1) For about 4 to 5 seconds after the power is turned ON.

(2) While "Reset and rewind" (RRWn) signal is ON, and for about 0.5 to 1 seconds after "Reset and rewind"

(RRWn) signal turns OFF.

(3) While "Emergency stop" signal is being input, and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Emergency stop" signal turns

OFF.

(4) During "Servo alarm", and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Servo alarm" is removed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION

"PAUSE" SPLn X614 X694 X714 X794 X814 X894 X914

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN "RESET" RSTn X615 X695 X715 X795 X815 X895 X915

Automatic operation "start" command (ST)

G00X100 G00X100

In automatic operation "start" (STL)

In automatic operation "pause" (SPL) Automatic operation "pause" command (*SP)

Axis motion

Reset condition (Reset & rewind (RRW))

Invalid

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

124

[Function]

This signal is output during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON:

(1) "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8n) turns ON during MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode.

The signal turns OFF:

(1) Commanded feed has been completed.

(2) When "Reset & Rewind" signal is input during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.

[Timing chart]

[Related signals]

(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8n)

(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXFINn)

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller is indexing the memory mode.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) signal is turned ON by the PLC in memory mode (with M02 or M30

command), and turns OFF when the controller completes indexing the program in execution.

(Note 1) Since indexing of program in memory mode ends immediately, it may not be verified by user PLC.

[Related signals]

(1) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED CXNn X616 X696 X716 X796 X816 X896 X916

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN REWIND RWDn X617 X697 X717 X797 X817 X897 X917

Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8)

In manual arbitrary feed (CXN)

Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFIN)

Rise of strobe signal is detected and "In manual arbitrary feed" signal (CXN) turns ON.

When the specified feed is completed successfully, the "In manual arbitrary feed" signal turns OFF and the "Manual arbitrary feed completion" signal turns ON.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

125

[Function]

This signal notifies that the commanded motion has been completed by the controller.

In the machining program when the motion command and miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command are specified in

the same block, this signal can be used as a synchronization signal to determine whether miscellaneous function

command is executed simultaneously with or after the motion command.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The system is initialized after the power is turned ON.

(2) Execution of motion command is completed in automatic operation.

(3) Reset condition occurs.

(For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.)

The timing chart for the "Motion command completion" (DENn) signal is shown below.

(Note 1) The "Motion command completion" signal is output even during machine lock.

(Note 2) Unless commanded motion is completed, this signal does not turn ON even when motion is suspended by

interlock function or "Auto operation "pause" command" signal.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MOTION COMMAND COMPLE-

TION DENn X618 X698 X718 X798 X818 X898 X918

G00X100.; Command program G00X200.M08;

Axis motion state

Motion command completion (DEN)

M function strobe (MF)

M code data

M code decode (user process)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Detection not possible

Machine side control

DEN process

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

126

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC that the all axis components of the controller are in commanded positions.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) when there is no acceleration/deceleration delay in all control axes and servo errors (remaining pulses) in

positioning are within the specified range.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Acceleration/deceleration motion is delayed in a control axis.

(2) Servo positioning error (remaining pulses) for a control axis exceeds the specified range.

(Note 1) The signal may turn ON even during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.

(Note 2) The condition where the servo errors must be in a specific range to turn ON the signal can be invalidated with

parameters. In this case, the signal will turn ON/OFF depending on whether there is any delay in the

acceleration/deceleration.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZn)

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC that there is no delay (caused by the acceleration/deceleration time constants) in any of the

controller control axis command system.

The PLC axis is not included in the control axis.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when the movement amount commanded in automatic or manual operation, including delay amount

of acceleration/deceleration time constant, is successfully output.

The signal turns OFF during execution of movement command, or if delay exists in acceleration/deceleration time

constant.

(Note 1) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock.

(Note 2) The signal may turn ON during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.

[Related signals]

(1) All axes in-position (TIMPn)

(2) In axis plus motion (MVPn) ... "All axes smoothing zero" signal turns ON when these signals are OFF.

(3) In axis minus motion (MVMn) ... "All axes smoothing zero" signal turns ON when these signals are OFF.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A ALL AXES IN-POSITION TIMPn X619 X699 X719 X799 X819 X899 X919

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A ALL AXES SMOOTHING ZERO TSMZn X61A X69A X71A X79A X81A X89A X91A

Accel./Decel. Time constant

Positioning loop Time constant

Smoothing circuit Servo amplifer

Accel./Decel. delay Motor servo control error

Motor

Feed axis selection (+J1)

Axis motion (Position loop delay is not included.)

All axes smoothing zero

Acceleration/deceleration time constant

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

127

[Function]

This signal is output when motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) During motion in manual arbitrary feed mode.

(The signal stays OFF when motion is interrupted by a reset & rewind signal.)

(2) The power is turned ON.

[Timing chart]

[Related signals]

(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8n)

(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXNn)

[Function] [Operation]

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.

This signal turns OFF when the "external search strobe" signal is turned OFF from the user PLC.

[Related signals]

(1) External search status

(2) External search device No.

(3) External search program No.

(4) External search sequence No.

(5) External search block No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

COMPLETION CXFINn X61C X69C X71C X79C X81C X89C X91C

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED ETSEn X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D

Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8)

In manual arbitrary feed (CXN)

Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFIN)

Start of strobe signal is detected and "In manual arbitrary feed" signal is output. "Manual arbitrary feed completion" signal turns OFF.

When manual arbitrary feed is completed successfully, "Manual arbitrary feed completion" signal turns ON.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

128

[Function]

This signal is output during rapid traverse motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI).

[Operation]

(1) The signal is ON when:

- Rapid traverse motion in automatic operation.

Fixed cycle positioning and reference position return (G28), etc., are included in the automatic operation rapid

traverse besides the motion command by the G00 command.

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- The block in rapid traverse motion is completed during automatic operation.

- Rapid traverse motion is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal during

automatic operation.

- Rapid traverse motion axis is stopped by interlock during automatic operation.

- The ratio of the "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FVmn) becomes 0% during automatic rapid traverse

operation.

- A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic rapid traverse operation.

- Reset condition occurs.

(Note 1) "In rapid traverse" (RPNn) signal can turn ON and OFF even during machine lock.

(Note 2) The signal is not output in manual operation.

(Note 3) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.

The timing chart for "In rapid traverse" (RPNn) signal is shown below.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN RAPID TRAVERSE RPNn X620 X6A0 X720 X7A0 X820 X8A0 X920

Command program

Axis motion state

In rapid traverse (RPN)

G00X100.; M08 ;

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

129

[Function]

This signal informs that given motion command is executed for cutting feed in automatic operation (memory, MDI).

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Motion command is given for cutting feed in automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The block in cutting feed in automatic operation is completed.

(2) Execution of cutting feed is suspended by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal.

(3) Execution of cutting feed is stopped by interlock during auto operation.

(4) The ratio of the cutting feedrate override becomes 0% during automatic cutting feed operation.

(5) A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic cutting feed operation.

(6) Reset condition occurs.

(Note 1) The signal (CUTn) can be turned ON and OFF during cutting feed even if machine interlock is applied.

(Note 2) Cutting feed commands in automatic operation include G01, G02, G03 and G31.

(Note 3) The signal is not output in manual operation.

(Note 4) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.

[Function]

This signal informs that commanded motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI) is executed in canned tapping cycle,

or tapping mode is selected for execution of commanded motion.

[Operation]

(1) The signal turns ON when:

- Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in canned tapping cycle.

- Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in tapping mode (G63).

(2) The signal turns OFF when:

- Commanded motion is not being executed in fixed tapping cycle, nor in tapping mode.

The signal is reset by G80 or "01" group G command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G33) during canned tapping

cycle, and by G61, G62 and G64 during tapping mode.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN CUTTING FEED CUTn X621 X6A1 X721 X7A1 X821 X8A1 X921

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN TAPPING TAPn X622 X6A2 X722 X7A2 X822 X8A2 X922

In cutting feed (CUT)

Axis motion

Cutting feed (G01)

Motion command

In tapping (TAP)

(Note 1) This signal is output even during machine lock.

G00 G84; G80; G63; G01; G61;

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

130

[Function]

This signal is output during execution of thread cutting command.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Thread cutting command is given.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Motion command other than thread cutting command is given.

(2) Reset condition occurs during thread cutting.

(Note) Spindle override is invalid (100%) during thread cutting.

[Function]

This signal is output during execution of synchronous feed command.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- Synchronous feed command (G94) is given.

The signal turns OFF when:

- Asynchronous feed command (G95) is given.

[Function]

This signal informs that automatic operation is under constant circumferential (surface) speed control.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Constant surface speed control mode (G96) is selected during automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Constant surface speed control off command (G97) is given.

(Note 1) This signal (CSSn) is output even during machine lock.

[Function]

This signal is output while skip command (G31) is being executed.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Skip command (G31) is being executed with automatic operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Block having a skip command is completed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN THREAD CUTTING THRDn X623 X6A3 X723 X7A3 X823 X8A3 X923

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED SYNn X624 X6A4 X724 X7A4 X824 X8A4 X924

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN CONSTANT SURFACE

SPEED CSSn X625 X6A5 X725 X7A5 X825 X8A5 X925

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN SKIP SKIPn X626 X6A6 X726 X7A6 X826 X8A6 X926

G0Z-10.; G00 Motion command

In constant surface speed (CSS)

G96 G1 X30. S30; G0 X- ; G97 G01

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

131

[Function]

This signal is output while reference position return command is being executed.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) G28 command is executed.

(2) G30 command is executed.

(3) Manual reference position return mode is selected.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) All cases other than above.

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller uses inch unit for data input.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when inch unit is selected.

During G20 (Inch unit command) modal, "In inch unit selection" signal turns ON.

This signal will not change with machine parameter "#1041 l_inch".

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller uses F1-digit commands (F1 to 5) to control operation.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) F1-digit command (F1 to 5) is selected for feedrate command currently being executed.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) Block having a motion command specified with F1-digit code is completed.

(2) Operation is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal during execution of

motion command by F1-digit command.

(3) Operation is stopped by "Interlock" signal during execution of motion command by F1-digit command.

(4) Reset condition occurs.

(For details of reset conditions, refer to the description about "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal.)

(Note 1) The machine parameter, base specification parameter "#1079 F1digt" must be validated and "#1185 to 89 F1-

digit feedrate" must be set to use the F1-digit command.

[Related signals]

(1) F1-digit No. code m (F1mn)

[Function]

This signal is output during the tool life management.

[Operation]

"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is

ON.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN REFERENCE POSITION RE-

TURN ZRNNn X627 X6A7 X727 X7A7 X827 X8A7 X927

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN INCH UNIT SELECTION INCHn X628 X6A8 X728 X7A8 X828 X8A8 X928

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A F 1-DIGIT COMMANDED F1DNn X62A X6AA X72A X7AA X82A X8AA X92A

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

132

[Function]

This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data Life data).

This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data life data). (Same timing as the count up

of usage data.)

(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.

(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe

1 (TF1n)" signal.)

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the

signal will remain ON.)

(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)

[Caution]

If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.

(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller is in program error condition.

[Operation]

This type of alarm occurs during automatic operation in memory or MDI mode, mainly due to use of faulty machining

program, or program incompatible with the controller specifications.

Some typical examples of program error are shown below. For details, refer to the relevant Instruction Manual or Setup

Manual.

(1) Illegal address (address not covered by the specifications is used)

(2) Absence of F command

(3) Arc end point excessive deviation

(4) Return incomplete axis found (a motion command was issued to an axis that has not completed reference

position return)

(5) Program end error (M02 or M30 command is not inserted or reset & rewind process has not been performed)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NC ALARM 3 (Program error) AL3n X632 X6B2 X732 X7B2 X832 X8B2 X932

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

133

[Function]

This signal informs that the controller is in operation error condition.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON in case of operation alarm, and OFF when the alarm condition is removed.

Some typical examples of operation errors are shown below:

For details, refer to the Instruction Manual or Setup Manual.

(1) Hardware axis motion stroke end

(2) Software axis motion stroke end

(3) No operation mode set

(4) Cutting feedrate override set to "zero"

(5) Manual feedrate zero

(6) External interlock axis found

(7) Warning regarding absolute position detection

[Function]

This signal is output when the program No. to be searched with search & start is illegally designated, or search & start is

executed during restart search.

[Operation]

This signal is output when the No. of the program to be searched with search & start is illegal, or search & start is

executed during restart search. Automatic operation start will not be carried out if this signal is output. This signal will turn

OFF if the program No. is correctly input to execute search & start again, or when the reset signal is issued.

Refer to the "Search & start" (RSSTn) signal for details.

[Related signals]

(1) Search & start (RSSTn)

[Function]

This signal is output when searching for a program is started with search & start.

[Operation]

Informs the PLC that the CNC is searching for the program with search & start.

Hold the "search & start" signal until the "search & start (search)" signal turns ON.

If the No. of the program to be searched is illegal or search & start is executed during restart search, the "search & start

(error)" (SSEn) signal will be output.

[Related signals]

(1) Search & start program No.

(2) Search & start (error) (SSEn)

(3) Search & start (RSSTn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NC ALARM 4 (Operation error) AL4n X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SEARCH & START ERROR SSEn X635 X6B5 X735 X7B5 X835 X8B5 X935

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SEARCH & START SEARCH SSGn X636 X6B6 X736 X7B6 X836 X8B6 X936

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

134

[Function]

This signal is output if axis (No.) selected in handle mode or manual arbitrary feed mode is illegal.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) For handle mode

If specified "1st to 3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn to HS3mn) is beyond the maximum number of

control axes.

(2) For manual arbitrary feed mode

If specified manual arbitrary feed axis No. is beyond the maximum number of control axes.

[Function]

F1-digit feed function No. is output.

[Operation]

When F1-digit feed command specified in memory or MDI operation is executed, No. of that F1-digit feed function is set

with a code.

[Function]

This signal informs that the waiting between part systems is being executed.

[Operation]

1 : This signal is output while the waiting between part systems is commanded in one part system to when the

corresponding waiting between system command is commanded in the other part system (during the waiting

function between part systems).

0 : When the waiting between part systems is not executed, this signal is not output.

[Function] [Operation]

This signal indicates that the hypothetical axis command mode has been selected.

[Related signals]

(1) Hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the tapping in execution is high-sped synchronous tapping.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED ASLEn X637 X6B7 X737 X7B7 X837 X8B7 X937

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A F 1-DIGIT NO. CODE m F1mn X638 -

63A X6B8 -

6BA X738 -

73A X7B8 -

7BA X838 -

83A X8B8 -

8BA X938 -

93A

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A WAITING BETWEEN PART

SYSTEMS X63C X6BC X73C X7BC X83C X8BC X93C

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COM-

MAND MODE VAMODOn X63E X6BE X73E X7BE X83E X8BE X93E

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN HIGH-SPEED TAPPING HSST X63F X6BF X73F X7BF X83F X8BF X93F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

135

[Function]

This signal informs that a special miscellaneous function (M00) is selected and commanded. When a special M function

is specified, "Normal miscellaneous function strobe" signal and "M code data" are output.

M code independent outputs include M01, M02 and M30.

[Operation]

When M00, M01, M02 or M30 is specified during auto operation (memory or MDI), or by manually set numerical

command, this signal turns ON. The signal turns OFF when M function finish signal, reset signal or reset & rewind signal

is given.

If motion command and/or dwell is present in the same block, the signal turns ON after completion of dwell.

However, the signal is not output if M function finish signal turns ON before completion of motion command or dwell.

Generally, each M code is used for the following purpose:

M00 : Program stop

M01 : Optional stop

M02,M30 : Program end

(1)For M00

When M00 is input, single block (SBKn) signal is turned ON and M function finish signal (FIN1n or FIN2n) is

sent back.

(2) For M01

When M01 is input, optional stop switch setting (ON or OFF) is checked. If the setting is "ON", single block

signal is turned ON and M function finish signal is sent back, like the case with M00. If the setting is "OFF", M

function finish signal is sent back immediately.

(3) For M02, M30

When motion where M02 or M30 was input (spindle stop, coolant stop, etc.) is completed, reset & rewind

(RRWn) signal is sent back instead of M function finish signal. If M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n) signal is sent

back, "program error" may occur.

[Related signals]

(1) M code independent output M01 (DM01n)

(2) M code independent output M02 (DM02n)

(3) M code independent output M30 (DM30n)

[Function][Operation]

Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-

PUT M00 DM00n X640 X6C0 X740 X7C0 X840 X8C0 X940

Machining program M code

independent output

Signal abbreviation

Answer back to controller

M00 M00 DM00 FIN1n or FIN2n

M01 M01 DM01 FIN1n or FIN2n

M02 M02 DM02 Reset & rewind signal ("FIN" is not sent back)

M30 M30 DM30 Reset & rewind signal ("FIN" is not sent back)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-

PUT M01 DM01n X641 X6C1 X741 X7C1 X841 X8C1 X941

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

136

[Function][Operation]

Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

[Function][Operation]

Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".

[Function]

This signal informs that the miscellaneous functions (M code) is commanded with the automatic operation (memory,

MDI) machining program or manual numerical command input.

The miscellaneous function is also called the M function, and is used to issue miscellaneous functions such as ON/OFF

of the cutting oil, and normal/reverse/stop of the spindle, etc., for the target machine.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when:

(1) The 1st set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI mode).

(2) M function (M code) is specified by manual numerical command input.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.

(2) Reset condition occurs.

(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

The relation of the machining program and M function strobe is shown below.

(Note 1) During operation with miscellaneous function lock (AFLn signal ON), the "M function strobe" (MFmn) will not

be output. However, this signal will be output when the M code is commanded independently (M00, M01, M02,

M30).

(Note 2) Since M98 (read of subprogram call), M99 (return from subprogram), etc. are handled within the controller, "M

function strobe" is not output.

(Note 3) The "M function strobe" will not be output when the M function is output if the "M function finish 1" (FIN1n)

signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal is ON.

(Note 4) Outputs from manual numerical command always correspond to the "M function strobe 1" (MF1n).

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-

PUT M02 DM02n X642 X6C2 X742 X7C2 X842 X8C2 X942

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M CODE INDEPENDENT OUT-

PUT M30 DM30n X643 X6C3 X743 X7C3 X843 X8C3 X943

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M FUNCTION STROBE m MFmn X644 -

647 X6C4 -

6C7 X744 -

747 X7C4 -

7C7 X844 -

847 X8C4 -

8C7 X944 -

947

Machining program ..... M03 M08 M10 M18 (1st set) (2nd set) (3rd set) (4th set)

Corresponds to M function strobe 1 (MF1), 1st set of M code Corresponds to M function strobe 2 (MF2), 2nd set of M code Corresponds to M function strobe 3 (MF3), 3rd set of M code Corresponds to M function strobe 4 (MF4), 4th set of M code

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

137

An example of the timing chart for the "M function strobe" (MF1n, MF2n, MF3n) signal is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) M code data 1 to 4

(2) M function strobe 2 (MF2n)

(3) M function strobe 3 (MF3n)

(4) M function strobe 4 (MF4n)

(5) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(6) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

Point The following points must be observed in the sequence process.

(a) When the M function is commanded, the MFmn and M code data m is output. (b) MFmn is always the trigger in the sequence process to start the M function process. (c) When the designated M function process is completed, the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) is returned to the controller. (d) The controller waits for the rising of the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) and then turns MFmn OFF. (e) MFmn OFF is confirmed in the sequence process and then the "M function finish" signal (FIN1n, FIN2n) is turned OFF. This completes the series of M function processes.

Command program

M code data 1

M code data 2

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M function strobe 2 (MF2)

M code data 3

M function strobe 3 (MF3)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

M22; M03M08; M10M25M05;

22 3 10

8 25

5

G00 ;

Handshaking with the controller and an accurate sequence process possible if the Mfn conditions are inserted at the M function start and completed signals.

M decode circuit MFn

M1

Designated M function process

M function finish confirmation

MFn M2 FIN1

M2

M1 Relay meaning a designated M function

Relay meaning completion of a Designated M function

M function finish 1

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

138

[Function]

This signal informs that M, S, T or B (2nd miscellaneous function) command is given with a specific display format

selected on the setting and display unit. With the signal, user PLC discriminates the command from that given in normal

automatic operation.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when M, S, T or B signal is specified with a specific display format in manual or automatic operation

(other than auto start). Like M function strobe signal, the signal turns OFF when M function finish 1 (FIN1n) or 2 (FIN2n)

signal turns ON, or in case of reset.

(Example)

[Related signals]

(1) M function strobe (MFmn)

(2) S function strobe m (SFmn)

(3) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)

(4) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)

(5) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(6) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL NUMERICAL COM-

MAND MMSn X649 X6C9 X749 X7C9 X849 X8C9 X949

M03 manual numerical command

Manual numerical command (MMS)

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

139

[Function]

This signal notifies that the axis commanded with the tool change position return command has completed return to the

tool change position.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when all axes commanded with the tool change position return command (G30.3) have moved to

the tool change position. This signal turns OFF when even one of the axes moved to the tool change position with the

command has moved from the tool change position.

Refer to the Programming Manual for details on the tool change return command.

[Timing chart]

[Function]

This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in the group is selected in the tool life management II.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The tool selected by T command tool selection is unused (status 0).

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When T command is completed due to the M function finish signal (FIN1,FIN2).

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL CHANGE POSITION RE-

TURN COMPLETION TCPn X64B X6CB X74B X7CB X84B X8CB X94B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NEW TOOL CHANGE TCRQn X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C

Example: When G30.1 command, additional axis tool change position return is valid

Machining program

Z axis tool change position reached

X, Y axis tool change position reached

Additional axis tool change position reached

Tool change position return completed (TCP)

G30.1; G00 X-100. T02;

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

140

[Function]

This signal informs that the tool function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode) machining

program or by manual numerical command input.

The tool function is also called the T function, and is used to command the tool No. In the lathe specification controller,

the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose wear compensation) Nos. are also indicated.

The user PLC receives the T code data m with this signal.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The T function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode).

(2) T function (T) is specified by manual numerical command input.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.

(2) Reset condition occurs.

(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

(Note 1) One T command can be issued in one block.

(Note 2) The "T function strobe 1" (TF1n) is not output during operation with the M function lock (AFLn signal ON).

(Note 3) In the case of manual numerical command input, outputs are in accordance with "T function strobe 1" (TF1n).

An example of the timing chart for the "T function strobe 1" (TF1n) signal is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) T code data 1

(2) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(3) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A T FUNCTION STROBE 1 TF1n X650 X6D0 X750 X7D0 X850 X8D0 X950

Command program

T code data

T function strobe 1 (TF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

T01; G00X100.;

1

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

141

[Function]

This signal informs that 2nd M function is selected in automatic operation (memory, MDI) machining program or by

manual numerical command input.

The 2nd M function is also called the B function.

With the signal (BF1n), user PLC receives 2nd M function data m.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The 2nd M function (B code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI).

(2) 2nd M function (B code) is issued by manual numerical command input.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal is turned ON.

(2) Reset condition occurs.

(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

(Note 1) One 2nd M function can be issued in one block at a time.

(Note 2) The "2nd M function strobe 1" (BF1n) is not output during operation with M function lock (AFLn signal ON).

(Note 3) In the case of manual numerical command input, outputs are in accordance with "2nd M function strobe 1"

(BF1n).

(Note 4) Address for 2nd M function can be selected from addresses A, B and C by using machine parameter. Set so

that the address is different from the axis address.

[Related signals]

(1) 2nd M function data 1

(2) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(3) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 2ND M FUNCTION STROBE 1 BF1n X654 X6D4 X754 X7D4 X854 X8D4 X954

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

142

[Function]

This signal informs that S (spindle) function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode) machining

program or by manual numerical command input.

The spindle function is also called the S function, and is used to command the spindle speed.

With the signal (SF1 to 4), user PLC receives S code data m respectively.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) S function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI mode).

(2) S function is specified by manual numerical command input.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal or "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.

(2) Reset condition occurs.

(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" (OPn) signal section for details on the reset conditions.)

(Note 1) The S function strobe (SNGEn) is not output during operation with M function lock (AFLn signal ON).

(Note 2) When the S function is commanded, the "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn) signal and "S command no

gear selected" (SNGEn) signal are output in addition to this signal (SFmn). Refer to the sections of each signal

for details.

An example of the timing chart for the "S function strobe" (SF1n) signal is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) S code data 1 to 4

(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)

(3) S command no gear selected (SNGEn)

(4) Spindle gear selection code m (GImn)

(5) Spindle gear shift completion (GFINn)

(6) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(7) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A S FUNCTION STROBE m SFmn X658 -

65E X6D8 -

6DE X758 -

75E X7D8X7

DE X858 -

85E X8D8 -

8DE X958 -

95E

Command program

S code data

S function strobe 1 (SF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

S1000; G00X100.;

1000

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

143

[Function]

This signal notifies that the machine position is within the area set by the parameters.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the control axis machine position reaches the range set by the parameters, and turns OFF

when the range is left. The axis name and range are set in parameters #7501 to #7573.

The validity of this signal differs in the following manner depending on the absolute position detection or incremental

detection.

This signal is valid when the power is turned ON after zero point initialization is completed.

This signal is not validated until the first reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON.

(PSW1n to PSW16n will all remain OFF until this signal is validated.)

Example of signal output

The setting range of the position switch uses the basic machine coordinate system as a reference.

The dog1 and dog2 setting values can be set to any size, and the area between the smaller setting and the larger setting

will be used as the signal output range.

A slight delay will occur in the output signal fluctuation due to the actual machine position. This maximum delay time

(tmax), which depends on the area check method parameters #7504 to #7634, is as follows. Also consider the delay by

the scan time as it depends on scan time for the ladder.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A POSITION SWITCH m PSWmn

X660 - 667

X670 - 677

X6E0 - 6E7

X6F0 - 6F7

X760 - 767

X770 - 777

X7E0 - 7E7

X7F0 - 7F7

X860 - 867

X870 - 877

X8E0 - 8E7

X8F0 - 8F7

X960 - 967

X970 - 977

PSW1: ON

PSW2: OFF

PSW3: OFF

PSW4: OFF

PSW5: OFF

Machine position

dog1 dog2

dog1 dog2

dog2dog1

dog1dog2

dog1dog2

tmax = 0.004 - TP [s]

TP :

PGN :

tmax = 0.004 [s]

When parameter is set to "0" (commanded machine position)

When parameter is set to 1 (detector FB position)

1 PGN

Position loop time constant [s]

Position loop gain

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

144

[Function]

This signal informs that no reading data is in the buffer memory so it is idle and waiting for receiving data during FPT

operation.

If the download is completed, it does not enter into idle mode and an program error (P36) will occur.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

- It is idle and waiting for data to be received as the buffer memory for FTP operation is empty during the download

from FTP server.

The signal turns OFF when:

- The waiting for data to be received state, as described above, is released.

- When download is completed. (If the download is completed while in the waiting for data to be received state, an

program error (P36) will occur.)

[Related signals]

(1) Download completed (DLDFIN)

(2) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

[Function]

This signal informs that tap retract is possible, and is output if operation is stopped during tap cycle execution.

The "Tap retract" (TRVn) signal will be valid when this signal (TRVEn) is ON.

[Operation]

(1) This signal turns ON when tap cycle is stopped in the cutting feed area (between c-d-e in the drawing) due to the

following causes:

- Emergency stop.

- Reset stop.

- Power OFF (only in absolute position detection system).

(2) This signal turns OFF in the following cases:

- Tap retract is executed and completed.

- Tap axis is moved manually or with manual mode.

[Related signals]

(1) Tap retract (TRVn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A WAITING FOR DATA TO BE

DOWNLOADED DLWAITn X66C X6EC X76C X7EC X86C X8EC X96C

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE TRVEn X66D X6ED X76D X7ED X86D X8ED X96D

Tap cycle command

f Initial point

e R point

a b

c

(Spindle reverse run)

Tap feed (spindle forward run)

d Tap base

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

145

[Function]

This signal is output when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum No. of work machining.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work value (WRK LIMIT) set in

the [Process parameter] screen.

(Note 1) This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work value

regardless of the count up by the controller or user PLC.

(Note 2) This signal is not output when "0" is set for the maximum work value.

[Related signals]

(1) No. of work machining (current value)

(2) No. of work machining (max. value)

[Function]

This signal notifies that the amount moved while the power is OFF has exceeded to the tolerable amount when using the

absolute position detection system.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the difference of the machine position at power OFF and at power ON exceeds the tolerable

value ([ABS. POSI PARAM] "#2051 check" setting value) when using the absolute position detection system.

(Note) The movement amount during power OFF depends on the "PON POS (power ON position)" and "POF POS

(power OFF position)" on the [ABS SERVO MONITOR (absolute position monitor)] screen.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NO. OF WORK MACHINING

OVER PCNTn X66E X6EE X76E X7EE X86E X8EE X96E

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A POWER SHUTOFF MOVEMENT

OVER X66F X6EF X76F X7EF X86F X8EF X96F

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

146

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

This signal is output if specified gear No. is illegal.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON if gear No. specified by user is beyond the maximum system gear No.

[Function]

This signal is output when S-analog command value is clamped to the maximum or minimum value.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON if S-analog command value is larger than spindle maximum speed parameter (Smaxn) value, or

smaller than spindle minimum speed parameter (Smin) value.

[Function]

This signal is output if gear is not present for S function (S code) issued by automatic operation.

[Operation]

This signal will turn ON when the S function (S code) is issued during automatic operation, and the S code does not

match any gear set in the spindle maximum speed parameters.

This signal (SNGEn) is output simultaneously with "spindle function strobe m" (SFmn) signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle function strobe m (SFmn)

(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)

[Function]

This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor has exceeded the maximum speed.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback exceeds the maximum speed regardless of the commanded

speed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A S COMMAND GEAR NO. ILLE-

GAL SIGEn X984 X9B4 X9E4 XA14 XA44 XA74 XAA4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A S COMMAND MAX./MIN. COM-

MAND VALUE OVER SOVEn X985 X9B5 X9E5 XA15 XA45 XA75 XAA5

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A S COMMAND NO GEAR SE-

LECTED SNGEn X986 X9B6 X9E6 XA16 XA46 XA76 XAA6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE SPEED UPPER LIMIT

OVER SUPPn X98B X9BB X9EB XA1B XA4B XA7B XAAB

Spindle speed (Feedback)

Spindle speed upper limit over (SUPP)

Maximum speed (parameter setting value)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

147

[Function]

This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor is less than the minimum speed.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback is less than the minimum speed regardless of the commanded

speed.

[Function]

This signal informs which gear stage in the spindle applies to the S command (S code) issued in the automatic operation

(memory, MDI) machining program.

For machines that have gear stage shift, the gear will be shifted on the machine side when this signal is received.

[Operation]

When the S command (S code) is issued in automatic operation, the gear stage for the commanded S code is output

with a 2-bit (GR1n, GR2n) code from the preset parameters (spindle max. speed).

The relation of the spindle max. speed parameter (Smax1 to Smax4) and the "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn)

signal output is shown below.

This signal (GR1n, GR2n) is output simultaneously with the "Spindle function strobe m" (SFmn).

(Note 1) If the commanded S code does not match any of the gear stages, the "S command no gear selected" (SNGEn)

signal will be output separately from this signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle function strobe m (SFmn)

(2) S command no gear selected (SNGEn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE SPEED LOWER LIMIT

OVER SLOWn X98C X9BC X9EC XA1C XA4C XA7C XAAC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT COM-

MAND m GRmn

X98D - 98E

X9BD - 9BE

X9ED - 9EE

XA1D - A1E

XA4D - A4E

XA7D - A7E

XAAD - AAE

Gearstage Max. spindlespeed Spindlegear shift

GR2n GR1n

1 Smax1 0 0 Range "S0 to S (Smax1)"

2 Smax2 0 1 Range "S (Smax1)+1 to S (Smax2)"

3 Smax3 1 0 Range "S (Smax2)+1 to S (Smax3)"

4 Smax4 1 1 When range over "S (Smax3)+1" is specified.

Minimum speed (parameter setting value)

Spindle speed (Feedback)

Spindle speed lower limit over (SLOW)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

148

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

drive motor current is about to reach the permissible maximum current. The signal can be used to prevent stabbing of

cutter into workpiece, for example.

[Operation]

The signal (CDOn) turns ON if motor current goes up to a level (110% output) close to the permissible maximum current

(120%).

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

motor speed is dropped below the speed specified by parameter.

[Operation]

The signal (VRO) turns ON when motor speed (motor rotation speed) drops below the speed specified by the spindle

parameter "#13028 Speed detection set value (SP028:SDTS)". (Related parameter "#13029 Speed detection reset width

(SP029:SDTR)")

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

failure occurs in spindle controller.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON if alarm which occurs in the spindle controller is detected.

To cancel alarm, reset the controller (by reset & rewind), turn the controller power OFF or turn the spindle controller

power supply OFF. Note that reset method depends on type of alarm.

Typical examples of alarm are listed below. For details of alarm contents and cancel procedure, refer to the Spindle

Controller specifications and maintenance manual.

(1) Overcurrent

(2) Breaker trip

(3) Motor overheat

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A CURRENT DETECTION CDOn X991 X9C1 X9F1 XA21 XA51 XA81 XAB1

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPEED DETECTION VROn X992 X9C2 X9F2 XA22 XA52 XA82 XAB2

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A IN SPINDLE ALARM FLOn X993 X9C3 X9F3 XA23 XA53 XA83 XAB3

Spindle motor speed

Speed detection (VR0)

Speed command level (SP020)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

149

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

motor speed has dropped below the set speed level.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the actual spindle motor speed drops below the speed specified by the spindle parameter

"#13027 Motor zero speed (SP027:ZSP)".

(Note 1) The signal is output, no matter whether direction of rotation is "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) or "Spindle

reverse run start" (SRIn).

(Note 2) Minimum output pulse width of the signal is about 200ms.

(Note 3) Speed at which the signal is output can be set within range from 1r/min to 1000r/min with the spindle

parameters.

(Note 4) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A ZERO SPEED ZSOn X994 X9C4 X9F4 XA24 XA54 XA84 XAB4

Zero speed (ZS0)

Spindle motor speed

Motor Zero speed

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

150

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

actual spindle motor speed reaches the range designated with the parameter "#3105 sut".

This signal is used for the S command complete conditions or control axis interlock during automatic operation.

[Operation]

When the operation is changed from spindle forward run to spindle reverse run, the spindle motor starts to decelerate,

and the spindle up-to-speed signal turns OFF. When the motor enters the detection range again, the spindle up-to-speed

signal turns ON again.

(Note 1) This signal is not output unless the "spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal or "spindle reverse run start"

(SRIn) signal is ON.

(Note 2) This signal is not output when operating with a command that is not a speed command such as synchronous

tap.

(Note 3) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serially connected with the spindle controller.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED USOn X995 X9C5 X9F5 XA25 XA55 XA85 XAB5

Spindle motor speed

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Up-to-speed range

Spindle forward run start (SRN)

Spindle reverse run start (SRI)

Spindle motor speed

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Up-to-speed range

Up-to-speed range

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

151

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle is positioned in the set range in accordance with spindle orientation command.

[Operation]

When the spindle positioning in the set range completes, this signal will turn ON. The spindle orientation is started by

"Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC).

(1) The in-position range is set with the spindle parameter "#13024 SP024 (INP) ".

(2) The signal is turned OFF when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) is turned OFF.

(Note 1) When spindle orientation command is given, orientation starts regardless of the "Spindle forward run start

(SRNn)" or "Spindle reverse run start (SRIn)".

(Note 2) This signal is not available when an analog connection is used.

(Note 3) While the spindle is in position, it is under servo lock condition. However, if the spindle is rotated by external

force, the signal (ORAO) may be turned OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the low-speed coil is being selected in the spindle coil changeover function.

[Operation]

The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSLn) in the 2-step coil

changeover specification.

(1) 2-step coil changeover

[Related signals]

(1) L coil selection (LRSLn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE IN-POSITION ORAOn X996 X9C6 X9F6 XA26 XA56 XA86 XAB6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A IN L COIL SELECTION LCSAn X997 X9C7 X9F7 XA27 XA57 XA87 XAB7

Selected coil L coil selection

(LRSLn) In L coil selection

(LCSAn)

High-speed (H) OFF OFF

Low-speed (L) ON ON

Spindle orientation command (ORC)

Spindle motor speed

Spindle in-position (ORAO)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

152

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle can operate.

[Operation]

This signal (SMAn) turns ON when the spindle controller is ready for operation. The signal turns OFF (ready off) in the

following conditions.

(1) A spindle alarm is generated.

(2) "Ready-on" signal (internal signal) from controller is OFF.

(Note 1) The ready on signal is output from the controller to the spindle controller.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle is under the position control state (synchronous tap control, C-axis control).

[Operation]

The "Spindle servo-on" (SSAn) signal turns ON when the spindle is ready (SMAn signal is ON), the servo-on command

has been transferred from the controller to the spindle controller, and the spindle controller is in the servo-on state.

Note that this signal turns OFF during rotation with "spindle forward run start"(SRNn)/"spindle reverse run start"(SRIn)

(except during spindle synchronization) or spindle orientation.

This signal (SSAn) turns OFF when the servo-on command is canceled.

(Note 1) The spindle servo-on command is output from the controller to the spindle controller, and is mainly output

during synchronous tap control.

(Note 2) While the "Spindle servo-on" signal is ON, all input signals for "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn), "Spindle

reverse run start" (SRIn), and "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) are ignored.

(Note 3) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE READY-ON SMAn X998 X9C8 X9F8 XA28 XA58 XA88 XAB8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE SERVO-ON SSAn X999 X9C9 X9F9 XA29 XA59 XA89 XAB9

Controller ready-on (Note1)

Spindle ready-on (SMA)

Spindle alarm

Machine ready-on (External interface signal) Max. 1 s Max. 1 s Max. 1 s

Spindle servo-on (SSA)

Spindle servo-on command Note 1)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

153

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle is rotating in the forward direction.

[Operation]

The "Spindle forward run" (SSRNn) signal turns ON when the spindle motor is rotating in the forward direction. This will

also turn ON if the spindle motor is rotating in the forward direction during orientation or synchronous tap.

(Note 1) The "Spindle forward run" (SSRNn) signal turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the stop state with

servo rigidity during orientation or synchronous tap.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle motor is rotating in the reverse direction.

[Operation]

The "Spindle reverse run" (SSRIn) signal turns ON when the spindle motor rotates in the reverse direction. It also turns

ON even during orientation or synchronous tap if the spindle motor rotates in the reverse.

(Note 1) The "Spindle reverse run" (SSRIn) signal turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the stop state with

servo rigidity during orientation or synchronous tap.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A IN SPINDLE FORWARD RUN SSRNn X99B X9CB X9FB XA2B XA5B XA8B XABB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A IN SPINDLE REVERSE RUN SSRIn X99C X9CC X9FC XA2C XA5C XA8C XABC

Spindle motor speed

In spindle forward run (SSRN)

Spindle motor speed

In spindle reverse run (SSRI)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

154

[Function]

This signal is output from the spindle controller (spindle drive) for MELDAS AC spindle drive high-speed serial

connection specification, and informs that the encoder's Z phase has been passed when changing the spindle from

speed control to positioning control during C axis control.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The Z phase is passed during C axis control.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The "Spindle servo-ON" signal turns OFF.

(2) The "Spindle ready-ON" signal turns OFF.

(Note) This signal is valid only for a system having a control unit high-speed serially connected with the spindle

controller.

[Function]

If the spindle controller is connected with high-speed serial connection, this signal will inform that the spindle is in the in-

position state during synchronous tap.

[Operation]

The signal will turn ON when:

(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) is within the in-position range during synchronous tap control

(servo on).

The signal will turn OFF when:

(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) has exceeded the in-position range during synchronous tap

control (servo on)

(2) Synchronous tap control is not commanded. ((A) in the following drawing)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A Z-PHASE PASSED SZPHn X99D X9CD X9FD XA2D XA5D XA8D XABD

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A POSITION LOOP IN-POSITION SIMPn X99E X9CE X9FE XA2E XA5E XA8E XABE

Spindle ready-ON

Spindle servo-ON

Z-phase passed

Z phase

(A) (A)

Servo-on command

Motor speed Forward run

Reverse run

Position loop In-position (SIMPn)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.4 Bit Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

155

[Function]

This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive) and informs that

the spindle is in position under C-axis control or synchronous tap control.

[Operation]

The "STLQ" signal turns ON when:

(1) Any of "Spindle torque limit" 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n) signals is ON.

The "STLQ" signal turns OFF when:

(1) All of "Spindle torque limit" 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n) signals are OFF.

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle torque limit 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the spindle is in multi-step speed monitor mode.

When the spindle speed exceeds the monitoring speed in multi-step speed monitor mode, a safety observation error will

occur.

[Operation]

This signal will be turned ON after "Spindle multi-step speed monitor request" (SMSORn) is turned ON, and the spindle

speed becomes less than monitoring speed, and then both NC and drive unit start executing the speed monitor function.

When "Spindle multi-step speed request" (SMSORn) signal is turned OFF, this signal will be also turned OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)

(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)

(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

[Function]

This signal notifies which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-step

speed monitoring.

[Operation]

When the monitor speed of drive unit is switched to the safety monitor speed of the mode which is designated by

"Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input" (SMSOMImn), this signal is also switched to the designated mode.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)

(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)

(3) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT STLQn X99F X9CF X9FF XA2F XA5F XA8F XABF

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

A IN SPINDLE MULTI-STEP

SPEED MONITOR SMSOEn X9A9 X9D9 XA09 XA39 XA69 XA99 XAC9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

A SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONI-

TOR MODE OUTPUT m SMSO- MOmn

X9AA - 9AB

X9DA - 9DB

XA0A - A0B

XA3A - A3B

XA6A - A6B

XA9A - A9B

XACA - ACB

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output Speed monitor mode being executed

SMSOMO2n SMSOMO1n

0 0 1

0 1 2

1 0 3

1 1 4

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

156

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

Operator's key operation can be monitored on the PLC side.

[Operation]

While operator is using the keyboard, the corresponding data is set to "KEY IN".

(Note) The key signals and codes shown in parentheses are the shift IN side key signals.

[Related signals]

KEY OUT

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- KEY IN G10208

R8

Key symbol Code (HEX)

Key symbol Code (HEX)

Key symbol Code (HEX)

Key symbol Code (HEX)

MONITOR 80 ( )

0B(F8) - (+) 2D(2B) O (A) 4F(41)

TOOL/PARAM 81 ( )

0A(F7) . (,) 2E(2C) N (B) 4E(42)

EDIT/MDI 83 ( ) 08(F5) EOB() 3B(5D) G (C) 47(43)

DIAGN IN/OUT

85 ( ) 09(F6) = (#) 3D(23) X (U) 58(55)

SFG 86 DELETE (INS)

7F(8C) / (*) 2F(2A) Y (V) 59(56)

F0 87 C.B.(CAN) 8E(18) Z (W) 5A(57)

SHIFT 88 0 (SP) 30(20) F (E) 46(45)

INPUT(CALC) 0D(F4) 1 31 D (L) 44(4C)

2 32 H (!) 48(21)

3 33 P (I) 50(49)

Previous page 90 Window key (?HELP)

89(F9) 4 34 Q (J) 51(4A)

Next page 9A Activ Wind (CTRL)

8A(8B) 5 35 R (K) 52(4B)

Menu 1 91 6 36 M ( () 4D(28)

Menu 2 92 7 37 S () ) 53(29)

Menu 3 93 8 38 () 54(5B)

Menu 4 94 9 ($) 39(24)

Menu 5 95

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

157

[Function]

This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter

"#2118 S_DSl" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter "#3071 S_DSISp". Then the signal

notifies that the selected door can be opened.

This signal is not output when "#21162 mulstepssc multi-step speed monitor value" is set to "1".

The door No. corresponds to the following bits.

[Operation]

When both CNC and drive unit start the speed monitor function with the speed monitor mode turned ON and speed

monitor parameter check completed, the speed monitor door open signal will turn ON.

When the speed monitor mode is OFF, the speed monitor door open possible signal is OFF as well.

[Caution]

When using the speed monitor function, create user PLC that enables door open when the speed monitor door open

possible signal is ON.

[Related signals]

Speed monitor mode (SMOD)

[Function]

It confirms the handle pulse counter value.

[Operation]

1st to 3rd handle pulse counter values will output to R10 to R12.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPEED MONITOR DOOR OPEN

POSSIBLE SMODEN

G10209

R9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- HANDLE PULSE COUNTER G10210 - G10212

R10 - R12

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Door 1 Door 2 Door 16

Speed monitor mode (SOMD)

Speed monitor door open possible (SMDOEN)

Mechanical door lock

In check Parameter check

Door lock

Door open Door close Door close Door status

Door lock Door lock canceled

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

158

[Function]

This signal notifies which screen is currently being displayed by the controller.

[Operation]

The screen information changes in the following cases. Note that the information will not change when a screen that has

already been displayed is re-displayed.

(1) When a function select key is pressed.

(2) When a menu key is pressed.

(3) When a page key is pressed.

The relation of each key operated and the screen information is as follows.

(Note)File registers G10218/R18 and G10219/R19 are invalid.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CRT DISPLAY INFORMATION G10216 - G10219

R16 - R19

File register Operated key Screen information

G10217/R17 bit F to 8 Function No.

MONITOR 00

TOOL-PARAM cmdtyp is 1, 2 0C

cmdtyp is 3, 4 12

EDIT-MDI 0D

DIAGN-IN/OUT 10

SFG 08

F0 09

G10217/R17 bit 7 to 0 Menu No.

G10216/R16 ... bit F to 8

Page No. 01~n Change by next page key or previous page key

G10216/R16 ... bit 7 to 0

--- Not set. The data is not set.

00 01 02 03 04

05 06 07 08 09

0A 0B 0C 0D 0E

0F 10 11 12 13

(0~19: decimal) Menu changeover00~13

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

159

[Function]

The causes of emergency stop are shown with bit correspondence.

[Operation]

The cause of the emergency stop state is shown as follows with bit correspondence.

If there are multiple causes, the multiple bits corresponding to each cause are output.

The bit of this signal that is set to "0" is the emergency stop cause.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- EMERGENCY STOP CAUSE G10221

R21

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(R)

File register

Bit

Se rv

o dr

iv e

un it

em er

ge nc

y st

op o

ut pu

t

Sp in

dl e

dr iv

e un

it em

er ge

nc y

st op

o ut

pu t

D oo

r i nt

er lo

ck , d

og /O

T ar

bi tra

ry a

llo ca

tio n

de vi

ce il

le ga

l

Fi le

a re

a er

ro r

Bu ilt

-in P

LC p

ro gr

am e

xe cu

tio n

er ro

r

Q a

nd Q

r b us

a la

rm a

ris en

e m

er ge

nc y

st op

Po w

er d

ow n

ha nd

lin g

er ro

r e m

er ge

nc y

st op

Po w

er s

up pl

y ex

te rn

al e

m er

ge nc

y st

op

Em er

ge nc

y st

op in

th e

sa fe

ty c

irc ui

t

Bu ilt

-in P

LC p

ro gr

am S

/W e

m er

ge nc

y st

op o

ut pu

t i s

1

C on

ta ct

or s

hu to

ff te

st

C on

tro l u

ni t E

M G

c on

ne ct

or E

m er

ge nc

y st

op s

ta te

N et

w or

k er

ro r e

m er

ge nc

y st

op

Ta rg

et M

EL SE

C s

to p

st at

e

Bu ilt

-in P

LC s

to p

st at

e

AP LC e m er ge nc y st op c au se st at e

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

160

[Function]

This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.

[Operation]

When a value is set in the system variables #1100 to #1131 or #1132 with the user macro system, the user PLC output

to the file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.

The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

File registers G10224/R24 and G10225/R25 correspond to system variables #1100 to #1131, and #1132 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"

each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.

Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132

(Controller -> PLC)

G10224 - G10225

R24 - R25

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal System variable Points Interface output signal

#1100 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 0 #1116 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 0

#1101 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 1 #1117 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 1

#1102 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 2 #1118 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 2

#1103 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 3 #1119 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 3

#1104 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 4 #1120 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 4

#1105 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 5 #1121 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 5

#1106 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 6 #1122 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 6

#1107 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 7 #1123 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 7

#1108 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 8 #1124 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 8

#1109 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 9 #1125 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 9

#1110 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 10 #1126 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 10

#1111 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 11 #1127 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 11

#1112 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 12 #1128 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 12

#1113 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 13 #1129 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 13

#1114 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 14 #1130 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 14

#1115 1 Register G10224/R24 bit 15 #1131 1 Register G10225/R25 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal

This correspondence table shows the example for file registers G10224/R24 and G10225/R25.

#1132 32 Register G10224/R24,G10225/R25

#1133 32 Register G10226/R26,G10227/R27

#1134 32 Register G10228/R28,G10229/R29

#1135 32 Register G10230/R30,G10231/R31

Bit selection parameter #6454/bit0

User macro output #1132 to #1135

(Controller -> PLC)

User macro output #1032 to #1035

(PLC -> Controller)

0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331

1: Part system independentG10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

161

[Function]

This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.

[Operation]

When a value is set in the system variable #1133 with the user macro system, the user PLC output to the file register Rn

and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.

(Example)

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133

(Controller -> PLC)

G10226 - G10227

R26 - R27

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134

(Controller -> PLC)

G10228 - G10229

R28 - R29

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135

(Controller -> PLC)

G10230 - G10231

R30 - R31

#1133 = 1000 ACT DMOV G10226(R26) D100

Sequence program

1000 is input in D100 and 101 when the ACT signal turns ON.

User macro program

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

162

[Function]

This indicates the version of the software for controller control.

[Operation]

The version of the software for controller is displayed.

The file registers G10202/R32 to G10235/R35 are set to the following data.

(Note 1) If the version is a 2-digit No., bits F to 8 of G10232/R32 are set to "20H".

(Note 2) Bits 7 to 0 on the G10232/R32 are always "20H".

[Function]

This notifies a drop cause in the battery voltage.

[Operation]

The voltage of the data storage battery in the controller:

(1)This signal is "0" when the voltage is higher than the battery warning detection level.

(Note) If invalidating the battery alarm/warning detection (#6449 bit4=1), this signal is always "0".

(2)This signal is "1" when the voltage is higher than the battery alarm detection level and is below the battery warning

detection level.

(3)This signal is "3" when the voltage is below the battery alarm detection level.

(4)This signal is "2" when error occurs in the battery detection circuit.

[Related signals]

(1) Battery warning (BATWR)

(2) Battery alarm (BATAL)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SOFTWARE VERSION

CODE

G10232 - G10235

R32 - R35

Item File register Type Example

(1) Model function No. G10235/R35 Binary 1007=3EFH

(2) Serial No. G10234/R34 Binary 000=0000H

(3) Version

Bits F to 8 of G10233/R33 ASCII code A=41H

Bits 7 to 0 of G10233/R33 ASCII code 0=30H

Bits F to 8 of G10232/R32 ASCII code (Note1) A=41H

- - Bits 7 to 0 of G10232/R32 Always 20H (Note2)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- BATTERY DROP CAUSE G10240

R40

8.1/2

MP BND - 377W000 - A0 SV1 BND-

OFFM

[S/W MODULE TREE] ALARM/DIAGN

BND- 1007W000-A0A (1) (2) (3)

(Example)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

163

[Function]

If the internal temperature of the control unit rises above 90C, the overheat will be detected, and the following states will

occur.

(1) The "Temperature rise" (SM16) is turned ON.

(2) The "Temperature warning cause" is turned ON.

(3) The alarm message (Z53) is displayed on the screen.

If the machine is in automatic operation, the operation will be continued, but restarting will not be possible after resetting

or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible after block stop or feed hold.)

[Operation]

The "Temperature warning cause" is turned ON when:

- The internal temperature of the control unit rises above 90C.

The "Temperature warning cause" is turned OFF when:

- The internal temperature of control unit drops below 90C.

The "Temperature warning cause" is a bit unit signal. Independent bits are assigned to the control unit and setting and

display unit for CNC exclusive use respectively.

[Related signals]

(1) Temperature rise (SM16)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- TEMPERATURE WARNING

CAUSE

G10241

R41

(G10241/R41)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0File register

Bit

Control unit

SM16

G10241/R41 Bit0

Control unit internal temperature

90 Alarm occurrence temperature

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

164

[Function]

- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)

This signal informs the phase error (value including the phase error memorized with the spindle synchronization

phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation

request" signal (SSPHM) is ON. The phase error is output by 1 increment.

The data has no meaning in cases other than above.

[Operation]

- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)

When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON,

and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant, the phase error between the

basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.

[Related signals]

(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

[Function]

- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)

This signal informs the phase error (value excluding the phase error memorized with the spindle synchronization

phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation

request" (SSPHM) signal is ON. The phase error is output by 1 increment.

The data has no meaning in cases other than above.

[Operation]

- During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)

When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON,

and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant, the phase error between the

basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.

[Related signals]

(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

[Function]

The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output in the spindle synchronous function.

[Operation]

The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output.

Unit: 360/4096

(Note 1) If the phase can not be calculated because, for instance, the basic spindle or synchronous spindle has not

passed the Z-phase, "-1" will be output.

(Note 2) This data is output only during the phase shift calculation or the spindle phase synchronization.

[Related signals]

(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

(2) Phase offset request (SSPHF)

(3) Spindle synchronization phase offset data

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR 1

G10248

R48

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR 2

G10249

R49

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR OUTPUT

G10255

R55

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

165

[Function]

The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.

[Operation]

The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit value)

(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit value)

[Function]

The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.

[Operation]

The lower limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor

(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit value)

[Function]

The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.

[Operation]

The upper limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor

(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit value)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR MONITOR

G10256

R56

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR MONITOR (lower limit)

G10257

R57

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE ERROR MONITOR (upper limit)

G10258

R58

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

166

[Function]

With the spindle phase shift amount calculation function, the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is

obtained and memorized by turning signal ON at executing the spindle synchronization. The synchronous spindle can be

rotated with the handle during the spindle phase shift calculation, so the phase relation between two spindles can be

adjusted by seeing.

If the "Spindle phase synchronous control" (SPPHS) signal is input while the "Phase offset request" signal (SSPHF) is

ON, the phase error will be aligned based on the position shifted by the memorized phase shift amount.

Such operation makes the phase alignment easy when clamping an irregular material over.

[Operation]

The phase error memorized by the phase shift calculation is output.

Unit: 360/4096

(Note 1) This data is output only during the spindle synchronous control.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

(2) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

(3) Phase offset request (SSPHF)

(4) Spindle synchronization phase error output

[Function] [Operation]

This signal is an interface for sending data from APLC C language module to PLC device.

[Function]

This signal outputs the No. of ZR device in which an error has occurred during read or write of common variables.

[Operation]

CNC sets the No. of ZR device in which an error has occurred first at the execution of the DDWR/DDRD instruction.

If no error has occurred, "0" is set.

This device value is kept until read/write of common variables is executed with the next DDWR/DDRD instruction.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE OFFSET DATA

G10259

R59

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- APLC INPUT DATA n G10260 - G10269

R60 - R69

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

-

ZR DEVICE NO. AT OCCUR- RENCE OF NC EXCLUSIVE IN-

STRUCTION (DDWR/DDRD) ERROR

PCVERR

G10280 - G10281

R80 - R81

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

167

[Function]

This signal outputs the part system No. and common variable No. in which an error has occurred when the common

variable is read with ZR device from GOT.

[Operation]

The thousand's digit represents the part system where the error has occurred, and the hundred's to one's digits indicate

the common variable No.

(Example)

If multiple errors occur when the common variable is read, one of the occurring error codes will be set. It is uncertain

which error cause of common variable will be output.

The value is kept until the error cause is removed.

[Function]

This signal outputs the error cause of the common variable No. in which an error has occurred when the common

variable is read with ZR device from GOT.

[Operation]

The error codes are set by CNC. The error causes are as follows.

If multiple errors occur when the common variable is read, one of the occurring error codes will be set. It is uncertain

which error code of common variable will be output.

The value is kept until the error cause is removed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- COMMON VARIABLE NO. AT

OCCURRENCE OF ZR DEVICE ERROR

ZRECVNO

G10282

R82

Value Contents

520 The common variable #520 is an error.

2150 The common variable #150 of 2nd part system is an error.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- ERROR CAUSE FOR ZR DE- VICE ERROR OCCURRENCE

ZRECVFC G10283

R83

Error code Error cause

0x0001 The specified common variable is empty

0x0002 The common variable value is illegal (infinity, etc.)

0x0004 The common variable value is out of the range from -214748.3648 to 214748.3647.

0x0008 The specified common variable is outside of the allowed setting range (subject to option settings).

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

168

[Function]

This signal notices that data changeover is completed.

[Operation]

Turns ON when data changeover is completed.Turns OFF when Data changeover request signal is turned OFF.

[Function

This signal informs the CNC side dual signal input status of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

These devices are the copies of the data X200 to X25F, made by CNCs internal processing.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE-

OVER COMPLETION

G10290 - G10291

R90 - R91

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MOD-

ULE m SU_NC m

G12470 - G12475

R2150 - R2155

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

Data changeover completion for Window 1 Data changeover completion for Window 2

Data changeover completion for Window 10

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Automatic setting window data change request

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module input 00 CNC side dual signal module input 01

CNC side dual signal module input 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module input 10 CNC side dual signal module input 11

CNC side dual signal module input 1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

169

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status of "CNC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module. The signal turned

ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module 1 to 3.

[Operation

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

These signals are the copies of the output signals Y200 to Y25F, made by CNCs internal processing.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALER-

ROR MODULE m SU_NER m

G12480 - G12485

R2160 - R2165

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT-

PUT MODULE m SU_NO m

G12490 - G12492

R2170 - R2172

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module error 00 CNC side dual signal module error 01

CNC side dual signal module error 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module error 10 CNC side dual signal module error 11

CNC side dual signal module error 1F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output 0A CNC side dual signal module output 0B

CNC side dual signal module output 0F

CNC side dual signal module output 1A CNC side dual signal module output 1B

CNC side dual signal module output 1F

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

170

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status between CNC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal

module.

The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs CNC side dual signal compare status to the PLC.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.

bit1: Device test error detection 2

An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.

[Caution]

This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual

signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT-

PUT ERROR MODULE m SU_NOER

m

G12494 - G12496

R2174 - R2176

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS 2 SU_NST2

G12499

R2179

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output error 0A CNC side dual signal module output error 0B

CNC side dual signal module output error 0F

CNC side dual signal module output error 1A CNC side dual signal module output error 1B

CNC side dual signal module output error 1F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Output off check error Device test error detection 2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.5 Data Type Input Signals : System State ( CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

171

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.

[Operation]

To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check

each other.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison status.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitorting only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal head G device No.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMA-

TION SU_NLT

G12500

R2180

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS SU_NST

G12501

R2181

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV G12502

R2182

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side emergency stop status CNC side dual signal module input compare error CNC side counterparts signal compare stop detected CNC side dual signal module data error detected CNC side dual signal module output FB compare error CNC side compare process start CNC side compare process stopping PLC side compare process stopping Servo ready ON Dual Signal Module compare ladder check normal

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

172

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1 to #21145 SSU_Dev3.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the number of dual signal modules.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE

TIME SU_NDLY

G12503

R2183

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD

DEVICE NO. m SU_NDV m

G12504 - G12506

R2184 - R2186

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MOD-

ULES ON CNC SIDE SU_NNUM

G12508

R2188

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

173

4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

During ball screw thermal expansion compensation, the compensation amount calculated based on the "thermal

expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" is set in this register by

the CNC.

[Operation]

The "thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and the "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" is set as

a set for each axis in the R register.

The current compensation amount is set by the CNC into the "thermal expansion compensate amount".

The thermal expansion compensation is invalid for the axis if the "thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and

"thermal expansion max. compensation amount" are set to 0.

These R registers are cleared to zero when the power is turned ON.

A unit half of the minimum command unit is the setting unit.

If the minimum command unit is 1m and 100 is set, for example, the compensation amount will be 50m.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- THERMAL EXPANSION COM-

PENSATION AMOUNT

G11000 G11010 G11020 G11030 G11040 G11050 G11060 G11070

R800 R810 R820 R830 R840 R850 R860 R870

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G11080 G11090 G11100 G11110 G11120 G11130 G11140 G11150

R880 R890 R900 R910 R920 R930 R940 R950

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

(PLC R CNC) Unit: Minimum command unit/2

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

(PLC R CNC) Unit: Minimum command unit/2

Thermal expansion compensation amount

(CNC R PLC) Unit: Minimum command unit/2

1st axis G+1002/R3102 G+1003/R3103 G11000/R800

2nd axis G+1012/R3112 G+1013/R3113 G11010/R810

3rd axis G+1022/R3122 G+1023/R3123 G11020/R820

4th axis G+1032/R3132 G+1033/R3133 G11030/R830

5th axis G+1042/R3142 G+1043/R3143 G11040/R840

6th axis G+1052/R3152 G+1053/R3153 G11050/R850

7th axis G+1062/R3162 G+1063/R3163 G11060/R860

8th axis G+1072/R3172 G+1073/R3173 G11070/R870

9th axis G+1082/R3182 G+1083/R3183 G11080/R880

10th axis G+1092/R3192 G+1093/R3193 G11090/R890

11th axis G+1102/R3202 G+1103/R3203 G11100/R900

12th axis G+1112/R3212 G+1113/R3213 G11110/R910

13th axis G+1122/R3222 G+1123/R3223 G11120/R920

14th axis G+1132/R3232 G+1133/R3233 G11130/R930

15th axis G+1142/R3242 G+1143/R3243 G11140/R940

16th axis G+1152/R3252 G+1153/R3253 G11150/R950

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

174

Setting example

[Caution]

The compensation amount calculated with this compensation function is added to the machine error compensation

amount and output to the servo system.

Make sure that the ball screw thermal expansion compensation amount + machine error compensation amount does not

exceed -32768 to +32767.

[Related signals]

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

bscmp- -100.000 bscmp- 120.000 bscmp+ 120.000 bscmp+ -100.000

-40 40

180 100

- 100.000 120.000

- 20

- 100.000 120.000

70

20

70

Data Setting value Data Setting value

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Machine position (mm)

Thermal expansion compensation amount (m)

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

(1) When the compensation basic point is in the minus area, and the plus area is to be compensated.

(2) When the compensation basic point is in the plus area, and the minus area is to be compensated.

Machine position (mm)

Thermal expansion compensation amount (m)

Thermal expansion max. compen- sation amount

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.6 Data Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

175

[Function]

This signal outputs the position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC setting unit.

[Operation]

The base point of basic machine coordinate system is 0. Backlash compensation and machine error compensation are

not included.

The unit is the input setting unit parameter "#1003 iunit".

The range of output value is shown below.

(Example 1) For a linear axis, the following values are output.

(Example 2) When diameter specification axis parameter "#1019 dia" is set to "1", the following values are output.

(Example 3) For a rotation axis, the following values are output.

The output values are common for inch/metric system

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS MPOSn

G11002- G11003

G11012- G11013

G11022- G11023

G11032- G11033

G11042- G11043

G11052- G11053

G11062- G11063

G11072- G11073

R802- R803

R812- R813

R822- R823

R832- R833

R842- R843

R852- R853

R862- R863

R872- R873

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G11082- G11083

G11092- G11093

G11102- G11103

G11112- G11113

G11122- G11123

G11132- G11133

G11142- G11143

G11152- G11153

R882- R883

R892- R893

R902- R903

R912- R913

R922- R923

R932- R933

R942- R943

R952- R953

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Linear axis -2147483648 to 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647

Rotation axis 0 to 359999 0 to 3599999

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value where machine position is at 1mm (metric system)

2000 20000

Output value where machine position is at 1inch (inch system)

20000 200000

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value where machine position is at 1mm (metric system)

1000 10000

Output value where machine position is at 1inch (inch system)

10000 100000

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value at machine position 1 1000 10000

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

176

[Function]

This signal outputs feedback position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC setting unit.

[Operation]

The base point of basic machine coordinate system is 0. Backlash compensation and machine error compensation are

not included.

The unit is the input setting unit parameter "#1003 iunit".

The range of output value is shown below.

(Example 1) For a linear axis, the following values are output.

(Example 2) When diameter specification axis parameter "#1019 dia" is set to "1", the following values are output.

(Example 3) For a rotation axis, the following values are output.

The output values are common for inch/metric system

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- FEEDBACK MACHINE POSI-

TION n-TH AXIS FBMPOSn

G11004- G11005

G11014- G11015

G11024- G11025

G11034- G11035

G11044- G11045

G11054- G11055

G11064- G11065

G11074- G11075

R804- R805

R814- R815

R824- R825

R834- R835

R844- R845

R854- R855

R864- R865

R874- R875

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G11084- G11085

G11094- G11095

G11104- G11105

G11114- G11115

G11124- G11125

G11134- G11135

G11144- G11145

G11154- G11155

R884- R885

R894- R895

R904- R905

R914- R915

R924- R925

R934- R935

R944- R945

R954- R955

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Linear axis -2147483648 to 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647

Rotation axis 0 to 359999 0 to 3599999

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value where feedback machine position is at 1mm (metric system)

2000 20000

Output value where feedback machine position is at 1inch (inch system)

20000 200000

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value where feedback machine position is at 1mm (metric system)

1000 10000

Output value where feedback machine position is at 1inch (inch system)

10000 100000

#1003 (iunit) settings B (1m) C (0.1m)

Output value at machine position 1 1000 10000

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

177

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function][Operation]

The status at the end of the external search is output.

The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the CNC CPU based on the external

search is shown below.

(Note) Timeout monitoring is executed only when "1" is set to "#21102 add02/bit1".

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search device No.

(3) External search program No.

(4) External search sequence No.

(5) External search block No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EXTERNAL SEARCHSTATUS G10300 G10400 G10500 G10600 G10700 G10800 G10900

R100 R200 R300 R400 R500 R600 R700

External searchstatus

value Details Remedy

0 Normally finished.

1 Operation search is being carried out. Wait for other functions operation search to finish before searching.

2 Search was attempted during theprogram operation. Stop the program before searching.

3 A non-existed or disabled device was designated. Confirm the presence of the device, and that the device is within the specifications.

4 The program file is not designated. Designate the program No. or sequence No.

5 The block with the designated program No., sequence No. or block No. was not found. Or search was attempted during restart search.

Reset the restart search and search again.

6 No external search specifications Check the specifications.

7 The operation search did not yet finished after three seconds since the external search had started. (Note)

Data may be being input or output. Restart the external search after finishing the operation.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

178

[Function]

When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller

is a max. 8-digit BCD code.

[Operation]

M code data are updated when:

(1) "M**" is issued in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

(2) "M**" in fixed cycle causes motion during execution of the fixed cycle.

(3) "M**" is executed by manual numerical command input.

M code data is also updated when an "M code independent output" command is issued even during M function lock. The

data is kept unchanged after "M function finish" (FIN1n, FIN2n) signal is sent back.

"Reset" or "Emergency stop" does not clear the data.

[Caution]

(1) Commands can be defined up to four in a block with parameters. When plural M functions are placed in one block,

the signals are output in the order at programming.

A program error will not occur even if more than the maximum numbers of commands are issued. The latter

commands will be valid.(Example) When five M commands are issued though only four M commands can be used.

The last four M commands are valid.

(2) M98 (read of subprogram), M99 (return to main program), etc. are processed within the CNC, and not output as M

code data.

[Related signals]

(1) M function strobe m (MFmn)

(2) M code data 2, 3, 4

[Function]

When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller

is a max. 8-digit BCD code.

[Operation]

M code data 2 are updated when:

(1) Two or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- M CODE DATA 1

G10304 - G10305

G10404 - G10405

G10504 - G10505

G10604 - G10605

G10704 - G10705

G10804 - G10805

G10904 - G10905

R104 - R105

R204 - R205

R304 - R305

R404 - R405

R504 - R505

R604 - R605

R704 - R705

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- M CODE DATA 2

G10306 - G10307

G10406 - G10407

G10506 - G10507

G10606 - G10607

G10706 - G10707

G10806 - G10807

G10906 - G10907

R106 - R107

R206 - R207

R306 - R307

R406 - R407

R506 - R507

R606 - R607

R706 - R707

M03 M08 M80 M82; Output to M code data 1 Output to M code data 2 Output to M code data 3 Output to M code data 4

M 11 M 12 M 13 M 14 M 15

The last four M commands are valid.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

179

[Function]

When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller

is a max. 8-digit BCD code.

[Operation]

M code data 3 are updated when:

(1) Three or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

[Function]

When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from the controller

is a max. 8-digit BCD code.

[Operation]

M code data 4 are updated when:

(1) Four or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- M CODE DATA 3

G10308 - G10309

G10408 - G10409

G10508 - G10509

G10608 - G10609

G10708 - G10709

G10808 - G10809

G10908 - G10909

R108 - R109

R208 - R209

R308 - R309

R408 - R409

R508 - R509

R608 - R609

R708 - R709

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- M CODE DATA 4

G10310 - G10311

G10410 - G10411

G10510 - G10511

G10610 - G10611

G10710 - G10711

G10810 - G10811

G10910 - G10911

R110 - R111

R210 - R211

R310 - R311

R410 - R411

R510 - R511

R610 - R611

R710 - R711

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

180

[Function]

When S function is specified, value following address "S" can be identified. The S code data output from the controller is

binary code with a sign.

[Operation]

"S code data" are updated when:

(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

(2) "S**" is executed by manual numerical command input.

Data remain unchanged when M function finish (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency stop"

does not cause clear to data.

The S code data is assigned in the following manner. (Refer to the table above for the 2nd and further part systems.)

[Caution]

(1) Seven S codes can be placed in one block. If the number of S codes defined exceeds the specified number, the S

codes defined last is valid.

(2) If two or more S codes for one spindle are issued in a block, the S code defined last will be valid.

[Related signals]

(1) S function strobe m (SFmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- S CODE DATA 1 to 4

G10312 - G10319

G10412 - G10419

G10512 - G10519

G10612 - G10619

G10712 - G10719

G10812 - G10819

G10912 - G10919

R112 - R119

R212 - R219

R312 - R319

R412 - R419

R512 - R519

R612 - R619

R712 - R719

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- S CODE DATA 5 to 7

G10364 - G10369

G10464 - G10469

G10564 - G10569

G10664 - G10669

G10764 - G10769

G10864 - G10869

G10964 - G10969

R164 - R169

R264 - R269

R364 - R369

R464 - R469

R564 - R569

R664 - R669

R764 - R769

Signal name Register (1st part system)

S code data 1 G10312,10313/R112,113

S code data 2 G10314,10315/R114,115

S code data 3 G10316,10317/R116,117

S code data 4 G10318,10319/R118,119

S code data 5 G10364,10365/R164,165

S code data 6 G10366,10367/R166,167

S code data 7 G10368,10369/R168,169

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

181

[Function]

When T function is specified, value following address "T" can be identified. The T code data output from the controller is

a max. 8-digit BCD code.

[Operation]

T code data 1 are updated when:

(1) "T**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

(2)"T**" is executed by manual numerical command input.

Data remain unchanged even when "M function finish" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency

stop" does not clear this data.

[Caution]

(1) Up to one T code can be commanded in one block.

The latter code will be valid if more than two codes are commanded in one block.

[M system]

[L system]

[Related signals]

(1) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- T CODE DATA 1

G10320 - G10321

G10420 - G10421

G10520 - G10521

G10620 - G10621

G10720 - G10721

G10820 - G10821

G10920 - G10921

R120 - R121

R220 - R221

R320 - R321

R420 - R421

R520 - R521

R620 - R621

R720 - R721

T05 T15 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

T0505 T1515 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

182

[Function]

When 2nd M function is specified, value following address "B" can be identified.

The 2nd M function data output from the controller is a max. 8-digit BCD code.

(Note 1) Select an address for the 2nd M function address from the setup parameters basic specification parameter

"#1170 M2name" A, B or C address that is not being used for "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax".

[Operation]

2ND M FUNCTION DATA 1 are updated when:

(1) "B (A, C)**" is specified in automatic operation (memory or MDI).

(2)"B (A, C)**" is executed by manual numerical command input.

Data remain unchanged even when "M function finish" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal is sent back. "Reset" and "Emergency

stop" does not clear this data.

[Caution]

(1) Only one 2nd M function can be commanded in one block. The latter code will be valid if more than two codes are

commanded in one block.

[Related signals]

(1) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)

[Function]

Set the compensation No. of the tool data for setting the measurement result during manual tool length measurement II.

This is set in BCD code.

[Operation]

When the sensor is touched by the tool, compensation amount will be written into the tool data of the compensation No.

automatically specified.

This tool No. is interpreted as the tool compensation No. by the CNC.

[Related signals]

(1) Wear compensation No.

(2) Tool length measurement 2 (TLMSn)

[Function] [Operation]

This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 2ND M FUNCTION DATA 1

G10328 - G10329

G10428 - G10429

G10528 - G10529

G10628 - G10629

G10728 - G10729

G10828 - G10829

G10928 - G10929

R128 - R129

R228 - R229

R328 - R329

R428 - R429

R528 - R529

R628 - R629

R728 - R729

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL NO. G10336 G10436 G10536 G10636 G10736 G10836 G10936

R136 R236 R336 R436 R536 R636 R736

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- GROUP IN LIFE MANAGEMENT G10338 G10438 G10538 G10638 G10738 G10838 G10938

R138 R238 R338 R438 R538 R638 R738

B05 B15 ;

The rear side of T command will be valid.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

183

[Function]

The No. of work machining current value and maximum value are notified by the controller to the PLC.

[Operation]

If data is set in the No. of work machining (WRK COUNT M) and the maximum No. of work machined (WRK LIMIT) of the

[Process parameters], the current value or maximum value of the No. of work machining is output.

(Note 1) If data is not set in "WRK COUNT M" and "WRK LIMIT" on the [Process Parameter] screen, data will not be

output to the file register.

(Note 2) If the No. of work machining matches or exceeds maximum value, the No. of work machining over (PCNTn)

signal turns ON.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- NO. OF WORK MACHINING

(CURRENT VALUE)

G10340 - G10341

G10440 - G10441

G10540 - G10541

G10640 - G10641

G10740 - G10741

G10840 - G10841

G10940 - G10941

R140 - R141

R240 - R241

R340 - R341

R440 - R441

R540 - R541

R640 - R641

R740 - R741

G10340/R140

G10341/R141

G10346/R146

G10347/R147

No. of work machining Low-order side

Current value High-order side

No. of work machining Low-order side

Maximum value High-order side

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

184

(1) Set "0" in "WRK COUNT M" on the [Process Parameter] screen. With this setting, the controller side will not

count up.

(2) Add "1" to "No. of work machining (current value)" with the user PLC.

(3) The controller will display "No. of work machining (current value)" as the No. of work machining on the

[COORDINATE] screen. Even in this case, if the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the work

maximum value, the No. of work machining over (PCNTn) signal will turn ON.

(Note) This area allows CNC CPU to output the data to PLC CPU, while it does not allow PLC CPU to write the

data in with the shared device. To write the No. of work machining current value and maximum value in

this area, use the PLC window as follows.

[Related signals]

(1) No. of work machining (maximum value)

[DMOV D1000 U3E0\G12260]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12268]

[MOV K140 U3E0\G12270]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12272]

M1000

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12273]

[MOV K2 U3E0\G12275]

Set the No of work machining current value

Section No.0

Sub-section No.140 = R140

Write method

The number of the write data

Start one-shot write

[DMOV K1000 U3E0\G12260]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12268]

[MOV K146 U3E0\G12270]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12272]

M0

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12273]

[MOV K2 U3E0\G12275]

Set the No of work machin maximum value

Section No.0

Sub-section No.146 = R146

Write method

The number of the write data

Start one-shot write

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

185

[Function]

This signal indicates that the control axis is near the reference position when using the absolute position detection

system.

This signal is output for the 1st reference position to the 4th reference position.

Near the 1st reference position, the time for outputting the signal is shorter than the "near reference position" (NRFn)

signal (the ON/OFF timing accuracy during axis movement is improved).

[Operation]

(1) Using the nth reference position as a reference, when the control axis is in the range set with the parameters, this

signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the axis is not within the range.

(2) The near reference position signal is output with four bits for each axis.

(a) R register and corresponding axes

G10342/R142

G10343/R143

(b) Output value and near nth reference position

(Note 1) The near reference position signal devices include X devices (NRFn) which output signal only for the 1st

reference position, and the R registers (G10342/R142,G10343/R143) which outputs a signal for each

reference position (1st reference position to 4th reference position).

(Note 2) The near reference position signal output width is set with the absolute position parameters "#2057 nrefp" and

"#2058 nrefn". The near reference position signal output width is the same width for the 1st reference position

to the 4th reference position.

(Note 3) Near the 1st reference position, the signals are output to the conventional X device (NRFn) and the R registers

(G10342/R142,G10343/R143) which output signals to each reference position.

[Related signals]

(1) Near reference position nth axis (NRFn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- NEAR REFERENCE POSITION (PER REFERENCE POSITION)

G10342 - G10343

G10442 - G10443

G10542 - G10543

G10642 - G10643

G10742 - G10743

G10842 - G10843

G10942 - G10943

R142 - R143

R242 - R243

R342 - R343

R442 - R443

R542 - R543

R642 - R643

R742 - R743

High-order bit Low-order bit Near nth reference position

0 0 0 1 Near 1st reference position

0 0 1 0 Near 2nd reference position

0 1 0 0 Near 3rd reference position

1 0 0 0 Near 4th reference position

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis output value 2nd axis output value 3rd axis output value 4th axis output value

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

5th axis output value

6th axis output value 7th axis output value 8th axis output value

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

186

[Function] [Operation]

This signal output usage data of tools currently being used with the tool life management II. (When multiple

compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)

[Function]

The No. of work machining maximum value are notified by the controller to the PLC.

[Operation]

Refer to the No. of work machining current value.

[Function]

With this function, the CNC alarms and errors which are normally output to CNC screen are partially coded and output to

PLC I/F device. Thus, the contents of alarms and errors can be confirmed without CNC screen.

[Operation]

The following output will be made when an alarm occurs.

The message displayed in CNC screen is not converted.

(Example) When servo alarm S03 occurs

(Axis name is added for the messages such as some of M01, S01 to S52, and Z70 to Z73.

The following 48 bits are used as the output PLC I/F devices.)

The output is as shown above on the CNC screen. However, this can be coded and output to PLC I/F device as shown

below using this function.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA

G10344 - G10345

G10444 - G10445

G10544 - G10545

G10644 - G10645

G10744 - G10745

G10844 - G10845

G10944 - G10945

R144 - R145

R244 - R245

R344 - R345

R444 - R445

R544 - R545

R644 - R645

R744 - R745

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- NO. OF WORK MACHINING

(MAXIMUM VALUE)

G10346- G10347

G10446- G10447

G10546- G10547

G10646- G10647

G10746- G10747

G10846- G10847

G10946- G10947

R146- R147

R246- R247

R346- R347

R446- R447

R546- R547

R646- R647

R746- R747

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- ERROR CODE OUTPUT

G10356 - G10358

G10456 - G10458

G10556 - G10558

G10656 - G10658

G10756 - G10758

G10856 - G10858

G10956 - G10958

R156 - R158

R256 - R258

R356 - R358

R456 - R458

R556 - R558

R656 - R658

R756 - R758

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- ERROR CODE OUTPUT EX-

TENSION

G10360 - G10363

G10460 - G10463

G10560 - G10563

G10660 - G10663

G10760 - G10763

G10860 - G10863

G10960 - G10963

R160 - R163

R260 - R263

R360 - R363

R460 - R463

R560 - R563

R660 - R663

R760 - R763

Alarm type : Converted into a 2-digit numeral code. (Refer to the code table.) Alarm message : Not coded, and not output. Alarm No. : The No. is output as HEX. Axis name : Error occurrence axis is expressed as a bit, and the bit of servo and spindle are output separately. The head digit of the alarm without axis name will be "0".

S03 0052 XZSERVO WARNING

Alarm No.

Alarm message

Alarm type

Axis name

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

187

The output to PLC I/F device is as follows.

[ERROR CODE OUTPUT]

[ERROR CODE OUTPUT EXTENSION]

If the alarm No. and alarm axis name are numeric type, numeric values are output as they are. If the alarm axis name is

the axis data type, it will not be output.

Ex. Y20 Safety observation error 1234 54321

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

bit

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

G10358/R158 G10358/R158 G10357/R157 G10357/R157 G10356/R156 G10356/R156

1st axis

2nd axis

3rd axis

4th axis

5th axis

6th axis

7th axis

8th axis

As for the servo axis name and spindle name, the bit corresponding to the No. of axis in which the alarm occurs is turned on. The max servo axis Nos. in the 1st part system are 8, and the max spindle Nos. in the 1st part system are 7. The spindle alarm is output to the 1st part system. The PLC axis name is output to the 1st part system.

Alarm type Servo axis nameAlarm No. Spindle namePLC axis name

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

G10361/R161 G10361/R161 G10360/R160 G10360/R160

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

G10363/R163 G10363/R163 G10362/R162 G10362/R162

Alarm No.

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

Alarm axis name

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

G10361/R161 G10361/R161 G10360/R160 G10360/R160

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

G10363/R163 G10363/R163 G10362/R162 G10362/R162

4321

12345

R161,0 = 00001234

R163,2 = 00054321

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

(Higher side) (Lower side) (Higher side) (Lower side)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

188

Code table

The alarm type is coded as the contents of following code table.

Alarm code list

Alarm Details Alarm type Axis name Priority

Multi-CPU error A01 MULTI CPU ERROR A1 Not added 1

System alarm

Z70 Z71 Z72 Z73 Z89 Z99

ABS. ILLEGAL DETECTOR ERROR COMPARE ERROR ABS. WARNING APLC ERROR FILE AREA ERROR

55 56 57 58 58 5C

Some are added 2

Servo/spindle alarm

S01 S02 S03 S04

SERVO ALARM: PR INIT PARAM ERR SERVO ALARM: NR SERVO ALARM: AR

31 32 33 36

Added 3

MCP alarm

Y02 Y03 Y06 Y07 Y09 Y11 Y14 Y20

System alarm Amp. Unequipped mcp_no setting error Too many axes connected Too many axisno connected Node detect error VIR.AX AMP EQU. Safety observation error

41 42 49 43 4A 4B 4F 4C

Some are added 4

Network related alarm

L10 L11 L12 L13

DN Initialization error 1 DN Initialization error 2 DN Link error DN Message error

B1 B2 B3 B4

Not added 5

Emergency stop EMG EMERGENC 01 Not added 6

Program error P

P990 (Program error) PREPRO S/W ERR

71 61

Not added 7

Servo/spindle warning S51 S52

PARAMETER ERROR SERVO WARNING

34 35

Added 8

MCP warning Y51 Y21 Y90

Parameter error Safety observation warning No spindle signal

45 4E 47

9

System warning

Z30 Z52 Z53 Z55 Z59 Z20

ETHERNET ERROR BATTERY FAULT TEMP_OVER RIO NOT CONNECT TIME CONSTANT Power ON again

51 52 53 54 59 5A

Not added 10

Operation error M01 M00 M01

OPERATION ERROR AUX OPER. ALM. AUX OPER. ALM.

11 81 82

Some are added Not added

Added 11

Stop code

T01 T02 T03 T10

CAN'T CYCLE ST FEED HOLD BLOCK STOP FIN WAIT

21 22 23 26

Not added 12

Illegal PLC U10 Built-in PLC alarm 91 Not added 13

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

189

The message at emergency stop is displayed in CNC screen shown below.

(Example) EMG EMERGENCY STOP PLC

When the emergency stop occurs, the message is coded and an alarm No. is output.

Emergency stop code list

(Note 1)If the MCP alarm "Y02 SYSTEM ALARM" occurs, part of the data will not be coded. Confirm the data on the

display unit.

(Example) Y02 SYSTEM ALARM 0051 0104

In this case, only "Y02" and "0051" are coded and output to the PLC I/F device.

(Note 2)If an alarm without an alarm No. occurs, "0" will be set as the alarm No. and output to the PLC I/F device.

(Note 3)If an alarm that does not have an axis name occurs, "0" will be set as the axis name and output to the PLC I/F

device.

(Note 4)Alarms not shown in the code table are not output to the PLC I/F device.

(Note 5)If multiple alarms occur simultaneously, only the alarm with the highest order of priority in the code table will be

output.

(Note 6)The "OOO" section of the program error "POOO" is output to the alarm No. area.

(Example) "P34 G-CODE ERROR 0 0"

The code output becomes 71003400, and the output to PLC I/F devices is as follows.

Error message Details Alarm No.

Emergency stop (EMG)

EXIN External emergency stop 0000

PLC Built-in PLC emergency stop 0001

SRV Servo drive unit not ready 0002

STOP PLC not running 0003

SPIN Spindle drive unit not ready 0004

DATA File area error 0005

PARA Door open II fixed device setting illegal 0006

STP2 Built-in PLC not running 0007

LAD Built-in PLC illegal code 0010

MULT Q and Qr bus alarm 0013

IPWD Illegal power down 0014

CVIN PS external emergency stop 0015

MCT Contactor shutoff test 0016

SUIN Emergency stop in the safety circuit 0017

LINK Network unit error 0018

APLC Emergency stop is set from APLC function 0019

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Alarm type Alarm No. Axis name

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

190

[Function]

This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC o user macro program.

[Operation]

When a value is set in the system variables #1100 to #1131 or #1132 with the user macro system, the user PLC output

to the file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.

The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

File registers G10370/R170 and G10371/R171 correspond to system variables #1100 to #1131, and #1132 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"

each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.

Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132

(Controller -> PLC)

G10370 - G10371

G10470 - G10471

G10570 - G10571

G10670 - G10671

G10770 -

G10771

G10870 - G10871

G10970 - G10971

R170 - R171

R270 - R271

R370 - R371

R470 - R471

R570 - R571

R670 - R671

R770 - R771

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal Systemvariable Points Interface output signal

#1100 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 0 #1116 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 0

#1101 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 1 #1117 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 1

#1102 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 2 #1118 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 2

#1103 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 3 #1119 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 3

#1104 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 4 #1120 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 4

#1105 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 5 #1121 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 5

#1106 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 6 #1122 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 6

#1107 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 7 #1123 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 7

#1108 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 8 #1124 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 8

#1109 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 9 #1125 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 9

#1110 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 10 #1126 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 10

#1111 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 11 #1127 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 11

#1112 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 12 #1128 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 12

#1113 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 13 #1129 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 13

#1114 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 14 #1130 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 14

#1115 1 Register G10370/R170 bit 15 #1131 1 Register G10371/R171 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface output signal

This correspondence table shows the example for file registers G10370/R170 and G10371/R171.

#1132 32 Register G10370/R170,G10371/R171

#1133 32 Register G10372/R172,G10373/R173

#1134 32 Register G10374/R174,G10375/R175

#1135 32 Register G10376/R176,G10377/R177

Bit selection parameter #6454/bit0

User macro output #1132 to #1135

(Controller -> PLC)

User macro output #1032 to #1035

(PLC -> Controller)

0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331

1: Part system independentG10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

191

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

[Function]

This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.

[Operation]

When a value is set in the system variable #1133 with the user macro system, the user PLC output to the file register Rn

and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.

(Example)

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133

(Controller -> PLC)

G10372 - G10373

G10472 - G10473

G10572 - G10573

G10672 - G10673

G10772 - G10773

G10872 - G10873

G10972 - G10973

R172 - R173

R272 - R273

R372 - R373

R472 - R473

R572 - R573

R672 - R673

R772 - R773

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134

(Controller -> PLC)

G10374 - G10375

G10474 - G10475

G10574 - G10575

G10674 - G10675

G10774 - G10775

G10874 - G10875

G10974 - G10975

R174 - R175

R274 - R275

R374 - R375

R474 - R475

R574 - R575

R674 - R675

R774 - R775

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135

(Controller -> PLC)

G10376 - G10377

G10476 - G10477

G10576 - G10577

G10676 - G10677

G10776 - G10777

G10876 - G10877

G10976 - G10977

R176 - R177

R276 - R277

R376 - R377

R476 - R477

R576 - R577

R676 - R677

R776 - R777

#1133 = 1000 ACT DMOV G10372(R172) D100

PLC program

1000 is input in D100 and 101 when the ACT signal turns ON.

User macro program

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

192

[Function] [Operation]

The state of chopping operation is output as each bit information.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping (CHPS)

(2) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING STATUS G10380 G10480 G10580 G10680 G10780 G10880 G10980

R180 R280 R380 R480 R580 R680 R780

BIT Name Description

0 In chopping start It turns ON during the chopping operation regardless of either with chopping by the external signal or by the command from the machining program.

1 In chopping mode It turns ON at the start of chopping command (G81.1 or chopping signal ON). After issuing the chopping complete command (G80 or chopping signal OFF) and then completing the basic position return, it turns OFF.

2 Stroke compensation completion

While the compensation operation is executed during the chopping operation, it turns ON as the difference between the position of upper dead point/bottom dead point and the feedback position has reached less than the tolerance specified with the parameter. If change, such as the movement stop, operation parameter change etc., occurs, it turns OFF.

3 Chopping designation error

Check the setting of operation parameter at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal, and turn it OFF if there is any abnormality. Correct the setting detail, and check it again at the rising edge of the chipping parameter valid signal. If there is no abnormality, turn it OFF. Refer to the alarm No. for the detail of the abnormality.

4 Chopping start preparation completion

Reading the operation parameter inside the NC completes at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal, and turn it ON when the operation of the designated parameter is valid. Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming this signal is ON. When the chopping parameter valid signal turned OFF, this signal will also turn OFF.

5 Playback mode error over

Even the compensation operation is executed using the memorized compensation amount with the playback mode of fixed compensation amount method, it turns ON if the difference between the command position and the feedback position exceeds the tolerance. If the difference is within the tolerance, it turns OFF. Set with the parameter to use the compensation value sequential update type for changing the compensation amount when the error amount exceeds the tolerance.

6 Compensation memorize complete

It turns ON when the measurement of compensation amount is completed in the record mode of fixed compensation amount method. The compensation amount is the difference between the command position and the feedback position and should be within the tolerance. It turns OFF at the completion of chopping operation of the record mode.

7 Compensation memorize incomplete

The error amount cannot be within the tolerance even chopping operation with fixed compensation method is executed 50 times succession.

8 to F Not used

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.7 Data Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

193

[Function]

When the alarm occurs during the chopping operation by the external signal or at the rising edge of the chopping

parameter valid signal, the alarm content will be notified to the PLC.

[Operation]

The relationship between the chopping error No. and its content is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping (CHPS)

(2) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING ERROR NO. G10381 G10481 G10581 G10681 G10781 G10881 G10981

R181 R281 R381 R481 R581 R681 R781

Error No. Description Classification

0 No error -

1 Number of cycles for chopping is zero. (Operates when the number of cycles is 1) A

2 (Chopping axis feed rate) > (Cutting feed clamp speed) (Feed rate is clamped at the cutting feed clamp speed.)

A

3 (Acceleration of chopping axis) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed time constant) (Feed rate is clamped at (cutting feed clamp speed) / (cutting feed time constant))

A

4 (Number of cycles for chopping) > (1000/min) (The number of cycles for chopping is clamped at 1000/min.)

A

5 Chopping axis zero point return is not completed. B

6 Chopping override is zero B

7 Commanded axis is the chopping axis. B

8 The bottom dead point position is zero. B

9 Chopping axis is a manual feed axis. B

10 Interlock B

11 Stored stroke limit or stroke end B

20 No chopping specification. -

22 Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface. C

23 Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter. C

26 Data No. of chopping control data is out of range. C

27 "#2081 chclsp" (chopping clamp speed) and "#2002 clamp" (cutting clamp speed) for chopping axis are both set to "0".

C

28 Chopping axis was changed during the chopping operation. (Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping.)

C

29 The rotary axis is designated as a chopping axis. C

31 Chopping command is executed by PLC when selecting the chopping by G command. C

Classificati on A

The error is retained during chopping operation. The alarm is removed after the alarm factor is removed.

Classificati on B

The error is cleared after the alarm factor is removed, or when the NC is reset.

Classificati on C

It does not enter into the chopping mode.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

194

[Function]

The axis which is in the chopping operation is output.

[Operation]

The axis which is in the chopping operation turns ON regardless of either by PLC command or by machining program

command.

It turns OFF when the chopping mode is removed.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis

: :

bit7: 8th axis

bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

[Related signals]

(1) In chopping mode

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING AXIS G10382 G10482 G10582 G10682 G10782 G10882 G10982

R182 R282 R382 R482 R582 R682 R782

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

195

4.8 Data Type Input Signals : Spindle State (CNC CPU->PLC CPU)

[Function]

This signal informs that spindle speed reference signal (S) command specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI) or

by manual numerical data input. "Spindle command rotation input" speed output from the controller is binary data. The

data can be monitored in the "S display" on the command value screen.

[Operation]

Set "Spindle command rotation speed input" is renewed when:

(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI) and "M function finish 1 or 2" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal or

"Gear shift completion" (GFINn) signal is sent back to the controller.

(2) "S**" is specified by manual numerical command input and "M function finish 1 or 2" (FIN1n or FIN2n) signal or "Gear

shift completion" (GFINn) signal is sent back to the controller.

(Note 1) Data cannot be cleared by "Reset" or "Emergency stop".

(Note 2) "Spindle command rotation speed input" directly denotes spindle speed (r/min) specified as S function

command.

(Note 3) By setting data of desired spindle speed to this signal, the spindle can be run at that speed. PLC program for

transfer needs to be created by the user to transfer the data. With the PLC program, if the spindle speed to be

controlled does not need to change from the (S) command value, copy the spindle command rotation speed

input value to the spindle command rotation speed output. If it is desired to be changed, set the intended value

to the spindle command rotation speed output.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle speed command rotation output (SRPMOTn)

(2) Spindle command final data (Rotation speed) (SRPMn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

- SPINDLE COMMAND ROTA-

TION SPEED INPUT SRPMINn

G11160 - G11161

G11190 - G11191

G11220 - G11221

G11250 - G11251

G11280 - G11281

G11310 - G11311

G11340 - G11341

R1600 - R1601

R1630 - R1631

R1660 - R1661

R1690 - R1691

R1720 - R1721

R1750 - R1751

R1780 - R1781

S func. strobe 1 (SF1n)

S function strobe 1 (SF1n) turns ON and the following signals rise:

M function finish 1,2 (FIN1n,FIN2n) Gear shift completion (GFINn) Reset & rewind (RRWn) or during synchronous tapping

Spindle command rotation speed input (SRPMINn)

Spindle command rotation speed output (SRPMOTn)

PLC program process (mandatory) (Copy or set the intended value)(Note 3)

S function command S code data 1

Tr an

sf er

ti m

in g

When the system is under constant surface speed control, constant surface speed data is set for "Spindle command rotation speed input"

- Spindle gear shift rotation speed - Spindle orientation rotation speed

Spindle gear selection code m (GImn) Spindle stop (SSTPn) Spindle gear shift (SSFTn) Spindle orientation (SORCn) Spindle speed override code m (SPmn)

Spindle controller

Spindle command final data (Rotation speed)(SRPMINn)

Spindle command final data (12 bit binary)(SBINn)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

196

[Function]

The command value is indicated to the spindle controller.

[Operation]

The "Spindle command rotation speed input" indicates the value for the spindle function (S) data commanded with the

automatic operation or manual numeric value command, whereas this data indicates a value to which the "Spindle

override", "Spindle gear selection code 1,2"(Gl1, Gl2), "Spindle stop"(SSTP), "Spindle gear shift"(SSFT) and "Spindle

orientation"(SORC) conditions have been considered.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle command rotation speed input (SRPMINn)

(2) Spindle command rotation speed output (SRPMOTn)

[Function]

When the system has spindle equipped with encoder, actual spindle speed can be monitored.

[Operation]

True spindle speed is always set by feedback signal from spindle encoder.

Data are multiplied by 1000, and stored.

[Function]

It displays the thermistor temperature of the spindle motor with a thermistor.

[Operation]

It always sets the thermistor temperature of the spindle motor. The unit is "C".

It always sets to "0" for the motor without a thermistor.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

- SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL

DATA (rotation speed) SRPMn

G11162 - G11163

G11192 - G11193

G11222 - G11223

G11252 - G11253

G11282 - G11283

G11312 - G11313

G11342 - G11343

R1602 - R1603

R1632 - R1633

R1662 - R1663

R1692 - R1693

R1722 - R1723

R1752 - R1753

R1782 - R1783

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

- SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED

G11166 - G11167

G11196 - G11197

G11226 - G11227

G11256 - G11257

G11286 - G11287

G11316 - G11317

G11346 - G11347

R1606 - R1607

R1636 - R1637

R1666 - R1667

R1696 - R1697

R1726 - R1727

R1756 - R1757

R1786 - R1787

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1stSP 2ndSP 3rdSP 4thSP 5thSP 6thSP 7thSP

- SPINDLE MOTOR TEMPERA-

TURE

G11171 G11201 G11231 G11261 G11291 G11321 G11351

R1611 R1641 R1671 R1701 R1731 R1761 R1791

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

197

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function]

This signal carries out a contactor shutoff test.

[Operation]

Send a "ready OFF" command to the drive unit at the contactor shutoff test signal's rising edge and shut the drive side

contactor OFF. Then, turn the power shutdown signal of the dual signal module OFF to shut the CNC side contactor

OFF.

Confirm that the contactor's status is OFF by monitoring contactor's auxiliary b contact signal, then send a "ready ON"

command to the drive unit to turn the drive unit side contactor ON. Turn ON the power shutdown signal to turn ON the

CNC side contactor. After that, turn the 24 hours continuous operation signal OFF.

If the contactor shutoff could not be confirmed within 5 seconds, Alarm"Y20 Safety observation error 0008" (contactor

weld detection) is output and the status turns to the emergency stop.

[Timing chart]

[Caution]

Contactor shutoff test must be carried out when the drive's main power can be shut off without causing any problem.

Vertical axis requires brake circuit, etc. for a drop prevention.

[Related signals]

Emergency stop cause

24 hours continuous operation (CNOP)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A CONTACTOR SHUTOFF TEST MCT Y310

24 hours continuous operation (CNOP)

Contactor shutoff test (MCT)

Servo ready state

Contactor's auxiliary b contact signal

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

198

[Function]

Dual signal module's output OFF check and contactor welding detected are commenced.

[Operation]

It confirms that the contactor's auxiliary b contact is ON at the rising edge of the "dual signals check start".

When the contactor's welding is detected, "Y20 Safety observation error 0008" will occur.

At the same time, output's ON/OFF check will be commenced.

If the error is detected at the dual signal module's PLC side output, "Y20 Safety observation error 0048" will occur. If the

error is detected at the NC side, "Y20 Safety observation erro 0049" will occur.

"EMG Emergency stop MCT" will be displayed until the output's ON/OFF check is completed.

"Dual signals check start" signal is valid only when "#21161 Dual signal check-time change" (SftySgnlChkTrg) is set to

"1". If "#21161 Dual signal check-time change" is set to "0", the controller will automaticallly start checking. Setting "1" is

allowed only when the power supply to I/Os is impossible at the controller's power ON. It starts checking when the "dual

signals check start" is ON under the state of power supply.

"Dual signals check start" signal is only valid at the first rising edge of the signal.

[Caution]

Output signal state of the dual signals module will change after executing the output ON/OFF check. When creating a

program, consider the state transition so as not to make the machine dangerous state even the output signals change.

[Related signals]

Emergency stop cause

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DUAL SIGNALS CHECK START CHKTRG Y311

ON OFF

ON OFF

Controller ready completion (MA)

Dual signal check start

Dual signal ON/OFF check (NC side)

Dual signal ON/OFF check (PLC side)

Dual signal comparison

Execution Stop

Execution Stop

Execution Stop

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

199

[Function]

Dual signal module's output OFF check is commenced.

[Operation]

"Output OFF check" signal is ON, it enters in emergency stop state and then servo ready OFF. In the servo ready OFF

state, all the output signals of the dual signals module will be OFF. Confirm that the input signal of output signal feedback

is OFF. If it is not confirmed in a given amout of time, it will be considered as an error.

If the error is detected at the dual signal module's PLC side output, "Y20 Safety observation error 0050" will occur. If the

error is detected at the NC side, "Y20 Safety observation erro 0051" will occur.

"EMG Emergency stop MCT" will be displayed while the output OFF check is executed.

[Caution]

All the output signals of the dual signals module will be OFF by executing the output OFF check. When creating a

program, consider the state transition so as not to make the machine dangerous state even the output signals are OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Emergency stop cause

(2) Output OFF check not complete (NOFFCHK)

[Function]

The total duration of a signal specified by a user PLC can be counted and displayed. For this, integration time input 1 and

2 are available.

[Operation]

The INTEGRAL TIME during this signal (RHDm) has been ON is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds.

Integrating time is displayed on "#6 EXT TIME 1" and "#7 EXT TIME 2" of "[MONITOR]-[TIME]" CNC monitor screen.

The counted (integrated) time is held even when the power is turned OFF. The integration time can be preset or reset.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A OUTPUT OFF CHECK

(OFFCHK) OFFCHK Y312

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A INTEGRATION TIME INPUT m RHDm Y314 - Y315

ON OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

Output OFF check (NC -> PLC)

Servo ready state

Output OFF check not complete (NC -> PLC)

All dual signal modules output signals

Feedback input signal state of all dual signal modules output signals

The output OFF check is executed when the output OFF check not complete is ON

Servo ready turns OFF when the test is executed

All output signals turn OFF

The test is completed after all the output signals are OFF is confirmed

The output OFF check is turned ON when there is no output during the last 24 hours

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

200

[Function]

Data pertinent to tool functions, and coordinate data (origin reset) can be protected with this signal.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned OFF (set to "0"), the tool data setting operation is prohibited.

[Caution]

If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY1) is OFF, DATA PROTECT appears in the message section of screen.

[Related signals]

(1) Data protect key 2 (*KEY2)

(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3)

[Function]

Data pertinent to user parameters, common variables, CNC ladder, R register, C register and T register can be

protected.

[Operation]

When this signal (KEY2) is turned OFF (0), the parameter and common variable setting operation is prohibited.

[Caution]

If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY2) is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT appears in the message section of CRT

screen.

[Related signals]

(1) Data protect key 1 (*KEY1)

(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3)

[Function]

Data pertinent to machining program can be protected.

[Operation]

When this signal (KEY3) is turned OFF (0), the editing of the machining program is prohibited.

[Caution]

If data is edited when the data protect key 3 is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT will appear in the message section.

[Related signals]

(1) Data protect key 1 (*KEY1)

(2) Data protect key 2 (*KEY2)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

B DATA PROTECT KEY 1 *KEY1 Y318

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

B DATA PROTECT KEY 2 *KEY2 Y319

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

B DATA PROTECT KEY 3 *KEY3 Y31A

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

201

[Function]

When using one setting and display unit for multiple controller display units, this signal is used to inform the controller

that it has been changed as a display unit.

[Operation]

When this signal turns ON, the currently selected screen will display at the rising edge. For the setting and display unit

screen, the screen on the controller before the changeover will remain, so when this signal is input, the local screen

display will be changed to.

[Timing chart]

[Function]

The displayed part system of the multiple part systems can be changed.

[Operation]

The displayed part system is changed at the rising edge of each display changeover signal.

The screen display for the multiple part systems is a screen for displaying one of the part systems. Thus, which part

system to be displayed is determined by these signals.

If both of these signals are started up simultaneously, they will be invalid.

[Timing chart]

[Function]

The start and end of data sampling are controlled.

[Operation]

When "#34 PLC-DEVICE" is set to "0" (or No. for this device or illegal value):

(1) When "2" is selected for "#5 Starting condition"

The sampling is started as this signal is turned ON during the trigger stand-by state.

(2) When "2" is selected for "#32 Ending condition"

The sampling is stopped as this signal is turned OFF during the sampling state.

(If a ring buffer is used for "#31 processing format", the sampling will be stopped. In other type of buffering is

selected, it enters into preparing for stop state and the sampling will be stopped because the buffer is full.)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A CRT CHANGEOVER COMPLE-

TION CRTFN Y31D

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DISPLAY CHANGEOVER $m DISP$m Y31E - Y31F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A NC DATA SAMPLING TRIGGER SMPTRG Y321

CRT changeover

CRT changeover completion (CRTFN)

Screen display

Other controller Local At least 100 ms Or more required

Screen display on other controller Local screen display

Display part system

Display changeover $1 (DISP1)

Display changeover $2 (DISP2)

$1 display $2 display $1 display

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

202

[Function]

It saves the operation history information to the saving area.

[Operation]

Turn this signal ON to save the operation history information to the saving area.

It will be used for analysing the history information when the error occurs.

- Signal history

- Alarm history

- Key operation history

(Note 1) When the saving operation history data is executed, a new operation history information cannot be saved until

the power is ON again.

(Note 2) Saved operation history will be retained even the power is turned OFF.

[Function]

This signal instructs to release "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0002" and "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0003".

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON, "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0002" and "Z99 FILE AREA ERROR 0003" are released.

Other alarms (such as 0001, 0004) will not be released.

[Caution]

Always make sure to check the details of machining program before turning this signal ON.

Refer to the Setup manual on how to release other alarms.

[Related signals]

(1) Edited data in processing (EDITDO)

(2) Edited data error (EDITERR)

[Function]

The controller can be set to emergency stop condition, like the case where emergency stop signal is given by user PLC.

[Operation]

Emergency stop occurs in the controller when the signal (QEMG) is turned ON. In this case, "Servo ready completion

(SA)" is turned OFF.

(Note) Since this signal is processed in software, response is somewhat slower, as compared with external

emergency stop signal. Approximate response is equal to 1 scan by user PLC plus 100ms.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SAVING OPERATION HISTORY

DATA HISAVE Y322

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A EDITED DATA RECOVERY

CONFIRMATION EDITOK Y323

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC EMERGENCY STOP QEMG Y327

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

203

[Function]

This signal stops all axes, and cuts OFF contactor power.

[Operation]

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns ON.

(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles).

(2) A ready OFF state occurs after all axes stop, and the contactor power of each drive unit is cut OFF.

(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns OFF.

(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.

(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.

[Caution]

(1) Handling of the PLC axis

Set so a "Door open I" signal is output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If a "Door open I" signal

is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake method due to the ready OFF state.

(2) Handling of the analog spindle

When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the

CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.

Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run

and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.

(3) Opening the door during ATC operation

When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.

[Related signals]

(1) Door open enable (DROPNS)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOOR OPEN I DOOR1 Y328

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

204

[Function]

This signal stops all axes, and cuts off contactor power.

[Operation]

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns ON.

(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles). (Axis interlock)

(2) After all axes stop, the contactor power of each drive unit is cut off. The servo READY signal does not turn OFF.

(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.

(4) Automatic operation start is valid during door interlock. Note that an interlock is applied on the axis movement.

(5) If the door interlock ("Door open II" (DOOR2) signal) turns ON during axis movement, the axis will decelerate to a

stop. The axis movement will resume when the door interlock ("Door open II" (DOOR2) signal) turns OFF.

The CNC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns OFF.

(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.

(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.

[Caution]

(1) Handling of the PLC axis

Set so a "Door open II" (DOOR2) signal is output to the CNC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC. If a "Door

open II" (DOOR2) signal is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake method due

to the ready OFF state. The remaining distance will be held in the R register being used in the PLC axis control

interface.

(2) Handling of the analog spindle

When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely stopped with the

CNC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before opening the door.

Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the forward run

and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.

(3) Opening the door during ATC operation

When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.

[Related signals]

Door open enable (DROPNS)

[Function]

This signal validates the PLC axis control in buffering mode.

[Operation]

Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in buffering mode.

If this signal has been turned OFF, the axis movement, which had been commanded in buffering mode, is canceled.

[Caution]

(1) Turning this signal ON updates the control information in single mode, such as status and machining position, even

during axis control in buffering mode.

The information is updated at the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is

recommended to turn the PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering

mode, and to refer to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in

buffering mode.

(2) Specify the axis to command in buffering mode in the control information, axis specification, for buffering mode.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOOR OPEN II DOOR2 Y329

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFER-

ING MODE VALID PABMI Y32B

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

205

[Function]

This device designate a handle when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

[Operation]

When "PLC control axis mth handle valid" (PCHm) is ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.

The 1st part system of "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn), "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn), "2nd handle axis

selection code m" (HS2mn), "2nd handle valid" (HS2Sn), "3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS3mn), "3rd handle valid"

(HS3Sn), which are used with the normal control device, are used to select each handle axis.

PLC axes are differentiated from NC axes and counted from the 1st.

Turn ON "PLC axis 1st handle valid" (PCH1), "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) and "1st handle valid"

(HS1Sn) to operate the 1st handle with PLC axis 1st axis.

[Caution]

The handle feed magnification is also used for CNC control axes.

[Function]

This signal is used to cancel the spindle synchronous control with the G114.1 command.

The spindle synchronous control with the "Spindle synchronous control" (SPSY) is not canceled.

[Operation]

The spindle synchronous control mode can be canceled by turning this signal ON.

[Related signals]

In spindle synchronous control (SPSYN1)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

Spindle phase synchronous control (SPPHS)

Spindle synchronous control phase error 1 (degree)

Spindle synchronous control phase error 2 (degree)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC CONTROL AXIS mTH HAN-

DLE VALID PCHm Y32D - Y32F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

CANCEL SSYNI Y330

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

206

[Function]

This signal is turned ON while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle clamp the same work.

[Operation]

The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned ON when the "Chuck close" signal is ON.

The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned OFF when the "Chuck close" signal is OFF.

(Note) Use the "Error temporary cancel" only when the rotation error between the basic spindle and synchronous

spindle occurs because of the "Chuck close" signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chuck close confirmation (SPCMP)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A CHUCK CLOSE SPCMPC Y331

Chuck open Chuck close Chuck close

Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

Error temporary cancel (SPDRPO)

In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

In error cancel

Synchronous spindle chuck

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close Chuck open

Chuck close confirmation

Chuck open confirmation

Chuck close (SPCMPC)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

207

[Function]

The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by turning this signal ON.

[Operation]

The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by inputting the "Spindle synchronous control" signal (SPSY). During

the spindle synchronous control mode, the synchronous spindle is controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed

commanded for the basic spindle.

Set the basic spindle, synchronous spindle and rotation direction beforehand.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)

(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(6) Spindle synchronous control Basic spindle selection

(7) Spindle synchronous control Synchronous spindle selection

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SPSY Y332

Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation

G+257/R2357

Spindle synchronous control Basic spindle select

-

Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the basic spindle. (0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th spindle (Note 1) Spindle synchronization control will not take place if a spindle not connected in serial is selected. (Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle.

G+258/R2358

Spindle synchronous control Synchronous spindle selection

-

Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the synchronous spindle. (0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th spindle (Note 3) Spindle synchronization control will not take place if a spindle not connected in serial is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected. (Note 4) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous spindle.

Y334 Spindle synchronous rotation direction

-

Designate the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation directions for spindle synchronization control. 0:The synchronous spindle rotates in the same direction as the basic spindle. 1:The synchronous spindle rotates in the reverse direction of the basic spindle.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

208

[Function]

Spindle phase synchronization starts this signal is turned ON during the spindle synchronous control mode.

[Operation]

Spindle phase synchronization starts when the "Spindle phase synchronous control" signal (SPPHS) is input during the

spindle synchronous control mode. The "Spindle phase synchronization completion" signal is output when the spindle

phase synchronization attainment level setting value (#3051 spplv) is reached.

(Note) This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during a mode other than the spindle synchronous

control mode.

(Note 1) This is turned OFF once to change the rotation speed during phase synchronization.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(4) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)

(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONI-

ZATION SPPHS Y333

Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion ON

In spindle synchronous control ON

Spindle synchronous control OFF In spindle synchronous control OFF

Spindle phase synchronous control ON

Spindle phase synchronization completion ON

Spindle phase synchronous control OFF

(Note1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

209

[Function]

The synchronous spindle's rotation direction is designated with this signal. Select whether the direction is the same as or

the reverse of the basic spindle.

[Operation]

Designate the rotation direction for the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during spindle synchronous control.

0: Synchronous spindle rotates in same direction as basic spindle.

1: Synchronous spindle rotates in reverse direction of basic spindle.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

(5) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS RO-

TATION DIRECTION SPSDR Y334

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

210

[Function]

This signal calculates the phase error of the basic spindle during rotation synchronization, and requests that it be saved

in the CNC memory.

[Operation]

The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is saved in the CNC memory when this signal is ON and

the rotation synchronization command's (with no R address command) spindle synchronization is completed (when

"Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion" signal is ON).

This signal turns ON when the spindle rotation is stopped before the rotation synchronization command.

(Note 1) The phase cannot be aligned when calculating the phase shift.

(Note 2) If the handle mode is selected as the manual operation mode, the synchronous spindle cannot be rotated with

the handle.

[Related signals]

(1) Phase Offset request (SSPHF)

(2) Spindle synchronization phase error output

(3) Spindle synchronization phase Offset data

[Function]

This signal requests that the phase be aligned to the value obtained by adding the value commanded with the phase

synchronization command's R address to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved with the

"Phase shift calculation request" (SSPHM) signal.

[Operation]

If phase synchronization is commanded (with R address command) while this signal is ON, the basic spindle and

synchronous spindle phases will be aligned to attain the phase error obtained by adding the value commanded with the

R address command to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the CNC memory.

[Related signals]

(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

(2) Spindle synchronization phase error output

(3) Spindle synchronization phase Offset data

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PHASE SHIFT CALCULATION

REQUEST SSPHM Y335

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PHASE OFFSET REQUEST SSPHF Y336

Spindle synchronous control ON

Phase shift calculation request ON Phase shift calculation request OFF

Spindle synchronous control OFF

Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM)

The phase error occurred in this interval is saved.(Synchronous spindle can be controlled with handle.)

Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.9 Bit Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

211

[Function]

This signal cancels the error caused by the speed fluctuation when the chuck is closed.

When the chuck is closed, the speed will fluctuate due to external causes. An error will occur between the basic spindle's

position and the synchronous spindle's position due to this speed fluctuation. This signal is used to cancel this error. (If

spindle synchronization is attempted when closing the chuck without canceling this error, torsion could occur.)

[Operation]

The error between the basic spindle's position and synchronous spindle's position is saved when this signal changes

from OFF to ON. The saved error is canceled and the spindle is synchronized while this signal is ON. (Even if the chuck

close signal is OFF, the error will be canceled while the "Error temporary cancel" signal is ON.)

(Note 1) Turn this signal ON after the chucks on both the basic spindle side and synchronous spindle side have closed

and grasped the chuck.

(Note 2) Turn this signal OFF when the either the basic spindle side or synchronous spindle side chuck is open.

(Example)

(1) Close the basic spindle side chuck.

(2) Start spindle synchronization (G114.1).

(3) Close the synchronous spindle side chuck.

(The speed will fluctuate due to external causes at this time, and an error will occur.)

(4) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" (SPCMP) signal, check that the chucks are closed.

(5) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" (SPDRPO) signal ON, and cancel the error.

(6) Execute machining with spindle synchronous control.

(7) Open the chuck on the synchronous spindle side.

(8) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" (SPCMP) signal, check that the chuck is opened.

(9) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" (SPDRPO) signal OFF, and stop the error cancellation.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPHA)

(4) Chuck close confirmation (SPCMP)

(5) Chuck close (SPCMPC)

[Function]

The near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return is input.

[Operation]

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A ERROR TEMPORARY CANCEL SPDRPO Y337

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

B PLC AXIS NEAR POINT DETEC-

TION m-TH AXIS *PCDm Y338 - Y33F

Signal abbreviation Signal name

*PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis

*PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis

*PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis

*PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis

*PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis

*PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis

*PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis

*PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

212

[Function]

This signal validates the PLC axis control in single mode.

[Operation]

Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in single mode.

Status, alarm details and machine position of each axis can be referred.

If this signal has been turned OFF, status, alarm details and machine position are not updated. The axis movement,

which has been commanded in single mode, is canceled. The PLC axis control is executed upon the control information

data while the PLC axis control valid signal is ON.

[Function]

This signal designates the download request to FTP server.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON, the file transfer is requested to FTP server.

When the designated file exists, it will be downloaded to the buffer memory.

This signal should be ON until download is finished. If this signal is turned OFF during the download, download will be

interrupted and the download in progress signal will also be turned OFF.

The file transfer will not begun during the TAPE mode operation (OP). Turn this signal ON again after the operation is

finished.

[Related signals]

(1) Download in progress (DLOAD0)

(2) Download completed (DLDFIN)

(3) Download error (DLDERR)

[Function] [Operation]

This signal is an interface for sending a signal from PLC device to APLC C language module .

[Function]

This is the skip input signal from the PLC. (m = 1 to 32)

The skip condition can be created to perform skip operation.

Skipping is implemented in accordance with the logical sum of high-speed skip (hardware-fixed signals) and PLC skip

conditions.

[Operation]

This can be used for the skip related functions. (G31 skip, tool length measurement, etc.)

[Caution]

When PLC skip is used, the coasting amount from the skip signal input will be slightly longer than the high speed skip.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-

TH AXIS PLCAEm Y340 - Y347

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A DOWNLOAD REQUEST DLDREQ Y350

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A APLC OUTPUT SIGNAL n APL-

COUTn Y380 - Y39F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC SKIP PSKIPm Y3A0 - Y3BF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

213

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function]

Desired control axis can be specified to be exempted from control function.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When "Control axis detach" signal (DTCHn) turns ON, the corresponding axis is exempted from control.

(1) Specified axis is not under any positioning control (oriented spindle stop, index, etc.)

(2) "Servo alarm", "Stroke end alarm" and other alarms are not applied to specified axis.

(3) Interlock signal applied to specified axis is deemed to be ON.

(4) Specified axis is displayed by the setting and display unit.

(Note 1) The same function can be used by setting parameter on the setting and display unit. (See below)

The control axis detach is valid when the following are valid:

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A CONTROL AXIS DETACH DTCHn

Y400 Y430 Y460 Y490 Y4C0 Y4F0 Y520 Y550

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y580 Y5B0 Y5E0 Y610 Y640 Y670 Y6A0 Y6D0

Basic specification parameter "#1070 axoff" (axis detach), and control axis detach n-th axis(DTCHn)

or

Basic specification parameter "#1070 axoff" (axis detach), and axis parameter of machining parameter "#8201 AX. RELEASE"

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

214

[Function]

Control axis (axis motion under control) can be set to "Servo OFF" (i.e., servo motor remains still).

In servo OFF condition, positioning control is impossible but the position detect function is alive.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When "Servo OFF" signal (*SVFn) turns OFF, the corresponding control axis is set to servo OFF condition.

Whether displacement which was caused during servo OFF by external force is corrected when "Servo ON" signal is

given, or not, can be determined by setting parameter. (#1064 svof Error correction)

(1) When displacement is corrected (follow-up):

- An amount of motion equal to the displacement is commanded so that positioning error becomes zero.

- In this case, machine position remains deviated from in-position when "Servo OFF" signal is restored. The current

position read by position counter is corrected and the machine position is corrected when the next absolute motion

command is given ("Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is turned ON when manual operation is selected).

(2) When displacement is not corrected:

- In this case, machine position should be corrected when "Servo OFF" signal is restored.

(Example) Servo-OFF during motion

*1: Servo turns OFF after deceleration and stopping during axis motion.

*2, 3: Controller internal interlock by servo OFF (axis motion not possible)

[Caution]

These signals are all handled as B contacts.

[Function]

This signal is used to machine a symmetrical shape by reversing the sign for the movement amount per block.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

Symmetrical cutting is enabled by reversing the sign of the value commanded for memory or MDI operation.

(1)Regardless of whether the coordinate is commanded with an incremental mode or absolute mode, the mirror image is

applied ON the incremental amount to be executed for all axes that can be controlled.

(Note) The mirror image is changed after block stop.

[Related signals]

(1) In mirror image (MIRn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B SERVO OFF *SVFn

Y401 Y431 Y461 Y491 Y4C1 Y4F1 Y521 Y551

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y581 Y5B1 Y5E1 Y611 Y641 Y671 Y6A1 Y6D1

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MIRROR IMAGE MIn

Y402 Y432 Y462 Y492 Y4C2 Y4F2 Y522 Y552

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y582 Y5B2 Y5E2 Y612 Y642 Y672 Y6A2 Y6D2

Servo OFF (*SVFn)

Axis motion

Servo ready n-th axis

*2

*1

*3

Approx. 0.7 s

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

215

[Function]

The feedrate when the control axis is moving in the + direction can be controlled while this signal (*+EDTn) is OFF, at a

constant speed set with the parameters.

Control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the control

axis No.

"#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid" selects whether it is common setting for all axes or setting

for each axis. (0: Common setting for all axes, 1: Setting for each axis)

[Operation]

During manual mode when the "External deceleration +" (*+EDTn) signal turns OFF, each axis decelerates

independently. However, during automatic mode, all axes will decelerate at the same deceleration speed when even one

axis matches the external deceleration conditions. The deceleration occurs when the movement axis direction matches

the "External deceleration" signal direction of the corresponding axis.

(1) The external deceleration speed can be randomly set with the parameters. (Common setting for all

axes:#1216 extdcc, setting for each axis: #2086 exdcax1, #2161 exdcax2 to #2165 exdcax6)

(2) When the speed is less than the external deceleration speed, it will not be affected even if this signal is OFF.

(3) The deceleration speed during automatic operation will be the combined deceleration speed, if the

deceleration conditions match and the external deceleration speed is exceeded.

(4) When returning in the reverse direction, the speed will immediately return to the correct command speed.

(5) For G28, G29 and G30 commands, the speed will become the external deceleration speed for that axis only,

even in automatic operation.

(6) The speed will become the external deceleration speed even in rapid traverse during synchronous tapping.

(7) About combined speed when the external deceleration signal is multiple axes valid When the combined speed

exceeds the lowest external deceleration speed among the axes that the external deceleration signal valid, it

slows the combined speed to its lowest external deceleration speed.

[Caution]

(1) The unused axis must be put into invalidating an external deceleration by setting "1" with PLC program.

[Related signals]

(1) External deceleration - (*-EDTn)

(2) External deceleration speed selection

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B EXTERNAL DECELERATION + *+EDTn

Y403 Y433 Y463 Y493 Y4C3 Y4F3 Y523 Y553

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y583 Y5B3 Y5E3 Y613 Y643 Y673 Y6A3 Y6D3

Axis movement + direction movement

External deceleration speed

External deceleration+ (*+EDTn)

External deceleration- (*-EDTn) *-EDTn is invalid during + direction movement

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

216

[Function][Operation]

The functions and operations of this signal are the same as those of "External deceleration + nth axis" signal (*+EDTn).

The deceleration occurs when the movement is in the minus direction and the "External deceleration - nth axis" signal (*-

EDTn) is OFF.

[Related signals]

(1)External deceleration +(*+EDTn)

(2) External deceleration speed selection

[Function]

All axis motions of machine can be decelerated and stopped immediately during automatic operation when motion of a

specific axis (nth axis) in plus direction activates the interlock function.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When this signal turns OFF for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under automatic operation mode (memory,

MDI), motion of all axis decelerates and stops with "M01 operation error code 004" displayed.

With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the system completes calculation for axis motion but makes it remain

stopped with the same operation error code displayed. In either case, setting the signal ON resumes or starts axis

motion.

[Caution]

(1) All automatic interlock + (*+AITn) signals are for B contact.

(2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic interlock -(*-AITn)

(2) Manual interlock +/- (*+/-MITn)

[Function][Operation]

The details are the same as the "Automatic interlock +" (*+AITn) signal, except that the direction is opposite.

The "Automatic interlock +" (*+AITn) signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal is valid for the

axis moving in the minus direction.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic interlock + (*+AITn)

(2) Manual interlock +/- (*+/-MITn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B EXTERNAL DECELERATION - *-EDTn

Y404 Y434 Y464 Y494 Y4C4 Y4F4 Y524 Y554

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y584 Y5B4 Y5E4 Y614 Y644 Y674 Y6A4 Y6D4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK + *+AITn

Y405 Y435 Y465 Y495 Y4C5 Y4F5 Y525 Y555

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y585 Y5B5 Y5E5 Y615 Y645 Y675 Y6A5 Y6D5

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK - *-AITn

Y406 Y436 Y466 Y496 Y4C6 Y4F6 Y526 Y556

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y586 Y5B6 Y5E6 Y616 Y646 Y676 Y6A6 Y6D6

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

217

[Function]

When the corresponding axis is moving in the plus direction with manual operation (jog, manual, incremental, reference

position return), only the corresponding axis can be decelerated and stopped by turning OFF this signal that corresponds

to that axis.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When this signal turns OFF (0) for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under manual operation mode (jog,

handle, incremental, reference position return), motion of the axis decelerates and stops with NC alarm "M01

OPERATION ERROR 0004" displayed.

With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the system completes calculation for axis motion but makes it remain

stopped with the same operation error code displayed. In either case, setting the signal ON (1) resumes or starts axis

motion.

[Caution]

(1) All manual interlock + (*+MITn) signals are for B contact.

(2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.

[Related signals]

(1) Manual interlock - (*-MITn:)

(2) Automatic interlock +/- (*+/-AITn)

[Function][Operation]

The details are the same as the "Manual interlock +nth axis" signal, except that the direction is opposite.

The "Manual interlock +nth axis" signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal is valid for the axis

moving in the minus direction.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Related signals]

(1) Manual interlock + (*+MITn)

(2) Automatic interlock +/- (*+/-AITn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B MANUAL INTERLOCK + *+MITn

Y407 Y437 Y467 Y497 Y4C7 Y4F7 Y527 Y557

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y587 Y5B7 Y5E7 Y617 Y647 Y677 Y6A7 Y6D7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

B MANUAL INTERLOCK - *-MITn

Y408 Y438 Y468 Y498 Y4C8 Y4F8 Y528 Y558

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y588 Y5B8 Y5E8 Y618 Y648 Y678 Y6A8 Y6D8

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

218

[Function]

During automatic operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to check program.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

In the automatic operation (memory, MDI), when this signal is ON, the current position (counter) can be changed on a

specific axis (for which the signal is ON) without actual machine motion. If the signal turns ON in the middle of a block

(during motion), block termination occurs after the completion of that block, and then the machine lock will be valid for the

following blocks.

[Caution]

(1) If "Auto machine lock" (AMLKn) signal changes during automatic operation, block stop occurs after completion of

the block in execution.

(2) To move only the table without drilling to confirm the drilling position, turn ON the signal for the 3rd axis (AMLK3) if

the drilling axis is the 3rd axis.

(Equivalent to Z axis cancel)

[Related signals]

(1) Manual machine lock (MMLKn)

[Function]

During manual operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to check program.

[Operation]

When this signal is ON, current position can be changed on a specific axis (nth axis) without actual machine motion. If

the signal turns ON or OFF during execution of a block, the operation continues until it is completed. It is required to stop

motion of all axes to validate the machine lock.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic machine lock (AMLKn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A AUTOMATIC MACHINE LOCK AMLKn

Y409 Y439 Y469 Y499 Y4C9 Y4F9 Y529 Y559

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y589 Y5B9 Y5E9 Y619 Y649 Y679 Y6A9 Y6D9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MANUAL MACHINE LOCK MMLKn

Y40A Y43A Y46A Y49A Y4CA Y4FA Y52A Y55A

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y58A Y5BA Y5EA Y61A Y64A Y67A Y6AA Y6DA

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

219

[Function]

This signal is used to start motion (jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return mode) in plus direction during

manual operation.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When "Feed axis select" signal (+Jn) turns ON, the following motion occurs.

(1) When jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return is possible, motion in plus direction occurs on the

selected axis.

(2) In jog feed, motion continues while the signal is ON.

(3) In incremental feed, amount (length) of motion depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed magnification". The

motion is in plus direction. Even when signal (+Jn) turns OFF during motion, the motion (feed) does not stop. To

start the motion again, turn ON the signal after the preceding motion has been completed.

(4) After reference position return mode is decelerated to approach speed by the near point detect dog, the motion

continues, even after the feed axis selection + (+Jn) signal is turned OFF, until motion reaches the reference

position.

(Note 1) If feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn) signals turn ON at the same time, neither plus signal nor minus signal is

selected (same as the case where feed axis select signal is OFF.)

(Note 2) If this signal turns ON before jog, incremental or reference position return mode is selected, this signal is

ignored. In this case, the signal should be turned OFF and then ON.

(Note 3) If reset is exerted while this signal is ON, or " this signal turns ON during reset, the this signal is ignored even

when the reset condition is canceled. In this case, this signal should be turned OFF and then ON.

(Note 4) This signal will be invalid even if turned ON while the corresponding axis is decelerating (when command

output is not completed). The signal must be turned OFF and ON again after the deceleration has completed

completely (command output is completed). Special care is required when the feed axis direction changes.

(Note 5) In the 2nd part system specifications, even if this signal of 1st part system and 2nd part system turn ON in the

same cycle (scan) of the sequence, the start up may not be completely simultaneous.

[Related signals]

(1) Feed axis selection - (-Jn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A FEED AXIS SELECTION + +Jn

Y40B Y43B Y46B Y49B Y4CB Y4FB Y52B Y55B

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y58B Y5BB Y5EB Y61B Y64B Y67B Y6AB Y6DB

Jog mode (Jn)

Feed axis selection (+Jn)

1st axis motion [+]

Incremental feed mode (Sn)

Feed axis selection (+Jn)

1st axis motion [+]

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

220

[Function]

This signal is used to feed the axis in the minus (-) direction during jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return

mode in manual operation.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

(Refer to the "Feed axis selection + nth axis" for details.)

[Operation]

The operation is the same as the feed axis selection + (+Jn).

Use this signal to move in the minus (-) direction.

[Related signals]

(1) Feed axis selection + (+Jn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A FEED AXIS SELECTION - -Jn

Y40C Y43C Y46C Y49C Y4CC Y4FC Y52C Y55C

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y58C Y5BC Y5EC Y61C Y64C Y67C Y6AC Y6DC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

221

[Function]

The automatic mode (MDI, memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog, manual reference position return) can be

simultaneously selected allowing manual operation during automatic operation. (Arbitrary feed with the PLC is also

possible.)

[Operation]

The manual/auto simultaneous mode is entered when the automatic mode and manual mode are selected

simultaneously. The manual operation axis is selected with this signal during the manual/auto mode. The manual

operation axes (MAEn) are selected individually for each axis.

The axis selected with this signal can be operated in the manual mode during automatic operation.

(Note 1) If an axis command is issued to a manual operation axis from the automatic mode, the "M01 OPERATION

ERROR 0005" will occur. The automatic operation will be interlocked until the operation error is canceled.

(Note 2) During the automatic mode (when manual is not selected and manual/auto simultaneous mode is not entered),

this signal will be invalid and the interlock will not be applied.

(Note 3) If this signal turns ON in respect to an axis commanded with automatic during the manual/auto simultaneous

mode, an interlock will be applied on the axis, and the axis will immediately decelerate and stop. (The "M01

OPERATION ERROR 0005" will occur.)

After decelerating and stopping, operation with the manual mode will be possible. Note that the interlock will

also be applied during the tap modal.

(Note 4) During the manual/auto simultaneous mode and the automatic mode, the manual axis command for which this

signal is OFF will be invalid. Note that interruption with the manual handle will be possible.

(Note 5) The feedrates for the automatic command axis and the manual command axis are different. The acceleration/

deceleration mode (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are also independent.

(Note 6) The rapid traverse override, cutting feed override and 2nd cutting feedrate override are valid for both the

automatic command axis and manual command axis. (Note that the cutting and 2nd cutting overrides to the

manual command axis are valid when the manual cutting override is valid.) Override cancel is valid for the

automatic command axis.

(Note 7) The manual interlock is valid for the manual command axis, and the automatic interlock is valid for the

automatic command axis.

(Note 8) The in-cutting feed and in-rapid traverse signals will follow the automatic command axis movement mode.

(Note 9) The axis moving with manual movement will not stop with single block stop or feed hold.

(Note 10) If the G92 and G53 commands are issued in the manual mode to an axis for which this signal is ON, the G92

and G53 commands will be executed after the manual axis movement stops. (An axis command with G53 will

cause an operation error after the manual axis movement stops.)

(Note 11) If a soft limit or OT is applied on the manual command axis during the manual/auto simultaneous mode, the

automatic command axis will also decelerate to a stop, and will enter the feed hold state.

The operation of the automatic handle interruption during the manual/auto mode is as follows.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SIMUL-

TANEOUS VALID MAEn

Y40D Y43D Y46D Y49D Y4CD Y4FD Y52D Y55D

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y58D Y5BD Y5ED Y61D Y64D Y67D Y6AD Y6DD

Axis for which manual/auto valid signal is ON Axis for which manual/auto valid signal is OFF

Handle mode selection

Automatic handle interrupt

The specifications of the manual/auto simultaneous mode will be followed. The automatic axis command will cause an operation error, and only the manual axis command will be valid.

The specifications of the automatic handle interruption will be followed. Interruption with the handle can be applied in respect to the automatic axis movement.

Manual mode other than handle Same as above Same as above

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

222

[Function]

A control axis can be excluded from the control targets with this function.

Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number (n = 1, 2, 3...) of the signal abbreviation indicates the

control axis No.

[Operation]

When the "Control axis detach 2" signal (DTCH2n) turns ON, the corresponding axis is excluded from the control targets.

(1) Position control cannot be carried out, but the position is not lost because the position detection is valid.

(2) The "Interlock" signal of the corresponding axis is considered turned ON.

(3) The corresponding axis also appears in the CRT position display.

[Related signals]

(1) Control axis detach (DTCHn)

[Function][Operation]

This signal turns on when validating the current limit.

The current limit parameter switches from SV013 to SV014.

Release the droop and move the command value to the FB position.

(Note 1) The axis that droop release invalid axis is set does not execute the droop release.

[Related signals]

(1) In current limit (ILIn)

(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)

(3) Droop release request (DORn)

(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)

(5) Current limit changeover

(6) Droop release invalid axis

[Function][Operation]

During the current limit control, release the droop generated by the current limit and follow the FB position.

(Note 1) The axis that the droop release invalid axis is set does not execute the droop release.

[Related signals]

(1) In current limit (ILIn)

(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)

(3) Current limit changeover (ILCn)

(4) Current limit mode m (ILMmn)

(5) Current limit changeover

(6) Droop release invalid axis

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2 DTCH2n

Y40E Y43E Y46E Y49E Y4CE Y4FE Y52E Y55E

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y58E Y5BE Y5EE Y61E Y64E Y67E Y6AE Y6DE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A CURRENT LIMIT CHANGE-

OVER ILCn

Y410 Y440 Y470 Y4A0 Y4D0 Y500 Y530 Y560

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y590 Y5C0 Y5F0 Y620 Y650 Y680 Y6B0 Y6E0

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A DROOP RELEASE REQUEST DORn

Y411 Y441 Y471 Y4A1 Y4D1 Y501 Y531 Y561

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y591 Y5C1 Y5F1 Y621 Y651 Y681 Y6B1 Y6E1

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

223

[Function]

This selects the zero point initialization set with the marked point alignment method I/II in the absolute position detection

system.

[Operation]

The zero point initialization set is selected with this signal.

Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.

(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the operation

mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.

(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.

- When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position detection system.

- When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4".

[Related signals]

(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)

(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)

(3) In initialization

(4) Initialization incomplete

(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn)

[Function]

This is used to set a random position as the origin during zero point initialization set using the marked point alignment

method in the absolute position detection system I/II.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when a corresponding axis is moved in the zero point initialization set mode, and the position to be

set as the zero point is reached.

Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.

(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the operation

mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.

(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.

- When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position detection system.

- When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2" or "4".

(Note 3) This signal will be invalid in the following states.

- During emergency stop

- During reset

- When the "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point initialization set

mode" (AZSn) signal. In this case, turn this signal OFF once, and then turn it ON again.

- When the grid (Z-phase signal provided per motor rotation) has not been passed once after the power is

turned ON.

[Related signals]

(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn)

(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn)

(3) In initialization

(4) Initialization incomplete

(5) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION

SET MODE AZSn

Y412 Y442 Y472 Y4A2 Y4D2 Y502 Y532 Y562

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y592 Y5C2 Y5F2 Y622 Y652 Y682 Y6B2 Y6E2

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION

SET START ZSTn

Y413 Y443 Y473 Y4A3 Y4D3 Y503 Y533 Y563

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y593 Y5C3 Y5F3 Y623 Y653 Y683 Y6B3 Y6E3

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

224

[Function]

This signal indicates that unclamping has been completed in respect to the unclamp command from the CNC.

[Operation]

When the unclamp command (UCLPn) signal turns ON, the clamp on the corresponding axis is released by the PLC,

and then this signal turns ON.

When the unclamp command (UCLPn) turns OFF, the corresponding axis is clamped by the PLC, and then this signal

turns OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Unclamp command (UCLPn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A UNCLAMP COMPLETION UCLPFn

Y415 Y445 Y475 Y4A5 Y4D5 Y505 Y535 Y565

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y595 Y5C5 Y5F5 Y625 Y655 Y685 Y6B5 Y6E5

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

225

[Function]

This signal is used to execute the multi-step speed monitor for the control axes.

This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".

(Note) Refer to "5.1 PLC Axis Control" when using PLC axes.

[Operation]

When this signal turns ON, NC operates as follows.

(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters.

(2) Checks if NC's speed monitor parameters match with the speed monitor parameters sent to the drive unit.

(3) Notifies a speed monitor command to the drive unit.

(4) Executes the speed monitor function on NC.

(5) Turns the "Speed monitor door open possible" signal ON when receiving the "In speed monitor mode" signal from

the drive unit.

The followings are monitored while the multi-step speed monitor function is executed.

(Note) Use "Multi-step speed monitor input" (MSOMImn) to select which to use among the parameters from "#2181

sscfeed1 Safety observation speed 1" to "#2184 sscfeed4 Safety observation speed 4".

[Timing chart]

[Caution]

(1) Be sure to confirm the deceleration speed of the axis before turning this signal ON. Turning the signal ON without

decelerating the speed will cause the safety observation warning due to the FB speed exceeding the monitoring

speed. The speed monitor mode will not be entered in the mean time.

(2) Turning this signal ON while a parameter error occurs will not start the speed monitor. Set the parameter to

appropriate value before turning the signal ON.

[Related signals]

(1) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)

(2) Multi-step speed monitor mode input (MSOMImn)

(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR

REQUEST MSORn

Y416 Y446 Y476 Y4A6 Y4D6 Y506 Y536 Y566

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y596 Y5C6 Y5F6 Y626 Y656 Y686 Y6B6 Y6E6

Item Details

Command speed monitoring When a command speed that NC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with a parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.

Feedback speed monitoring When a motor rotation speed sent from the drive unit to NC exceeds a safety rotation speed set with the parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.

Feedback position monitoring When a difference between feedback position sent from the drive unit to NC and a position commanded by NC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

FB speed

Emergency stop

Multi-step speed monitor request

In multi-step speed monitor

Safety observation speed

Changing the speed

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

226

[Function]

This signal designates which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-

step speed monitoring.

This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".

[Operation]

When the signals' state is changed, the safety observation speed of the designated mode will be transferred to the drive

and the "Multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals' state will also be changed. (It will be changed

even when "In multi-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) is OFF.)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR

MODE INPUT m MSOMImn

Y417 to 418

Y447 to 448

Y477 to 478

Y4A7 to 4A8

Y4D7 to 4D8

Y507 to 508

Y537 to 538

Y567 to 568

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y597 to 598

Y5C7 to 5C8

Y5F7 to 5F8

Y627 to 628

Y657 to 658

Y687 to 688

Y6B7 to 6B8

Y6E7 to 6E8

Multi-step speed monitor mode input m Speed monitor mode to be selected

Corresponding safety observation speed parameter

MSOMI2n MSOMI1n

0 0 1 #2181 sscfeed1

0 1 2 #2182 sscfeed2

1 0 3 #2183 sscfeed3

1 1 4 #2184 sscfeed4

Multi-step speed monitor mode input

Multi-step speed monitor mode output

Mode 2 Mode 3

Safety observation speed 2

Mode 1

Safety observation speed 1NC side speed monitor

Drive side speed monitor Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2

Safety observation speed 3

Safety observation speed 3

Mode 2 Mode 3Mode 1

FB speed

Safety observation speed 1 Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

* When changing the mode, be sure to decelerate before chaging it.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.10 Bit Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

227

[Caution]

(1) Before changing these signals' state while "In multi-step speed monitor" is ON, be sure to decelerate the axis below

the monitor speed of the mode to be changed. When the signals' state has been changed before deceleration

starts, the safety observation warning will be output until the speed decelerates below the monitor speed of the

mode to be changed, and the speed monitor mode will not be changed in the meantime.

(2) Do not open the door before the "Multi-step speed monitor mode output" (MSOMOmn) signals for all axes in the

door are changed to the desired mode, even when the "In mult-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) signals are ON for all

axes in the door.

[Related signals]

(1) Multi-step speed monitor (MSORn)

(2) In multi-step speed monitor (MSOEn)

(3) Multi-step speed monitor mode output (MSOMOmn)

[Function]

Set each axis's relative values displayed to "0".

[Operation]

The relative value counter of corresponding axis is set to "0" when this signal is ON.

[Caution]

- Only the relative value counter is set to "0" when this signal is ON. Workpiece coordinate value and the machine

position counter will not change.

- This signal is valid during the program operation.

- The relative values of the primary axis and the secondary axis will both be set to "0" when this signals for the primary

axis during the synchronous control is ON.

- This signal for the secondary axis is invalid during the synchronous control.

- The signal must be ON for at least 15ms.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A COUNTER ZERO CNT0n

Y41A Y44A Y47A Y4AA Y4DA Y50A Y53A Y56A

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y59A Y5CA Y5FA Y62A Y65A Y68A Y6BA Y6EA

Speed

Safety observation warning

Multi-step speed monitor request

Monitor speed of mode 1

Monitor speed of mode 2

In multi-step speed monitor

Safety observation warning

Multi-step speed monitor mode input

Multi-step speed monitor mode output

Mode 1 Mode 2

Mode 1 Mode 2

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

228

[Function]

This signal can switch between NC axis and PLC axis.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC axis. When it is turned OFF, it is controlled as the NC

axis.

Switch this signal after confirming the axis switching invalid signal is OFF.

When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while axis switching invalid signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/

PLC axis switch illegal 1250" will occur. If the axis switching invalid signal is OFF with this state, NC axis and PLC axis

are switched and the alarm will be cleared.

If this signal is switched while executing the axis movement command, NC axis and PLC axis will be switched when the

command is completed and the axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF.

(1) If the PLC switching signal is turned ON when the "axis switching invalid status" signal is OFF (switching is

permitted), the NC axis changes over to the PLC axis control state, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned

ON.

(2) The NC axis does not change over to the NC axis control by turning OFF the "PLC axis switching" signal when the

"axis switching invalid status" signal is ON (where switching is prohibited). An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch

illegal 1250" will occur.

(3) Axis switching invalid status signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. Then the NC axis changes

over to the NC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)

(2) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A PLC AXIS SWITCHING CHGPLCn

Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB

(1) (2)

(CHGPLCn)

(AXCHGISn)

(PLCMODEn)

(3)

0

PLC axis switching

Axis switching invalid status

In PLC axis control

Feedrate

In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

229

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC

CPU)

[Function]

JOG operation mode (manual operation) is selected.

[Operation]

When JOG mode (Jn) signal turns ON, JOG operation mode is selected.

Axis motion is started by turning ON the "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal after turning ON the jog mode and

setting the "Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)" signal.

For rapid traverse, "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is turned ON together with this signal (Jn).

If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will

occur.

[Related signals]

(1)Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)

(2)Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(3)Rapid traverse (RTn)

[Function]

"Handle feed operation" mode (manual operation) is selected.

[Operation]

When HANDLE mode (Hn) signal is turned ON, HANDLE FEED mode is selected.

Axis motion starts when the manual pulse generator handwheel is rotated after axis is selected by handle axis selection

code (HS1mn, HS1Sn, HS2mn, HS2Sn, HS3mn, HS3mn) and this signal is turned ON. Speed of the axis motion

depends on setting of feedrate magnification (Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)).

If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will

occur.

The handle feed speed is clamped at the rapid traverse speed (at the external deceleration speed when the external

deceleration is valid) .The speed clamping method can be selected from clamping with the feedrate by the parameter

"#1281 ext17/bit4" or clamping with the handle input pulse number.

[Related signals]

(1)1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn), 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)

(2)2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn), 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn) .....Valid only for handle 2-axis spec.

(3)3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn), 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn) ......Valid only for handle 3-axis spec.

(4)Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A JOG MODE Jn Y700 Y7E0 Y8C0 Y9A0 YA80 YB60 YC40

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A HANDLE MODE Hn Y701 Y7E1 Y8C1 Y9A1 YA81 YB61 YC41

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

230

[Function]

INCREMENTAL FEED mode (manual operation) is selected.

[Operation]

When incremental mode command (Sn) signal is turned ON, INCREMENTAL FEED mode is selected.

Each time "Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal for desired axis is turned ON, axis motion starts. Speed of the axis

motion (incremental feed) depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m" (MPmn).

When "Rapid traverse" signal (RTn) is ON, speed is the rapid traverse speed. When signal (RTn) is OFF, speed is equal

to "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn).

If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101"

will occur.

(Note 1) The incremental mode is also called the step mode.

[Related signals]

(1)Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)

(2)Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)

(3)Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(4)Rapid traverse (RTn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A INCREMENTAL MODE Sn Y702 Y7E2 Y8C2 Y9A2 YA82 YB62 YC42

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

231

[Function]

Manual arbitrary feed mode in manual operation is selected.

[Operation]

Manual arbitrary feed mode is selected when this signal is turned ON ("1").

[Caution]

To turn the manual arbitrary feed mode ON, the rest of the manual modes and the automatic mode must be OFF (0).

Otherwise, this mode cannot be selected. (Note that this mode can be selected simultaneously when manual/automatic

simultaneous is valid.)

[Related signals]

(1)Signals from PLC to controller

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

MODE PTPn Y703 Y7E3 Y8C3 Y9A3 YA83 YB63 YC43

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+073 +087 +101 +115 +129 +143 +157 <- Sharing G

Y790 Y870 Y950 YA30 YB10 YBF0 YCD0 CX11n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1

Y791 Y871 Y951 YA31 YB11 YBF1 YCD1 CX12n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2

Y792 Y872 Y952 YA32 YB12 YBF2 YCD2 CX14n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 4

Y793 Y873 Y953 YA33 YB13 YBF3 YCD3 CX18n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 8

Y794 Y874 Y954 YA34 YB14 YBF4 YCD4 CX116n Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 16

Y795 Y875 Y955 YA35 YB15 YBF5 YCD5

Y796 Y876 Y956 YA36 YB16 YBF6 YCD6

Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7 CX1Sn Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid

Y798 Y878 Y958 YA38 YB18 YBF8 YCD8 CX21n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 1

Y799 Y879 Y959 YA39 YB19 YBF9 YCD9 CX22n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2

Y79A Y87A Y95A YA3A YB1A YBFA YCDA CX24n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4

Y79B Y87B Y95B YA3B YB1B YBFB YCDB CX28n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8

Y79C Y87C Y95C YA3C YB1C YBFC YCDC CX216n Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16

Y79D Y87D Y95D YA3D YB1D YBFD YCDD

Y79E Y87E Y95E YA3E YB1E YBFE YCDE

Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF CX2Sn Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev. Signal name

+074 +088 +102 +116 +130 +144 +158 <- Sharing G

Y7A0 Y880 Y960 YA40 YB20 YC00 YCE0 CX31n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 1

Y7A1 Y881 Y961 YA41 YB21 YC01 YCE1 CX32n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2

Y7A2 Y882 Y962 YA42 YB22 YC02 YCE2 CX34n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 4

Y7A3 Y883 Y963 YA43 YB23 YC03 YCE3 CX38n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 8

Y7A4 Y884 Y964 YA44 YB24 YC04 YCE4 CX316n Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 16

Y7A5 Y885 Y965 YA45 YB25 YC05 YCE5

Y7A6 Y886 Y966 YA46 YB26 YC06 YCE6

Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7 CX3Sn Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid

Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8 CXS1n Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off

Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9 CXS2n Manual arbitrary feed axis independent

Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA CXS3n Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F

Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB CXS4n Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1

Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC CXS5n Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK

Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED CXS6n Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC

Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE *CXS7n Manual arbitrary feed stop

Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF CXS8n Manual arbitrary feed strobe

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

232

(2) Signals from controller to PLC

(a)In manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPOn)

(b)In manual arbitrary feed (CXNn)

(c)Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFINn)

(3)Other

(a)Feedrate least increment m (PCFmn)

(b)Manual/automatic simultaneous valid (MAEn)

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7 abbrev

. Signal nameSharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al Sharin

g G Intern

al

+308 R2408 +408 R2508 +508 R2608 +608 R2708 +708 R2808 +808 R2908 +908 R3008 1st handle/incremental feed magnification+309 R2409 +409 R2509 +509 R2609 +609 R2709 +709 R2809 +809 R2909 +909 R3009

+310 R2410 +410 R2510 +510 R2610 +610 R2710 +710 R2810 +810 R2910 +910 R3010 2nd handle feed magnification

+311 R2411 +411 R2511 +511 R2611 +611 R2711 +711 R2811 +811 R2911 +911 R3011

+312 R2412 +412 R2512 +512 R2612 +612 R2712 +712 R2812 +812 R2912 +912 R3012 3rd handle feed magnification

+313 R2413 +413 R2513 +513 R2613 +613 R2713 +713 R2813 +813 R2913 +913 R3013

+314 R2414 +414 R2514 +514 R2614 +614 R2714 +714 R2814 +814 R2914 +914 R3014 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount+315 R2415 +415 R2515 +515 R2615 +615 R2715 +715 R2815 +815 R2915 +915 R3015

+316 R2416 +416 R2516 +516 R2616 +616 R2716 +716 R2816 +816 R2916 +916 R3016 Manual arbitrary feed 2st axis travel amount+317 R2417 +417 R2517 +517 R2617 +617 R2717 +717 R2817 +817 R2917 +917 R3017

+318 R2418 +418 R2518 +518 R2618 +618 R2718 +718 R2818 +818 R2918 +918 R3018 Manual arbitrary feed 3st axis travel amount+319 R2419 +419 R2519 +519 R2619 +619 R2719 +719 R2819 +819 R2919 +919 R3019

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

233

[Function]

The reference position return mode is selected.

"Reference position return" is that axis motion component (tool, table, etc.) is returned to the position previously

determined for individual machine.

[Operation]

The reference position return mode is selected when the "Reference position return mode" signal (ZRNn) is turned ON.

Select the reference position return mode, and turn ON the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal of designated axis to

return to the reference position.

If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101"

will occur.

The first reference position return after the controller power is turned ON is the dog-type return (excluding when the basic

machine coordinate system is established for the absolute position detection specifications). After the second manual

reference position return (when basic machine coordinate system is established), the dog-type return or the high-speed

return is selected with the machine parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063 mandog".

(1) Dog-type reference position return pattern

The return pattern is determined by the final entry method of the machine parameter reference position return.

- After the near-point dog is detected and the approach speed is applied, the axis will move to the reference position

even if the Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal is turned OFF. Thus, after the approach speed is applied,

another axis can be switched to and reference position return executed.

- The entry direction (final entry direction) after the near-point dog is tripped is set with parameters.

- The feedrate before the approach speed is the reference position return feedrate if the "Rapid traverse"(RTn) signal is

ON, and the "Manual feedrate code m"(*JVmn) is OFF.

- The approach speed is set with the parameters.

- When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal is

ON, and the "1st reference position reached"(ZP1n) signal will turn ON.

(2) High-speed reference position return

- The axis will move toward the reference position. The motion speed will be rapid traverse if the rapid traverse signal is

ON, and manual feedrate if OFF.

- When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn)" signal is

ON, and the "1st reference position reached"(ZP1n) signal will turn ON.

- "Feed axis selection +/-"(+Jn,-Jn) signal for high-speed return is enabled only in the reference position direction. If the

opposite direction signal is designated, the NC alarm "M01 Operation Error 0003" will occur.

[Related signals]

(1) Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn,-Jn)

(2) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(3) Rapid traverse (RTn)

(4) 1st reference position reached (ZP1n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A REFERENCE POSITION RE-

TURN MODE ZRNn Y704 Y7E4 Y8C4 Y9A4 YA84 YB64 YC44

(a) Operation when axis is moved in same direction as the final entry method, and dog is tripped.

Parameters final entry method

Near-point dog

(b) When axis is moved in opposite direction from final entry method, and dog is tripped.

Parameters final entry method

Near-point dog

Reference position Reference position

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

234

[Function]

The automatic initialization mode is selected.

[Operation]

This mode is selected when automatic initialization is to be carried out with the machine end stopper method of absolute

position detection.

The initialization is started when the automatic initialization mode is selected, and the "Feed axis selection +/- "(+Jn,-Jn)

signal in the direction of the machine end of the axis to be initialized is turned ON.

(Note 1) The automatic initialization mode is invalid when the absolute position detector is not provided and when the

machine end stopper method is not selected for the absolute position detection.

(During feed axis selection, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0024" will occur.)

(Note 2) This mode will not start in the following cases of the machine end stopper method absolute position detection.

(The message "Start not possible" will display.)

- When "#0 Absolute posn set" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is not set to "1".

- When "#2 Zero-P" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen has not been set.

- When "#2055 pushf" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen has not been set.

- When "Z71 0005" has occurred.

[Function]

Memory mode of automatic operation is selected.

In this mode of operation, automatic operation is based on programs stored in the memory.

[Operation]

- Memory mode is selected when "Program operation mode (Memory mode)"(MEMn) signal turns ON.

- The program is started with the "Automatic operation "start" command"(STn) signal.

- If the automatic operation mode is duplicated or canceled during automatic operation, the NC alarm "M01

OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur, and the block will stop.

- If the manual operation mode is entered or the program is duplicated with the manual operation mode during

automatic operation, the NC alarm will occur, and automatic operation will stop. However, the manual and

automatic programs can be duplicated if manual/automatic simultaneous operation is valid.

(Note 1) Even when operation mode is other than automatic operation, illegal mode, if selected, causes operation error.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

(2) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

[Function]

This signal designates the FTP mode as the operation mode.

[Operation]

After starting up automatically with FTP mode, it starts executing the machining program which is downloaded to the

buffer memory.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION

MODE ASTn Y705 Y7E5 Y8C5 Y9A5 YA85 YB65 YC45

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A PROGRAM OPERATION MODE

(MEMORY MODE) MEMn Y708 Y7E8 Y8C8 Y9A8 YA88 YB68 YC48

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A FTP MODE FTPn Y709 Y7E9 Y8C9 Y9A9 YA89 YB69 YC49

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

235

[Function]

MDI (Manual Data Input) mode of automatic operation is selected.

Automatic operation is performed with the program set in the MDI screen.

[Operation]

- MDI mode is selected when "MDI mode" (Dn) signal turns ON.

- The program is started with the "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal.

- If the automatic operation mode is duplicated or canceled during automatic operation, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION

ERROR 0101" will occur, and the block will stop.

- If the manual operation mode is entered or the program is duplicated with the manual operation mode during automatic

operation, the NC alarm will occur, and automatic operation will stop. However, the manual and automatic programs

can be duplicated if manual/automatic simultaneous operation is valid.

(Note 1) Even when operation mode is other than automatic operation, illegal mode, if selected, causes operation error.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

(2) Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn)

[Function]

This signal is used to start automatic operation in MEMORY mode, MDI mode, or to restart after automatic operation

pause (halt) or block stop.

[Operation]

(1) "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal arises when the pressed "auto operation start" pushbutton is

released (i.e. at the time the signal turns OFF). The signal must be ON for a min. of 100msec.

(2) "In automatic operation "start"" signal (STLn) turns ON when the pressed "auto operation start" pushbutton is

released, and turns OFF when "auto operation pause (or halt)" pushbutton is pressed or block stop occurs in single-

block operation.

(3) Signal (STn) is invalid when:

- Automatic operation starts.

- Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn) signal is OFF.

- During reset ("Reset & rewind" signal is ON).

- During alarm.

- Sequence No. is being searched for.

(4) Automatic operation stops or is suspended or block stops when:

- Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) (*SPn) signal turns OFF.

- Reset occurs ("Reset & rewind" signal turns ON).

- Alarm which causes stop to automatic operation occurs.

- Automatic operation mode is changed to manual operation mode.

- Mode is changed to other automatic operation mode and then the block in execution is completed.

- Block in execution is completed after "Single-block" (SBKn) signal turns ON.

- Block in execution is completed after "Automatic machine lock" (AMKLn) signal turns ON.

- Program specified in MDI mode has been executed completely.

[Related signals]

(1) Program operation mode (Memory mode) (MEMn)

(2) MDI mode (Dn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MDI MODE Dn Y70B Y7EB Y8CB Y9AB YA8B YB6B YC4B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A

AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" COMMAND

(Cycle start) STn Y710 Y7F0 Y8D0 Y9B0 YA90 YB70 YC50

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

236

[Function]

During automatic operation, axis motion can be decelerated and stopped with this command signal. To restart, press

"Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) signal pushbutton.

[Operation]

(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal turns OFF, automatic operation stops.

- During automatic operation, the operation stops. "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPLn) occurs.

- Restart with the automatic start (STn) button. (Press after turning *SP signal.)

(2) In the following cases, automatic operation does not immediately stop.

Operation will continue to where stopping is possible, and then will stop.

- During tapping in fixed cycle.

Automatic operation stops when tapping is completed and the tool returns to "R" point.

- During thread cutting.

Automatic operation stops when a block for axis motion (other than thread cutting), which comes first after the

"Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal turns OFF, is completed. If the "Automatic operation

"pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal remains OFF, however, automatic operation stops immediately

after a block (other than thread cutting) is given.

- When control variable "feed hold invalid" has been set by user macro.

Automatic operation stops immediately after a block where the control variable "feed hold invalid" is cleared

starts.

(3) "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is valid even during machine lock.

[Related signals]

(1)Program operation mode (Memory mode) (MEMn)

(2)MDI mode (Dn)

(3)Automatic operation "start" command (STn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B

AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE" COMMAND

(Feed hold) *SPn Y711 Y7F1 Y8D1 Y9B1 YA91 YB71 YC51

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

237

[Function]

Machining program can be executed block by block in automatic operation.

[Operation]

(1) When "Single block" (SBKn) signal turns ON, operation of controller is as follows:

- During automatic operation

After the block in execution has been completed, automatic operation stops. To start execution of the next

block, "Automatic operation "start" command" (STn) must be turned ON to OFF.

- There will be no operation when automatic operation is not being executed but if automatic operation is started

with the "Single block" (SBKn) signal ON, one block will be executed and then will stop. This allows the

commanded program to be executed one block at a time.

(2) If the "Single block" (SBKn) signal is ON at the end of a block, operation will normally stop immediately. However, in

the following case, operation will continue to where stopping is possible, and then will stop.

- During cycle operation such as a fixed cycle.

The block where single block is being received will differ according to each cycle. Refer to the cycle sections in

the Programming Manual.

[Function]

This signal prohibits start of the next block in automatic operation (memory, MDI).

[Operation]

While the "Block start interlock" (*BSLn) signal is OFF, execution of the next block may not be started in automatic

operation. When the signal is given during execution of a block, the execution of the block continues until it is completed.

Since the signal does not cause stop or suspension of automatic operation, execution of program starts when the "Block

start interlock" (*BSLn) signal turns ON.

(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated in controller by fixed cycle, etc.

(Note 2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.

[Related signals]

(1) Cutting block start interlock (*CSLn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SINGLE BLOCK SBKn Y712 Y7F2 Y8D2 Y9B2 YA92 YB72 YC52

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B BLOCK START INTERLOCK *BSLn Y713 Y7F3 Y8D3 Y9B3 YA93 YB73 YC53

Single block signal (SBK)

Automatic operation "start" command (ST)

Axis motion block

SBK turns ON at start (INVALID)

SBK switches during axis motion (VALID)

SBK turns ON after completion of block

(VALID)

G00 X100 G01 Y100 G01 X10 Y20

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

238

[Function]

This signal prohibits start of an axis motion command block other than that for positioning in automatic operation

(memory, MDI).

[Operation]

While the "Cutting block start interlock" (*CSLn) signal is OFF, execution of an axis motion command block other than

that for positioning may not be started in automatic operation. When the signal is given during execution of a block, the

execution of the block continues until it is completed.

Since the signal does not cause stop or suspension of automatic operation, execution of program starts when the

"Cutting block start interlock" (*CSLn) signal is turned ON.

(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated by fixed cycle, etc.

(Note 2) The unused axis must be put into an interlock cancel state by setting "1" with PLC program.

[Related signals]

(1) Block start interlock (*BSLn)

[Function]

Feedrate in automatic operation is specified by manually set value instead of program command value (F value).

[Operation]

(1) DRY RUN signal given during cutting feed

- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON, the cutting feedrate is equal to the maximum cutting feedrate.

In this case, "cutting feedrate override" and "rapid traverse override" are ignored.

- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF, the set "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn) will apply.

Cutting feed override will also be valid if the "Manual override method selection" (OVSLn) signal is ON.

(2) Dry run signal given during rapid traverse

- The parameter must be turned ON to validate dry run for rapid traverse (G0, G27, G28, G29, G30).

- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON, the "Dry run" signal is ignored.

- When "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF, the speed is equal to manually set speed.

(Note 1) Dry run is not applicable to manual operation.

(Note 2) Dry run is valid even during G84 or G74 operation.

[Related signals]

(1) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(2) Rapid traverse (RTn)

(3) Manual override method selection (OVSLn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B CUTTING BLOCK START IN-

TERLOCK *CSLn Y714 Y7F4 Y8D4 Y9B4 YA94 YB74 YC54

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A DRY RUN DRNn Y715 Y7F5 Y8D5 Y9B5 YA95 YB75 YC55

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

239

[Function]

Machine motion is stopped momentarily in transition from a cutting feed block to other block during automatic operation

to provide time for determination whether in-position check is made or not before start of the next block.

Block-to-block transition may cause rounding in cutting because of delay caused by acceleration or deceleration, and

servo response delay. Rounding can be eliminated by stopping the machine motion between the blocks by turning the

"Error detection" (ERDn) signal ON.

[Operation]

When this "Error detection" (ERDn) signal is ON in block-to-block transition during cutting in automatic operation, in-

position check is accomplished. If the signal is OFF, the next block starts after completion of the preceding block without

stop.

(Note 1) In general practice, the signal (ERDn) is turned ON and OFF using an appropriate miscellaneous function (M

code, etc.) so that command program can determine whether machine motion should be stopped or not. When

the signal is ON, the status is same as the case where G09 is specified by the command program.

Consequently, it is recommended to use G function unless otherwise required especially.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A ERROR DETECTION ERDn Y717 Y7F7 Y8D7 Y9B7 YA97 YB77 YC57

Error detection (ERD)

Axis motion X axis cutting feed Y axis cutting

feed X axis cutting feed

OFF ON X axis X axis

Y axis Y axis The next motion starts after machine stop.

The next motion starts without machine stop.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

240

[Function]

This signal is used to reset the control unit.

[Operation]

When this signal (NRST1n) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.

Generally, the signal for the reset button of the setting and display unit for CNC exclusive use is set to "NC reset 1"

(NRST1n). At this time, the control unit will take the following actions.

(1) The G command modal will be held.

(2) The tool compensation data will be held.

(3) The memory will be indexed.

(4) The error/alarm will be reset.

(5) The MST code output will be held.

(6) The M independent output M00 to M30 (DM00n to Dm30n) will turn OFF.

(7) The axis movement will stop.

(8) The "In reset" (RSTn) signal will be output.

[Related signals]

(1) NC reset 2 (NRST2n)

(2) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

(3) In "reset" (RSTn)

[Function]

This signal is used to reset the control unit.

[Operation]

When this signal (NRST2n) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.

Generally, this is turned ON when the miscellaneous function M02 or M30 is executed. In some cases, the "Reset &

Rewind" (RRWn) explained later is used.

At this time, the control unit will take the following actions.

(1) The G command modal will be initialized.

(2) The tool compensation data will be canceled. (Will not be applied.)

(3) The memory will not be indexed.

(4) The error/alarm will be reset.

(5) The MST code output will be held.

(6) The M independent output M00 to M30 (DM00n to Dm30n) will turn OFF.

(7) The axis movement will stop.

(8) The "In reset" signal (RSTn) will be output.

[Related signals]

(1) NC reset 1 (NRST1n)

(2) Reset & rewind (RRW:n)

(3) In "reset" (RSTn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NC RESET 1 NRST1n Y718 Y7F8 Y8D8 Y9B8 YA98 YB78 YC58

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NC RESET 2 NRST2n Y719 Y7F9 Y8D9 Y9B9 YA99 YB79 YC59

NC reset 1 (NRST1)

In reset (RST)

NC reset 2 (NRST2)

In reset (RST)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

241

[Function]

This signal resets the controller.

During memory operation, the head of the machining program currently being run can be called out.

The reset button in the setting and display unit for CNC exclusive use may be set to "Reset & rewind" (RRWn).

According to the operation condition, it is set in either "NC reset 1" (NRST1n) or "Reset & rewind" (RRWn).

[Operation]

When this signal (RRWn) turns ON:

(1) Ongoing axis motion is decelerated and stopped.

(2) CNC is reset after axis motion stops. In about 0.5 second after CNC is reset, "In reset" (RSTn) signal turns ON.

(3) At the same time as CNC is reset, "In rewind" (RWDn) signal turns ON.

- In memory operation mode, the head of program in execution is read (memory index).

(4) While the signal (RRWn) is ON, automatic operation and manual operation are impossible.

(5) G command modal is initialized.

(6) Tool compensation (offset) data are canceled (no motion).

(7) Error/alarm is reset.

(8) M, S, T code outputs are held. (Strobe signal turns OFF.)

(9) M independent output (M00 to M30 (DM00n to DM30n)) is turned OFF.

The process when M02 or M30 are commanded in the program is shown below.

Generally, when M02 (or M30) is executed by the program, this signal (RRWn) will be returned when the

designated operation is completed. M function finish 1 (FIN1n) and M function finish 2 (FIN2n) will not be returned.

(Refer to *1 in the following drawing.)

[Related signals]

(1) In reset (RSTn)

(2) In rewind (RWDn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A RESET & REWIND RRWn Y71A Y7FA Y8DA Y9BA YA9A YB7A YC5A

M02 (M02), M30 (M30)

Reset & rewind (RRW)

In reset (RST)

In rewind (RWD)

M function finish 1,2 (FIN1, FIN2)

This interval is unknown.

About 0.5 s

*1

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

242

[Function]

In thread cutting cycle, chamfering can be ignored.

[Operation]

Status of this signal is determined at start of thread cutting cycle.

- CHAMFERING (*CDZn) is OFF.

Chamfering (at end of thread cutting) is accomplished.

- CHAMFERING (*CDZn) is ON.

Chamfering is not accomplished (signal is ignored).

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B CHAMFERING *CDZn Y71B Y7FB Y8DB Y9BB YA9B YB7B YC5B

Chamfer section

Thread section

Tool nose path

Thread section

Tool nose path

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

243

[Function]

If this signal is turned ON after the end of the machining program execution, the same machining program will be

restarted.

[Operation]

The same machining program will restart if this signal is turned ON during automatic start.

[Timing chart]

(Note 1) The modal is initialized with this signal.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only during automatic start.

(Note 3) This signal is valid during the memory and MDI automatic operation modes.

(Note 4) Normally, "M code independent output" signal for M02 or M30 is input into this signal, but in this case, do not

input the M02 or M30 completion signal (FIN1n, FIN2n).

(Note 5) If the "Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold)" (*SPn) signal is valid, the "Automatic restart" signal

will be invalid.

(Note 6) This signal is invalid during single block stop.

(Note 7) Note that if an M command other than M02 or M30 is input into this signal, the program will return to the start

point without completing the program, and the program will be restarted.

(Note 8) If "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) are applied during the auto restart process (*2 section in time chart above), the

modal will be initialized and the tape will be rewound, but the "Automatic restart" signal will be invalid.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A AUTOMATIC RESTART ARSTn Y71C Y7FC Y8DC Y9BC YA9C YB7C YC5C

*1:Rewind time During memory operation approx. 0.1 to 0.2 Program indexing time is a moment, so its time might not be confirmed by sequence program.

*2:Refer to Note 8.

N03 ;

Program example

Machining program

M code

In automatic operation "start" (STLn)

M single output

In rewind (RWDn)

Automatic restart (ARSTn)

N04 ; N05 M02 ; N01 ; N02 ;

M02

N04 ; N05 M02 ;

Miscellaneous function strobe

Head block

*1

*2

N01 ; Program indexing

Automatic restart

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

244

[Function] [Operation]

The CNC CPU starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.

The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the operation search blocks are shown below.

The designated block No. is added to the operation search block No. which is searched by operation search.

(Example) If program No. 100, sequence No. 300 and block No. 2 are designated, operation search is executed for the

block with(*).

O100()

N0100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;

M3 S1000;

N0200 G0 Z100.;

G0 X100. Y0.;

N0300 G01 Z50. F1000;

G01 Y10.;

G01 Z0. F100; ......... (*)

G00 Z50.

N0400 G0 Z100.;

M30;

(Note) The block No. is designated with the number of blocks following the last sequence No.

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search status

(3) External search device No.

(4) External search program No.

(5) External search sequence No.

(6) External search block No.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE EXTSSn Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D

Condition Operation search block

Program No. Sequence No.

Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program

Designated Not designated (=0) Head of designated program

Not designated (=0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program

Not designated (=0) Not designated (=0) Error: 4 (Refer to "External search status")

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

245

[Function]

This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function, tool (T) function

or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side.

[Operation]

If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each function strobe

(MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) will turn ON.

When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or B function has been specified, it performs that function(s) and,

after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 1" (FIN1n) signal turns OFF.

When the controller verifies that signal FIN1n turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding function.

The PLC checks that each strobe signal turns OFF, then turns OFF FIN1n.

With the signal FIN1n turned OFF, the controller proceeds to the next block.

An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:

There are two "M function finish" signals, namely, "M function finish 1" and "M function finish 2" (Refer to the next page).

The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at the rising edge. These can be used

separately per operation in one PLC.

(Note 1) "M function finish" (FIN1n) signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.

(Note 2) The "M function finish 1" signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S command data,

etc.) during S function execution.

(Note 3) If signal FIN1 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or B function are

not output. To output, the signal FIN1 should be turned OFF once.

(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" (RRWn) signal is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish" 1 or 2 signal

should not be sent back. If the M function finish 1 (2) signal is return with the M02 command at the end of the

machining program, the NC alarm "P36 PROGRAM END ERR" will occur.

[Related signals]

(1) M function finish 2 (FIN2n)

(2) M, S, T, B function strobe (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n)

(3) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R)

(4) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M FUNCTION FINISH 1 FIN1n Y71E Y7FE Y8DE Y9BE YA9E YB7E YC5E

Command program

M function strobe 1 (MF1)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

M08 Next block

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

246

[Function]

This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function, tool (T) function

or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side. When too much signals FIN1 must be used,

this signal can be used instead of signal FIN1 to save time.

[Operation]

If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each function strobe

(MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) will turn ON.

When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or 2nd M function has been specified, it performs that function(s)

and, after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 2" (FIN2n) signal turns ON.

When the controller verifies that signal FIN2n turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding function.

When each strobe signal turns OFF, the PLC turns OFF signal FIN2n. With the signal FIN2n turned OFF, the controller

proceeds to the next block.

An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:

There are two types of M function finish signals, namely, "M function finish 1" (refer to the previous page) and "M function

finish 2". The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at the rising edge. These can be

used separately per operation in one PLC.

(Note 1) "M function finish 2 (FIN2n)" signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.

(Note 2) The M function finish 2 signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S command data, etc.)

during S function execution.

(Note 3) If signal FIN2 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or B function are

not output.

(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" signal (RRWn) is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish" 2 or 1 signal

should not be sent back. If the "M function finish 2 (1)" signal is return with the M02 command at the end of the

machining program, the NC alarm "P36 PROGRAM END ERR" will occur.

[Related signals]

(1) M function finish 1 (FIN1n)

(2) M, S, T, B function strobe (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n)

(3) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R)

(4) Reset & rewind (RRWn)

[Function]

"Tool length manual measurement 1" is selected by this signal.

For M system, "Tool length manual measurement 1 and 2" functions are used by this signal.

[Operation]

When the signal (TLMn) is turned ON (1), amount of tool length to be corrected is calculated automatically in the

controller.

[Caution]

(1) This signal is invalid if the tool length data screen (L system)/tool compensation screen (M system) is not selected.

(2) The calculation result is read when INPUT key is pressed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A M FUNCTION FINISH 2 FIN2n Y71F Y7FF Y8DF Y9BF YA9F YB7F YC5F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL LENGTH MEASURE-

MENT 1 TLMn Y720 Y800 Y8E0 Y9C0 YAA0 YB80 YC60

Command program

M function strobe (MF1)

M function finish 2 (FIN2)

M08 Next block

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

247

[Function]

"Tool length measurement 2" is selected by this signal.

[Operation]

When the signal (TLMSn) is turned ON, calculation of tool length compensation amount is automatically started in the

controller.

When skip signal is input during tool length measurement, amount of tool length to be corrected is calculated.

[Timing chart]

[Caution]

(1) To use the tool length measurement 2 function, select manual operation mode.

Otherwise, tool length measurement mode cannot be established.

(2) "Tool length measurement 2" can be used with a machine equipped with tool measurement sensor.

The sensor for tool length measurement is connected to the connector "CON3" No. 24 pin ON the controller unit.

(3) The calculation result is read automatically inside the controller.

(4) With tool length measurement 2, multiple part systems cannot be measured simultaneously.

[Related signals]

(1) Tool No.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL LENGTH MEASURE-

MENT 2 TLMSn Y721 Y801 Y8E1 Y9C1 YAA1 YB81 YC61

Measurement mode

Manual mode

Tool length measurement 2 (TLMS)

Manual feed

Tool measurement sensor

Controller internal interlock

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

248

[Function]

When the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0051" (Synchronization error too large) occurs, the occurring error is corrected

without changing the operation method with this mode.

[Operation]

In the correction mode, the operation is as follows.

(1) The synchronous control is not carried out even in the secondary axis, and the primary axis and secondary

axis are handled as independent two axes in the each control part. Thus, the primary axis and secondary axis

can be moved individually.

(2) If the zero point has established, the synchronization error check is carried out.

(3) If the correction mode switch is turned ON during selecting the mode except the handle or manual arbitrary

feed mode, the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120" (Synchronization correction mode ON) will occur.

In the handle or manual arbitrary feed mode, if the correction mode switch is turned ON, the correction mode can be set

and "CORRECTION MODE" will be displayed in the operation mode display position.

The operation procedure is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) Synchronous control operation method selection

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SYNCHRONIZATION CORREC-

TION MODE SYCMn Y722 Y802 Y8E2 Y9C2 YAA2 YB82 YC62

Correction mode ON

Handle or manual arbitrary feed mode?

No

Yes

Start

Select the handle or manual arbitrary feed mode.

Select the axis to be moved between the primary axis and secondary axis.

Move the axis

Correction mode OFF

End

Display the message "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120" (in the synchronization correction).

"CORRECTION MODE" is displayed in the operation mode display position.

Only the axis selected between the primary axis and secondary axis is moved.

The mode returns to the Synchronization mode, and the mode display becomes "HANDLE" or "MANUAL ARBITRARY".

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

249

[Function]

With the program restart function, when the axis is returned to the restart position with the manual mode after the restart

search is performed, the direction can be checked, or the axis can be stopped at the restart position.

[Operation]

If the "Program restart" signal (SRN) is turned ON after the restart search is performed and the axis is moved to the

restart position direction with the manual mode, the axis is stopped at the restart position automatically. The

[RESTARTR] values on the program restart screen are set to zero and "RP" appears by the side of the [RESTART-P]

values. If the axis is moved in the opposite direction to the restart position, an OPERATION ERROR will occur.

(Note) When "#1302 AutoRP (Automatic return by program restart)" is set to "1", it recovers by the automatic start to

the position at the same speed as when dry run (DRN) is turned ON, and all axes start machining after the

restart position recovery is completed. Therefore, the program restart signal is not necessary. Even when

"#1302 AutoRP (Automatic return by program restart)" is set to "1", the restart position recovery is possible by

manually turning the program restart signal (SRN) ON.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A PROGRAM RESTART SRN Y723 Y803 Y8E3 E9C3 YAA3 YB83 YC63

[RESTART . (G54)] [RESTART . R]

X -130.000 RP X 0.000

Y -10.000 RP Y 0.000

Z 0.000 RP Z 0.000

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

250

[Function]

When the controller is ready for user macro interrupt, the program being in execution can be interrupted, or other

program can be executed after the former program has been executed, by turning ON "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal.

[Operation]

When "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal turns ON within time interval starting with M96 command and ending with M97

command or reset, the program being in execution can be interrupted for execution of other program.

"Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal becomes valid when:

(1) Memory, tape or MDI is selected.

(2) Automatic operation is selected (signal STLn is ON).

(3) Other user macro is not being executed.

"Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is accepted in "status trigger" method or "edge trigger" method, either one of which can

be selected by parameter #1112.

(1) Status trigger method

While "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is ON, the signal can be accepted.

When M96 is used to make acceptable user macro interrupt, the inserted program is executed when the signal

(UITn) turns ON.

With the signal (UITn) kept turned ON, inserted program can be executed repeatedly.

(2) Edge trigger method

The signal (UITn) is accepted when its status changes from "OFF" to "ON" (i.e., with rise edge of signal).

This method is advantageous when inserted program is executed only once.

Refer to the relevant "Programming Manual" for details on the user macro interrupt function such as interrupt

method and call method for when the "Macro interrupt" (UITn) signal is ON.

(Note 1) M96 and M97 can be changed to other M code by using a parameter.

(Note 2) User macro interrupt control M code is processed internally and not output to an external source (PLC).

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MACRO INTERRUPT UITn Y725 Y805 Y8E5 Y9C5 YAA5 YB85 YC65

M96 P_ H_ ; User macro interrupt valid Interrupt sequence No. Interrupt program No.

M97; User macro interrupt invalid

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

251

[Function]

Speed or feedrate of axis motion in "JOG" mode, "incremental feed" mode or "reference position return" mode can be

changed to rapid traverse speed.

[Operation]

When the signal (RTn) is turned ON.

(1) The jog and incremental feedrate will be the rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.

(2) The speed until the near-point detection dog signal is detected during dog-type reference position return will be

the reference position return rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.

(3) Speed or feedrate is changed at the same time as the signal is turned ON.When the signal (RTn) is turned

OFF, rapid traverse speed changes to the previous speed or feedrate.

"Feed axis selection +/-" (+Jn, -Jn) signal may be kept turned ON.

(4) The speed will be the rapid traverse feedrate until the near point dog signal is detected during jog, incremental

feed or reference position return. The rapid traverse override will also be valid.

(5) The "Rapid traverse override code m" (ROVmn) will be validated when the "Rapid traverse" signal is ON.

(Note 1) "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal does not act as mode signal, but serves as interrupt signal for "JOG" mode,

"INCREMENTAL FEED" mode, etc.

(Note 2) This signal can be used likewise during machine lock.

(Note 3) For handling of "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal during dry run, refer to the description about dry run signal

(DRNn).

[Related signals]

(1) Rapid traverse override code m (ROVmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A RAPID TRAVERSE RTn Y726 Y806 Y8E6 Y9C6 YAA6 YB86 YC66

JOG mode (Jn)

Feed axis selection (+Jn) Rapid traverse (RTn)

1st axis motion [+]

Manual feedrate speed Manual feedrate speed

Rapid traverse speed

Rapid traverse speed

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

252

[Function]

This signal selects whether to update the program coordinate system the amount moved with manual operation (jog,

handle, etc.).

[Operation]

(1) When "Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is OFF:

The amount moved with manual operation is not added to the absolute position register in the controller. Thus, if

manual is used during automatic operation, the axis will move in parallel the amount moved manually at the end

point of the block and the end point of the following blocks. (The axis will move in parallel regardless of the absolute/

incremental command in the machining program.)

(2) When "Manual absolute" (ABSn) signal is ON:

The amount moved by manual operation is added to the absolute position register in the controller, and the

coordinate system is not changed. Thus, if manual operation is used during automatic operation by absolute

command, the axis will return to the position commanded at the end of the inserted block and following blocks.

However, if the manual interrupt is an incremental command, the axis will move in parallel the amount moved

manually. (The axis will move in parallel regardless of the absolute/incremental command at the end of the inserted

block.)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ABSOLUTE ABSn Y728 Y808 Y8E8 Y9C8 YAA8 YB88 YC68

X axis

Z axis

Stop caused by feed hold Programmed path (absolute command)

Start after manual interrupt

Locus shifts the amount moved with manual interrupt.

Interrupt by manual operation

Stop caused by feed hold Programmed path (absolute command)

Interrupt by manual operation

Start after manual interrupt

Pass the same path as commanded in the machining program

Z axis

X axis

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

253

[Function]

This signal is turned ON if a calculated block (next block) is recalculated during operation of the machining program.

[Operation]

For example, to operate mirror image, etc., with the miscellaneous (M) command in the program.

N1 M45; To apply mirror image with this M command

N2 G0X100;

When the N1 block is reached in the above program example, the "Recalculate request" signal will turn ON before FIN is

output or simultaneously with FIN. This will validate the mirror image from the N2 block.

[Caution]

The "Recalculation request" (CRQn) signal latches the rising edge in the controller. Thus, even if the "Recalculation

request" (CRQn) signal is ON (1), the "recalculation" will not take place unless at the rising edge.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A RECALCULATION REQUEST CRQn Y72B Y80B Y8EB Y9CB YAAB YB8B YC6B

N1 M45; Execution block

M function strobe (MF)

Recalculate request (CRQ)

Auxiliary function finish (FIN)

Calculate next block

Mirror image N2 G0X100 calculation start Recalculate N2 G0X100

N2 G0X100; N1 M45;

ON

Control unit latches rising edge

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

254

[Function]

This signal is used to display a program on the Word Edit screen during operation.

[Operation]

When the "Program display during operation" signal (PDISPn) turns ON, the program being operatedwill appear in the

program display of the EDIT screen.

[Caution]

Word editing function enables editing a machining program in operation in the foreground edit mode (with the Program

display during operation signal (Y72C) turned OFF) even in an automatic operation as long as it is in a block stop.

When the automatic start up is executed after the editing, the operation may start from an unintended location, and it

may cause program errors or unintended operations. Therefore, create a sequence program in which automatic start is

disabled during in the foreground edit mode (with the Program display during operation signal (Y72C) turned OFF) .

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A PROGRAM DISPLAY DURING

OPERATION PDISPn Y72C Y80C Y8EC Y9CC YAAC YB8C YC6C

Edit mode

Y70A

Y70A Y72C

Automatic start

Y710

Y72C

EDIT mode

Program display during operation

Automatic Operation Start

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

255

[Function]

Block accompanying "/n (n: 1 to 9)" (slash) can be skipped.

By creating a machining program with a "/" code inserted, a different part can be machined with one program.

[Operation]

(1)When a program having a block with "/n" (slash code) placed at the head of block is executed with "Optional block

skip mn" (BDTmn) signal turned ON, the block is skipped. The block with the "/n" code in the middle instead of at the

head will be executed.

When the signal is OFF, block with "/n" is executed.

(Example)If machining the two parts as illustrated below, create the following program. When machining with the

"Optional block skip mn" (BDTmn) signal ON, part 1 will be provided. With the signal OFF, part 2 will be provided.

N1 G54;

N2 G90G81X50. Z-20. R3. F100;

/1N3 X30.;

N4 X10.;

N5 G80;

M02;

(Note) "1" of "/1N3 X30.;" can be omitted.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m BDTmn Y72D Y738 -

73F

Y80D Y818 -

81F

Y8ED Y8F8 -

8FF

Y9CD Y9D8 -

9DF

YAAD YAB8 -

ABF

YB8D YB98 -

B9F

YC6D YC78 -

C7F

Part 1 Optional block skip ON

Part 2 Optional block skip OFF

N4 N2 N2 N3 N4

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

256

[Function]

It is also possible to return to the nth reference position in the manual reference position return mode. This signal is used

to select the number of the reference position (n) to return to. Normally both the "Reference position selection code 1, 2"

(ZSL1n, ZSL2n) signals are turned OFF, and 1st point reference position return is performed.

[Operation]

"Reference position selection code 1, 2" (ZSL1n, ZSL2n) signals are valid when:

(1) Reference position return mode is ON ("1").

(2) Manual start condition is held.

(Note 1) Returning to the first reference position must be performed before returning to the second, third or forth

reference position.

[Related signals]

(1) Reference position return mode (ZRN)

(2) Feed axis selection +/- (+Jn, -Jn)

(3) Mth reference position reached (ZP1n to ZP4n)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A REFERENCE POSITION SE-

LECTION CODE m ZSLmn

Y730 - 731

Y810 - 811

Y8F0 - 8F1

Y9D0 - 9D1

YAB0 - AB1

YB90 - B91

YC70 - C71

Reference position selection code 2 Reference position selection code 1 Return position

0 0 1st reference position

0 1 2nd reference position

1 0 3rd reference position

1 1 4th reference position

Reference position return mode

Reference position selection code

Manual start (Feed axis selection (+)/(-))

In axis motion

N-th reference position reached

Even when "Reference position selection code" signal changes during axis movement, point selected at start of motion is held.

N-th reference position return request

Goes to n-th reference position

No change

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

257

[Function]

This signal selects whether the reference position selection is common for all axes or independent for each axis.

[Operation]

When this signal is OFF, the reference position selection is common for all axes, and Reference position selection code

m (ZSLmn) are valid.

When this signal is ON, the reference position selection is independent for each axis, and "Each axis reference position

select" is valid.

[Related signals]

(1) Reference position selection code m (ZSLmn)

(2) Each axis reference position select

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A REFERENCE POSITION SE-

LECTION METHOD Mn Y737 Y817 Y8F7 Y9D7 YAB7 YB97 YC77

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

258

[Function]

In HANDLE mode (handwheel is operated), axis component to be moved is selected.

In the case of 2-axis or 3-axis handle specification (two or three handles are required), axis is selected for the 1st handle.

[Operation]

For axis motion in HANDLE mode:

(1) Select HANDLE mode.

(2) Specify axis No. for 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn).

(3) Turn ON "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn) signal (later described).

(4) Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.

The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

[Related signals]

(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)

(2) 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn)

(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)

(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 1ST HANDLE AXIS SELECTION

CODE m HS1mn

Y740 - 744

Y820 - 824

Y900 - 904

Y9E0 - 9E4

YAC0 - AC4

YBA0 - BA4

YC80 - C84

- -

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 1 0 0 0

Handle axis No.

Motion axis

X axis (1st axis) selected

Y axis (2nd axis) selected

Z axis (3rd axis) selected

#4 axis (4th axis) selected

1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle

#5 axis (5th axis) selected

#6 axis (6th axis) selected

#7 axis (7th axis) selected

#8 axis (8th axis) selected

"1st handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved with the nth handle.

1st handle axis selection

code m (HS1mn)

2nd handle axis selection

code m (HS2mn)

3rd handle axis selection

code m (HS3mn)

HS 1Sn

HS 116n

HS 18n

HS 14n

HS 12n

HS 11n

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

259

[Function]

In HANDLE mode, axis No. of axis motion component to be moved is set for 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn).

To make valid the specified handle axis No., this signal is used.

[Operation]

Axis motion does not start when the 1st handle (handwheel) is rotated after HANDLE mode is selected and the desired

axis No. is set for the "1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) if this signal (HS1Sn) is not given. Although either the

"1st handle axis selection code m" (HS1mn) signal or the "1st handle valid" (HS1Sn) signal can be given first, these two

signals are to be given when manual axis motion is started.

[Related signals]

(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 1ST HANDLE VALID HS1Sn Y747 Y827 Y907 Y9E7 YAC7 YBA7 YC87

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

260

[Function]

This signal selects which handle to move with the 2nd handle when using the 2-axis or 3-axis handle specifications (two

or three handles are required).

[Operation]

For axis motion controlled by the 2nd handle:

(1)Select HANDLE mode.

(2)Specify axis No. for 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn).

(3)Turn ON "2nd handle valid" (HS2Sn) signal (later described).

(4)Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.

The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

[Related signals]

(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)

(2) 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)

(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)

(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3Sn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 2ND HANDLE AXIS SELECTION

CODE m HS2mn

Y748 - 74C

Y828 - 82C

Y908 - 90C

Y9E8 - 9EC

YAC8 - ACC

YBA8 - BAC

YC88 - C8C

- -

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 1 0 0 0

Handle axis No.

Motion axis

X axis (1st axis) selected

Y axis (2nd axis) selected

Z axis (3rd axis) selected

#4 axis (4th axis) selected

1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle

#5 axis (5th axis) selected

#6 axis (6th axis) selected

#7 axis (7th axis) selected

#8 axis (8th axis) selected

"2nd handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved with the nth handle.

1st handle axis selection

code m (HS1mn)

2nd handle axis selection

code m (HS2mn)

3rd handle axis selection

code m (HS3mn)

HS 2Sn

HS 216n

HS 28n

HS 24n

HS 22n

HS 21n

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

261

[Function][Operation]

This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable only to 2-axis

handle specification (two handles are required).

Refer to the above table for the relation with the "2nd handle axis selection code m" (HS2mn).

[Related signals]

(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 2ND HANDLE VALID HS2Sn Y74F Y82F Y90F Y9EF YACF YBAF YC8F

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

262

[Function]

This signal selects which handle to move with the 3rd handle when using the 3-axis handle specifications (three handle

is required).

[Operation]

For axis motion in HANDLE mode:

(1) Select HANDLE mode.

(2) Specify axis No. for 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn).

(3) Turn ON "3rd handle valid" (HS3Sn) signal (later described).

(4) Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.

The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:

[Related signals]

(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS1mn)

(2) 1st handle valid (HS1Sn)

(3) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS2mn)

(4) 2nd handle valid (HS2Sn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 3RD HANDLE AXIS SELECTION

CODE m HS3mn

Y750 - 754

Y830 - 834

Y910 - 914

Y9F0 - 9F4

YAD0 - AD4

YBB0 - BB4

YC90 - C94

- -

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 1 0 0 0

Handle axis No.

Motion axis

HS 3Sn

HS 316n

HS 38n

HS 34n

HS 32n

HS 31n

X axis (1st axis) selected

Y axis (2nd axis) selected

Z axis (3rd axis) selected

#4 axis (4th axis) selected

1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle

#5 axis (5th axis) selected

#6 axis (6th axis) selected

#7 axis (7th axis) selected

1st handle axis selection

code m (HS1mn)

2nd handle axis selection

code m (HS2mn)

3rd handle axis selection

code m (HS3mn)

#8 axis (8th axis) selected

"3rd handle valid" signal

Set the No. of the axis to be moved with the nth handle.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

263

[Function][Operation]

This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable only to 3-axis

handle specification (three handles are required).

Refer to the above table for the relation with the "3rd handle axis selection code m" (HS3mn).

[Related signals]

(1) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS3mn)

[Function]

With this signal, override to cutting feedrate input to the controller during automatic operation is ignored.

[Operation]

When the signal (OVCn) turns ON ...

(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn) is ignored and feedrate specified by F command is selected.

(2) When cutting feedrate override is set at "0%", the signal (OVCn) is not valid (feedrate is zero and no motion

occurs).

(3) The signal does not affect to "Manual feedrate override" and "Rapid traverse override".

[Related signals]

(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)

[Function]

Override can be exerted on "manual feedrate" (feedrate in JOG feed, incremental feed, etc. during manual operation).

[Operation]

When this signal (OVSLn) is turned ON when manual feedrate has been set, the previously set cutting feedrate override

(%) is applied to that feedrate.

(Note) For details of "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn), "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) and "2nd

cutting feedrate override", refer to the relevant descriptions.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 3RD HANDLE VALID HS3Sn Y757 Y837 Y917 Y9F7 YAD7 YBB7 YC97

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A OVERRIDE CANCEL OVCn Y758 Y838 Y918 Y9F8 YAD8 YBB8 YC98

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL OVERRIDE METHOD

SELECTION OVSLn Y759 Y839 Y919 Y9F9 YAD9 YBB9 YC99

=

Manual feedrate (1) Code method (*JV1 to 16) (2) File register method

(Setting value)

Cutting federate override (1) Code method (*FV1 to 16) (2) File register method

(Setting value)

ON

OFF

OVSL

2nd curring feedrate override

Actual manual feedrate

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

264

[Function]

Strobe signal for miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified during automatic operation cannot be output when this

signal is used. The signal (AFLn) can be used to check machining program, for example.

[Operation]

When the signal (AFLn) turns ON:

(1) Miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified in automatic operation cannot be executed, i.e. output of

code data and function strobe signal (MF1n to MF4n, SF1n to SF7n, TF1n, BF1n) are withheld.

(2) If the signal turns ON after code data is output, that output is accepted and the corresponding function can be

completed (FIN1n or FIN2n is received and strobe signal is set to "0").

(3) Miscellaneous function M00, M01, M02 or M30 is, however, accepted and realized even when the signal

(AFLn) is ON and the decode signals, code data and "M function strobe" signal are output.

(4) Miscellaneous function which is executed within the controller and does not output its code data and "M

function strobe" signal, such as M98 and M99, is executed even when the signal is ON.

(Note) As for S command data (output), the value before "Miscellaneous function lock" (AFLn) signal is turned ON will

be retained even when this signal is ON. When the signal is ON at CNC power ON, S command data will be 0.

[Related signals]

(1) M function strobe m (MFmn)

(2) M code data

(3) S function strobe m (SFmn)

(4) S code data

(5) T function strobe 1 (TF1n)

(6) T code data

(7) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1n)

(8) 2nd M function data

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION

LOCK AFLn Y75A Y83A Y91A Y9FA YADA YBBA YC9A

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

265

[Function]

This function is used to remove the tap from the workpiece when tap cycle has been stopped due to emergency stop,

etc.

[Operation]

If the "Tap retract" signal (TRVn) is turned ON while the "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) is ON due to an

interruption in the tap cycle, the tap retract operation can be started.

(1) The following items are conditions for tap retract. (The "Tap retract possible" signal will turn ON at this time.)

- Emergency stop during tap cycle

- Reset during tap cycle

- Power OFF during tap cycle (Only for absolute position detection system)

(2) Tap retract is executed as follows:

- Execute the synchronous tap cycle command. ---> (a)

- Stop the tap cycle with emergency stop. ---> (b)

- The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) turns ON. ---> (c)

- Release the emergency stop. (The "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns ON.) ---> (d)

- Turn ON the "Tap retract" signal (TRVn). ---> (e)

- The spindle will rotate in reverse, and the tap axis will move toward the tap cycle's initial point.

The feedrate is the tap cycle feedrate. ---> (f)

- When the tap axis reaches the tap cycle initial point, the spindle and tap axis will stop, and

tap retract will be completed. ---> (g)

- The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVEn) will turn OFF.

(Note 1) The area between "c" and "e" above is the tap cycle. The "Tap retract possible" signal will not be output if the

operation is not stopped in this area.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only during rising in the tap cycle.

(Note 3) When this signal turns ON, emergency stop and reset will not function.

(Note 4) The acceleration/deceleration method at the time of tap retract will be the time-constant method, and the time

constant set for tapping will be used for tap retract.

[Related signals]

(1) Tap retract possible (TRVEn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TAP RETRACT TRVn Y75C Y83C Y91C Y9FC YADC YBBC YC9C

Tap cycle command

f Initial point

e R point

a b

c

(Spindle reverse run)

Tap feed (spindle forward run)

d Tap base

Normal tap cycle

Tap cycle command

f Initial point a b

(a)

Tap retract operation

Stop (g)

R point C Tap feed (spindle forward run) (b)

Emergency stop

(c) Stop

(f) Tap retract operation (spindle reverse run)

d Tap base

(e)

Tap retract Emergency stop release

(d)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

266

[Function]

This function returns immediately to a set reference position when the return signal is input. This function is used to

return to a set position for changing the tool.

[Operation]

Reference position return is executed when this signal is turned ON. At the rising edge of the signal, the program is

automatically reset (reset & rewind) and then reference position return is executed.

During the automatic or MDI operation, the operation is interrupted and stopped by the reset, and reference position

return is executed.

If this signal is input during execution of a tap cycle in the automatic or MDI operation modes, the "Tap retract possible"

signal will be output by the reset interruption, and the return operation will be the tap retract operation. The tap retract is

completed at the initial point, and after that the reference position return will be carried out.

(1) If there are two or more axes, set the return order with parameter "#2019 revnum".

(2) When the reference position is reached, the corresponding "Reference position reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n)

signal will be output.

(3) This signal must be held until the "Reference position reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n) signal is output. If it is turned

OFF midway, the return operation will be interrupted and stop. If the signal is input again, the operation will

restart from execution of resetting.

(4) The reference position return speed is handled in the same manner as the normal reference position return

speed.

(5) The reference position returned to during reference position retract depends on the "Reference position

selection code m".

(6) Even if the return signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However, if the return signal is

executed in a block other than the thread cutting block, the return operation will be executed.

(7) The return signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error will occur when the

return signal is input. "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0020"

[Timing chart]

[Related signals]

(1) Tap retract possible (TRVEn)

(2) Tap retract (TRVn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A REFERENCE POSITION RE-

TRACT RTNn Y75D Y83D Y91D Y9FD YADD YBBD YC9D

Reference position retract (RTN)

In reset (RST)

Automatic operation

Reference position reached (ZP1n)

Reference position return Reset stop

Approx. 100ms

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

267

[Function]

This function is used to check the program by moving the machine without rotating the spindle when the synchronous

tapping command is issued. The program can advance without rotating the spindle during synchronous feed even in the

asynchronous tapping mode.

[Operation]

(1) Synchronized tapping mode

When the spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the spindle will not rotate even if the servo is turned ON.

During the synchronized tapping mode, the operation up to when the synchronized tapping mode turns OFF will not

change even if the spindle OFF mode is changed.

This signal should be ON from the start of operation.

When the spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the operation is executed with the command speed if the dry run signal

is OFF.

When the dry run signal is ON, the operation is executed with the manual feed rate.

(2) Asynchronous tapping mode

(a) During synchronous (per revolution) feed

When the tapping cycle is executed with the spindle being not rotated, the machine will be stopped because of

the M01 Operation error 0154 (spindle stop). When the dry run signal is turned ON at this time and the

spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the tapping cycle will be executed as the spindle in the stopping status (in that

case, it moves at the speed of the dry run).

When the dry run signal OFF or the spindle OFF mode signal is turned OFF, the machine will be stopped

because of the M01 Operation error 0154 (spindle stop).

(b) During asynchronous feed (per minute) feed

Even when the tapping cycle is executed with the spindle being not rotated, the taping cycle will be executed.

The spindle OFF mode signal is not related.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SPINDLE OFF MODE SPOFFMn Y75F Y83F Y91F Y9FF YADF YBBF YC9F

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

268

[Function]

Override (magnification) can be exerted to cutting feedrate (F feedrate) during automatic operation with this signal.

[Operation]

When the signal is valid, true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying referenced speed by override ratio (%)

specified by the signal.

Override is 100%, even when the signal is given, in the following cases:

(1) When "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.

(2) During tapping mode.

(3) During thread cutting.

These signals (*FV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) Override cancel (OVCn)

(2) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)

(3) Cutting feedrate override method selection (FVSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B CUTTING FEEDRATE OVER-

RIDE CODE m *FV1mn

Y760 - 764

Y840 - 844

Y920 - 924

YA00 - A04

YAE0 - AE4

YBC0 - BC4

YCA0 - CA4

*FV16 *FV8 *FV4 *FV2 *FV1 Cutting feedrate override

Generally, the rotary switch(5-step, 21-notch, complimentbinary code output) is connectedto the operation board, and used between 0 and 200%. If *FV1 to *FV16 are all OFF, the previous value will be maintained. The value will change to 0% when the power is turned OFF.

1 1 1 1 1 0%

1 1 1 1 0 10%

1 1 1 0 1 20%

1 1 1 0 0 30%

1 1 0 1 1 40%

1 1 0 1 0 50%

1 1 0 0 1 60%

1 1 0 0 0 70%

1 0 1 1 1 80%

1 0 1 1 0 90%

1 0 1 0 1 100%

1 0 1 0 0 110%

1 0 0 1 1 120%

1 0 0 1 0 130%

1 0 0 0 1 140%

1 0 0 0 0 150%

0 1 1 1 1 160%

0 1 1 1 0 170%

0 1 1 0 1 180%

0 1 1 0 0 190%

0 1 0 1 1 200%

0 1 0 1 0 210%

0 1 0 0 1 220%

0 1 0 0 0 230%

0 0 1 1 1 240%

0 0 1 1 0 250%

0 0 1 0 1 260%

0 0 1 0 0 270%

0 0 0 1 1 280%

0 0 0 1 0 290%

0 0 0 0 1 300%

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

269

[Function]

Override normally exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation is within a range from 0% to 300%. When this

signal is used, another override (ranging from 0% to 327.67%) can be exerted on overridden feedrate.

[Operation]

When the signal (FV2En) is ON, override can be exerted on feedrate previously overridden in code method (*FV1mn), or

file register method (by setting numerals manually). Applicable range of the 2nd override is 0% to 327.6% (0.01%

increment). Value (override ratio) is set to file register in binary code.

[Function]

When override is exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation, override method can be selected between "code

method" and "file register method".

[Operation]

When the signal (FVSn) is OFF, code method of "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) is selected.

When the signal (FVSn) is ON, file register method (value is specified by manual setting) is selected.

(Note) For details of code method and file register method, refer to the relevant descriptions.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A 2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE

OVERRIDE VALID FV2En Y766 Y846 Y926 YA06 YAE6 YBC6 YCA6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A CUTTING FEEDRATE OVER- RIDE METHOD SELECTION

FVSn Y767 Y847 Y927 YA07 YAE7 YBC7 YCA7

FV2E

Code method override (*FV1 to *FV16)

File register method override (File register)

ON

OFF

2nd override

True override = or

= Cutting feedrate (Fmm/min)

FVS

OFF: Code method

ON: File register method

*FV1 to *FV16 (0 to 300%, 10% increment)

File register (0 to 300%, 1% increment) True feedrate

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

270

[Function]

This signal is used to exert override on rapid traverse speed set by parameter (for rapid traverse) in automatic operation

(memory, MDI) or manual operation.

[Operation]

The true rapid traverse speed is that obtained by multiplying rapid traverse speed (set by parameter) by override ratio

specified by this signal.

This signal is invalid if the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF during cutting feed during automatic operation or during

manual operation.

These signals (ROVmn) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) Rapid traverse speed override method selection (ROVSn)

[Function]

When speed override is exerted on rapid traverse speed specified in automatic operation or manual operation, override

method is selected between code method and file register method (manually set).

[Operation]

When the signal (ROVSn) is OFF, code method of "Rapid traverse override code m" (ROVmn) is used.

When the signal (ROVSn) is ON, file register method is used.

(Note) For details of "code method override" and "file register method", refer to the respective description.

[Function]

Feedrate in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or in dry run of automatic operation (memory,

MDI) is selected.

[Operation]

This signal is valid in the following cases, but will be invalid when the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is ON.

(1) Jog mode, incremental mode or reference position return mode is ON.

(2) During cutting feed in automatic operation and "Dry run" (DRNn) signal is ON.

(3) Dry run signal is ON during rapid traverse in the automatic operation. Note that parameter "#1085 G00 dry run"

must be ON.

These signals (*JV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

CODE m ROVmn

Y768 - 769

Y848 - 849

Y928 - 929

YA08 - A09

YAE8 - AE9

YBC8 - BC9

YCA8 - CA9

ROV2n ROV1n Rapid traversespeed override

0 0 100%

0 1 50%

1 0 25%

1 1 1%

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

METHOD SELECTION ROVSn Y76F Y84F Y92F YA0F YAEF YBCF YCAF

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B MANUAL FEEDRATE CODE m *JVmn Y770 -

774 Y850 -

854 Y930 -

934 YA10 -

A14 YAF0 -

AF4 YBD0 -

BD4 YCB0 -

CB4

Rapid traverse speed (parameter setting)

ROVS

OFF: Code method

ON: File register method

ROV1, 2 (1, 25, 50, 100%)

File register (0 to 100%, 1% increment)

True rapid Traverse speed =

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

271

If *JV 1 to *JV16 are all OFF, the previous value will be maintained. The value will be set to 0 when the power is turned

OFF.

(Note 1) In JOG mode, true feedrate changes if this signal changes during feed motion.

(Note 2) In incremental feed mode, true feedrate does not change if this signal changes during feed motion.

[Related signals]

(1) Manual feedrate method selection (JVSn)

(2) Manual override method selection (OVSLn)

*JV16 *JV8 *JV4 *JV2 *JV1

Manual feedrate

Machine parameter setin meters Machine parameter setin inches

Metric mode (mm/min)

Inch mode (inch/min)

Metric mode (mm/min)

Inch mode (inch/min)

1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.000 0.00 0.000

1 1 1 1 0 1.00 0.040 0.51 0.020

1 1 1 0 1 1.40 0.054 0.71 0.028

1 1 1 0 0 2.00 0.079 1.02 0.040

1 1 0 1 1 2.70 0.106 1.37 0.054

1 1 0 1 0 3.70 0.146 1.88 0.074

1 1 0 0 1 5.20 0.205 2.64 0.104

1 1 0 0 0 7.20 0.283 3.66 0.144

1 0 1 1 1 10.00 0.394 5.08 0.200

1 0 1 1 0 14.00 0.551 7.11 0.280

1 0 1 0 1 20.00 0.787 10.16 0.400

1 0 1 0 0 27.00 1.060 13.72 0.540

1 0 0 1 1 37.00 1.460 18.80 0.740

1 0 0 1 0 52.00 2.050 26.42 1.040

1 0 0 0 1 72.00 2.830 36.58 1.440

1 0 0 0 0 100.00 3.940 50.80 2.000

0 1 1 1 1 140.00 5.510 71.12 2.800

0 1 1 1 0 200.00 7.870 101.60 4.000

0 1 1 0 1 270.00 10.600 137.16 5.400

0 1 1 0 0 370.00 14.600 187.96 7.400

0 1 0 1 1 520.00 20.500 264.16 10.400

0 1 0 1 0 720.00 28.300 365.76 14.400

0 1 0 0 1 1000.00 39.400 508.00 20.000

0 1 0 0 0 1400.00 55.100 711.20 28.000

0 0 1 1 1 2000.00 78.700 990.60 39.000

0 0 1 1 0 2700.00 106.000 1371.60 54.000

0 0 1 0 1 3700.00 146.000 1879.60 74.000

0 0 1 0 0 5200.00 205.000 2641.60 104.000

0 0 0 1 1 7200.00 283.000 3657.60 144.000

0 0 0 1 0 10000.00 394.000 5080.00 200.000

0 0 0 0 1 14000.00 551.000 7112.00 280.000

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

272

[Function]

When feedrate is specified in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or dry run (automatic

operation), feedrate command method is selected between code method and file register method.

[Operation]

When the signal (JVSn) is OFF, code method of "Manual feedrate code m" (*JVmn) is selected.

When the signal (JVSn) is ON, file register method is selected.

(Note) For details of "code method feedrate" and "file register method feedrate", refer to the relevant description.

[Function]

When manual feedrate is specified in file register method (JVSn: "ON") or in arbitrary manual feed mode, manual

feedrate of file registers R is used. In this case, least increment of the feedrate entered into the file registers is specified

by this signal.

[Operation]

The relationship between PCFmn and least feed increment is as follows:

[Related signals]

(1) Manual feedrate

[Function]

This is used when the manual feedrate designation is to be per rotation feed (feed rate per spindle rotation).

[Operation]

(1) The following operation mode feedrates will immediately become per rotation feed when the "Jog synchronous feed

valid" signal is turned ON.

- Jog mode

- Incremental feed mode

- Reference position return mode

- When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is OFF and "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1"

(CXS4n) is ON in the manual random feed mode.

(2) Even if the "Jog synchronous feed valid" signal is ON, the per minute feed will be used in the following states.

- When the dry run signal is ON.

- When the "Rapid traverse" signal is ON in the jog, incremental or reference position return modes.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL FEEDRATE METHOD

SELECTION JVSn Y777 Y857 Y937 YA17 YAF7 YBD7 YCB7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A FEEDRATE LEAST INCRE-

MENT CODE m PCFmn

Y778 - 779

Y858 - 859

Y938 - 939

YA18 - A19

YAF8 - AF9

YBD8 - BD9

YCB8 - CB9

PCF2n PCF1n Least increment

(mm/min or inch/min) Operation

0 0 10 10mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

0 1 1 1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

1 0 0.1 0.1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

1 1 0.01 0.01mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A JOG SYNCHRONOUS

FEED VALID JSYNn Y77A Y85A Y93A YA1A YAFA YBDA YCBA

JVS

OFF: Code method

ON: File register method

= *JV1 to 16 (0 to 14000mm/min) Feedrate in automatic operation or

dry run (automatic operation) File register (0 to 100000mm/min)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

273

[Designation of feedrates]

The designation of the per rotation feedrate is the same as the per minute feed input.

The cutting override will be valid when the "Manual override method selection" (OVSLn) signal is ON.

(a) Code method (*JV1n to *JV16n)

(b) File register method (manual feedrate)

The feedrate when the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) is selected will be set in manual feedrate with

the binary value. However, the designation unit will be as follows according to the "Feedrate least increment code

m" (PCFmn).

[Related signals]

(1) Manual feedrate

*JV16n *JV8n *JV4n *JV2n *JV1n Feed per minute Feed per rotation

mm/min inch/min mm/rev inch/rev

1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.000 0.0000 0.00000

1 1 1 1 0 1.00 0.040 0.0100 0.00040

1 1 1 0 1 1.40 0.054 0.0140 0.00054

1 1 1 0 0 2.00 0.079 0.0200 0.00079

1 1 0 1 1 2.70 0.106 0.0270 0.00106

1 1 0 1 0 3.70 0.146 0.0370 0.00146

1 1 0 0 1 5.20 0.205 0.0520 0.00205

1 1 0 0 0 7.20 0.283 0.0720 0.00283

1 0 1 1 1 10.00 0.394 0.1000 0.00394

1 0 1 1 0 14.00 0.551 0.1400 0.00551

1 0 1 0 1 20.00 0.787 0.2000 0.00787

1 0 1 0 0 27.00 1.060 0.2700 0.01060

1 0 0 1 1 37.00 1.460 0.3700 0.01460

1 0 0 1 0 52.00 2.050 0.5200 0.02050

1 0 0 0 1 72.00 2.830 0.7200 0.02830

1 0 0 0 0 100.00 3.940 1.0000 0.03940

0 1 1 1 1 140.00 5.510 1.4000 0.05510

0 1 1 1 0 200.00 7.870 2.0000 0.07870

0 1 1 0 1 270.00 10.600 2.7000 0.10600

0 1 1 0 0 370.00 14.600 3.7000 0.14600

0 1 0 1 1 520.00 20.500 5.2000 0.20500

0 1 0 1 0 720.00 28.300 7.2000 0.28300

0 1 0 0 1 1000.00 39.400 10.0000 0.39400

0 1 0 0 0 1400.00 55.100 14.0000 0.55100

0 0 1 1 1 2000.00 78.700 20.0000 0.78700

0 0 1 1 0 2700.00 106.000 27.0000 1.06000

0 0 1 0 1 3700.00 146.000 37.0000 1.46000

0 0 1 0 0 5200.00 205.000 52.0000 2.05000

0 0 0 1 1 7200.00 283.000 72.0000 2.83000

0 0 0 1 0 10000.00 394.000 100.0000 3.94000

0 0 0 0 1 14000.00 551.000 140.0000 5.51000

PCF2n PCF1n Feed per minute Feed per rotation

Speed unit mm/min. or inch/min. Speed unit mm/rev. or inch/rev.

0 0 10 0.1

0 1 1 0.01

1 0 0.1 0.001

1 1 0.01 0.0001

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

274

[Function]

Jog feed and handle feed can be carried out without changing the operation mode.

[Operation]

If the "Jog mode" (Jn) signal and this signal are input simultaneously, the "jog/handle synchronous mode" will be

entered.

If the "Rapid traverse" (RTn) signal is turned ON during the "jog/handle synchronous mode", the jog feed will be carried

out at the rapid traverse feedrate. When the "Rapid traverse" turns OFF, the jog feed will be carried out at the manual

feedrate.

(1) During "jog/handle synchronous mode", jog feed and handle feed can be carried out randomly.

However, jog feed and handle feed cannot be carried out simultaneously on the same axis. If carried out

simultaneously, the jog feed will have a priority. The changeover between jog feed and handle feed on the same

axis is carried out when the relevant axis has stopped.

(Note) If only the "Jog handle synchronous" signal is output, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur. If the "Jog

handle synchronous" signal is input simultaneously with an operation mode signal other than the jog mode, the

"Jog handle synchronous" signal will be ignored.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A JOG HANDLE SYNCHRONOUS JHANn Y77B Y85B Y93B YA1B YAFB YBDB YCBB

Operation mode

Jog handle synchronous signal (JHANn)

Rapid traversesignal (RTn)

Operation during jog feed Handle feed

Jog feed

ON ON Rapid traverse feedrate Possible

OFF Manual feedrate Possible

OFF ON Rapid traverse feedrate Impossible

OFF Manual feedrate Impossible

If handle feed is carried out on an axis that is being jog fed, the jog feed will have a priority, so after movement with jog feed has completed (the axis has stopped), handle feed movement will start.

If jog feed is carried out on an axis that is being handle fed, the handle feed movement will stop at the rising edge of the jog feed command. After the axis stops, the jog feed movement will start.

Jog feed command

Handle pulse

Axis movement

Handle pulses as this section are ignored.

Jog movement Handle movement

Jog feed command

Handle pulse

Axis movement

Jog movement Handle movement

Handle pulses as this section are ignored.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

275

[Function]

This signal selects process of current limit reached.

[Operation]

When the current reaches its limit during current control, the "current limit reached" signal will be output, and the

following mode will be selected and performed.

(1) Normal mode

Movement command is executed in the current state.

In automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end and moves to the next block with droops

accumulated.

(2) Interlock mode

Movement command is blocked (internal interlock).

In automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block and does not move to the next block.

In manual operation, the subsequent commands to the same direction will be ignored.

[Related signals]

(1) In current limit (ILIn)

(2) Current limit reached (ILAn)

(3) Current limit changeover (ILCn)

(4) Droop release request (DORn)

(5) Current limit changeover

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A CURRENT LIMIT MODE m ILMmn Y77D -

77E Y85D -

85E Y93 - 93E

YA1 - A1E

YAFD - AFE

YBDD - BDE

YCBD - CBE

Current limit mode 2 Current limit mode 1 Mode

0 0 Normal

0 1 Interlock

1 0 Normal

1 1 Normal

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

276

[Function]

Amount of feed motion per pulse from the manual pulse generator in HANDLE feed mode, or amount of feed motion per

shot in incremental feed mode +/- (+Jn, -Jn) is multiplied by this signal.

[Operation]

This signal (MPmn) is set with the code method.

When this code mode is selected, the true amount of feed motion (per pulse feed in handle feed mode, and per ON/OFF

of Jn value in incremental feed mode) is the product obtained by multiplying originally set amount of feed by multiplier

MP1n, MP2n, MP4n.

The relationship between multiplier code (MPmn) and magnification in each feed mode is as follows.

[Related signals]

(1) Handle mode (Hn)

(2) Incremental mode (Sn)

[Function] [Operation]

This signal sets magnification per each handle when setting magnification of feed arbitrarily.

(1) When the signal is ON

When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification can be set per each handle.

When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for all handles.

(2) When the signal is OFF

When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification of 1st handle/incremental feed will be

applied for all handles.

When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for all handles.

[Related signals]

(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)

(2) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MP1n, MP2n, MP4n)

(3) 1st handle/incremental feed magnification

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED

MAGNIFICATION CODE m MPmn

Y780 - 782

Y860 - 862

Y940 - 942

YA20 - A22

YB00 - B02

YBE0 - BE2

YCC0 - CC2

MP4n MP2n MP1n Magnification in HANDLE

feed Magnification in INCREMENTAL

feed

0 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 10 10

0 1 0 100 100

0 1 1 1000 1000

1 0 0 1 5000

1 0 1 10 10000

1 1 0 100 50000

1 1 1 1000 100000

Con- tact

Signal name Signal

abbreviation $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MAGNIFICATION VALID FOR

EACH HANDLE MPPn Y786 Y866 Y946 YA26 YB06 YBE6 YCC6

Handle Magnification of feed

File register method Code method

1st handle R2408, 2409

Y780, Y781, YC7822nd handle R2410, 2411

3rd handle R2412, 2413

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

277

[Function]

Feed magnification method in handle feed or incremental feed is selected between "code method" and "file register

method" by this signal.

[Operation]

When the signal (MPSn) is OFF, "Handle/incremental feed magnification code m" (MPmn) is selected.

When the signal (MPSn) is ON, "file register magnification method" is selected.

(Note) For details of the motion corresponding to the code method or file register method, refer to the relevant

descriptions.

[Related signals]

(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)

(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification

[Function]

This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.

This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool

alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool

skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.

(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is

designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is

selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal

is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group

is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be

carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected

needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected

due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal

input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation

request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION METHOD SE-

LECTION MPSn Y787 Y867 Y947 YA27 YB07 YBE7 YCC7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

MPS

OFF: Code method

ON: File register method

Basic amount of feed (1) Multiplier by MP1, MP2, MP4

Multiplier by value set in file register = True amount

of motion

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

278

[Function]

This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 4 (a tool of Tool alarm 2).

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "4" (a tool of

Tool alarm 2).

This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

See "4.19.11 Interface with PLC" for details.

[Function]

This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management

specification.

This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management

specification.

[Function]

This signal validates the tool life management.

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, the tool life management process is executed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL ALARM 2 TAL2n Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT IN-

PUT TLF1n Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

279

[Function]

This signal is used to clear all tool usage data in a group with the tool life management II.

[Operation]

Select with the tool group No. designation whether all groups that have exceeded their lifetimes or specific group to be

cleared.

After this signal is input, the first tool of the group will be selected at the next group selection.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be

carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected

needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again. However, a tool may not be selected

due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal

input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation

request" (CRQn) signal before selecting the group.

[Related signals]

(1) Recalculation request (CRQn:Y72B)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL CHANGE RESET TCRTn Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

280

[Function]

This signal specifies a number of the axis component to move in manual arbitrary feed mode.

Components of up to three axes can be moved simultaneously in manual arbitrary feed mode.

This signal is used to specify one of them.

[Operation]

(1) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) must be set before "Manual arbitrary feed strobe"

(CXS8n) signal is turned ON. An attempt to set it during motion shall fail.

(2) Besides this signal (CX1mn), there are two signals to specify a "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code m"

(CX2mn) and a "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m" (CX3mn). The axis numbers need not be

specified in ascending order.

(3) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) is validated by turning ON the "Manual arbitrary

feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal explained later. Similarly, the valid signals (CX2Sn, CX3Sn) are also provided

for the 2nd and 3rd axis number signals.

(4) Axis numbers can be specified as follows:

(5) Motion of the specified axis component is as follows:

(a) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn)

signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount".

(b) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code m" (CX2mn)

signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount".

(c) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m" (CX3mn)

signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount".

[Related signals]

For related signals, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

[Function]

This signal is used to validate the axis specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal

so that the axis component can move in manual arbitrary feed mode.

[Operation]

(1) The specification of the axis by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal explained

earlier is validated only when the "CX1S" signal is turned ON.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

1ST AXIS SELECTION CODE m CX1mn Y790 - 4 Y870 - 4 Y950 - 4 YA30 - 4 YB10 - 4 YBF0 - 4 YCD0 - 4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

1ST AXIS VALID CX1Sn Y797 Y877 Y957 YA37 YB17 YBF7 YCD7

n: 1 to 3

Signal

Axis

specification

CXnS CXn16 CXn8 CXn4 CXn2 CXn1

1st axis 1 0 0 0 0 1

2nd axis 1 0 0 0 1 0

3rd axis 1 0 0 0 1 1

4th axis 1 0 0 1 0 0

Validity signal Axis number

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

281

[Function][Operation]

See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn)" signal.

[Function][Operation]

See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal.

[Function][Operation]

See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX1mn) signal explained above.

[Function][Operation]

See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" (CX1Sn) signal.

[Function]

This signal is used to move an axis component under the condition where the acceleration/ deceleration time constant is

0 is manual arbitrary feed mode.

[Operation]

With the "Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off" (CXS1n) signal set ON, axis motion in manual arbitrary feed mode is

performed under the same conditions as when the acceleration/deceleration time constant is set to 0.

(Note 1) When using this signal to move an axis component under the condition where the acceleration/deceleration

time constant is 0, move it at a slow speed. Otherwise, a servo alarm (excess error) may occur.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode" (PTPn) mode.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

2ND AXIS SELECTION CODE m CX2mn

Y798 - 79C

Y878 - 87C

Y958 - 95C

YA38 - A3C

YB18 - B1C

YBF8 - BFC

YCD8 - CDC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

2ND AXIS VALID CX2Sn Y79F Y87F Y95F YA3F YB1F YBFF YCDF

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

3RD AXIS SELECTION CODE m CX3mn Y7A0 - 4 Y880 - 4 Y960 - 4 YA40 - 4 YB20 - 4 YC00 - 4 YCE0 - 4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

3RD AXIS VALID CX3Sn Y7A7 Y887 Y967 YA47 YB27 YC07 YCE7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

SMOOTHING OFF CXS1n Y7A8 Y888 Y968 YA48 YB28 YC08 YCE8

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

282

[Function]

When moving two or more axis components simultaneously in "manual arbitrary feed" mode, this signal can be used to

position each axis independently without performing interpolation.

[Operation]

When a manual arbitrary feed is executed for two or more axes at the same time with "Manual arbitrary feed axis

independent" (CXS2n) ON, each axis is positioned independently without being subjected to interpolation.

The "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent" (CXS2n) signal is generally used when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1"

(CXS4n) signal explained later is OFF (G0 selected).

The following is an example where the rapid traverse speeds of X-axis and Z-axis are both set to 9,600 mm/min, and the

amounts of movement of X-axis and Z-axis are set to 300mm and 200mm respectively.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

AXIS INDEPENDENT CXS2n Y7A9 Y889 Y969 YA49 YB29 YC09 YCE9

(Example 1)

End point

Z-axis

X-axis

200

300

f z

f x

X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min

Start point

Z-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min

End point

(Example 2) Z-axis

X-axis

300

200

Z-axis effective speed: 6400 mm/min

f z

f x

Start point

X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

283

[Function]

This signal selects whether a manual arbitrary feed in G1 mode is done at manual feed rate or at modal speed in

automatic operation.

[Operation]

When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal explained later is ON n, the "CXS3" signal works as follows:

(1) When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is OFF:

1)When the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is OFF, the speed selected by the manual feed rate

(*JV1 to 16) applies.

2)When the "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is ON, the applicable speed is determined by the

relation between the contents of the corresponding file register (R) and the "Feedrate least increment code m"

(PCFmn) signal.

(2) When "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) is ON:

Manual arbitrary feed is operated at a modal speed (F***) set in automatic operation. However, it will not operate if

no F command has been executed before.

After executing 1-digit F command when F 1-digit feed is valid (#1079 is set to "1"), it will operate with the F 1-digit

feed speed (#1185 to #1189) which is registered beforehand.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

[Function]

This signal selects a manual feed speed or rapid traverse speed in manual arbitrary feed mode.

[Operation]

This signal operates as shown below depending on the status of the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal.

(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is OFF:

The rapid traverse speed originally set to the corresponding axis applies. Rapid traverse override is also valid. The

rapid traverse speed applicable when moving two or more axis components at the same time varies with the status

of the "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent" (CXS2n) signal. See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed

axis independent" (CXS2n) signal.

(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is ON:

The manual feed speed or the speed specified by the F command in automatic operation apply. For details, see the

description on the "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n).

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

EX.F/MODAL.F CXS3n Y7AA Y88A Y96A YA4A YB2A YC0A YCEA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

G0/G1 CXS4n Y7AB Y88B Y96B YA4B YB2B YC0B YCEB

File register (R)

Manual feedrate code *JV1~*JV16

PCF1, PCF2

F command modal (F***)

Off

On

JVS

Off

On

EX. F/MODAL. F (CX3n)

Moving speed

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

284

[Function]

This signal selects a machine coordinate system or a modal workpiece coordinate system on which positioning is done in

manual arbitrary feed mode.

[Operation]

The "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal becomes valid when the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6)

signal explained later is OFF in manual arbitrary feed mode.

(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal is OFF:

"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the machine

coordinate system.

(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5) signal is ON:

"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the modal

workpiece coordinate system.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

[Function]

This signal selects whether travel amount is given in an absolute value or incremental value for manual arbitrary feed.

[Operation]

(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6) signal is OFF:

"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as an absolute value. For details,

see the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5)" signal explained before.

(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6) signal is ON:

"Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as a real movement value.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

MC/WK CXS5n Y7AC Y88C Y96C YA4C YB2C YC0C YCEC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

ABS/INC CXS6n Y7AD Y88D Y96D YA4D YB2D YC0D YCED

Amount of motion =

Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on machine coordinate system

Amount of motion =

Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on modal workpiece coordinate system

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

285

[Function]

This signal stops an ongoing axis component halfway in manual arbitrary feed mode.

The function of this signal is equivalent to those of the "Manual interlock +" (*+MITn) and "Manual interlock -" (*-MITn)"

signals.

[Operation]

Turning the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n) signal OFF (0) causes the following:

(1) Motion of axis in manual arbitrary feed mode is decelerated and stopped.

(2) The axis component which is going to move in manual arbitrary feed mode remains stopped. When the "Manual

arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n) signal is turned ON (1) while an axis component is in the stop state, it immediately

restarts the operation.

[Related signals]

For related signal, see the "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)."

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

STOP *CXS7n Y7AE Y88E Y96E YA4E YB2E YC0E YCEE

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

286

[Function]

This signal is a trigger signal for moving an axis component in manual arbitrary feed mode. The axis component starts

moving at the rising edge of this signal.

[Operation]

The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal should be turned ON after all signal values necessary for manual

arbitrary feed are set appropriately.

(1) The following signals must be appropriately set before turning ON the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n)

signal:

(a) Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPn)

(b) Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m to Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m (CX1mn to

CX3mn), Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid to Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid (CX1Sn to CX3Sn)

(c) Manual arbitrary feed nth axis travel amount

(d) Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off (CXS1n)

(e) Manual arbitrary feed axis independent (CXS2n)

(f) Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3n)

(g) Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1 (CXS4n)

(h) Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)

(i) Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6)

(2) The following signals can be changed even after the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal is turned ON:

(j) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(k) Rapid traverse override for a rapid traverse speed when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4n) signal is

OFF.

(l) "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7n)

(Note 1) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal can be accepted even when the "Manual arbitrary feed

stop" (*CXS7n) signal is OFF (0).

(Note 2) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" (CXS8n) signal must be ON for at least 30ms.

[Related signals]

Signals listed in (a) to (l) above

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED

STROBE CXS8n Y7AF Y88F Y96F YA4F YB2F YC0F YCEF

Example of operation timing chart

Manual arbitrary feed mode, etc.

Manual arbitrary feed strobe

Axis motion

Axis selected (Axn: X7A0)

Manual arbitrary feed stop

In manual arbitrary feed

Manual arbitrary feed

((a) to (i)) above )

(CXS8n: YCBF)

(*CXS7n: YCBE)

(CXNn: XC16)

completion (CXFINn: XC1C)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

287

[Function]

The axis is interlocked at a designated position during manual 2nd reference position return.

[Operation]

During 2nd reference position return while this signal is valid (base specification parameter "#1505 ckref2" is "1"), if this

signal turns OFF , movement of axes that have reached the designated position will stop, and an interlock will be applied.

Axes that have not reached the designated position will be interlocked after reaching the designated position.

When this signal is ON, the axis movement will not stop, and the 2nd reference position return will continue.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

B 2ND REFERENCE POSITION

RETURN INTERLOCK *ZRITn Y7B0 Y890 Y970 YA50 YB30 YC10 YCF0

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

288

[Function]

This signal is input into the controller when executing operation search in the memory mode and carrying out automatic

start up.

This signal is also input into the controller when a program is downloaded from the FTP server also, the automatic

startup is executed.

[Operation]

If this signal is input when the memory operation mode is selected, an operation search of the machining program

designated by "Search & start program No." will be carried out. After the search, the program will be automatically

started.

When the FTP mode is selected, download the program designated by "search and start program No." from FTP server

and execute the automatic startup after the search is completed.

If this signal is input during automatic operation, the program will be reset before the search. After the resetting is

completed, the search and automatic start operations will be executed.

Do not turn OFF this signal until the download completed signal turns ON or the download error signal turns ON.

Otherwise download will be interrupted.

(Example)The O900 machining program is designated and search & start is executed in a state other than automatic

operation.

(Example)When O900 machining program is designated during operation of the O1 machining program, and search &

start is executed.

(Note 1) This signal is valid only when the memory mode is selected.

(Note 2) An error signal will be output if:

- the machining program No. is not designated;

- the designated program No. is illegal (0 or exceeding 99999999); or

- restart search is in execution.

(Note 3) This signal is valid at the rising edge.

(Note 4) If this signal is input during resetting, the search & start will not be executed.

[Related signals]

(1) Search & start program No.

(2) Search & start error (SSEn)

(3) Search & start (search) (SSGn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SEARCH & START RSSTn Y7B2 Y892 Y972 YA52 YB32 YC12 YCF2

O900Program No.

In automatic operation

Search & start (search)

Search & start

O90001Program No.

In automatic operation

In "reset"

Search & start (search)

Search & start

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

289

[Function]

Select whether the movement for the inclined axis in the manual operation is affected to the corresponding basic axis or

not.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the corresponding basic axis is

not moved.

When this signal is turned OFF and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the compensation operation

attending the movement of the inclined axis is executed to the corresponding basic axis.

[Caution]

Even if this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will not be valid.

If this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will be valid after the axis movement is stopped.

[Function]

In the hypothetical linear axis control, select whether to command the hypothetical axis in the hypothetical plane or to

command the actual axis.

[Operation]

Hypothetical axis command mode can be selected by turing ON the hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn). This

mode can command the hypothetical axis out of the hypothetical plane and the actual axis.

Actual axis command mode can be selected by turing OFF the hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODn). This mode

can command the actual axis.

[Related signals]

(1) In Hypothetical axis command mode (VAMODOn)

[Function]

Designate whether to rotate the spindle in reverse during synchronous tapping.

[Operation]

When the "Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal" signal is ON, the spindle will rotate in reverse during

synchronous tapping.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A INCLINED AXIS CONTROL: NO

Z AXIS COMPENSATION Y7B6 Y896 Y976 YA56 YB36 YC16 YCF6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COM-

MAND MODE VAMODn Y7B8 Y898 Y978 YA58 YB38 YC18 YCF8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING

COMMAND POLARITY REVER- SAL

Y7B9 Y899 Y979 YA59 YB39 YC19 YCF9

T command

Command polarity reversal Synchronous tapping

Command to spindle

Basically, the reverse run command signal is input simultaneously with the T command

The spindle will not rotate in reverse even if turned ON during synchronous tapping

The spindle will not return to forward run even if turned OFF during synchronous tapping

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

290

[Function]

This validates the chopping function by external signal.

[Operation]

The chopping operation is started at the rising edge of this signal and terminated at the falling edge of this signal.

This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

[Function]

This validates the chopping operation parameter by the external signal.

[Operation]

(1) The chopping operation parameter is valid at the rising edge of this signal.

The chopping operation parameters include the following.

(a) Compensation method selection

(b) Operation mode selection

(c) Rapid traverse override valid

(d) Chopping axis selection

(e) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(f) Bottom dead point position designation (L)(H)

(g) Number of cycles designation

(h) Data No.

(2) This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

(3) Chopping operation parameter can be changed with this signal during chopping operation.

[Related signals]

(1) Compensation method selection

(2) Operation mode selection

(3) Rapid traverse override valid

(4) Chopping axis selection

(5) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(6) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(7) Number of cycles designation

(8) Data No.

(9) Chopping status

[Function]

The compensation method of the chopping by external signal is selected.

[Operation]

0: The compensation amount sequential update method

1: The fixed compensation amount method

The selection with this signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A CHOPPING CHPSn Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A CHOPPING PARAMETER VAL-

ID Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A COMPENSATION METHOD SE-

LECTION Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

291

[Function]

The operation mode is selected when the fixed compensation amount method is selected in the compensation method of

the chopping operation with eternal signal.

[Operation]

0: Playback mode

1: Record mode

This selects the operation mode, when the fixed compensation amount method from the chopping operation's

compensation method by the external signal, is selected.

When the compensation value sequential update method is selected as a compensation method, this signal will be

ignored.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

This sets the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the motion speed between basic point and the upper dead

point.

[Operation]

0: Invalid

1: Valid

When this signal is OFF, the axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate regardless of the designation of the rapid traverse

override.

This signal will not be switched at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal or in the the chopping operation

where the G81.1 command is issued.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A OPERATION MODE SELEC-

TION Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

VALID Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

292

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function]

This signal changes the spindle speed to the speed (S command) specified in the machining program.

This signal is used to smoothly perform the spindle speed (S command, etc.) control.

[Operation]

To change the spindle speed to the speed specified by the S command during automatic operation (memory, MDI), it is

needed to turn ON the "Gear shift completion" (GFINn), or "M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n)" signal.

When using the "Gear shift completion" (GFINn) signal, the following two conditions should be considered:

- Whether gear shift (gear change) is applicable (whether there are two or more states of gear shift).

- Whether "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal output from the spindle controller is used for verification of spindle

speed.

(Operation example 1) There is no gear shift and the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is not used.

(Operation example 2) There is no gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is used.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION GFINn YD26 YD56 YD86 YDB6 YDE6 YE16 YE46

S command + Spindle command speed Spindle

Rising edge of GFIN, FIN1, or FIN2

Command program

S function strobe (SF)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle speed

S100 Next block

Command program

S function strobe (SF)

Gear shift completion (GFIN)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Spindle speed

S100 Next block

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

293

(Operation example 3) There is gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal is not used.

(Operation example 4) There is gear shift and "Spindle up-to-speed" (USOn) signal are used.

[Related signals]

(1) S function strobe m (SFmn)

(2) Spindle gear shift command m (GRmn)

(3) M function finish (FIN1n, FIN2n)

(4) Spindle gear selection input code (GImn)

(5) Spindle stop (SSTPn), Spindle gear shift (SSFTn)

Command program

S function strobe (SF)

Spindle gear shift (GR1, GR2)

Spindle stop (SSTP)

Spindle gear shift (SSFT)

Spindle gear selection code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)

Gear shift completion (GFIN)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle speed

The same operation will be executed even if gear shift completion signal is not used.

S100 Next block

Command program

S function strobe (SF)

Spindle gear shift (GR1, GR2)

Spindle stop (SSTP)

Spindle gear shift (SSFT)

Gear shift completion (GFIN)

M function finish 1 (FIN1)

Spindle up-to-speed (USO)

Spindle speed

Spindle gear selection code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)

S100 Next block

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

294

[Function]

This signal applies override (magnification) on the S command issued in the automatic operation (memory, MDI).

[Operation]

By selecting "Spindle speed override m" (SPmn) signal, override ratio can be selected within range from 50% to 120%

(increment: 10%).

Override cannot be set when:

(1) "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal is ON.

(2) TAP mode is selected.

(3) Thread cutting mode is selected.

This signal (SPmn) is set with the code method. The relation is shown below.

(Note)The spindle override can be set either with the code method or by directly inputting the numerical value.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle override method selection (SPSn)

[Function]

When override is applied on the S command issued in automatic operation (memory, MDI), "code method" or "file

register method" is selected for override method.

[Operation]

When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) is OFF, "Spindle override code m" (SPmn) is selected.

When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) is ON, register method override (value set in file register is

applicable) is selected.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle override code m (SPmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE SPEED

OVERRIDE CODE m SPmn

YD28 - D2A

YD58 - D5A

YD88 - D8A

YDB8 - DBA

YDE8 - DEA

YE18 - E1A

YE48 - E4A

SP4n SP2n SP1n Spindle override

1 1 1 50%

0 1 1 60%

0 1 0 70%

1 1 0 80%

1 0 0 90%

0 0 0 100%

0 0 1 110%

1 0 1 120%

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION

SPSn YD2F YD5F YD8F YDBF YDEF YE1F YE4F

S command =

SP1 to SP4 (50 to 120%, 10% increment) OFF: Code method

ON: File register method

SPS File register (0 to 200%, 1% increment)

Spindle speed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

295

[Function]

This signal informs the controller which spindle gear has been selected on the machine side.

[Operation]

This "Spindle gear selection code" (GImn) signal is set according to the machine's spindle gear stage. The controller

calculates the S command data (data is transferred when the spindle controller is the high-speed serial connection

specification) based on this "Spindle gear selection" (GImn).

The flow after the spindle (S) command is executed and output to the spindle is shown below.

The relation of the gear stage to the spindle limit speed and maximum spindle speed selected with gear selection code

signal (Glmn) is as shown below.

(1) Slimt1 to 4 are set with parameters. The spindle speed for when the spindle (S) command final data is the max.(the

motor is run at the max. speed) is set.This setting is used for each gear stage unit, and is determined by the

deceleration ratio (gear ratio) of the motor and spindle.

For example, if the max. motor speed is 6000 r/min, and the 1st gear stage is decelerated to half, "3000" will be set

in parameter Slimt1.

(2) The controller calculates the spindle command final data as shown below.For example, if S command is issued,

"Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn) is the 1st stage (GI1n=OFF, GI2n=OFF), spindle override value (%) is

SOVR.

(3) If S2600 is executed when Slimt1 = "3000", Slimit2 = "6000" and spindle override "100%":

During this time, the motor rotation speed is 3549/4095 * 6000 = 5200 (r/min) and the gear ratio is 1/2 therefore the

spindle command final data is 2600 r/min.

(4) The S command is clamped with the Smaxn (n=1 to 4).If Smax1="2500" in the above state, the S-analog output will

be:

(Note) The spindle controller calculates the actual motor rotation speed with gear ratio as the motor max. rotation

speed is 6000 r/min with the gear ratio is 2nd gear stage.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE GEAR SELECTION

CODE m GImn

YD30 - D31

YD60 - D61

YD90 - D91

YDC0 - DC1

YDF0 - DF1

YE20 - E21

YE50 - E51

Gear stage Spindle gear selection code

Spindle speedlimit Maximumspindle speed GI2n GI1n

1 0 0 Slimt1 Smax1

2 0 1 Slimt2 Smax2

3 1 0 Slimt3 Smax3

4 1 1 Slimt4 Smax4

Spindle gear selection code (GImn) Spindle parameter (Slimt1 to 4, Smax1 to 4) Spindle override code m (SPmn)

Spindle command rotation speed input

S command

Spindle command rotation speed output

Calcu- lation

Spindle command final data (SBINn)

Spindle

PLC program process (mandatory)

SOVR =

Slimt1

100 4095

S commandSpindle command final data (SBINn)

2600 100 =

3000

100 4095 = 3549(r/min)Spindle command final data

(SBINn)

2500 100 = (

3000

100 4095 ) < 2500(r/min)(Smax1)Spindle command final data

(SBINn)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

296

[Function]

In spindle control, S command data (spindle speed) can be set to "0" by using this signal (SSTPn). Usually, the signal is

not used alone, but combined with "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal explained later.

[Operation]

When the signal (SSTPn) is turned ON, S command data is set to "0". S command data is restored when the signal is

turned OFF.

When "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal turns ON while the signal is ON, S command data which corresponds to speed

set by the spindle speed parameter is output.

"Spindle speed override code m" (SPmn)) is ignored while the signal is ON.

[Function]

This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed, when spindle gear is shifted, so that spindle gear can be

engaged smoothly.

[Operation]

When the signal (SSFTn) turns ON, the S command data equivalent to the low speed previously set by parameter is

output.

If gears are not engaged properly, the signal is turned ON. It should be noted that "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal should

be ON beforehand to use the signal (SSFTn).

Together with this signal (SSFTn), the forward run signal or the reverse run signal needs to be turned ON.

Spindle gear shift speed is selected by "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn).The relation is as follows:

S command data (spindle speed data) while "Spindle gear shift" (SSFTn) signal is ON can be determined from the

formula shown below.

For example, if the "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn) is the 1st stage (GI1n=OFF, GI2n=OFF), the spindle rotation

speed data is as follows:

Actual value is as follows:

Spindle command final data (SBINn) = Ssift1 / Slimt1 * 4095

When the spindle command final data (SBINn) is "4095", the rotation speed of the motor becomes maximum.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE STOP SSTPn YD34 YD64 YD94 YDC4 YDF4 YE24 YE54

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT SSFTn YD35 YD65 YD95 YDC5 YDF5 YE25 YE55

Gearstage

Spindle gearselection codesignal Spindle speed atgear shift Spindle speedlimit

GI2n GI1n

1 0 0 Ssift1 Slimt1

2 0 1 Ssift2 Slimt2

3 1 0 Ssift3 Slimt3

4 1 1 Ssift4 Slimt4

Spindle rotation speed (Motor rotation speed)

Maximum motor rotation speed Ssift1

= Slimt1

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

297

[Function]

This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed when executing mechanical orientation (Note) during spindle

control.

Since most spindle drive/control units recently marketed are equipped with spindle orientation function, and

therefore this signal is rarely used for mechanical orientation. The signal (SORCn) is used for application such as

rotating the spindle by constant rotation speed.

(Note) The mechanical orientation assumes to operate the orientation by performing as follows.

(1) Rotate the spindle at low speed.

(2) It detects when the spindle has reached the area where such as proximity switch is used and then stops

the spindle. The spindle stops after the speed is slowed to some extent.

(3) The position (the orientation position) is decided by hitting the pin against the spindle under the status of

(2).

[Operation]

When the signal (SORCn) turns ON, spindle speed is changed to the low speed previously set by parameter.

It should be noted that "Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal must be ON to use the signal (SORCn). Together with this signal

(SORCn), the forward run signal or the reverse run signal is required.

The table below shows the relationship between the oriented spindle speed and the "Spindle gear selection code m"

(GImn) signal.

Spindle speed data while "Spindle orientation" (SORCn) signal is ON can be determined from the formula shown below.

When "Spindle gear selection code m" (GImn)" signal combination is GI2n=0 and GI1n=1, the spindle rotation speed

data is as follows:

Actual spindle rotation speed is as follows:

Spindle command final data (SBINn) = SORI / Slimt2 * 4095

When the spindle command final data (SBINn) is "4095", the motor becomes the maximum rotation speed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE ORIENTATION SORCn YD36 YD66 YD96 YDC6 YDF6 YE26 YE56

Gearstage

Spindle gearselection codesignal Orientantion spindle speed Spindle speedlimit

GI2n GI1n

1 0 0

SORI

Slimt1

2 0 1 Slimt2

3 1 0 Slimt3

4 1 1 Slimt4

Orientation spindle speed data (Motor rotation speed)

Maximum motor rotation speed SORI

= Slimt2

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

298

[Function]

This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal

turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in normal direction (CCW as viewed from the shaft side).

[Operation]

Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command when the signal (SRNn) is turned ON.

When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.

When the "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle forward rotation, the

acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.

When the "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal is turned ON during deceleration to stop of spindle forward rotation,

the spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the machining will start immediately.

(1) Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal and "Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal

are turned ON at the same time. To resume forward run, both signals OFF once and then turn the "Spindle forward

run start" signal ON.

(2) The operation may stop during forward run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn the forward run

signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion " (SA) signal turns ON.

(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation speed when the

S command data changes.

(4) When "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORCn) is turned ON at the same as "Spindle forward run start" signal

(SRNn) is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.

(5) Servo ON command (SRVn) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the CNC side so that it will turn

ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle reverse run start (SRIn)

(2) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE FORWARD RUN

START SRNn YD38 YD68 YD98 YDC8 YDF8 YE28 YE58

(SRN)Spindle forward run start

(SRI)Spindle reverse run start

(Forward rot.)Variation at spindle position

(Reverse rot.)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

299

[Function]

This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal

turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in inverse direction (CW as viewed from the shaft side).

[Operation]

Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command when the signal (SRIn) is turned ON. (The operation with

"Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal is the same as one with "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) except for its rotation

direction.)

When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.

When the "Spindle reverse run" (SRIn) signal is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle reverse rotation, the

acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.

When the "Spindle reverse run" (SRIn) signal is turned ON during deceleration to stop of spindle reverse rotation, the

spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the machining will start immediately.

(1) Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle reverse run start" (SRIn) signal and "Spindle forward run start" (SRNn) signal

turn ON at the same time. To resume reverse run, both signals OFF once and then turn the "Spindle reverse run

start" signal ON.

(2) The operation may stop during reverse run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn the reverse run

signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion" (SA) signal turns ON.

(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation speed when the

S command data changes.

(4) When "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned ON at the same time "Spindle reverse run start"

(SRIn) signal is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.

(5) Servo ON command (SRVn) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the CNC side so that it will turn

ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle forward run start (SRNn)

(2) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE REVERSE RUN

START SRIn YD39 YD69 YD99 YDC9 YDF9 YE29 YE59

(SRN) Spindle forward run start

(SRI) Spindle reverse run start

(Forward rot.) Variation at spindle position

(Reverse rot.)

(SRN) Spindle forward run start

(SRI) Spindle reverse run start

(Forward rot.) Variation at

spindle position (Reverse rot.)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

300

[Function]

This signal is used for the forward run index in multi-point indexing.

[Operation]

(1) Multi-point indexing

(a) This signal turns ON after the "Spindle in-position" (ORAOn) signal is output.

(b) Continuous indexing can be carried out by turning this signal ON and OFF while the "Spindle orientation

command" (ORCn) signal is ON.

(c) If this signal is turned ON before the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned ON and the

"Spindle in-position" (ORAOn) signal is output, first the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal will turn

ON, and the orientation will be completed at the multi-point orientation position data read in. Then, the spindle

will be indexed to the position command value read in when this signal is turned ON. If the position command

value is the same when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) turns ON and this signal turns ON, the

indexing operation will not be carried out.

(d) The index position command value is read in at the rising edge of this signal. Thus, even if the index position

command value is changed after this signal is input, the stop position will not change.

(e) Even if this signal is turned OFF while the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) is ON, the spindle will

continue to stop at the position before this signal was turned OFF. Even if this signal is turned OFF during the

indexing operation, the spindle will stop at the position command value read at the rising edge of this signal.

(f) If the stop point and index position command value are close (within the in-position range), the "Spindle in-

position" (ORAOn) signal may not turn OFF and the indexing may be carried out.

(g) If the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) signal is turned OFF during indexing or when stopped, the servo

lock will turn OFF and the motor will coast. "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) must be carried out again

when executing indexing again.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE FORWARD RUN IN-

DEX WRNn YD3C YD6C YD9C YDCC YDFC YE2C YE5C

Multi-point orientation position data (index) (R7009)

Spindle orientation command (ORC)

Spindle in-position (ORAO)

Spindle forward run index (WRN)

Spindle speed waveform Index stop Index stop

Orienting operation Indexing operation Indexing operation

Orientation stop T : 100ms or more

t

t

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

301

[Indexing operation according to encoder installation direction]

(Note) Case 1 above applies when using the motor built-in encoder with Z-phase.

[Related signals]

(1) Multi-point orientation position data

(2) Spindle in-position (ORAOn)

(3) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

[Function]

This signal is used for the spindle reverse run index in multi-point indexing.

[Operation]

The operation is the same as forward run indexing, except that the direction is different. Refer to the section on "Spindle

forward run index".

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle forward run index (WRNn)

Case 1 Case 2

Installation method

Indexing

Orientation

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE REVERSE RUN IN-

DEX WRIn YD3D YD6D YD9D YDCD YDFD YE2D YE5D

Encoder

Belt Motor View A

Encoder

Belt View A Motor

Forward run Reverse run 0

6978H (270)

2328H (90)

4650H (180)

Forward run Reverse run 0

2328H (90)

6978H (270)

4650H (180)

Forward run Reverse run 0

6978H (270)

2328H (90)

4650H (180)

Forward run Reverse run 0

2328H (90)

6978H (270)

4650H (180)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

302

[Function]

This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal

is turned ON, the spindle is indexed in position.

[Operation]

If the "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORCn) turns ON during spindle rotation or when stopped, the spindle will

start orientation (stopping at set position). When positioning at the set position is completed, the "Spindle in-position"

signal (ORAOn) will be output, and orientation will stop.

During oriention spindle stop, the control system is under "servo lock" condition. Servo lock is released when the signal

(ORCn) is turned OFF. When servo lock must be maintained, the signal, therefore, should be kept turned ON.

The encoder or proximity method can be used for orientation.

The orientation rotation direction is determined with the parameters.

The orientation stop position is determined by the Z-phase for the encoder method, and by the sensor installation

position for the proximity method. The stopping position can be changed with the following items when using the encoder

method.

(1) By parameters (position shift amount)

(2) By the value of multi-point orientation position data

The value of multi-point orientation position data is added to the parameters.

The timing chart for basic orientation is shown below.

(Note 1) The "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) takes precedence over the forward run (SRNn) and reverse run

(SRIn) commands.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only for systems that are high-speed serial connected with the spindle controller.

[Related signals]

(1) Multi-point orientation position data

(2) Spindle in-position (ORAOn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE ORIENTATION COM-

MAND ORCn YD3E YD6E YD9E YDCE YDFE YE2E YE5E

Spindle orientation command (ORC)

Motor speed

Spindle in-position (ORAO)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

303

[Function]

This signal is used to select the low-speed coil in the spindle coil changeover function.

[Operation]

The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSLn) in the 2-step coil

changeover specification.

(Note) The coil is not changed over during the position loop control mode even if this signal is changed.The coil

selected immediately before the position loop control mode is entered is retained.

(1) 2-step coil changeover

[Related signals]

(1) In L coil selected (LCSAn)

[Function]

This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive). When the signal

turns ON, spindle motor torque is reduced temporarily.

The signal is used in mechanical oriented spindle stop, or gear shift.

[Operation]

"Spindle torque limit 1 to 3" (TL1n to TL3n) are provided as spindle torque limit signals.

Spindle torque limit ratio is set by spindle parameters.

Spindle torque limit ratio is determined depending on the combination of Spindle torque limit 1 to 3 (TL1n to TL3n), and

the output torque will drop accordingly.

(Example) When TL1n=1,TL2n=1,TL3n=0 and SP067=50

(Note 1) This signal is valid only for systems that are connected with the spindle controller via high-speed serial

interface.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A L COIL SELECTION LRSLn YD3F YD6F YD9F YDCF YDFF YE2F YE5F

Selected coil L coil selection(LRSLn) In L coil selected(LCSAn)

High-speed (H) OFF OFF

Low-speed (L) ON ON

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

A SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT m TLmn YD45 -

D47 YD75 -

D77 YDA5 -

DA7 YDD5 -

DD7 YE05 -

E07 YE35 -

E37 YE65 -

E67

Signal Selection

Spindle torque limit (TL1n)

Spindle torque limit (TL2n)

Spindle torque limit (TL3n)

Note

Spindle torque limit invalid 0 0 0

Spindle torque limit level 1 1 0 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP065

Spindle torque limit level 2 0 1 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP066

Spindle torque limit level 3 1 1 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP067

Spindle torque limit level 4 0 0 1 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP068

100%

50%

Torque Rated motor torque

Spindle torque limit ratio when TL1n=1, TL2n=1, and TL3n=0 is 50%.

Rotation speed

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

304

[Function]

This signal is used to execute the multi-step speed monitor for the control axes.

This signal can be used only when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "1".

[Operation]

When this signal turns ON, NC operates as follows.

(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters.

(2) Checks if NC's speed monitor parameters match with the speed monitor parameters sent to the drive unit.

(3) Notifies a speed monitor command to the drive unit.

(4) Executes the speed monitor function on NC.

(5) Turns the "Speed monitor door open possible" signal ON when receiving the "In speed monitor mode" signal from

the drive unit.

The followings are monitored while the multi-step speed monitor function is executed.

(Note) "Multi-step speed monitor input" (SMSOMImn) selects which parameter to use from "#3141 spsscfeed1 Safty

observation speed 1" to "#3144 spsscfeed4 Safty observation speed 4".

[Timing chart]

[Caution]

(1) Always make sure to confirm deceleration speed of the spindle before turning this signal ON.Turning the signal ON

without decelerating the speed will cause the safety observation warning due to the FB speed exceeding the

monitoring speed. The speed monitor mode will not be entered in the mean time.

(2) Turning this signal ON while a parameter error occurs will not start the speed monitor. Set the parameter to

appropriate value before turning the signal ON.

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)

(2) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input (SMSOMImn)

(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

A SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONI-

TOR REQUEST SMSORn YD49 YD79 YDA9 YDD9 YE09 YE39 YE69

Item Details

Command speed monitoring When a command speed that NC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with a parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.

Feedback speed monitoring When a motor rotation speed sent from the drive unit to NC exceeds a safety rotation speed set with the parameter (Note), an emergency stop occurs.

Feedback position monitoring When a difference between feedback position sent from the drive unit to NC and a position commanded by NC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

Speed

Emergency stop

Spindle multi-step monitor request

In spindle multi-step speed monitor

Safety observation speed

Changing the speed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.12 Bit Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

305

[Function]

This signal designates which speed monitor parameter (speed monitor mode) is used for the speed monitor in the multi-

step speed monitoring.

[Operation]

When these signals' state has been changed, the safety observation speed of the designated mode will be transferred to

the drive and the "Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals' state will also be changed. (It

will be changed even when "In spindle multi-step speed monitor" (SMSOEn) is OFF.)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

A SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED

MONITOR MODE INPUT m SMSO- MImn

YD4A - D4B

YD7A - D7B

YDAA - DAB

YDDA - DDB

YE0A - E0B

YE3A - E3B

YE6A - E6B

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input Mode to be selected

Corresponding safety observation speed parameter

SMSOMI2n SMSOMI1n

0 0 1 #3141 spsscfeed1

0 1 2 #3142 spsscfeed2

1 0 3 #3143 spsscfeed3

1 1 4 #3144 spsscfeed4

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output

Mode 2 Mode 3

Safety observation speed 2

Mode 1

Safety observation speed 1NC side speed monitor

Drive side speed monitor Safety observation speed 2

Safety observation speed 3

Safety observation speed 3

Mode 2Mode 1

FB speed

Safety observation speed 1

Safety observation speed 2 Safety observation speed 3

* When changing the mode, be sure to decelerate before chaging it.

Safety observation speed 1

Mode 3

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

306

[Caution]

(1) Before changing these signals' state while "In multi-step speed monitor" is ON, be sure to decelerate the spindle

below the monitor speed of the mode to be changed. When the signals' state has been changed before

deceleration starts, the safety observation warning will be output until the speed decelerates below the monitor

speed of the mode to be changed, and the speed monitor mode will not be changed in the meantime.

(2) Do not open the door before the "Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output" (SMSOMOmn) signals for all axes

in the door are changed to the desired mode, even when the "In spindle mult-step speed monitor" (MSOEn) signals

are ON for all axes in the door.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle multi-step speed monitor request (SMSORn)

(2) In spindle multi-step speed monitor (SMSOEn)

(3) Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output (SMSOMOmn)

[Function]

The spindle speed will be clamped with the speed which is designated with the parameter.

[Operation]

The rotating speed will be controlled with the smaller value of either command speed or clamp speed (the parameter

setting value "#3119 ext_clp") by turning the external axis speed clamp signal ON.

Do not switch the state of the external axis speed clamp while the spindle is in operation.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis

A EXTERNAL AXIS SPEED

CLAMP ESSCn YD4F YD7F YDAF YDDF YE0F YE3F YE6F

FB speed

Safety observation warning

Spindle multi-step monitor request

Monitor speed of mode 1 Monitor speed of mode 2

In spindle multi-step speed monitor

Safety observation warning

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode output

Mode 1 Mode 2

Mode 1 Mode 2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

307

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function]

This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter

"#2118 SscDrSel" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter "#3071 SscDrSelSp".

This signal is ignored when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor valid" is set to "1"

The door No. corresponds to the following bits.

[Operation]

CNC performs as follows by turning the speed monitor signal ON.

(1) Checks consistency of speed monitor parameters

(2) Checks if CNC's speed monitor parameter matches with the speed monitor parameter sent to servo drive unit and

spindle drive unit.

(3) Notifies speed monitor command to the drive unit

(4) Executes the speed monitor function on CNC

(5) Turns ON Speed monitor door open possible signal when CNC receives Speed monitor mode signal from the drive

unit

The followings are performed while the speed monitor function is executed.

[Caution]

(1) Be sure to turn ON the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) after confirming deceleration of all axes.

If the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON without deceleration, and the motor rotation speed exceeds

the set speed, a speed monitor alarm will occur, resulting in an emergency stop state.Then, power of the drive

section will be shut off.

(2) Turn OFF the speed monitor mode signal after confirming the door lock is OFF.

(3) Even if the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON while parameter error is output, speed monitoring is not

initiated. Set the parameter with appropriate value, and then turn ON the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD).

[Related signals]

Speed monitor door open possible (SMODEN)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPEED MONITOR MODE SMOD G+209

R2309

Item Details

Monitoring command speed When a command speed CNC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with parameter, an emergency stop occurs.

Monitoring feed back speed When a motor rotation speed sent to CNC from the drive unit exceeds a safety rotation speed set with parameter, an emergency stop occurs.

Monitoring feed back position When a difference between feedback position sent to CNC from the drive unit and a position commanded by CNC is large, an emergency stop occurs.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Door 1 Door 2 Door 16

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

308

[Function] [Operation]

The PLC axis for which the droop should not be released is set when current limit changeover (ILCn) is executed.

The axis corresponds to the following bits:

[Caution]

(1) This signal is also valid at the droop release request.

(2) This signal is invalid if the current does not reach its limit at the current limit changeover.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC AXIX DROOP RELEASE IN-

VALID AXIS SMOD

G+210

R2310

DROOP RELEASE INVALID AXIS

Operation

0 Release the droop and adjust the command value to the FB position when current limit changeover is executed.

1 During the current limit changeover, the droop will not be released.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Droop release invalid 1st axis Droop release invalid 2nd axis

Droop release invalid 8th axis

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

309

[Function]

When this signal is used, key data can be entered on the PLC side instead of the CNC keyboard.

[Operation]

Process of the key data changing/issuing by the PLC program is as follows.

(1) Parameter "#6451/bit3" is ON.

(2) The key data is set to "KEY IN".

(3) The PLC refers to "Reading key data".

(4) Either of the following processes is carried out. (Data is written in "Writing key data".)

Usually, (a) is processed, (b) and (c) are processed if necessary.)

(a) Always copies "Reading key data" to "Writing key data" without change.

(b) Data that is rewritten according to the content of "Reading key data" is written to "Writing key data".

When deleting the key data, etc.

(c) The substitute of the operator

When the alarm is generated, the key data which selects the alarm diagnosis screen is written in "Writing key

data", etc.

(5) CNC processes the valid key data according to the contents of "KEY OUT".

[Caution]

(1) When the key data is rewritten from the PLC, maintain the key data at 50ms or more.

(2) When the key data is rewritten by the PLC program, parameter "#6451/bit3" is turned ON. It is necessary to write the

key data to the PLC program when turning ON.

The key data does not pass PLC program when turning OFF.

[Related signals]

KEY IN

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- KEY OUT G+212

R2312

G O T 1 0 0 0

KEY IN (R8)

KEY OUT (R2312)

OFF

ON

#6451/bit3

CNC

Reading key data

G device U3E1\G10208

G device U3E0\G10212 Writing key

data

CNC process

Key data copy or screen selection key, etc.

When #6451/bit3 is ON, the PLC processing is indispensable.

PLC

When PLC CPU is STOP, #6451/bit3 is equal to OFF.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

310

[Function]

This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.

[Operation]

The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user

macro system variables #1000 to #1031 or #1032.The relationship between system variable and file register is as

follows:

File registers G+224/R2324 and G+225/R2325 correspond to system variables #1000 to #1031, and #1032 (32-bit

data).

User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC) and User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)

each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.

Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC) (Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC) (Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller) (Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller) (Part system independent)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO INPUT#1032

(PLC -> Controller)

G+224 - G+225

R2324 - R2325

System variable Points Interface input signal System variable Points Interface input signal

#1000 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit0 #1016 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit0

#1001 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit1 #1017 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit1

#1002 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit2 #1018 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit2

#1003 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit3 #1019 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit3

#1004 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit4 #1020 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit4

#1005 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit5 #1021 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit5

#1006 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit6 #1022 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit6

#1007 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit7 #1023 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit7

#1008 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit8 #1024 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit8

#1009 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit9 #1025 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit9

#1010 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit10 #1026 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit10

#1011 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit11 #1027 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit11

#1012 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit12 #1028 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit12

#1013 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit13 #1029 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit13

#1014 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit14 #1030 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit14

#1015 1 Register G+224/R2324 bit15 #1031 1 Register G+225/R2325 bit15

System variable Points Interface input signal

This correspondence table shows theexample for file registers G+224/R2324and G+225/R2325.

#1032 32 Register G+224/R2324, G+225/R2325 #1033 32 Register G+226/R2326, G+227/R2327 #1034 32 Register G+228/R2328, G+229/R2329 #1035 32 Register G+230/R2330, G+231/R2331

Bit selection parameter#6454/bit0

User macro output#1132 to #1135(Controller - > PLC)

User macro output#1032 to #1035(PLC -> Controller)

0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331

1: Part system independentG10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

311

[Function]

This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.

[Operation]

The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user

macro system variables #1033.

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

[Function][Operation]

The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

[Function][Operation]

The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO INPUT #1033

(PLC -> Controller)

G+226 - G+227

R2326 - R2327

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO INPUT #1034

(PLC -> Controller)

G+228 - G+229

R2328 - R2329

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- USER MACRO INPUT #1035

(PLC -> Controller)

G+230 - G+231

R2330 - R2331

ACT

IF [#1000 EQ 0] GOTO 100

#100 = #1033

N100ACT

DMOV K1000 G10226(R2326)

WOR G10224(R2324) K1 G10224(R2324)

(Example) Sequence program User macro program

Set 1 in #1000. The #1033(G10226/R2326, G10227/R2327)data is read into #100 Other than when #1000 is set to 0.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

312

[Function]

The user PLC version can be displayed with the software version that controls controller on the setting and display unit

(communication terminal) DIAGNOSIS screen.

[Operation]

Characters to be displayed are placed in ASCII code.

(Program example)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC VERSION CODE G+232 - G+235

R2332 - R2335

PLCu BND W : Alphabet is used. : Numeric is used.

3 digits can be used (no restriction).

4 digits can be used (no restriction).

Version code ("A0" for 1st version) : Renewed at major revision A to Z

(I and O should not be used.) : Renewed at minor revision 0 to 9 : Renewed at supplemental revision A to Z

(I and O should not be used.)

,

BND 1 2 3 4 W 5 6 7 A 0 B

G+232/R2332

G+233/R2333

G+234/R2334

G+235/R2335

[Set to "B" in ASCII code (42) for the high-order side Set to "FF" code for the low-order side]

[Set to "A0" in ASCII code]

[Set to 567 in binary notation]

[Set to 1234 in binary notation]

ACT MOV G10232(R2332)

" 0" " A"

" B"

MOV G10233(R2333)

MOV G10234(R2334)

MOV

H 4 2 F F

H 4 1 3 0

K 5 6 7

K 1 2 3 4 G10235(R2335)

Always set to "FF" when displaying 3 digits

Always turn ON at the first scan of the sequence program (constant also possible)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

313

[Function]

PLC I/F signal of each axis is allocated from the 1st axis of 1st part system in order, but if the axis structure of each part

system is changed, PLC I/F signal corresponding to that will be changed. In that case, the PLC I/F signal's allocation of

each axis is set randomly to make the PLC program in common with the I/F signal.

[Operation]

In the following example, when the 1st part system is a two or three-axes structure and the 2nd part system is a one-axis

structure, it is impossible to make the PLC program in common because the axis I/F of 2nd part system is changed by

the axis structure of 1st part system. Then, by changing the allocation with the axis index, the allocation of 2nd part

system is fixed and the PLC program can be made in common.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- mTH AXIS INDEX G+240 - G+255

R2340 - R2355

X400 Y400

X420

X440 Y420

Y440

X400 Y400

X420

X440 Y420

X460 Y440

Y460

X400 Y400

X420

X440 Y420

X460 Y440

Y460

G+240/R2340 0

G+241/R2341 0

G+242/R2342 0

G+240/R2340 0

G+241/R2341 0

G+242/R2342 4

G+243/R2343 3

Axis index

Axis I/F after the allocation is changed with the axis index.

1st part system 2 axes 2nd system part 1 axis

1st part system 3 axes 2nd part system 1axis

Axis index

Move 3rd axis to 4th axis. Move 4th axis to 3rd axis.

$1 1st axis $1 1st axis

$1 2nd axis

$2 1st axis $1 2nd axis

$2 1st axis

$1 1st axis $1 1st axis

$1 2nd axis

$1 3rd axis $1 2nd axis

$2 1st axis $1 3rd axis

$2 1st axis

$1 1st axis $1 1st axis

$1 2nd axis

$2 1st axis $1 2nd axis

$1 3rd axis $2 1st axis

$1 3rd axis

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

314

[Function]

Select the basic spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.

[Operation]

Select the spindle to be controlled as the basic spindle from the serially connected spindles.

(0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th

spindle

(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected, spindle synchronous control will not be executed.

(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle.

[Function]

Select the synchronous spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.

[Operation]

Select the spindle to be controlled as the synchronous spindle from the serially connected spindles.

(0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle, 7: 7th

spindle

(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected,

spindle synchronous control will not be executed.

(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous spindle.

[Function]

The synchronous spindle's phase shift amount can be designated from the PLC.

[Operation]

Designate the phase shift amount for the synchronous spindle.

Unit: 360/4096

[Related signals]

(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1)

(2) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV)

(3) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH)

(4) Spindle synchronization (SPSY)

(5) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS)

(6) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION BASIC SPINDLE SELECTION

G+257

R2357

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE SE-

LECTION

G+258

R2358

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION

PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT

G+259

R2359

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

315

[Function]

This signal enables the user PLC version to be displayed, together with the software version controlling control unit, in

the DIAGNOSIS screen of the setting display unit (communication terminal).

[Operation]

The ASCII code that corresponds to the character to be displayed in the version display interface is set.

(Program example)

[Function] [Operation]

This signal is an interface for sending data from PLC device to APLC C language module.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC VERSION CODE

(METHOD 2)

G+260 - G+266

R2360 - R2366

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- APLC OUTPUT DATA n G+280 - G+289

R2380 - R2389

PLCu 8967452301846L

G+260/R2360 (38 39)

G+261/R2361 (36 37)

G+262/R2362 (34 35)

G+263/R2363 (32 33)

G+264/R2364 (30 31)

G+265/R2365 (38 34)

G+266/R2366 (36 4C)

PLCu : Random alphanumeric

characters are used.Total of 14 characters "HIGH" side of R*

"LOW" side of R*

Interface

ASCII code

ACT DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10260(R2360)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10262(R2362)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10264(R2364)

DMOV H36 37 38 39 G10266(R2366)

Always turn ON at the 1st scan of the sequence program. (Can be left ON constantly.)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

316

[Function]

This signal notices that necessary command is set in command area.

[Operation]

Turns ON when command data is changed.

(R2391/bitF is handled as window valid signal.)

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal input status of the dual signal modules.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE-

OVER REQUEST

G+290 - G+291

R2390 - R2391

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MOD-

ULE m SU_PC m

G+2580 - G+2585

R4450 - R4455

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

Data changeover request for Window 1 Data changeover request for Window 2

Data changeover request for Window 10

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Window valid

Automatic setting window data change request

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module input 00 PLC side dual signal module input 01

PLC side dual signal module input 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module input 10 PLC side dual signal module input 11

PLC side dual signal module input 1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

317

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status of "PLC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module.The signal turned ON

once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module.

[Operation

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALER-

ROR MODULE m SU_PER m

G+2590 - G+2595

R4460 - R4465

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT-

PUT MODULE m SU_PO m

G+2600 - G+2602

R4470 - R4472

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module error 00 PLC side dual signal module error 01

PLC side dual signal module error 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module error 10 PLC side dual signal module error 11

PLC side dual signal module error 1F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

PLC side dual signal module output 0A PLC side dual signal module output 0B

PLC side dual signal module output 0F

PLC side dual signal module output 1A PLC side dual signal module output 1B

PLC side dual signal module output 1F

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

318

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status between PLC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal

module. The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs PLC side dual signal compare status to the CNC.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.

bit1: Device test error detection 2

An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.

[Caution]

This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual

signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.

[Operation

To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check

each other.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUT-

PUT ERROR MODULE m SU_POER

m

G+2604 - G+2606

R4474 - R4476

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS 2 SU_PST2

G+2609

R4479

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE SAFETYCOMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMA-

TION SU_PLT

G+2610

R4480

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output error 0A PLC side dual signal module output error 0B

PLC side dual signal module output error 0F

PLC side dual signal module output error 1A PLC side dual signal module output error 1B

PLC side dual signal module output error 1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.13 Data Type Output Signals : System Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

319

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison status.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head G device No. that has been transmitted to the PLC.

This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module, which

has been transmitted to the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS SU_PST

G+2611

R4481

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV G+2612

R4482

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE

TIME SU_PDLY

G+2613

R4483

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side emergency stop status PLC side dual signal module input compare error PLC side counterparts signal compare stop detected PLC side dual signal module output FB compare error PLC side compare process start

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

320

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module, which has been transmitted to

the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1 to #21145 SSU_Dev3.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the number of dual signal modules, which has been transmitted to the PLC.This is for

confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The CNC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the safety-related operation status that has been set by PLC side user ladder when dual

signal comparison function is valid.

[Operation]

The CNC is informed of the safety-related operation status devices (M0 to M15) that have been set by PLCside user

ladder.

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD

DEVICE NO. m SU_PDV m

G+2614 - G+2616

R4484 - R4486

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- NO. OF DUAL SIGNALMOD-

ULES ON PLC SIDE SU_PNUM

G+2618

R4488

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE SAFETYOPERATION

STATUS SU_POP

G+2620

R4490

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

M0 CNC emergency stop request M1 User safety status signal 1 M2 User safety status signal 2

M15 User safety status signal 15

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

321

4.14 Data Type Output Signals : Axis Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function] [Operation]

External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the G

device for each axis.

Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC CPU rewrites G device compensation data. Necessary condition, timing,

etc., are set by PLC CPU.

The interface between PLC CPU and CNC is shown below.

(Note 1) File register Nos. correspond to CNC.

(Note 2) The delay to compensation is about (one PLC program scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and

servo follow delay are not contained.

[Function][Operation]

Set the compensation amount for the axis feed error caused by the ball screw's thermal expansion. Set "thermal

expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" as a set for each axis.

Refer to "thermal expansion compensation amount" for details.

[Related signals]

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount

Thermal expansion compensation amount

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDI-

NATE SYSTEM COMPENSA- TION DATA

G+1000 G+1010 G+1020 G+1030 G+1040 G+1050 G+1060 G+1070

R3100 R3110 R3120 R3130 R3140 R3150 R3160 R3170

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G+1080 G+1090 G+1100 G+1110 G+1120 G+1130 G+1140 G+1150

R3180 R3190 R3200 R3210 R3220 R3230 R3240 R3250

G device Details G device Details

File register File register

G+1000 Compensation data 1st axis

G+1080 Compensation data 9th axis

R3100 R3180

G+1010 Compensation data 2nd axis

G+1090 Compensation data 10th axis

R3110 R3190

G+1020 Compensation data 3rd axis

G+1100 Compensation data 11th axis

R3120 R3200

G+1030 Compensation data 4th axis

G+1110 Compensation data 12th axis

R3130 R3210

G+1040 Compensation data 5th axis

G+1120 Compensation data 13th axis

R3140 R3220

G+1050 Compensation data 6th axis

G+1130 Compensation data 14th axis

R3150 R3230

G+1060 Compensation data 7th axis

G+1140 Compensation data 15th axis

R3160 R3240

G+1070 Compensation data 8th axis

G+1150 Compensation data 16th axis

R3170 R3250

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- THERMAL EXPANSION OFF-

SET COMPENSATION AMOUNT

G+1002 G+1012 G+1022 G+1032 G+1042 G+1052 G+1062 G+1072

R3102 R3112 R3122 R3132 R3142 R3152 R3162 R3172

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G+1082 G+1092 G+1102 G+1112 G+1122 G+1132 G+1142 G+1152

R3182 R3192 R3202 R3212 R3222 R3232 R3242 R3252

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

322

[Function][Operation]

Set the maximum compensation amount of the axis feed error caused by the ball screw's thermal expansion. Set

"thermal expansion offset compensation amount" and "thermal expansion max. compensation amount" as a set for each

axis. Refer to "thermal expansion compensation amount" for details.

[Related signals]

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount

Thermal expansion compensation amount

[Function]

When the external deceleration signal is valid, the external deceleration parameter for each axis is selected. This R

register is valid when "1" is set to "#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid".

[Operation]

When external deceleration +(*EDTn) or external deceleration-(*EDTn) is valid, it is decelerated to the speed, which is

set in "#2086 exdcax1 External deceleration speed 1", "#2161 exdcax2 External deceleration speed 2" to "#2165

exdcax6 External deceleration speed 6". The relationship between parameter and the setting value is as follows.

[Related signals]

(1)External deceleration +(*+EDTn)

(2)External deceleration -(*-EDTn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- THERMAL EXPANSION MAX. COMPENSATION AMOUNT

G+1003 G+1013 G+1023 G+1033 G+1043 G+1053 G+1063 G+1073

R3103 R3113 R3123 R3133 R3143 R3153 R3163 R3173

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G+1083 G+1093 G+1103 G+1113 G+1123 G+1133 G+1143 G+1153

R3183 R3193 R3203 R3213 R3223 R3233 R3243 R3253

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

- EXTERNAL DECELERATION

SPEED SELECTION

G+1004 G+1014 G+1024 G+1034 G+1044 G+1054 G+1064 G+1074

R3104 R3114 R3124 R3134 R3144 R3154 R3164 R3174

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

G+1084 G+1094 G+1104 G+1114 G+1124 G+1134 G+1144 G+1154

R3184 R3194 R3204 R3214 R3224 R3234 R3244 R3254

The external deceleration speed selection value

External deceleration speed (for each axis)

0 External deceleration speed 1 (#2086

exdcax1)

1 External deceleration speed 2 (#2161

exdcax2)

2 External deceleration speed 3 (#2162

exdcax3)

3 External deceleration speed 4 (#2163

exdcax4)

4 External deceleration speed 5 (#2164

exdcax5)

5 External deceleration speed 6 (#2165

exdcax6)

Other than the above. External deceleration speed 1 (#2086

exdcax1)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

323

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC

CPU)

[Function]

When "Cutting feedrate override method selection method" (FVSn) is set to "file register method", override (0 to 300%,

1% increment) can be exerted on the cutting feedrate. Desired value is set to file register (R) in binary code.

[Operation]

When override is exerted to the preset feedrate, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying the preset

feedrate by the specified override ratio (provided that "2nd cutting feedrate override" is not valid).

The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st feedrate override" setting, under the following condition:

(1) "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.

(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.

(3) During TAPPING mode.

(4) During thread cutting.

(Note) Only when override setting is 0%, override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic operation.

That is, cutting feed as well as rapid traverse stop if the 1st feedrate override is set to 0% during automatic

operation. When override setting is 0%, "M01 OPERATION ERROR" appears in the alarm display section of

setting and display unit, and "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0102" in the ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.

[Related signals]

(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)

(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection method (FVSn)

(3) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)

(4) 2nd cutting feedrate override

(Note) For relationship among these signals, refer to the description the cutting federate override.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE

OVERRIDE

G+300 G+400 G+500 G+600 G+700 G+800 G+900

R2400 R2500 R2600 R2700 R2800 R2900 R3000

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

324

[Function]

When the "2nd cutting feedrate override valid" function (FV2En) is used, another override can be exerted on cutting

feedrate overrided by "Cutting feedrate override code m" (*FV1mn) in code method, or by "1st cutting feedrate override"

when the "Cutting feedrate override method selection" (FVSn) is set to file register method. The 2nd feedrate override

can be set within range from 0% to 327.67% with 0.01% increment. The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.

[Operation]

When this override function is used, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying commanded feedrate (F) by

"1st cutting feedrate override" ratio and "2nd cutting feedrate override" ratio.

Since the least increment of 2nd feedrate override is 0.01%, override setting "10000" corresponds to 100%.

The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st cutting feedrate override" or "2nd cutting feedrate override"

setting, under the following condition:

(1) "Override cancel" (OVCn) signal is ON.

(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.

(3) During TAPPING mode.

(4) During thread cutting.

(Note) Only when the 1st cutting feedrate override or 2nd cutting feedrate override is 0% or both of them are 0%,

override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic operation. That is, cutting feed as well as rapid

traverse stop if the 1st override feedrate is set to 0% during automatic operation. When override setting is 0%,

"M01 OPERATION ERROR" appears in the alarm display section of setting and display unit, and "M01

OPERATION ERROR 0102" in the ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.

[Related signals]

(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1mn)

(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection method (FVSn)

(3) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2En)

(4) 1st cutting feedrate override

(Note) For relationship among these signals, refer to the description about the cutting feedrate override.

[Function]

The rapid traverse override specified with values (ROVSn) provides the override control within the range of 0% to 100%

by 1% increments in addition to the normal override specified with codes (ROVmn).

The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.

[Operation]

During rapid traverse in the automatic or manual operation, the actual feed rate will be the result of multiplying this

override ratio by the rapid traverse speed set in a parameter.

(Note 1) The override will be clamped at 100%.

(Note 2) No operation error messages are indicated even if the value is set to 0%.

[Related signals]

(1) Rapid traverse overridecode m (ROVmn)

(2) Rapid traverse override method selection (ROVSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE

OVERRIDE

G+301 G+401 G+501 G+601 G+701 G+801 G+901

R2401 R2501 R2601 R2701 R2801 R2901 R3001

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE G+302 G+402 G+502 G+602 G+702 G+802 G+902

R2402 R2502 R2602 R2702 R2802 R2902 R3002

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

325

[Function]

When "Manual feedrate method selection" (JVSn) signal is set to "file register method", feedrate can be specified,

besides code method (*JVmn) setting, by setting desired feedrate ratio manually. The value is set in the file register (R)

in binary.

[Operation]

This mode of feedrate setting can be used in JOG feed, incremental feed, reference position return feed and manual

arbitrary feed mode. For JOG, incremental and reference position return mode, "Rapid traverse speed" (RTn) signal

should be OFF. For manual arbitrary feed mode, "Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F" (CXS3n) signal should be OFF.

Feedrate specified in this mode can be applied to feed motion in dry run (automatic operation).

The use of this signal is conditioned as follows:

(1) When "Manual feedrate override valid" (OVSLn) signal is OFF, the originally set feedrate is applied.

(2) When "Manual feedrate override valid" (OVSLn) signal is ON, the actual feedrate can be obtained by

multiplying the feedrate specified by the 1st/2nd cutting feed override value.

(3) Manual feedrate is set to file registers Rn and Rn+1. The feedrate depends on "Feedrate least increment code

m" (PCFmn) as listed below.

(4) Feedrate clamp (max. feedrate) depends on setting of axis parameter (cutting feedrate clamp) when "Rapid

traverse" (RTn) signal is OFF.

(Note 1) During incremental feed mode, the true feedrate does not change even when the manual feedrate setting

is changed while feed motion is going on.

(Note 2) As for file registers (Rn and Rn+1), Rn is of lower order.Of the file registers Rn and Rn+1 to designate the

feedrate, if the value is 2-bytes (one word), the high-order side does not need to do anything.

[Related signals]

(1) Manual feedrate code m (*JVmn)

(2) Manual feedrate method selection (JVSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- MANUAL FEEDRATE

G+304 - G+305

G+404 - G+405

G+504 - G+505

G+604 - G+605

G+704 - G+705

G+804 - G+805

G+904 - G+905

R2404 - R2405

R2504 - R2505

R2604 - R2605

R2704 - R2705

R2804 - R2805

R2904 - R2905

R3004 - R3005

PCF2n PCF1n Least increment(mm/

min or inch/min) Operation

0 0 10 10mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

0 1 1 1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

1 0 0.1 0.1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

1 1 0.01 0.01mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

326

[Function]

By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPSn), an arbitrary magnification can be designated

separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is set in file register (R) in

binary.

When the "handle/incremental feed magnification method selection" (MPSn) signal is ON, this magnification factor is

applied for the hand pulse from handy terminal.

[Operation]

Magnification is applied to amount of feed per pulse in handle feed mode (output from manual pulse generator), or to

amount of feed per signal in incremental feed mode +/- (+Jn, -Jn).

When multiplier is "500" and one pulse is given in handle feed mode, for example, 500m of feed motion occurs.

When multiplier is "30000" and one feed command signal is given in incremental feed mode, 30mm of feed motion

occurs (time constant for feed motion is equal to time constant for rapid traverse or step).

(Note 1) Change of magnification setting during feed motion is ignored.

(Note 2) Since considerably large magnification can be used, the signal should be used carefully.

[Related signals]

(1) Handle/Incremental feed magnification +/- (MPmn)

(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)

[Function]

By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPSn), an arbitrary magnification can be designated

separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is set in file register (R) in

binary.

Arbitrary magnification, when using 2nd and 3rd handles, is designated here.

[Operation]

When 1 pulse is sent by 2nd or 3rd handle, its feed amount conforms to this feed magnification.

For example, when 1 pulse is sent in handle mode with magnification set at "500", its feed amount will be 500m.

(Note 1) Changing magnification during feed motion is invalid.

(Note 2) Considerably large magnification can be set in the handle/incremental feed magnification method. Pay extra

attention when setting magnification.

[Related signals]

(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MPmn)

(2) Handle/incremental feed magnification

(3) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 1ST HANDLE/INCREMENTAL

FEED MAGNIFICATION

G+308 - G+309

G+408 - G+409

G+508 - G+509

G+608 - G+609

G+708 - G+709

G+808 - G+809

G+908 - G+909

R2408 - R2409

R2508 - R2509

R2608 - R2609

R2708 - R2709

R2808 - R2809

R2908 - R2909

R3008 - R3009

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 2ND HANDLE FEED MAGNIFI-

CATION

G+310 - G+311

G+410 - G+411

G+510 - G+511

G+610 - G+611

G+710 - G+711

G+810 - G+811

G+910 - G+911

R2410 - R2411

R2510 - R2511

R2610 - R2611

R2710 - R2711

R2810 - R2811

R2910 - R2911

R3010 - R3011

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- 3RD HANDLE FEED MAGNIFI-

CATION

G+312 - G+313

G+412 - G+413

G+512 - G+513

G+612 - G+613

G+712 - G+713

G+812 - G+813

G+912 - G+913

R2412 - R2413

R2512 - R2513

R2612 - R2613

R2712 - R2713

R2812 - R2813

R2912 - R2913

R3012 - R3013

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

327

[Function]

This data specifies the travel amount or positioning point in manual arbitrary feed mode.

[Operation]

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis

selection code m" (CXmn).

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" means differently depending on the statuses of the "Manual arbitrary feed

MC/WK" (CXS5n) and "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signals.

(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signal is ON:

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies the travel amount (increment).

(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6n) signal is OFF, it depends on the status of the "Manual

arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal as follows:

(a) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal is OFF:

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of the

machine coordinate system.

(b) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" (CXS5n) signal is ON:

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of the

modal workpiece coordinate system.

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is written in binary notation with a sign. The unit of the specified value

matches that of data entered.

(Example)When micrometer system specifies "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" to 1, axis motion is set to

1m (at incremental specification).

[Caution]

"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" forms a data item by G+314/R2414 and G+315/R2415 (for 1st part

system). Handle negative data carefully.

[Related signals]

For related signals, see the descriptions on "Manual arbitrary feed mode" (PTPn).

[Function][Operation]

"Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd

axis selection code m" (CX2mn).

The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the previous section.

[Function][Operation]

"Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd

axis selection code m" (CX3mn).

The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the previous section.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT

G+314 - G+315

G+414 - G+415

G+514 - G+515

G+614 - G+615

G+714 - G+715

G+814 - G+815

G+914 - G+915

R2414 - R2415

R2514 - R2515

R2614 - R2615

R2714 - R2715

R2814 - R2815

R2914 - R2915

R3014 - R3015

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT

G+316 - G+317

G+416 - G+417

G+516 - G+517

G+616 - G+617

G+716 - G+717

G+816 - G+817

G+916 - G+917

R2416 - R2417

R2516 - R2517

R2616 - R2617

R2716 - R2717

R2816 - R2817

R2916 - R2917

R3016 - R3017

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT

G+318 - G+319

G+418 - G+419

G+518 - G+519

G+618 - G+619

G+718 - G+719

G+818 - G+819

G+918 - G+919

R2418 - R2419

R2518 - R2519

R2618 - R2619

R2718 - R2719

R2818 - R2819

R2918 - R2919

R3018 - R3019

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

328

[Function]

When this signal is used, stroke end error can be avoided without eternal wiring for stroke end signal (a device which is

set in 2074 H/W_OT+ or #2075 HW_HT-) provided for each axis. "Stroke end" signal ON axis for which the "OT ignored"

signal is set can be used for other purpose.

[Operation]

"Stroke end" signal associated with a specific axis motion can be ignored.

The interface for this signal is as follows:

(Note 1) The signal is applicable to (+) and (-) motion at the same time (ignored when "ON").

(Note 2) "OT" is abbreviation of "Over Travel".

[Function]

When this signal is used, "Near-point detected" signal which is used for dog type reference position return can be

ignored (tripping of near switch can be ignored).

The selection of two or more near-point dogs with conditions, or the activation of the "Near-point detected" signal at a

position not desirable due to the machine structure can seemingly be ignored. Furthermore, the "Near-point detected"

signal for an axis to which the "Near-point dog ignored" signal is set can be used for other applications.

[Operation]

When the signal is turned ON, "Near-point detected" signal corresponding to the control axis can be ignored.

The interface is shown below:

[Function]

The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool

life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]

The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- OT IGNORED G+320 G+420 G+520 G+620 G+720 G+820 G+920

R2420 R2520 R2620 R2720 R2820 R2920 R3020

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- NEAR-POINT DOG IGNORED G+321 G+421 G+521 G+621 G+721 G+821 G+921

R2421 R2521 R2621 R2721 R2821 R2921 R3021

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA-

TION

G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930

R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

:

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0File register (R) Bit

1st axis OT ignored 2nd axis OT ignored

16th axis OT ignored

:

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0File register (R) Bit

1st near point ignored 2nd near point ignored

16th near point ignored

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

329

[Function]

The synchronization control's ON/OFF can be changed over by operating the bit corresponding to each axis of this

signal. CNC changes over the operation at the point when all axes enter in-position state.

[Operation]

(1) Designation of the synchronization operation method

Turn ON both the bits corresponding to the primary axis and secondary axis with the base specifications parameter

"#1068 slavno".

(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis) and 3rd axis (secondary axis) are operated by the synchronous

operation

(2) Designation of the independent operation method

Turn ON the bit corresponding to only one of the axes to be moved with the primary axis command.

(Example) When only the 3rd axis (secondary axis) is moved

For the machine structure reasons, if the synchronous state must always be kept from immediately after the power is

turned ON, set the synchronization control operation method when the ladder power is turned ON at the first time.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- SYNCHRONIZATION CON-

TROL OPERATION METHOD

G+332 G+432 G+532 G+632 G+732 G+832 G+932

R2432 R2532 R2632 R2732 R2832 R2932 R3032

In case of synchronous control

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX

Synchronization control operation method

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 1

0 1

0 0

00 06

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX

Synchronization control operation method

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 1

0 0

0 0

00 04

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Synchronization control operation method

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

330

(1) Designation of the synchronization operation method

Turn ON both the bits corresponding to the primary axis and secondary axis with the base specifications parameter

"#22014 mastno".

(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis), the 3rd axis (secondary axis), and the 4th axis (secondary axis) are

operated by the synchronous operation

(2) Designation of the independent operation method

Turn ON the bit corresponding to only one of the axes to be moved with the primary axis command.

(Example) When the 2nd axis (primary axis) and the 3rd axis (secondary axis) are moved in synchronization, and

the 4th axis is operated independently.

For the machine structure reasons, if the synchronous state must always be kept from immediately after the power is

turned ON, set the synchronization control operation method when the ladder power is turned ON at the first time.

In case of multi-secondary-axis synchronous control

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX

Synchronization control operation method

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 1

0 1

0 1

0 0

00 0E

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX

Synchronization control operation method

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 1

0 1

0 0

00 06

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

331

When changing the operation with the synchronization control operation method during automatic operation,

calculate the coordinates again.

After secondary axis independent operation is carried out, the end point coordinates of the secondary axis are

substituted in the program end point coordinates for the primary axis. Thus, if the coordinates are not recalculated,

the primary axis' movement command will not be created properly.

Request recalculation immediately after the synchronization control operation method is changed.

Primary axis: 2nd axis Secondary axis: 3rd axis

When M code is assigned to each:

M10: Asynchronous operation

M20: Independent operation

M40: Synchronous operation

MOV H0C G10332(R2432)

Only turning the power ON at the first time

= H10 G10220(R20) X230

M2000

= H20 G10220(R20) M2001 X230

= H40 G10220(R20) M2002 X230

M2000 X1F8 MOV H00 G10332(R2432)

M2001 X1F8 MOV H04 G10332(R2432)

M2002 X1F8 MOV H06 G10332(R2432)

M2000

M2001

M2002

Y72B

Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON and M10 commanded M2000 ON

Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON and M20 commanded M2001 ON

Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1n) ON and M40 commanded M2002 ON

M2000 ON and motion command completion (DENn) Asynchronous operation signal set

M2001 ON and motion command completion (DENn) Independent operation signal set

M2002 ON and motion command completion (DENn) Synchronous operation signal set

M2000 or M2001 or M2002 ON Recalculation request (CRQn) set

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

332

[Caution]

(1) During synchronous operation or independent operation, the primary axis signals are valid for the "Interlock" and

"Machine lock" signals, etc.

(2) The secondary axis will return to the reference position in synchronization with the primary axis if G27, G28 or G30

is commanded during synchronous operation. If the secondary axis is at the reference position when the primary

axis completes reference position return, the reference position return will be completed. If the secondary axis is not

at the reference position when the primary axis completes reference position return, the "Reference position

reached" (ZP1n to ZP4n) signal for the primary axis will not be output.

(3) The position switches are processed independently for the primary axis and secondary axis.

(4) Input the same OT signal for the primary axis and secondary axis.

Set the same soft limit value for the primary axis and secondary axis.

If the above settings cannot be made because of the machine specifications, observe the following points.

- If OT or soft limit occurs during the manual operation mode, an alarm will occur only for the secondary axis,

and the primary axis will not stop.

Thus, make sure that the primary axis alarm turns ON before the secondary axis.

- OT during the manual operation mode will cause the secondary axis to stop when the OT signal for only the

primary axis turns ON. The primary axis is stopped by the position controller, and the secondary axis is

stopped by the CNC control unit. Thus, there may be a difference in the stop positions. If an excessive error

alarm occurs because of OT, enter the editing mode, and cancel the alarm.

(5) The primary axis independent operation is handled as asynchronous, so the PLC input/output signal is not reflected

on the secondary axis.

(6) A command error and feedback error are confirmed on a synchronous error screen.

[Related signals]

Synchronized correction mode (SYCMn)

Recalculation request (CRQn)

MFmn

DENn

FIN

Execution block Movement (1) M2002;(synchronization designation) Movement (2)

Operation method selection

All axes in-position

Operation method

Recalculation request (CRQn)

Calculation of next block

Asynchronous Synchronous

Asynchronous Synchronous

CNC latches at rising edge

Recalculation

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

333

[Function]

The axis which does not release droop is set when current limit changeover (ILCn) is executed.

[Operation]

(Note 1) This signal is also valid at the droop release request.

(Note 2) This signal is invalid if the current does not reach its limit at the current limit changeover.

[Related signals]

(1) Current limit changeover (ILCn)

(2) Droop release request (DORn)

(3) In current limit (ILIn)

(4) Current limit reached (ILAn)

[Function]

Select the each axis reference position return position for manual reference position return.

[Operation]

(1) This signal is valid when the reference position select method is ON.

(2) Two bits are used for each axis to select the reference position.

(a) R register and corresponding axis

Each axis reference position select

(b) Setting value and reference position No.

[Related signals]

(1) Reference position select method (Mn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- DROOP RELEASE INVALID

AXIS

G+333 G+433 G+533 G+633 G+733 G+833 G+933

R2433 R2533 R2633 R2733 R2833 R2933 R3033

Droop release invalid axis Operation

0 Release the droop and move the command value to the FB position when current limit changeover is executed.

1 During the current limit changeover, the droop will not be released.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EACH AXIS REFERENCE POSI-

TION SELECTION

G+334 G+434 G+534 G+634 G+734 G+834 G+934

R2434 R2534 R2634 R2734 R2834 R2934 R3034

High-order bit Low-order bit Return position

0 0 1st reference position

0 1 2nd reference position

1 0 3rd reference position

1 1 4th reference position

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis setting value 2nd axis setting value 3rd axis setting value 4th axis setting value 5th axis setting value 6th axis setting value 7th axis setting value 8th axis setting value

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

334

[Function]

The No. of the program to be searched with search & start is designated.

[Operation]

Set the No. of the program to be searched with search & start with a binary value.

(Note 1) The program No. must be set before the "Search & start" signal is input.

(Note 2) If a machining program No. is not designated or if an illegal No. is designated, and error signal will be output

when the search operation is executed.

[Related signals]

(1) Search & start (RSSTn)

(2) Search & start (error) (SSEn)

[Function]

(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function

Set the tool No. (Selected tool No.) and the tool compensation No. (Workpiece coordinate offset measurement

compensation No.) used for workpiece coordinate offset measurement in a BCD code.

(2) Chuck barrier check

Set the tool No. (Selected tool No.) and the compensation No. (Workpiece coordinate offset measurement

compensation No.) selected for the chuck barrier check.

[Operation]

(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function

Set the tool No. and the tool compensation No. used for workpiece coordinate offset measurement in a BCD code.

This is set with the user PLC.

This tool No. (Selected tool No.) is interpreted as the tool offset No. by the CNC.

(2) Chuck barrier check

The file register used differs according to the parameter (#1098 Tlno.)

If the tool length compensation No. is not designated (if the contents are 0), the tool length and tool nose wear offset will

both follow the T command modal.

The T command modal will also be followed if the designated offset No. is not within the specified range.

If the T command modal value is 0, the compensation amount will be interpreted as 0.

[Related signals]

(1) Selected tool No.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- SEARCH & START

PROGRAM NO

G+338 - G+339

G+438 - G+439

G+538 - G+539

G+638 - G+639

G+738 - G+739

G+838 - G+839

G+938 - G+939

R2438 - R2439

R2538 - R2539

R2638 - R2639

R2738 - R2739

R2838 - R2839

R2938 - R2939

R3038 - R3039

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- WORKPIECE COORDINATE OFFSET MEASUREMENT

COMPENSATION NO.

G+346 - G+347

G+446 - G+447

G+546 - G+547

G+646 - G+647

G+746 - G+747

G+846 - G+847

G+946 - G+947

R2446 - R2447

R2546 - R2547

R2646 - R2647

R2746 - R2747

R2846 - R2847

R2946 - R2947

R3046 - R3047

#1098 Tlno. Workpiece coordinate offset

measurement compensation No. Selected tool No.

0 Tool length, tool nose wear offset No. Tool No.

1 Tool nose wear offset No. Tool No., tool length compensation No.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

335

[Function][Operation]

Refer to the explanation of "workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No." for details.

[Function] [Operation]

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No. Be sure to set 0 for this CNC.

An error occurs if any No. except "0" is set. (Status: 3)

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search status

(3) External search program No.

(4) External search sequence No.

(5) External search block No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

[Function] [Operation]

Designate the program No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.

The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (8 digits).

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search status

(3) External search device No.

(4) External search sequence No.

(5) External search block No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- SELECTED TOOL NO.

G+348 - G+349

G+448 - G+449

G+548 - G+549

G+648 - G+649

G+748 - G+749

G+848 - G+849

G+948 - G+949

R2448 - R2449

R2548 - R2549

R2648 - R2649

R2748 - R2749

R2848 - R2849

R2948 - R2949

R3048 - R3049

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE

NO.

G+361 G+461 G+561 G+661 G+761 G+861 G+961

R2461 R2561 R2661 R2761 R2861 R2961 R3061

Device No. Device

0 Memory

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EXTERNAL SEARCH PRO-

GRAM NO.

G+362 - G+363

G+462 - G+463

G+562 - G+563

G+662 - G+663

G+762 - G+763

G+862 - G+863

G+962 - G+963

R2462 - R2463

R2562 - R2563

R2662 - R2663

R2762 - R2763

R2862 - R2863

R2962 - R2963

R3062 - R3063

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

336

[[Function] [Operation]

Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.

The setting range is 1 to 99999 (5 digits).

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search status

(3) External search device No.

(4) External search program No.

(5) External search block No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

[[Function] [Operation]

Designate the block No. as a binary.

The setting range is 0 to 99 (2 digits).

[Related signals]

(1) External search finished

(2) External search status

(3) External search device No.

(4) External search program No.

(5) External search sequence No.

(6) External search strobe (EXTSSn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EXTERNAL SEARCHSE-

QUENCE NO.

G+364 - G+365

G+464 - G+465

G+564 - G+565

G+664 - G+665

G+764 - G+765

G+864 - G+865

G+964 - G+965

R2464 - R2465

R2564 - R2565

R2664 - R2665

R2764 - R2765

R2864 - R2865

R2964 - R2965

R3064 - R3065

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK

NO.

G+366 - G+367

G+466 - G+467

G+566 - G+567

G+666 - G+667

G+766 - G+767

G+866 - G+867

G+966 - G+967

R2466 - R2467

R2566 - R2567

R2666 - R2667

R2766 - R2767

R2866 - R2867

R2966 - R2967

R3066 - R3067

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

337

[Function]

This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro program.

[Operation]

The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user

macro system variables #1000 to #1031 or #1032.

The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:

File registers G+370/R2470 and G+371/R2471 correspond to system variables #1000 to #1031, and #1032 (32-bit data).

"User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)" and "User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)"

each have both part system common signals and part system independent ones.

Setting the bit selection parameter #6454/bit0 selects part system common or part system independent.

Register Nos. when part system common/independent is selected

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO INPUT #1032

(PLC -> Controller)

G+370 - G+371

G+470 - G+471

G+570 - G+571

G+670 - G+671

G+770 - G+771

G+870 - G+871

G+970 - G+971

R2470 - R2471

R2570 - R2571

R2670 - R2671

R2770 - R2771

R2870 - R2871

R2970 - R2971

R3070 - R3071

Systemvariable Points Interface input signal Systemvariable Points Interface input signal

#1000 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 0 #1016 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 0

#1001 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 1 #1017 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 1

#1002 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 2 #1018 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 2

#1003 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 3 #1019 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 3

#1004 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 4 #1020 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 4

#1005 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 5 #1021 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 5

#1006 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 6 #1022 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 6

#1007 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 7 #1023 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 7

#1008 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 8 #1024 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 8

#1009 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 9 #1025 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 9

#1010 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 10 #1026 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 10

#1011 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 11 #1027 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 11

#1012 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 12 #1028 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 12

#1013 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 13 #1029 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 13

#1014 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 14 #1030 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 14

#1015 1 Register G+370/R2470 bit 15 #1031 1 Register G+371/R2471 bit 15

Systemvariable Points Interface input signal

This correspondence table shows the example for file registers G+370/R2470 and G+371/R2471.

#1032 32 Register G+370/R2470, G+371/R2471

#1033 32 Register G+372/R2472, G+373/R2473

#1034 32 Register G+374/R2474, G+375/R2475

#1035 32 Register G+376/R2476, G+377/R2477

Bit selection parameter #6454/bit0

User macro output #1132 to #1135

(Controller -> PLC)

User macro output #1032 to #1035

(PLC -> Controller)

0: Part system common G10224-G10231/R24-R31 G+224-G+231/R2324-R2331

1: Part system independentG10370-G10977/R170-R777 G+370-G+977/R2470-R3077

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

338

[Function]

This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.

[Operation]

The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side with the user

macro system variables #1033.

[Related signals]

(1) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system common)

(2) User macro output #1132 to #1135 (Controller -> PLC)(Part system independent)

(3) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system common)

(4) User macro input #1032 to #1035 (PLC -> Controller)(Part system independent)

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

[Function][Operation]

The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO INPUT #1033

(PLC -> Controller)

G+372 - G+373

G+472 - G+473

G+572 - G+573

G+672 - G+673

G+772 - G+773

G+872 - G+873

G+972 - G+973

R2472 - R2473

R2572 - R2573

R2672 - R2673

R2772 - R2773

R2872 - R2873

R2972 - R2973

R3072 - R3073

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO INPUT #1034

(PLC -> Controller)

G+374 - G+375

G+474 - G+475

G+574 - G+575

G+674 - G+675

G+774 - G+775

G+874 - G+875

G+974 - G+975

R2474 - R2475

R2574 - R2575

R2674 - R2675

R2774 - R2775

R2874 - R2875

R2974 - R2975

R3074 - R3075

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- USER MACRO INPUT #1035

(PLC -> Controller)

G+376 - G+377

G+476 - G+477

G+576 - G+577

G+676 - G+677

G+776 - G+777

G+876 - G+877

G+976 - G+977

R2476 - R2477

R2576 - R2577

R2676 - R2677

R2776 - R2777

R2876 - R2877

R2976 - R2977

R3076 - R3077

ACT

IF [#1000 EQ 0] GOTO 100

#100 = #1033

N100ACT

DMOV K1000 G10372(R2472)

WOR G10370(R2470) K1 G10370(R2470)

(Example) Sequence program User macro program

Set 1 in #1000. The #1033(G10372/R2472, G10373/R2473)data is read into #100 Other than when #1000 is set to 0.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.15 Data Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

339

[Function]

The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100% (1% increment).

[Operation]

(1) Only the chopping override is valid for the chopping operation. However, valid or invalid of the rapid traverse override

can be selected for the rapid traverse between the basic position and the upper dead point.

(2) The chopping override is set between 0 and 100% in a 1% increment. If a value outside the range from 0 to 100% is

set, the override will be clamped at 100%.

(3) If the "Chopping override" signal is set to "0", "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0150" will occur.

(4) The value is set in binary.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The axis to operate chopping is set when the chopping is commanded by the external signal.

[Operation]

When chopping is commanded by the external signal, "1" is set to a corresponding bit of the axis to operate chopping.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis

: :

bit7: 8th axis

bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

If two or more bit are designated, the lowest number axis will be selected.

The axis designation with this signal is valid in the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method

and the fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The upper dead point is set when chopping is commanded by external signal.

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOVn G+380 G+480 G+580 G+680 G+780 G+880 G+980

R2480 R2580 R2680 R2780 R2880 R2980 R3080

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION G+381 G+481 G+581 G+681 G+781 G+881 G+981

R2481 R2581 R2681 R2781 R2881 R2981 R3081

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA-

TION (L)

G+382 G+482 G+582 G+682 G+782 G+882 G+982

R2482 R2582 R2682 R2782 R2882 R2982 R3082

- UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA-

TION (H)

G+383 G+483 G+583 G+683 G+783 G+883 G+983

R2483 R2583 R2683 R2783 R2883 R2983 R3083

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

340

[Function]

The bottom dead point of when chopping is commanded by the external signal is set with the increment amount from the

upper dead point.

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The speed when chopping is commanded by external signal is set with the number of cycles in one minute. [Number of

cycles/min]

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

When the compensation method is the fixed compensation amount method, the number of the data to be recorded or

played back is designated.

[Operation]

(When operating in the record mode, the measured amount of compensation is recorded in the area of the designated

number. In the playback mode, operation parameter is read from the area of the designated number.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG-

NATION (L)

G+384 G+484 G+584 G+684 G+784 G+884 G+984

R2484 R2584 R2684 R2784 R2884 R2984 R3084

- LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG-

NATION (H)

G+385 G+485 G+585 G+685 G+785 G+885 G+985

R2485 R2585 R2685 R2785 R2885 R2985 R3085

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIG-

NATION

G+386 G+486 G+586 G+686 G+786 G+886 G+986

R2486 R2586 R2686 R2786 R2886 R2986 R3086

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- DATA NO. G+387 G+487 G+587 G+687 G+787 G+887 G+987

R2487 R2587 R2687 R2787 R2887 R2987 R3087

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

341

4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

[Function]

By setting data of desired spindle speed to this signal, the spindle can be run at that speed.

Even when the data does not need to be changed, the process of copying the spindle command rotation speed input to

the spindle command rotation speed input is required.

[Operation]

(1) When the spindle function (S) command is issued, the control device set the commanded value to the spindle

command rotation speed input.

(2) The spindle command rotation speed value will be copied to the spindle command rotation speed output each time if

the spindle speed if the spindle speed to be controlled does not need to change from the (S) command for the PLC

program. If it is desired to be changed, set the intended value to the spindle command rotation speed output each

time.

(3) The control device processes the value of the spindle command rotation speed output and output the rotation speed

command to the spindle controller.

(Note 1) Prepare the PLC program by the user.

(Note 2) When the data is set to the spindle command rotation speed output with PLC program, it will be written each

time.

(Note 3) The conditions of the spindle override code m(SPmn), spindle gear selection code m(GImn), spindle stop

(SSSTPn), spindle gear shift (SSFTn) and spindle orientation (SORCn) are evaluated to the spindle command

rotation speed output, and then transferred to the spindle controller.

(Note 4) Refer to the spindle command rotation speed input section for the flow of spindle function (S) command and

the timing of updating the data.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle command rotation speed input

(2) Spindle command final data(rotation speed)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

- SPINDLE COMMAND ROTA-

TION SPEED OUTPUT SRPMOTn

G+1160 - G+1161

G+1190 - G+1191

G+1220 - G+1221

G+1250 - G+1251

G+1280 - G+1281

G+1310 - G+1311

G+1340 - G+1341

R3900 - R3901

R3930 - R3931

R3960 - R3961

R3990 - R3991

R4020 - R4021

R4050 - R4051

R4080 - R4081

Spindle command rotation speed input (SRPMINn)

S command Spindle command rotation speed output (SRPMOTn)

Spindle controller

(Controller process) PLC program process (mandatory)

Copy or set the intended value

The controller device processes, such as override,

and output to the spindle controller. (Refer to Note 3)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

342

[Function]

When "Spindle override method selection" (SPSn) signal is set to "file register method", override can be exerted on the

spindle rotation speed besides the code method override (Spindle override code m (SPmn)).

Override can be exerted within range of 0% to 200% (1% increment).

The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.

[Operation]

When this function is used, the true spindle speed is obtained by multiplying the originally set spindle speed by override

ratio set with this signal.

Clamp spindle speed is the maximum or minimum speed set with parameters, which depends on "Spindle gear selection

code m" (GImn) signal.

Even when spindle speed exceeds the maximum or minimum speed at the currently selected gear stage, due to change

of override setting, "Spindle gear shift command m" (GRmn) signal does not automatically change.

(Note) Override is not valid (100%) under the following condition:

(1)"Spindle stop" (SSTPn) signal is ON.

(2)During tapping mode.

(3)During thread cutting.

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle override code m (SPmn)

(2) Spindle override method selection (SPSn)

(3) Spindle gear selection code m (GImn)

(4) Spindle stop (SSTPn)

(5) Spindle gear shift (SSFTn)

(6) Spindle orientation (SORCn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

- S COMMAND OVERRIDE G+1170 G+1200 G+1230 G+1260 G+1290 G+1320 G+1350

R3910 R3940 R3970 R4000 R4030 R4060 R4090

0 Smini Smax1 Smax2 Smax3 G10

G20

G30

Applicable override range at gear stage 3

GR10 : Applicable override range at gear stage GR20 : Applicable override range at gear stage GR30 : Applicable override range at gear stage Smini : Minimum spindle speed (parameter) Smax1: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 1 (parameter)

Smax2: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 2 (parameter)

Smax3: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 3 (parameter)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

4.16 Data Type Output Signals : Spindle Command ( PLC CPU->CNC CPU)

343

[Function]

This signal, having the following two functions, is issued in respect to the high-speed serial connection specification

spindle controller (spindle drive).

(1) Notification of orientation position to control unit (spindle controller) at orientation command.

Position data where the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) is turned ON.

(2) During multi-point indexing, notification of indexing position during forward run indexing or reverse run indexing to

control unit (spindle controller).

Position data where the "Spindle forward run index" (WRNn), the "Spindle reverse run index" (WRIn) is turned ON.

[Operation]

(1) Orientation command

The orientation position at when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORCn) turns ON is input.

The values designated with the spindle parameter (SP007 OPST: in-position shift amount for orientation) and with

"Multi-point orientation position data" signal are totaled to determine the orientation position.

(2) Multi-point indexing

Each time the "Spindle forward run index" (WRNn) and "Spindle reverse run index" (WRIn) turn ON, the axis rotates

by the amount designated with the multi-point orientation position data.

When using MDS-D series drive unit, command value is handled as 16-bit binary data and its increment is as

follows.

Command increment = 360/36000 [0.01]

This signal must be validated before the "Spindle orientation command" signal turns ON (at least 30 ms before).

[Related signals]

(1) Spindle orientation command (ORCn)

(2) Spindle forward run index (WRNn)

(3) Spindle reverse run index (WRIn)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st spin- dle

2nd spin- dle

3rd spin- dle

4th spin- dle

5th spin- dle

6th spin- dle

7th spin- dle

- MULTI-POINT ORIENTATION

POSITION DATA

G+1171 G+1201 G+1231 G+1261 G+1291 G+1321 G+1351

R3911 R3941 R3971 R4001 R4031 R4061 R4091

At least 30 ms required.

Multi-point orientation position data

Spindle orientation command (ORCn) Spindle forward run index (WRNn) /Spindle reverse run index (WRIn)

4 Explanation of Interface Signals

MITSUBISHI CNC

344

345

5

Explanation for Each Application

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

346

5.1 PLC Axis Control This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the user PLC, separately from the CNC

control axis.

5.1.1 Specifications

(Note 1) Screen displays as follows according to the setting of the parameter "#1003 iunit".

(Note 2) Commands can be issued by inch if "#1042 pcinch (PLC axis command)" is set to "1"

(inch system).

Other restrictions

(1) There is no mirror image or machine lock function.

(2) Rapid traverse override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible.

(3) Automatic operation start, automatic operation stop, reset and interlock CNC controls are invalid for PLC

control axes.

The same control can be realized using an interface dedicated for PLC control axes.

(4) There is no dedicated emergency stop. The emergency stop is valid in the same manner as the CNC control

axis.

(5) PLC axis external deceleration is valid only when external deceleration ("#1239 set11/bit6 External

deceleration axis compliance valid" is set to "1") is set by axis.

Item Details

No. of control axes Max. 8 axes

Simultaneous control axes

The PLC control axis is controlled independently of the CNC control axis. Simultaneous start of multiple PLC axes is possible.

Command unit Min. command unit (Note 1) 0.001mm (0.0001 inch) 0.0001mm (0.00001 inch)

Feedrate 0 to 1000000mm/min (0 to 100000inch/min) (The feedrate is fixed regardless of the unit system.)

Movement commands Incremental value commands from the current position. Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system. 0 to 99999999 (Note 1)

Operation modes

Rapid traverse, cutting feed Jog feed (+), (-) Reference position return feed (+), (-) Handle feed

Backlash compensation Provided

Stroke end Not provided

Soft limit Provided

Rotation axis commands

Provided Absolute value commands......Rotation amount within one rotation. (Rotates the remainder divided by rotational axis division count.) The axis rotates in shortcut direction according to "#8213 Rotation axis type" setting. Incremental commands...........Rotates the commanded rotation amount.

Inch/mm changeover Not provided Command to match the feedback unit.

Setting value Unit Display

B 0.001mm (0.0001inch) Displays up to three digits after the decimal point.

C 0.0001mm (0.00001inch) Displays up to four digits after the decimal point.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

347

5.1.2 Detailed Explanation

The flow of the process during PLC axis control execution is shown below.

(1) PLC sets operation mode, feedrate, movement data and others.

(2) PLC turns ON the PLC axis control valid signal/PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal.

(3) PLC turns ON the start signal of the control signal.

(4) CNC notifies PLC of the execution of PLC axis control, status being processed and others according to the

conditions of PLC axis control.

(5) PLC turns OFF the start signal after confirming busy/wait signal.

(Note 1) The specification of axis is valid only in buffering mode.

(Note 2) Refer to "5.1.6 Timing Chart" for the exact timing.

G+1370(R4200)

G+1371(R4201)

G+1372(R4202)

G+1374(R4204)

G11370(R1900)

G11371(R1901)

G+1376(R4206)

G11374(R1904)

G11372(R1902)

(4)

PLC CPUCNC CPU

(4) CNC notifies PLC of the execution of PLC axis control, status being processed and others according to the conditions of PLC axis control.

(1) PLC sets operation mode, feedrate, movement data and others.

(2) PLC turns ON the PLC axis control valid signal/PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal.

(3) PLC turns ON the start signal of the control signal.

Flow of PLC axis control for 1st PLC axis

Machine position

Remaining distance

Axis specification

Status

Alarm details

Feedrate

Movement data

Operation mode

Control signal

(5) PLC turns OFF the start signal after confirming busy/wait signal.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

348

5.1.3 Interface with PLC

To perform interface between PLC and CNC, PLC carries out the following steps.

-Sets the control information data to the shared device (G).

-Turns ON either the PLC axis control valid signal or the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal.

-Turns ON the start signal of control signal.

The operation is executed in single mode if the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, executed in buffering mode if the PLC

axis control buffering mode valid signal is ON.

Single mode and buffering mode can be operated simultaneously. However, a movement command to the same axis

can only be issued in either mode.

Alarm doesn't occur when either mode is operating an axis and valid signal of the other mode is turned ON for the same

axis. Instead, the mode commanded later is ignored.

In this case, process in the first mode is not canceled.

(Note 1) Refer to "5.1.9 Buffering Mode" for details of buffering mode.

(Note 2) Refer to "5.1.4 (2) Alarm details" for alarms.

[Function]

This signal validates the PLC axis control in single mode.

[Operation]

Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in single mode.

Status, alarm details and machine position of each axis can be referred.

If this signal has been turned OFF, status, alarm details and machine position are not updated. The axis movement,

which has been commanded in single mode, is canceled. The PLC axis control is executed upon the control information

data while the PLC axis control valid signal is ON.

[Function]

This signal validates the PLC axis control in buffering mode.

[Operation]

Turning this signal ON executes the PLC axis control upon the control information data in buffering mode.

If this signal has been turned OFF, the axis movement, which had been commanded in buffering mode, is canceled.

[Caution]

(1) Turning this signal ON updates the control information in single mode, such as status and machining position, even

during axis control in buffering mode.

The information is updated at the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is

recommended to turn the PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering

mode, and to refer to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in

buffering mode.

(2) Specify the axis to command in buffering mode in the control information, axis specification, for buffering mode.

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-

TH AXIS PLCAEm Y340 - Y347

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

A PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFER-

ING MODE VALID PABMI Y32B

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

349

Store the control information data in the R registers indicated in the table below before executing the PLC axis

control. The control information data is arranged as table below.

(Note) Devices are written with each shared memory device (G) Nos. in upper line and each internal register

Nos. in bottom line.

(Note 1) Axis specification is valid only for buffering mode.

(Note 2) The buffering mode area is invalid for multi-step speed monitor signal input.

(Note 3) Pay attention when programming as the device No. of PLC axis 8th axis is not close to that of 1st to 7th

axis.

PLC axis control information data

Signal name PLC axis No. For buffering mode

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Data A Data B Data C

Status G11370 G11378 G11386 G11394 G11402 G11410 G11418 G12660 G11426 G11434 G11442

R1900 R1908 R1916 R1924 R1932 R1940 R1948 R1980 R1956 R1964 R1972

Alarm details G11371 G11379 G11387 G11395 G11403 G11411 G11419 G12661 G11427 G11435 G11443

R1901 R1909 R1917 R1925 R1933 R1941 R1949 R1981 R1957 R1965 R1973

Machine position

G11372 G11380 G11388 G11396 G11404 G11412 G11420 G12662 G11428 G11436 G11444

R1902 R1910 R1918 R1926 R1934 R1942 R1950 R1982 R1958 R1966 R1974

G11373 G11381 G11389 G11397 G11405 G11413 G11421 G12663 G11429 G11437 G11445

R1903 R1911 R1919 R1927 R1935 R1943 R1951 R1983 R1959 R1967 R1975

Remaining distance

G11374 G11382 G11390 G11398 G11406 G11414 G11422 G12664 G11430 G11438 G11446

R1904 R1912 R1920 R1928 R1936 R1944 R1952 R1984 R1960 R1968 R1976

G11375 G11383 G11391 G11399 G11407 G11415 G11423 G12665 G11431 G11439 G11447

R1905 R1913 R1921 R1929 R1937 R1945 R1953 R1985 R1961 R1969 R1977

Status 2 G11376 G11384 G11392 G11400 G11408 G11416 G11424 G12666

(Not used) (Not used) (Not used) R1906 R1914 R1922 R1930 R1938 R1946 R1954 R1986

Signal name PLC axis No. For buffering mode

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis Data A Data B Data C

Axis specification (Note 1)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

(Not used)

+1426 +1434 +1442

R4256 R4264 R4272

Operation mode +1371 +1379 +1387 +1395 +1403 +1411 +1419 +2661 +1427 +1435 +1443

R4201 R4209 R4217 R4225 R4233 R4241 R4249 R4281 R4257 R4265 R4273

Feedrate

+1372 +1380 +1388 +1396 +1404 +1412 +1420 +2662 +1428 +1436 +1444

R4202 R4210 R4218 R4226 R4234 R4242 R4250 R4282 R4258 R4266 R4274

+1373 +1381 +1389 +1397 +1405 +1413 +1421 +2663 +1429 +1437 +1445

R4203 R4211 R4219 R4227 R4235 R4243 R4251 R4283 R4259 R4267 R4275

Movement data

+1374 +1382 +1390 +1398 +1406 +1414 +1422 +2664 +1430 +1438 +1446

R4204 R4212 R4220 R4228 R4236 R4244 R4252 R4284 R4260 R4268 R4276

+1375 +1383 +1391 +1399 +1407 +1415 +1423 +2665 +1431 +1439 +1447

R4205 R4213 R4221 R4229 R4237 R4245 R4253 R4285 R4261 R4269 R4277

Control signal +1376 +1384 +1392 +1400 +1408 +1416 +1424 +2666 +1432 +1440 +1448

R4206 R4214 R4222 R4230 R4238 R4246 R4254 R4286 R4262 R4270 R4278

External deceleration speed selection/ Multi-step speed monitor signal input (Note 2)

+1377 +1385 +1393 +1401 +1409 +1417 +1425 +2667 +1433 +1441 +1449

R4207 R4215 R4223 R4231 R4239 R4247 R4255 R4287 R4263 R4271 R4279

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

350

5.1.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data

(1) Status

The status is set by the CNC to indicate the execution status of PLC axis control and the status of the axis being

controlled.

bit 0: busy Command processing

This turns ON when the command is being processed.

The next command is not received while this bit is ON.

The next command to be issued is received while this bit is OFF.

bit 1: den Axis movement completed

This bit turns ON when the initialization and commanded movement are completed.

This bit stays OFF during movement, even when an interlock is applied.

This bit turns ON at reset or servo OFF, or when PLC axis control valid is "0".

bit 2: move Axis moving

This bit turns ON when the machine is moving, and turns OFF when the machine is stopped.

When movement distance is microscopically small, PLC may be unable to detect having turned ON.

bit 3: SA Servo ready

This bit turns ON when the servo is ready.

It turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.

bit 4: svon Servo ON

This bit turns OFF when a servo OFF signal is output.

It also turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.

Machine movement is possible when this signal is ON.

bit5: ZP Reference position reached

This bit turns ON when the reference position is reached after completion of a reference position return.

It turns OFF when the machine moves.

bit6: IMP During in-position

This bit turns ON when the PLC axis moves upon in-position, turns OFF when out of in-position.

bit7: WAIT Axis movement wait

This bit turns ON in the buffering mode when the axis movement of the previous block has been completed,

and the machine is in a WAIT status.

It turns OFF when the previous block movement is completed and the movement of the next block begins.

bit 8: oper Option error

This bit turns ON when an attempt is made to execute PLC axis control when there is no PLC axis control

option.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

G11370(R1900)

(1st axis)

bit0:busy Command processing bit8:oper Option error 1:den Axis movement completed 9:ILI In current limit 2:move Axis moving A:ILA Current limit reached 3:SA Servo ready B: 4:svon Servo ON C: 5:ZP Reference position reached D:ALM3 Feedrate zero alarm 6:IMP During in-position E:ALM2 Axis in control alarm

7:WAIT Axis movement wait F:ALM1 Control information data designation alarm

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

351

bit9 : ILI In Current Limit

This bit turns ON when a current limit changeover signal turns ON and entering in current limit state. It turns

OFF by turning the current limit changeover signal OFF.

(Note 1) In current limit of the axis, which is selected by axis designation, will be output in a buffering mode.

bitA :ILA Current limit reached

This bit turns ON when a current value reaches to the current limit. It turns OFF when a current value falls

below the current limit.

(Note 1) A current limit reached of the axis, which is selected by axis designation, will be output in a buffering

mode.

bitD: ALM3 Feedrate zero alarm

It turns ON when the feedrate is zero during the execution of axix control.

It turns OFF by setting the feedrate, and starts moving immediately.

bit E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm

This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control. Axis control

cannot be executed while this bit is ON.

After the cause of the alarm has been removed, turn the bit OFF by turning ON a reset signal of PLC axis,

setting PLC axis control valid signal to 0, or turning the power OFF then ON again.

(Note) When alarms occur during axis control, the same alarms appear in the CNC screen as for CNC

control axes. Set the 1st PLC axis to "1", and the 2nd PLC axis to "2".

Example: When a servo alarm occurs for the 1st PLC axis

bit F: ALM:1 Control information data designation alarm

This bit turns ON when the designated details of the control information data are illegal.

When an alarm occurs for the simultaneous operation of buffering mode and single mode, the mode

designated later is not executed and the mode designated first continues processing.

PLC axis control is not executed when any other alarm occurs.

Turn the bit OFF by correcting the data, turning ON a reset signal of PLC axis, or setting PLC axis control valid

signal to 0.

(Note) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON for an axis, status of the same axis is

automatically updated.

S03 52 1Servo alarm

PLC axis

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

352

(2) Alarm details

The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set.

The details of each alarm No. are shown below.

ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm)

ALM2 (Axis in control alarm)

(Note) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON for an axis alarm details for the same axis is

automatically updated.

Alarm No. Details

01 Control signal illegal (A signal other than a registered control signal has been commanded.)

02 Axis No. illegal

03 Operation mode illegal (0 to 6)

04 Movement data range exceeded -99999999 to +99999999

05

06

07

10 Reference position return not complete (absolute value command not possible)

11

12

Alarm No. Details

0 Servo alarm (Alarm No. is displayed in the PLC axis monitor screen. Refer to the Drive Unit Maintenance Manual for details.)

1 Z-phase not passed

2 Soft limit (+)

3 Soft limit (-)

078F G11371(R1901)

ALM1 Alarm No. ALM2 Alarm No.(1st axis)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

353

(3) Machine Position

The machine position output to the machine system is expressed. The machine position becomes the Rfp

(reference position) when the reference position is reached.

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.

(Note 2) When the PLC axis control valid signal turned is ON for an axis, machine position for the same axis is

automatically updated.

(4) Remaining Distance

The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed.

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.

(Note 2) When the PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON, remaining distance for the same axis is

automatically updated.

(5) Status 2

Multi-step speed monitor related signals for each axis are output. It is valid wether PLC axis control valid signal is

ON or OFF. This signal outputs only when #21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled is set to 1.

Bit 0: ZLS Zero point initialization incomplete

This signal is output when the absolute position is not established in the absolute position detection system.

Bit 1: Power shutoff movement over

This signal turns ON when the difference of the machine position at power OFF and at power ON exceeds the

tolerable value (parameter "#2051 check" setting value) when using the absolute position detection system.

Bit 8: In multi-step speed monitor

This signal turns ON when the muti-step speed monitor request is ON and PLC axis is in multi-step speed

monitor.

Bit 9, A: Multi-step speed monitor output

This signal outputs the mode is currently used to monitor the speed for multi-step speed monitor.

(Numerical data) 0: Speed monitor mode 1 1: Speed monitor mode 2 2: Speed monitor mode 3 3: Speed monitor mode 4

G11373(R1903)

G11372(R1902) Machine position

(input unit) (1st axis)

G11375(R1905)

G11374(R1904) Remaining distance

(input unit) (1st axis)

FG11376 R1906

A 9 8 1 0

(1st axis)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

354

(6) Axis specification

PLC axis No. is designated.

Only buffering mode allows the axis specification upon this data.

Single mode, which provides the PLC axis control valid signal for each axis, does not allow the axis specification

upon this data.

(7) Operation Mode

The operation mode for the PLC axis is designated.

For example, in the handle mode, R1n+5=6 (DATA) is set.

The axis movement will not be affected by changing the operation mode, even while the axis is moving. The new

operation mode is validated at the next start.

(8) Feedrate

When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (operation mode, register = 1 to 3), the PLC axis feedrate is

designated with a binary code.

(Note 1) The measure unit of feedrate is fixed regardless of the unit system set as command unit.

(Note 2) The feedrate designated in the parameters is used for the rapid traverse mode and reference position

return mode.

(Note 3) The feedrate can be changed during axis movement by directly changing the feedrate data (R1n + 6, 7).

0: 1st axis 1: 2nd axis 2: 3rd axis 3: 4th axis 4: 5th axis 5: 6th axis 6: 7th axis 7: 8th axis

(Numeric value data) 0: Rapid traverse (G0) 1: Cutting feed (G1) 2: Jog feed (+) 3: Jog feed (-) 4: Reference position return (+) 5: Reference position return (-) 6: Handle feed 7: Automatic initial set

G+1370(R4200) Axis specification (1st axis)

G+1371(R4201) Operation mode (1st axis)

G+1373(R4203)

G+1372(R4202) Feedrate

(1st axis)

Command range : 1 to 1000000 mm/min. (0.1 to 100000 inch/min.)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

355

(9)Movement Data

When the operation mode is rapid traverse or cutting feed, the movement data is designated with a binary code.

(Note 1) Refer to the explanation of "#1003 iunit" in "5.1.1 Specifications" for measure unit.

(Note 2) The movement data is classified as follows by the absolute value command flag (bit 8) of the command

signal.

Absolute value command flag = 0: Incremental value from the current position

Absolute value command flag = 1: Absolute value of the machine coordinate system

(Note 3) If the movement amount is changed during axis movement, the new movement amount will be validated

at the next start.

(10) Control Signals

Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the PLC axis.

bit 0: Start

Starting begins at the rising edge (OFF -> ON) of the start signal, based on the control information data.

Turn ON a start signal after turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal.

The axis does not move during interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2.

Movement starts after interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2 are canceled.

Start is invalid during resetting.

bit 1: Interlock

The moving PLC axis executes a deceleration stop when the interlock signal turns ON.

The stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the interlock signal turns OFF (is canceled).

bit 2: Reset

The PLC axis is reset when the reset signal turns ON.

Moving PLC axes will execute a deceleration stop.

Commands and controls are invalid during resetting.

If the reset signal turns ON during an alarm occurrence, the alarm will be cleared.

bit 3: Servo OFF

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

G+1376(R4206)

(1st axis)

bit 0: Start bit 8: Absolute value command 1: Interlock 9:Current limit changeover 2: Reset A:Droop release request 3: Servo OFF B: 4: Axis removal C: 5: Axis removal 2 D: 6: External deceleration + E: 7: External deceleration - F:

G+1375(R4205)

G+1374(R4204) Movement data

(1st axis)

Command range : -99999999 to +99999999

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

356

bit4: Axis removal

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF status will result, when the axis removal signal

turns ON.

A servo ON status will result and the stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the axis removal signal

turns OFF (is canceled).

Axis removal is validated when either this signal or machining parameter and axis parameter "#8201 Axis

Removal" is validated.

The reference position return will become incomplete when the axis is removed. Therefore, a dog-type

reference position return must be completed again when starting with an absolute value command.

bit 5: Axis removal 2

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF/ready OFF status will result, when the axis removal

2 signal turns ON.

A servo ON/ready ON status will result for the stopped PLC axis when the axis removal 2 signal turns OFF (is

canceled).

A restart must be executed to start the movement again.

Position control cannot be carried out while the axis removal 2 signal is ON. However, position detection is

possible so the position will not be lost.

bit6: External deceleration +

When the external deceleration + signal has been turning ON while the PLC axis is moving towards +

direction, the feedrate can be set to constant speed set by parameter. Turning this signal ON does not affect it

when it is moving at the speed less than the external deceleration. The external deceleration speed can be

randomly set with "#2086 exdcax1 External deceleration speed 1", "#2161 exdcax2 External deceleration

speed 2" to "#2165 exdcax6 External deceleration speed 6" and the external deceleration speed selection

signal.

This signal is valid only when "#1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid" is set to "1".

bit7 : External deceleration -

The performance is the same as the External deceleration +. The condition of deceleration is to turn the

external deceleration signal - ON while the PLC axis is moving towards "-" direction.

bit 8: Absolute value command

Turn this bit ON when the movement data is commanded in absolute values.

When this bit is OFF, the commands will be processed as incremental value commands.

bit9 : Current limit changeover

Turn this bit ON when validating the current limit. A current limit parameter will switch from SV013 to SV014.

If this signal is turned OFF, the droop generated by the current limit will be released and the command value

will move to the FB position during the current limit reached.

(Note 1) If #1236 set08/bit2 Current limit droop cancel invalid is selected for current limit changeover or for

the axis designated as a droop release invalid axis, the droop will not be released.

(Note 2) Use the current limit changeover signal in single mode even during the buffering mode. (The PLC

axis control valid signal needs to be ON.) The current limit changeover signal for a buffering mode is

invalid.

(Note 3) If the current limit changeover signal is turned ON while the movement command remains, do not

release the droop at once. After turning OFF the signal, make sure no movement command remains

and then release the droop.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

357

bitA : Droop release request

Release the droop generated by the current limit and move the command value to the FB position if it is during

the current limit reached.

(Note 1) This signal is invalid for the axis that is set as the droop release invalid axis.

(Note 2) Use the droop release request signal in the single mode even during the buffering mode. (The PLC

axis control valid signal needs to be ON.) The current limit changeover signal for a buffering mode is

invalid.

(Note 3) If the current limit changeover signal is turned ON while the movement command is still effective, do

not release the droop at once. After turning OFF the signal, make sure no movement command is

still effective and then release the droop.

(11) External deceleration speed selection

This signal selects which external deceleration parameter to use when the PLC axis external deceleration signal is

valid. It is valid only when #1239 set11/bit6 External deceleration axis compliance valid is set to 1.

Setting range:0~5

(12) Multi-step speed monitor input

This signal is used to input the multi-step speed monitor related signal for each axis. It is always valid wether the

PLC axis control valid signal is ON or OFF.

This signal is ignored when "#21162 mulstepssc Multi-step speed monitor enabled" is set to "0".

bit8 : Multi-step speed monitor request

PLC axis executes to monitor the multi-step speed while the speed monitor request signal is ON.

bit9,A :Multi-step speed monitor mode input

This signal selects which speed monitor parameter to use when the speed monitor request signal for PLC axis

becomes valid.

(Numerical value data) 0: External deceleration speed 1(#2086 exdcax1)

1: External deceleration speed 2 (#2161 exdcax2 2: External deceleration speed 3(#2162 exdcax3) 3: External deceleration speed 4(#2163 exdcax4) 4: External deceleration speed 5(#2164 exdcax5) 5: External deceleration speed 6(#2165 exdcax6) Other than above: External deceleration speed 1(#2086 exdcax1)

(Numerical data) 0 : Speed monitor mode 1 (#2181 sscfeed1) 1 : Speed monitor mode 2 (#2182 sscfeed2) 2 : Speed monitor mode 3 (#2183 sscfeed3) 3 : Speed monitor mode 4 (#2184 sscfeed4)

078F

+1371 R4207

External deceleration speed selection

(1st axis)

A 9 8 0F+1377 R4207 (1st axis)

External deceleration speed selection

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

358

5.1.5 Precautions

(1) Updates of signals are not synchronized. Set the control information data, such as feedrate and movement data

before setting the start signal of control signal/bit 0.

(2) PLC control valid signal is valid at all times for as many PLC axes as used.

PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal is also valid at all times during the axis is used.

Therefore, the PLC axis control valid signal and the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal must be turned ON

until the movement of the axis specified is completed.

If these signals are turned OFF, the axis is reset and the command is canceled.

(3) Always transfer 32bit data via 32bit regardless of the setting value.

5.1.6 Timing Chart

(1) For rapid traverse and cutting feed mode

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

(2) For jog feed mode

(Note) The axis moves by jog feed only during start ON.

busy

den

move

Start

Speed

PLC axis control valid signal

busy

den

move

Speed

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

359

(3) For reference position return feed mode

(a) Dog-type reference position return

(Note 1) The axis moves by reference position return feed only during start ON.

Turn the start OFF after confirming that the reference position has been reached.

(Note 2) The first reference position return after the power is turned ON is always dog-type.

All returns after that are high-speed reference position returns.

(b) High-speed reference position return

busy

den

move

ZP

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed (G1 mode)

busy

den

move

ZP

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed (G1 mode)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

360

(4) For handle feed mode

(Note) Handle feed is possible only during start ON.

(5) When the interlock signal is ON (= 1)

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

Handle

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

Interlock

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

361

(6) When the reset signal is ON (= 1)

(Note 1) Make sure that the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

(Note 2) The busy signal will be reset at the falling edge of the reset signal. The start signal has to start up again to

make the mode valid if the mode is used with the start signal ON for handle mode, JOG mode, or

reference position return mode.

When the reset command is issued with this mode and the start up signal is turned OFF, it will be a busy

state as the reset is cancelled and the start signal is turned ON again. Then the handle mode becomes

valid.

(7) When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1)

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

Reset

svon

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

Servo OFF

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

362

(8) When the PLC axis control valid signal is OFF (= 0)

(Note) Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

363

(9) When the start signal ON (=1) is earlier than the PLC axis control valid signal ON (=1) (A section)

(a) When OFF the last PLC axis control valid signal OFF is earlier than a start signal OFF (B section)

When PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF at the 1st time, a start signal continues being ON, and since

the start signal is turned ON previously when PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON at the 2nd time, CNC

cannot detect the standup of a start signal.

Therefore, a PLC axis does not operate by the 2nd start signal.

(b) When the PLC axis control valid signal OFF is later than the start signal OFF (C section)

When PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF at the 1st time, a start signal is turned OFF, CNC can detect

the standup of a start signal when PLC axis control valid signal is turned ON at the 2nd time.

Therefore, a PLC axis operates by the 2nd start signal.

When the start signal ON (=1) is earlier than the PLC axis control valid signal ON (=1), a PLC axis does not

operate according to the state of the last start signal.

In order to avoid such a situation, please turn ON PLC axis control valid signal after a start signal or turn OFF

PLC axis control valid signal after a start signal.

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

A section B section

busy

den

move

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

A section C section

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

364

(10) When the external deceleration speed signal is set to ON (="1") during the G0/G1 mode

Make sure the busy signal has been turned ON before turning OFF the start signal.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal is kept ON even after the movement has ended.

2 1 0

0

500

1000

2000

3000

0

busy

den

move

30000

External deceleration speed selection

Feedrate

PLC axis control valid signal

Start

Speed

External deceleration +

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

365

5.1.7 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

5.1.8 Handle Feed Axis Selection

The axis is designated for the following devices when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

When Y32D, Y32E, Y32F are ON, each handle changes to PLC axis dedication.

Y740-Y744, Y747, Y748-Y74C, Y74F, Y750-Y754, Y757 used with the normal control device are used to select each

handle axis.

PLC axes are differentiated from NC axes and counted from the 1st.

Therefore, if you will operate the first handle in the 1st PLC axis, turn ON Y32D, Y740-Y744 and Y747.

(Note) The handle feed magnification is also used for CNC control axes.

Device No. Signal name

Y338 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis

Y339 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis

Y33A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis

Y33B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis

Y33C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis

Y33D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis

Y33E *PCD7 PLC axis near point detection 7th axis

Y33F *PCD8 PLC axis near point detection 8th axis

Device No. Signal name

Y32D PCH1 PLC axis 1st handle valid

Y32E PCH2 PLC axis 2nd handle valid

Y32F PCH3 PLC axis 3rd handle valid

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

366

5.1.9 Buffering Mode

In the buffering mode, the PLC axis command (control information data) is commanded to several blocks. This enables

smooth changeover of commands.

Axis specifications can be set to each control information data. Up to three axes can be controlled in sequence. (See the

figure in "(1) Control information data".)

(1) Control information data

The control data for the buffering mode is set in three blocks, the control information data A, B and C.

The contents of each control information data have the same configuration as the normal control information data.

When executing, the axis moves in the order that each control information data has been started. When the

movement is completed, it will move to the next block.

(If the start signals are turned ON simultaneously, it will be performed in the order of A, B, and C.)

(Note 1) Only one set of the buffering mode can be commanded.

(Note 2) Turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal updates the control information in single mode, such as

status and machining position, even during axis control in buffering mode. The information is updated at

the same time when the axis is moved by the command in buffering mode. It is recommended to turn the

PLC axis valid signal ON for the axis specified in the control information for buffering mode, and to refer

to single mode for status, alarm details, machine position and remaining distance even in buffering mode.

G+1434 R4264

G+1442 R4272

G+1426 R4256

G11434 R1964

G11442 R1972

G11426 R1956

Control information

data A

Control information

data B

Control information

data C

Control information

data A

Control information

data B

Control information

data C

Operation mode

Feedrate

Movement data

Control signal

Axis specification Alarm details

Machine position

Remaining distance

Status

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

367

(2) Timing chart

G1G1G0G1 (same axis)

(Note) Change and start the data after the busy signal or wait signal turns OFF.

Starting while the busy signal or wait signal is ON will be ignored.

As long as the start signal is ON, the busy signal or wait signal is kept ON even after the movement has

ended.

busy

den

move

wait

A

busy

den

move

wait

C

busy

den

move

wait

B

Start

Speed

Start

Start

PLC axis control valid signal

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

368

G1G1G0G1 (two axes)

busy

den

move

wait

A

busy

den

move

wait

B

busy

den

move

wait

C

10

0

1

PLC axis control valid signal

1st axis speed

Start

Axis No.

Start

Axis No.

Start

Axis No.

2nd axis speed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

369

5.1.10 Parameters

Set the parameters according to the Operation Manual. Servo parameters to set are same as parameters for CNC axis.

The table below shows the axis parameters, the basic parameters and the axis specification parameters, which are

related to PLC axis control.

Correspondence of Parameters to PLC axis

: Supported : Not supported

# Name Support

ed # Name

Support ed

# Name Support

ed

[Axis parameters] 1065 JOG_H 1106 Tcount

8201 AX. RELEASE 1066 JOG_HP 1107 Tllfsc

8202 OT-CHECK 1067 JOG_HN 1108 TlrectM

OFF 1068 slvno 1109 Subs_M

8203 OT-CHECK- 1069 no_dsp 1110 M96_M

CANCEL 1070 axoff 1111 M97_M

8204 OT-CHECK-N 1071 JOG_D 1112 S_TRG

8205 OT-CHECK-P 1073 I_Absm 1113 INT_2

8206 TOOL CHG. P 1074 I_Sync 1114 mcrint

8207 G76/87 IGNR 1075 I_G00 1115 thwait

8208 (-)G76/87 (-) 1076 AbsInc 1116 G30SLM

8209 G60 SHIFT 1077 radius 1117 H_sens

8210 OT INSIDE 1078 Decpt2 1118 mirr_A

1079 F1digt

8213 Rotation axis type

[Basic parameters] 1080 Dril_Z

1001 SYS_ON 1081 Gmac_P

1002 axisno 1082 Geomet

1003 iunit 1084 RadErr

1013 axname 1085 G00Drn

1014 incax 1086 G0intp

1015 cunit 1087 G96_G0

1016 iout 1088 G30SL

1017 rot 1089 Cut_RT

1018 ccw 1090 Lin_RT

1019 dia 1091 Mpoint

1020 sp_ax 1092 Tchg_A

1037 cmdtyp 1093 Wmvfin

1038 plccel 1094 Tl_SBK

1039 spinno 1095 T0tfof

1040 M_inch 1096 T_Ltyp

1041 I_inch 1097 T1digt

1042 pcinch 1098 Tlno.

1043 lang 1099 Treset

1044 auxno 1100 Tmove

1060 SETUP 1101 Tabsmv

1061 intabs 1102 tlm

1062 T_cmp 1103 T_life

1063 mandog 1104 T_Com2

1064 svof 1105 T_Sel2

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

370

# Name Support

ed # Name

Support ed

[Axis specification parameters] 2055 pushf

2001 rapid 2056 aproch

2002 clamp 2057 nrefp

2003 smgst 2058 nrefn

2004 G0tL 2059 zerbas

2005 G0t1 2061 OT_1B-

2006 G0t2 2062 OT_1B+

2007 G1t+ 2063 OT_1Btype

2008 G1t1 2068 G0fwdg

2009 G1t2 2069 Rcoeff

2010 fwd_g 2070 div_RT

2011 G0back

2012 G1back

2013 OT-

2014 OT+

2015 tlml-

2016 tlml+

2017 tap_g

2018 no_srv

2019 revnum

2020 o_chkp

2021 out_f

2022 G30SLX

2023 ozfmin

2024 synerr

2025 G28rap

2026 G28crp

2027 G28sft

2028 grmask

2029 grspc

2030 dir(-)

2031 noref

2032 nochk

2033 zp_no

2037 G53ofs

2038 #2_rfp

2039 #3_rfp

2040 #4_rfp

2049 type

2050 absdir

2051 check

2052 absg28

2053 absm02

2054 clpush

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.1 PLC Axis Control

371

5.1.11 PLC Axis Monitor

The PLC axis operation status (machine position and remaining distance) can be confirmed by checking the section of

the PLC axis on the servo monitor.

5.1.12 Absolute Position Detection

The absolute position of the PLC axis can be detected in the same manner as the CNC control axis.

The initial setting operations are the same as the CNC control axis. However, the following restrictions apply to the

absolute position detection with the PLC axis.

(1) The near zero-point signal cannot be output.

(2) About the automatic initialization set start trigger

PLC axis automatic initialization set starts by starting the axis that the initialization is to be performed. (For NC axis,

the initialization is started when the automatic initialization mode is selected, and the "Feed axis selection" (+Jn, -

Jn) signal in the direction of the machine end of the axis to be initialized is turned ON.

5.1.13 Rotary axis

In PLC axis, the axis which is designated 1" by #1017 rot rotary axis is controlled with the rotary axis' coordinate

system in the same manner as the CNC control axis.

The rotating type (short-cut valid/invalid) is set with the parameter "#8213 rotation axis type".

The setting range for #8213 rotation axis type is 0 to 2. "Workpiece coordinate linear type is applied when "2" is set for

NC axis, but for PLC axis it performs as same as 0 (disable shot-cut) is set.

5.1.14 Position switch

Position switch function can be used for PLC axis in the same manner as NC axis. The following devices turn ON within

the area set by parameter.

The relationship of PLC axis position switch and output signal (CNC -> PLC)

PWS No. PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 PSW4 PSW5 PSW6 PSW7 PSW8

Shared device G10006.0 G10006.1 G10006.2 G10006.3 G10006.4 G10006.5 G10006.6 G10006.7

Internal device X360 X361 X362 X363 X364 X365 X366 X367

PWS No. PSW9 PSW10 PSW11 PSW12 PSW13 PSW14 PSW15 PSW16

Shared device G10006.8 G10006.9 G10006.A G10006.B G10006.C G10006.D G10006.E G10006.F

Internal device X368 X369 X36A X36B X36C X36D X36E X36F

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

372

5.1.15 Usage Example

An example of the PLC axis control ladder in single mode for the 1st PLC axis is shown below.

Mode: cutting feed, speed: 60mm/min, movement amount: 1.000mm (iunit: B)

(Note 1) Program example of bit-type interface was made on the premise that the interface is transferred corresponding

to the device Nos. of NC interface.

Assignment of device Nos. may change the details of the program.

(Note 2) Set all kinds of control information data before outputting control signal.

Y340

MOV K1 D101

DMOV K60 D102

DMOV K1000 D104

MOV K1 D100

Y340

TEST D110 K0 M100

M100

BRST D100 K0

Y340

Always ON

PLC axis control start

PLC axis control valid signal ON

Set operation mode (G1)

Set feedrate

Set movement data

Turn start signal ON

Read status

Fetch BUSY signal

Turn start signal OFF

Output operation mode

Output feedrate

Output movement data

Output control signal

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

MOV U3E1\G11370 D110

MOV D101 U3E0\G11371

DMOV D102 U3E0\G11372

DMOV D104 U3E0\G11374

MOV D100 U3E0\G11376

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

373

5.2 PLC Window PLC window is used to read/write the operation state, axis information, parameters and tool data through a cyclic

transmission area in CPU shared memory.

5.2.1 Details

PLC window has two interfaces, "window command interface" and "window response interface", which are used between

PLC and CNC.

"Window command interface", an interface for control signals (from PLC to CNC), requests CNC for the data of "read

control command", "write control command" and "write data".

"Window response interface", an interface for state signals (from CNC to PLC), outputs data of "read result", "write

result" and "read data" to PLC.

If PLC sets the required command to the window command interface, data can be written to or read from CNC.

Window command interface (Interface from PLC to CNC)

Window response interface (Interface from CNC to PLC)

Interface between CNC and PLC

Write control command

Read control command

Write data

Read result

Write result

Read data

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

374

"Read control command", "read data" and "read result" in the chart above are all called "read window". "Write control

command", "write data" and "write result" are all called "write window".

These windows are used for the read and write operations. 40 units of windows, 20 units for each, are provided for "read

window" and "write window".

Note that the device Nos. assigned to the windows are not continuous through each unit of read/write window. Refer to

"5.2.2 Read Window" and "5.2.3 Write Window" when using the windows. Take care not to set wrong device Nos.

Outlines of read and write processes are shown below.

CNC CPU

(1) (2)

(3) (2) Parameters

Tool data Variable data

Read control command

Read result

Read data PLC CPU

Max. 20 windows

(1) PLC sets the read control command with the information on the CNC internal data to be read, and then turn the read control signal ON.

(2) CNC receives the control signal, and reads the data designated in the read control command. (3) CNC sets the read data to read data.

CNC also sets the read status and results, such as errors, to the read result.

CNC CPU

(1)

(2)

(3)

(2) Parameters Tool data

Variable data

Write control command

Write dataPLC

Write result

CPU

Max. 20 windows

(1) PLC sets the write control command with the information of the CNC internal data where the data is written into, and sets the data to be written to the write data. After setting, turns the write control signal ON.

(2) CNC receives the control signal, and writes the data designated in the writedata into the CNC internal data designated in the write control command.

(3) CNC sets the write status and errors to the "write result

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

375

Data is transmitted between PLC CPU and CNC CPU through a cyclic transmission area in the memory shared among

CPU. The cyclic transmission area is allocated to G device, from G10000.

Interfaces for PLC window are allocated to the cyclic transmission area. This area is used to read out or write into the

CNC internal data.

The lists of device Nos. are shown below. The device Nos. in the lists are offset Nos. from a head device in a cyclic

transmission area.

List of device Nos. of read window

List of device Nos. of write window

Note that when a system is configured with multiple CNC-CPUs, which divide a cyclic transmission area to use, head

device Nos. are changed as follows.

Relation of CNC configuration to head device No.

* The head device of 2nd unit changes depending on the parameter "26742.

Sequence programs need the designation of CPU No. in addition to device No.

Designate as follows to access the cyclic transmission area.

Relation of CPU No. to head input/output No.

Signal name Shared device Reference

Read control command G+2100 to G+2259

5.2.2 Read windowRead data G12310 to G12469

Read result G12270 to G12289

Signal name Shared device Reference

Write control command G+2260 to G+2579

5.2.3 Write windowWrite data

Write result G12290 to G12309

Configuration Head device No. Parameter (#26742) Remark

1 unit of CNC

1st unit G10000 10000 Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)

2 units of CNC

1st unit G10000 10000 Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)

2nd unit *

G13072 G14000

13072 14000

Set with a parameter for CNC CPU (#26742)

CPU No. 1 2 3 4

Head I/O No. 3E0 3E1 3E2 3E3

DesignationU__\G__

Address of the memory shared among CPU Head input/output No. of CPU module

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

376

The following chart shows the interfaces when a system is configured with a PLC CPU and 2 CNC CPUs.

* When the head address of 2nd unit is U3E\G1400, the window status is U3E0\G16100 to U3E0\G16579.

:

:

:

:

:

:

PULL

MITSUBISHI

MELSEC

U3E0

U3E0

U3E0

U3E0

U3E0

U3E0

U3E1

U3E1

U3E1

U3E2

U3E2

U3E2

G10000

G12100

G12579

G13072

G15172

G15651

G10000

G12270

G12469

G10000

G12270

G12469

PLC CPU(CPU No.1) CNC CPU(CPU No.2) CNC CPU(CPU No.3)

Cyclic transmission area Head

Window command interface

: Head

Window command interface

Cyclic transmission area

Window response interface

Cyclic transmission area

Window response interface

PLC interface CNC control signal

Internal device

Internal device

Internal device

Internal device

I/O modules

PLC interface CNC control signal

PLC interface CNC control signal

PLC interface CNC control signal

to

to

to

to

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

377

5.2.2 Read window

Read control command is used to designate the CNC internal data to read. For shared device Nos., refer to "Read

window interface" written later in this section. For setting values such as section Nos., refer to "Appendix 1. List of PLC

Window Data".

(Note 1) As well as the usual part system, PLC axis can be designated. Set "100" for designating the PLC axis.

(Note 2) Designating the sub-section No. is only available when the sub-section Nos. are consecutive as 1, 2, 3 (such

as R register, tool offset).

(Note 3) When decimal point is valid, last 4 digits of the value to be read are placed after decimal point.

(Example) The value "1234567" is read as:

"123.4567" when decimal point is valid.

"1234567" when decimal point is invalid.

Read control command

Shared device Item Details

Gn Section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.

Gn+1 Section sub-ID No. (Note 1)

Designate the part system No. (0:1st part system 1 - 7:Designated part system 100:PLC axis)

Gn+2 Sub-section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.

Gn+3 Data No.

Designate the axis No. used in the part system. The axis No. can be designated up to 8 axes for each part system. (Each part system: 1 to 8, PLC axis: 1 to 8. "0" will be converted to designate the 1st axis. *if the part system is unused, designate the available axis No.

Gn+4 Read method (Note 2)

0: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "data No.". 1: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "sub-section No.". 2: Reads up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "section sub-ID No.".

Gn+5 Number to be read Designate the number of data to be read. Maximum number to be read is 4. If 5 or more is designated, the number of data is regarded as 4.

Gn+6 Blank

Gn+7 Control signal (Note 3)

bit0: - ON/ Start continuous read - OFF/ Stop continuous read bit1: - ON/ Start one-shot read - OFF/ Stop one shot read bit2: Not used bit3: - ON/ Decimal point is valid - OFF/ Decimal point is invalid Bit4: - ON/ Divide the reading result into halves - OFF/ Not to divide the reading result into halves

When 2 of the control signals are ON, continuous read is adapted. Set all the other data in this table before turning the control signal ON.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

378

"Read data" is an area that stores data read by CNC. "Read data" can store up to 4 consecutive data.

Data read by CNC is stored in the data storage area as follows.

1 or 2 byte read data is stored as 4 byte with sign extension.

(Example 1)

Read data: 100000(0x186A0)

When the device No. of the 1st read data window is G12310/G12311,

G12310: 0x86A0 G12311: 0x0001

(Example 2)

Read data: -2(0xFFFE)

When the device No. of the 1st read data window is G12310/G12311,

G12310: 0xFFFE G12311: 0xFFFF

Read result stores the number of the read data in high 8 bit and the read status in low 8 bit.

As for read status, bit0 is turned ON when the read operation is completed, while bit1 to 7 are combined to show error

status. Refer to the following table for details. Read result is cleared by turning the control signal OFF.

Read data

Shared device Item Details

Gn 1st read data Stores the read data

Gn+1

Gn+2 2nd read data Stores the read data

Gn+3

Gn+4 3rd read data Stores the read data

Gn+5

Gn+6 4th read data Stores the read data

Gn+7

Read result

Shared device Item Details

Gn Read result bit0 to bit7: Status bit8 to bitF: Results

bit0: Read finished (this bit is turned ON when the read operation finished, regardless of whether the operation succeeded or not.) bit1 to 7: bit1 to 7: Error status 0x01: Normally finished 0x11: Read variable is empty 0x21: Read variable overflowed 0x41: Part system designation illegal 0x45: Section No. illegal 0x5D: Data type illegal 0xFF: No option

: Number of data read

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

379

Read control window is written by PLC, while read data window and read result are written by CNC.

Read window interface

Window No.

Read control window

Read data window Read result1 2 3 4

1 G+2100-G+2107 G12310-G12311 G12312-G12313 G12314-G12315 G12316-G12317 G12270

R8500-R8507 R9040-R9041 R9042-R9043 R9044-R9045 R9046-R9047 R9000

2 G+2108-G+2115 G12318-G12319 G12320-G12321 G12322-G12323 G12324-G12325 G12271

R8508-R8515 R9048-R9049 R9050-R9051 R9052-R9053 R9054-R9055 R9001

3 G+2116-G+2123 G12326-G12327 G12328-G12329 G12330-G12331 G12332-G12333 G12272

R8516-R8523 R9056-R9057 R9058-R9059 R9060-R9061 R9062-R9063 R9002

4 G+2124-G+2131 G12334-G12335 G12336-G12337 G12338-G12339 G12340-G12341 G12273

R8524-R8531 R9064-R9065 R9066-R9067 R9068-R9069 R9070-R9071 R9003

5 G+2132-G+2139 G12342-G12343 G12344-G12345 G12346-G12347 G12348-G12349 G12274

R8532-R8539 R9072-R9073 R9074-R9075 R9076-R9077 R9078-R9079 R9004

6 G+2140-G+2147 G12350-G12351 G12352-G12353 G12354-G12355 G12356-G12357 G12275

R8540-R8547 R9080-R9081 R9082-R9083 R9084-R9085 R9086-R9087 R9005

7 G+2148-G+2155 G12358-G12359 G12360-G12361 G12362-G12363 G12364-G12365 G12276

R8548-R8555 R9088-R9089 R9090-R9091 R9092-R9093 R9094-R9095 R9006

8 G+2156-G+2163 G12366-G12367 G12368-G12369 G12370-G12371 G12372-G12373 G12277

R8556-R8563 R9096-R9097 R9098-R9099 R9100-R9101 R9102-R9103 R9007

9 G+2164-G+2171 G12374-G12375 G12376-G12377 G12378-G12379 G12380-G12381 G12278

R8564-R8571 R9104-R9105 R9106-R9107 R9108-R9109 R9110-R9111 R9008

10 G+2172-G+2179 G12382-G12383 G12384-G12385 G12386-G12387 G12388-G12389 G12279

R8572-R8579 R9112-R9113 R9114-R9115 R9116-R9117 R9118-R9119 R9009

11 G+2180-G+2187 G12390-G12391 G12392-G12393 G12394-G12395 G12396-G12397 G12280

R8580-R8587 R9120-R9121 R9122-R9123 R9124-R9125 R9126-R9127 R9010

12 G+2188-G+2195 G12398-G12399 G12400-G12401 G12402-G12403 G12404-G12405 G12281

R8588-R8595 R9128-R9129 R9130-R9131 R9132-R9133 R9134-R9135 R9011

13 G+2196-G+2203 G12406-G12407 G12408-G12409 G12410-G12411 G12412-G12413 G12282

R8596-R8603 R9136-R9137 R9138-R9139 R9140-R9141 R9142-R9143 R9012

14 G+2204-G+2211 G12414-G12415 G12416-G12417 G12418-G12419 G12420-G12421 G12283

R8604-R8611 R9144-R9145 R9146-R9147 R9148-R9149 R9150-R9151 R9013

15 G+2212-G+2219 G12422-G12423 G12424-G12425 G12426-G12427 G12428-G12429 G12284

R8612-R8619 R9152-R9153 R9154-R9155 R9156-R9157 R9158-R9159 R9014

16 G+2220-G+2227 G12430-G12431 G12432-G12433 G12434-G12435 G12436-G12437 G12285

R8620-R8627 R9160-R9161 R9162-R9163 R9164-R9165 R9166-R9167 R9015

17 G+2228-G+2235 G12438-G12439 G12440-G12441 G12442-G12443 G12444-G12445 G12286

R8628-R8635 R9168-R9169 R9170-R9171 R9172-R9173 R9174-R9175 R9016

18 G+2236-G+2243 G12446-G12447 G12448-G12449 G12450-G12451 G12452-G12453 G12287

R8636-R8643 R9176-R9177 R9178-R9179 R9180-R9181 R9182-R9183 R9017

19 G+2244-G+2251 G12454-G12455 G12456-G12457 G12458-G12459 G12460-G12461 G12288

R8644-R8651 R9184-R9185 R9186-R9187 R9188-R9189 R9190-R9191 R9018

20 G+2252-G+2259 G12462-G12463 G12464-G12465 G12466-G12467 G12468-G12469 G12289

R8652-R8659 R9192-R9193 R9194-R9195 R9196-R9197 R9198-R9199 R9019

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

380

5.2.3 Write window

Write control command is used to designate the CNC data to write in.

For shared device Nos., refer to "Write window interface" written later in this section.

For setting values such as section Nos., refer to "Appendix 1. List of PLC Window Data".

(Note 1) As well as the usual part system, PLC axis can be designated. Set "100" for designating the PLC axis.

(Note 2) Designating the sub-section No. is only available when the sub-section Nos. are consecutive as 1, 2, 3 (such

as R register, tool offset).

(Note 3) When decimal point is valid, last 4 digits of the value to be written are placed after decimal point.

(Example) The value "1234567" is written as:

"123.4567" when decimal point is valid.

"1234567" when decimal point is invalid.

Write control command

Shared device Item Details

Gn Section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.

Gn+1 Section sub-ID No. (Note 1)

Designate the part system No. (0:1st part system 1 to 7:Designated part system 100:PLC axis)

Gn+2 Sub-section No. Designate the type of the CNC internal data.

Gn+3 Data No.

Designate the axis No. used in the part system. The axis No. can be designated maximum of 8 axes for each part system. (Each part system: 1 to 8, PLC axis: 1 to 8. "0" will be converted to designate the 1st axis. *if the part system is unused, designate the available axis No.

Gn+4 Write method (Note 2)

0: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Data No.". 1: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Sub-section No.". 2: Writes up to 4 consecutive data from the designated "Section sub-ID No.".

Gn+5 Number to be written Designate number of data to be written. Maximum number to be written is 4. If 5 or more is designated, the number of data is regarded as 4.

Gn+6 Blank

Gn+7 Control signal (Note 3)

bit0: - ON/ Start continuous write - OFF/ Stop continuous write bit1: - ON/ Start one-shot write - OFF/ Stop one-shot write bit2: - ON/ Addition input - OFF/ Direct input bit3: - ON/ Decimal point is valid - OFF/ Decimal point is invalid

When 2 of the control signals are ON, continuous read is adapted. Set all the other data in this table before turning the control signal ON.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

381

"Write data" is an area that stores data to be written in CNC. "Write data" can store up to 4 consecutive data.

Data to be written in CNC should be stored in the data storage area as follows.

(Example)

Write data: 100000(0x186A4)

When the device No. of the 1st write data window is G12260/G12261,

G12260: 0x86A0 G12261: 0x0001

(Note) The value of data which is written to CNC using PLC window function should be within the range shown in the

Appendix 1. If the value is set over the range, the performance is not guaranteed.

"Write result" stores the number of written data in high 8 bit and the write status in low 8 bit.

As for write status, bit0 is turned ON when the write operation is completed, while bit1 to 7 are combined to show error

status. Refer to the following table for details. "Write result" is cleared by turning the control signal OFF.

Write data

Shared device Item Details

Gn 1st write data Stores data to be written

Gn+1

Gn+2 2nd write data Stores data to be written

Gn+3

Gn+4 3rd write data Stores data to be written

Gn+5

Gn+6 4th write data Stores data to be written

Gn+7

Write result

Shared device Item Details

Gn Write result bit0 to bit7: Status bit8 to bitF: Results

bit0: Write finished (this bit is turned ON when the write operation finished, regardless of whether the operation succeeded or not.)) bit1 to 7: bit1 to 7: Error status 0x01: Normally finished 0x21: Write variable overflowed 0x41: Part system designation illegal 0x45: Section No. illegal 0x5D: Data type illegal 0x6D: Written in read-only data 0xFF: No option

: Number of data written

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

382

Write control window and write data window are written by PLC, while write result is written by CNC.

Write window interface

Window No.

Write control window

Write data window ("write data") Write result1 2 3 4

1 G+2268-G+2275 G+2260-G+2261 G+2262-G+2263 G+2264-G+2265 G+2266-G+2267 G12290

R8668-R8675 R8660-R8661 R8662-R8663 R8664-R8665 R8666-R8667 R9020

2 G+2284-G+2291 G+2276-G+2277 G+2278-G+2279 G+2280-G+2281 G+2282-G+2283 G12291

R8684-R8691 R8676-R8677 R8678-R8679 R8680-R8681 R8682-R8683 R9021

3 G+2300-G+2307 G+2292-G+2293 G+2294-G+2295 G+2296-G+2297 G+2298-G+2299 G12292

R8700-R8707 R8692-R8693 R8694-R8695 R8696-R8697 R8698-R8699 R9022

4 G+2316-G+2323 G+2308-G+2309 G+2310-G+2311 G+2312-G+2313 G+2314-G+2315 G12293

R8716-R8723 R8708-R8709 R8710-R8711 R8712-R8713 R8714-R8715 R9023

5 G+2332-G+2339 G+2324-G+2325 G+2326-G+2327 G+2328-G+2329 G+2330-G+2331 G12294

R8732-R8739 R8724-R8725 R8726-R8727 R8728-R8729 R8730-R8731 R9024

6 G+2348-G+2355 G+2340-G+2341 G+2342-G+2343 G+2344-G+2345 G+2346-G+2347 G12295

R8748-R8755 R8740-R8741 R8742-R8743 R8744-R8745 R8746-R8747 R9025

7 G+2364-G+2371 G+2356-G+2357 G+2358-G+2359 G+2360-G+2361 G+2362-G+2363 G12296

R8764-R8771 R8756-R8757 R8758-R8759 R8760-R8761 R8762-R8763 R9026

8 G+2380-G+2387 G+2372-G+2373 G+2374-G+2375 G+2376-G+2377 G+2378-G+2379 G12297

R8780-R8787 R8772-R8773 R8774-R8775 R8776-R8777 R8778-R8779 R9027

9 G+2396-G+2403 G+2388-G+2389 G+2390-G+2391 G+2392-G+2393 G+2394-G+2395 G12298

R8796-R8803 R8788-R8789 R8790-R8791 R8792-R8793 R8794-R8795 R9028

10 G+2412-G+2419 G+2404-G+2405 G+2406-G+2407 G+2408-G+2409 G+2410-G+2411 G12299

R8812-R8819 R8804-R8805 R8806-R8807 R8808-R8809 R8810-R8811 R9029

11 G+2428-G+2435 G+2420-G+2421 G+2422-G+2423 G+2424-G+2425 G+2426-G+2427 G12300

R8828-R8835 R8820-R8821 R8822-R8823 R8824-R8825 R8826-R8827 R9030

12 G+2444-G+2451 G+2436-G+2437 G+2438-G+2439 G+2440-G+2441 G+2442-G+2443 G12301

R8844-R8851 R8836-R8837 R8838-R8839 R8840-R8841 R8842-R8843 R9031

13 G+2460-G+2467 G+2452-G+2453 G+2454-G+2455 G+2456-G+2457 G+2458-G+2459 G12302

R8860-R8867 R8852-R8853 R8854-R8855 R8856-R8857 R8858-R8859 R9032

14 G+2476-G+2483 G+2468-G+2469 G+2470-G+2471 G+2472-G+2473 G+2474-G+2475 G12303

R8876-R8883 R8868-R8869 R8870-R8871 R8872-R8873 R8874-R8875 R9033

15 G+2492-G+2499 G+2484-G+2485 G+2486-G+2487 G+2488-G+2489 G+2490-G+2491 G12304

R8892-R8899 R8884-R8885 R8886-R8887 R8888-R8889 R8890-R8891 R9034

16 G+2508-G+2515 G+2500-G+2501 G+2502-G+2503 G+2504-G+2505 G+2506-G+2507 G12305

R8908-R8915 R8900-R8901 R8902-R8903 R8904-R8905 R8906-R8907 R9035

17 G+2524-G+2531 G+2516-G+2517 G+2518-G+2519 G+2520-G+2521 G+2522-G+2523 G12306

R8924-R8931 R8916-R8917 R8918-R8919 R8920-R8921 R8922-R8923 R9036

18 G+2540-G+2547 G+2532-G+2533 G+2534-G+2535 G+2536-G+2537 G+2538-G+2539 G12307

R8940-R8947 R8932-R8933 R8934-R8935 R8936-R8937 R8938-R8939 R9037

19 G+2556-G+2563 G+2548-G+2549 G+2550-G+2551 G+2552-G+2553 G+2554-G+2555 G12308

R8956-R8963 R8948-R8949 R8950-R8951 R8952-R8953 R8954-R8955 R9038

20 G+2572-G+2579 G+2564-G+2565 G+2566-G+2567 G+2568-G+2569 G+2570-G+2571 G12309

R8972-R8979 R8964-R8965 R8966-R8967 R8968-R8969 R8970-R8971 R9039

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

383

5.2.4 Operation Details

Procedure to read data is as follows.

(1) Designate the data to read by setting "section No.", "section sub-ID No.", "sub-section No.", "data No.", and

"data size" to the "read control command".

(2) Designate "number to be read" (max. 4 data) and "read method" to the same "read control command".

(3) If bit0 of "control signal" is turned ON, the read operation starts ("A" in the chart below). The read operation

continues as long as bit0 is ON.

If bit1 of "control signal" is turned ON, one-shot read operation starts ("B" in the chart below).

(4) After the read operation is completed, CNC sets the "status" in "read result" ("C" in the chart below).

If "status" is set while one-shot read is ON, data is not read.

(5) If the control signal of "read control command" is turned OFF, "status (bit0)" in "read result" is also turned OFF.

The operation is the same for both one-shot and continuous read. ("D" in the chart below)

(6) "Read data window" stores the read data. Check the "status" and "result" in "read result" before using the read

data.

Read operation

B C A C

D D

Read control command Control signal bit0 (continuous read)

Read result, status

Read operation of CNC data

Reading data

One-shot read Continuous read

Read control command Control signal bit1 (one-shot read)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

384

Procedure to write data is as follows.

(1) Designate the data to write by setting "section No.", "section sub-ID No.", "sub-section No.", "data No.", and

"data size" to the "write control command".

(2) Designate "number to be written" (max. 4 data) and "write method" to the same "write control command".

(3) If bit0 of "control signal" is turned ON, the write operation starts ("A" in the chart below).

The write operation continues as long as bit0 is ON.

If bit1 of "control signal" is turned ON, one-shot write operation starts ("B" in the chart below).

(4) After the write operation is completed, CNC sets the "status" in "write result" ("C" in the chart below).

If "status" is set while one-shot write is ON, CNC does not write data.

(5) If the control signal of "write control command" is turned OFF, "status(bit0)" in "write result" is also turned OFF.

The operation is the same for both one-shot and continuous read. ("D" in the chart below)

(6) Check the "status" and "result" in "write result" before executing other operations to the written data.

Write operation

B C A C

D D

Write control command Control signal bit1 (one-shot write)

Write result, status

Write operation of CNC data

One-shot write Continuous write

Writing data

Write control command Control signal bit0 (continuous write)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

385

5.2.5 Usage Examples

This section shows the usage examples with the system configured as follows.

(1) Set the data to be read as follows.

[TOOL OFFSET] - [WORK OFFSET] screen

(2) Set the following data to the read control command.

Example 1 (Reading out the G54 workpiece coordinate offset values of each 1st to 4th axes in the1st part system)

Device No. Item Setting value Details

G12100 Section No. 0x0004 Designate workpiece coordinate offset

G12101 Section sub-ID No. 0x0001 Designate the part system No.

G12102 Sub-section No. 0x0000 Designate G54 workpiece coordinate offset

G12103 Data No. 0x0001 Designate the axis No. used in the part system

G12104 Read method 0x0000 Set the method to read the designated number of data consecutively from the designated data No.

G12105 Number to be read 0x0004 Designate the number to be read

PULL

M IT S U B IS H I

M E L S E C

I/O modules

PLC CPU (CPU No.1)

CNC-CPU (CPU No.2)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

386

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control

command.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

The sequence program of example 1 is written as follows.

Device No. Device value Details

G12270 0x0401 High 8 bit (number of data read): 4 Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x86A0 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 1st axis is "100.000"G12311 0x0001

G12312 0x49F0 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 2nd axis is "150.000"G12313 0x0002

G12314 0x0D40 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 3rd axis is "200.000"G12315 0x0003

G12316 0xD090 G54 workpiece coordinate offset value of the 4th axis is "250.000"G12317 0x0003

ACT

ACT

M100 ( M100 )

[MOV K4 U3E0\G12100]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12101]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12102]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12103]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12104]

[MOV K4 U3E0\G12105]

[MOV K1 U3E0\G12107] Turn ON the control signal in the read control window

Set data to the read control command

Check the read result [ > U3E1\G12270 K0 ]

[MOV K0 U3E0\G12107] Turn the control signal OFF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

387

(1) Set the values to be read as follows.

[POSITION] - [COMMON VARIABLE] screen

(2) Set the following values to the read control command.

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0 and bit3) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0 and bit3) of the read

control command.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

Example 2 (Reading out the values of each common variable #100 to #103 in the 1st part system)

Device No. Item Setting value Details

G12100 Section No. 0x0020 Designate common variable

G12101 Section sub-ID No. 0x0001 Designate the part system No.

G12102 Sub-section No. 0x0064 Designate common variable No.

G12103 Data No. 0x0000 Designate the axis No. used in the part system

G12104 Read method 0x0001 Set the method to read the designated number of data consecutively from the designated sub- section No.

G12105 Number to be read 0x0004 Designate the number to be read

Device No. Device value Details

G12270 0x0401 High 8 bit (number of data read): 4 Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x4240 The value of common variable #100 for the 1st part system is "100.0000"G12311 0x000F

G12312 0xD687 The value of common variable #101 for the 1st part system is "123.4567"G12313 0x0012

G12314 0xBDC0 The value of common variable #102 for the 1st part system is "-100.0000"G12315 0xFFF0

G12316 0x2979 The value of common variable #103 for the 1st part system is "-123.4567"G12317 0xFFED

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

388

(1) Set the values to be read as follows.

(The following screen shows the value set for the 1st part system. Change the part systems and set the value for

each 1st to 4th part system.)

Set "150.0000" for 2nd part system #100, "200.0000" for 3rd part system #100, 250.0000 for 4th part system #100.

[POSITION] - [COMMON VARIABLE] screen

(2) Set the following values to the read control command.

Change the setting value of "read method" in the example 2 from "1" to "2". (The other setting values are the same

as those in example 2.)

(3) Turn ON the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control command.

(4) Check the read result (G12270) in the read control window.

(5) After the read result (G12270/bit0) is turned ON, turn OFF the control signal (G12107/bit0) of the read control

command. Turn bit3 ON for the same signal.

(6) Check the read data in the read data window.

Example 3 (Reading out the value of common variable #100 for each part system)

Device No. Item Setting value Details

G12104 Read method 0x0002 Set the method to read the designated number of data consecutively from the designated section sub-ID No.

Device No. Device value Details

G12270 0x0401 High 8 bit (number of data read): 4 Low 8 bit (read status): Completed

Device No. Device value Details

G12310 0x0064 The value of common variable #100 for the 1st part system is "100"G12311 0x0000

G12312 0x0096 The value of common variable #100 for the 2nd part system is "150"G12313 0x0000

G12314 0x00C8 The value of common variable #100 for the 3rd part system is "200"G12315 0x0000

G12316 0x00FA The value of common variable #100 for the 4th part system is "250"G12317 0x0000

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.2 PLC Window

389

5.2.6 Precautions

(1) PLC window operates even while PLC stops. If read/write control signal is ON, read/write function operates during

the PLC stop.

(2) When multiple data is read/written while continuous read/write is set, some data may not be updated due to the time

of execution.

To read/write all the multiple data at the same time, synchronize the data transfer timing of each CPU by

designating the target command with I45(interruption pointer) and terminating the command with IRET command.

The following sequence program is the example when the system is configured with PLC CPU for CPU No.1 and

CNC CPU for No.2.

[IRET]

ACT I45 Set the 1st read data to PLC

Set the 2nd read data to PLC

Set the 3rd read data to PLC

Set the 4th read data to PLC

[DMOV U3E1\G12310 D500]

[DMOV U3E1\G12312 D502]

[DMOV U3E1\G12314 D504]

[DMOV U3E1\G12316 D506]

Designate the command with I45 (interruption pointer) to ransfer data at the synchronized timing.

[IRET]

ACT I45 Set the 1st write data to the shared device

Set the 2nd write data to the shared device

Set the 3rd write data to the shared device

Set the 4th write data to the shared device

[DMOV K1 U3E0\G12268]

[DMOV K2 U3E0\G12270]

[DMOV K3 U3E0\G12272]

[DMOV K4 U3E0\G12274]

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

390

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System) 5.3.1 Outline of Tool Life Management Function

-When the tool is commanded, a tool is selected from the tool group.(Only for tool life management II.)

-The tool status is monitored by counting the tool usage time and number of uses.

-When the tool being used reaches its life, the tool life over signal is output.

[Preparation] The life time and number of life times are set

Spare/spindle tool data

[Cutting] Use time and number of uses are counted

[Tool function command] The life is checked when the tool is selected

[WARNING] Tool life over

Tool life is over

User PLC

[Tool life management screen]

2/2.4LOOT]EFILLOOT[ GROUP 10000000 #TOOL NO.ST FROM L-CMP R-CMP AUX LIFE USED 1 12345678 4 220 -345.678 100.000 12345 1234 234(min) 2 1234567 3 120 112.340 30.000 11111 123 45(min) 3 123456 2 111 122.220 20.000 44444 100 50(set) 4 12345 1 002 11.234 100.123 100 50 15(cyc) 5 6 7 8 9 10

# ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

OFFSET REGIST LIFE MENU

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

391

5.3.2 Tool Life Management Methods

The following two management methods are available.

(1) Tool life management I (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 1.)

The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721) is

integrated and the tool use state is monitored.

Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759)

(2) Tool life management II (When Base common parameter "#1096 T-Ltyp" is set to 2.)

A function to select a spare tool has been added to the tool management I. The spare tool is selected from the

group by the spare tool selection processes executed by the CNC when the tool is commanded, etc. The tool data

for that spare tool is output (G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735).

Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool specified from user PLC (G11450-G1145/R6720-R6721) is output

(G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759) and tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool is made.

(Note) Tool life management can be executed only for the 1st part system.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

392

5.3.3 Procedure when Tool Function Command is Executed

(1) Tool life management I

(a) When the tool function command (T command) is commanded, the CNC outputs the T code data (BCD) and

the tool function strobe signal.

(b) The CNC checks the tool function command, and executes the tool selection process if the life management is

valid ("#1103 T_life" is set to "1").

(c) The tool selection process outputs the tool data for the tool corresponding to the designated tool No. (G12220-

G12231/R6724-R6735)

(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data after

the confirmation of the tool function strobe signal, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(2) Tool life management II

(a) When the tool function command (T command) is commanded, the CNC outputs the T code data (BCD) and

the tool function strobe signal.

(b) The CNC checks the tool function command, and executes the spare tool selection process if the life

management is required as is valid ("#1103 T_life" is set to "1").

(c) The spare tool selection process selects the spare tool corresponding to the specified No. (group No., tool No.)

and outputs the tool data of the spare tool. (G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735)

The T command value, after the subtraction of the tool life management standard number (#1312 T_base), is

used as group No. and tool No.

If the commanded value is smaller than the tool life management standard number, the spare tool selection is

not processed.

(d) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the output tool data after

the confirmation of the tool function strobe signal, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. At the time, the specified tool No. is

output to the tool No. in the output tool data as it is.

Tool function command (Rm)

(Tool No., group No.)

Tool data (Rn)Spare tool selection function command

In tool life management I, tool No. is only specified and spare tool is selected.

Tool is selected according to tool No. in tool data.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

393

5.3.4 Procedure when Spindle Tool is Changed

(1) When spindle tool is changed during the spindle tool change command (M06), etc., the user PLC specifies the tool

No. of the spindle tool (G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721).

CNC always outputs the spindle tool data corresponding to the tool No. of the spindle (G12244 -G12255/R6748-

R6759).

(2) CNC integrates the use time or use count of the spindle tool based on the spindle tool data in the tool data file.

In tool life management II, it also executes tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool.

(Note) If -1 is set in the group No. in the output spindle tool data, the spindle tool data is invalid. At the time, the

specified tool No. (G11450-G11451 (R6720-R6721)) is output to the tool No. in the output spindle tool data as

it is. CNC does not integrate the usage time or usage count of the spindle tool or make tool compensation.

CNCG11450-G11451 /R6720-R6721

G11452-G11453 /R6722-R6723

G12222-G12223 /R6726-R6727

G12244-G12255 /R6748-R6759

T life mgmt Spindle tool No. Tool data file (CNC internal data)

When the spindle No. is changed, CNC regards that the spindle tool has been changed and searches for new tool data in the tool data file. Life management and tool compensation are conducted based on this data. The tool data is output to G12244-G12255/R6748- R6759 when synchronized.

Standby tool No.

T life mgmt Spare tool No.

Spindle tool data

When tool is changed, the spindle tool No. is set in G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721. (User PLC)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

394

5.3.5 Tool Life Management II Method

(1) Tool function command method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the

spare tool selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Group No. command method (When Base common parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 0.)

The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as group No. Spare

tool is selected among the tools corresponding to the group No. in tool data.

(b) Tool No. command method (When BASE SPEC parameter "#1104 T-Com2" is set to 1.)

The command tool No. (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection process is handled as a tool No. The

group No. containing the command tool No. is found and spare tool is selected among the group.

(2) Spare tool selection method

One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for the spare tool selection method of the spare tool

selection process in tool life management II:

(a) Selection in tool registration order (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 0.)

This selects the tool from the tools in use in the same group, following the registration No. order.

If there are no "Tools in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools" and

"Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

(b) Life equality selection (When Base common parameter "#1105 T-Sel2" is set to 1.)

This selects the tool with the maximum remaining life from the tools in use and not in use in the same group.

When several tools have the same remaining life, the tools are selected in order of registration No. If there are

no "Tools in use" or "Tools not in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools"

and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

5.3.6 Maximum Number of Registerable Tools

Maximum number of registerable tools is 100.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

395

5.3.7 Tool Data

The tool data is tool management data such as the group No., tool No., and tool status.

(Note) Refer to tool data after the output tool No. coincided with the number set to the spindle tool No.

Tool data name Explanation Data range

Group No.

No. to manage tools of the same type (form and dimensions) in a group is set. The tools assigned the same group No. are assumed to be spare tools.

1 to 99999999

Tool No. No. unique to each tool actually output during tool function command execution

1 to 99999999

Tool data flag Set the parameter for tool life management method, length compensation method, radius compensation method, etc.

Tool status The tool state is indicated.

0 to 4

Auxiliary data May differ according to the machine tool builder specifications.

0 to 65535

Tool life data Life time or life count for each tool is set. (If 0 is set, infinity is assumed to be specified.)

0 to 4000 (minutes) 0 to 65000 (times)

Tool usage data Usage time or usage count for each tool. (Refer to the following "Usage time, usage count" section for details on the count method.)

0 to 4000 (minutes) 0 to 65000 (times)

Tool length compensation data

The tool length compensation data is set with the format designated with the tool data flag.

Compensation No. 1 to 200 Direct offset amount 99999.999 Addition offset amount 99999.999

Tool radius compensation data

The tool radius compensation data is set with the format designated with the tool data flag.

Compensation No. 1 to 200 Direct offset amount 99999.999 Addition offset amount 99999.999

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Tool life management method 0-2 (2) Tool radius compensation method 0-2 (3) Tool length compensation method 0-2

bit F E D C B A 9 8

0 to 4

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

396

(1) Tool data flag

(2) Tool status

-Values of tool status, 3 and 4 may differ according to the machine tool builder specifications.

-The unused tool and tool in use are usable spare tools.

(3) Tool life data, tool usage data

The setting range and unit differ according to the tool data flag's tool life management method.

(Note) When usage time is selected for the tool life management method, the data is output to user ladder on a

1/16 minute basis.

(4) Tool length compensation data, tool radius compensation data

The tool corresponding to the spindle tool can be compensated with tool life management II.

The setting details and range differ according to the tool data flag's tool length compensation method and tool

radius compensation method.

Parameter Details Value Explanation

Tool life management method (bit4/5)

Usage time 0 Manages the cutting feed with the execution time.

Mount count 1 Manages the number of times the tool becomes the spindle tool at tool change, etc.

Work count 2 Manages with the number of times the cutting feed command is issued.

Tool length compensation method

(bit0/1) Tool radius

compensation method (bit2/3)

Compensation number method

0 Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the compensation No., and compensates by replacing the compensation No. commanded in the machining program with this value.

Addition compensation

method 1

Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the addition compensation amount. Compensates by adding the amount to the compensation amount indicated by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program.

Direct compensation

method 2

Handles the compensation data in the tool data as the direct compensation amount. Compensates by replacing the amount to the compensation amount indicated by the compensation No. commanded in the machining program with this value.

Details Value Explanation

Unused tool 0 Set to 0 when replacing the tool with a new tool.

Tool in use 1 This state is activated when cutting is actually started.

Normal life tool 2 This state is activated when the usage data exceeds the life data.

Error tool 1 3 This state is activated when the CNC receives tool error 1 signal.

Error tool 2 4 This state is activated when the CNC receives tool error 2 signal.

Tool life management method

Setting range Unit

0 : Usage time 0 to 4000 Minute

1 : Mount count 0 to 65000 Times

2 : Work count 0 to 65000 Times

Tool compensation data

Setting details Setting range

0 : Compensation number method

Compensation No.

1 to 200

1 : Addition compensation method

Compensation amount 99999.999

2 : Direct compensation method

Compensation amount 99999.999

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

397

5.3.8 Usage Time, Work Count

The usage data is counted with the life system (usage time, work count, mount count) set for each tool.

Counts the time duration of cutting feed movement (G01/02/03, etc.). (The duration indicated with <=> in the following

chart is counted.)

Counts the number of times at which the rapid traverse command (G00) has been changed to the cutting feed command.

However, if a command other than the rapid traverse has been issued while the cutting feed is commanded, the data is

not counted.

Counts the number of times at which the cutting feed has started after the tool change.

This is not counted unless the cutting feed is commanded after the tool change.

(1) Tool life management is executed even when the operation mode is MDI.

(2) Linear interporation, arc interporation and threading are regarded as cutting feed.

However, the data is not counted unless any movement has been made in the block.

(3) The data is not counted if the automatic machine lock is executed to any one of the axes.

(4) These counts are available when the parameter "#1103 T_Life (Validate life management)" is set to "1" and "Usage

data count valid" signal (Y78A) is ON. The data is not counted when either the parameter or the signal is set to "0"

or OFF.

(5) None of the "0" tool life data, tools whose life is over, and abnormal tools (status: 3 or 4) are counted.

(6) The data is not counted during miscellaneous function lock or dry run.

(7) The data is not counted during the operation with a single block.

(8) The movement by the skip command (G31) is not counted.

Usage time count

Work count

Mount count

Precautions

G00 G01 G00 G04G01G01 G01T01M06 G00

G00 G01 G00 G04G01G01 G01T01M06 G00

Adds 1 to the work count

Adds 1 to the work count

*Not counted

G00 G01 G00 G04G01G01 G01T01M06 G00

Adds 1 to the mount count

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

398

5.3.9 Tool Data Flow (R Register)

G11451/R6720

G11452/R6721

G11453/R6722

G11454/R6723

G12220/R6724

G12221/R6725

G12222/R6726

G12223/R6727

G12224/R6728

G12225/R6729

G12226/R6730

G12227/R6731

G12228/R6732

G12229/R6733

G12230/R6734

G12231/R6735

CNC CPU

G10320/R120

G10321/R121

G12244/R6748

G12245/R6748

G12246/R6748

G12247/R6748

G12248/R6748

G12249/R6748

G12250/R6748

G12251/R6748

G12252/R6748

G12253/R6748

G12254/R6748

G13255/R6759

[DMOV]

[DMOV]

Tool data flag/status

Auxiliary data

Group No.

Tool No.

Life data

Usage data

Spindle tool No.

Standby tool No.

Use as life management and screen display data.

Use as screen display data.

The tool data corresponding to the spindle tool No. is output. Tool data can be referred to if the output tool No. coincides with the spindle tool No.

Status check, etc.

Standby tool number is set.

(Note) Note that the data handled in tool life management except for tool data flag/status is binary, while the data used in the D(P).ATC, such as search tool data and magazine tool No. in magazine, is BCD.

PLC CPU

The CNC searches for the tool data indicated by the T command data. The searched tool data is set in G12220-G12231/R6724-R6735.

When magazine is indexed according to the read tool No. and new tool is mounted on the spindle, tool No. of the new tool is set in G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721.

Status check, etc.

Tool data flag/status

Auxiliary data

T command data (BCD data)

Group No.

Tool No.

Life data

Usage data

Tool length compensation

amount

T command

Tool radius compensation

amount

Tool length compensation

amount

Tool radius compensation

amount

Spare tool selection process

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

399

5.3.10 User PLC Processing

A PLC processing example when tool change is made by the T command is given below:

YES

NO

YES NO

YES NO

START

Is tool available?

Index magazine according to tool No. in the read tool data.

Index up magazine according to the G10320/R120 contents.

Change tool (mount new tool on spindle)

Set the tool No. of the tool mounted on the spindle G11450 -G11451/R6720-R6721.

Turn ON auxiliary function completion signal(Y71E).

Error processing

The control method varies depending on whether or not life management is selected.

The tool status and tool No. are checked to see if the tool can be used.

Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

Desired tool (magazine) is indexed.

Set the tool No. of the new tool mounted on the spindle in G11450-G11451/R6720-R6721. Seeing a change in the G11450-G11451 /R6720-R6721 contents, CNC outputs the life management tool data corresponding to the tool No. G12244-G12255/R6748-R6759 and starts life management at the same time.

The completion signal when life management is selected is turned ON after the spindle tool No. is set in G11450-G11451 /R6720-R6721.

Is life management valid? (X62B)

Tool function command executed?

(X650)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

400

5.3.11 Interface with PLC

[Function]

This signal is output during the tool life management.

[Operation]

"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is

ON.

[Function]

This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data Life data).

This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data life data). (Same timing as the count up

of usage data.)

(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.

(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe

1 (TF1n)" signal.)

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the

signal will remain ON.)

(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)

[Caution]

If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.

(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

CNC -> PLC interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1

A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1

A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

401

Standby tool data

Active tool data

1st part system Name Details

G12220/R6724 SPARE TOOL: GROUP NO. This is the SPARE TOOL spare tool's group No.

G12221/R6725

G12222/R6726 SPARE TOOL: TOOL NO. This is the spare tool's tool No.

G12223/R6727

G12224/R6728 SPARE TOOL: TOOL DATA

FLAG/STATUS This is the spare tool's flag/status.

G12225/R6729 SPARE TOOL: AUXILIARY

DATA This is the spare tool's auxiliary data.

G12226/R6730 SPARE TOOL: LIFE DATA This is the spare tool's life data.

G12227/R6731 SPARE TOOL: USAGE DATA This is the spare tool's usage data.

G12228/R6732 SPARE TOOL: LENGTH COMPENSATION AMOUNT

This is the spare tool's tool length compensation amount. G12229/R6733

G12230/R6734 SPARE TOOL: RADIUS COMPENSATION AMOUNT

This is the spare tool's tool radius compensation amount. G12231/R6735

1st part system Name Details

G12244/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: GROUP NO. This is the active tool's group No.

G12245/R6748

G12246/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: TOOL NO. This is the active tool's tool No.

G12247/R6748

G12248/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: TOOL DATA

FLAG/STATUS This is the active tool's flag/status.

G12249/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: AUXILIARY

DATA This is the active tool's auxiliary data.

G12250/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: LIFE DATA This is the active tool's life data.

G12251/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: USAGE DATA This is the active tool's usage data.

G12252/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: LENGTH COMPENSATION AMOUNT

This is the active tool's tool length compensation amount. G12253/R6748

G12254/R6748 ACTIVE TOOL: RADIUS COMPENSATION AMOUNT

This is the active tool's tool radius compensation amount. G12255/R6759

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

402

Spindle/Standby tool Nos.

[Function]

This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.

This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool

alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool

skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.

(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is

designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is

selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal

is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group

is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be

carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected

needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected

due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal

input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation

request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

[Function]

This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 4 (a tool of Tool alarm 2).

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "4" (a tool of

Tool alarm 2).

This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

See "4.19.11 Interface with PLC" for details.

1st part system Name Details

G11450/R6720 T LIFE MGMT SPINDLE TOOL NO.

This is the active spindle tool No. G11451/R6721

G11452/R6722 T LIFE MGMT STANDBY TOOL NO.

This is the standby tool No. G11453/R6723

PLC -> CNC interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL ALARM 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL ALARM 2 TAL2n Y789 Y869 Y949 YA29 YB09 YBE9 YCC9

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.3 Tool Life Management (M System)

403

[Function]

This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management

specification.

This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management

specification.

[Function]

This signal validates the tool life management.

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, the tool life management process is executed.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

B Con-

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT IN-

PUT TLF1n Y78B Y86B Y94B YA2B YB0B YBEB YCCB

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

404

[Function]

The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool

life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]

The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)

Y (Axis)

Y (Part system)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA-

TION

G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930

R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

PLC -> CNC interface signal

1st part system

Signal abbreviatio

n Name Details

Y409 AMLK1 Automatic machine lock 1st axis

While this signal is being received, the tool life management is not performed.

Y439 AMLK2 Automatic machine lock 2nd axis

Y469 AMLK3 Automatic machine lock 3rd axis

Y499 AMLK4 Automatic machine lock 4th axis

Y4C9 AMLK5 Automatic machine lock 5th axis

Y4F9 AMLK6 Automatic machine lock 6th axis

Y529 AMLK7 Automatic machine lock 7th axis

Y559 AMLK8 Automatic machine lock 8th axis

1st part system

Signal abbreviation

Name Details

Y712 SBKn Single block While this signal is being received, the tool life management is not performed.

Y715 DRNn Dry run

Y75A AFLn Miscellaneous function lock

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.4 Tool Life Management (L System)

405

5.4 Tool Life Management (L System) The tool life is managed based on usage time and usage count of tools.

5.4.1 Interface with PLC

[Function]

This signal is output during the tool life management.

[Operation]

"In tool life management" (TLFOn) signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is

ON.

[Function]

This signal notifies that tool usage data (per tool) have reached to its lifetime (Usage data Life data).

This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the controller, etc., will not stop.

This signal turns ON when the usage data of the tool matches or exceeds the life data. Note that this signal is only

output, and the automatic operation of the CNC, etc., will not stop.

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The final tool of the group current selected has reached the life (usage data life data). (Same timing as the count up

of usage data.)

(2) When "Tool skip (TAL1n)" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the currently selected group.

(3) If a group is selected, when the lives of all tools in the group have reached the life. (Same timing as "T function strobe

1 (TF1n)" signal.)

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When the group selection has been completed. (At T command. Note that if the selected group is a life group, the

signal will remain ON.)

(2) When usage data of currently selected group is cleared. (When "Tool change reset (TRSTn)" signal is input, etc.)

[Caution]

If this signal is used for M system tool life management II, refer to this signal 30ms after the spindle tool was replaced.

(This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was replaced.)

CNC -> PLC interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT TLFOn X62B X6AB X72B X7AB X82B X8AB X92B

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL LIFE OVER TLOVn X62E X6AE X72E X7AE X82E X8AE X92E

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

406

[Function]

This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in the group is selected in the tool life management II.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The tool selected by T command tool selection is unused (status 0).

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When T command is completed due to the M function finish signal (FIN1,FIN2).

[Function] [Operation]

This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.

[Function] [Operation]

This signal output usage data of tools currently being used with the tool life management II. (When multiple

compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A NEW TOOL CHANGE TCRQn X64C X6CC X74C X7CC X84C X8CC X94C

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- GROUP IN LIFE MANAGEMENT G10338 G10438 G10538 G10638 G10738 G10838 G10938

R138 R238 R338 R438 R538 R638 R738

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA

G10344 - G10345

G10444 - G10445

G10544 - G10545

G10644 - G10645

G10744 - G10745

G10844 - G10845

G10944 - G10945

R144 - R145

R244 - R245

R344 - R345

R444 - R445

R544 - R545

R644 - R645

R744 - R745

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.4 Tool Life Management (L System)

407

[Function]

This signal is used when the tool in which life has not been reached is attempted to change compulsorily.

This signal sets the tool status during tool life management to 3.

[Operation]

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3"(a tool of Tool

alarm 1). This signal is validated when tool life management input (TLF1n) signal is ON.

By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3" (a tool of tool

skip), and the tool is handled in the same manner as life tool.

(1) The group No. to which the tool, which is attempted to change status by the sequence program, belongs is

designated ("Tool group No. designation" signal) and "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON. When the group is

selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(2) When "Tool skip 1" (TAL) signal is turned ON without designating the group No. ("Tool group No. designation" signal

is "0"), the group No. which has been selected at that time is considered to have been designated. When the group

is selected next time, a new tool in the group is selected.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be

carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected

needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.However, a tool may not be selected

due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal

input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation

request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the group.

[Function]

This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.

[Operation]

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life management

specification.

This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (TLF1n) is ON.

The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life management

specification.

PLC -> CNC interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1 TAL1n Y788 Y868 Y948 YA28 YB08 YBE8 YCC8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEFn Y78A Y86A Y94A YA2A YB0A YBEA YCCA

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

408

[Function]

This signal is used to clear all tool usage data in a group with the tool life management II.

[Operation]

Select with the tool group No. designation whether all groups that have exceeded their lifetimes or specific group to be

cleared.

After this signal is input, the first tool of the group will be selected at the next group selection.

(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage data count will be

carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection. Therefore, if a tool selected

needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again. However, a tool may not be selected

due to a preceding process if there is no movement command up to the next group selection after the signal

input. In this case, contents of the preceding process can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation

request" (CRQn) signal before selecting the group.

[Related signals]

(1) Recalculation request (CRQn:Y72B)

[Function]

The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded with the tool

life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.

[Operation]

The group designation range is as follows.For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.For all groups: 65535 (all 1)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

A TOOL CHANGE RESET TCRTn Y78C Y86C Y94C YA2C YB0C YBEC YCCC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNA-

TION

G+330 G+430 G+530 G+630 G+730 G+830 G+930

R2430 R2530 R2630 R2730 R2830 R2930 R3030

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.5 External Search

409

5.5 External Search External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program storage device,

program No., sequence No., block No. designated from the PLC CPU.

Flow of process for the external search (the 1st part system) is shown below.

[Operation]

(1) The PLC CPU sets the device, program No., sequence No., and block No.

(2) The PLC CPU sets the external search strobe signal ON.

(3) The CNC CPU searches for the target machining program from the designated device, program No., sequence No.,

and block No.

(4) The CNC CPU sets the search results as the external search status.

(5) The CNC CPU turns the external search finished signal ON.

(6) The PLC CPU turns the external search strobe signal OFF.

(7) The CNC CPU turns the external search finished signal OFF.

Details

CNC CPU

G+361/R2461 G+362/R2462 G+363/R2463 G+364/R2464 G+365/R2465 G+366/R2466 G+367/R2467

G10300/R100

(3)

(4)

(5)

(7)

(2)

(6)

(1)

Device No.

Program No.

Block No.

Sequence No.

External search status

PLC CPU

Set the device No.

Set the program No.

Set the sequence No.

Set the block No.

Set search result

Search process execution

Check with error check, etc

External search finished signal

ETSEn (X61D) ON

External search strobe signal

EXTSSn (Y71D) ON

External search finished signal

ETSEn (X61D) OFF

External search strobe signal

EXTSSn (Y71D) OFF

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

410

(1) External search finished (ETSFn:X61D)

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.

This signal turns OFF when the "external search strobe" signal is turned OFF from the PLC CPU.

(2) External search status (G10300/R100)

The status at the end of the external search is output.

Refer to "External search status" for the details on status value.

CNC CPU PLC CPU Interface signals

Signal name Part system No.

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED X61D X69D X71D X79D X81D X89D X91D

EXTERNAL SEARCH STATUS G10300 G10400 G10500 G10600 G10700 G10800 G10900

R100 R200 R300 R400 R500 R600 R700

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.5 External Search

411

(1) External search device No. (G+361/R2461)

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No. Be sure to set 0 for this CNC.

An error occurs if any No. except "0" is set. (Status: 3)

(2) External search program No. (G+362/R2462, G+363/R2463)

Designate the program No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.

The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (8 digits).

(3) External search sequence No. (G+364/R2464, G+365/R2465)

Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.

The setting range is 1 to 99999 (5 digits).

(4) External search block No. (G+366/R2466, G+367/R2467)

Designate the block No. as a binary.

The setting range is 0 to 99 (2 digits).

(5) External search strobe (EXTSSn:Y71D)

The CNC CPU starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.

PLC CPU CNC CPU Interface signals

Signal name Part system No.

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE NO.

G+361 G+461 G+561 G+661 G+761 G+861 G+961

R2461 R2561 R2661 R2761 R2861 R2961 R3061

EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM NO.

G+362 - G+363

G+462 - G+463

G+562 - G+563

G+662 - G+663

G+762 - G+763

G+862 - G+863

G+962 - G+963

R2462 - R2463

R2562 - R2563

R2662 - R2663

R2762 - R2763

R2862 - R2863

R2962 - R2963

R3062 - R3063

EXTERNAL SEARCH SEQUENCE NO.

G+364 - G+365

G+464 - G+465

G+564 - G+565

G+664 - G+665

G+764 - G+765

G+864 - G+865

G+964 - G+965

R2464 - R2465

R2564 - R2565

R2664 - R2665

R2764 - R2765

R2864 - R2865

R2964 - R2965

R3064 - R3065

EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO.

G+366 - G+367

G+466 - G+467

G+566 - G+567

G+666 - G+667

G+766 - G+767

G+866 - G+867

G+966 - G+967

R2466 - R2467

R2566 - R2567

R2666 - R2667

R2766 - R2767

R2866 - R2867

R2966 - R2967

R3066 - R3067

EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE Y71D Y7FD Y8DD Y9BD YA9D YB7D YC5D

Device No. Device

0 Memory

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

412

The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the operation search blocks are shown below.

The designated block No. is added to the operation search block No. which is searched by operation search.

(Example)If program No. 100, sequence No. 300 and block No. 2 are designated, operation search is executed for the

block underlined.

O100()

N0100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;

M3 S1000;

N0200 G0 Z100.;

G0 X100. Y0.;

N0300 G01 Z50. F1000;

G01 Y10.;

G01 Z0. F100; ......... (*)

G00 Z50.

N0400 G0 Z100.;

M30;

(Note) The block No. is designated with the number of blocks following the last sequence No.

Condition Operation search block

Program No. Sequence No.

Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program

Designated Not designated (=0) Head of designated program

Not designated (=0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program

Not designated (=0) Not designated (=0) Error: 4 (Refer to "External search status")

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.5 External Search

413

The timing chart for the external search is shown below.

(Note 1) Retain the external search strobe until external search finished signal is turned ON.

(Note 2) Refer to external search status to confirm that the operation search has successfully completed.

Timing chart

External search strobe (PLC CPUCNC CPU)

External search being executed (CNC CPU)

External search completed (CNC CPUPLC CPU)

External search status (CNC CPUPLC CPU)

Block information (Note) (PLC CPUCNC CPU)

Referable

(Note) Block information includes program No., sequence No. and block No.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

414

The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the CNC CPU based on the external

search is shown below.

(Note) Timeout monitoring is executed only when "1" is set to "#21102 add02/bit1".

(1) If the external search strobe is OFF at the time when CNC CPU completes the external search, the external search

finished signal ON may not be confirmed by PLC CPU.

Do not turn OFF the external search strobe signal until the external search finished signal is turned ON.

(2) Set program No., sequence No. and block No. before turning ON the external search strobe signal.

Do not change the Nos. until the external search finished signal is turned ON.

(3) External search status can only be referred when the external search finished signal is ON.

(4) Execution of external search during resetting is possible.

External search status

External search status value

Details Remedy

0 Normally finished.

1 Operation search is being carried out. Wait for other function's operation search to finish before searching.

2 Search was attempted during the program operation. Stop the program before searching.

3 A non-existed or disabled device was designated. Confirm the presence of the device, and that the device is within the specifications.

4 The program file is not designated. Designate the program No. or sequence No.

5 The block with the designated program No., sequence No. or block No. was not found.

6 No external search specifications Check the specifications.

7 The operation search did not yet finished after three seconds since the external search had started. (Note)

Data may be being input or output. Restart the external search after finishing the operation.

Precautions

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.5 External Search

415

An example of the external search ladder for the 1st part system is shown below.

(Example) Executes the operation search for the block O100 N1 B0 in CNC CPU mounted in slot 0.

(Note) Bit devices (Y71D/X61D) in the program example are set on the premise that the transfer corresponds to the

device Nos. of CNC interface.

Assignment of device Nos. may change the details of the program.

Usage example

M8001

M8000

X61D

Y71D

M8001

Y71D

X61D

PLS M8001

External search start pulse

MOV K0 U3E0\G10361 Set external search device No.

DMOV K100 U3E0\G10362 Set external search program No. (0100)

DMOV K1 U3E0\G10364 Set external search sequence No. (N1)

DMOV K0 U3E0\G10366 Set external search block No. (B0)

Turn external search strobe signal ON

External search start signal

External search start pulse

External search finished signal

MOV U3E1\G10300 D100 Retrieve external search status

External search finished signal

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

416

5.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the G

device for each axis.

Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC CPU rewrites G device compensation data. Necessary condition, timing,

etc., are set by PLC CPU.

The interface between PLC CPU and CNC is shown below.

(Note 1) File register Nos. correspond to CNC.

(Note 2) The delay to compensation is about (one PLC program scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and

servo follow delay are not contained.

G device Details G device Details

File register File register

G+1000 Compensation data 1st axis

G+1080 Compensation data 9th axis

R3100 R3180

G+1010 Compensation data 2nd axis

G+1090 Compensation data 10th axis

R3110 R3190

G+1020 Compensation data 3rd axis

G+1100 Compensation data 11th axis

R3120 R3200

G+1030 Compensation data 4th axis

G+1110 Compensation data 12th axis

R3130 R3210

G+1040 Compensation data 5th axis

G+1120 Compensation data 13th axis

R3140 R3220

G+1050 Compensation data 6th axis

G+1130 Compensation data 14th axis

R3150 R3230

G+1060 Compensation data 7th axis

G+1140 Compensation data 15th axis

R3160 R3240

G+1070 Compensation data 8th axis

G+1150 Compensation data 16th axis

R3170 R3250

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

417

5.7 Safety Observing 5.7.1 CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

[Function

This signal informs the CNC side dual signal input status of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

These devices are the copies of the data X200 to X25F, made by CNCs internal processing.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

MODULE m SU_NC m

G12470 - G12475

R2150 - R2155

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module input 00 CNC side dual signal module input 01

CNC side dual signal module input 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module input 10 CNC side dual signal module input 11

CNC side dual signal module input 1F

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

418

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status of "CNC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module. The signal turned

ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

ERROR MODULE m SU_NER m

G12480 - G12485

R2160 - R2165

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module error 00 CNC side dual signal module error 01

CNC side dual signal module error 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module error 10 CNC side dual signal module error 11

CNC side dual signal module error 1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

419

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module 1 to 3.

[Operation

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

These signals are the copies of the output signals Y200 to Y25F, made by CNCs internal processing.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status between CNC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal

module.

The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

OUTPUT MODULE m SU_NO m

G12490 - G12492

R2170 - R2172

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m SU_NOER

m

G12494 - G12496

R2174- - R2176

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output 0A CNC side dual signal module output 0B

CNC side dual signal module output 0F

CNC side dual signal module output 1A CNC side dual signal module output 1B

CNC side dual signal module output 1F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side dual signal module output error 0A CNC side dual signal module output error 0B

CNC side dual signal module output error 0F

CNC side dual signal module output error 1A CNC side dual signal module output error 1B

CNC side dual signal module output error 1F

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

420

[Function]

This signal informs CNC side dual signal compare status to the PLC.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.

bit1: Device test error detection 2

An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.

[Caution]

This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual

signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.

[Operation]

To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check

each other.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS 2 SU_NST2

G12499

R2179

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMA- SU_NLT

G12500

R2180

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Output off check error Device test error detection 2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

421

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal comparison status.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitorting only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the CNC side dual signal head G device No.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

COMPARE STATUS SU_NST

G12501

R2181

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV G12502

R2182

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOW- ANCE TIME

SU_NDLY G12503

R2183

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

CNC side emergency stop status CNC side dual signal module input compare error CNC side counterparts signal compare stop detected CNC side dual signal module data error detected CNC side dual signal module output FB compare error CNC side compare process start CNC side compare process stopping PLC side compare process stopping Servo ready ON Dual Signal Module compare ladder check normal

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

422

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1 to #21145 SSU_Dev3.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC of the number of dual signal modules.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

HEAD DEVICE NO. m SU_NDV m

G12504 - G12506

R2184 - R2186

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL UNITS

ON CNC SIDE SU_NNUM

G12508

R2188

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

423

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal input status of the dual signal modules.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU Interface signals

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

MODULE m SU_PC m

G+2580 - G+2585

R4450 - R4455

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module input 00 PLC side dual signal module input 01

PLC side dual signal module input 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module input 10 PLC side dual signal module input 11

PLC side dual signal module input 1F

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

424

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status of "PLC side dual signal input" in the dual signal module.The signal turned ON

once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

ERROR MODULE m SU_PER m

G+2590 - G+2595

R4460 - R4465

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module error 00 PLC side dual signal module error 01

PLC side dual signal module error 0F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module error 10 PLC side dual signal module error 11

PLC side dual signal module error 1F

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

425

[Function]

This signal informs the PLC side dual signal output status of the dual signal module.

[Operation

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the comparison status between PLC side dual signal output and its input signal of the dual signal

module. The signal turned ON once holds the state until the controller power is turned ON again.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals. If this signal is ON, a corresponding signal bit turns ON.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

OUTPUT MODULE m SU_PO m

G+2600 - G+2602

R4470 - R4472

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL

OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m SU_POER

m

G+2604 - G+2606

R4474 - R4476

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

PLC side dual signal module output 0A PLC side dual signal module output 0B

PLC side dual signal module output 0F

PLC side dual signal module output 1A PLC side dual signal module output 1B

PLC side dual signal module output 1F

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side dual signal module output error 0A PLC side dual signal module output error 0B

PLC side dual signal module output error 0F

PLC side dual signal module output error 1A PLC side dual signal module output error 1B

PLC side dual signal module output error 1F

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

426

[Function]

This signal informs PLC side dual signal compare status to the CNC.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals:

bit0: Output off check error

An error is detected during the output off check.

bit1: Device test error detection 2

An error is detected during the check pattern 2 for the device test.

[Caution]

This device is dedicated to the monitor. Do not change the device value with PLC program. If it is changed, the dual

signal compare ladder will not be executed correctly.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison activity check counter.

[Operation

To ensure that dual signal comparison is constantly done between the CNC and PLC CPUs, they perform activity check

each other.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the PLC side dual signal comparison status.

[Operation]

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS 2 SU_PST2

G+2609

R4479

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMA-

TION SU_PLT

G+2610

R4480

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM-

PARE STATUS SU_PST

G+2611

R4481

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

PLC side emergency stop status PLC side dual signal module input compare error PLC side counterparts signal compare stop detected PLC side dual signal module output FB compare error PLC side compare process start

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.7 Safety Observing

427

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head G device No. that has been transmitted to the PLC.

This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter " #26742 G Device TOP number" is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal comparison mismatch allowance time of the dual signal module, which

has been transmitted to the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The value set by the parameter "#21142 SSU_Delay " is normally set.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the dual signal head device No. of the dual signal module, which has been transmitted to

the PLC. This is for confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The PLC is informed of the value set by the parameters "#21143 SSU_Dev1 to #21145 SSU_Dev3.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the number of dual signal modules, which has been transmitted to the PLC.This is for

confirming that data has been correctly transmitted to the PLC.

[Operation]

The CNC is informed of the value set by the parameter "#21125 SSU_num.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. SU_NGDV G+2612

R4482

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COM- PARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE SU_PDLY

G+2613

R4483

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD

DEVICE NO. m SU_PDV m

G+2614 - G+2616

R4484- - R4486

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULE

ON PLC SIDE SU_PNUM

G+2618

R4488

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

428

[Function]

This signal informs the CNC of the safety-related operation status that has been set by PLC side user ladder when dual

signal comparison function is valid.

[Operation]

The CNC is informed of the safety-related operation status devices (M0 to M15) that have been set by PLCside user

ladder.

Each bit corresponds to the following signals.

[Caution]

This device is for monitoring only. Do not change the device by user ladder. The comparison ladder is not correctly

executed when changing.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal abbreviation

Common for part systems

- PLC SIDE SAFETY OPERATION

STATUS SU_POP

G+2620

R4490

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

M0 CNC emergency stop request M1 User safety status signal 1 M2 User safety status signal 2

M15 User safety status signal 15

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

429

5.8 GOT Window GOT window interface is for displaying various NC data on GOT1000 that is connected to CNC CPU.

By commanding device read instruction, GOT can read data such as current machining program No., current machining

program and coordinate value.

Set a command to CNC CPU using GOT or PLC I/F command. Also create data that corresponds to the command on

CNC CPU side.

As the area of up to ten commands is available, up to ten commands can be designated at a same time.

The group of commands which are frequently used can be automatically set at the power ON, and it is available to refer

to the CNC data without programming. (Automatic setup window)

Data displayed How to obtain these data

Current program Using command code: 0xF01

Main/Sub/O/N number Using command code: 0xF02

F command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02

S command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02

T command (modal) Using command code: 0xF02

Machine position Using command code: 0xF03

Remaining distance Using command code: 0xF03

S 6000 500F T 5

X 110.000

120.000

130.000

Y

Z

X 110.000

120.000

130.000

Y

Z

N100G91G28X0.Y0.Z0.; N110G00X-150.Y-200.; N120G00Z-500.; N130G01Z-50.F500.; N140G00Z50.; N150G00X50.Y50.; N160G00-Z50.F500.;

1 100O N 1 100O N

01 02

GOT

Current program

Main program Sub program

Machine position Remaining position

Spindle tool

Standby tool

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

430

5.8.1 GOT Window Interface

Assign command area to the devices from U3En\G11460 (the CNC No. 2 is from U3En\G14532) and response area to

the devices from D5600 to D6879 (devices in CNC). Designated data is set in command area, using PLC I/F command.

And then, CNC will store the designated data in response area, and this data can be read and displayed on GOT as

needed.

Maximum of ten sets of window areas have been assigned. So, up to ten types of command can be designated at a time.

(Note 1) The head address for CNC CPU No.3 changes depending on the value set for "#26742".

Refer to the table in "Command area and response area" for the relationship between the parameter and the

address.

Outline

GOT

D5600 D5728

D6752

D5600 D5728

D6752

#26741 = 10000 #26741 = 13072

Issue command

Set command in command area.

The devices shared between multi-CPU

No. 1 PLC CPU

No. 2 CNC CPU (No. 1)

No. 3 CNC CPU (No. 2)

Process window

Process window

\G11460 \G11524

\G12036

\G10290 Data modification request

U3E0\G10000 (No. 2 head)

\G14532 Command 1 Command 2

Command 10

Command 1 Command 2

Command 10

\G14596

\G15108

\G13362 Data modification request

U3E0\G13072 (No. 3 head)

Response 1 Response 2

Response 10

Response 1 Response 2

Response 10

Display CNC No. 1

Display CNC No. 2

Read and display the data from CNC CPU response area (from D5600).

CNC parameter CNC parameter

command area

command area

Sequence program

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

431

Automatic setting window is a GOT window that can automatically set frequently-used command group when the power

is turned ON and the CNC data can be referred without programming.

The response data will be stored in the window response area accodance with the command that is automatically set.

Some of the commands can change the acquiring data by changing the argument. The command's argument can be

changed by both GOT and PLC program.

As the automatic setting window is assigned to the different area from the 10 sets of window previously mentioned, GOT

window and automatic setting window can be used in combination.

Refer to "Automatic setting window" section about the automatic setting window.

(Note 1) The head address for CNC CPU No.3 changes depending on the value set for "#26742".

Refer to the table in "Command area and response area" for the relationship between the parameter and the

address.

D6880 D7008

D8032

D6880 D7008

D8032

GOT

#26741 = 10000 #26741 = 13072

R4416 R4417

R4422

R4416 R4417

R4422

GOT GOT

Sequence program

Command argument change

Automatic setting window modification interface

Automatic setting window modification interface

The devices shared between multi-CPU

No. 1 PLC CPU

No. 2 CNC CPU (No. 1)

No. 3 CNC CPU (No. 2)

Automatic setting window process

\G10270 Coordinate value type data type

BitE: Modification request

\G10271

\G10291

U3E0\G10000 (No. 2 head)

\G13342 Coordinate value type data type

BitE: Modification request

\G13343

\G13363

U3E0\G13072 (No. 3 head)

Response 1 Response 2

Response 10

Response 1 Response 2

Response 10

Display CNC No. 1

Display CNC No. 2

Store the command argument from GOT to CNC R4416 onwards or to U3E0/G10270 (for CNC No.2 U3E0/G13342 onwards) using the PLC program, and make modification request. Read and display the data from CNC CPU response area.

CNC parameter CNC parameter

Automatic setting window process

Coordinate value type data type

Modification request

Coordinate value type data type

Modification request

Automatic setting window modification interface

Automatic setting window modification interface

: :

: :

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

432

There are ten sets each of command areas and response areas.

64 words are used for one command in the command area, and 128 words are used for one response in the response

area.

Command area is assigned to the devices shared between multi-CPU (G device). Writing command to the command

area is done by PLC program.

The response area is assigned to the D device in the CNC CPU. The response area (CNC CPU device) is monitored by

GOT.

Command area and response area

Command area Response

Item CPU No.1 CPU No.2

Items Devise Setting value for

parameter "#26742" 10000

When "13072" is set

When "14000" is set

Head device U3E0\

G10000 U3E0\

G13072 U3E0\

G14000

Window command 1 G11460 G14532 G15460 Window response 1 D5600

Window command 2 G11524 G14596 G15524 Window response 2 D5728

Window command 3 G11588 G14660 G15588 Window response 3 D5856

Window command 4 G11652 G14724 G15652 Window response 4 D5984

Window command 5 G11716 G14788 G15716 Window response 5 D6112

Window command 6 G11780 G14852 G15780 Window response 6 D6240

Window command 7 G11844 G14916 G15844 Window response 7 D6368

Window command 8 G11908 G14980 G15908 Window response 8 D6496

Window command 9 G11972 G15044 G15972 Window response 9 D6624

Window command 10 G12036 G15108 G16036 Window response 10 D6752

*G11460 is the top of command area for the first CNC CPU. If there are two CNC CPUs, the command area for the second CPU will change depending on the value set for "#26742".

* When referring the response area (CNC CPU's device) from GOT drawing data, make sure to designate the CNC No. (2 to 4) to refer to in the CNC No. setting field. If "0" (host CNC) is designated, it may monitor the CNC which is not intended to do so depending on the connection state of GOT.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

433

5.8.2 How to Obtain Window Data

In order for GOT to obtain NC data, firstly set necessary command in command area. And then, turn Data changeover

request signal ON.

When NC has received Data changeover request signal and finished the data changeover, Data changeover completion

signal will be turned ON.

Once Data changeover request signal is turned ON, NC will continuously create data until Data changeover request

signal is turned ON next time.

There are ten Data changeover request signals, which correspond to Window 1 through 10.

- When the command is changed, GOT cannot obtain the response data for modified command until the data

changeover completion signal is turned ON.

- When the command is not changed, turn ON the data changeover request signal only once with PLC program.

Subsequent response area will be constantly updated.

Procedure

Command setting (Ladder -> CNC)

Data changeover request (Ladder -> CNC)

Data changeover completion (CNC -> Ladder)

Data acquisition (Process of GOT)

Write command and argument into command area using ladder. And then, turn Data changeover request signal ON.

GOT reads out devices from response area.

NC receives Data changeover request signal, and refreshes data in response area. After that, turn Data changeover completion signal ON.

In response to Data changeover completion signal, ladder turns OFF Data changeover request signal.

NC continuously creates data that corresponds to designated command, and store them in response area.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

434

[Function]

This signal notices that necessary command is set in command area.

[Operation]

Turns ON when command data is changed.

(R2391/bitF is handled as window valid signal.)

[Function]

This signal notices that data changeover is completed.

[Operation]

Turns ON when data changeover is completed.Turns OFF when Data changeover request signal is turned OFF.

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU Interface signals

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE-

OVER REQUEST

G+290 - G+291

R2390 - R2391

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU Interface signals

Contact Signal name Signalab- breviation

Common for part systems

- GOT WINDOW DATACHANGE-

OVER COMPLETION

G10290 - G10291

R90 - R91

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

Data changeover request for Window 1 Data changeover request for Window 2

Data changeover request for Window 10

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Window valid

Automatic setting window data change request

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit

Data changeover completion for Window 1 Data changeover completion for Window 2

Data changeover completion for Window 10

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Automatic setting window data change request

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

435

Ten fixed sets of window command areas are used.

(Note 1) Offset is described in the word unit.

Ten fixed sets of window response areas are used.

(Note 1) Offset is described in the word unit.

Window command

Offset Description Note

Window 1

+0 Data size The number of bytes from the command code to the end of the argument

+1 Reserve

+2 Command code Command code to use

+3 Reserve

+4 to +63 Argument 1 to Argument 30

Configuration of the argument is different depending on the function

Window 2

+64 Data size The number of bytes from the command code to the end of the argument

+65 Reserve

+66 Command code Command code to use

+67 Reserve

+68 to +125 Argument 1 to Argument 30

Configuration of the argument is different depending on the function

Command code Description

0xF01 Get the current program with designating the format

0xF02 Get all modal information

0xF03 Get all axes' coordinate values

0xF04 Get the alarm message currently occurring

0xF05 Get the alarm history information

Window response

Offset Description Note

Window 1

+0 Data size The number of bytes from the command code to the end of the argument

+1 Reserve

+2 Command code Command code to use

+3 Reserve

+4 , +5 Error code 0: No error Other than 0: Error

+6 to +127 Response (122 words) Configuration of the response is different depending on the function

Window 2

+128 Data size The number of bytes from the command code to the end of the argument

+129 Reserve

+130 Command code Command code to use

+131 Reserve

+132 , +133 Error code 0: No error Other than 0: Error

+134 to +255 Response (122 words) Configuration of the response is different depending on the function

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

436

5.8.3 Details of Command

Get the current program.

Example type 1:(Not to line-wrap the current program)

(Note 1) Offset is described in word unit.

(Note 2) Make sure the total number of characters ("the number of lines in program to be obtained" * "the number of

characters in one line") is within 240.

(Note 3) The block currently executed is always output from the 2nd line. A space (0x20) will be output for a blank

block. Thus, if not in operation, a space (0x20) will be output for the 1st and 2nd lines.

(Note 4) The number of characters which is designated with the argument 3 are output for one block before the

currently executed block (the 1st line). It is output from the head of the block. It does not line-wrap.

(Note 5) The values for the argument 2 "the number of lines in a program to get" and the argument 3 "the number of

characters in one line" should fit the actual GOT display area. Otherwise it will not be displayed correctly.

Command code 0x0F01

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 16

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F01 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

1: 1st part system Setting range: 1 to 7 (When 0 is set, it is handled as 1st part system.)

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the number of lines in a program to get.(Note 5)

5 Setting range: 1 to 10

8, 9 Argument 3: Designate the number of characters per line.(Note 5)

16 Setting range: 1 to 240

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 92 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F01 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6, 7 Status 1 0: Not in operation 1: In operation

8 to 15 Data in 1st line N01G90G28X0.Y0.Z (Note 4)

16 to 23 Data in 2nd line N02G00X-123.456Y

24 to 31 Data in 3rd line N03M03S1000;

32 to 39 Data in 4th line N04G01Z-234.567F

40 to 47 Data in 5th line M30;

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

437

Example type 2:(Line-wrap the current program)

(Note 1) Offset is described in word unit.

(Note 2) Make sure the total number of characters (the number of lines in program to be obtained * the number of

characters in one line) is within 240.

(Note 3) The block currently executed is always output to the second line. A space (0x20) will be output for a blank

block. Thus, if not in operation, a space (0x20) will be output for the 1st and 2nd lines.

(Note 4) The number of characters which is designated with the argument 3 are output for one block before the

currently executed block (the 1st line). It is output from the head of the block. It does not line-wrap.

(Note 5) The values for the argument 2 "the number of lines in a program to get" and the argument 3 "the number of

characters in one line" should fit the actual GOT display area. Otherwise it will not be displayed correctly.

(Note 6) When the argument 4 is set to "1", from the program block currently executed is output with line-wrap. But it

might not be display till the end of the block (;).

(Note 7) For example, if the block currently executed is line-wrapped and displayed in 2 lines, the status will be output

as follows. The status can be used to differentiate the block currently executed by changing the display color.

The status output example described in the above shows that the program which is output in line 2 and 3 are

being executed.

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F01 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1 1: $1 (1st part system) 1 to 7: 1st to 7th part system

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the number of lines in a program to get. (Note 5)

5 Setting range: 1 to 10

8, 9 Argument 3: Designate the number of characters in a line.(Note 5)

16 Setting range: 1 to 240

10, 11 Argument 4: Designate the validation of line-wrapping.(Note 5)

1 0:Invalid 1:Valid

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 92 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F01 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6, 7 Status 0x0006

0: Not in operation 1: In operation It displays the operation status of each line for each bit. (Note 7)

8 to 15 Data in 1st line N01G90G28X0.Y0.Z (Note 4)

16 to 23 Data in 2nd line N02G00X-123.456Y (Note 6)

24 to 31 Data in 3rd line -123.456;

32 to 39 Data in 4th line N03M03S1000;

40 to 47 Data in 5th line N04G01Z-234.567F (Note 6)

BIT F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

Line position 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

438

Get all modal information.

Example

Offset is described in the word unit.

Offset is described in the word unit.

The F modal value will be without override.

NC alarm message language is set by the NC parameter "#1043 lang".

(Note) If the "#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

Command code 0x0F02

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 8

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F02 Designate melGetCurrentPrgPack

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

1: 1st part system Setting range: 1 to 7 (When 0 is set, it is handled as 1st part system.)

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 190 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F02 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6 to 9 S1 modal "1200 " S1 modal in 8 digits (ASCII) S1 is output regardless of part system

10 to 13 T modal "13 " T modal in 8 digits (ASCII)

14 to 18 F modal "1200.00 " FA modal in 10 digits (ASCII)

19 to 48 G modal

"01 17 91 94 " "21 40 49 80 " "98 54 64 67 " "97 50.1 43.1 "

G modal of each group (ASCII) One group is output in 4 characters

49 NC status 1 0 0: No alarm message 1: Alarm message

50 to 68 NC status 2 "LSK mm INC G40 G54"

When there isn't alarm message: ST1 to ST8 will be output in ASCII When there is alarm message: Message will be output in up to 33 characters

69 to 72 Main program No. "100 " Main program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)

73 to 76 Main sequence No. "110 " Main program sequence No. in 8 digits (ASCII)

77 to 80 Sub program No. "9990 " Sub program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)

81 to 84 Sub sequence No. "200 " Sub program sequence No. in 8 digits (ASCII)

85 to 88 S2 modal "2000 " S2 modal in 8 digits (ASCII) S2 is output regardless of part system

89 to 92 Current program No. "9990 " Current program No. in 8 digits (ASCII)

93 to 96 Sequence No. of the program currently executed

"200 " Sequence No. of the program currently executed in 8 digits (ASCII)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

439

Get all axes' coordinate values.

The part system No. and the axis No. of NC axis that the coordinate value is to be get can be designated. After getting

the coordinate value of NC axis, the coordinate values of all mounted PLC axes will be obtained. Designating the type of

coordinate value is valid for NC axis and PLC axis.

There are three types of response store methods - binary type, character string type, and extended character string type.

In binary type, the coordinate value can be obtained with two words signed numerical value. The unit is interpolation unit

(Note).

In character string type, it can be obtained with six words character string.

In extended character string type, it can be obtained with seven words character string. The axis state information, such

as the zero point arrival, is added to the character string.

There is no need to convert the unit for character string type and extended character string type. Select the type of

response with command "Argument4: Data type". See below for a store method of each data type.

(Note) Binary type is stored with interpolation unit.

When command unit is "1m", the interpolation unit is "0.5m". The value of response divided by 2 is the

coordinate value [m].

When command unit is "0.1m", the interpolation unit is "0.05m". The value of response divided by 2 is the

coordinate value[0.1m].

Example of getting the machine value(Getting in binary)

Designate "0:Binary type" to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset is described in the word unit

Command code 0x0F03

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

1: 1st part system Setting range: 1 to 7 (When 0 is set, it is handled as 1st part system.)

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 7

BIT0: 1st axis BIT1: 2nd axis If no axis is designated, all axes will be got.

8, 9 Argument 3: Designate the type of coordinate value

0

NC axis PLC axis

0 1 2

3

4

Machine value Current value Workpiece coordinate value Remaining commands Next command

Machine value No data obtained No data obtained

Remaining commands No data obtained

10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 0

0 : Binary type 1 : Character string type (ASCII) 2 : Extended character string type(ASCII)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

440

Designate "0:Binary type" to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register (0xFFFF9F8E (-024690))

(Note) Binary type is store with interpolation unit.

When command unit is "1m", the interpolation unit is "0.5m". The value of response devided by 2

is the coordinate value [m].

When command unit is "0.1m", the interpolation unit is "0.05m". The value of response devided by

2 is the coordinate value [0.1m].

- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be

returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)

- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC

axis is stored in later than offset 22. (Offset unit is word)

- The blank digits will be stored for the response area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to

acquire.

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 68 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F03 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6, 7 Coordinate value of 1st axis 20000 (0x4E20)

Up to 11 ASCII characters. Aligned to right, and if not all the prepared digits are used, spaces will fill the blank digits. The last character will always be space.

8, 9 Coordinate value of 2nd axis -24690 (0xFFFF9F8E)

10, 11 Coordinate value of 3rd axis 1000 (0x3E8)

12, 13 Coordinate value of 4th axis 0

14, 15 Coordinate value of 5th axis 0

16, 17 Coordinate value of 6th axis 0

18, 19 Coordinate value of 7th axis 0

20, 21 Coordinate value of 8th axis 0

22, 23 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value 6000 (0xBB8) Response example when there are five PLC axes.

24, 25 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value 1000 (0x3E8)

26, 27 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value 20000 (0x4E20)

28, 29 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value 150000 (0x249F0)

30, 31 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value 4000 (0xFA0)

32, 33 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value 0

34, 35 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value 0

36, 37 PLC axis 8th axis coordinate value 0

+0 9F8E

+1 FFFF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

441

Example of getting the machine value (Getting in the character string type)

Designate "1:Character string type (ASCII) to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset is described in the word unit

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

1: 1st part system Setting range: 1 to 7 (When 0 is set, it is handled as 1st part system.)

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 3

BIT0: 1st axis BIT1: 2nd axis If no axis is designated, all axes will be got.

8, 9 Argument 3: Designate the type of coordinate value

0

NC axis PLC axis

0 1 2

3

4

Machine value Current value Workpiece coordinate value Remaining commands Next command

Machine value No data obtained No data obtained

Remaining commands No data obtained

10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 1

0 : Binary type 1 : Character string type (ASCII) 2 : 2:Extended character string type(ASCII)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

442

Designate "1:Character string type (ASCII) to "Argument4: Data type".

Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register (-123.456)

- When the data type is character string type, the diameter value will be displayed for the diameter specification

axis.

- When the data type is character string type, "*" will be displayed if the coordinate value exceeds 8 digits. (e.g.)

*****.***

- When the data type is character string, unit conversion is not required.

- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be

returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)

- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC

axis is stored in later than offset 54.(Offset unit is word)

- The blank digits will be stored for the response area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to

acquire.

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 188 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F08 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6 to 11 Coordinate value of 1st axis " -12345.678 "

Up to 11 ASCII characters. Aligned to right, and if not all the prepared digits are used, spaces will fill the blank digits. The last character will always be space.

12 to 17 Coordinate value of 2nd axis " -12345.678 "

18 to 23 Coordinate value of 3rd axis " "

24 to 29 Coordinate value of 4th axis " "

30 to 35 Coordinate value of 5th axis " "

36 to 41 Coordinate value of 6th axis " "

42 to 47 Coordinate value of 7th axis " "

48 to 53 Coordinate value of 8th axis " "

54 to 59 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value " -12345.678 " Response example when there are five PLC axes.

60 to 65 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "

66 to 71 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "

72 to 77 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "

78 to 83 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value " -12345.678 "

84 to 89 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value " "

90 to 95 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value " "

96 to 101 PLC axis 8th axis coordinate value " "

bit15 ------------------------ bit8 bit7 ------------------------ bit0

+0 " " " "

+1 "-" " "

+2 "2" "1"

+3 "." "3"

+4 "5" "4"

+5 " " "6"

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

443

Example of getting the machine value (Getting in the extended character string type)

Designate "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" to "Argument 4

Offset is described in the word unit

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 20

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F03 Designate melGetAxisPosition

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

1: 1st part system Setting range: 1 to 7 (When 0 is set, it is handled as 1st part system.)

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the axis to get 3

BIT0: 1st axis BIT1: 2nd axis If no axis is designated, all axes will be got.

8, 9 Argument 3: Designate the type of coordinate value

0

NC axis PLC axis

0 1 2

3

4

Machine value Current value Workpiece coordinate value Remaining commands Next command

Machine value No data obtained No data obtained

Remaining commands No data obtained

10, 11 Argument 4: Data type 2

0 : Binary type 1 : Character string type (ASCII) 2 : Extended character string type(ASCII)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

444

Designate "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" to "Argument 4: Data type"

Offset is described in the word unit.

Example of how to store in the register(-123.456 #1)

Axis state when "2: Extended character string type (ASCII)" is designated as a data type is as follows:

1) Zero point arrival: #1, #2, #3, #4 (# is a zero point arrival No.)

2) Axis detachment: ><

3) Servo OFF: ][

4) Mirror image: MR

5) Others: (Space)

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 248 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F03 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6 to 13 Coordinate value of 1st axis "-12345.678 #1"

Maximum of 13 characters of ASCII Stored by right alignment and spaces will be inserted if there are not enough digits.

14 to 21 Coordinate value of 2nd axis "-12345.678 #2"

22 to 29 Coordinate value of 3rd axis " "

30 to 37 Coordinate value of 4th axis " "

38 to 45 Coordinate value of 5th axis " "

46 to 53 Coordinate value of 6th axis " "

54 to 61 Coordinate value of 7th axis " "

62 to 69 Coordinate value of 8th axis " "

70 to 77 PLC axis 1st axis coordinate value "-12345.678 ][" This is a response example when the PLC axes have 5 axes.

78 to 85 PLC axis 2nd axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "

86 to 93 PLC axis 3rd axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "

94 to 101 PLC axis 4th axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "

102 to 109 PLC axis 5th axis coordinate value "-12345.678 "

110 to 117 PLC axis 6th axis coordinate value " "

118 to 125 PLC axis 7th axis coordinate value " "

bit15 ------------------------ bit8 bit7 ------------------------ bit0

+0 " " " "

+1 "-" " "

+2 "2" "1"

+3 "." "3"

+4 "5" "4"

+5 " " "6"

+6 "1" "#"

+7 " " " "

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

445

- When the data type is character string type, the diameter value will be displayed for the diameter specification

axis.

- When the data type is character string type, "*" will be displayed if the coordinate value exceeds 8 digits. (e.g.)

*****.***

- When the data type is character string, unit conversion is not required.

- If the number of axes to get exceeds the number of axes actually connected to the NC, an error will be

returned. No coordinate values will be stored. (Including the data for axes actually connected.)

- Offset of response area which stores the coordinate value for each axis is fixed. The coordinate value of PLC

axis is stored in later than offset 70. (Offset unit is word)

- Space will be stored for theresponse area of an unset axis and an axis which is not eligible to acquire.

- The axis state which is eligible to acquire from PLC axis is only servo OFF.

- When the data type is extended character string type, the coordinate values for the PLC axis 8th axis cannot

be obtained.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

446

Get the currently occurring alarm messages. It is possible to designate how many messages to get (up to five). The

messages will be got in priority order.

The language of NC alarm/stop code will follow the NC parameter #1043 lang.

(Note) If the ""#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

Example

Offset is described in the word unit.

Offset is described in the word unit.

Command code 0x0F04

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 16

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F04 Designate melGetCurrentAlarmMsg2

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1: Designate the part system No.

1

0: All part systems 1: 1st part system 2: 2nd part system Setting range: 0 to 7

6, 7 Argument 2: Designate the number of messages to get

5 Setting range: 1 to 5

8, 9 Argument 3: Alarm type to get 0x7

bit0: NC alarm bit1: Stop code Bit2 :Macro alarm message Alarm message to which corresponding bit is ON is acquired.

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 252 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F04 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6 to 7 The number of messages got 2 The number of messages there were got. (The number of alarms currently occurring.)

8 to 10 Alarm code (1) 0x003300520700 Refer to the code list.

11 to 31 Alarm message (1) "S03 Servo alarm:PR 0052

XYZ $1" Aligned to left. In the blank area, spaces (0x20) will go in.

32 to 34 Alarm code (2) 0x000100000000

35 to 55 Alarm message (2) "EMG EXIN $1"

56 to 58 Alarm code (3) 0x000000000000 If there is no alarm, it will be 0.

59 to 79 Alarm message (3) NULL If there is no alarm, it will be NULL (0).

80 to 82 Alarm code (4) 0x000000000000

83 to 103 Alarm message (4) NULL

104 to 106 Alarm code (5) 0x000000000000

107 to 127 Alarm message (5) NULL

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

447

(1) Message format

NC alarm and stop codes will be in the following format.

Length of each message is fixed to 21 words (42 characters).

- NC alarm/Stop code

[When the error No.1 is 4 characters]

Message (20 characters)+sp+Error No. 1 (4 characters)+sp+ Error No. 2 (8 characters)+sp+$1 (2

characters)+sp (5 characters)

[When the error No.1 is 5 characters]

Message (20 characters)+sp+Error No.1(5 characters)+sp+Error No.2(7 characters)+sp+$1(2

characters)+sp(5 characters)

- Macro alarm message

Message (30 characters) + sp (2 characters) + No. (4 characters) + sp (6 characters)

(2) Alarm code

NC alarm and stop code that is displayed on the NC screen will be coded in three words.

(Note 1) The alarm message will not be changed into code.

(Note 2) When the alarm number is 5-digits, "10xxx" - "15xxx" are set in the alarm No. area as "Axxx" - "Fxxx", but it will

not be set correctly if the alarm No. is bigger than "16xxx".

(Note 3) If the alarm with no alarm No. occurs, the alarm No. area is set to "0".

(Note 4) If the alarm with no axis name occurs, the axis name area is set to "0".

(Note 5) The alarm not in the alarm code table occurs, it will not be set in the alarm code.

(Note 6) "xxx" of a program error "Pxxx" will be set in the alarm No. area.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

00000000 00110011 00000000 01010010 00000101 00000000

S03 Servo alarm:PR 0052 XZ

Axis name Alarm No. Alarm message Alarm type

PLC axis name Alarm type Alarm No. Spindle name

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

As for servo axis name, spindle name and PLC axis name, bit that corresponds with the axis with the alarm will be ON. When more than one axis has alarm, more than one bit will be ON.

Servo axis name

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

448

(3) List of alarm code

Alarm types and alarm Nos. are as follows.

The highest priority is on the alarm with the priority number 1.

Alarm Details Alarm type Axis name Priority

Multi-CPU error A01 MULTI CPU ERROR A1 Not added 1

System alarm

Z70 Z71 Z72 Z73 Z89 Z99

ABS. ILLEGAL DETECTOR ERROR COMPARE ERROR ABS. WARNING APLC ERROR FILE AREA ERROR

55 56 57 58 58 5C

Some are added 2

Servo/spindle alarm

S01 S02 S03 S04

SERVO ALARM: PR INIT PARAM ERR SERVO ALARM: NR SERVO ALARM: AR

31 32 33 36

Added 3

MCP alarm

Y02 Y03 Y06 Y07 Y09 Y11 Y14 Y20

System alarm Amp. Unequipped mcp_no setting error Too many axes connected Too many axisno connected Node detect error VIR.AX AMP EQU. Safety observation error

41 42 49 43 4A 4B 4F 4C

Some are added 4

Network related alarm

L10 L11 L12 L13

DN Initialization error 1 DN Initialization error 2 DN Link error DN Message error

B1 B2 B3 B4

Not added 5

Emergency stop EMG EMERGENC 01 Not added 6

Program error P

P990 (Program error) PREPRO S/W ERR

71 61

Not added 7

Servo/spindle warning S51 S52

PARAMETER ERROR SERVO WARNING

34 35

Added 8

MCP warning Y51 Y21 Y90

Parameter error Safety observation warning No spindle signal

45 4E 47

9

System warning

Z30 Z52 Z53 Z55 Z59 Z20

ETHERNET ERROR BATTERY FAULT TEMP_OVER RIO NOT CONNECT TIME CONSTANT Power ON again

51 52 53 54 59 5A

Not added 10

Operation error M01 M00 M01

OPERATION ERROR AUX OPER. ALM. AUX OPER. ALM.

11 81 82

Some are added Not added

Added 11

Stop code

T01 T02 T03 T10

CAN'T CYCLE ST FEED HOLD BLOCK STOP FIN WAIT

21 22 23 26

Not added 12

Illegal PLC U10 Built-in PLC alarm 91 Not added 13

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

449

Emergency stop messages are changed into codes as follows.

Get the current program with designating the format.

(1) Content of alarm history

- Get the alarm history information in the NC

- From among the history data that is displayed on the NC's "Operation history" screen, get the NC alarm history.

- In getting, history data is sorted in reverse chronological order

- In the NC, up to 168 alarms can be stored. If more alarms occur, older alarms will be deleted

- Stop code isn't stored in the operation history

- Of NC alarms, following alarms aren't stored in the operation history

M01 OPERATION ERROR 0004 (External interlock axis exists)

M01 OPERATION ERROR 0005 (Internal interlock axis exists)

M01 OPERATION ERROR 0109 (Block start interlock)

M01 OPERATION ERROR 0110 (Cutting block start interlock)

(2) Message format of alarm history

Length of each message is fixed to 60 characters.

Blanks in the message will be filled with space code.

Part system No. ($1, $2, etc) will be at the 38th and 39th characters in the message.

In the case of the system with one part system, part system No. will be sp+sp.

NC alarm message language is set by the NC parameter "#1043 lang".

(Note) If the ""#1043 lang" is Simplified Chinese, the messages are displayed in English.

(3) How to use

Get M history items from the Nth item from the latest item. (M= The number of items to get.) However, due to the

size limitation of the response area, how may items to get at a time is also limited.

Up to four items can be got at a time.

Thus, in order to get all the alarm history in the NC, it is necessary to get by up to 42 times.

Error message Details Alarm No.

Emergency stop (EMG)

EXIN External emergency stop 0000

PLC Built-in PLC emergency stop 0001

SRV Servo drive unit not ready 0002

STOP PLC not running 0003

SPIN Spindle drive unit not ready 0004

DATA File area error 0005

PARA Door open II fixed device setting illegal 0006

STP2 Built-in PLC not running 0007

LAD Built-in PLC illegal code 0010

MULT Q and Qr bus alarm 0013

IPWD Illegal power down 0014

CVIN PS external emergency stop 0015

MCT Contactor shutoff test 0016

SUIN Emergency stop in the safety circuit 0017

LINK Network unit error 0018

APLC Emergency stop is set from APLC function 0019

Command code 0x0F05

07/01/01 sp 13:59:02 sp P153 Compensation interference sp sp $1 sp sp sp Y/M/D H:M:S Message

8 1 8 1 42

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

450

Example

Offset is described in the word unit.

Offset is described in the word unit.

Offset Description Setting

example Note

0 Data size 12

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F05 Designate melGetAlarmHistory

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Argument 1:Head item No. of history items to get

10

0: Start with the latest item 1: Start with the second item from the latest one 2: Start with the third item from the latest one

6, 7 Argument 2:The number of items to get 4 Setting range: 1 to 4

Offset Description Setting example Note

0 Data size 252 The number of bytes

1 Reserve 0

2 Command code 0x0F05 Used function code

3 Reserve 0

4, 5 Error code 0 0: No error Other than 0: Error

6 , 7 The number of history items got

3 The number of history items there were got.

8 to 37 Alarm history (1) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "

38 to 67 Alarm history (2) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "

68 to 97 Alarm history (3) "03/01/01 15:20:26 EMG EXIN $3 "

98 to 127 Alarm history (4) " " If there is no alarm history, it will be space.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

451

5.8.4 Automatic setting window

Automatic setting window, which has ten sets of area as shown below, sets pre-establised command automatically when

the power is turned ON.

2-part systems window (window No. 6 to 10) is not valid for 1-part system. (Null is entered in all the response area.)

The window response area is assigned in NC as shown below.Direct reference from GOT is possible.

Description of automatic setting window

No. Command description Part system Details

1 Machine coordinate value package acquisition (all axes within the 1-part system) 0xF03

1-part system

Designate ASCII output

2 Remaining distance package acquisition (all axes within the 1-part system)

3 Modal information package acquisition 0xF02

4 Acquisition of currently running program 0xF01 Designate 48 words 5 rows

5 Acquisition of alarm message which is occurring

0xF04 The number of messages = 5

6 Machine coordinate value package acquisition (all axes within the 2-part system) 0xF03

2-part system Same as above 7

Remaining distance package acquisition (all axes within the 2-part system)

8 Modal information package acquisition 0xF02

9 Acquisition of currently running program 0xF01

10 Acquisition of alarm message which is occurring

0xF04

Window response area

No. Response areas device

1 D6880

2 D7008

3 D7136

4 D7264

5 D7392

6 D7520

7 D7648

8 D7776

9 D7904

10 D8032

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

452

Fixed value is set for automatic setting windows command details, however it is possible to change a part of the value

after it was set.

The followings explain the contens which can be changed.

The range of changeable setting value depends on the setting range of arguments of each command.

The value is changed for both 1st and 2nd part systems.

When one of the value is changed all the setting values needs to be set. When "0" is set, it does not need to be changed.

Keep in mind that the arguments of machine coordinate value packet acquisition do not mach with the data in the actual

command.

When changing the machine coordinate value packeage acquision, data type of the remaining distance packeage

acquisitions window is also changed.

When the value outside the specification range is set, the error occurs for the response area window. Normal response is

output by changing the value and removing the error.

(Note) Acquiring the currently executed program in the automatic setting window does not line-wrap and is fixed type.

If the line-wrap is required, use the standard GOT window.

Automatic setting windows command change

Command details Changeable argument Setting details Default value

Package acquisition of Machine coordinate values

Type of output coordinate

1 Machine value

1: Machine value

2 Current value

3 Work coordinate value

4 Remaining command

5 Next command

- -

Data type

1 Interpolation unit

3: Extended character string

2 Character string (AXCII)

3 Extended character string (AXCII)

Acquisition of running program

Number of blocks 5 1 to 10 5 blocks

Number of characters inside the block

48 1 to 240 48 characters

Obtaining the message during the alarm

Number of messages 5 1 to 5 5 Messages

Type of message 1

Bit0: NC alarm bit1: Stop code *When 3 is set, both of them are obtained.

Bit0: NC alarm only

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.8 GOT Window

453

Write a value to change directory to the device in NC to change the command detail from GOT.

Interfaces for change are shown below.

Timing chart of changing details of command from GOT is shown below.

Follow the order of this timing chart and make sure that the change request is written at the end.

Changing the command from GOT

Device in NC Details of interface

R4416 Type of output coordinate value

R4417 Data type of output coordinate value

R4418 Number of output blocks of running program

R4419 Number of characters in the block of running program

R4420 Number of messages output

R4421 Type of message output

R4422 Change request (write1 when required)

00 1R4422

R4416R4421 Modified value

Modification request

GOT window command

Update from GOT

Write from GOT

CNC CPU updates the setting value

GOT window response

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

454

Write a value to change via shared device to change the command detail from PLC.

Interfaces for change are shown in the table below.

These interfaces of the NC internal device is same as the NC internal device that is written directory from GOT (refer to

Changing the command from GOT).

Updating during the first scan (such as the condition of SM402) from PLC, control for updating because of the change

request is not required. In this case, the command details can be changed by writing the details of changing in G+270 to

G+275. (When detals of G+270 to G+275 are all zero, command changing is not executed.)

Timing chart of changing details of command from PLC is shown below.

Follow the order of this timing chart and make sure that the change request is turned ON at the end.

5.8.5 Error code for each command code

Changing the command from PLC

Shared device Details of interface

G+270 Type of output coordinate value

G+271 Data type of output coordinate value

G+272 Number of output blocks of running program

G+273 Number of characters in the block of running program

G+274 Number of messages output

G+275 Type of message output

G+291 bite: Change request

Command code Error No. Error description

0x0F01 0x80050C93 The number of characters of No. of block x 1 block are over 240.

0x0F02 0x80040190 Part system is out of range.

0x0F03 0x80040190 Either part system or axis is out of range. The coordinate value type is out of range. The data type is out of range.

0x0F04 0x80040190 Part system is out of range. The alarm type is out of range.

0x0F05 0x80040190 The head number of history data acquired is out of range (other than 0 to 167). The number of history data acquired is out of range (1 to 4).

G+291/BITE

G10291/BITE

G+271G+276 Modified value

Modification request

GOT window command

Update from PLC

CNC CPU updates the setting value

Modification complete

GOT window response output

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.9 PLC Constants

455

5.9 PLC Constants The parameters #6301 to #6348 can be used as PLC constants.

The setting range is 8 digits (-99999999 to 99999999)

When the data is set while the parameters #6301 to #6348 are displayed, the set data is set in the file register and

backed up.

If the data is set at R register from the PLC side, the screen display will not change. To change the display,

move to another screen and then select the PLC constants screen.

(1) Parameter input/output

The PLC constant data can be input and output with the CNC data.

PLC constants are output with N6301 to N6348.

Sharing G device Internal R register

(HIGH side) (LOW side) (HIGH side) (LOW side)

6301 G12521 G12520 R4501 R4500

6302 G12523 G12522 R4503 R4502

6303 G12525 G12524 R4505 R4504

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

6347 G12613 G12612 R4593 R4592

6348 G12615 G12614 R4595 R4594

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

456

5.10 PLC bit selection There are 96 parameters, #6401 to #6469, that can be used for PLC bit selection.

#6401 to #6448 (48 parameters) are for user open area and their interfaces are as follows.

Only reference is possible from the PLC.

#6449 to #6496 are interlocked with the NC system and applications are fixed. CNC performance is changed by setting

the value.

They are set by turning ON/OFF of each bit.

(1) Parameter input/output

The PLC bit selection data can be input and output with the CNC data input/output operation.

The PLC bit selection data can be input and output with N64011 to N6496.

Sharing G device Internal R register

6401 6402

G12616 (Low order side) (High order side)

R4600 (Low order side) (High order side)

6403 6404

G12617 (Low order side) (High order side)

R4601 (Low order side) (High order side)

6405 6406

G12618 (Low order side) (High order side)

R4602 (Low order side) (High order side)

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

6447 6448

G12663 (Low order side) (High order side)

R4623 (Low order side) (High order side)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

457

5.11 Chopping This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of the program operation when workpiece

contours are to be cut.

There are two types of command for the chopping function: a command by the machining program and a command by a

signal from the PLC. Use "#1323 chopsel (chopping command method)" to select which command to choose for the

chopping function.

(a) Grindstone

(b) Chopping operation

(c) Workpiece

(a)

(c)

(b)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

458

5.11.1 Interface with PLC

[Function] [Operation]

The state of chopping operation is output as each bit information.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping (CHPS)

(2) Chopping parameter valid

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING STATUS G10380 G10480 G10580 G10680 G10780 G10880 G10980

R180 R280 R380 R480 R580 R680 R780

BIT Name Description

0 In chopping start It turns ON during the chopping operation regardless of either with chopping by the external signal or by the command from the machining program.

1 In chopping mode It turns ON at the start of chopping command (G81.1 or chopping signal ON). After issuing the chopping complete command (G80 or chopping signal OFF) and then completing the basic position return, it turns OFF.

2 Stroke compensation completion

While the compensation operation is executed during the chopping operation, it turns ON as the difference between the position of upper dead point/bottom dead point and the feedback position has reached less than the tolerance specified with the parameter. If change, such as the movement stop, operation parameter change etc., occurs, it turns OFF.

3 Chopping designation error

Check the setting of operation parameter at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal, and turn it OFF if there is any abnormality. Correct the setting detail, and check it again at the rising edge of the chipping parameter valid signal. If there is no abnormality, turn it OFF. Refer to the alarm No. for the detail of the abnormality.

4 Chopping start preparation completion

Reading the operation parameter inside the NC completes at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal, and turn it ON when the operation of the designated parameter is valid. Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming this signal is ON. When the chopping parameter valid signal turned OFF, this signal will also turn OFF.

5 Playback mode error over

Even the compensation operation is executed using the memorized compensation amount with the playback mode of fixed compensation amount method, it turns ON if the difference between the command position and the feedback position exceeds the tolerance. If the difference is within the tolerance, it turns OFF. Set with the parameter to use the compensation value sequential update type for changing the compensation amount when the error amount exceeds the tolerance.

6 Compensation memorize complete

It turns ON when the measurement of compensation amount is completed in the record mode of fixed compensation amount method. The compensation amount is the difference between the command position and the feedback position and should be within the tolerance. It turns OFF at the completion of chopping operation of the record mode.

7 Compensation memorize incomplete

The error amount cannot be within the tolerance even chopping operation with fixed compensation method is executed 50 times succession.

8 to F Not used

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

459

[Function]

When the alarm occurs during the chopping operation by the external signal or at the rising edge of the chopping

parameter valid signal, the alarm content will be notified to the PLC.

[Operation]

The relationship between the chopping error No. and its content is shown below.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping (CHPS)

(2) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING ERROR NO. G10381 G10481 G10581 G10681 G10781 G10881 G10981

R181 R281 R381 R481 R581 R681 R781

Error No. Description Classification

0 No error -

1 Number of cycles for chopping is zero. (Operates when the number of cycles is 1) A

2 (Chopping axis feed rate) > (Cutting feed clamp speed) (Feed rate is clamped at the cutting feed clamp speed.)

A

3 (Acceleration of chopping axis) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed time constant) (Feed rate is clamped at (cutting feed clamp speed) / (cutting feed time constant))

A

4 (Number of cycles for chopping) > (1000/min) (The number of cycles for chopping is clamped at 1000/min.)

A

5 Chopping axis zero point return is not completed. B

6 Chopping override is zero B

7 Commanded axis is the chopping axis. B

8 The bottom dead point position is zero. B

9 Chopping axis is a manual feed axis. B

10 Interlock B

11 Stored stroke limit or stroke end B

20 No chopping specification. -

22 Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface. C

23 Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter. C

26 Data No. of chopping control data is out of range. C

27 "#2081 chclsp" (chopping clamp speed) and "#2002 clamp" (cutting clamp speed) for chopping axis are both set to "0".

C

28 Chopping axis was changed during the chopping operation. (Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping.)

C

29 The rotary axis is designated as a chopping axis. C

31 Chopping command is executed by PLC when selecting the chopping by G command. C

Classificati on A

The error is retained during chopping operation. The alarm is removed after the alarm factor is removed.

Classificati on B

The error is cleared after the alarm factor is removed, or when the NC is reset.

Classificati on C

It does not enter into the chopping mode.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

460

[Function]

The axis which is in the chopping operation is output.

[Operation]

The axis which is in the chopping operation turns ON regardless of either by PLC command or by machining program

command.

It turns OFF when the chopping mode is removed.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis

: :

bit7: 8th axis

bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

[Related signals]

(1) In chopping mode

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING AXIS G10382 G10482 G10582 G10682 G10782 G10882 G10982

R182 R282 R382 R482 R582 R682 R782

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

461

[Function]

This validates the chopping function by external signal.

[Operation]

The chopping operation is started at the rising edge of this signal and terminated at the falling edge of this signal.

This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

[Function]

This validates the chopping operation parameter by the external signal.

[Operation]

(1) The chopping operation parameter is valid at the rising edge of this signal.

The chopping operation parameters include the following.

(a) Compensation method selection

(b) Operation mode selection

(c) Rapid traverse override valid

(d) Chopping axis selection

(e) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(f) Bottom dead point position designation (L)(H)

(g) Number of cycles designation

(h) Data No.

(2) This signal is ignored during the chopping by machining program.

(3) Chopping operation parameter can be changed with this signal during chopping operation.

[Related signals]

(1) Compensation method selection

(2) Operation mode selection

(3) Rapid traverse override valid

(4) Chopping axis selection

(5) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(6) Upper dead point position designation (L)(H)

(7) Number of cycles designation

(8) Data No.

(9) Chopping status

[Function]

The compensation method of the chopping by external signal is selected.

[Operation]

0: The compensation amount sequential update method

1: The fixed compensation amount method

The selection with this signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A CHOPPING CHPSn Y7BA Y89A Y97A YA5A YB3A YC1A YCFA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A CHOPPING PARAMETER VAL-

ID Y7BB Y89B Y97B YA5B YB3B YC1B YCFB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A COMPENSATION METHOD SE-

LECTION Y7BC Y89C Y97C YA5C YB3C YC1C YCFC

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

462

[Function]

The operation mode is selected when the fixed compensation amount method is selected in the compensation method of

the chopping operation with eternal signal.

[Operation]

0: Playback mode

1: Record mode

This selects the operation mode, when the fixed compensation amount method from the chopping operation's

compensation method by the external signal, is selected.

When the compensation value sequential update method is selected as a compensation method, this signal will be

ignored.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

This sets the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the motion speed between basic point and the upper dead

point.

[Operation]

0: Invalid

1: Valid

When this signal is OFF, the axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate regardless of the designation of the rapid traverse

override.

This signal will not be switched at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal or in the the chopping operation

where the G81.1 command is issued.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100% (1% increment).

[Operation]

(1) Only the chopping override is valid for the chopping operation. However, valid or invalid of the rapid traverse override

can be selected for the rapid traverse between the basic position and the upper dead point.

(2) The chopping override is set between 0 and 100% in a 1% increment. If a value outside the range from 0 to 100% is

set, the override will be clamped at 100%.

(3) If the "Chopping override" signal is set to "0", "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0150" will occur.

(4) The value is set in binary.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A OPERATION MODE SELEC-

TION Y7BE Y89E Y97E YA5E YB3E YC1E YCFE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

A RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

VALID Y7BF Y89F Y97F YA5F YB3F YC1F YCFF

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOVn G+380 G+480 G+580 G+680 G+780 G+880 G+980

R2480 R2580 R2680 R2780 R2880 R2980 R3080

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

463

[Function]

The axis to operate chopping is set when the chopping is commanded by the external signal.

[Operation]

When chopping is commanded by the external signal, "1" is set to a corresponding bit of the axis to operate chopping.

bit0: 1st axis

bit1: 2nd axis

: :

bit7: 8th axis

bit8 to F: Not used (Set to "0".)

If two or more bit are designated, the lowest number axis will be selected.

The axis designation with this signal is valid in the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method

and the fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The upper dead point is set when chopping is commanded by external signal.

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

The bottom dead point of when chopping is commanded by the external signal is set with the increment amount from the

upper dead point.

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION G+381 G+481 G+581 G+681 G+781 G+881 G+981

R2481 R2581 R2681 R2781 R2881 R2981 R3081

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA-

TION (L)

G+382 G+482 G+582 G+682 G+782 G+882 G+982

R2482 R2582 R2682 R2782 R2882 R2982 R3082

- UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNA-

TION (H)

G+383 G+483 G+583 G+683 G+783 G+883 G+983

R2483 R2583 R2683 R2783 R2883 R2983 R3083

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

$1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

- LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG-

NATION (L)

G+384 G+484 G+584 G+684 G+784 G+884 G+984

R2484 R2584 R2684 R2784 R2884 R2984 R3084

- LOWER DEAD POINT DESIG-

NATION (H)

G+385 G+485 G+585 G+685 G+785 G+885 G+985

R2485 R2585 R2685 R2785 R2885 R2985 R3085

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

464

[Function]

The speed when chopping is commanded by external signal is set with the number of cycles in one minute. [Number of

cycles/min]

[Operation]

The designation by this signal is valid with the record mode of the compensation value sequential update method and the

fixed compensation amount method.

The designation is invalid with the playback mode of the fixed compensation amount method.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

[Function]

When the compensation method is the fixed compensation amount method, the number of the data to be recorded or

played back is designated.

[Operation]

(When operating in the record mode, the measured amount of compensation is recorded in the area of the designated

number. In the playback mode, operation parameter is read from the area of the designated number.

This signal is valid at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.

[Related signals]

(1) Chopping parameter valid

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIG-

NATION

G+386 G+486 G+586 G+686 G+786 G+886 G+986

R2486 R2586 R2686 R2786 R2886 R2986 R3086

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st part system

2nd part system

3rd part system

4th part system

5th part system

6th part system

7th part system

- DATA NO. G+387 G+487 G+587 G+687 G+787 G+887 G+987

R2487 R2587 R2687 R2787 R2887 R2987 R3087

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

465

5.11.2 Chopping command from PLC

Chopping command by the signalf from PLC is as follows.

(1) The chopping performance parameter setting

Set the information that is required for chopping performance to the PLC interface.

- Rapid traverse override valid/invalid

- Chopping axis selection

- Upper dead point (increment amount from the basic position)

- Lower dead point (increment amount from the upper dead point)

- Number of cycles (number of cycles/min)

(2) Turn the chopping performance parameter valid signal ON

Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON, and make the chopping performance parameters which are

mentioned in (1)valid.

Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal is turned

ON.

(3) Starting the chopping operation

The chopping operation starts after turning ON the chopping signal.

When the chopping signal is turned OFF during the operation, the chopping operation ends after returing to the

basic position.

(Note 1) The basic position is the point where the chopping signal is turned ON.

(Note 2) When 1 is set to #1323 chopsel Chopping command method, the chopping does not start up from the PLC.

Turning the chopping operation parameter valid signal ON outputs the error No. 31 on the chopping error No.

(Note 3) Operation depends on whether automatic mode or manual mode is selected when the chopping signal is

turned ON during the chopping designated axis is moving with other mode.

< Automatic operation mode >

When a movement command is issued for chopping axis, the chopping operation starts after completing the

movement block.

< Manual operation mode >

When the movement is executed for the chopping axis, the chopping operation does not start and M01

Operation error 0154 occurs.

(Note 4) When the movement command is executed for the chopping axis during the chopping operation, the chopping

operation continues without executing the movement because of the M01 Operation error 0151.

(Note 5) Always make sure to set chopping operation parameter before the chopping starts.

When the chopping operation is executed again after completing the chopping operation, the chopping

operation parameter valid signal needs to be turned ON.

If the chopping operation is executed without setting the parameters, it executes with previous parameter

settings.

(Note 6) The chopping operation parameter can be changed during the chopping operation.

The parameters after changing the operation parameters are validated when the chopping parameter valid

signal ON after changing the operation parameter setting value.

(Note 7) Do not execute the chopping command to an axis in synchronous control (tandem).

(Note 8) Do not execute the coordinate preset (G92) to an axis in chopping operation.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

466

5.11.3 Chopping operation

(1) Starting the chopping operation

The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of the chopping signal and the chopping operation will be initiated

using the current position as a bisic position. Chopping is operated after travelling from the base position to the

upper dead point with rapid traverse.

Acceleration/deceleration will be performed by linear acceleration/deceleration for travelling from the basic point to

the upper dead point.

(2) During the chopping operation

The axis travels repeatedly between the upper dead point and the lower dead point by designated number of cycles

or the feedrate.

During the chopping operation, the compensation amount is calculated from the machinery operation (feedback

position of the motor end) to compensate so that the machine can move to the upper dead point/lower dead point.

Travelling during the chopping operation will be performed by soft acceleration/deceleration.

(3) Terminating the chopping operation

The chopping operation is terminated at the falling edge of the chopping signal.

After the chopping operation is performed to get to the upper dead point, the chopping axis will travel to the base

point with rapid traverse.

When the chopping axis is travelling from the upper dead point to tthe lower dead point, it will travel to the lower

dead point before terminating.

Acceleration/deceleration will be performed by linear acceleration/deceleration for travelling from the basic point to

the upper dead point.

5.11.4 Interrupt operation during chopping

If an interruption (such as resetting) that affects the chopping axis occurs during the chopping operation, the chopping

axis will perform as follows.

Interrupt operation Chopping operation Chopping mode

Reset Travel to the basic position with rapid traverse after travelling to the upper dead point immediately.

Cancel

Feed hold Peformance can be continued witout stopping.

Hold Block stop

Axis interlock Decelerates to stop. The chopping operation starts again after cancelling the interruption.Door interlock II

Door interlock I

Decelerates to stop. Cancel

Servo OFF

Axis detachment

Stroke end

Emergency stop Stop immediately.

Program error Travel to the basic position with rapid traverse after travelling to the upper dead point immediately.

Hold

Basic positionMotion of chopping axis Start Stop

Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Upper dead center point

Bottom dead center point

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

467

5.11.5 Changing the peformance parameter during the chopping start state

Chopping performance parameter can be changed during the chopping operation.

When the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON after changing the performance parameter, the chopping axis

decelerates to stop once at the upper or bottom dead center point at before the parameter was changed.

As soon as decelerating to stop, chopping operation is carried out immediately with the changed parameter.

(1) Switching the upper dead point and the lower dead point, during the travel from the upper dead point to the lower

dead point

(2) Switching the upper dead point and the lower dead point, during the travel from the lower dead point to the upper

dead point

(Note) Chopping axis cannot be changed during the chopping operation.

Control data change

Bottom dead center point before change

New bottom dead center point

Decelerates to stop

Control data change

Upper dead center point before change

Bottom dead center point before change

New upper dead center point

New bottom dead center point

Decelerates to stopUpper dead center point before change

New upper dead center point

New upper dead center point Decelerates to stop

Upper dead center point before change

Control data change

Bottom dead center point before change

New upper dead center point

New bottom dead center point Decelerates to stop

Upper dead center point before change

Control data change

Bottom dead center point before change

New bottom dead center point

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

468

5.11.6 Chopping compensation operation

As this function involes high-speed repetitive motions, the positioning method allowing compensation based on the

calculation from the machinery operation (feedback position of the motor end) is adapted, rather than the method using

in-position check.

There are two types of compensation method, the compensation value sequential update method and the fixed

compensation amount method.

The compensation amount for assigning the position can be calculated from the difference between command position

and feedback position for every four cycyle after the chopping operation started. Then the compensation amount is

added on the positioning command for the next cycle to eliminate the difference between command position and

feedback position.

Compare the commanded stroke and the actual stroke. When the difference between them has become less than the

tolerance which is designated with the parameter (#2080 chwid), output the stroke compensation completion signal.

If the grindstone contacts with the workpiece immediately after the chopping operation has started, the chopping width

before and after compensation may be differed, and which may affect the machining surface. In this case, the

compensation value fixed method is appropriate.

With the compensation amount fixed method, compensation amount based on a dry run operation is recorded in

advance so that, in the real operation, compensation is carried out from the first positioning to the bottom dead point

using the compensation amount recorded earlier.

Set with "#1235 set07/bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start" whether to compensate with the same

compensation amount or to update every four cycyle like the compensation value sequential update method.

The stroke compensation completion signal is output when the difference between the commanded stroke and the actual

stroke has reached the tolerance specified with the parameter (#2080 chwid).

Compensation value sequential update method

Fixed compensation amount fixed method

Bottom dead center point

Positioning command Motion of the motor end Compensation starts from the 5th cycle.

Upper dead center point

Bottom dead center point

Positioning command: Select the compensation value fixed method and set the compensation amount so that compensation is carried out from the first bottom dead center point position since the operation has started.

Motion of the motor end Compensation in the 5th cycle or later is carried out with the same compensation amount as as in the 1st cycle.

Upper dead centerpoint

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

469

Compensation amount fixed method includes the record mode and the playback mode.

< Record mode >

This mode records the compensation amount with the following procedures.

(1) Setting the chopping operation parameter

Set the necessity information for chopping operation to the PLC interface by turning the compensation

method selection ON (the compensation amount fixed method) and the operation mode selection signal

ON (the record mode).

- Rapid traverse override valid/invalid

- Chopping axis selection

- Upper dead point position (increment amount from the upper dead point)

- Lower dead point position (increment amount from the lower dead point)

- Number of cycles (cycle/min)

- Data No. (0 to 3)

(2) Validating Chopping parameter

Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON to validate the parameters mentioned in (1).

This signal must be turned OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal (chopping

status bit4) is turned ON.

(3) Starting chopping operation

After turning the chopping signal ON, the chopping operation will start.

If the chopping signal is turned OFF during the chopping operation, the chopping operation will be

terminated after returning to the base point.

(4) Recording the compensation amount

From the start of chopping operation, the chopping operation will be carried out with the compensation

value sequential update method.

The compensation is carried out with the compensation value sequential update method. The

compensation value will be recorded when the difference amount between the command position and

feedback position has become within the tolerance, and the compensation recording completion signal

(chopping status bit6) will be output.

(5) Terminating the chopping operation

The compensation amount recording is completed when the compensation amount recording completion

signal is turned ON. Turn the chopping signal OFF.

The chopping operation will be terminated after returning to the base point.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

470

< Playback mode >

Command the playback mode with the following procedures.

(1) Setting the chopping operation parameter

Set the data No. for playback by turning the compensation method selection ON (the compensation

amount fixed method) and the operation mode selection signal OFF (the playback mode).

Setting for the chopping axis, the upper dead point position, the lower dead point position and the number

of cycles are invalid with the playback mode.

(2) Validating Chopping parameter

The recorded information will be read by turninig ON the chopping parameter valid signal.

The information which is read is the chopping axis, the upper dead point poisition, the lower dead point

position, the number of cycyles and the compensation amount.

This signal must be turned OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal (chopping

status bit4) is turned ON.

(3) Starting chopping operation

After turning the chopping signal ON, the chopping operation will start.

If the chopping signal is turned OFF during the chopping operation, the chopping operation will be

terminated after returning to the base point.

The compansation will be carried out with the recorded compensation amount for four cycles after starting

the chopping opearation.

Set with "#1235 set07/bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start" whether to compensate

with the same compensation amount from 5th cycle onwards or to modify the compensation amount

based on the previous four cycle's error amount.

(4) Terminating the chopping operation

When the chopping signal is turned OFF, the chopping operation will be terminated after returning to the

base point.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

471

5.11.7 Chopping feedrate

The chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the chopping axis clamp speed (#2081 chclsp). When "0" is set to the chopping

clamp speed, the chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the G1 clamp speed (#2002 clamp). The acceleration/

deceleration time constant is set with chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant (#2141 chtL). When "0" is

set to the chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant, the chopping axis linear acceleration/deceleration time

constant (#2007 G1tL) is used.

When the chopping is executed by the command from PLC, designate the feedrate with the number of cycles (cycle/

min).

When the upper dead point, the lower dead point and the number of cycles are set with the chopping control data, the

speed pattern in which the acceleration speed will be "the clamp speed/time constant" is commanded to the servo drive

unit.

Feedrate conversion by designating with cycle

chclsp =

chclsp

chtL

cht 1

Speed [mm/min]

Time [ms]

Acceleration chtL(or G1tL)

t

F

chclsp F t =

1/number of cycles (s)

chtL(or G1tL)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

472

When the chopping operation parameter is illegal, the chopping designate error signal will be turned ON and the

contents will be notified to the chopping error No.

In the following cases, the number of cycles or feedrate is converted into the value controllable with NC (clamp value)

upon occurrence of the alarm.

(1) When number of cycles is "0"

Number of cycles is 1/min.

(2) When converted feedrate F exceeds chclsp

The following indicates that F exceeds chclsp when the speed pattern is calculated based on the acceleration

of chclsp/chtL. (The number of cycles becomes smaller than that of specified.)

(3) When number of cycles is 1000/min or more

The number of cycles is clamped at 1000/min.

chtL

chclsp

F Pattern by the parameter

Actual pattern (clamp value)

1/2 number of cycles (s)

(or G1tL)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.11 Chopping

473

5.11.8 Usage example

The circuit example is shown below.

(Note) Bit devices in the program example are set on the premise that the transfer corresponds to the device Nos. of

CNC interface.

Depending on the device No. to assign, the details of the program may differ.

M8001

M8000

M8001

M1001

M8000

M8000 D100.0 D100.1 D100.2

Y7BB

Y7BA

M8002

Y7BB

D100.4

Y7BA

D100.4

PLS M8001

Parameter setting start pulse

MOV K4 U3E0\G10381 Chopping axis designation (3rd axis)

DMOV K-10000 U3E0\G10382 Upper dead center point position setting (-10.0mm from base point)

DMOV K-20000 U3E0\G10384 Lower dead center point position setting (-20.0mm from base point)

MOV K100 U3E0\G10366 Number of cycle setting (100 cycle/min)

Chopping parameter valid signal

Chopping start

Parameter setting start pulse

Start ready completion

Chopping signal

MOV U3E1\G10380 D100

Always ON

Chopping cutting start interlock

Retrieve chopping status

In chopping start

In chopping mode

Stroke compensation completion

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

474

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing 5.12.1 Functions

PLC axis indexing is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary coordinate position.

This function is applied to tool exchange and magazine control.

[Positioning command methods]

(1) Station method

The axis will be positioned to the destination (station) that has been decided.

There are two assigning methods: Uniform assignment and arbitrary coordinate assignment.

Uniform assignment

One rotation (360) of the rotary axis will be equally divided to determine the stations.

(Maximum number of divisions: 360)

[Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)]

[For linear axis]

A valid stroke will be equally divided to determine the station. (Maximum number of divisions: 359)

[Setting 5 stations]

Arbitrary coordinate assignment

A station will be assigned to an arbitrary coordinate set in each table

(2) Arbitrary coordinate designation method

An arbitrary coordinate will be directly designated in PLC program for positioning.

1

2

3

4 5

6

7

8

Station

1 2 3 4 5

Zero point Valid stroke length Station

Station No.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

475

[Operation functions]

Automatic mode

Stations will be determined automatically.

Manual mode

Stations will be determined manually.

While the start signal is ON, the axis will be rotated at a constant speed. When the start signal is OFF, the axis

will be positioned at the nearest station.

JOG mode

The axis will be rotated at constant speed.

Incremental feed

The axis will be moved by the designed amount.

Manual handle feed

The axis will be moved by the manual pulse generator.

Reference position return

The axis will be positioned at the reference position.

Reference position return is not possible by a dog switch.

[Feed functions]

Feed rate selection

Automatic mode and manual mode can have each four different feed rates to be designated in the PLC

program.

Acceleration/deceleration method

Four different combination can be set from the acceleration/deceleration patterns (linear or S-pattern

acceleration/deceleration) and the acceleration/deceleration time constants. The combination will be selected

in the PLC program.

Select acceleration/deceleration type with parameter: the acceleration/deceleration with constant time or the

one with a constant angle of inclination.

Short-cut control

A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary axis is rotated.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

476

5.12.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface

Operation command PLC CPU -> CNC CPU (R4300 to R4345)

List of signals

PLC indexing axis Abbrev. Signal name

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722 AUXCM4 PLC axis indexing control command 4

R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342

G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723 AUXCM3 PLC axis indexing control command 3

R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343

G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724 AUXCM2 PLC axis indexing control command 2

R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344

G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725 AUXCM1 PLC axis indexing control command 1

R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345

G+2684 G+2690 G+2696 G+2702 G+2708 G+2714 G+2720 G+2726 PLC axis indexing control command position (L)R4304 R4310 R4316 R4322 R4328 R4334 R4340 R4346

G+2685 G+2691 G+2697 G+2703 G+2709 G+2715 G+2721 G+2727 PLC axis indexing control command position (H)R4305 R4311 R4317 R4323 R4329 R4335 R4341 R4347

PLC axis indexing control command 4 (R4300: AUXCM4)

PLC axis indexing control command 3 (R4301: AUXCM3)

bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name

bit0 OV1 Speed override 1 bit0 ST1 Station selection 1

bit1 OV2 Speed override 2 bit1 ST2 Station selection 2

bit2 OV4 Speed override 4 bit2 ST4 Station selection 4

bit3 OV8 Speed override 8 bit3 ST8 Station selection 8

bit4 OV16 Speed override 16 bit4 ST16 Station selection 16

bit5 OV32 Speed override 32 bit5 ST32 Station selection 32

bit6 OV64 Speed override 64 bit6 ST64 Station selection 64

bit7 OVR Speed override valid bit7 ST128 Station selection 128

bit8 Spare bit8 ST256 Station selection 256

bit9 Spare bit9 Spare

bitA Spare bitA Spare

bitB Spare bitB Spare

bitC Spare bitC Spare

bitD Spare bitD Spare

bitE Spare bitE Spare

bitF Spare bitF Spare

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

477

PLC axis indexing control command 2 (R4302: AUXCM2)

PLC axis indexing control command 1 (R4303: AUXCM1)

bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name

bit0 ST Operation start bit0 *SVF Servo OFF

bit1 DIR Rotation direction bit1

bit2 STS Arbitrary point feed command valid bit2

bit3 bit3 MRST Master reset

bit4 MP1 Incremental feed magnification 1 bit4 *IT+ Interlock+

bit5 MP2 Incremental feed magnification 2 bit5 *IT- Interlock-

bit6 PR1 Operation parameter selection 1 bit6 RDF Ready OFF

bit7 PR2 Operation parameter selection 2 bit7 H Handle feed operation mode selec- tion

bit8 EDT+ External deceleration+ bit8 AUT Automatic operation mode

bit9 EDT- External deceleration- bit9 MAN Manual operation mode

bitA Spare bitA J JOG operation mode

bitB Spare bitB ZRN Reference position return mode

bitC Spare bitC

bitD Spare bitD AZS Basic point initialization setting mode

bitE Spare bitE ZST Basic point setting

bitF Spare bitF S Incremental feed operation mode selection

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

478

Operation status signal CNC CPU -> PLC CPU (R2000 to R2045)

PLC indexing axis Abbrev. Signal name

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722 AUXST4 PLC axis indexing control status 4

R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042

G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723 AUXST3 PLC axis indexing control status 3

R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043

G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724 AUXST2 PLC axis indexing control status 2

R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044

G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725 AUXST1 PLC axis indexing control status 1

R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045

G12684 G12690 G12696 G12702 G12708 G12714 G12720 G12726 PLC axis indexing control machine position (L)R2004 R2010 R2016 R2022 R2028 R2034 R2040 R2046

G12685 G12691 G12697 G12703 G12709 G12715 G12721 G12727 PPLC axis indexing control machine position (H)R2005 R2011 R2017 R2023 R2029 R2035 R2041 R2047

PLC axis indexing control status 4 (R2000: AUXST4)

PLC axis indexing control status 3 (R2001: AUXST3)

bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name

bit0 PSW1 Position switch 1 bit0 STO1 Station position 1

bit1 PSW2 Position switch 2 bit1 STO2 Station position 2

bit2 PSW3 Position switch 3 bit2 STO4 Station position 4

bit3 PSW4 Position switch 4 bit3 STO8 Station position 8

bit4 PSW5 Position switch 5 bit4 STO16 Station position 16

bit5 PSW6 Position switch 6 bit5 STO32 Station position 32

bit6 PSW7 Position switch 7 bit6 STO64 Station position 64

bit7 PSW8 Position switch 8 bit7 STO128 Station position 128

bit8 Spare bit8 STO256 Station position 256

bit9 Spare bit9 PSW9 Position switch 9

bitA Spare bitA PSW10 Position switch 10

bitB NST Start not possible bitB PSW11 Position switch 11

bitC Spare bitC PSW12 Position switch 12

bitD Spare bitD PSW13 Position switch 13

bitE Spare bitE PSW14 Position switch 14

bitF Spare bitF PSW15 Position switch 15

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

479

PLC axis indexing control status 2 (R2002: AUXST2)

PLC axis indexing control status 1 (R2003: AUXST1)

bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name

bit0 AUTO In automatic operation mode bit0 RDY Servo ready

bit1 MANO In manual operation mode bit1 INP In-position

bit2 JO In JOG operation mode bit2 SMZ Smoothing zero

bit3 bit3 AX1 Axis selection output

bit4 ZRNO In reference position return mode bit4 MVP In axis plus motion

bit5 bit5 MVM In axis minus motion

bit6 AZSO In basic point initialization setting mode

bit6 TLQ In torque limit

bit7 SO In incremental mode bit7

bit8 AL1 Alarm 1 bit8 ZP Reference position reached

bit9 AL2 Alarm 2 bit9 RST In reset

bitA AL4 Alarm 4 bitA HO In handle feed operation mode

bitB BAT Battery drop bitB MA Controller ready completion

bitC ABS Absolute position power shutoff movement over

bitC SA Servo ready completion

bitD ZSN Absolute position data loss bitD JSTA Automatic set position reached

bitE ZSF Initialization setting completed bitE JST Set position reached

bitF ZSE Initialization setting error completed bitF NEAR Near set position

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

480

[Function][Operation]

When the Servo OFF signal is set to "0" (B contact), the control axis enters the servo OFF status. No matter which

operation mode the servo is in and turned OFF, the axis movement will stop, and the servo will turn OFF. The axis

movement restarts when the servo is turned ON again.

If the axis moves for any reason while the servo is OFF, it can be selected whether to compensate that movement

amount when the servo turns ON the next time. Select with parameter "#1064 svof".

(1) When carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 1)

When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are always updated by the amount the axis has moved. When the servo is

OFF, the coordinates show the machine position.

(2) When not carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 0)

When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are not updated even when the axis moves. When the servo is OFF, the

coordinates show the machine position when the servo is OFF.

When the servo is turned ON, the axis is moved to the position where the servo was turned OFF.

When the servo is OFF and the axis movement exceeds the excessive error width (designated with parameter

"#2226 SV026"), a servo alarm occurs.

[Caution]

(1) The actual servo OFF operation is validated after In-position (INP) is completed. When using a mechanical clamp,

carry out the clamp operation after confirming the in-position status.

(2) When the power is turned ON, the Servo OFF signal turns OFF ("0") and the servo OFF function becomes valid. It is

necessary before operation to turn the Servo OFF signal ON ("1") in the PLC program to release the servo OFF.

[Function]

This signal resets the PLC indexing axis.

[Operation]

When this signal is ON, the following reset operations are carried out.

(1) The axis movement decelerates to a stop.

(2) Alarms that can be released by the reset are released.

(3) The In reset (RST) signal is output.

(4) The operation alarm is released while resetting.

[Related signals]

(1) In reset (RST: AUXST1/bit9)

[Function][Operation]

When the control axis is moving in the (+) direction, this signal decelerates and stops the axis movement immediately.

When this signal is OFF from before movement, the motion is stopped in the same manner as without starting. In any

case the movement is started or restarted by turning this signal ON.

Details of operation command signals (PLC NC)

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- MAND 1

AUXCM1 G+2683 G+2689 G+2695 G+2701 G+2707 G+2713 G+2719 G+2725

R4303 R4309 R4315 R4321 R4327 R4333 R4339 R4345

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

B Servo OFF *SVF AUXCM1/bit0

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Master reset MRST AUXCM1/bit3

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Interlock+ *IT+ AUXCM1/bit4

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

481

[Function][Operation]

This is the same as the Interlock + (IT+) signal, the only difference being the direction.

[Function]

This is a signal to turn OFF the READY status.

[Operation]

When put into a READY OFF status, the power supply to the servomotor is shut off, and the contactor control output is

simultaneously turned OFF. If the motor is in operation, it will stop by a dynamic brake stop or a deceleration control

stop. Servo ready completion (SA) and Servo ready (RDY) are also turned OFF, but an alarm does not occur. When this

signal is turned OFF, the machine immediately returns to the original state.

[Related signals]

(1) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)

(2) Servo ready (RDY: AUXST1/bit0)

[Function]

This signal selects the handle feed operation mode.

[Operation]

The axis will move for the amount determined by input pulse multiplied by feed magnification after this signal is turned

ON, each signal [Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) and Incremental feed magnification (MP1, MP2)] is

determined, and the handle pulse is input.

[Caution]

(1) Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.

0101".

(2) The handle mode acceleration/deceleration time is the acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 linear acceleration/

deceleration of the selected operation parameter group.

[Related signals]

(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

(2) Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 (MP1, MP2: AUXCM2/bit4,5)

[Function]

This signal selects the automatic operation mode.

[Operation]

Turn this signal ON, set Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256) and then turn Operation start (ST) ON to move the

axis to the designated station. The shortcut control or the rotation direction can be selected with parameters.

[Caution]

Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.

0101".

[Related signals]

(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)

(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

(3) Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256: AUXCM3/bit0 to 8)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Interlock- *IT- AUXCM1/bit5

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Ready OFF RDF AUXCM1/bit6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Handle feed operation mode H AUXCM1/bit7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Automatic operation mode AUT AUXCM1/bit8

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

482

[Function]

This signal selects the manual operation mode.

[Operation]

When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving, and the

rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. When Operation start turns OFF, the

axis will be positioned to the nearest station.

[Caution]

Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.

0101".

[Related signals]

(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)

(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

[Function]

This signal selects the JOG operation mode.

[Operation]

When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving, and the

rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. Unlike the manual operation mode,

when Operation start is turned OFF, the axis immediately decelerate to a stop.

[Caution]

Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.

0101".

[Related signals]

(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)

(2) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

[Function]

This signal selects the reference position return mode.

[Operation]

When this signal (ZRN) is turned ON, the reference position return mode is designated. To start the reference position

return, turn this signal ON, select the operation parameter group, then turn ON the Operation start (ST) signal.

When the absolute position coordinate system has been established in the absolute position specifications, the high-

speed return will be applied in every operation.

[Related signals]

(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

[Function]

This signal selects the mode that initializes the basic point for the absolute position detection system.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON, the basic point initialization setting mode is held until the NC power is turned OFF.

(Cannot be canceled)

When the stopper method is selected by setting "1" to "#2049 type", the torque limit value and the excessive error

detection width in the operation parameter group 4 are automatically selected.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Manual operation mode MAN AUXCM1/bit9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A JOG operation mode J AUXCM1/bitA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Reference position return mode ZRN AUXCM1/bitB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Basic point initialization setting

mode AZS AUXCM1/bitD

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

483

[Function]

This signal turns ON when designating the basic point with the basic point initialization in the absolute position detection

system.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON in the basic point initialization setting mode, the designated position is set as the absolute

position basic point.

[Function]

This signal selects the incremental feed operation mode selection.

[Operation]

After turning ON this signal, designate the operation parameter group (with PR1 and PR2), the incremental feed

magnification (with MP1 and MP2) and the rotation direction (with DIR). Then turn ON the Operation start (ST) signal to

move the axis.

[Caution]

(1) Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M00 AUX OPER. ALM.

0101".

(2) In the incremental mode, the axis travel will be maintained at a constant amount, even if the Operation start signal is

OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Basic point setting ZST AUXCM1/bitE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Incremental feed operation mode

selection S AUXCM1/bitF

S

MP1,MP2

PR1,PR2

DIR

ST

RST

Axis movement

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

484

[Function][Operation]

When this signal is turned ON in an operation mode, the operation will start. The Operation start signal is handled as a

status, so the ON status must be maintained until the operation is finished.

Operation movement in each operation mode

(1) Automatic operation mode

Station selection (ST1 to ST256) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting

the Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are

held even if they are changed after the startup.

When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position

will be output as "0". When the positioning is completed, Automatic set position reached (JSTA) and Set position

reached (JST) is output. Then turn the Operation start signal OFF.

When the Operation start signal is turned OFF during axis movement, the axis will stop at the nearest station. Note

that for a linear axis, if there is not a nearest point in the movement direction, the commanded station becomes the

nearest point.

(Note) When the shortcut function is OFF for the rotating axis, the positioning direction can be designated with

Rotation direction (DIR).

(2) Manual operation mode

Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting the

Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are held

even if they are changed after the startup.

When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position

will be output as "0".

While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the designated direction. When the Operation start

signal is turned OFF, a positioning is carried out to the nearest station where the axis can stop in the rotation

direction. Note that for a linear axis, if there is no nearest point in the movement direction, the axis will immediately

decelerate to a stop.

When the positioning is completed, Set position reached (JST) is output.

(Note) Automatic set position reached (JSTA) will not be output.

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- MAND 2

AUXCM2 G+2682 G+2688 G+2694 G+2700 G+2706 G+2712 G+2718 G+2724

R4302 R4308 R4314 R4320 R4326 R4332 R4338 R4344

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Operation start ST AUXCM2/bit0

Station selection

Operation start

Automatic set position reached

Set position reached

Near set position

Station position

Axis movement

Output 0 (zero)

Rotation direction

Operation start

Automatic set position reached

Set position reached

Near set position

Station position

Axis movement

Output 0 (zero)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

485

(3) JOG operation mode

Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting the

Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so they are held

even if they are changed after the startup.

When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station position

will be output as "0". While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the designated direction. When

the Operation start signal is turned OFF, the axis decelerates to a stop. Set position reached (JST) and Near set

position (NEAR) are output if the axis is stopped within each tolerable width from the station position.

[Function]

This signal designates the rotation direction of the operation in each operation mode.

[Operation]

Turn this signal ON to designate the rotation direction before inputting the Operation start (ST) signal.

This signal is invalid in the automatic operation mode when the shortcut control is set and selected by the parameter.

When the shortcut control is not selected, a positioning is carried out in the direction designated by this signal.

This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.

The actual motor rotation direction is reversed by changing the setting of parameter "#1018 ccw".

[Related signals]

(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)

[Function][Operation]

This signal selects the mode that executes the positioning, with the command unit specified by "#1003 iunit", to the

arbitrary position (coordinate) transferred from the NC. Automatic operation mode (AUT) must be turned ON

simultaneously with Arbitrary point feed command valid.

[Related signals]

(1) Automatic operation mode (AUT: AUXCM1/bit8)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Rotation direction DIR AUXCM2/bit1

DIR Axis rotation direction Station movement direction

0 Forward run Direction of increasing station No.

1 Reverse run Direction of decreasing station No.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Arbitrary point feed command val-

id STS AUXCM2/bit2

Output 0 (zero)

Station selection

Operation start

Automatic set position reached

Set position reached

Near set position

Station position

Axis movement

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

486

[Function][Operation]

This signal selects the incremental feed amount and the handle feed magnification. In the handle feed, the movement

amount per handle pulse is selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal selects one parameter group to be actually used from four parameter groups that designate the axis feed

operation. The parameter group cannot be changed while Operation start (ST) is ON. (The group is held in NC.)

If Smoothing zero is confirmed for the target axis, the operation parameter group can be changed with the Operation

start. Changing the parameter setting values of the time constant, torque limit value and excessive error detection width,

however, is not possible unless Smoothing zero is confirmed for all the NC axes. The parameter values, if changed

during the NC axis movement, are valid after the smoothing zero is confirmed.

[Function]

The feed speed towards positive direction is controlled by the external deceleration speed while this signal is OFF.

[Operation]

The external deceleration speed is set with the axis parameter.

The external deceleration speed can be set in 6 steps and can be selected with the external deceleration speed selection

signal.

The external deceleration speed selection signal uses the PLC axis interface.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Incremental feed magnification 1,

2 MP1,MP2 AUXCM2/bit4,5

MP2 MP1 Feed amount

0 0 0.001

0 1 0.01

1 0 0.1

1 1 1

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Operation parameter selection 1,

2 PR1,PR2 AUXCM2/bit6,7

PR2 PR1 Selected operation parameter group

0 0 1

0 1 2

1 0 3

1 1 4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

B External deceleration+ *EDT+ AUXCM2.bit8

Operation parameter group 4

Operation parameter group 3

Operation parameter group 2 Operation parameter group 1

Automatic feedrate Manual feedrate Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 Torque limit value Excessive error detection width Set position detection width Near set position detection width

Select

Operation parameter Automatic feedrate Manual feedrate Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 Torque limit value Excessive error detection width Set position detection width Near set position detection width

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

487

[Function]

The feed speed towards negative direction is controlled by the external deceleration speed while this signal is OFF.

[Operation]

Same as the External deceleration(*EDT+).

[Function]

This signal designates an index station No. in the automatic operation mode.

[Operation]

Set an index station No. before inputting Operation start (ST) in the automatic operation mode.

Input a 9-digit binary number. An input "000000001" corresponds to station No.1.

This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.

When this signal is set to "000000000" and the automatic operation is started, a one station rotation special command

will result. (Note that this cannot be used when the station positions are determined in non-uniform assignments.)

[Function][Operation]

This signal designates the override value added to the selected feedrate. Set a binary value for the override. Values over

100% are regarded as 100%.

Effective feedrate = (Selected speed * Speed override) / 100

[Function][Operation]

This is a signal to validate the speed override. When this signal is turned OFF, the set feedrate becomes the operation

speed without calculating the override.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

B External deceleration- *EDT- AUXCM2.bit9

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- MAND 3

AUXCM3 G+2681 G+2687 G+2693 G+2699 G+2705 G+2711 G+2717 G+2723

R4301 R4307 R4313 R4319 R4325 R4331 R4337 R4343

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Station selection 1 to 256 ST1 to ST256

AUXCM3/bit0 to 8

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COM- MAND 4

AUXCM4 G+2680 G+2686 G+2692 G+2698 G+2704 G+2710 G+2716 G+2722

R4300 R4306 R4312 R4318 R4324 R4330 R4336 R4342

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Speed override 1 to 64 OV1 to OV64

AUXCM4/bit0 to 6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Speed override valid OVR AUXCM4/bit7

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

488

[Function]

This signal indicates that the servo system is in an operable status.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when:

(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after turning the power ON.

(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).

(3) The emergency stop has been released.

(4) Ready OFF (RDF) or Servo OFF (*SVF) has been released.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) Servo ready completion (SA) is turned OFF.

(2) The Servo OFF signal is input and the drive unit is in a servo OFF state.

[Related signals]

(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)

(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)

(3) Servo OFF (*SVF: AUXCM1/bit0)

(4) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)

[Function]

This signal notifies that the control axis is in-position.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when:

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned ON and the droop is within the range set in the parameters.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned OFF. (When there is a movement command.)

(2) The droop exceeds the range set in the parameters.

[Caution]

(1) In-position (INP) may turn ON, even during movement, when the axis is moving at extremely low speeds.

(2) The in-position detection range is set in the parameter "#2224 SV024 In-position detection width".

(3) In the servo ready OFF state, Smoothing zero (SMZ) turns OFF when the travel amount of servomotor is detected.

Therefore, In-position (INP) also turns OFF. In axis plus motion (MVP) or In axis minus motion (MVN) turns ON

depending on the detected movement direction. Note that Smoothing zero (SMZ), In axis plus motion (MVP) and In

axis minus motion (MVN) will not change in the servo OFF state without error correction, because detected

servomotor travel amount becomes a droop amount.

[Related signals]

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

Details of operation status signals (NC PLC)

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- TUS 1

AUXST1 G12683 G12689 G12695 G12701 G12707 G12713 G12719 G12725

R2003 R2009 R2015 R2021 R2027 R2033 R2039 R2045

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Servo ready RDY AUXST1/bit0

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In-position INP AUXST1/bit1

Acceleration/ deceleration

delay process Position loop process

Acceleration/deceleration delay Servo droop

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

489

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the acceleration/deceleration process in the built-in controller is finished, and that no command

to the control section remains.

[Function]

This signal indicates that the control axis has received the movement command.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON in the following cases, and turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected.

(1) In automatic operation mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.

(2) In manual operation mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.

(3) In JOG operation mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.

(4) In reference poisition return mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.

When an interlock is applied, this signal remains ON even when the servo is OFF. This signal turns OFF atthe

emergency stop.

[Related signals]

(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (+) direction.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (+) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected

or the axis starts moving in the (-) direction.

[Related signals]

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (-) direction.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (-) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected

or the axis starts moving in the (+) direction.

[Related signals]

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Smoothing zero SMZ AUXST1/bit2

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Axis selection output AX1 AUXST1/bit3

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In axis plus motion MVP AUXST1/bit4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In axis minus motion MVM AUXST1/bit5

Axis selection output (AX1)

Axis movement

Operation start (ST)

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

490

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the control axis is at the current limit value. This signal turns ON when the motor output torque

(motor current) is limited at the torque limit value of the selected operation parameter group.

[Function]

Thsi signal indicates that the control axis is on the reference position.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the reference position is reached in the reference position return mode.

If the reference position is reached in other operation modes or by other commands, the signal will not turn ON.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) The axis is moved by a travel command, etc.

(2) An emergency stop has been activated due to an emergency stop input or a servo alarm occurrence, etc.

(3) The axis has moved in the servo OFF state.

[Related signals]

(1) Reference position return mode (ZRN: AUXCM1/bitB)

[Function]

This signal indicates that the built-in controller is being reset.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON.

(2) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON and the built-in controller is being reset.

(3) In an emergency stop status.

[Related signals]

(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that handle feed operation mode is selected.

[Function]

This signal indicates that the controller is in a status to carry out normal operation.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when:

(1) Normal operation has begun after the power ON.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) The power is turned OFF.

(2) An error with the controller, such as CPU error or memory error, has been detected.

(3) A servo error, which cannot be released unless the controller is first turned OFF, has occurred.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In torque limit TLQ AUXST1/bit6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Reference position reached ZP AUXST1/bit8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In reset RST AUXST1/bit9

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In handle feed operation mode HO AUXST1/bitA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Controller ready completion MA AUXST1/bitB

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

491

[Function]

This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation. In other words, the servo system (position

control) is not working when the signal is OFF.

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after the power ON.

(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).

(3) The emergency stop has been released.

(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.

This signal turns OFF when:

(1) Controller ready completion (MA) is turned OFF.

(2) A servo alarm has occurred.

(3) Emergency stop is issued.

(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.

[Caution]

With Servo OFF (*SVF), Servo ready completion (SA) will not turn OFF as long as there are no separate conditions for

turning the SA OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)

(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)

(3) Controller ready completion (MA: AUXST1/bitB)

[Function]

In the automatic operation, this signal notifies that the positioning to the commanded station No. is completed. The

tolerable ON width is as same as that of Set position reached (JST).

[Operation]

The signal turns ON when:

(1) The positioning to the designated station No. is completed in the automatic operation mode. The signal actually turns

ON before the positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) When the Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes.

(2) When the axis deviates outside the tolerable width.

[Caution]

(1) In automatic operation, this signal does not turn ON when positioning to the nearest station is carried out by the

Operation start signal OFF.

(2) When this signal is ON, it does not turn OFF if the same station No. index is started.

(3) When the positioning to the station is completed in manual mode and the same station No. index is started, this signal

turns ON. However, there is no movement.

(4) Once turned OFF, this signal does not turn ON again even if the axis returns within the tolerable width.

(5) During the emergency stop or the servo OFF, the axis movement, once deviated outside the output width of Set

position reached, returns within the tolerable width, turns this signal ON again if "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit4" is OFF;

does not turn it ON if "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit4" is ON.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Servo ready completion SA AUXST1/bitC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Automatic set position reached JSTA AUXST1/bitD

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

492

[Function]

This signal notifies that the positioning to the station position has been completed. It is ON when the machine position is

at any of the station positions. The tolerable ON width is set with a parameter.

[Operation]

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The positioning to the station is completed in automatic or manual operation. The signal actually turns ON before the

positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.

(2) The stop position after JOG operation is the station position or within the tolerable width.

(3) The reference position return position corresponds to those of the stop position in (2).

Other than the above conditions, this signal normally monitors the machine position, and carries out comparisons

between stations. Therefore, this signal is output even when the machine moves to a station position outside the

operation.

The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes. When the operation is started by the Operation start

signal, this signal will not turn ON, even when a station position is passed during operation.

(2) The axis deviates outside the tolerable width.

[Function]

This signal notifies that the machine position is near the station.

[Operation]

It operates in the same manner as the Set position reached (JST), but the tolerable width is set with a different

parameter. The tolerable width is generally set larger than that of Set position reached. This signal is generally used at

the mechanical clamp or the like just before the completion of the positioning.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Set position reached JST AUXST1/bitE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Near set position NEAR AUXST1/bitF

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

493

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the automatic operation mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the manual operation mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the JOG operation mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the reference position return mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the basic point initialization setting mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the incremental mode has been selected.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred requiring the power to be turned ON again after the cause is removed.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred which can be released by the Master reset (MRST) signal after the

cause is removed.

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- TUS 2

AUXST2 G12682 G12688 G12694 G12700 G12706 G12712 G12718 G12724

R2002 R2008 R2014 R2020 R2026 R2032 R2038 R2044

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In automatic operation mode AUTO AUXST2/bit0

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In manual operation mode MANO AUXST2/bit1

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In JOG operation mode JO AUXST2/bit2

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In reference position return mode ZRNO AUXST2/bit4

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In basic point initialization setting

mode AZSO AUXST2/bit6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A In incremental mode SO AUXST2/bit7

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Alarm 1 AL1 AUXST2/bit8

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Alarm 2 AL2 AUXST2/bit9

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

494

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that an operation alarm or absolute position alarm has occurred.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the axis moved beyond the tolerable amount while the control power was OFF in the absolute

position system.

[Function][Operation]

This signal informs that the battery voltage is dropping.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the absolute position data has been lost in the absolute position system.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that in the absolute position system the basic point initialization setting has completed normally, and

that the absolute position coordinates have been established.

[Function][Operation]

This signal indicates that the basic point initialization setting has not finished normally in the absolute position system.

[Function][Operation]

This signal shows a 9-digit binary No. of the present station.

This signal outputs the station position when Set position reached (JST) is ON, "0" when Set position reached is OFF.

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Alarm 4 AL4 AUXST2/bitA

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Absolute position power shutoff

movement over ABS AUXST2/bitC

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Battery voltage dropping BAT AUXST2.bitB

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Absolute position data loss ZSN AUXST2/bitD

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Initialization setting completed ZSF AUXST2/bitE

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Initialization setting error complet-

ed ZSE AUXST2/bitF

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- TUS 3

AUXST3 G12681 G12687 G12693 G12699 G12705 G12711 G12717 G12723

R2001 R2007 R2013 R2019 R2025 R2031 R2037 R2043

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Station position 1 to 256 STO1 to STO256

AUXST3/bit0 to 8

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.12 PLC Axis Indexing

495

[Function][Operation]

This signal turns ON when the axis is within the setting range of the respective position switches.

[Function][Operation]

This signal turns ON when the Operation start signal is turned ON for non PLC indexing axis.

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STA- TUS 4

AUXST4 G12680 G12686 G12692 G12698 G12704 G12710 G12716 G12722

R2000 R2006 R2012 R2018 R2024 R2030 R2036 R2042

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Position switch 1 to 15 PSW1 to PSW15

AUXST4/bit0 to 7 AUXST3/bit9 to F

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

bit

A Start not possible NST AUXST4/bitB

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

496

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis 5.13.1 Outline

This is the function which dynamically switches the drive unit control method between the control from NC and the

control from PLC. In addition, switching between the NC axis control and the indexing axis control is possible when a

PLC axis is set as the indexing axis.

5.13.2 Specification

The PLC switching signal (CHGPLCn) preforms switching between the NC axis control and PLC axis control. When it is

turned OFF, an axis is controlled as the NC axis. When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC

axis. In addition, the current control mode is output to the In PLC axis control signal (PLCMODn) as OFF during the NC

axis control, and as ON state during the PLC axis control.

The axis switching invalid signal (AXCHGISn) informs of the state that the NC axis control and PLC axis control cannot

be switched. Confirm this signal is OFF, and then switch the PLC axis switching signal ON/OFF.

When switching the PLC switching signal ON/OFF while the axis switching invalid signal is ON, the alarm "M01 NC/PLC

axis switch illegal 1250" will occur (*). After that, when axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF, the control will be

switched and the alarm will be released. Returning the state of the PLC axis switching signal also releases the alarm.

If the axis control is switched during motion, the switching will be realized after the command has completed and the axis

switching invalid status has been turned OFF.

The axis switching invalid signal will be turned ON when the valid axis of the NC/PLC axis switching is in the following

conditions.

- While the axis is in motion

- During the Servo OFF

- While removing the axis

- While the axis is stopped with override zero

- While the axis is stopped with interlock

- During the current limit

- During the droop release

- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command

- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the

program

- During the H/W OT, or soft limit

(*) When an alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch illegal 1250" occurs, the NC axis name is displayed regardless of its

control mode.

Switching

Switching requirements

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

497

Timing of axis switching

(1) The switching signal is turned OFF to ON, and the axis switching invalid signal is OFF (switching is permitted).

Therefore the axis changes over to the PLC axis control state and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned ON.

(2) The PLC axis switching signal is turned OFF, but the axis switching invalid signal is ON (switching is prohibited).

Therefore the axis does not change over to the NC axis control. An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch illegal 1250"

will occur.

(3) The axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. And then it will be switched

to the PLC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned ON.

Commands can be issued only from the mode in control.

When a command is issued from PLC during the NC axis control, the command from PLC is ignored and the NC axis

command execution continues. Moreover, when the command is issued by the buffering mode, the subsequent buffer

commands are all ignored. The command from a PLC axis does not cause an alarm. Make sure the signal is in the PLC

axis control by the ladder, and then activate the switching.

When manual feed command is issued from NC during the PLC axis control, an error "M01 Operation error 0005" (*) will

occur. Then the command from NC is ignored, and the PLC axis command execution continues. Also, if the command

from NC is a program command, an error "P32 Address. Error" occurs, and the program is stopped. However, motion

commands to the other NC axes and parameter input by program do not cause any alarms.

(*) When the alarm "M01 Operation error 0005" occurs, the NC axis No. is displayed.

Commands

(1) (2)

(CHGPLCn)

(AXCHGISn)

(PLCMODEn)

(3)

0

PLC axis switching

Axis switching invalid status

In PLC axis control

Feedrate

In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

498

The command unit which is switched to the PLC axis control is the minimum command unit (#1003 iunit) of the NC axis.

Similarly, the command unit system for the inch/mm uses the unit system of the NC axis (#1040 M_inch and #1041

I_inch).

To change the command unit system with G20/G21 is invalid in the PLC axis control.

However, the command position on PLC axis I/F, machine position, remaining distance, command federate, and

machine /command position on indexing axis I/F are based on the unit of "#1042 pcinh". Therefore, the command

position and command federate are converted from the unit system, "pcinh" to "I_inch" due to the "#1041 I_inch" and

"#1042 pcinch" settings. On the contrary, the unit system for the machine position and remaining distance are converted

from "I_inch" to "pcinch". The machine position on I/F may not match with the command position because the position of

the actual NC axis is converted for output.

(Example 1) If 1000 is set to the command position for PLC axis I/F when "#1041 I_inch = 0" and "#1042 pcinh = 1";

The value on I/F is based on inch unit, and on the NC control is based on millimeter unit, so the positioning will

be at 2.540 mm, the result of inch -> millimeter conversion of the command position, which is 1000 (0.1000

inches). The machine position on I/F will be at 1000 (0.1000 inches), the result of millimeter -> inch conversion

of the current NC axis position, which is 2.540 mm.

(Example 2) If 1000 is set to the command position for OLC axis I/F when" #1041 I_inch = 1 "and "#1042 pcinh = 0";

The value on I/F is based on millimeter unit, and on NC control is based on inch unit, so the positioning will be

at 0.0393 inch 0.0393 inches, the result of millimeter -> inch conversion of the command position, which is

1000 (1.000 mm). The machine position on I/F will be at 999 (0.999 mm), the result of millimeter -> inch

conversion of the current NC axis position, which is 0.0393 inches.

When the PLC axis is moved, the movement speed (Fc) for relative screen, etc., is not displayed. When the other axes

are simultaneously moving, the composite speed of the axes currently in NC axis control only is displayed.

The movement speed in the PLC axis is displayed as the feedrate in the PLC monitor screen.

Command during the PLC axis control is issued using positions on the machine coordinate of the NC axis.

When the axis is moved by PLC axis, the machine values, workpiece coordinates and relative values of the NC axis are

updated. Also, the NC axis workpiece coordinates are updated when workpiece coordinates are changed by G54, etc.,

while in the PLC axis control.

If the axis is switched to the PLC axis as keeping the tool compensation amount, including the length and radius

compensation valid in the NC axis control, the compensation amount is retained. However, when the axis in the PLC

control is moved by the compensation amount, the program error "P32 ADDRESS. ERROR" will occur.

When the axis in the PLC axis control is returned to zero point, the compensation amount will be cleared.

The PLC axis which is switched to the NC axis is also displayed on the PLC axis monitor screen. However, only the

machine position is updated in the NC axis control, and other data except it will not be updated. For the switching axis,

"NC" appears on the axis type column for the switching axis.

Control unit

Speed display

Coordinate system

Tool compensation

PLC axis monitor screen

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

499

5.13.3 Combined Functions

Function list

Function name Summary

Reset The signal of each control mode is valid.

Servo OFF The signal of each control mode is valid.

Axis detach The signal of each control mode is validated, so is the axis detachment by parameters. During switching the indexing axis, only axis detachment by parameters is valid.

Interlock The signal of each control mode is valid.

Current limit changeover The signal of each control mode is valid.

Droop release request The signal of each control mode is valid.

External deceleration The signal of each control mode is validated. However, external deceleration in the PLC axis control is valid only for the each axis external deceleration ("#1239 set11/bit6" is set to 1).

Speed monitor When individual axis speed is monitored, speed monitor is performed with the NC axis signal even if the axis is currently in the PLC axis control. Turning the PLC axis signal ON does not activate the speed monitor.

Absolute value initialization setting

Absolute value initialization can be set with the zero point initialization setting mode (AZSn) of the NC axis and the zero point initialization start (ZSTn) signal in the PLC axis control. Absolute initialization can be set with the same signal which is available in the indexing axis I/F during the indexing axis control. The PLC axis (indexing axis) signal is used to start the axis in the PLC axis control.

High accuracy control The axis in the PLC axis control is invalided.

Synchronization control When this function is set to the primary axis / secondary axis of the synchronization control, the parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error #2187" will occur when the power is turned ON.

Spindle C axis When this function is set to the axis designated as the spindle C axis, the parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error #2187" will occur when the power is turned ON.

Ready OFF The ready OFF signal of each axis on the PLC indexing axis is always invalid.

Machine lock

The machine lock signal of NC axis enables to update the current position without moving the axis through the PLC axis command in the PLC axis control. The machine lock status does not switch while the axis is moving. However, the automatic machine lock signal is invalid.

Machine error compensation (backlash error compensation, pitch error compen- sation, thermal expansion compensa- tion, external machine error compensation)

Compensation amount is set for the NC axis. The set amount is valid even when the control mode is switched, and it can be set in either mode regardless of the control mode. The backlash error compensation during the indexing axis control will be always G0 backlash compensation regardless of the command mode. It is switched to the G0 or G1 backlash compensation during the NC axis control depending on the command mode.

Stroke end (over travel)

The axis is stopped by the OT signal of the NC axis even during the PLC control. It is impossible to switch the axis during stroke end, so release the alarm to execute the switching. If the axis switched to the PLC axis causes the alarm of H/W or soft limit, an alarm"T01 Cycle start prohibit 106"will occur, and it prevents automatic operation start. If the axis which is switched to the PLC axis causes a limit alarm at the time of automatic start, an alarm "T02 Feed hold 202"occurs and the program will be stopped.

Soft limit

Parameters are shared by the NC axis control and PLC axis control. The axis control can not be switched when soft limit is occurring, so release the alarm and execute switching. Resetting NC axis releases the alarms during the NC axis control, and resetting PLC axis releases the alarms during the PLC axis control. However, regardless of the con- trol mode, the soft limit IB and IIB can be released by resetting the NC axis. When the axis which is switched to the PLC axis causes the soft limit alarm, "T01 Cycle start prohibit 106"will occur, and it prevents automatic start. When the axis which is switched to the PLC axis causes the limit alarm, an alarm"T02 Feed hold 202"occurs, and the program will be stopped. When the range is moved to the outside of the limit to the inside during PLC control, the clamp with "#2021 out_f"is not executed, and the axis is operated at the com- manded speed.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

500

Position switch (PSW)

The NC axis PSW and PLC axis PSW are both valid any time, and the signal turns ON/OFF in their own PSW ranges. The PLC axis No. after being switched is set on the PLC axis PSW. The PLC axis PSW can be switched to the indexing axis. However, the indexing axis PSW is valid only while the indexing axis is being switched, and the signal is not output during the NC axis control even the axis is in the range of the PSW.

PLC window Data can be read and write by specifying the NC axis No. regardless of its control modes. When the PLC axis No. is specified, the alarm of illegal data type will occur.

Programmable parameter input Specifying the desired NC axis No. can set programmable parameter input regardless of its control modes.

Manual absolute The command from the PLC axis is counted as the manual interrupt amount. When the manual ABC signal is ON, execution of the absolute value command from NC af- ter being moved by the PLC axis updates the program coordinate.

Acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination

The requirements for the acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination are different between NC axes and PLC axes. The acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination for a NC axis can be performed in "#1200 G0_acc (rapid traverse)", "#1201 G1_acc(cutting feed)", "#1205 G0bdcc(before G0 interpolation)" or high accuracy control (G61.1). The acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination for a PLC axis is can be performed in "#21101 add01/bit0 (rapid traverse)" or "#21101 add01/bit1 (cutting feed)", and in "#1361 aux_add (automatic operation mode)" for a PLC index- ing axis.

Origin zero

The axis on the PLC axis control can be selected; however, the absolute value and workpiece coordinate will not be zero value even if the origin zero function is applied. When the origin zero is applied to the axis in the PLC axis control, the axis name will be no longer highlighted. To perform the origin zero, set as the NC axis control.

Counter zero The counter zero function can be applied during the PLC axis control. The counter zero for a NC axis signal is also valid.

Function name Summary

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

501

All the PLC axis and indexing axis signal are invalid in the NC axis control.

The validity of control signals which are available for each NC axis in the PLC axis (indexing axis) control is as follows.

Signal list

Signal name Abbreviation Valid/Invalid

Control axis detach DTCH

Servo OFF *SVFn

Mirror image MI

External deceleration + *+EDTn

External deceleration - *-EDTn

Automatic interlock + *+AITn

Automatic interlock - *-AITn

Manual interlock + *+MITn

Manual interlock - *-MITn

Automatic machine lock AMLK

Manual machine lock MMLKn

Feed axis selection + +Jn

Feed axis selection - -Jn

Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid MAEn

Control axis detach 2 DTCH2n

Current limit ILCn

Droop release request DORn

Zero point initialization set mode AZSn

Zero point initialization set start ZSTn

Unclamp completion UCLPFn

Multi-step speed monitor request MSORn

Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 MSOMI1n

Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 MSOMI2n

Counter zero CNT0n

External machine coordinate system compensation data -

Each axis reference position selection -

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount -

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount -

External deceleration speed selection -

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

502

The validity of status signals which are available for each NC axis in the PLC axis (indexing axis) control is as follows.

Signal name Abbreviation Valid/Invalid

Servo ready RDYn

Axis selection AXn

In axis plus motion MVPn

In axis minus motion MVMn

1st reference position reached ZP1n

2nd reference position reached ZP2n

3rd reference position reached ZP3n

4th reference position reached ZP4n

Near reference position NRFn

NC axis up-to-speed ARRFn

Zero point initialization set completed ZSFn

Zero point initialization set error completed ZSEn

In zero point initialization ZSn

Zero point initialization incomplete ZLSn

In current limit ILIn

Current limit reached ILAn

Unclamp command UCLPn

In-position INPn

In multi-step speed monitor MSOEn

Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1 MSOMO1n

Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2 MSOMO2n

Thermal expansion compensation amount -

Servo motor temperature -

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

503

5.13.4 Parameter settings

This NC axis / PLC axis switching function sets the PLC No. to be switched to a NC axis. The I/F No. of a vacant PLC

axis will be used. If this function is not used, set to 0.

When a PLC axis I/F No. is designated twice or more, the parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur.

Assuming there are 3 NC-exclusive axes, 1 PLC-exclusive axis and 1 switching axis, and if the 4th NC axis is switched to

the 6th PLC axis, set the PLC axis No. "6" which is switched to the A axis side as the following. For this example, when

"1" is set to "#2187 chgPLCax", a parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur when the power is turned

ON. When the axis is changed to the PLC axis, the command will be issued using the 6th I/F of the PLC axis.

No. Item Details Setting range

2187(PR) chgPLCax PLC axis switch- ing axis No.

When the NC/PLC axis switching is used, this sets the I/F No. of the PLC axis to be switched. The I/F No. of a vacant PLC axis will be used. When it is not used, set to 0.

0 to 8

Switching between NC axis and PLC axis

$1 PLC #1001 syson 1 1 #1002 axisno 4 1

1 2 3 4 5 #1013 axname X Y Z A 1 #1021 mcp_no 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 #2187 chgPLCax 0 0 0 6 0 #12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 0 0

G1137 R1900

+1370 R4200

: G11410 R1940

+1410 R4240

NC PLC

X Y Z 1

Q17

A

PLC axis I/F 1st axis

6th axis

NC axis command PLC axis command

Switching axis PLC 6th axis

NC axis PLC axis

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

504

Assuming there are 3 NC-exclusive axes, 2 PLC-exclusive axis and 1 switching axis, and if the A axis is switched to the

8th PLC axis, and the 8th PLC axis is used as the 2nd indexing axis, set the PLC axis No. "8" and indexing axis No. "2"

which are switched to the A side as the following. In this example, if axis Nos. "1" to "3" are set to "#2187 chgPLCax", a

parameter error "Y05 Initial parameter error 2187" will occur when the power is turned ON. After the axis is changed to

the PLC indexing axis, the command is issued using the 8th PLC axis and 2nd indexing axis's I/F.

Switching between NC axis and PLC indexing axis

$1 PLC #1001 syson 1 1 #1002 axisno 4 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 #1013 axname X Y Z A 1 2 3 #1021 mcp_no 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 #2187 chgPLCax 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 #12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 2 0 0 1

G11370 R1900

+1370 R4200

G11378 R1908

+1378 R4208

G11386 R1916

+1386 R4216

: G12660 R1980

+2660 R4280

G12680 R2000

+2680 R4300

G12686 R2006

2686 R4306

PLC NC

X Y Z A

Q17

1 2 3

PLC axis I/F 1st axis

2nd axis

3rd axis

8th axis

PLC Indexing axis I/F 1st axis

2nd axis

PLC axis command

Switching axis 8th PLC axis /

2nd Indexing axis

NC axis

NC axis command

PLC axis 1st Indexing axis

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

505

When switching between the NC axis and PLC axis, the parameters in the following chart are valid only in either NC or

PLC axis mode. The parameters except the following are common to both the NC axis control and the PLC axis control.

Parameters which turn valid only when the axis is controlled as the NC axis:

Parameters which turn valid only when the axis is controlled as the PLC axis (common to non-switching PLC axes

including PLC indexing axes):

Operation parameter

Parameter No. Operations

#1200 G0_acc Select acceleration/deceletion mode of rapid traverse when the axis is set to NC axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

#1201 G1_acc Select acceleration/deceleration mode of cutting feed when the axis is set to NC axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

#1205 G0bdcc Set the G0 command to be acceleration and deceleration before interporation regardless of validity/invalidity of high accuracy control when the axis is set to NC axis.

Parameter No. Operations

#21101 add01/bit0 Select acceleration/deceleration mode of rapid traverse when the axis is set to PLC axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

#21101 add01/bit1 Select acceleration/deceletion mode of cutting feed when the axis is set to PLC axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

#1361 aux_add Select acceleration/deceletion mode of automatic operation mode when the axis is set to PLC indexing axis to be with constant time or constant angle of inclination.

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

506

5.13.5 Interface with PLC

[Function]

This signal informs that the switching between NC axis and PLC axis cannot be executed.

[Operation]

This signal turns ON when the following conditions apply to the axis which is valid for switching between NC axis and

PLC axis. When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while this signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/PLC

axis switch illegal 1250 will occur.

- While the axis is in motion

- During the Servo OFF

- While removing the axis

- While the axis is stopped for interlock

- While the axis is stopped for override

- During the current limit

- During the droop release

- The axis is stopped because of feed hold during the program command

- The axis is stopped before completing all the axes' movement even more than two axes are commanded by the

program

- During the H/W OT, soft limit

[Related signals]

(1) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

[Function]

This signal informs that the mode is PLC axis control for NC axis/PLC axis switching function.

[Operation]

This signal turns OFF during the NC axis control and turns ON during the PLC axis control.

[Related signals]

(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)

(2) PLC axis switching (CHGPLCn)

CNC CPU -> PLC CPU interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A AXIS SWITCHING INVALID

STATUS AXCHGISn

X416 X436 X456 X476 X496 X4B6 X4D6 X4F6

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X516 X536 X556 X576 X596 X5B6 X5D6 X5F6

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A IN PLC AXIS CONTROL PLCMODn

X417 X437 X457 X477 X497 X4B7 X4D7 X4F7

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12th axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

X517 X537 X557 X577 X597 X5B7 X5D7 X5F7

C70 PLC Interface Manual

5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis

507

[Function]

This signal can switch between NC axis and PLC axis.

[Operation]

When this signal is turned ON, the NC axis is controlled as the PLC axis. When it is turned OFF, it is controlled as the NC

axis.

Switch this signal after confirming the axis switching invalid signal is OFF.

When switching between NC axis and PLC axis is executed while axis switching invalid signal is ON, an alarm "M01 NC/

PLC axis switch illegal 1250" will occur. If the axis switching invalid signal is OFF with this state, NC axis and PLC axis

are switched and the alarm will be cleared.

If this signal is switched while executing the axis movement command, NC axis and PLC axis will be switched when the

command is completed and the axis switching invalid signal is turned OFF.

(1) If the PLC switching signal is turned ON when the "axis switching invalid status" signal is OFF (switching is

permitted), the NC axis changes over to the PLC axis control state, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned

ON.

(2) The NC axis does not change over to the NC axis control by turning OFF the "PLC axis switching" signal when the

"axis switching invalid status" signal is ON (where switching is prohibited). An alarm "M01 NC/PLC axis switch

illegal 1250" will occur.

(3) Axis switching invalid status signal is turned OFF when the axis movement is completed. Then the NC axis changes

over to the NC axis control, and the In PLC axis control signal will be turned OFF.

[Related signals]

(1) Axis switching invalid status (AXCHGISn)

(2) In PLC axis control (PLCMODn)

PLC CPU -> CNC CPU interface signal

Con- tact

Signal name Signal ab- breviation

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

A PLC AXIS SWITCHING CHGPLCn

Y41B Y44B Y47B Y4AB Y4DB Y50B Y53B Y56B

9th axis 10th axis 11th axis 12tha axis 13th axis 14th axis 15th axis 16th axis

Y59B Y5CB Y5FB Y62B Y65B Y68B Y6BB Y6EB

(1) (2)

(CHGPLCn)

(AXCHGISn)

(PLCMODEn)

(3)

0

PLC axis switching

Axis switching invalid status

In PLC axis control

Feedrate

In NC axis control In PLC axis control In NC axis control

5 Explanation for Each Application

MITSUBISHI CNC

508

509

6

Spindle Control

6 Spindle Control

MITSUBISHI CNC

510

Spindle speed can be directly controlled by an 8-digit S code command.

The controller selects an appropriate spindle gear stage corresponding to the 8-digit command following the S code and

outputs (spindle gear shift command) it to the machine side (PLC CPU). The controller also outputs S command data

(serial connection data) corresponding to the gear input (spindle gear select input) and spindle speed specified by the

machine side (PLC CPU).

6.1 Related Parameters The PLC can have up to four gear stages.

The table below lists the four gear stages and the corresponding parameters.

(Note 1) The upper line shows the parameter name, and the bottom line shows the parameter No.

(Note 2) Set the parameter for the gear stage not being used to 0.

6.2 Connection Method To serially connect the controller and spindle controller

Parameters

Parameter name Spindle

limit speed

Maximum spindle speed

Spindle shift speed

Tap cycle maximum speed

Oriented speed

Minimum speed

Output signal

Input signal

Gear stage GR2 GR1 GI1 GI2

1 Slimt1 #3001

Smax1 #3005

Ssift1 #3009

Stap1 #3013

Sori #3021

Smin #3023

0 0 0 0

2 Slimt2 #3002

Smax2 #3006

Ssift2 #3010

Stap2 #3014

0 1 0 1

3 Slimt3 #3003

Smax3 #3007

Ssift3 #3011

Stap3 #3015

1 0 1 0

4 Slimt4 #3004

Smax4 #3008

Ssift4 #3012

Stap4 #3016

1 1 1 1

Control unit Operation panel I/O unit

OPT [Zero speed, spindle up-to-speed, orientation completion signal, etc.]

[Spindle forward run, reverse run, orientation command, etc.]

CN1A

Axis drive unit Spindle drive unit

CN1B

High-speed serial connection

C70 PLC Interface Manual

6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data

511

6.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data

Outline explanation

(1) The "S function strobe 1" (SF1n) signal is output when the spindle (S) command is issued.

(2) After the designated processes is executed by SF1n with the sequence program, the M function finish or gear

shift completion signal is returned to the controller.

(3) Data (rotation speed) corresponding to the S command is output to Spindle rotation speed input (G11160/

R1600 and G11161/R1601) with the completion signal.

(4) The values of spindle rotation speed input are transferred to spindle command rotation speed output(G+1160/

R3900 and G+1161/R3901) with PLC process. (By setting data to the spindle command rotation speed output,

the spindle can be rotated with that value. PLC program for transfer needs to be created by the user.)

(5) Spindle command rotation speed output data is transferred to the spindle drive unit with serial communication

according to the spindle parameter SOUT value.

(Note) If spindle commands from multiple part systems are issued to a spindle, the command issued later will be

applied.

G10412,G10413 R212,R213

SF11(X658) SF12(X6D8)

G10312,G10313 R112,R113

+

+

S100 ;

S150 ;

S200 ;

G11160,G11161 R1600,R1601

G+1160,G+1161 R3900,R3901

G11162,G11163 R1602,R1603

G11164,G11165 R1604,R1605

Part system 1

Operation program

Spindle parameter (SOUT) Spindle drive unit /inverter, etc.

Spindle end command data (Rotation speed: for monitor)

0: No output

1: Serial output

Spindle override Spindle gear selection Spindle stop Spindle gear shift Spindle orientation, etc.

FIN11(Y71E), FIN21(Y71F) or GFIN1(YD26)

S command completion process with PLC program (ladder)

Part system 2

(Spindle command rotation speed input: for monitor)

PLC program process (MOV)

Spindle end command data (12-bit binary: for monitor)

6 Spindle Control

MITSUBISHI CNC

512

513

7

Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

514

The following abbreviations are used in the subsequent explanations.

- Miscellaneous function (command) : M function (command)

- Spindle function (command) : S function (command)

- Tool function (command) : T function (command)

- 2nd miscellaneous function (command) : B function (command)

- Miscellaneous function strobe 1 to 4 : MF (MF1, 2, 3, 4)

- Spindle function strobe 1 to 7 : SF (SF1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)

- Tool function strobe 1 : TF (TF1)

- 2nd miscellaneous function strobe 1 : BF (BF1)

- Miscellaneous function finish 1, 2 : FIN1, FIN2

7.1 Command Format (1) The maximum number of commands that can be issued in one block are shown below.

(2) The command can have up to eight digits.

(3) A program error will not occur even if more commands than the maximum number are issued. The latter commands

will be valid.

(Example) When five M commands are issued though only four M commands can be used.

7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish After the PLC CPU (machine) finished the specified operations for the M, S, T, B commands output with automatic

operation (memory, MDI) or manual numerical commands from the CNC, the finish signal will be returned to the CNC.

However, there are two types of finish signals as shown below. Use these accordingly in one sequence.

(1) FIN1 ... CNC proceeds to next block at falling edge of finish (FIN1n) signal.

(2) FIN2 ... CNC proceeds to next block at rising edge of finish (FIN2n) signal.

The details for FIN1 and FIN2 are also described in the section "4. Explanation of Interface Signals".

Examples of the M function are given in the following section.

Function Maximum number of commands

(when released to user)

M function 4 commands

S function 7 commands (Form : Sn = xxxx)

T function 1 command

B function 1 command

M 11 M 12 M 13 M 14 M 15

The last four M commands are valid.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish

515

7.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command)

[Example of machining program]

N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ;

N002 G0Z-2000;

N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ;

[Explanation of operation]

(a) The CNC outputs the M code data m (BCD) and MFm to the PLC CPU (machine).

Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF

output timing.

(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and executes the

specified operation. Then, it turns FIN1 ON.

(c) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns MF OFF.

(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.

(e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then proceeds to the next block.

N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh N002N001 G0X10000

MF1

MF2

MF3

MF4

FIN1

(a)

Maa

Mbb

Mcc

Mdd

Mee

Mff

Mgg

Mhh

(b)

(c)

(d) (e)

t1 t2

Machining program

Axis movement

M code 1

M code 2

M code 3

M code 4

t1: User sequence process time

t2: 15 to 30 ms

Next block

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

516

7.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command)

[Example of machining program]

N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ;

N002 G0Z-20000;

N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ;

[Explanation of operation]

(a) The CNC outputs the M code data m (BCD) and MFm to the PLC CPU (machine).

Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF

output timing.

(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and executes the

specified operation. Then, it turns FIN2 ON.

(c) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned ON, and proceeds to the next block simultaneously with the turning

OFF of MF.

(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN2 OFF.

MF1

MF2

MF3

MF4

FIN2

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)t1

t2

N001 G0X N002 Z-20000 ; N003 Mee Mff

Maa

Mbb

Mcc

Mdd

Mee

Mff

Mgg

Mhh

Machining program

Axis movement

M code 1

M code 2

M code 3

M code 4

t1: User sequence process time

t2: 15 to 30 ms

Next block

C70 PLC Interface Manual

7.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish

517

7.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command)

[Explanation of operation]

The general operation is the same as "6.2.2 Operation sequence 2" on the previous page.

(a) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned OFF, and then output the next code signal and MF.

MFm

FIN2

Maa Mbb Mcc

Maa Mbb Mcc

(a) (a)

Machining program

M code n

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

518

7.3 M Code Independent Output The following four types of M codes output "M code independent output" signal (decode signals) separately from their

code signals and MF.The M code independent output is generally used with the following details, but the CNC outputs

only the decode signal, and the operation and finish signal processes, etc., are carried out by the PLC CPU (machine).

7.3.1 Operation Sequence

The "M code independent output" signal turns ON when M00, M01, M02 or M30 is commanded during automatic

operation (memory, MDI) or by the manual numerical command, and turns OFF with the "FIN1", "FIN2", "Reset 1",

"Reset 2" or "Reset & rewind" signal.

[Explanation of operation]

(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC CPU (machine).

Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF

output timing.

(b) (c) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out the specified

operation. It then confirms that the "Optional switch" is ON, and then turns "Single block" and "FIN1" ON.

(d) (e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns the MF and "M code independent output" signal

OFF. The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.

(f) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then turns "In automatic start" signal OFF.

(g) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that "In automatic start" signal has turned OFF, and then turns the "Single

block" OFF at the next automatic start.

M00 Program stop The block stop state is entered when M00 is commanded.

M01

Optional stop The block stop state is entered when M01 is commanded and the optional stop selection switch is selected.

M02, M30

Program end When M02 or M30 is commanded, "Reset" or "Reset & rewind" is returned to the CNC, and the reset state is entered.

Example of M01 process (stopping the block with the M01 command)

FIN1

MF

M01

M01

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

In automatic start

M code

M code independent output

Optional switch

Single block

Block stop state

* Turns OFF after confirming that "In automatic start" is OFF.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

7.3 M Code Independent Output

519

[Explanation of operation]

(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC CPU (machine).

Refer to the section "7.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code data and MF

output timing.

(b) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out the specified

operation. It then turns "Reset & rewind" ON.

(c) The CNC confirms that "Reset & rewind" has turned ON, then turns MF, "M code independent output" and "In

automatic start" OFF, and then starts the rewinding operation.

(d) The PLC CPU (machine) confirms the "In reset" or "In rewind" signals, and then turns the "Reset & rewind"

signal OFF.

Example of M02 process (carrying out "Reset & rewind" with M02 command)

FIN1

MF

M02

M02

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Reset state In automatic start

M code

M code independent output

Reset & rewind

In reset (In rewind)

* Turns OFF after confirming "In reset" or "In rewind" signal.

* FIN does not turn ON.

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

520

7.4 Axis Movement and M Commands If an M command is issued in the same block as a movement command, whether to process the M command

simultaneously with the movement command or to process it after the movement is finished, depends on the "Movement

command finish (DEN)" signal output from the CNC. When processing M command after the movement is finished, the

"Movement command finish" (DEN) signal is inserted in the startup condition of M function.

Example: Processing the spindle forward rotation and reverse rotation simultaneously without DEN, while processing the

spindle stop with DEN.

Axis movement and general M command (To execute M command after movement command is finished)

FIN1

MF

G01X

G01X F Maa G01X

G01X

Maa

Machining program

Axis movement

M code

Movement command finish

M command execution timing when not using "Movement command finish" signal

M command execution

< >

< >

< > M3

M4

M5

MF1

MF1

MF1 DEN

[= K3 G10304(R104)]

[= K4 G10304(R104)]

[= K5 G10304(R104)]

Spindle forward run

Spindle reverse run

Spindle stop

C70 PLC Interface Manual

7.5 Precautions

521

(a) When the M code independent output command is issued in the same block as a movement command, the M code

independent output will be output after the movement command is finished.

(b) Even when the M code independent output command is issued without movement command, it will be output after

the axis movement in the previous command block is finished.

(Note 1) Refer to the section "7.3 M Code Independent Output" for details on the PLC CPU (machine) process for the M

code independent output.

7.5 Precautions (1) M code data and MF output timing (Also applies to S, T, B signal)

The M code data m and MFm are output simultaneously to the PLC CPU.

(2) The finish signals (FIN1, FIN2) are commonly used for the M, S, T, B functions, so turn them ON under the conditions

where all function operations have been finished.

(3) When the "M function lock" (AFLn) signal is turned ON, the M, S, T, B functions (including M commands in fixed

cycle) issued during automatic operation (memory, MDI) and manual numerical command, will not be executed. In

other words, the code signal, MF, SF, TF and BF signals will not be output (updated). However, when the M code

independent output (M00, M01, M02, M30) is commanded, the "M code independent output", "M code data" and

MF will be output as usual.

(4) The 2nd miscellaneous (B) function can be selected from address A, B or C using the setup parameters. The "B

function" refers to when address "B" is selected.

Axis movement and M code independent output command

G01XM00

MF

G01X

M00

M00 M00

M00 G01X Machining program

Axis movement

M code

Movement command finish

For (b)For (a)

M code independent output

7 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions

MITSUBISHI CNC

522

523

8

Exclusive Instructions

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

524

NC exclusive instruction is limited to its application for the processes which may be difficult to perform only with basic

instruction or function instruction.

NC exclusive instructions include:

(1) ATC exclusive instruction (ATC)

With this instruction, ATC, such as magazine index control, tool change by arm, etc. is performed.

ATC exclusive instructions include:

- Tool No. search

- Tool change

- Tool table forward/reverse run

- Pointer (which displays magazine index position) forward/reverse run

- Tool data read/write, etc.

(2) Rotary body control instruction (ROT)

With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function

as a ring counter is realized.

This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret, etc. based

on the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC dedicated instruction, or used when controlling the rotary

body position.

(3) Another CPU module's device write instruction (DDWR)

An instruction to write data from the PLC CPU to another CPU module's device

(4) Another CPU module's device read instruction (DDRD)

An instruction to read the data of another CPU module's device to the PLC CPU.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

525

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 8.1.1 Outline of ATC Control

The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) control, also called magazine control, is executed in the following two ways:

(1) Mechanical random control

With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control method determines

the direction of magazine rotation, number of steps, etc. for index of the magazine, according to the given

command.

Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) has a one-on-one corresponding relation.

Usually, the "intermediate pot" that supports the transfer of the tool is provided between the spindle and the

magazine.

This control is possible by not using ATC instruction, but ROT instruction only.

(2) Memory random control

With the information of magazine rotation, or magazine position from the machine, the control method controls

tool No. stored in the memory.

For index of the magazine, the direction of magazine rotation and number of steps, etc. are determined by the

given T command and tool No. stored in the memory.

Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) does not always have a one-on-one corresponding relation.

Usually, the "intermediate pot" is not provided.

8.1.2 ATC Operation

The motions related to ATC operation can be largely divided into the following four motions:

(1) Index of magazine ....... (ATC-Function No.1, Function No.2, Function No.5, Function No.6, Function No.7,

Function No.8)

(2) Tool change (arm, or the like is used) ....... (ATC-Function No.3, Function No.4)

(3) Transfer of tool to intermediate pot or arm ....... (Normal function instructions such as MOV, XCH are used)

(4) Others ....... (ATC-Function No.9, Function No.10, Function No.11)

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

526

8.1.3 Explanation of Terminology

8.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines

When the floating pointer method or tool table rotation method is selected on the tool registration screen,

correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates; when the fixed

pointer method is selected, it does not change.

(1) Pointer: Points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No. are previously recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer serves as "ring counter" for control of magazine position.

(2) Fixed pointer method:

This is the type with tool pots numbered and the relationship between tool pot and tool No. is fixed if the magazine is rotated. When the tool table is rotated, fixed pointer does not functionally differ from variable pointer method.

(3) Variable pointer method:

This is the type with numbered fixed position on magazine and the relationship between magazine No. and tool No. changes when the magazine rotates.

7 4

2

5

8 312

2

5 83

4

2

5

8 312

6

2

5 83

12

9

CW

CW

12 1

5

4

3

2 1 2

3

4

5

12

12 1 2

4

3 12

1 2

4

3

One step in CW direction

One step in CW direction

Pot No. Fixed pointer Relationship between pot No. and tool No. does not change.Tool No.

Variable pointer Relationship between pot No. and tool No. changes.

Magazine No. (fixed)

11

9 2

3 4

678 5

147 10 1

128 311 1212 2

111

10

5 4 3 2

99 1

1 1 11 11 2 2 12 12 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6

Magazine No. Pot No.

Tool No.

[TOOL REGISTRATION]

HEAD NEXT1

MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D

Magazine No. (floating pointer method, tool table rotation method) or pot No. (Fixed pointer method)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

527

8.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions

The use order of the ATC and ROT instructions during the T command or tool change command is shown below:

The relationship between the tool number search instruction and rotary body indexing instruction when the tool table

rotation method or variable pointer method is used is explained below.

(1) When indexing tool number 8 in the situation given in the above chart,

(a) In the tool table rotation method, the tool number search instruction outputs 3.

(b) In the variable pointer method, the tool number search instruction outputs 7.

(2) The tool number search instruction output result is used by the rotary body indexing instruction to find the rotation

direction, the number of steps, etc.

(a) In the tool table rotation system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship

between current value 0 (pointer 0) and tool number search output result 3.

(b) In the variable pointer method, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from the relationship

between current value 4 (pointer 4) and tool number search output result 7, as in (a) above.

In the fixed pointer system, the pointer is fixed to 0 and the ring counter of 0 to n-1 (n is the number of

magazines), separate from the pointer, is controlled. The counter value is used as the current position.

T command Matching place No.

Number of the matches

Error process

Pointer or ring counter value

Rotary body indexing Turning

direction

Number of steps, etc.

Magazine turn Fixed pointer method

Ring counter control

Pointer forward run /reverse run

Tool table forward run /reverse run

Variable pointer method

Tool change

Arbitrary position tool change

Magazine stop

Tool change command

Tool No. search

Tool No. AND operation search

ATC instruction Function No.1

ATC instruction Function No.2

ROT instruction Function No.1

ROT instruction Function No.3

ATC instruction Function No.5 Function No.K6

ATC instruction Function No.7 Function No.8

ATC instruction Function No.3

ATC instruction Function No.4

10

7

6 5

4

3

2

1 9

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

: : : : : : : :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4

: : : : : : : :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Current position

Current position

Current position

Target position

Tool table rotation method Variable pointer method

Tool No. Pointer

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

528

8.1.6 Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction

(1) Available devices

(Note) Local devices are not available.

(2) Setting data

(3) (S1) Control data for request data

Setting data

Available devices

Internal user device/ Internal system device

File register

Indirect desig- nation

Link direct device (J \ )

Unit access device (U \G )

Index register

(Z )

Constant

Others

Bit

Word

Bit Word Bit

Word

Bit Word

Decimal, hexa-

decimal (K,H)

Real number string

Digit desig- nation

A

Digit desig- nation

B

Digit desig- nation

n1

S1

D1 (Note)

(Note)

D2 (Note)

(Note)

Setting data

Setting details Setting range Setting side Data type

n1 Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16 For CPU No. 2 to 4: H3E1 to H3E3

3E1h to 3E3h User BIN16 Bit

S1 Head device that stores the control data for request data User Word

D1 Head device that stores the control data for response data System Word

D2 Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is completed. System Bit

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

S1+0 Size of request data Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the control data for request data.

3 to 6 User

S1+1 Function No. Designate the No. of function to command. 1 to 11 User

S1+2 R No. to store the number of tools in magazine

Designate the No. of file that stores the number of tools in magazine.

0 to 8191 User

S1+3 to

S1+6 Argument 1, 2

Stores the arguments that correspond to the designated function No. Refer to "(1) Control data for request data" in "8.1.7 Functions".

User

D.ATC n1 S1 D1 D2

DP.ATC n1 S1 D1 D2

D.ATC

DP.ATC

Instruction

Instruction

[Instruction]symbol [Execution]condition

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

529

(4) (D1) Control data for response data

(Note) For error codes other than "0", see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

(5) (D2) Completion device

(6) Availability of instruction execution for each type

(Note) Completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, is not recognized in the sequence program (execution type) with

long cycle time. The device is basically programmed in a scan.

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

D1+0 Completion status

Stores the status when an instruction has been completed. 0: No error (Successfully completed) Others: Error codes (Note)

System

D1+1 Size of response data Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the control data for response data.

0 to 2 System

D1+2 Response 1 Stores the response data that corresponds to the designated function No. Refer to "(2) Control data for response data" in "8.1.7 Functions".

System D1+3 Response 2

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

D2+0

Completion device

Goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction has been completed.

0/1 System

D2+1 Goes ON with D2+0 upon abnormal completion. 0/1 System

No. Type of execution Availability

1 Initial program Available

2 Scan program Available

3 Fixed-interval program Available (Note)

4 Interrupt program Available (Note)

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

530

8.1.7 Functions

This section explains the functions to execute ATC (Automatic Tool Change) control for the target CPU. D(P).ATC

instruction has 11 functions. Operations of the instruction are decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1).

Size of the request data stored in (S1+0) is also decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1).

Contents and numbers of data, stored in the control data for request data, differ according to the function No. in (S1+1).

Contents and numbers of responses, stored in control data for response data, also differ.

The following tables show the contents of the control data for request data, which are set according to the function No.,

and the contents of responses, which are stored in the control data for response data.

(1) Control data for request data

(S1+0) Size of data

(S1+1) (S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4)

Function No. Type of instruction

3 1 Tool No. search

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine

Tool No. to be searched (BCD)

-

4 2 Tool No. AND operation search

AND data

3 3 Tool change R No. to specify the position of tool change

-

4 4 Arbitrary position tool change

Magazine No. to be changed

3 5 Forward run of pointer R No. to specify pointer in magazine

-

3 6 Reverse run of pointer -

3 7 Forward run of tool table R No. to specify the number of

tools in magazine

-

3 8 Reverse run of tool table

-

3 9 Tool data read Magazine No. to be read -

4 10 Tool data write Magazine No. to which data is written

Data to be written

3 11 Automatic tool data write

Default value -

(S1+0) Size of data

(S1+1) (S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4) (S1+5) (S1+6)

Function No. Type of instruction

4 1 Tool No. search

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine

Tool No. to be searched (BCD)

- -

6 2 Tool No. AND operation search

AND data

3 3 Tool change R No. to specify the position of tool change

- - -

4 4 Arbitrary position tool change

Magazine No. to be changed

- -

3 5 Forward run of pointer R No. to specify pointer in magazine

- - -

3 6 Reverse run of pointer - - -

3 7 Forward run of tool table

R No. to specify the number of tools in magazine

- - -

3 8 Reverse run of tool table

- - -

3 9 Tool data read Magazine No. to be read

- - -

5 10 Tool data write Magazine No. to which data is written

Data to be written -

4 11 Automatic tool data write

Default value - -

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

531

(2) Control data for response data

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

1 Tool No. search

Completion status

Size of response data; 2 Search result Number of the matches

2 Tool No. AND operation search Size of response data; 2 Search result Number of the matches

3 Tool change Size of response data; 0 - -

4 Arbitrary position tool change Size of response data; 0 - -

5 Forward run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -

6 Reverse run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -

7 Forward run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -

8 Reverse run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -

9 Tool data read Size of response data; 1 Read data -

10 Tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

11 Automatic tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

1 Tool No. search

Completion status

Size of response data; 2 Search result Number of the matches

2 Tool No. AND operation search Size of response data; 2 Search result Number of the matches

3 Tool change Size of response data; 0 - -

4 Arbitrary position tool change Size of response data; 0 - -

5 Forward run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -

6 Reverse run of pointer Size of response data; 0 - -

7 Forward run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -

8 Reverse run of tool table Size of response data; 0 - -

9 Tool data read Size of response data; 2 Read data

10 Tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

11 Automatic tool data write Size of response data; 0 - -

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

532

8.1.8 Operation Outline

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).ATC instruction is executed.

If (D2+1) has been turned ON, the instruction is abnormally completed. Then the data is stored in completion status

(D1+0). For the values stored, see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

END ENDENDEND

ON

ON

ON

Sequence program

D(P).ATC instruction

Reception of D(P).ATC instruction

CNC-CNC exclusive communication (0.888ms cycle time)

Transfer

D(P).ATC instruction received

Completion device (D2+0)

Device that display the status when an instruction has been completed (D2+1)

Only upon abnormal completion

1 scan

D(P).ATC instruction executed

Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

533

8.1.9 Errors

SM0 is turned ON and the error code is stored in SD0 when:

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that has already been reserved or has not been

mounted.

(Error code: 2110 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the host CPU itself.

(Error code: 2114 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that does not correspond to the exclusive

instructions in this section.

(Error code: 2117 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the invalid value (not within 3E0H to 3E3H).

(Error code: 4100 )

CNC CPU outputs the following error codes to the completion status when:

- An invalid function No. (out of the range 0 to 11) was specified. (Error code: 3200)

- An invalid R No. to store the number of tools in magazine (out of the range 4710 to 4714) was specified. (Error code:

3201)

- An invalid tool No. (negative value or over the number of tools) is specified.(Error code: 3202)

- An invalid magazine No. was specified. (Error code: 3203)

- An invalid number of arguments was specified. (Error code: 3207)

8.1.10 Program Example

(1) Executes an ATC instruction (tool No. search) to CPU No.2 (Q17nNCCPU) when X0 is turned ON.

X0

M10 M11

M11

SM771

MOV K1 D101

MOV K4710 D102

MOV R220 D103

MOV K3 D100

DP.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M10

Program upon normal completion

Program upon abnormal completion

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

534

8.1.11 File Register Allocation and Parameters for ATC Control

(1) File registers for ATC control

File registers used for ATC control are as shown below.

The number enclosed with brackets "( )" is a relative address of the shared device.

R register for corresponding file

Remarks (data type)

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine

Specification T4-digit/T8-digit

T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T8-digit T8-digit

ATC control parameters R4700 (2210)

Number of magazine designation

R4710 (2220)

R4711 (2221)

R4712 (2222) Binary

Pointer designation R4715 (2225)

R4716 (2226)

R4717 (2227) Binary

Spindle tool R4720 (2230)

R4720 R4721 (2230) (2231)

R4730 (2240)

R4730 R4731 (2240) (2241)

- - BCD

Standby 1 tool R4721 (2231)

R4722 R4723 (2232) (2233)

R4731 (2241)

R4732 R4733 (2242) (2243)

- - BCD

Standby 2 tool R4722 (2232)

R4724 R4725 (2234) (2235)

R4732 (2242)

R4734 R4735 (2244) (2245)

- - BCD

Standby 3 tool R4723 (2233)

R4726 R4727 (2236) (2237)

R4733 (2243)

R4736 R4737 (2246) (2247)

- - BCD

Standby 4 tool R4724 (2234)

R4728 R4729 (2238) (2239)

R4734 (2244)

R4738 R4739 (2248) (2249)

- - BCD

AUX data R4748 Binary (0 to 99)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

535

(Note 1) The maximum number of tools to be set is 80 per magazine.

(Note 2) Tool registration screen is provided only for No.1 magazine.

(2) Contents of control parameter

R register for corresponding file

Remarks (data type)

Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine

Specification T4-digit/T8-digit

T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit

Magazine tool data

MG1 R4750 (2260)

R4750 R4751 (2260) (2261)

R4990 (2500)

R4990 R4991 (2500) (2501)

R5230 (2740)

R5230 R5231 (2740) (2741)

BCD

MG2 R4751 (2261)

R4752 R4753 (2262) (2263)

R4991 (2501)

R4992 R4993 (2502) (2503)

R5231 (2741)

R5232 R5233 (2742) (2743)

BCD

MG3 R4752 (2262)

R4754 R4755 (2230) (2231)

R4992 (2502)

R4994 R4995 (2504) (2505)

R5232 (2742)

R5234 R5235 (2744) (2745)

BCD

: : : : : : : :

MG79 R4828 (2338)

R4906 R4907 (2416) (2417)

R5068 (2578)

R5146 R5147 (2656) (2657)

R5308 (2818)

R5386 R5387 (2896) (2897)

BCD

MG80 R4829 (2339)

R4908 R4909 (2418) (2419)

R5069 (2579)

R5148 R5149 (2658) (2659)

R5309 (2819)

R5388 R5389 (2898) (2899)

BCD

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0R4700 (2210)

Max. number of standby displayed: 4

0:T4-digit 1:T8-digit

0:Magazine starts from "1" 1:Magazine starts from "0"

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

536

8.1.12 Details of Each Instruction

Searches for the tool No. stored in the magazine (tool data table) and outputs the number of the matches as well as their

location in the tool data table. If two or more tool Nos. are found, the location of tool No. closest to the pointer is output.

Tool No. search

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

D100 D101 D102 D103

K3 K1

K4710 K234

10

2

234 (0) 567 (1) 100 (2) 234 (3)

101 (8) 102 (9)

D200 D201 D202

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

3 2

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 2

Two locations have data "234". The location "3", which is closer to the pointer No., is output.

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine Tool No. to be searched

Matched at (3) in tool data table

Number of data found: 2

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

Tool data table head (fixed)

Based on the output result, the rotation direction, the number of steps, etc. are figured out by using the ROT instruction.

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

(Note 1) Pointer and location are numbered from the tool data table head as 0,1,2,...9.

(Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

537

The function of this instruction is as same as that of the tool number search instruction (ATC K1). Search data and in-

magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search.

Tool No. AND operation search

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

D104

D200 D201 D202

K4 K2

K4710 234

10

2

2001 (0) 1002 (1) 3003 (2) 2004 (3)

1009 (8) 2010 (9)

HF000

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

3 3

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 2

Three locations have data "2***". The location "3", which is closest to the pointer No., is output.

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine Tool No. to be searched

Matched at (3) in tool data table

Number of data found: 3

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

Tool data table head (fixed)

Based on the output result, the rotation direction, the number of steps, etc. are figured out by using the ROT instruction.

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

AND data

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

(Note 1) Pointer and location are numbered from the tool data table head as 0,1,2,...9.

(Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

538

This instruction is used to update the contents in the memory (R register) after a spindle tool and a magazine index tool

have been exchanged by the ATC arm, etc.

Tool change

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

R4720

R4752

D200 D201

K3 K3

K4710 K4720

10

2

1000 (0) 1001 (1) 1002 (2) 1003 (3)

1008 (8) 1009 (9)

1234

Number of arguments

Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

Change the content "1234" in R4720 (R No. to specify tool change position) with the content "1002" in R4752, which is designated by R4715 (R No. to specify pointer position).

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine R No. to specify the position of tool change

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

Tool data table head (fixed)

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

(Note 1) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

539

In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur, however, that tool

change is required at other stations (tool change at spare tool change position, for example). This instruction is used in

such a case.

Arbitrary position tool change

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

D104

R4720

K4 K4

K4710 K4720

10

2

1000 (0) 1001 (1) 1002 (2) 1003 (3)

1009 (9)

K5

1234

1004 (4) 1005 (5)

1007 (7) 1008 (8)

1006 (6)

8 9

MG0 1 2 3 4 6 7

9 10

MG1 2 3 4 6 7 8

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine R No. to specify the position of tool change

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

(Note 1) Tool change position differs depending on whether magazine No. starts from "0" or "1". However, the substantial consequence does not differ.

(Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

Magazine No. to be changed

Tool data table head

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

Spindle tool in this example

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

540

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actual magazine position

when the magazine rotates in forward direction.

Forward run of pointer

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

K3 K5

K4710 K4715

10

1 2

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine R No. to specify pointer in magazine

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control sequence is as follows: 0,1,2,3,...9,0,1,2,...8,9,0,1,... (Note 1) This instruction changes the relation between magazine

No. and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

Pointer No. is incremented.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

541

In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with actual magazine position

when the magazine rotates in reverse direction.

Reverse run of pointer

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

K3 K6

K4710 K4715

10

2 1

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine R No. to specify pointer in magazine

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control sequence is as follows: 2,1,0,9...2,1,0,9,8,...1,0,9... (Note 1) This instruction changes the relation between magazine No.

and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

Pointer No. is decremented

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

542

This instruction is used to rotate the tool table in accordance with the magazine rotation.

Forward run of tool table

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4750 R4751 R4752

R4760

R4710

K3 K7

K4710 K4710

1000 1001

1010

10

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).

(Note 2) This instruction changes the relation between magazine No. and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

543

This instruction is used to rotate the tool table in accordance with the magazine rotation.

Reverse run of tool table

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

K3 K8

K4710 K4710

1000 1001

1010

10

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4750 R4751 R4752

R4760

R4710

Number of arguments

Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head).

(Note 2) This instruction changes the relation between magazine No. and tool No. on the tool registration screen.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

544

This instruction is used to read out a specific tool No. in the magazine.

Tool data read

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200

D200 D201 D202

ACT

K3 K9

K4710 K3

10

2

1000 (0) 1001 (1) 1002 (2) 1003 (3)

1009 (9)

1004 (4) 1005 (5)

1007 (7) 1008 (8)

1006 (6)

8 9

MG0 1 2 4 5 6 7

9 10

MG1 2 4 5 6 7 8

1004/1005

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 1

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine Magazine No. to be read

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

(Note 1) Tool change position differs depending on whether magazine No. starts from "0" or "1". However, the substantial consequence does not differ.

(Note 2) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

Read data

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction

545

This instruction is used to write a tool No. to each magazine No. through PLC program, instead of using the setting and

display unit.

Tool data write

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200 ACT

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

D104

K4 K10

K4710 K3

10

2

1000 (0) 1001 (1) 1002 (2) 1003 (3)

1009 (9)

(4) (5)

1007 (7) 1008 (8)

1006 (6)

K1234

9 10

MG1 2 4 5 6 7 8

8 9

MG0 1 2 4 5 6 7

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine Magazine No. to which data is written

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

(Note) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

When magazine No. starts from "0"

When magazine No. starts from "1"

Data to be written

Data "1234" is written to magazine No.3.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

546

All tool Nos. are written in batch. This instruction is used for initialization and so on.

Data is written for each tool while incrementing the default value one by one.

Automatic tool data write

D.ATC H3E1 D100 M100D200

D200 D201

D100 D101 D102 D103

R4710

R4715

R4750 R4751

R4758 R4759

ACT

K3 K11

K4710 K1000

10

2

1008 (0) 1009 (1) 1000 (2) 1001 (3) 1002 (4) 1003 (5) 1004 (6) 1005 (7) 1006 (8) 1007 (9)

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 0

Data is written for each tool while incrementing the default value one by one from the location indicated by the pointer.

R No. to store the number of tools in magazine Tool No. to be searched

Number of tools in magazine

Pointer

Tool data table head (fixed)

(Example when 10 tools in magazine)

(Note) Pointer (R4715) should be set to "0" when not used.

File registers for ATC allocated in NC

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.2 ROT Instruction

547

8.2 ROT Instruction With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function as a

is realized.

This is used when calculating the rotation direction or number of index steps of the magazine and turret, etc. based on

the output data figured with tool No. search of ATC instruction, or used when controlling the rotary body position.

8.2.1 Instruction List

8.2.2 Format of ROT Instruction

(1) Available devices

(Note) Local devices are not available.

Instruction Description

D.ROT S1 D1 D2n Rotary body indexing/ring counter

Setting data

Available devices

Internal user device/ Internal system device

File register

In- direct desig- nation

Link direct device (J \ )

Unit access device

(U \G ) Index

register (Z )

Constant

Others

Bit

Word

Bit Word Bit

Word

Bit Word

Decimal, hexa-

decimal (K,H)

Real number string

Digit desig- nation

A

Digit desig- nation

B

Digit desig- nation

n1

S1

D1 (Note)

(Note)

D2 (Note)

(Note)

D.ROT n1 S1 D1 D2

DP.ROT n1 S1 D1 D2

D.ROT

DP.ROT

Instruction

Instruction

[Instruction]symbol [Execution]condition

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

548

(2) Setting data

(3) (S1) Control data for request data

(4) (D1) Control data for response data

(Note) For error codes other than "0", see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

(5) (D2) Completion device

(6) Availability of instruction execution for each type

(Note) Completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, is not recognized in the sequence program (execution type)

with long cycle time. The device is basically programmed in a scan.

Setting data

Details Setting range Setting side Data type

n1 Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16 For CPU No. 2 to 4: H3E1 to H3E3

3E1h to 3E3h User BIN16 Bit

S1 Head device that stores the control data for request data User Word

D1 Head device that stores the control data for response data System Word

D2 Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is completed. System Bit

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

S1+0 Number of arguments Set the number of words of arguments to store in the control for the request data.

45 User

S1+1 Function No. Designate the No. of function to command. 13 User

S1+2 Parameter Set the parameter that designates the specifications of rotary body to control. User

S1+3 to

S1+5 Argument 1 to 3

Stores the arguments corresponding to the designated function No. Refer to "(1) Control data for request data" in "8.2.3 Functions".

User

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

D1+0 Completion status

Stores the status when an instruction has been completed. 0: No error (Successfully completed) Others: Error codes (Note)

System

D1+1 Size of response data Set the size (number of words) of data to store in the control data for response data.

0 to 2 System

D1+2 Response 1 Stores the response data corresponding to the designated function No. Refer to "(2) Control data for response data" in "8.2.3 Functions".

System D1+3 Response 2

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

D2+0

Completion device

Goes ON for 1 scan when an instruction is completed. 0/1 System

D2+1 Goes ON with D2+0 upon abnormal completion. 0/1 System

No. Type of execution Availability

1 Initial program Available

2 Scan program Available

3 Fixed-interval program Available (Note)

4 Interrupt program Available (Note)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.2 ROT Instruction

549

8.2.3 Functions

This instruction is used to determine the rotary body's target position, rotation direction, etc. in the target CPU.

D(P).ROT instruction has 2 functions. Operations of the instruction are decided by the function No. stored in (S1+1). The

number of arguments stored in (S1+0) is also decided according to the function No. stored in (S1+1).

Contents and number of data, stored in the control data for request data, differ according to the function No. in (S1+1).

Contents and number of responses, stored in control data for response data, also differ.

The following tables show the contents of the control data for request data, which are set according to the function No.,

and the contents of responses, which are stored in the control data for response data.

(1) Control data for request data

(2) Control data for response data

S1+0) Number of arguments

(S1+1) (S1+2) (S1+3) (S1+4) (S1+5)

Function No. Type of instruction

5 1 Rotary body indexing Parameter Current position Target position Number of rotary body indexing cycles

4 3 Ring counter Parameter R No. to specify ring counter

Number of rotary body indexing cycles

Function No. Type of instruction (D1+0) (D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3)

1 Rotary body indexing Completion status Size of response data; 2 Number of output steps

Rotary direction 0:CW 1:CCW

3 Ring counter Completion status Size of response data; 0

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

550

8.2.4 Operation Outline

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).ROT instruction is executed.

If (D2+1) has been turned ON, the instruction is abnormally completed. Then the data is stored in completion status

(D1+0).For the values stored, see "8.3.3 Completion Status Information".

ON

ON

END END END END

ON

Sequence program

D(P).ROT instruction

Reception of D(P).ROT instruction

CNC-CNC exclusive communication (every 0.888ms) Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer

D(P).ROT instruction received

Transfer Transfer

Completion device (D2+0)

Device that display the status when an instruction has been completed (D2+1)

Only upon abnormal completion

1 scan

D(P).ROT instruction executed

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.2 ROT Instruction

551

8.2.5 Errors

SM0 is turned ON and the error code is stored in SD0 when:

- Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16 (n1) specified the CPU already been reserved or has not been mounted.

(Error code: 2110 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the operating CPU itself.

(Error code: 2114 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the CPU that does not correspond to the exclusive

instructions in this section.

(Error code: 2117 )

- "Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16" (n1) specified the invalid value (not within 3E0H to 3E3H).

(Error code: 4100 )

CNC CPU outputs the following error codes to the completion status when:

- An invalid function No. (other than 0 and 3) was specified. (Error code: 3200)

- An invalid number of rotary body indexing cycles (negative) was specified. (Error code: 3204)

- An invalid current position was set. (Error code: 3205)

- An invalid parameter was specified (calculation does not result to 11). (Error code: 3206)

- An invalid number of arguments was specified. (Error code: 3207)

8.2.6 Program Example

(1) Executes an ROT instruction (tool No. search) on CPU No.2 (Q17nNCCPU) when X0 is turned ON.

X0 SM771

M10 M11

M11

MOV K1 D101

MOV H8 D102

MOV K1X30 D103

MOV K5 D100

MOV R220 D104

MOV K6 D105

DP. ROT H3E1 D100 D200 M10

Program upon normal completion

Program upon abnormal completion

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

552

8.2.7 Details of Each Instruction

Direction of rotation and number of steps of ATC magazine (or turret) are determined.

Contents of Rp(parameter)

Rotary body indexing

Dn Dn+1 Dn+2 Dn+3 Dn+4 Dn+5

Dm Dm+1 Dm+2 Dm+3

D.ROT H3E1 Dn MmDm

0:CW 1:CCW

K5 K1

Parameter Current position Target position

Number of rotary body indexing cycles

Number of arguments Function No.

Completion status Size of response data; 2 Number of output steps

Rotary direction

(Note) CW or CCW output is controlled so that it takes a short circuit regardless of parameter specification.

15 14 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4 3

0 0 1

(Spare) 0 : Rotary body starts from 1 1 : Rotary body starts from 0

0 : Direction of rotation is determined for shorter reach

1 : Direction of rotation is not determined for shorter reach

0 : (Step No. +1) is counted 1 : Step No. is counted 0 : (Step No. -1) is counted

When the current value is equal to the target value, -1 is counted.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.2 ROT Instruction

553

(Example) Rotary body index by ROT-Function No.1 instruction

Conditions

(i) The number of rotary body index is 6.

(ii) The target position is set with the T command. The T command is set with the parameters so that it outputs to the

PLC with a binary. (Set base specification parameter Tbin to 1.)

In the example of ladder circuit shown below, the rotation direction is determined by the T command and current position

data given by the machine, and the rotary body is rotated in that direction until the target position reaches the current

position. When indexing is completed, the auxiliary command completion signal is turned ON.

1

6

5

4

3

2 M

X30 X31 X32 X33 X34

Y10 Y11

CNC CPU

(Fin)

CW CCW

G10320-G10321/ R120-R121 Y71E

Target position

Current position

PLC CPU

PLC processing

T code data T command ON

Auxiliary function completed

Index code 2 0

Index code 2 1

Index code 2 2

Index code 2 3

Index code strobe

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

554

(Note 1) Either M202 or M203 can be used for a stop signal.

(Note 2) The X and Y devices used above are set on the premise that the data is transferred to the device that coincides

with the CNC internal device.

(Note 3) The D devices are used in this example for no special purpose. Use any device within the available range.

(Note 4) If a value from 1 to 6 has not been set for current position data (D103) before the ROT instruction is issued, an

error will occur.

(Note 5) The contents of the control parameter (D102) is as follow:

- Rotary body starts from 1

- Take a short cut.

- Calculate the number of steps.

D.ROT H3E1 Dn Dm Mm ACT

MOV K5 D100

MOV K1 D101

MOV H8 D102

MOV K6 D105

M1000

X34

M100

X650

X650

M200

M204

X650

M200

CW

CCW

M202

M201

M201

M202

M203

M1000

Y10

Y11

Y71E

(M203) = K0 D203

<> K0 D203

= K0 D202

SET M204

SET M205

PLS M100

MOV K1X30 D103

D100

D101

D102

D103

D104

D105

0

5

1

8

6

D200

D201

D202

D203 CW/CCW

RST M204

M1000

M1000

DP.ROT H3E1 D100 D200 M200

G10320

G10321 Top of request data

(D100 in this example)

File register (R) map

1 to 6 (binary)

1 to 6

1 to 6

Completion status

Size of response

Number of steps

Top of response data (D200 in this example)

Completion status

Number of request data stored

Function No. stored

Parameter stored

Number of rotary body indexing cycles stored

Strobe rising signal created

Current position stored

Target position (T command) stored

CW or CCW is determined with the ROT instruction ROT instruction completed

Error check When required

Stop signal created (Note 1) (target value = current value) Stop signal created (Note 1) (number of steps = 0)

Auxiliary function completed

ROT instruction completed and reset

On-signal after PLC1 scan

MOV U3E1\G10320 D104

= U3E1\G10320 D103

Completion circuit

Shared memory device

T command (from CNC)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.2 ROT Instruction

555

This instruction is used to control position of rotary body.

The ring counter is a binary counter; it is used as an up/down counter of "start from 0" or "start from 1" according to the

parameter rotary body selection.

For ring counter, specify the device No. of CNC internal device on which up/down operation is executed.

(Note 1) The ring counter instruction is executed after setting R No. to Rn to Rn+1 and specifying data for the

parameter.

(Note 2) The error completion (Mm) of the ring counter instruction and the error output in bit F of the parameter (Rp) are

cleared when the activating signal (ACT) goes OFF. The activating signal (ACT) of the ring counter instruction

is generally pulsed. This makes it hard for the interface diagnostic and ladder monitor programs to detect an

error signal. For debugging, therefore, an error hold circuit is provided after the ring count instruction to ease

error detection.

Ring counter (Up/down counter)

Dn Dn+1 Dn+2 Dn+3 Dn+4

4 3

ACT DP.ROT H3E1 Dn Dm Mm

Device that goes ON upon completion

Parameter Ring counter Num of indexing

Top of response data

Top of request data

Ring counter instruction

Number of arguments is stored. Function No. is stored. Parameter is stored. Device No. of ring counter is stored. Number of rotary body indexing cycles is stored.

15 - - - 3 2 1 0

F E

Rotary body selection 0 : Rotary body starts from 1 1 : Rotary body starts from 0

Error output Instruction code --- DR.ROT Function No.n (the value of "Dn+1") is

neither 1 or 3 Up/down selection 0 : Up counter 1 : Down counter

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

556

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction This instruction is to execute a batch data write from PLC CPU to a device in another CPU.

DDWR instruction image figure

D0 (S2)

W10 (S3)

D9

W19

(S1+1) (S1+1)

NC

Device memory Device memory

10 words Write

10 words

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

557

8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction

(1) Available devices

: Available to designate : Partially available to designate

(Note 1): Index qualification can be used for setting data (n1) to (D1).

(Note 2): Local devices cannot be used.

(Note 3): Each program's file register cannot be used.

(2) Setting data

(3) Control data

Setting data

Note 1

Usable device

Internal user device/ Internal system device

File register

In- direct design ation

Link direct device (J \ )

Unit access device

(U \G ) Index register

(Z )

Constant

Others

Bit

Word

Bit Word Bit

Word

Bit Word

Decimal, hexa-

decimal

(K,H)

Real Num- ber

String

Digit designa

tion A

Digit designa

tion B

Digit designa

tion

n1

S1

Note 2

Note 3

S2

S3

D1 Note 2

Note 3

Setting data

Settings Setting side Data type

n1

Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16 The followings are the values actually assigned. No. 2: H3E1No. 3: H3E2No. 4: H3E3 (Note) NC CPU cannot be No.1 with multi-CPU configuration.

User BIN16

Bit

S1 The host CPU's head device which stores control data. User Word

S2 The host CPU's head device which stores the write data. User Word

S3 The target CPU unit's head device which stores the write data. User Word

D1

Completion device (D1+0): Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan at the completion of the instruction. (D1+): Device that goes ON for 1 scan at the abnormal completion of the instruction. (D1+0 will also be turned ON at the abnormal completion)

System Bit

Device Item Setting data Setting range Setting side

S1+0 Completion status Stores the status when an instruction has been completed. 0: No error (Successfully completed) Other than 0: Error code

System

S1+1 Number of write data Set the number of write data with word unit. 1 to 100 User

D.DDWR n1 S1 S2 S3

DP.DDWR n1 S1 S2 S3

D1

D1

D.DDWR

DP.DDWR

Instruction

Instruction

[Instruction]symbol [Execution]condition

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

558

In multi-CPU configuration, the data stored in each of the host CPU's devices starting from the one specified with (S2) by

the number specified with (S1+1) are copied. The copied data are stored in each of the devices starting from the one

specified with (S3) of the target CPU (n1).

Bit device digit designation is available for (S2) and (S3). However, it is 4-digit designation and only a multiple of 16 is

available for the start bit device No. If the value other than that is designated, MULTI-COM.ERROR [4353] will occur.

D(P).DDWR instruction being accepted and normal/abnormal completion can be confirmed with the status display device

(D1+1) at the completion of completion device (D1).

(a) Completion device

It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the next END process.

(b) State display device at completion

It turns ON/OFF depending on the condition at the instruction completion.

- Successfully completed: It stays OFF.

- Abnormal completion: It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the

next END process.

(Error code will be stored in the control data (S1+0: completion status) at the abnormal completion.)

NC devices that can write with DDWR instruction are shown below.

Usable NC devices

(Note 1) If a specified device is write-disabled, an error occurs (error code: 3001(HEX)).

(Note 2) The ZR devices ZR60000 to ZR67999 are used for reading and writing common variables.

For details, refer to "8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables".

Details of control

Device Usable device range Representation

W 0 to 1FFF Hexadecimal

ZR 0 to 4184063 (Note 1)(Note 2) Decimal

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

559

8.3.2 Operation when executing the DDWR instruction

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).DDWR instruction is executed.

- Execute this instruction when the target NC CPU has started up. It cannot be executed without starting up the target

CPU. (No process will occur.)

- After executed this instruction, do not change the device range etc. which is designated in the setting data until the

completion device is turned ON. If the change is made, data (the completion status and completion device) to be

stored in the system cannot be stored correctly.

- When executing this instruction without empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area, it will be

abnormal completion. Abnormal completion because of not having the empty block for the exclusive instruction

transmission area can be avoided by using a flag for with/without the exclusive instruction transmission area empty

block (SM796 to 799) as the instruction interlock.

Precautions

ON

BND BND BND

ON

ON

0.88s

D(2+0)

(D1)

Only upon abnormal completion

The operating CPU storage device

Set

Sequence program

D(P).DDWR instruction

D(P).DDWR instruction executed

Communication reception process exclusive among the CPUs

Transfer

Request data set

Completion device

Device that display the status when an

instruction has been completed (D2+1)

1 scan

Target CPU D(P).DDWR instruction reception process

Response data set

D(P).DDWR instructionreception process

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

560

8.3.3 Error contents

Abnormal completion occurs in the following cases, and the error code will be stored in the device which is designated by

the completion status storage device (S1+0).

(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

8.3.4 Calculation error

In the following cases, the calculation error occurs, the diagnosis error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code will be

stored in the diagnosis error register (SD0).

(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

Completion status error code

Error factors Remedy

0010 (HEX) ( 16 )

The instruction request from PLC CPU to NC CPU exceeds the tolerance. (No empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area.)

Decrease the number of instructions to execute at a time and adjust them to be within the tolerance.

3001 (HEX) ( 12289 )

The device which is designated by the program cannot be used with NC CPU. Or outside the device range.

Refer to "Device" of "(3) Control data" and designate the usable device with NC CPU.

3080 (HEX) ( 12416 )

The number of write data which is set with D(P).DDWR instruction is illegal.

Set the number of read data 1 to 100.

3209 (HEX) (12809)

The common variable control data is not set correctly in the D(P).DDWR instruction.

Set the common variable control data correctly.

Error code Error factors Remedy

10FE (HEX) ( 4350 )

An incorrect target CPU unit was selected by the instruction set in the program. (1) The designated unit has already been reserved. (2) CPU which is not mounted is designated. (3) Head I/O No. of target CPU unit divided by 16 (n1) is not within 3E0H to 3E3H.

Read the common information of the error using a programming tool, check error step corresponding to its numerical value (program error location), and correct the problem.

10FF (HEX) ( 4351 )

The designated target CPU cannot be executed. (1) The instruction name is incorrect. (2) The instruction which is not supported by the target CPU is executed.

1100 (HEX) ( 4352 )

An incorrect number of devices are designated in the program.

1101 (HEX) ( 4353 )

An unusable device is designated in the program.

1102 (HEX) ( 4354 )

An unusable character string is designated in the program.

1104 (HEX) ( 4355 )

The number of write data is outside the range of 1 to 100.

1005 (HEX) ( 4101 )

The number of write data is outside the range of the write data's storage device.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.3 D (P).DDWR Instruction

561

8.3.5 Interlock using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC

Special relay SM796 to SM799 (block information used for instruction exclusive for Multi CPU high speed transmission)

can be used as an interlock when using the PLC instruction exclusive for NC.

When a number of Multi CPU high speed transmission instructions are executed at once, use SM796 to SM799 as an

interlock for Multi CPU high speed transmission instructions.

When using special relay SM796 to SM799, set the maximum number of blocks used for special register SD796 to

SD799 of each CPU. (Maximum number of blocks that DDWR instruction uses is 7 and a DDRD instruction uses is 1.)

When the Multi CPU high speed transmission area becomes less than the number of blocks set in the SD796 to SD799,

corresponding special relay (SM796 to 799) will be turned ON.

SM 797

SM 797

D(P).DDWR H3E1

D(P).DDWR H3E1

8

2

Number of requested block : 4

Turn ON the SM797 where there are enough unused

blocks for D(P).DDWR instruction.

(Not execute the D(P).DDWR instruction)

Multi-CPUs high-speed communication area

Multi-CPUs high-speed communication area

Sending area (1 -> 2)

Not enough unused block to write the request of D(P).DDWR instruction.

No.1 No.2

Receiving area

In use

Number of unused block

Number of requested block : 4

Execution command

Turn OFF the SM797 as there are enough unused blocks

for D(P).DDWR instruction.

(Execute the D(P).DDWR instruction)

Multi-CPUs high-speed communication area

Multi-CPUs high-speed communication area

Sending area (1 -> 2)

Enable to write the request of D(P).DDWR instruction.

No.1 No.2

Receiving area (1 -> 2)

In use

Number of unused block

Execution command

Increasing the unused area for request block in the sending area (1 -> 2)

(1 -> 2)

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

562

8.3.6 Program example

(Example) A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No.2 when SM796 to 799 is used as an

interlock and X0 has started up.

MOV K7 SD797

MOV K100 D1301

SET M2000

D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 W0 M2001

RST M2000

SM402

SM402

X0

SM797M2000

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction.

Set the number of write data.

Store the D1400 to D1499 of the operating CPU to W0 to W99 of the No.2 CPU.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

563

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction This instruction is to read the device data in the other CPUs to the PLC CPU.

DDRD instruction image figure

D0 (D1)

W10 (S2)

(n1) 3E1h

D9

W19

(S1+1) (S1+1)

NC

Device memory Device memory

10 words Read

10 words

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

564

8.4.1 Format of DDRD Instruction

(1) Usable devices

: Available to designate : Partially available to designate

(Note 1) Index qualification can be used for setting data (n1) to (D1).

(Note 2) Local devices are not available.

(Note 3) Each program's file register cannot be used.

(2) Setting data

(3) Control data

Setting data *1

Usable device

Internal user device/internal system device

File register

Indirect designa

tion

Link direct device (J \ )

Unit access device

(U \G ) Index register

(Z )

Constant

Others

Bit

Word

Bit Word Bit

Word

Bit Word

Decimal, hexa-

decima

(K,H)

Real charact

er string

Digit designa

tion A

Digit designa

tion B

Digit designa

tion

n1

S1

Note 2

Note 3

S2

D1

Note 2

Note 2

Note 3

D2 Note 1

Note 3

Setting data

Settings Setting side Data type

n1

Head I/O No. of target CPU divided by 16 The followings are the values actually assigned. No. 2: H3E1No. 3: H3E2No. 4: H3E3 (Note) Motion CPU cannot be No.1 with multi-CPU configuration.

User BIN16

Bit

S1 The host CPU's head device which stores control data. User Word

S2 The target CUP unit's head device that the data to be read is stored. User Word

D1 The host CPU's head device that stores the read data. User Word

D2

Completion device (D1+0): Completion device that goes ON for 1 scan at the completion of the instruction. (D1+1): Device that goes ON for 1 scan at the abnormal completion of the instruction. (D1+0 will also be turned ON at the abnormal completion)

System Bit

Device Item Setting Setting range Setting side

S1+0 Completion status Stores the status when an instruction has been completed. 0: No error (Successfully completed) Other than 0: Error code

System

S1+1 Number of read data Set the number of read data with word unit. 1 to100 User

D.DDRD n1 S1 S2 D1

DP.DDRD n1 S1 S2 D1

D2

D2

D.DDRD

DP.DDRD

Instruction

Instruction

[Instruction]symbol [Execution]condition

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

565

In multi-CPU configuration, the data stored in each of the devices starting from the one specified with (S2) of the target

CPU (n1) by the number specified with (S1+1) are copied. The copied data are stored in each of the host CPU's devices

starting from the one specified with (D1).

Bit device digit designation is available for "S2" and "D1". However, it is 4-digit designation and only a multiple of 16 is

available for the start bit device No. If the value other than that is designated, MULTI-COM.ERROR [4353] will occur.

D(P).DDRD instruction being accepted and normal/abnormal completion can be confirmed with the status display device

(D2+1) at the completion of completion device (D2).

(a) Completion device

It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the next END process.

(b) State display device at completion

It turns ON/OFF depending on the condition at the instruction completion.

- Successfully completed: It stays OFF.

- Abnormal completion: It turns ON for the scan END process at the instruction completion, and turns OFF for the

next END process.

(Error code will be stored in the control data (S1+0: completion status) at the abnormal completion.)

NC devices that can write with DDRD instruction are shown below.

Usable NC devices

(Note 1) If a specified device is write-disabled, an error occurs (error code: 3001(HEX)).

(Note 2) The ZR devices from ZR60000 to ZR67999 are used for reading and writing common variables.

For details, refer to "8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables".

Details of control

Device Usable device range Representation

W 0 to 1FFF Hexadecimal

ZR 0 to 4184063 (Note 1)(Note 2) Decimal

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

566

8.4.2 Operation when executing the DDRD instruction

The following chart shows the outline of operation between CPUs when D(P).DDRD instruction is executed.

The outline of operation between CPUs

- Execute this instruction when the target NC CPU has started up. It cannot be executed without starting up the target

CPU. (No process will occur.)

- After executed this instruction, do not change the device range etc. which is set in the setting data until the

completion device is turned ON. If the change is made, data (the completion status and completion device) to be

stored in the system cannot be stored correctly.

- When executing this instruction without empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area, it will be

abnormal completion. Abnormal completion because of not having the empty block for the exclusive instruction

transmission area can be avoided by using a flag for with/without the exclusive instruction transmission area empty

block (SM796 to 799) as the instruction interlock.

Precautions

ON

ON

BND BND BND

ON

D(2+0)

(D1)

0.88ms

Sequence program

D(P). DDRD instruction

Target CPU D(P).DDRD instruction reception process

Communication reception process exclusive among the CPUs

Transfer

Request data set

Response data set

D(P).DDRD instruction executed

D(P).DDRD instruction reception process

Device that display the status when an

instruction has been completed (D2+1)

Completion device

The operating CPU storage device

Set

Only upon abnormal completion

1 scan

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.4 D(P).DDRD Instruction

567

8.4.3 Error contents

Abnormal completion occurs in the following cases, and the error code will be stored in the device which is designated by

the completion status storage device (S1+0).

(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

8.4.4 Calculation error

In the following cases, the calculation error occurs, the diagnosis error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code will be

stored in the diagnosis error register (SD0).

(Note) The error code is written in hexadecimal and base-10.

Completion status error code

Error factors Remedy

0010 (HEX) ( 16 )

The instruction request from PLC CPU to Motion CPU exceeds the tolerance. (No empty block for the exclusive instruction transmission area.)

Decrease the number of instructions to execute at a time and adjust them to be within the tolerance.

3001 (HEX) ( 12289 )

The device which is designated by the program cannot be used with NC CPU. Or outside the device range.

Refer to "Device" of "8.4.1 Format of DDRD Instruction" and designate the usable device with NC CPU.

3081 (HEX) ( 12417 )

The number of write data which is set with D(P).DDRD instruction is illegal.

Set the number of read data 1 to 100.

3208 (HEX) ( 12808 )

Any of the data specified in the D(P).DDRD instruction is overflowed.

This error may occur when a common variable value is got using the D(P).DDRD instruction. Change the setting so as not to get the common variable. Or change the setting of the common variable control data.

Error code Error factors Remedy

10FE (HEX) ( 4350 )

An incorrect target CPU unit was selected by the instruction set in the program. (1) The designated unit has already been reserved. (2) CPU which is not mounted is designated. (3) "Head I/O No. of target CPU unit divided by 16' (n1) is not within 3E0H to 3E3H.

Read the common information of the error using a programming tool, check error step corresponding to its numerical value (program error location), and correct the problem.

10FF (HEX) ( 4351 )

The designated target CPU cannot be executed. (1) The instruction name is incorrect. (2) The instruction which is not supported by the target CPU is executed.

1100 (HEX) ( 4352 )

An incorrect number of devices is designated in the program.

1101 (HEX) ( 4353 )

An unusable device is designated in the program.

1102 (HEX) ( 4354 )

An unusable character string is designated in the program.

1103 (HEX) ( 4355 )

The number of write data is outside the range of 1 to 100.

1105 (HEX) ( 4101 )

The number of read data is outside the range of the reading data's storage device.

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

568

8.4.5 Program example

(Example 1) A program which stores 100 words data from D400 of CPU No.2 in later than X0 of the host CPU when X0

turns ON.

MOV K2 SD797

MOV K100 D1301

SET M2000

D.DDRD H3E1 D1300 ZR50000 D1400 M2001

RST M2000

SM402

SM402

X0

SM797M2000

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction.

Set the number of read data.

Store the ZR50000ZR50099 of the No.2 CPU to D1400D1499 of the operating CPU.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

569

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables This section explains how to read and write common variables using the DDWR/DDRD instructions from the PLC.

To read and write common variables using the DDWR/DDRD instructions, specify the CNC side devices from between

ZR60000 and ZR67199

The setting of common variable read/write can be changed by executing the common variable control data, which is

described later, by using the DDWR instruction.

(Note 1) It is not possible to write "empty" data to a common variable using the DDWR instruction.

(Note 2) When an "empty" common variable is read using the DDRD instruction, "0" is loaded.

8.5.1 Instruction Format

The format of DDWR instruction for writing common variables is the same as of "8.3.1 Format of DDWR Instruction".

However, the CNC side devices are within the range between ZR60000 and ZR67199.

In the same way, the DDRD instruction format for reading common variables is the same as of "8.4.1 Format of DDRD

Instruction", but the CNC side devices are within the range between ZR60000 and ZR67199.

8.5.2 CNC Side Devices to be Specified

The assignment of S3 (the target CPU's head device which stores the write data) in DDWR instruction and S2 (the host

CPU's head device which stores the read data) in DDRD instruction is as shown below.

[How to assign CNC side devices]

The following CNC side devices are specified.

[Correspondence table between common variables and ZR devices]

The devices from ZR60000 are used for common variables

Part system No. (1 to 7) "0" for the common variable 1

Corresponding common variable No.

Type Devices used on the CNC side

Common variable control data ZR60000

Common variable 1 (#500 to #999) ZR60500 to ZR60999

Common variable 2 (#100 to #199)

1st part system ZR61100 to ZR61199

2nd part system ZR62100 to ZR62199

3rd part system ZR63100 to ZR63199

4th part system ZR64100 to ZR64199

5th part system ZR65100 to ZR65199

6th part system ZR66100 to ZR66199

7th part system ZR67100 to ZR67199

ZR 6 1 134

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

570

8.5.3 Common Variable Control Data

The following items are set to the common variable control data:

- The type of data to be read and written in common variables

- The decimal point position

- The overflow error notification selection

The following default settings are applied at the CNC power ON for reading and writing common variables.

- Two-word data

- With decimal point, and four effective decimal digits

- Error code is returned when overflowed

The settings of common variable control data are listed in the table below.

If a value other than 0 to 3 is selected for the data type, or if a value other than 0 to 2 for the decimal point position, an

error (error code: 3209(HEX)) is returned.

The settings of the common variable control data are held until the control data is changed next time.

In order to set the common variable control data, select "1" for the number of write data for the DDWR control data.

For program examples, refer to "8.5.5 Program Examples".

Device Item Setting data Setting range

Setting side

ZR60000 Control data for common variables

Set the type of data to read and write, and the decimal point position. [0 to the 3rd bits: Data type] 0: Two-word data 1: Word data 2: Double-precision floating-point data 3: Single-precision floating-point data [4th to 7th bits: Decimal point position in the data] 0: With decimal point/Four effective decimal digits 1: With decimal point/According to #1003(iunit) and #1041 (I_inch) 2: No decimal point (Note) Refer to "8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data". [8th bit: Error notification selection] 0: Error code is returned 1: Error is ignored (Note) Refer to "8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection".

- User

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

571

8.5.3.1 Data Type

The numbers of read and write data specified by the DDWR and DDRD instructions vary according to the data type

setting.

The table below shows the numbers of read and write data required for read and write of one data.

The values listed in "When five common variables are read and written" are the numbers of read/write data required for

reading and writing five common variables with the selected data type.

8.5.3.2 Decimal Point Position in the Data

When two-word data or word data is selected for the data type, the numbers of effective decimal digits are as in the table

below.

The values listed in "Common variable value after execution of DDWR instruction" are the ones when the write data

"12345678" is executed using the DDWR instruction.

The values listed in "Value read with DDRD instruction" are the ones when the common variable value "45.678912" is

read using the DDRD instruction.

(Note 1) Values enclosed with brackets "( )" are the ones when the common variable is displayed using the remote

monitor tool.

(Note 2) When the common variable 1 is read and written with the decimal point position set to "1", the decimal point

position is determined by the combination of #1003(iunit) and #1041(I_inch) set for the 1st part system.

(Note 3) If the value read with the DDRD instruction is smaller than the effective decimal digit, the value is rounded off.

Data type set in the control data

Number of read/write data required for read and write of

one data

When five common variablesare read and written

Two-word data 2 10

Word data 1 5

Double-precision floating-point data

4 20

Single-precision floating-point data

2 10

Setting value

Decimal point position setting

Number of effective decimal digits

Common variable val- ue after execution of

DDWR instruction (Note 1)

Value read with DDRD instruction

0 Four effective decimal digits 4 1234.5678 456789

1 Determined with #1003(iunit) and #1041(I_inch)

I_inch=0 Iunit=B 3

12345.678 (12345.6780)

45679

Iunit=C 4 1234.5678 456789

I_inch=1

Iunit=B 4 1234.5678 456789

Iunit=C 5 123.45678 (123.4568)

4567891

2 No decimal point 0 12345678

(1.2346 E 7) 46

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

572

8.5.3.3 Error Notification Selection

Select how to respond to an overflow error that occurs during execution of the DDRD instruction.

Operation when "0: Error code is returned" is selected

The processing ends at the point of the overflow error occurrence, and the completion status error code is returned.

In this case, no common variables can be retrieved.

Operation when "1: Error is ignored" is selected

When an overflow error occurs while a common variable is being read, the retrieved data of the variable is handled

as "0", and reading the subsequent common variables is continued. After the completion of the processing, the

normal completion status is returned.

In this case, it is possible to read out the common variable data by the specified number of variables.

8.5.4 Error Contents

For the DDWR instruction completion status error codes, refer to "8.3.3. Error Contents", and "8.4.3 Error Contents" for

the DDRD completion status error codes.

The No. of ZR device, in which an error has occurred during read/write of common variables with DDWR/DDRD

instruction, is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).

The No. of ZR device, where an error has occurred first, is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).

The contents of "H3E1\G10280" (by two words) are held until the next execution of the DDWR and DDRD instructions for

reading and writing common variables.

If there is no error occurring, "0" is written to "H3E1\G10280" (by two words).

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

573

8.5.5 Program Examples

8.5.5.1 Write Data to Common Variables

A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X0, in order to write

three data to the 1st part system's common variables starting from #100.

(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

[Example of executing write of common variables]

8.5.5.2 Read Common Variable Data

A program which executes the D.DDRD instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X0, in order to

retrieve three common variable data starting from #500.

(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

[Example of executing read of common variables]

SM400

X0

M2000 SM797

DMOV K1000000 D1400

RST M2000

DMOV K2000000 D1402

MOV K7 SD797

D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 ZR61100 M2001

SET M2000

MOV K6 D1301

DMOV K3000000 D1404

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction

Set the three data for writing to common variables

Set the number of write data to "6", as the two-word data type is selected for the control data.

Execute the D.DDWR instruction

SM400

X1

M2010 SM797

RST M2010

MOV K7 SD797

D.DDRD H3E1 D1310 ZR60500 D1600 M2011

SET M2010

MOV K6 D1311

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction

Set the number of read data to "6", as the two-word data type is selected for the control data.

Execute the D.DDRD instruction

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

574

8.5.5.3 Change the Common Variable Control Data

A program which executes the D.DDWR instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X2, in order to

change the control data settings to "word data" and "no decimal point".

After this, the D.DDWR instruction is executed again to write the 1st part system's three common variable data

starting from #100.

[Example of executing change of common variable control data]

SM400

M2100

X2

SM797

M2101 M2102

MOV K7 SD797

MOV H21 D1200

MOV K1 D1101

D.DDWR H3E1 D1300 D1400 ZR61100 M2111

MOV K3 D1301

MOV K3000 D1402

MOV K2000 D1401

MOV K1000 D1400

RST M2100

D.DDWR H3E1 D1100 D1200 ZR60000 M2101

SET M2100

SM797

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction

Select "word data" and "no decimal point" for the control data

Set the number of write data to "1"

Execute the D.DDWR instruction to change the control data

Set the three data for writing to common variables

Set the number of write data to "3", as the word data type is selected for the control data

Execute the D.DDWR instruction

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.5 Read/Write of Common Variables

575

8.5.5.4 Read Common Variable Data, Calculate and then Write the Data to Common Variables

A program which executes the D.DDRD instruction to the CPU No. 2 at the rising edge of X3. In this program,

the 1st part system's three common variable data starting from #100 are read out, calculation is performed,

and then the data are written to the common variables

(The default setting at the CNC power ON is applied to the control data)

[Example of executing read of common variable data, calculation and write of the data to common variables]

SM400

M3010

X3

SM797

M3011 M3012

M3013

M3013 SM797

MOV K7 SD797

D.DDWR H3E1 D1311 D1400 ZR61100 M3014

D+ K30000 D1404

D+ K20000 D1402

D+ K10000 D1400

MOV K6 D1311

M3013

RST M3010

D.DDRD H3E1 D1300 ZR61100 D1400 M3011

SET M3010

MOV K6 D1301

DDRD completion signal

DDRD error signal

Set the maximum number of used blocks per instruction

Execute the D.DDWR instruction

Calculate the retrieved data

Set the number of write data to "6", as the two-word data type is selected for the control data

Execute the D.DDRD instruction

Set the number of read data to "6", as the two-word data type is selected for the control data

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

576

8.6 Precautions 8.6.1 Transmitting Exclusive Instructions between CPUs

NC exclusive instructions are transmitted through the CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area, which is

provided to the system area in the shared memory for cyclic transmissions. The following chart shows the operation

concept of NC exclusive instructions.

CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area is allocated as follows when CNC CPU has standard settings (system

area size: 1K points).

Table 2 shows the numbers of blocks of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area used from the execution of a

NC exclusive instruction by PLC CPU until the completion device's ON.

If the number of blocks used for the instructions is larger than the size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission

area in table 1, the instructions cannot be executed at the same time. Instruction executions after the CPU-CPU

exclusive instruction transmission area has been occupied are not successfully completed. Execute either the interlock

with the special register for "Command FULL", explained in "Special register for "Command FULL"" column later, or the

adjustment of system area size, explained in "CPU-CPU exclusive transmission area" column, as required.

Operation concept of NC exclusive instructions

Number of multi-CPUs Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area per instruction target CPU

2 CPUs 47 blocks

3 CPUs 23 blocks

4 CPUs 15 blocks

Instruction Number of blocks used

D(P).ATC 1

D(P).ROT 1

D(P).DDWR D(P).DDRD

Numbers of data -

1 to 4 1

5 to 20 2

21 to 36 3

37 to 52 4

53 to 68 5

69 to 84 6

85 to 100 7

CNC CPU CPU-CPU

exclusive instruction transmission area

Exclusive instruction 1

Exclusive instruction 2

PLC CPU

(1) Executes instructions

(2) Receives instructions (every 0.88ms)

(4) Sets response data (5) Receives data (every 0.88ms)

(3) Executes instructions

[NC exclusive instruction 1]

[NC exclusive instruction 2]

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.6 Precautions

577

When the CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area is occupied, the target CPU cannot receive NC exclusive

instructions, which is "Command FULL" state.

Then, the special register for "Command FULL" (special relay in PLC CPU) goes ON and operates to the target CPU. If

the "Command FULL" state has been cleared with END process, the special relay goes OFF.

To prepare for the anticipated "Command FULL" state, execute an interlock with the special register for "Command

FULL" in the target CPU. Unless the interlock is executed, the error code "4C90" is set to the completion status when an

instruction is executed in "Command FULL" state. Note that no process is executed when the completion device is

omitted.

The following chart shows the operation outline when "Command FULL" state has occurred after the execution of NC

exclusive instructions.

Special register for "Command FULL"

Special relay in PLC CPU

Name Details

SM770

Exclusive instructions for multi- CPUs high-speed communication at "Command FULL" of CPU No.1

Operates to multi-CPUs high-speed communication with target CPU. Goes ON when the CPU-CPU transmission area is occupied, which is "Command FULL" state. Goes OFF if the "Command FULL" state has been cleared with END process.

SM771

Exclusive instructions for multi- CPUs high-speed communication at "Command FULL" CPU No.2

SM772

Exclusive instructions for multi- CPUs high-speed communication at "Command FULL" CPU No.3

SM773

Exclusive instructions for multi- CPUs high-speed communication at "Command FULL" CPU No.4

Operation of the special register for "Command FULL"

END

ON

0.88ms

Sequence program

NC exclusive instructions

Special register for "Command FULL" SM771 (for CPU No.2)

Size of transmission area used for CPU-CPU exclusive instruction

CPU-CPU exclusive instruction (per 0.88ms)

Instructions executed

Command FULL

Transfer Transfer

Check with END process

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

578

A program to execute an ATC instruction to CNC CPU No.2 after MO is ON.

(With the completion device and completion status omitted)

The size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area (number of blocks; 16 words per block) can be enlarged by

changing the system area size. The number of the CPUs used and the size of the selected system area decide the size

of the transmission area as follows.

When 2 multi-CPUs are used

When 3 multi-CPUs are used

Program example

CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission area

Size of selected system area Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission

area per target CPU

1.0kw 48 blocks

2.0kw 112 blocks

Size of selected system area Size of CPU-CPU exclusive instruction transmission

area per target CPU

1.0kw 24 blocks

2.0kw 56 blocks

RST M0

M0 SM771 DP.ATC H3E1 D100 D200 M10

Execution commanded

Command FULL in CPU No.2

Execution commanded

C70 PLC Interface Manual

8.6 Precautions

579

8.6.2 Executing NC Exclusive Instructions

(1) NC exclusive instructions are available in both fixed-interval programs and interrupt programs. If a completion

device is designated, make sure to execute the program during the scan after the completion of instruction.

Otherwise, the completion device, which is ON only for 1 scan, will not be recognized.

(2) File registers for each local device and each program are written into devices with END process. The following

devices are not available:

Completion devices and completion status of instructions

8.6.3 Completion Status Information

The following table shows the codes stored in completion status when a NC exclusive instruction has been completed.

(Error codes with "*" are detected on CNC CPU.)

Note that omitting a completion status storage device makes no error detection and null processing.

Completion status (Error code)(H)

Error factors

0 Successfully completed

4C20* The designated device is not available on CNC CPU or out of the range.

4C21* The executed multi-CPU instruction is not supported by CNC CPU.

4C2A* The designated command cannot be read by CNC CPU.

4C30* An invalid function No. was specified by the ATC or ROT instruction.

4C31* An invalid No. to store the number of magazines was specified by the ATC instruction.

4C32* An invalid tool No. was specified by the ATC instruction.

4C33* An invalid magazine No. was specified by the ATC instruction.

4C34* An invalid number of rotary body indexing cycles was specified by the ROT instruction.

4C35* An invalid current position was specified by the ROT instruction.

4C36* An invalid parameter was set by the ROT instruction.

0010 The number of instructions from PLC CPU to CNC CPU exceeds the tolerance. * The tolerance amount differs for each CPU and the number of the CPUs mounted on.

8 Exclusive Instructions

MITSUBISHI CNC

580

581

Ap1 Appendix 1

List of PLC Window Data

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

582

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

0 R register Not used Not

used

0 R register R0 R/W - 0 to 65535 Unsigned integer

R/W

9214 R register R0 R/W - 0 to 65535 Unsigned integer

1 Parameters common to each axis

Not used Axis No.

8960 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step)

R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8964 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd step)

R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8968 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step)

R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8972 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step)

R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

Not used Axis No.

8976 Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8980 Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8984 Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

8988 Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

Not used Axis No.

9008 Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

9010 Spindle shift speed (Gear 2nd step)

R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

9012 Spindle shift speed (Gear 3rdstep) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

9014 Spindle shift speed (Gear 4thstep) R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

Not used Axis No. 9024 Spindle orientation speed R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

Not used Axis No. 9026 Minimum spindle speed R/W - 0 to 99999 [r/min]

Not used Axis No.

8192 Spindle parameter SP001 R/W - 1 to 200 [1/s]

8194 Spindle parameter SP002 R/W - 1 to 200 [1/s]

8670 Spindle parameter SP240 R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Axis No. 195 Method selection parameter (1) R - -

Not used Axis No. 130 Method selection parameter (3) R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Axis No. 194 Method selection parameter (4) R/W - Refer to the manual

Part system

No.

Not used

11984

Position switch [1]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

11968 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

11972 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

No.

Not used

12004

Position switch [2]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

11988 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

11992 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

No.

Not used

12024

Position switch [3]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12008 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12012 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

No.

Not used

12044

Position switch [4]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12028 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12032 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

No

Not used

12064

Position switch [5]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12048 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12052 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

C70 PLC Interface Manual

583

1 Parameters common to each axis

Part system

Not used

12084

Position switch [6]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12068 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12072 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part systemP

art system

Not used

12104

Position switch [7]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12088 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12092 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

12124

Position switch [8]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

12108 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

12112 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14128

Position switch [9]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14112 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14116 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14148

Position switch [10]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14132 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14136 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14168

Position switch [11]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14152 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14156 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14188

Position switch [12]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14172 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14176 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14208

Position switch [13]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14192 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14196 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14228

Position switch [14]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14212 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14216 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14248

Position switch [15]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14232 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14236 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Not used

14268

Position switch [16]

axis R/W R/W Input the name of the designated axis with ASCII code.

14252 dog1 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

14256 dog2 R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

584

2 Axis independent parameters

Part system

Axis No.

272 1st reference position coordinate R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m]

276 2nd reference position coordinate R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

280 3rd reference position coordinate R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

284 4th reference position coordinate R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 288 Stored stroke limit (+) R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m] #2014

Part system

Axis No. 292 Stored stroke limit (-) R/W R/W 199999998 [0.5m] #2013

Part system

Axis No. 20 Movement control parameter R R Refer to the manual

R/W is not valid for the diameter specification axis of PLC axis.

Part system

Axis No. 38 Reference position return approach speed

R/W R/W 1 to 60000 [mm/min] Unsigned integer

Part system

Axis No. 44 Reference position return shift amount

R/W R/W 0 to 65535 [m] Unsigned integer

Part system

Axis No. 46 Rapid traverse backlash amount R/W R/W 9999

Part system

Axis No. 48 Cutting feed backlash amount R/W R/W 9999

Part system

Axis No. 640 Axis parameter R/W - Refer to the manual

Part system

Axis No. 656 Stored stroke limit II (+) R/W - 199999998 [0.5m] #8205

Part system

Axis No. 660 Stored stroke limit II (+) R/W - 199999998 [0.5m] #8204

Part system

Axis No. 24 Rapid traverse time constant G0tL R/W R/W 1 to 4000 [ms] #2004

Part system

Axis No. 26 Cutting feed time constant G1tL R/W R/W 1 to 5000 [ms] #2007

Part system

Axis No. 28 Rapid traverse time constant G0t1 R/W R/W 1 to 4000 [ms] #2005

Part system

Axis No. 32 Cutting feed time constant G1t R/W R/W 1 to 5000 [ms] #2008

Part system

Axis No. 122 Current limit value 2 (SV014) R/W R/W 0 to 999

Part system

Axis No. 0 Axis name (axname) R/W R/W X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C #1013

Part system

Axis No. 264 Cutting feed clamp speed R/W R/W 1 to 1000000 #2002

Part system

Axis No. 768 Soft limit IB+ R/W - 199999998 [0.5m] #2062

Part system

Axis No. 772 Soft limit IB- R/W - 199999998 [0.5m] #2061

Part system

Axis No. 376 Soft limit IB type R/W - 0 to 2

3 Machine error compensation information

Not used Not

used 2 Compensation basic axis No. R - -

Not used Not

used 6 Compensation direction axis No. R - -

Not used Not

used 10

Division point No. at reference position

R - -

Not used Not

used 14

Division point No. at the most negative side

R - -

Not used Not

used 18

Division point No. at the most positive side

R - -

Not used Not

used 20 Compensation scale factor R/W - 0 to 99

Not used Not

used 28 Division interval R/W - 2 to 19999998 [0.5unit]

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

C70 PLC Interface Manual

585

4

Workpiece coordinate system offset, external workpiece coordinate system offset

Part system

Axis No. 0 G54 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 4 G55 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 8 G56 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 12 G57 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 16 G58 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 20 G59 workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

Part system

Axis No. 24 External workpiece coordinate system offset

R/W - 199999998 [0.5m]

5 Alarm information

Part system

Not used

16

Servo alarm No.

Main R - -

18 Attribute (bit F)

R - -

20 Sub 1 R - -

22 Sub 2 R - -

Part system

Not used

64

Servo warning No.

Main R - -

66 Attribute (bit F)

R - -

68 Sub 1 R - -

70 Sub 2 R - -

Part system

Not used

96

Operation error No.

Main R - -

98 Attribute (bit F)

R - -

100 Sub 1 R - -

102 Sub 2 R - -

Part system

Not used

104

Automatic stop code

Main R - -

106 Attribute (bit F)

R - -

108 Sub 1 R - -

110 Sub 2 R - -

11

Axis common non-modal information in block being executed

Part system

Not used 172 Interporation vector length R - -

Part system

Not used 71 Movement mode R - -

12

Axis independent non-modal information in block being executed

Part system

Axis No. 4 Axis direction movement amount R - -

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

586

13

Axis common modal information in block being executed

Part system

Not used

0 G code (group 1) R - -

1 G code (group 2) R - -

2 G code (group 5) R - -

3 G code (group 7) R - -

4 G code (group 9) R - -

5 G code (group 12) R - -

6 G code (group 13) R - -

7 G code R - -

15 Block No. R - -

64 G code (group 15) R - -

76 Shape compensation No. R - -

78 Wear compensation No. R - -

208 Miscellaneous function code R - -

212 Spindle function code R - -

216 Tool function code R - -

220 2nd miscellaneous function code R - -

240 Program No. R - -

244 Sequence No. R - -

14

Axis independent modal information in block being executed

112 Tool length compensation No. R - -

15

Axis common non-modal information in next block

Same as the section No. 11

16

Axis independent non-modal information in next block

Same as the section No. 12

17

Axis common modal information in next block

Same as the section No. 13

18

Axis independent modal information in next block

Same as the section No. 14

19

20 Axis common machine control information 1

Part system

Not used

84 Automatic effective feedrate R - -

Part system

Not used

88 Manual effective feedrate R - -

Part system

Not used

4 In-position R - -

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

C70 PLC Interface Manual

587

21

Axis independent machine control information 1

Part system

Axis No. 0 Current position in machine coordinate system

R R -

Part system

Axis No. 8 Manual interrupt amount (1) R - -

Part system

Axis No. 12 Manual interrupt amount (2) R - -

Part system

Axis No. 36 Current position in workpiece coordinate system

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 112 Current position in workpiece coordinate system during skip ON

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 116 Current position in machine coordinate system during skip ON

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 120 Remaining distance during skip ON

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 124 Current position in machine coordinate system during manual skip ON

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 64 Current position of the program command

R - -

Part system

Axis No. 400 Remaining command R - -

22 Information input from PLC to controller

Part system

Not used

0 Emergency stop cause R - -

23

Information output from controller to PLC

Axis No. Not

used 48

Spindle command speed (effective value)

R - -

24 Cumulative time data

Not used Not

used 0 Power ON time R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Not

used 4 Automatic operation time R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Not

used 8 Automatic start up time R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Not

used 12 External cumulative time 1 R/W - Refer to the manual

Not used Not

used 16 External cumulative time 2 R/W - Refer to the manual

25

26 Axis common machine control information 2

Not used Axis No. 8992 Spindle motor real speed R - -

Not used Axis No. 8988 Spindle motor load R - -

Not used Axis No. 9176 Spindle position within one rotation (Z-phase standard)

R - -

27

Axis independent machine control information 2

Part system

Axis No. 74 Smoothing status, servo status R R -

Part system

Axis No. 308 Servo delay amount R R -

Part system

Axis No. 328 Feed axis motor load A (%) R R -

Part system

Axis No. 330 Feed axis motor load B (%) R R -

Part system

Axis No. 60 Grid amount R R -

Part system

Axis No. 1720 Overload (%) R R -

Part system

Axis No. 1704 Estimated disturbance torque (%) R R -

Part system

Axis No. 2540 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) R R -

28

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

588

29

Common variables (common for all part systems, from #500)

Not used Not used x (Common for all part systems, #500 to #999) (x=500 to 999)

R/W - Refer to the manual

Input/Output with decimal point is available Addition input and absolute value input are available

30 Local variable value

Part system

Not used x Local variables (level 0) (x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are availableAddition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 100+x Local variables (level 1)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 200+x Local variables (level 2)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 300+x Local variables (level 3)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 400+x Local variables (level 4)(x=1 to 32) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

C70 PLC Interface Manual

589

31 Tool compensation amount

Part system

Not used 1 to 400 Tool compensation amount 1 (M system)

R/W - 99999999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 1001 to 1400

Tool compensation amount 2 (M system)

R/W - 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 6001 to 6400

Tool compensation amount 3 (M system)

R/W - 99999999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 7001 to 7400

Tool compensation amount 4 (M system)

R/W - 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 1 to 80 1st axis tool length compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 99999999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 1001 to 1080

1st axis wear compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 2001 to 2080

3rd axis tool length compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 3001 to 3080

3rd axis wear compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 4001 to 4080

2nd axis tool length compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 5001 to 5080

2nd axis wear compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 6001 to 6080

Nose R compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 7001 to 7080

Nose R wear compensation amount (L system)

R/W - 0 to 99999

Addition input and absolute value input are available

Part system

Not used 8001 to 8080

Hypothetical nose No. (L system) R/W - Refer to the manual

Addition input and absolute value input are available

32 Common variables (from #100)

Part system

Not used x #100 to #199 (x=100 to 199) R/W - Refer to the manual

Input/Output with decimal point is available Addition input and absolute value input are available

62 Synchronous error monitor

Not used Not used 101 Command error (1st set) R R -

Not used Not used 201 Command error (2nd set) R R -

Not used Not used 301 Command error (3rd set) R R -

Not used Not used 102 FB error (1st set) R R -

Not used Not used 202 FB error (2nd set) R R -

Not used Not used 302 FB error (3rd set) R R -

Not used Not used 103 Machine position (1st set) R R -

Not used Not used 203 Machine position (2nd set) R R -

Not used Not used 303 Machine position (3rd set) R R -

Section No.

Details for each section

No.

Sub ID (system designa-

tion)

Signifi- cance of data

No.

Sub- section

No. Details for each sub-section No.

Spindle, NC axis

R/W

PLC axis R/W

Data range when writing Remarks

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

590

Appendix 1.1 Section No. List

Section No. Details Write Axis

specifcation Sub ID (system

designation) PLC axis

designation Remark

0 R register Possible (partially

not possible) Invalid Invalid Not possible

1 Parameters common to each axis Possible (partially

not possible) Partially

valid Partially valid

Possible (partially not

possible)

2 Axis independent parameters Possible Invalid Valid Possible

(partially not possible)

3 Machine error compensation information

Not possible (partially possible)

Invalid Invalid Not possible

4 Workpiece coordinate system offset, External workpiece coordinate system offset

Possible Valid Valid Not possible

5 Alarm information Not possibleNot

possible Invalid Valid Not possible

6

7

8

9

10

11 Axis common non-modal information in block being executed

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

12 Axis independent non-modal information in block being executed

Not possible Valid Valid Not possible

13 Axis common modal information in block being executed

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

14 Axis independent modal information in block being executed

Not possible Valid Valid Not possible

15 Axis common non-modal information in next block

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

16 Axis independent non-modal information in next block

Not possible Valid Valid Not possible

17 Axis independent non-modal information in next block

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

18 Axis independent modal information in next block

Not possible Valid Valid Not possible

19

20 Axis common machine control information 1

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

21 Axis independent machine control information 1

Not possible Valid Valid Possible

(partially not possible)

22 Information input from PLC to controller

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

23 Information output from controller to PLC

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

24 Cumulative time data Possible Invalid Invalid Not possible

25

26 Axis common machine control information 2

Not possible Invalid Valid Not possible

27 Axis independent machine control information 1

Not possible Valid Valid Possible

28

29 Common variable value 1 Possible Invalid Invalid Not possible From #500

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

591

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List The sub-section No. list shows the sub-section No. of each data in correspondence with the section No.

Each data has a search No. To refer to the contents of the data, search for the corresponding data in "Explanation of

Read/Write Data" using this search No.

Search No.

Section No Details Write Axis

specifcation Sub ID (system

designation) PLC axis

designation Remark

30 Local variable value Possible Invali Valid Not possible

31 Tool compensation amount Possible Invalid Valid Not possible

32 Common variable value 2 Possible Invalid Valid Not possible From #100

33 - 61

62 Synchronous error monitor Not possible Invalid Invalid Not possible

1 - 1 0

No. of searching (Note) This is not the sub-section No. Section No.

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

Search No. Data type Sub-section No. Size (byte) Write

System/ axis

designation

PLC axis

designa tion

Remark

1-10

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step)

8960 8964 8968 8972

4 4 4 4

Possible Possible Possible Possible

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

[Data definition] This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step. (This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smax1 to 4.) The CNC creates the spindle gear shift command 1 and 2 with this va lue and the commanded S command. During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.

1-10 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

592

Section No. 0 R resister

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

0-10

R register R0 0 2 Possible Invalid Not possible

R register R1 1 2 Possible Invalid Not possible

: : : : : :

R register R9214 9214 2 Possible Invalid Not possible

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

1-10

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) 8960 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not Possible

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) 8964 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not Possible

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) 8968 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not

possible

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step) 8972 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

1-11

Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) 8976 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) 8980 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) 8984 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step) 8988 4 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

1-13

Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step) 9008 2 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle shift speed (Gear 2nd step) 9010 2 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle shift speed (Gear 3rd step) 9012 2 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Spindle shift speed (Gear 4th step) 9014 2 Possible Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

1-20 Spindle orientation speed 9024 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

1-21 Minimum spindle speed 9026 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

1-30

Spindle parameter SP001 8192 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

Spindle parameter SP002 8194 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

: : : : : :

Spindle parameter SP240 8670 2 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

593

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

1-50

Method selection parameter (1) Bit0: Bit1: Bit2: Bit3: Bit4: Bit5: Bit6: Synchronous tapping Bit7:

195 1 Not

possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

1-70

Method selection parameter (3) Bit0: Bit1: Tool compensation method (Tabsmv) Bit2: Bit3: Bit4: Bit5: Bit6: Bit7:

130 1 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

1-80

Method selection parameter (4) Bit0: Bit1: Bit2: Bit3: Bit4: Bit5: Reference point middle point ignore Bit6: Bit7:

194 1 Possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

594

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis (position switch)

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

1-100 Position switch [1]

axis 11984 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 11968 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 11972 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [2]

axis 12004 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 11988 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 11992 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [3]

axis 12024 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12008 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12012 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [4]

axis 12044 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12028 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12032 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [5]

axis 12064 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12048 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12052 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [6]

axis 12084 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12068 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12072 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [7]

axis 12104 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12088 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12092 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [8]

axis 12124 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 12108 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 12112 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

595

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis (position switch)

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

1-100 Position switch [9]

axis 14128 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14112 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14116 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [10]

axis 14148 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14132 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14136 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [11]

axis 14168 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14152 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14156 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [12]

axis 14188 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14172 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14176 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [13]

axis 14208 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14192 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14196 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [14]

axis 14228 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14212 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14216 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [15]

axis 14248 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14232 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14236 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

1-100 Position switch [16]

axis 14268 1 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible Designate ASCII code with a decimal

dog1 14252 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

dog2 14256 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

596

Section No. 2 Axis independent parameters

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

2-10

1st reference position coordinate 2nd reference position coordinate 3rd reference position coordinate 4th reference position coordinate

272 276 280 284

4 4 4 4

Possible Possible Possible Possible

Valid/Valid Valid/Valid Valid/Valid Valid/Valid

Possible Not possible Not possible Not possible

2-11 Stored stroke limit (+) Stored stroke limit (-)

288 292

4 4

Possible Possible

Valid/Valid Valid/Valid

Possible Possible

For machine tool builder For machine tool builder

2-20

Movement control parameter Bit0: Bit1: Inch input Bit2: Reference point return direction (-) Bit3: Servo OFF error compensation Bit4: Rotary axis Bit5: Motor CCW Bit6: Bit7: Bit8: Bit9: BitA: No reference point axis BitB: BitC: BitD: Diameter designated axis BitE: BitF:

20 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

R/W is not valid for the diameter specification axis of PLC axis.

2-30 Reference position return approach speed 38 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-35 Reference position return shift amount 44 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-36 Rapid traverse backlash amount 46 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-37 Cutting feed backlash amount 48 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-39

Axis parameter Bit0: Bit1:(System reserve) Bit2: Bit3: Bit4: Bit5: Bit6: (System reserve) Bit7: Bit8: Bit9: BitA: Soft limit invalid #8202 BitB: (System reserve) BitC: (System reserve) BitD:(System reserve) BitE: BitF:

640 2 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

2-40 Stored stroke limit II (+) Stored stroke limit II (-)

656 660

4 4

Possible Possible

Valid/Valid Valid/Valid

Not possible Not possible

For user For user

2-50 Rapid traverse time constant G0tL 24 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-51 Cutting feed time constant G1tL 26 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-52 Rapid traverse time constant G0t1 28 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-53 Cutting feed time constant G1t1 32 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-54 Current limit value 2 (SV014) 122 2 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-55 Axis name (axname) 0 1 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-56 Cutting feed clamp speed 264 4 Possible Valid/Valid Possible

2-57 Soft limit IB+ 768 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

2-58 Soft limit IB- 772 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

2-59 Soft limit IB type 376 1 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

597

Section No. 3 Machine error compensation information

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

3-10 Compensation basic axis No. 2 1 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-11 Compensation direction axis No. 6 1 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-12 Division point No. at reference position 10 2 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-13 Division point No. at the most negative side 14 2 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-14 Division point No. at the most positive side 18 2 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-15 Compensation scale factor 20 2 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

3-16 Division interval 28 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Section No. 4 Workpiece coordinate system offset, external workpiece coordinate system offset

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

4-10 G54 workpiece coordinate system offset 0 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-11 G55 workpiece coordinate system offset 4 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-12 G56 workpiece coordinate system offset 8 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-13 G57 workpiece coordinate system offset 12 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-14 G58 workpiece coordinate system offset 16 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-15 G59 workpiece coordinate system offset 20 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

4-16 External workpiece coordinate system offset 24 4 Possible Valid/Valid Not possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

598

Section No. 5 Alarm information

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

5-30 Servo alarm No.

Main 16 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Attribute (bit F) 18 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)

Sub 1 20 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Sub 2 22 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

5-90 Servo warning No.

Main 64 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Attribute (bit F) 66 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)

Sub 1 68 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Sub 2 70 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

5-130 Operation error No.

Main 96 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Attribute (bit F) 98 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)

Sub 1 100 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Sub 2 102 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

5-140 Automatic stop code

Main 104 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Attribute (bit F) 106 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible (0-Invalid,1-Valid)

Sub 1 108 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Sub 2 110 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

599

Section No. 11 Axis common non-modal information in block being executed

15 Axis common non-modal information in the next block

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

11/15-10 Interporation vector length 172 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

11/15-20

Movement mode gmov Binary data 0: Positionoing (each axis independent) 1: Positionoing (linear) 2: Linear interpolation 3: Circular interpolation (CW) 4: Circular interpolation (CCW) 5: Helical interpolation (CW) 6: Helical interpolation (CCW) 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: Time designated dwell 12: 13: 1st reference position valification 14: 2nd reference position valification 15: 3rd reference position valification 16: 4th reference position valification 17: Automatic referene point return 18: Return from automatic referene point 19: 2nd reference point return 20: 3rd reference point return 21: 4th reference point return 22: Skip function 23: Multi-step skip function 24: Multi-step skip function 2 25: Multi-step skip function 3 26: Thread cutting 27: 28: 29: Coordinate system setting

71 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 12 Axis independent non-modal information in block being executed

16 Axis independent non-modal information in the next block

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

12/16-10 Axis direction movement amount 4 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

600

Section No. 13 Axis common modal information in block being executed

17 Axis common modal information in the next block

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

13/17-10 G code (Group 1) 0 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Interpolation mode

13/17-11 G code (Group 2) 1 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Plane selection

13/17-12 G code (Group 5) 2 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Feed mode

13/17-13 G code (Group 7) 3 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Radius compensation modal

13/17-14 G code (Group 9) 4 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Fixed cycle modal

13/17-15 G code (Group 12) 5 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Workpiece coordinate system modal

13/17-16 G code (Group 13) 6 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Cutting mode

13/17-17

G code (Group 3, 4, 6, 10, 17, 18) Bit0: Absolute/incremental mode Bit1 : Barrier check Bit2 : Inch/metric mode Bit3 : Fixed cycle R point return Bit4 : Bit5 : Constant surface speed control Bit6 : Balance cut Bit7 :

7 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

13/17-20 Block No. 15 1 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible 0 to 99

13/17-25

G code (Group 15) BitB : In normal line control BitC : The right side is in normal line control

64 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible Normal line control modal

13/17-30 Shape compensation No. 76 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

13/17-31 Wear compensation No. 78 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

13/17-40 Miscellaneous function No. 208 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible M code (binary)

13/17-41 Spindle function code 212 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible S code (binary)

13/17-42 Tool function code 216 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible T code (binary)

13/17-43 2nd miscellaneous function code 220 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible B code (binary)

13/17-44 Program No. 240 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible O1 to 99999999

13/17-45 Sequence No. 244 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible N1 to 99999

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

601

Section No. 14 Axis independent modal information in block being executed

18 Axis independent modal information in the next block

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

14/18-10 Tool length compensation No. 112 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

Machininig center system only

Section No. 20 Axis common machine control information

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

20-10 Automatic effective feedrate 84 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Effective speed of feed direction

20-11 Manual effective feedrate 88 4 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Effective speed of axis direction

20-20 In-position 4 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 21 Axis independent machine control information

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

21-10 Current position in machine coordinate system

0 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

21-12 Manual interrupt amount (1) 8 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible Manual ABS switch is OFF

21-13 Manual interrupt amount (2) 12 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible Manual ABS switch is ON

21-20 Current position in workpiece coordinate system

36 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-30 Current position in workpiece coordinate system during skip ON

112 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-31 Current position in machine coordinate system during skip ON

116 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-32 Remaining distance during skip ON 120 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-33 Current position in machine coordinate system during manual skip ON

124 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-34 Current position of the program command

64 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

21-35 Remaining command 400 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Not possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

602

* Use Section sub-ID No. to designate the axis No.

When no Axis No. is designated (Section sub-ID No. is set to "0"), the 1st spindle will be selected.

1: 1st spindle

2: 2nd spindle

::

7: 7th spindle

Section No. 22 Information input from PLC to controller

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

22-10

Emergency stop cause Bit0: CNC side PLC Software stop state Bit1 : Bit2 : Bit3 : Bit4 :External emergency stop Bit5 : Bit6 : PLC Emergency stop output device Y327 is "1" Bit7 : Bit8 : Bit9 : BitA : BitB : BitC : BitD : Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal BitE : Spindle drive unit emergency stop output BitF : Servo drive unit emergency stop output

0 2 Not

possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 23 Information output from controller to PLC

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

23-10 Spindle command speed (effective value)

48 4 Not

possible Valid* / Invalid

Not possible Including the override

Section No. 24 Cumulative time data

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

24-1 Power ON time 0 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

24-2 Automatic operation time 4 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

24-3 Automatic start up time 8 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

24-4 External cumulative time 1 12 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

24-5 External cumulative time 2 16 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

603

Section No. 26 Axis common machine control information

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

26-10 Spindle motor real speed 8992 4 Not

possible Invalid/Valid Not possible Including the override

26-20 Spindle motor load 8988 2 Not

possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

26-30 Spindle position within one rotation (Z-phase standard)

9176 4 Not

possible Invalid/Valid Not possible

Section No. 27 Axis independent machine control information 2

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

27-10

Smoothing status, servo status Bit0: READY ON Bit1: servo ON Bit2: Bit3: In alarm Bit4: Absolute position established Bit5: Z phase passed Bit6: In-position Bit7: Torque limit Bit8: Smoothing 0 Bit9: Smoothing + BitA: Smoothing - BitB: BitC: H/W OT+ BitD: H/W OT- BitE: Near-point dog ON BitF:

74 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-20 Servo delay amount 308 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-30 Feed axis motor load A (%) 328 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-31 Feed axis motor load B (%) 330 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-33 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

2540 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-34 Machine end FB 2192 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-35 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

2540 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-36 Grid amount 60 4 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-37 Overload (%) 1720 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-38 Estimated disturbance torque (%) 1704 2 Not

possible Valid/Valid Possible

27-39 #2 ZERO 20502 Possible Valid/Valid Possible -99999.999 to 99999.999

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

604

Section No. 29 Common variable value 1

Search No.

Data type Sub-section

No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

50 sets #500 #549 500 to 549 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Part system common variable

100 sets #500 #599 500 to 599 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

200 sets #500 #699 500 to 699 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

500 sets #500 #999 500 to 999 4 Possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Section No. 30 Local variable value

Search No.

Data type Sub-section

No. Size

(byte) Write

System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

30-10 Local variables (Level 0) 1 to 32 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

30-11 Local variables (Level 1) 101 to 132 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

30-12 Local variables (Level 2) 201 to 232 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

30-13 Local variables (Level 3) 301 to 332 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

30-14 Local variables (Level 4) 401 to 432 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 31 Tool compensation amount

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

31-10 Tool compensation amount 1 1 to 400 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

The contents will differ depending on the type of tool offset memory.

31-20 Tool compensation amount 2 1001 to 1400

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-30 Tool compensation amount 3 6001 to 6400

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-40 Tool compensation amount 4 7001 to 7400

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-100 1st axis tool length compensation amount

1 to 80 4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

The contents will differ depending on the type of tool offset memory.

31-110 1st axis wear compensation amount 1001 to 1080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-120 3rd axis tool length compensation amount

2001 to 2080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-130 3rd axis wear compensation amount 3001 to 3080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-140 2nd axis tool length compensation amount

4001 to 4080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-150 2nd axis wear compensation amount 5001 to 5080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-160 Nose R compensation amount 6001 to 6080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-170 Nose R wear compensation amount 7001 to 7080

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

31-180 Hypothetical nose No. 8001 to 8080

1 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List

605

Section No. 32 Common variable value 2

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

32-10

50 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to #149

100 to 149

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Variables per part system 100 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to #199

100 to 199

4 Possible Valid/Invalid Not possible

Section No. 62 Synchronous error monitor

Search No.

Data type Sub-

section No.

Size (byte)

Write System/axis designation

PLC axis designation

Remark

62-1

Command error (1st set) 101 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Command error (2nd set) 201 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Command error (3rd set) 301 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

62-2

FB error (1st set) 102 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

FB error (2nd set) 202 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

FB error (3rd set) 302 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

62-3

Machine position (1st set) 103 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Machine position (2nd set) 203 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Machine position (3rd set) 303 4 Not

possible Invalid/ Invalid

Not possible

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

606

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data Appendix 1.3.1 How to refer to the data

The explanation of read and write data is common for all machine type. The method for referring to the data is shown

below.

(1) Search for the data to be read or written from the type of data givenin the "Sub-section No. List".

(2) Confirm the search No. corresponding to the searched data.

(3) Search for the reference data from the "Appendix 1.3.3 Detailed Explanation of Data" based on the confirmed search

No.

(Note 1) Note that the first value of the search No. (for example, 1-10) is the section No., but the second value is not the

sub-section No.

(Note 2)The expression "1-50-6" in the read/write data explanation indicates section No.: 1, search No.: 50 and bit: 6.

(Note 3)The search No. expressed as "11/15-10" in the read/write data explanation indicates that the contens are

common to the data in section No.: 11, search No.: 10, and the data in section No.: 15 and search No.: 10.

(3)

[Data definition] This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step. (This corresponds to the se tup parameter, spindle parameter smax1 to 4.) The CNC creates the spindle gear sh ift command 1 and 2 with this value and the commanded S command. During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.

[Data unit, range] The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.

[Precautions] After being set (written), this data is valid from the ne xt spindle speed (S) command. However, the clamping operation with the maximum speed will be validated immediately.

1-10 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

Section No. 1 Parameters common to each axis

Search No. Data type Sub-section No. Size (byte) Write

System/ axis

designation

PLC axis

designa tion

Remark

1-10

Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 2nd step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 3rd step) Maximum spindle speed (Gear 4th step)

8960 8964 8968 8972

4 4 4 4

Possible Possible Possible Possible

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

1-11

Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step) Spindle limit speed (Gear 2nd step) Spindle limit speed (Gear 3rd step) Spindle limit speed (Gear 4th step)

8976 8980 8984 8988

4 4 4 4

Possible Possible Possible Possible

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Invalid/ Valid

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

Not possible

(1) (2) (1)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

607

Appendix 1.3.2 Data unit system

The unit system in this manual is explained below.

(Note 1)The unit systems B and C are settings for the setup parameters (basic specification parameters: #1003 iunit).

This may differ depending on the machine type.

(Note 2)The unit system C (0.1 m system) is an option specification.

(Note 3)Of the selection parameters, #1041 I_inch and #1040 M_inch are common for each axis, and #1061 iout is for

the independent axis.

(Note 4)The data is read and written in the internal unit.

Uni systemt B (1 m system) C (0.1m system) Selection parameter

Input unit

Mm 0.001 0.0001 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1041 I_inch = 0

Inch 0.0001 0.00001 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1041 I_inch = 1

Output unit (Detection unit)

Mm 0.0005 0.00005 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1016 iout = 0

Inch 0.00005 0.000005 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1016 iout = 1

Machine constant input

unit

Mm 0.001 0.001 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1040 M_inch = 0

Inch 0.0001 0.00001 Setup parameter

Basic specification parameter #1040 M_inch = 1

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

608

Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details

The details of the data that are read or written with the PLC window are explained below.

[Data definition]

This is CNC R register. (This corresponds to the I/F diagnosis screen.)

Refer to "Chapter4 Explanation of Interface Signals" for contents of each register.

[Data unit, range]

The data unit and range may differ depending on the register. Refer to "Chapter4 Explanation of Interface Signals"

for details.

[Precautions]

Data cannot be written in the R register that the shared device is assigned.

Write the data using the PLC program.

[Data definition]

This is a parameter for the maximum spindle speed of each gear step.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smax1 to 4.)

The CNC creates the spindle gear shift command 1 and 2 with this value and the commanded S command.

During tapping, the maximum speed will be the spindle tap speed.

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.

[Precautions]

After being set (written), this data is valid from the next spindle speed (S) command.

However, the clamping operation with the maximum speed will be validated immediately.

[Data definition]

This parameter is used to calculate the spindle speed (S-analog) data for each gear step.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter slimt1 to 4.)

The CNC determines the corresponding spindle limit speed with the spindle gear selection input (Y...) that is output

from the PLC, and calculates the spindle speed (S-analog) data.

slimt n : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)

Sd1d2d3d4 : Spindle speed (S) command

SOVR : Spindle override

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 99999.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

0-10 R resister (R0 to R9214)

1-10 Maximum spindle speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

1-11 Spindle limit speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

Sd1d2d3d4

slimt n SOVR

100Spindle speed data

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

609

[Data definition]

When changing the spindle gears, the spindle motor is run slowly at a constant speed to make the changeover

operation smoothly. This parameter is used to designate the speed for it.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter ssift to 4.)

The CNC determines the corresponding spindle shift speed with the spindle gear selection input (Y...) output from

the PLC.

Spindle speed data for gear shift = ssift n / slimt n

slimt n : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)

ssiftn : Spindle shift speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished

[Data definition]

This parameter is used to rotate the spindle at a slow constant speed when carrying out spindle orientation

(stopping at set position).

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter sori.)

Spindle speed data for orientation = sori / slimt n

sori : Spindle orientation speed

slimtn : Spindle limit speed of corresponding gear step detemined with spindle gear selection input. (n: 1 to 4)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.

[Precautions]

If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.

[Supplement]

The orientation function is provided for most of the recent spindle controllers, so this parameter is not used often for

the spindle orientation.

[Data definition]

This parameter specifies the minimum spindle speed value.

If the S command issued is a spindle speed lower than this parameter value or if the results of the spindle override

are lower than this parameter value, the spindl will be rotated at this minimum spindle speed.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter smini.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min, and the setting range is 0 to 32767.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

1-13 Spindle shift speed (Gear 1st step to gear 4th step)

1-20 Spindle orientation speed

1-21 Minimum spindle speed

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

610

[Data definition]

These parameters are used to control the spindles.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, spindle parameter "#13001 (SP001)" to "#13240 (SP240)".)

Refer to Setup manual for details of each parameter.

[Data unit, range]

The data unit and range may differ depending on the parameters. Refer to the Setup manual for details.

[Precautions]

Setting of some parameters will become valid after turning the NC power ON. Please turn the NC power ON after

setting the data using the PLC window.

[Data definition]

The following parameters are set in bit units.

1-50-6) Synchronous tapping

This parameter is used when executing the machining program's tapping cycle (G84, G74) with the synchronous

method.

0: Asynchronous method

1: Synchronous method

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter set01.)

[Data definition]

The following parameters are set in bit units.

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0 to 255.

The set data could affect the other bits, so take care when setting.

1-70-1) Tool compensation method --- Valid only for lathe (L) system

Designate the type of movement command, when the tool compensation operation (Tmove) is set to "1".

0: Compensation is carried out regardless of the movement command type.

1: Compensation is carried out only for a movement command issued with an absolute value.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter Tabsmv.)

[Data definition]

The following parameters are set in bit units.

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0 to 255.

The set data could affect the other bits, so take care when setting.

1-80-5) Reference point middle point ignore

This parameter designates how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference point return.

0: Move to the reference point via the middle point designated in the program.

1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program, and move directly to the reference point.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter Mpoint.)

1-30 Spindle parameter (SP001 to SP240)

1-50 Method selection parameter (1)

1-70 Method selection parameter (3)

1-80 Method selection parameter (4)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

611

[Data definition]

A software dog switch is established at an arbitrary point of the axis on the machine, and the output signal from this

switch is output to the PLC interface when the axis is passing over this switch. A maximum of sixteen switches can

be set per part system, also another 16 axes can be set for PLC axes (a maximum of 128 axes).

This switch can be used after the zero point is established.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, position switches axis, dog1 and dog2.)

The position switch uses the axis, dog1, dog2 as one set.

axis: Name of axis for which the switch is established.

dog1: Distance 1 from basic machine coordinate system zero point

dog2: Distance 2 from basic machine coordinate system zero point

The difference of distance between dog1 and dog2 becomes the position switch width.

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.

[Precautions]

A slight delay will occur in the output signal fluctuation due to the actual machine position. This maximum delay time

(tmax), which depends on the area check method parameters #7504 to #7634, is as follows. Also consider the

delay by the scan time as it depends on scan time for the ladder.

[Data definition]

The 1st reference point, 2nd reference point, 3rd reference point and 4th reference point using 0 of the basic

machine coordinates as the base point can be set for each axis with these parameters.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameters G53ofs to #4_rfp.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.

[Precautions]

This setting is validated from the next reference point return after setting (writing).

1-100 Position switch [1] to [16]

2-10 Axis n 1st to 4th reference point coordinate

tmax = 0.004 - TP [s]

TP :

PGN :

tmax = 0.004 [s]

When parameter is set to "0" (commanded machine position)

When parameter is set to 1 (detector FB position)

1 PGN

Position loop time constant [s]

Position loop gain

MBasic machine coordinates

1st reference point

2nd reference point

3rd reference point

4th reference point

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

612

[Data definition]

These parameters set the movable range in the (+) or (-) limit using 0 of the basic machine coordinates as the base

point.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameters OT+ and OT-.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-11 Axis n Stored stroke limit II (+), (-) ----- For machine tool builder

M

OT-(X) OT+ (X)

OT+(Y)

OT-(Y)

Basic machine coordinates

Basic machine coordinate system

Movable range

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

613

[Data definition]

The following parameters are indicated in bit units.

2-20-1) Inch output

This parameter indicates whether the output unit is a metric or inch.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter iout.)

0: When the machine side detectors (ball screw and detectors) are metric specifications.

1: When the machine side detectors (ball screw and detectors) are inch specifications.

2-20-2) Reference point return direction (-)

This parameter indicates whether the reference point position is to the (-) direction or (+) direction from the

reference point return near-point detection (near-point dog).

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter dir(-).)

0: (+) direction

1: (-) direction

2-20-3) Servo OFF error compensation

The servo system will enter the servo OFF state when the servo OFF n th axis (*SVFn) signal is input from the PLC

to the CNC. This parameter indicates for each axis whether the amount that the motor rotated during servo OFF is

to be returned to the original state when the servo is turned ON again.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter svof.)

0: Compensate the error (Do not return to the original state.)

1: Do not compensate the error

2-20-4) Rotary axis

This parameter indicates whether the target control axis is a linear axis or rotary axis.

0: Linear axis

1: Rotary axis

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter rot.)

2-20-5) Motor CCW

This parameter indicates the motor rotation direction when commanded in the + direction.

0: CW direction looking from motor load side

1: CCW direction looking from motor load side

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter ccw.)

2-20 Axis n Movement control parameter

Near-point dog

(-) direction (+) direction

CW CCW

Looking from load side

For + command For + command

Motor rotation direction definition (when parameter ccw=0)

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

614

2-20-A) No reference point axis

This parameter indicates that the control axis is one that does not have a reference point or that reference point

return is not required.

0: G28, G29, G30, manual reference point return is carried out.

1: G28, G29, G30, manual reference point return is ignored.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, zero point return parameter noref.)

2-20-D) Diameter disgnated axis (valid only for lathe system)

This parameter indicates the movement amount (commanded by U) in the X axis direction to half of the command

value.

The command in address X will always be a diameter command.

0: Addresses X and U command movement amounts are the same.

1: The address U command movement amount is half of the address X movement amount.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, basic specification parameter dia.)

[Data definition]

This parameter indicates the movement speed when moving toward the reference point after detecting the near-

point dog and then decelerating to stop during the reference point return command. This parameter can be set for

each axis.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter G28crp.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is mm/min, /min or inch/min and the setting range is 0 to 60000.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-30 Axis n Reference position return approach speed

Reference point

Rapid traverse

Approach speed

Near-point dog

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

615

[Data definition]

This parameter defines the distance from the electrical reference point (grid) to the actual machine reference point

during the reference point return command. This can be set for each axis.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, reference point return parameter G28sft.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is 0 to 65535 (m).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

This parameter indicates the backlash amount to be compensated when the movement direction is reversed with

the movement command in the rapid traverse mode or with the manual operation (excluding handle feed). This can

be set for each axis.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G0back.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -9999 to +9999 pulses.

[Precautions]

If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.

[Data definition]

This parameter indicates the backlash amount to be compensated when the movement direction is reversed with

the movement command in the cutting feed mode or with the handle feed mode of the manual operation. This can

be set for each axis.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G1back.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -9999 to +9999 pulses.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-35 Axis n Reference position return shift amount

2-36 Axis n Rapid traverse backlash amount

2-37 Axis n Cutting feed backlash amount

Dog

Reference position shift amount

Mechanically fixed reference point (Reference point return position after setting shift amount)

Reference point position according to grid point

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

616

[Data definition]

The following parameters are indicated in bit units.

2-39-A)

Select the soft limit function (stored stroke limit II or IIB) set in the parameter #8204 and #8205.

0: Soft limit valid

1: Soft limit invalid

[Data definition]

These parameters set the movable range in the (+) or (-) limit using 0 of the basic machine coordinates as the base

point for each axis.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter's soft limit (+) and soft limit (-))

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is 1/2 of the machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

Set up the liner control time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the rapid traverse mode.

This can be set for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis

specification parameter G0tL.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 4000 (ms).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

Set up the liner control time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be set

for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter G1tL.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 4000 (ms).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

2-39 Axis n Axis parameter

2-40 Axis n Stored stroke limit II (+), (-) ----- For user

2-50 Axis n Rapid traverse time constant G0tL

2-51 Axis n Cutting feed time constant G1tL

M -X

+X

+Y

-Y

Basic machine coordinates

Movable range

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

617

[Data definition]

Set up the primary-delay time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be

set for each axis with the parameter. (This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter

G0t1. When acceleration or deceleration by software is selected, the second stage time constant is used in G0t1.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 5000 (ms).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

Set up the primary-delay time constant for the acceleration and deceleration in the cutting feed mode. This can be

set for each axis with the parameter.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, axis specification parameter G1t1. When acceleration or deceleration by

software is selected, the second stage time constant is used in G1t1.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 5000 (ms).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

Set the rate (%) in respect to the stall current for special operations (absolute position initialization, stopper

operation, etc). (This is the limit value for both + and - direction.) For making the maximum driver torque level

available, set "800". This can be set for each axis with the parameter.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, servo parameter SV014.)

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is the stall rated current %, and the setting range is 0 to 999 (%).

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

Specify the axis name of each axis with alphabet. Spcify it from X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter and basic parameter "axname".)

[Data unit, range]

Input and output with ASCII code.

[Data definition]

Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.

It will be clamped with this feedrate even if the feedrate with G01 is over this value.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter and basic parameter "clamp".)

[Data unit, range]

Data unit is ms, and the setting range is 1 to 1000000 (ms).

2-52 Axis n Rapid traverse time constant G0t1

2-53 Axis n Cutting feed time constant G1t1

2-54 Axis n Current limit value 2

2-55 Axis n Axis name

2-56 Axis n Cutting feed clamp speed

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

618

[Data definition]

Set the coordinate of the upper limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is prohibited.

Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter OT_1B+.)

Stored stroke limit IB function will be invalid if the values set for the sign and value (other than 0) are the same as

soft limit IB-.

[Data unit, range]

Data unit is half of machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm

[Data definition]

Set the coordinate of the lower limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is prohibited.

Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter and axis specification parameter OT_1B-.)

Stored stroke limit IB function will be invalid if the values set for the sign and value (other than 0) are the same as

soft limit IB-.

[Data unit, range]

Data unit is half of machine constant input unit, and the setting range is -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm

[Data definition]

Select the type that applies the settings of "#2062 OT_IB+" and "#2061 OT_IB-" in stored stroke limit I. (This

corresonds to the axis specification parameter OT_1Byte.)

0: Soft limit IB is valid

1: Both soft limit IB and soft limit IC are invalid

2: Soft limit IC is valid

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0, 1 and 2.

[Data definition]

Specify the basic axis address for machine error compensation.

For pitch error compensation, set the name of the axis to be compensated.

For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be the base axis.

In the multi-part system, set "part system No. + axis name".

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter cmpax.)

[Data unit, range]

Output the axis No. of designated axis.

[Precautions]

Write disabled.

2-57 Axis n Axis n Soft limit IB+

2-58 Axis n Soft limit IB-

2-59 Axis n Soft limit IB type

3-10 Compensation basic axis No.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

619

[Data definition]

Specify the compensation axis address for machine error compensation.

For pitch error compensation, set the same axis name as #4001 cmpax.

For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be actually compensated.

In the multi-part system, set "part system No. + axis name".

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter drcax.)

[Data unit, range]

Output the axis No. of designated axis.

[Precautions]

Write disabled.

[Data definition]

Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference point position. The reference point is actually the

base, so there is no compensation No. Set the number that is decremented by 1.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter rdvno.)

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 4101 to 5124.

[Precautions]

Write disabled.

[Data definition]

Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest negative side.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter mdvno.)

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 4101 to 5124.

[Precautions]

Write disabled.

[Data definition]

Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest positive side.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter pdvno.)

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 4101 to 5124.

[Precautions]

Write disabled.

[Data definition]

Set the compensation amount's scale.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter sc.)

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0 to 99.

[Precautions]

If the writing is executed during the manual operation, it will be validated after the axis movement is stopped.

3-11 Compensation direction axis No.

3-12 Division point No. at reference position

3-13 Division point No. at the most negative side

3-14 Division point No. at the most positive side

3-15 Compensation scale factor

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

620

[Data definition]

Set the interval to divide the basic axis. Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these

intervals.

(This corresponds to the setup parameter, machine compensation parameter spcdy.)

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 1 to 9999999.

[Precautions]

Writing is possible during the automatic operation, but it will be validated after the NC axis movement is finished.

[Data definition]

These are the G54 to G59 workpiece offset amount of the nth axis (n: 1 to No. of control axes.).

(This corresponds to the tool/compensation amount workpiece coordinate offset G54 to G59.)

[Data unit, range]

Unit

Range: -199999998 to +199999998

[Precautions]

This setting is valid after the data is rewritten and the next workpiece coordinate changeover is commanded.

[Data definition]

These are the external workpiece coordinate system offset amount of the nth axis (n: 1 to No. of control axes).

(This corresponds to the tool/compensation amount workpiece coordinate offset EXT.)

[Data unit, range]

Unit

Range: -199999998 to +199999998

[Precautions]

This setting is valid after the data is rewritten and the next workpiece coordinate changeover is commanded.

3-16 Division interval

4-10 Axis n G54 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-11 Axis n G55 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-12 Axis n G56 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-13 Axis n G57 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-14 Axis n G58 workpiece coordinate system offset

4-15 Axis n G59 workpiece coordinate system offset

Input unit Linear axis Rotary axis

(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

4-16 Axis n External workpiece coordinate system offset

Input unit Linear axis Rotary axis

(iunit) Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

621

[Data definition]

This indicates that an error has occurred in the servo system.

When an error occurs, the NC alarm 2 (AL2:X331) will turn ON.

(1) Data configuration

(2) Alarm contents

5-30 Servo alarm No.

Sub-section No. Details

16 Alarm No. main (2-byte)

18

Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F 0: No alarm 1: Alarm has occurred (hexadecimal)

20 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)

22 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contents

1 10 Alarm axis Insufficient voltage

1 11 - Axis selection error

1 12 Alarm axis Memory error 1

1 13 - Software processing error 1

1 16 Alarm axis Magnetic pole detection error

1 17 Alarm axis A/D converter error

1 18 Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Initial communication error

1 1A Alarm axis Machine side detector - Initial communication error

1 1B Alarm axis Machine side detector - CPU error 1

1 1C Alarm axis Machine side detector - EEPROM/LED error

1 1D Alarm axis Machine side detector - Data error

1 1E Alarm axis Machine side detector - Memory error

1 1F Alarm axis Machine side detector - Communication error

1 20 Alarm axis Mortor side detector - No signal

1 21 Alarm axis Machine side detector - No signal

1 22 Alarm axis LSI error

1 23 Alarm axis Excessive speed error 1

1 25 Alarm axis Absolute position data lost

1 26 - Unused axis error

1 27 Alarm axis Machine side detector - CPU error 2

1 28 Alarm axis Machine side detector - Overspeed

1 29 Alarm axis Machine side detector - Absolute position data error

1 2A Alarm axis Machine side detector - Relative position data error

1 2B Alarm axis Motor side detector - CPU error 1

1 2C Alarm axis Motor side detector - EEPROM/LED error

1 2D Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Data error

1 2F Alarm axis Mortor side detector - Communication error

1 30 Alarm axis Over regeneration

1 31 Alarm axis Overspeed

1 32 Alarm axis Power module overcurrent

1 33 Alarm axis Overvoltage

1 34 - NC-DRV communication - CRC error

1 35 Alarm axis NC command error

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

622

(Note 1) Depending on the driver type and power supply type, there may be some alarms that might not occur.

(Note 2) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contents

1 36 - NC-DRV communication - Communication error

1 37 Alarm axis Initial parameter error

1 38 - NC-DRV communication - Protocol Error 1

1 39 Alarm axis NC-DRV communication - Protocol Error 2

1 3A Alarm axis Overcurrent

1 3B Alarm axis Power module overheat

1 3C Alarm axis Regeneration circuit error

1 40 Alarm axis Detector selection unit switching error

1 41 Alarm axis Detector selection unit communication error

1 42 Alarm axis Feedback error 1

1 43 Alarm axis Feedback error 2

1 46 Alarm axis Motor overheat

1 50 Alarm axis Overload 1

1 51 Alarm axis Overload 2

1 52 Alarm axis Excessive error 1

1 53 Alarm axis Excessive error 2

1 54 Alarm axis Excessive error 3

1 55 - External emergency stop

1 58 Alarm axis Collision detection 1 : G0

1 59 Alarm axis Collision detection 1 : G1

1 5A Alarm axis Collision detection 2

1 5C Alarm axis Orientation feedback error

1 5F - External contactor error

1 61 - Power module overcurrent

1 63 - Supplementary regeneration error

1 65 - Rush relay error

1 67 - Phase interruption

1 68 - Watchdog

1 69 - Grounding

1 6A - External contactor welding

1 6B - Rush relay welding

1 6C - Main circuit error

1 6D - Parameter error

1 6E - Memory error

1 6F - Power supply error

1 71 - Instantaneous power interruption

1 73 - Over regeneration

1 74 - Regenerative resistor overheat

1 75 - Overvoltage

1 76 - External emergency stop setting error

1 77 - Power module overheat

1 88 - Watchdog

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

623

[Data definition]

This indicates that a warining alarm has occurred in the servo system.

(1) Data configuration

(2) Alarm contents

(Note 1) E7 of the alarm No. sub 1 cannot be viewed as the servo warning No.

(Note 2) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

5-90 Servo warning No.

Sub-section No. Details

64 Alarm No. main (2-byte)

66

Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F 0: No alarm 1: Alarm has occurred (hexadecimal)

68 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)

70 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contens

2 90 Alarm axis Detector - Initial communication error

2 91 Alarm axis Detector - Communication error

2 92 Alarm axis Detector - Protocol error

2 93 Alarm axis Initial absolute position fluctuation

2 96 Alarm axis Scale feedback error

2 97 Alarm axis Scale offset error

2 9E Alarm axis Absolute position detector - Revolution counter error

2 9F - Battery voltage drop

2 A8 Alarm axis Turret indexing error warning

2 E0 Alarm axis Over regeneration warning

2 E1 Alarm axis Overload warning

2 E3 Alarm axis Absolute position counter warning

2 E4 Alarm axis Parameter error warning

2 E6 Alarm axis Control axis detachment warning

2 E7 - In NC emergency stop state

2 E8 - Excessive supplementary regeneration frequency

2 E9 - Instantaneous power interruption warning

2 EA - In external emergency stop state

2 EB - Over regeneration warning

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

624

[Data definition]

This indicates that the axis cannot move, etc., due to the operation or machine side conditions.

When an error occurs, the NC alarm 4 (AL4) will turn ON.

(1) Data configuration

5-130 Operation error No.

AL4 $1 $2 $3 $4 $5 $6 $7

X633 X6B3 X733 X7B3 X833 X8B3 X933

Sub-section No. Details

96 Alarm No. main (2-byte)

98

Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F 0: No alarm 1: Alarm has occurred (hexadecimal)

100 Alarm No. sub 1 (2-byte)

102 Alarm No. sub 2 (2-byte)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

625

(2) Alarm contents

(Note 1) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contents

1 1 Alarm axis Dog overrun

1 2 Alarm axis Z-axis not cross

1 3 Alarm axis Invalid return

1 4 Alarm axis External interlock

1 5 Alarm axis Internal interlock

1 6 Alarm axis H/W stroke end

1 7 Alarm axis S/W stroke end

1 8 - Chuck/tail-stock barrier stroke end axis found

1 9 - Reference point return number illegal

1 20 - Reference point return illegal

1 24 - Reference point return disabled during absolute position detection alarm

1 25 - Reference point return disabled during zero point initialization

1 51 - Synchronization error too large

1 101 - Not operation mode

1 102 - Override zero

1 103 - External feedrate zero

1 104 - F1-digit speed zero

1 105 - Spindle stop

1 106 - Handle feed axis No. illegal

1 107 - Spindle speed excessive

1 108 - Fixed point mode feed axis No. illegal

1 109 - Block start interlock

1 110 - Cutting block start interlock

1 112 - Program check mode

1 115 - Resetting

1 117 - Play back not possible

1 120 - Synchronization correction mode ON

1 121 - No synchronous control option

1 124 Alarm axis Simultaneous axes movement prohibition when the incline axis control is valid.

1 160 Alarm axis Axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft limit range

1 1005 - Execution of G114.* during G114.*

1 1106 - Spindle synchronization phase calculation illegal

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

626

[Data definition]

This indicates the cause of automatic stop or block stop.

(1) Data configuration

(2) Alarm contents

5-140 Automatic stop code

Sub-section No. Contents

104 Alarm attribute main (2-byte)

106

Alarm attribute (2-byte) bit F 0: No alarm 1: Alarm has occurred (hexadecimal)

108 Alarm attribute sub 1 (2-byte)

110 Alarm attribute sub 2 (2-byte)

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contents

1 101 - Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is moving.

1 102 - Automatic start is not performed as the NC is not ready.

1 103 - Automatic start is not performed as the "reset" signal has been input.

1 104 - Automatic start is not perfomed as the feed hold signal is turned ON.

1 105 - Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is at the stroke end.

1 106 - Automatic start is not performed as one of the axes is at the stored stroke limit.

1 107 - Automatic start is not performed as there is no operation mode.

1 108 - Automatic start is not performed as two or more automatic operation modes have been selected.

1 109 - Automatic start is not performed as the automatic operaton mode has changed to another automatic operation mode.

1 110 - Automatic start is not performed as the buffer correction is executed.

1 113 - Automatic start is not possible because a thermal alarm (Z53 CNC overheat) has occurred.

1 116 - Automatic start is not possible because the voltage of the battery in the NC control unit has dropped.

1 138 - A start signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm.

1 139 - A start signal was input during zero point initialization in the absolute position detection system.

1 141 - A start signal was input for MDI mode while the MDI operation was being carried out in another part system.

1 190 - Automatic start is not performed as the setting of setup parameters is enabled.

1 191 - Automatic start was attempted while a file was being deleted/written.

2 201 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as an axis is at the stroke end.

2 202 - Automatic operation pause was performed as an axis is at the stored stroke limit.

2 203 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the reset signal is detected.

2 204 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the feed hold switch is ON.

2 205 - Automatic operation pause was perfomed as the operation mode has changed to another mode during automatic operation.

2 206 - The acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large.

2 215 - An absolute position detection alarm occurred.

3 301 - Block stop was performed as the SINGLE BLOCK switch turned ON.

3 302 - Block stop was performed due to the user macro stop.

3 303 - Block stop was performed as the automatic mode changed to another automatic mode.

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

627

Alarm No. Main

Alarm No. Sub 1

Alarm No. Sub 2

Alarm contents

3 304 - MDI last block was completed.

3 305 - The interlock signal, which locks the block start, is ON.

3 306 - The interlock signal, which locks the block cutting start, is ON.

3 310 - The "inclined axis control: No Z axis compensation" signal has turned ON or OFF during the program operation.

10 (Note 2) - The Nos. in the table are shown during the operation of the corresponding completion wait factor. The numbers will disappear when the operation is completed.

0 0 0

1 1 1

8 8 2

9 9 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0

(Note 1) Refer to the alarm No. when the alarm attribute bit F is set to 1.

(Note 2)

(Note 3) (Note 4)

(Note 3) Waiting for unclamp when "#2076 index_x"=1.

(Note 4) Door open mode is enable d by the door interlock function.

A la

rm N

o.

W ait

ing fo

r u nc

lam p

sig na

l

D w

el lin

g

A la

rm N

o.

D oo

r o pe

n

Wa itin

g f or

sp ind

le po

siti on

to be

lo op

ed

A la

rm N

o.

Wa itin

g f or

spi nd

le o rie

nta tion

to co

mp lete

Wa itin

g f or

cu ttin

g s pe

ed de

ce ler

ati on

Wa itin

g f or

rap id

tra ve

rse de

ce ler

ati on

W ai

tin g

fo r M

ST B

co m

pl et

io n

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

628

[Data definition]

The remaining movement distance of the block being executed is indicated.

[Data unit, range]

The unit is 1/2 of the input unit.

(Either 0.5m, or 0.05m)

[Precautions]

The data is not set when G0 non-interpolation (G0Intp=1). The data will be updated with the interpolation cycle.

[Data definition]

11/15-10 Interporation vector length

11/15-20 Movement mode

Data (binary) Contents

0 G00 Positionoing (each axis independent)

1 G00 Positionoing (linear)

2 G01 Linear interpolation

3 G02 Circular interpolation (CW)

4 G03 Circular interpolation (CCW)

5 G02 X_Y_Z Helical interpolation (CW)

6 G03 X_Y_Z Helical interpolation (CW)

7

8

9

10

11 G04 Time designated dwell

12

13 G27_P1 1st reference position valification

14 G27_P2 2nd reference position valification

15 G27_P3 3rd reference position valification

16 G27_P4 4th reference position valification

17 G28 Automatic referene point return

18 G29 Return from automatic referene point

19 G30_P2 2nd reference point return

20 G30_P3 3rd reference point return

21 G30_P4 4th reference point return

22 G31 Skip function

23 G31.1 Multi-step skip function 1

24 G31.2 Multi-step skip function 2

25 G31.3 Multi-step skip function 3

26 G33 Thread cutting (G32 for lathe G code series 2.)

27 G34 Variable lead thread cutting (lathe only)

28

29 G92 Coordinate system setting

30

Y

X

(Remaining movement distance of each axis)

[Interpolation vector length]

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

629

[Data definition]

The remaining movement distance of each axis in the block being executed is indicated.

[Data unit, range]

The unit is 1/2 of the input unit.

(Either 0.5m, or 0.05m)

[Precautions]

(1) If the movement mode is skip or multi-step skip, the movement end point will not be the skip stop point, but

instead will be a value calculated from the commanded value.

(2)If the movement mode is counter preset, the counter preset value will be set instead of the remaining movement

distance of each axis. The value will be cleared immediately after the counter preset is executed.

(3) If the movement mode is reference point return, the remaining movement distance to the middle point will be set.

(4) If the movement mode is start position return, the remaining movement distance from the middle point will be

set.

[Data definition]

The current movement modal (group 1) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current plane selection modal (group 2) is indicated.

12/16-10 Axis direction movement amount

13/17-10 Interpolation mode (G code group 1)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 G00 G00 G00

1 G01 G01 G01

2 G02 G02 G02

3 G03 G03 G03

4 - - -

5 - - -

6 G33 G32 G33

7 - - -

8 - G34 G34

13/17-11 Plane selection (G code group 2)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 G17 G17 G17

1 G18 G18 G18

2 G19 G19 G19

(Machine position at movement end point) - (Machine position at movement start or current position)

For block being executed For block before execution

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

630

[Data definition]

The current feed modal (group 5) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current radius compensation modal (group 7) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current fixed cycle modal (group 9) is indicated.

13/17-12 Feed mode (G code group 5)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 - - -

1 G94 G98 G94

2 G95 G99 G95

13/17-13 Radius compensation modal (G code group 7)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 G40 G40 G40

1 G41 G41 G41

2 G42 G42 G42

3 - G46 G46

13/17-14 Fixed cycle modal (G code group 9)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 - G72 G72

1 - G73 G73

2 - G74 G74

3 - G75 G75

4 - G76 G76

5 - G90 G77

6 - G92 G78

7 - G94 G79

8 G80 G80 G80

9 G81 - -

10 G82 - -

11 G83 G83 G83

12 G84 G84 G84

13 G85 G85 G85

14 G86 - -

15 G87 G87 G87

16 G88 G88 G88

17 G89 G89 G89

18 - - -

19 - G70 G70

20 - G71 G71

21 G73 - -

22 G74 - -

23 G76 G79 G83.2

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

631

[Data definition]

The current workpiece coordinate system modal (group 12) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current cutting modal (group 13) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current G modal (group 3, 4, 6, 17, 18) is indicated.

* Lathe system

[Data definition]

The current block No. is indicated.

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0 to 99.

13/17-15 Workpiece coordinate system modal (G code group 12)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 G54 G54 G54

1 G55 G55 G55

2 G56 G56 G56

3 G57 G57 G57

4 G58 G58 G58

5 G59 G59 G59

13/17-16 Cutting mode (G code group 13)

Data Machininig

center system

Lathe system

Series 2 Series 3

0 G61 G61 G61

1 G62 G62 G62

2 G63 G63 G63

3 G64 G64 G64

4 G61.1 - -

13/17-17 Other G modals (G code group 3, 4, 6, 10, 17, 18)

bit7 *bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Group 18 Group 17 Group 10 Group 6 Group 4 Group 3

1 G15 G96 G99 G20 G22 G90

0 G14 G97 G98 G21 G23 G91

13/17-20 Block No.

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

632

[Data definition]

The current normal line control modal (G code group 15) is indicated.

* The bitB is turned ON by either G41.1 or G42.1. The bit C determines which of G41.1 or G42.1 turns the bit B

ON.

[Data definition]

(1)Machininig center system

The tool compensation No. commanded by address D in the nose radius compensation (G41, G42) or position

compensation (G45 to G48) block is indicated.

(2)Lathe system

The tool length compensation No. the tool function code T is indicated.

(a) When designating the tool length and tool nose wear compensation No. with the low-order 1digit or 2 digits

of the T command.

(b) When designating the tool length compensation No. and tool nose wear compensation No. independently.

In this case, the tool length compensation No. is the last two digits of the high-order digit.

[Data definition]

(1) Machininig center system

This is the same as the shape compensation No.

(2) Lathe system

The tool nose wear No. commanded by the tool function code (T) is indicated.

13/17-25 Normal line control modal (G code group 15)

bitF bitE bitD bitC bitB bitA bit9 bit8

Group 15 Group 15

1 G42.1 G41.1/ G42.1

0 G41.1 G40.1

13/17-30 Shape compensation No.

13/17-31 Wear compensation No.

Same compensation No.

Tool No.

Same compensation No.

Tool No.

Tool compensation method Tool nose wear compensation

Tool compensation method Tool nose wear compensation

Tool No. + Tool length compensation

Tool No. + Tool length compensation

Tool nose wear compensation

Tool nose wear compensation

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

633

[Data definition]

The miscellaneous function No. commanded by the miscellaneous function code (M) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The spindle speed commanded by the spindle function code (S) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The tool No. commanded by the tool function code (T) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The data commanded by the 2nd miscellaneous function code (B, A or C) is indicated.

[Data definition]

The current program No. (modal) is indicated.

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (binary).

[Data definition]

The current sequence No. is indicated.

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 1 to 99999 (binary).

[Data definition]

The tool length compensation No. of the axis is indicated

[Data unit, range]

The setting range is 0 to 99999999 (binary).

(Note) This is valid only for the machining center system.

[Data definition]

The actual feedrate in the automatic mode is indicated.

(This includes the speed change conditions such as override.)

(1) For G0, G1, G2, G3, G27

The composite speed of all commanded axes is indicated.

(2) For G28, G29, G30

The speed of the fastest axis among the axes moving simultaneously is indicated.

[Data unit]

13/17-40 Miscellaneous function (M) code (BCD)

13/17-41 Spindle function (S) code (BIN)

13/17-42 Tool function (T) code (BCD)

13/17-43 2nd miscellaneous function (B) code (BCD)

13/17-44 Program No.

13/17-45 Sequence No.

14/18-10 Tool length compensation No.

20-10 Automatic effective feedrate

Input unit system (iunit)

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 1 2-10 mm/min 0.1 2-10 inch/min

C 0.1 2-10 mm/min 0.01 2-10 inch/min

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

634

[Data definition]

The actual feedrate in the manual mode is indicated.

(This includes the speed change conditions such as override.)

The speed of the fastest axis among the axes moving simultaneously is indicated.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

This indicates that the control axes which belong to each part system are in teh state of in-position. (Up to 8 axes

are available in the part system)

[Data definition]

The current position of the axis in the machine coordinate system is indicated.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

The total of the movement amount in the manual mode with the manual absolute switch OFF is indicated.

The program coordinate system is shifted by the distance corresponding to this data.

[Data unit]

20-11 Manual effective feedrate

Input unit system (iunit)

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 1 2-10 mm/min 0.1 2-10 inch/min

C 0.1 2-10 mm/min 0.01 2-10 inch/min

20-20 In-position

21-10 Current position in machine coordinate system

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) sInput unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-12 Manual interrupt amount (1) (Manual absolute switch OFF)

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

635

[Data definition]

The total of the movement amount in the manual mode with the manual absolute switch ON is indicated.

This data is cleared in the following cases:

(1) When calculation of the buffer is started during automatic starting, or when automatic start up is executed.

(2) When the reset signal is input.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

The current position in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system is indicated.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

The current position in the workpiece coordinate system when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is

indicated.

This corresponds to the macro variable #5061, 5062 .....

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

The current position in the machine coordinate system when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is

indicated.

[Data unit]

21-13 Manual interrupt amount (2) (Manual absolute switch OFF)

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-20 Current position in workpiece coordinate system

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-30 Current position in workpiece coordinate system during skip ON

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-31 Current position in machine coordinate system during skip ON

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

636

[Data definition]

The remaining commanded distance when the skip signal is input during the G31 command is indicated.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

The current position in the machine coordinate system when the skip signal is ON during the manual skip command

is indicated.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

This indicates the program position of machine coordinate system. (The same value as the current value 2 of the

servo monitor screen will be displayed.)

This data does not include the work offset amount, tool compensation amount and radius compensation

amount. Counter operation is artificially carried out by adding the remaining movement amount to the end position

coordinate which is designated by the machining program. So it informs the command position of the machining

program when it reaches the end point of each block, but it does not show the correct path of the machining

program when the axis is in motion.

[Data unit]

The double of the counter value is stored.

[Data definition]

It displays the remaining distance of the movement command currently executed. (The remaining distance is the

incremental distance from the current position to the end point of that block).

[Data unit]

21-32 Remaining distance during skip ON

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-33 Current position in machine coordinate system during manual skip ON

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-34 Current position of program command

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

21-35 Remaining command

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

637

[Data definition]

The cause of why the CNC entered the emergency stop state is indicated.

This data can also be referred to with the file register R21 (G10221) in the PLC interface.

The correspondence of each bit is explained below. Here, the signal is normally "1", and is set to "0" when an

emergency stop occurs.

22-10-0) CNC side PLC Software stop state

This indicates that the emergency stop state was entered because the CNC side PLS is in the stop state. Switching

RUN/STOP for CNC side PLC is made by using the CNC unit rotary switch 2 (right side). (Normal: 0, at STOP: 1)

22-10-4) Emergency stop output

This indicates that the 24V is not being supplied to the emergency stop input because the emergency stop switch

has been pressed.

22-10-6) PLC Emergency stop output device Y327 is "1"

This indicates that the user PLC has entered the emergency stop state.

The PLC device "Y427" is the PLC emergency stop interface.

22-10-D) Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal

The device No. of door interlock dogO/T arbitrary allocation overlaps another signal, or that is specified with and

illegal No.

22-10-E) Spindle drive unit emergency stop output

This indicates that the spindle controller is in the emergency stop state.

22-10-F) Servo drive unit emergency stop output

This indicates that the servo controller is in the emergency stop state.

[Data definition]

This is not the spindle function (S) command value, but instead is the commanded speed that is obtained by adding

the conditions such as spindle override, spindle stop and spindle gear shift to the S command. Designate the axis

No. with section sub-ID No.

(1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, ...7: 7th spindle)

* When "0" is set, the 1st spindle data will be output.

[Data unit and range]

The data unit is r/min. The setting range is 0 to 32767.

[Data definition]

This is the total cumulative time from when the controller power is turned ON to when it is turned OFF.

[Data unit and range]

The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.

The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

22-10 Emergency stop cause

23-10 Spindle command speed (effective value)

24-1 Power ON time

64 9000 Read dataTime [s]

9000 64 Write data time

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

638

[Data definition]*256

This is the total cumulative time per machining time from when the automatic start button is pressed in the memory

(tape) mode to when the M02/M30 command is issued, or to when the reset process is carried out by pressing the

reset button.

[Data unit and range]

The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.

The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

[Data definition]

This is the total cumulative time of automatic starting from when the automatic start button is pressed in the memory

(tape) mode or MDI mode to when the feedhold stop, block stop or reset button is pressed.

[Data unit and range]

The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.

The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

[Data definition]

This counts and displays the total cumulative time that the designated signal (Y414, Y415) is ON with the PLC

program. The signals are assigned in the following manner.

24-4 External cumulative time 1: Y314

24-5 External cumulative time 2: Y315

[Data unit and range]

The read data is a binary, and is not a time unit.

The following calculation is performed to change the data to time (unit: second).

The reverse calculation is perfomed to write the data.

24-2 Automatic operation time

24-3 Automatic start up time

24-4 External cumulative time 1

24-5 External cumulative time 2

64 9000 Read dataTime [s]

9000 64 Write data time

64 9000 Read dataTime [s]

9000 64 Write data time

64 9000 Read dataTime [s]

9000 64 Write data time

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

639

[Data definition]

This is the real speed of the spindle motor detected by the encoder built into the motor.

[Data unit, range]

The data unit is r/min.

[Data definition]

This is the load (torque current) of the spindle motor.

The rated load for 30 minutes is regarded as 100%.

[Data definition]

This is the Z-phase position within one rotation of the spindle motor.

The same value (rounded with 360) as the machine value in the spindle monitor (3) screen of the CNC monitor will

be output.

[Data unit]

If the output unit setting ("#3025") is B, it is 0.0005 degree, and if it is C, it is 0.00005 dgree.

26-10 Spindle Motor real speed

26-20 Spindle Motor load

26-30 Spindle Position within one rotation (Z-phase standard)

Spindle motor load (%) = Read data (An absolute value is retrieved.)

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

640

[Data definition]

The various servo related information is expressed in bit units.

27-10-0) Ready ON

If the drive unit can be entered the ready ON state, including the ready ON request signal from the CNC, the main

circuit can be turned on. While the main circuit is ON, the ready ON signal will turn ON as the answer signal to the

CNC.

The conditions for turning OFF is as follows:

(1) When the ready ON request signal from the CNC turns OFF.

(2) When the CNC enters the emergency stop state.

(3) When a servo alarm occurs.

27-10-1) Servo ON

If the conditions, where the above ready ON signal is ON and the servo ON request signal is received from the

CNC, are met, turn ON the servo ON signal (structure a position loop). While the position loop is structured, the

servo ON signal will remain ON as the answer signal to the CNC.

The conditions for turning OFF is as follows:

(1) When the condition for turning OFF the the ready OFF signal is met and the servo ON request signal from

the CNC turns OFF.

27-10-3) In alarm

This notifies that the drive unit is in the servo OFF state.

27-10-4) Absolute position established

This turns ON when the absolute position has been established.

27-10-5) Z phase passed

This means that the datum point (Z phase) has been passed by the axis movement after the power was turned ON.

The servo parameter "SPEC" value in the setup parameters determines which datum point (Z phase) is valid

among the points output by detector.

The CNC will determine the reference point return position, etc., based on this signal.

Once turned ON, this signal remains ON until it is turned OFF.

27-10-6) In-position

This indicates that the difference of the command and the feedback from the detector, or in other words, the

position deflection (position loop droop) is within the range designated by the servo parameter "SV024" (in-position

width) in the setup parameters.

How the CNC operates upon receiving this signal depends on the basic specification parameter "inpos" (in-position

check valid) in the setup parameters.

27-10-7) Torque limit

This notifies that the motor drive current has been limited.

The current limit parameter will follow the ILMT (limit values for both + and - directions) in the servo parameters of

the setup parameters.

27-10 Smoothing status, servo status

Previous block Next block

Command

Servo

In-position width

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

641

27-10-8) Smoothing 0

The acceleration/deceleration time constant to make the machine movement smooth is applied to the issued step-

state command. The circuit onto which the acceleration/deceleration time constant is applied is called the

smoothing circuit.

Smoothing 0 means that there is no droop amount in that smoothing circuit.

(Note 1) This may turn ON when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.

(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the plus motion (+) signal (MVPn) and the minus motion (-) signal (MVMn)

sent from the CNC to the PLC are both OFF.

27-10-9) Smoothing (+)

This indicates that there is a (+) droop amount (movement in the + direction) in the smoothing circuit described in

section 27-10-8.

(Note 1) This may turn OFF when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.

(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the plus motion (+) signal (MVPn) sent from the CNC to the PLC.

27-10-A) Smoothing (-)

This indicates that there is a (-) droop amount (movement in the - direction) in the smoothing circuit described in

section 27-10-8.

(Note 1) This may turn OFF when the machine is moving at an extremely low speed.

(Note 2) This state is equivalent to when the minus motion (-) signal (MVPn) sent from the CNC to the PLC.

27-10-C) Hardware OT+ (hardware overtravel)

This indicates that the stroke end (+) signal was input for an axis moving in the (+) direction. Once the conditions

are met, the signal will turn ON and the axis will move in the (+) direction. And when the stroke end (-) signal is no

longer input, this signal will turn OFF.

27-10-D) Hardware OT- (hardware overtravel)

This indicates that the stroke end (-) signal was input for an axis moving in the (-) direction. Once the conditions are

met, the signal will turn ON and the axis will move in the (-) direction. And when the stroke end (-) signal is no longer

input, this signal will turn OFF.

27-10-E) Near-point dog ON

This turns ON when the reference point return near-point detection signal (dog) for the axis is detected while

executing the dog-type reference point return. This turns OFF when the reference point is reached.

[Data definition]

This is an amount that indicates the difference of the actual machine position from the commanded position. (With

code (+) ir (-))

The servo delay amount will be the same as the droop on the diagnosis screen's servo monitor, according to the

following equation.

27-20 Servo delay amount

Reference point

Rapid traverse rate

Creep speed

Dog

Reference point return operation

Near-point dog ON

2 1Droop [command unit] Read data

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

642

[Data definition]

This is the load of the feed axis monitor.

The data read with the PLC window has a code (+ or -).

[Precautions]

The motor data is data that considers the motor type. Thus, conversion may not be required depending on the

motor type.

[Data definition]

This is the load (current) of the feed axis monitor.

(Note) The same contents as the feed axis motor load A (27-30) are obtained for the feed axis motor load B.

To read the feed axis motor load, use the feed axis motor load A (27-30).

[Data definition]

This is the feedback value of the speed detector.

The data read with the PLC window has a code.

[Data unit]

When detecting the relative position, the base (zero) is where the power is turned ON.

When detecting the absolute position, the base (zero) is where the absolute position initialization set is made.

The distance from the base (not rounded to 360) is displayed as the FB value of the rotary axis unlike the machine

value.

[Data definition]

This is the speed of the feed axis monitor.

The data read with the PLC window has a code (+ or -).

27-30 Feed axis motor load A (%)

27-31 Feed axis motor load B (%)

27-32 Motor end FB

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

27-33 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

Feed axis motor load (%) Read data (An absolute value is retrieved.)

Feed axis motor load (%) Read data (An absolute value is retrieved.)

Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) = Read data (An absolute value is retrieved.)

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

643

[Data definition]

In case of full-closed control, it is the feedback value of machine end position detector.

In case of the semi-closed control, the value is the same as the motor end FB value.

The data read with the PLC window has a code.

[Data unit]

When detecting the relative position, the base (zero) is where the power is turned ON.

When detecting the absolute position, the base (zero) is where the absolute position initialization set is made.

The distance from the base (not rounded to 360) is displayed as the FB value of the rotary axis unlike the machine

value.

[Data definition]

This is the speed of the feed axis motor.

The data read with the PLC window has a code.

[Data definition]

The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point dog to the

grid point (electrical zero point) as the dog-type reference position return is executed.

The grid amount can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen.

After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the value designated by the parameter #1229 set01/bit6:

0: Distance between dog ON and basic point (including a grid mask amount)

1: A value given by deducting a grid mask amount from the distance between dog ON and basic point.

The grid amount is cleared by power shutoff of NC, and therefore 0 will be obtained if it is read after the NC restart.

[Data unit]

[Data definition]

This indicates the overload status (%) of the motor.

[Data definition]

This indicates the estimated disturbance torque (%) of the motor. The same value as the estimated disturbance

torque in the servo monitor is output.

27-34 Machine end FB

Input unit system (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

27-35 Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min)

27-36 Grid amount

Input unit (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005mm 0.00005inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

27-37 Overload (%)

27-38 Estimated disturbance torque (%)

Feed axis motor speed (0.01r/min) = Read data (An absolute value is retrieved.)

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

644

[Data definition]

This parameter is used to determine the basic machine coordinate system.

Specify the coordinates of the machine basic position seen from the zero point of basic machine coordinate system

or absolute position basic point.

(Whether the machine basic position or absolute position basic point is used is determined by data specified for

#2059 "zerbas" of the setup parameter.)

[Data unit]

Unit: mm

Range: -99999.999 to 99999.999

[Data definition]

These are comon variables used by the variable commands and user macros.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the variable No. to be read or written.

The common variable 1 can be used common for all the part systems.

[Precautions]

(1) When data is changed during operation:

(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.

(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to

the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".

When the control signal bit 3 is set to "0", only the integer is read or written.

[Data definition]

These are the local variables for the main program (macro level 0).

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the local No. to be read or written.

[Precautions]

(1) When data is changed during operation:

(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

(b) The variable is cleared to a blank when the macro is called.

(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.

(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to

the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".

27-39 #2 ZERO

29-10 Variable command (common variable value 1)

Common variables Function

Sub-section No. Remark

50 sets: #500 to #549 500 to 549

These can be used in the main program, sub program and each macro program.

100 sets: #500 to #599 500 to 599

200 sets: #500 to #699 500 to 699

500 sets: #500 to #999 500 to 999

30-10 Local variables (Level 0)

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

Values set to #2 ZERO

Machine basic position

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

645

[Data definition]

These are the same as the local variables (level 0), and are the local variables in macro level 1.

However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 200 has been added to the local variable

No.

[Data definition]

These are the same as the local variables (level 1), and are the local variables in macro level 2.

However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 200 has been added to the local variable

No.

[Data definition]

These are the same as the local variables (level 2), and are the local variables in macro level 3.

However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 300 has been added to the local variable

No.

[Data definition]

These are the same as the local variables (level 3), and are the local variables in macro level 4.

However, the sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 400 has been added to the local variable

No.

[Data definition]

This is the tool offset and differs according to the distinction of shape and wear.

Without shpae/wear distinction : Tool compensation amount

With shpae/wear distinction : Tool length shape compensation amount

The sub-section No. used by the PLC window corresponds to the tool offset No.

[Data unit, range]

Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 m, or 0.05 m)

Data range : -99999999 to +99999999 (binary)

[Precautions]

Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

[Data definition]

This is the tool length wear compensation amount.

(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 1000 has been added to the local variable No.

[Data unit, range]

Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 m, or 0.05 m)

Data range : -99999 to +99999 (binary)

[Precautions]

Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

30-11 Local variables (Level 2)

30-12 Local variables (Level 2)

30-13 Local variables (Level 3)

30-14 Local variables (Level 4)

31-10 Tool compensation amount 1

31-20 Tool compensation amount 2

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

646

[Data definition]

This is the tool radius shape compensation amount.

(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 6000 has been added to the offset No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "Tool compensation amount 1".

[Data definition]

This is the tool radius wear compensation amount.

(This is valid only when there is a shape/wear distinction in the tool offset. )

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 7000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "Tool compensation amount 2".

[Data definition]

This is the 1st axis tool length compensation amount.

The sub-section No. used by the PLC window corresponds to the tool offset No.

[Data unit, range]

Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 m, or 0.05 m)

Data range : -99999999 to +99999999 (binary)

[Precautions]

Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

[Data definition]

This is the 1st axis wear compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 1000 has been added to the local variable No.

[Data unit, range]

Unit : 1/2 of the input unit (Either 0.5 m, or 0.05 m)

Data range : 0 to 99999 (binary)

[Precautions]

Even if this data is changed during the operation, it will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

[Data definition]

This is the 3rd axis tool length compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 2000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis tool length compensation amount".

[Data definition]

This is the 3rd axis wear compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 3000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis wear compensation amount".

[Data definition]

This is the 2nd axis tool length compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 4000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis tool length compensation amount".

31-30 Tool compensation amount 3

31-40 Tool compensation amount 4

31-100 1st axis tool length compensation amount

31-110 1st axis wear compensation amount

31-120 3rd axis tool length compensation amount

31-130 3rd axis wear compensation amount

31-140 2nd axis tool length compensation amount

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

647

[Data definition]

This is the 2nd axis wear compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 5000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "1st axis wear compensation amount".

[Data definition]

This is the nose R compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 6000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "X axis tool length compensation amount".

[Data definition]

This is the nose R wear compensation amount.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 7000 has been added to the local variable No.

Data unit, data range and precautions are same as the "X axis wear compensation amount".

[Data definition]

This is the hypothetical nose No.

(1) Nose point

Generally, the tool nose is rounded, so the nose position in the program is aligned to point P as shown in the

following example.

With nose R compensation, select one point from the points shown below for each tool No., and preset this

position relation.

(Select from 1 to 8 for G46 mode, and from 0 to 9 for G41/G42 mode.)

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the value which 8000 has been added to the local variable No.

31-150 2nd axis wear compensation amount

31-160 Nose R compensation amount

31-170 Nose R wear compensation amount

31-180 Hypothetical nose No.

+X

+Z 3 4

57

8

0,9

P

4 3

21

P

8

6

5 7

Tool nose point 0 or 9

Correspondence between hypothetical tool nose numbers and tool nose points

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

648

[Data definition]

These are comon variables used by the variable commands and user macros.

The sub-section No. of the PLC window uses the same value as the variable No. to be read or written.

The common variable 2 is prepared per part system. Designate the part system No. on the part system No.

designation bit.

[Precautions]

(1) When data is changed during operation:

(a) The data will not be effective on a block that has already been calculated.

(2) The substitute command is executed when the command block is ACT.

(3) When handling decimal place with the PLC window, the last four digits of the data read or written correspond to

the decimal place when the control signal bit 3 is set to "1".

When the control signal bit 3 is set to "0", only the integer is read or written.

[Data definition]

This is the deviation of the secondary axis machine position in respect to the primary axis. This displays the error of

the command value to the servo control section before compensating the pitch error, incremental position, or

backlash. If this error occurs, the parameters that should be the same for the secondary axes are different. Check

the setting value.

This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for

axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for

synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.

Command error = Command "s" - command "m" -

Command "s": Seconady axis command value

Command "m": Primary axis command value

: Command "s" - command "m" at start of synchronous control

[Data unit]

The data units, depending on the input unit of the part system to which the primary/secondary axis belongs, are as

follows.

32-10 Variable command (common variable value 2)

Common variables Function

Sub-section No. Remark

50 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to #149

100 to 149 These can be used in the main program, sub program and each macro program. 100 sets * No. of part systems: #100 to

#199 100 to 199

62-1 Command error

Input unit (iunit)

Linear axis Rotary axis

Input unit (metric) Input unit (inch)

B 0.0005 mm 0.00005 inch 0.0005

C 0.00005 mm 0.000005 inch 0.00005

C70 PLC Interface Manual

Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data

649

[Data definition]

This is the deviation of the secondary axis feedback value in respect to the feedback value from the primary axis

servomotor. This displays the error of the actual machine position. The synchronous error check is carried out on

this error.

This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for

axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for

synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.

FB error = FBs - FBm -

FBs : Secondary axis feedback value

FBm: Primary axis feedback value

: FBs . FBm at start of synchronous control

[Data unit]

Same as "Command error".

[Data definition]

This displays the machine position of the master axis.

This data is valid only during the synchronous operation. When in independent or asynchronous operation, or for

axis set(s) that are not being synchronous-operated (e.g., the 3rd set in case where only 2 sets are designated for

synchronous operation), the value "0" will be displayed.

[Data unit]

Same as "Command error".

62-2 FB error

62-3 Machine position

Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data

MITSUBISHI CNC

650

Page No. INDEX

Numbers

1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE .......................................................................................................................... 323 1ST HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m...................................................................................................................... 258 1ST HANDLE VALID ........................................................................................................................................................ 259 1ST HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION................................................................................................. 326 1ST REFERENCE POSITION REACHED ....................................................................................................................... 106 24 HOURS CONTINUOUS OPERATION .......................................................................................................................... 91 2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE VALID .............................................................................................................. 269 2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE.......................................................................................................................... 324 2ND HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................................................... 260 2ND HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 326 2ND HANDLE VALID........................................................................................................................................................ 261 2ND M FUNCTION STROBE 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 141 2ND REFERENCE POSITION REACHED....................................................................................................................... 107 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN INTERLOCK.................................................................................................... 287 3RD HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................................................... 262 3RD HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 326 3RD HANDLE VALID........................................................................................................................................................ 263 3RD REFERENCE POSITION REACHED....................................................................................................................... 107 4TH REFERENCE POSITION REACHED ....................................................................................................................... 107

A

Absolute position data loss ............................................................................................................................................... 494 Absolute position power shutoff movement over .............................................................................................................. 494 Alarm 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 493 Alarm 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 493 Alarm 4 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 494 ALL AXES IN-POSITION.................................................................................................................................................. 126 ALL AXES SMOOTHING ZERO....................................................................................................................................... 126 APLC INPUT DATA n ....................................................................................................................................................... 166 APLC INPUT SIGNAL n ................................................................................................................................................... 102 APLC OUTPUT DATA n ................................................................................................................................................... 315 APLC OUTPUT SIGNAL n ............................................................................................................................................... 212 Arbitrary point feed command valid .................................................................................................................................. 485 AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION MODE ............................................................................................................................. 234 AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK -............................................................................................................................................. 216 AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK + ............................................................................................................................................ 216 AUTOMATIC MACHINE LOCK ........................................................................................................................................ 218 AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE" COMMAND (Feed hold) ....................................................................................... 236 AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" COMMAND (Cycle start)....................................................................................... 235 Automatic operation mode................................................................................................................................................ 481 AUTOMATIC RESTART................................................................................................................................................... 243 Automatic set position reached......................................................................................................................................... 491 Axis selection output......................................................................................................................................................... 489 AXIS SELECTION ............................................................................................................................................................ 104 AXIS SWITCHING INVALID STATUS.............................................................................................................................. 115 AXIS SWITCHING INVALID STATUS.............................................................................................................................. 507

B

Basic point initialization setting mode ............................................................................................................................... 482 Basic point setting............................................................................................................................................................. 483 BATTERY ALARM.............................................................................................................................................................. 98 BATTERY DROP CAUSE ................................................................................................................................................ 162 Battery voltage dropping................................................................................................................................................... 494 BATTERY WARNING......................................................................................................................................................... 97 BLOCK START INTERLOCK ........................................................................................................................................... 237

C

CHAMFERING.................................................................................................................................................................. 242

CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION........................................................................................................................................ 339 CHOPPING AXIS SELECTION........................................................................................................................................ 463 CHOPPING AXIS ............................................................................................................................................................. 194 CHOPPING AXIS ............................................................................................................................................................. 460 CHOPPING ERROR NO.................................................................................................................................................. 193 CHOPPING ERROR NO.................................................................................................................................................. 459 CHOPPING OVERRIDE................................................................................................................................................... 339 CHOPPING OVERRIDE................................................................................................................................................... 462 CHOPPING PARAMETER VALID.................................................................................................................................... 290 CHOPPING PARAMETER VALID.................................................................................................................................... 461 CHOPPING STATUS ....................................................................................................................................................... 192 CHOPPING STATUS ....................................................................................................................................................... 458 CHOPPING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 290 CHOPPING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 461 CHUCK CLOSE CONFIRMATION..................................................................................................................................... 96 CHUCK CLOSE ............................................................................................................................................................... 206 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE m .......................................................................................................... 419 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME....................................................................... 172 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME....................................................................... 421 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 .......................................................................................................... 170 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 .......................................................................................................... 420 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS ............................................................................................................. 171 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS ............................................................................................................. 421 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................................. 418 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD DEVICE NO. m........................................................................................................... 422 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ........................................................................................................................... 168 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ........................................................................................................................... 417 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................. 419 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................................. 169 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD DEVICE NO. m............................................................................................................ 172 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................. 170 CNC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................ 169 CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. .................................................................................................................................................. 171 CNC SIDE HEAD G NO. .................................................................................................................................................. 421 CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMATION ............................................................................. 420 CNC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMATION .............................................................................. 171 CNC SOFTWARE VERSION CODE................................................................................................................................ 162 COMMON VARIABLE NO. AT OCCURRENCE OF ZR DEVICE ERROR ...................................................................... 167 COMPENSATION METHOD SELECTION ...................................................................................................................... 290 COMPENSATION METHOD SELECTION ...................................................................................................................... 461 CONTACTOR SHUTOFF TEST....................................................................................................................................... 197 CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2............................................................................................................................................ 222 CONTROL AXIS DETACH............................................................................................................................................... 213 Controller ready completion.............................................................................................................................................. 490 CONTROLLER READY COMPLETION............................................................................................................................. 92 COUNTER ZERO............................................................................................................................................................. 227 CRT CHANGEOVER COMPLETION............................................................................................................................... 201 CRT DISPLAY INFORMATION........................................................................................................................................ 158 CURRENT DETECTION .................................................................................................................................................. 148 CURRENT LIMIT CHANGEOVER ................................................................................................................................... 222 CURRENT LIMIT MODE m.............................................................................................................................................. 275 CURRENT LIMIT REACHED ........................................................................................................................................... 113 CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK.......................................................................................................................... 238 CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CODE m .................................................................................................................. 268 CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION............................................................................................ 269

D

DATA NO. ........................................................................................................................................................................ 340 DATA NO. ........................................................................................................................................................................ 464 DATA PROTECT KEY 1................................................................................................................................................... 200 DATA PROTECT KEY 2................................................................................................................................................... 200 DATA PROTECT KEY 3................................................................................................................................................... 200 DISPLAY CHANGEOVER $m.......................................................................................................................................... 201 DOOR OPEN ENABLE ...................................................................................................................................................... 93 DOOR OPEN I ................................................................................................................................................................. 203

DOOR OPEN II................................................................................................................................................................. 204 DOWNLOAD COMPLETED ............................................................................................................................................. 101 DOWNLOAD ERROR....................................................................................................................................................... 102 DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS........................................................................................................................................... 101 DOWNLOAD REQUEST .................................................................................................................................................. 212 DROOP RELEASE INVALID AXIS................................................................................................................................... 333 DROOP RELEASE REQUEST......................................................................................................................................... 222 DRY RUN ......................................................................................................................................................................... 238 DUAL SIGNAL UNCONFIRMED AFTER COMPARE ERROR .......................................................................................... 91 DUAL SIGNALS CHECK START ..................................................................................................................................... 198

E

EACH AXIS REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION........................................................................................................ 333 EDITED DATA ERROR .................................................................................................................................................... 100 EDITED DATA RECOVERY CONFIRMATION ................................................................................................................ 202 EDITIED DATA IN PROCESSING ................................................................................................................................... 100 EMERGENCY STOP CAUSE .......................................................................................................................................... 159 ERROR CAUSE FOR ZR DEVICE ERROR OCCURRENCE.......................................................................................... 167 ERROR CODE OUTPUT EXTENSION............................................................................................................................ 186 ERROR CODE OUTPUT.................................................................................................................................................. 186 ERROR DETECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 239 ERROR TEMPORARY CANCEL ..................................................................................................................................... 211 EXTERNAL AXIS SPEED CLAMP ................................................................................................................................... 306 EXTERNAL DECELERATION -........................................................................................................................................ 216 EXTERNAL DECELERATION +....................................................................................................................................... 215 EXTERNAL DECELERATION SPEED SELECTION ....................................................................................................... 322 External deceleration-....................................................................................................................................................... 487 External deceleration+...................................................................................................................................................... 486 EXTERNAL MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM COMPENSATION DATA.................................................................... 321 EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO. .................................................................................................................................. 336 EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE NO. ................................................................................................................................. 335 EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED ..................................................................................................................................... 127 EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM NO............................................................................................................................. 335 EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE ....................................................................................................................................... 244 EXTERNAL SEARCHSEQUENCE NO. ........................................................................................................................... 336 EXTERNAL SEARCHSTATUS......................................................................................................................................... 177

F

F 1-DIGIT COMMANDED................................................................................................................................................. 131 F 1-DIGIT NO. CODE m ................................................................................................................................................... 134 FEED AXIS SELECTION - ............................................................................................................................................... 220 FEED AXIS SELECTION +............................................................................................................................................... 219 FEEDBACK MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS ................................................................................................................ 176 FEEDRATE LEAST INCREMENT CODE m .................................................................................................................... 272 FTP MODE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 234

G

GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION ........................................................................................................................................... 292 GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER COMPLETION .................................................................................................... 168 GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER COMPLETION .................................................................................................... 434 GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER REQUEST........................................................................................................... 316 GOT WINDOW DATACHANGEOVER REQUEST........................................................................................................... 434

H

Handle feed operation mode ............................................................................................................................................ 481 HANDLE MODE ............................................................................................................................................................... 229 HANDLE PULSE COUNTER............................................................................................................................................ 157 HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION CODE m......................................................................................... 276 HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION METHOD SELECTION .................................................................. 277 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COMMAND MODE ..................................................................................................................... 289

I

ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED.............................................................................................................................................. 134 IN "RESET" ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123 IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE............................................................................................................................... 119 IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE".......................................................................................................................... 123 IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "RUN" .............................................................................................................................. 121 IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" .......................................................................................................................... 122 In automatic operation mode............................................................................................................................................ 493 IN AXIS MINUS MOTION................................................................................................................................................. 105 In axis minus motion......................................................................................................................................................... 489 IN AXIS PLUS MOTION................................................................................................................................................... 105 In axis plus motion............................................................................................................................................................ 489 In basic point initialization setting mode ........................................................................................................................... 493 IN CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED.................................................................................................................................. 130 IN CURRENT LIMIT ......................................................................................................................................................... 113 IN CUTTING FEED .......................................................................................................................................................... 129 In handle feed operation mode......................................................................................................................................... 490 IN HANDLE MODE........................................................................................................................................................... 117 IN HIGH-SPEED TAPPING.............................................................................................................................................. 134 IN HYPOTHETICAL AXIS COMMAND MODE ................................................................................................................ 134 IN INCH UNIT SELECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 131 IN INCREMENTAL MODE ............................................................................................................................................... 118 In incremental mode......................................................................................................................................................... 493 IN JOG MODE.................................................................................................................................................................. 117 In JOG operation mode .................................................................................................................................................... 493 IN L COIL SELECTION .................................................................................................................................................... 151 IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE.......................................................................................................................... 118 IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED...................................................................................................................................... 124 In manual operation mode................................................................................................................................................ 493 IN MDI MODE .................................................................................................................................................................. 120 IN MEMORY MODE......................................................................................................................................................... 120 IN MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 114 IN PLC AXIS CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................. 116 IN PLC AXIS CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................. 507 IN RAPID TRAVERSE...................................................................................................................................................... 128 IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE................................................................................................................. 119 In reference position return mode .................................................................................................................................... 493 IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN............................................................................................................................. 131 In reset ............................................................................................................................................................................. 490 IN REWIND ...................................................................................................................................................................... 124 IN SKIP............................................................................................................................................................................. 130 IN SPINDLE ALARM ........................................................................................................................................................ 148 IN SPINDLE FORWARD RUN ......................................................................................................................................... 153 IN SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR................................................................................................................ 155 IN SPINDLE REVERSE RUN........................................................................................................................................... 153 IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION.................................................................................................................................... 94 IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT........................................................................................................................................... 155 IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED.............................................................................................................................................. 130 IN TAPPING ..................................................................................................................................................................... 129 IN THREAD CUTTING ..................................................................................................................................................... 130 IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 131 IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 400 IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT........................................................................................................................................ 405 In torque limit .................................................................................................................................................................... 490 IN ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION.................................................................................................................................... 112 INCLINED AXIS CONTROL: NO Z AXIS COMPENSATION........................................................................................... 289 Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 ................................................................................................................................. 486 Incremental feed operation mode selection...................................................................................................................... 483 INCREMENTAL MODE.................................................................................................................................................... 230 Initialization setting completed ......................................................................................................................................... 494 Initialization setting error completed................................................................................................................................. 494 IN-POSITION ................................................................................................................................................................... 114 In-position......................................................................................................................................................................... 488 INTEGRATION TIME INPUT m........................................................................................................................................ 199 Interlock-........................................................................................................................................................................... 481 Interlock+.......................................................................................................................................................................... 480

J

JOG HANDLE SYNCHRONOUS ..................................................................................................................................... 274 JOG MODE....................................................................................................................................................................... 229 JOG operation mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 482 JOG SYNCHRONOUS FEED VALID ............................................................................................................................... 272

K

KEY IN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 156 KEY OUT .......................................................................................................................................................................... 309

L

L COIL SELECTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 303 LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)...................................................................................................................... 340 LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)...................................................................................................................... 463 LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ...................................................................................................................... 340 LOWER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ...................................................................................................................... 463

M

M CODE DATA 1.............................................................................................................................................................. 178 M CODE DATA 2.............................................................................................................................................................. 178 M CODE DATA 3.............................................................................................................................................................. 179 M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00......................................................................................................................... 135 M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M01......................................................................................................................... 135 M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M02......................................................................................................................... 136 M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M30......................................................................................................................... 136 M FUNCTION FINISH 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 245 M FUNCTION FINISH 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 246 M FUNCTION STROBE m ............................................................................................................................................... 136 MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS..................................................................................................................................... 175 MACRO INTERRUPT....................................................................................................................................................... 250 MACRO SINGLE VALID..................................................................................................................................................... 99 MAGNIFICATION VALID FOR EACH HANDLE............................................................................................................... 276 MANUAL ABSOLUTE....................................................................................................................................................... 252 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS SELECTION CODE m ..................................................................................... 280 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT .......................................................................................... 327 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS VALID .............................................................................................................. 280 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS SELECTION CODE m .................................................................................... 281 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT.......................................................................................... 327 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS VALID.............................................................................................................. 281 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT.......................................................................................... 327 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS SELECTION CODE m .................................................................................... 281 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS VALID.............................................................................................................. 281 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED ABS/INC ........................................................................................................................... 284 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED AXIS INDEPENDENT....................................................................................................... 282 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED COMPLETION.................................................................................................................. 127 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED EX.F/MODAL.F................................................................................................................. 283 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G0/G1 ............................................................................................................................... 283 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MC/WK ............................................................................................................................. 284 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE............................................................................................................................... 231 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED SMOOTHING OFF ........................................................................................................... 281 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STOP................................................................................................................................ 285 MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STROBE........................................................................................................................... 286 MANUAL FEEDRATE CODE m ....................................................................................................................................... 270 MANUAL FEEDRATE METHOD SELECTION................................................................................................................. 272 MANUAL FEEDRATE....................................................................................................................................................... 325 MANUAL INTERLOCK - ................................................................................................................................................... 217 MANUAL INTERLOCK + .................................................................................................................................................. 217 MANUAL MACHINE LOCK .............................................................................................................................................. 218 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND................................................................................................................................. 138 Manual operation mode .................................................................................................................................................... 482 MANUAL OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ................................................................................................................. 263 MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SIMULTANEOUS VALID............................................................................................................ 221

Master reset ..................................................................................................................................................................... 480 MDI MODE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 235 MIRROR IMAGE .............................................................................................................................................................. 214 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK............................................................................................................................. 264 MOTION COMMAND COMPLETION .............................................................................................................................. 125 mTH AXIS INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................ 313 MULTI-POINT ORIENTATION POSITION DATA ............................................................................................................ 343 MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE INPUT m ......................................................................................................... 226 MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE OUTPUT m ..................................................................................................... 115 MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR REQUEST................................................................................................................... 225

N

NC ALARM 1...................................................................................................................................................................... 99 NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) ............................................................................................................................................... 99 NC ALARM 3 (Program error) .......................................................................................................................................... 132 NC ALARM 4 (Operation error) ........................................................................................................................................ 133 NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED.................................................................................................................................................. 109 NC DATA SAMPLING COMPLETED............................................................................................................................... 101 NC DATA SAMPLING TRIGGER..................................................................................................................................... 201 NC RESET 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 240 NC RESET 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... 240 NEAR REFERENCE POSITION (PER REFERENCE POSITION) .................................................................................. 185 NEAR REFERENCE POSITION ...................................................................................................................................... 108 Near set position .............................................................................................................................................................. 492 NEAR-POINT DOG IGNORED ........................................................................................................................................ 328 NEW TOOL CHANGE...................................................................................................................................................... 139 NEW TOOL CHANGE...................................................................................................................................................... 406 NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULES ON CNC SIDE........................................................................................................ 172 NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL MODULE ON PLC SIDE ............................................................................................................ 427 NO. OF DUAL SIGNAL UNITS ON CNC SIDE................................................................................................................ 422 NO. OF DUAL SIGNALMODULES ON PLC SIDE........................................................................................................... 320 NO. OF WORK MACHINING (CURRENT VALUE).......................................................................................................... 183 NO. OF WORK MACHINING (MAXIMUM VALUE).......................................................................................................... 186 NO. OF WORK MACHINING OVER ................................................................................................................................ 145 NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIGNATION........................................................................................................................... 340 NUMBER OF CYCLES DESIGNATION........................................................................................................................... 464

O

OPERATION MODE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................... 291 OPERATION MODE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................... 462 Operation parameter selection 1, 2 .................................................................................................................................. 486 Operation start.................................................................................................................................................................. 484 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m............................................................................................................................................. 255 OT IGNORED................................................................................................................................................................... 328 OUTPUT OFF CHECK (OFFCHK)................................................................................................................................... 199 OUTPUT OFF CHECK NOT COMPLETE.......................................................................................................................... 91 OVERRIDE CANCEL ....................................................................................................................................................... 263

P

PHASE OFFSET REQUEST............................................................................................................................................ 210 PHASE SHIFT CALCULATION REQUEST ..................................................................................................................... 210 PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE VALID.......................................................................................................... 204 PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE VALID.......................................................................................................... 348 PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-TH AXIS ........................................................................................................................ 212 PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID m-TH AXIS ........................................................................................................................ 348 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 1 ............................................................................................................. 480 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 2 ............................................................................................................. 484 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 3 ............................................................................................................. 487 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 4 ............................................................................................................. 487 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 1 .................................................................................................................. 488 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 2 .................................................................................................................. 493 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 3 .................................................................................................................. 494 PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 4 .................................................................................................................. 495

PLC AXIS NEAR POINT DETECTION m-TH AXIS.......................................................................................................... 211 PLC AXIS POSITION SWITCH n ..................................................................................................................................... 102 PLC AXIS SWITCHING .................................................................................................................................................... 228 PLC AXIS SWITCHING .................................................................................................................................................... 508 PLC AXIX DROOP RELEASE INVALID AXIS.................................................................................................................. 308 PLC CONTROL AXIS mTH HANDLE VALID ................................................................................................................... 205 PLC EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................................................................................ 202 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ........................................................................ 319 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE MISMATCH ALLOWANCE TIME ........................................................................ 427 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 ........................................................................................................... 318 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS 2 ........................................................................................................... 426 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS .............................................................................................................. 319 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL COMPARE STATUS .............................................................................................................. 426 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................................. 424 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL HEAD DEVICE NO. m............................................................................................................ 427 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ............................................................................................................................ 316 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL MODULE m ............................................................................................................................ 423 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT ERROR MODULE m .............................................................................................. 425 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................ 425 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................................... 317 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALHEAD DEVICE NO. m............................................................................................................. 320 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT ERROR MODULE m ............................................................................................... 318 PLC SIDE DUAL SIGNALOUTPUT MODULE m ............................................................................................................. 317 PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. ................................................................................................................................................... 319 PLC SIDE HEAD G NO. ................................................................................................................................................... 427 PLC SIDE SAFETY COMPARE ACTIVITY CHECK INFORMATION .............................................................................. 426 PLC SIDE SAFETY OPERATION STATUS ..................................................................................................................... 428 PLC SIDE SAFETYCOMPARE ACTIVITYCHECK INFORMATION ................................................................................ 318 PLC SIDE SAFETYOPERATION STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 320 PLC SKIP.......................................................................................................................................................................... 212 PLC VERSION CODE ...................................................................................................................................................... 312 PLC VERSION CODE (METHOD 2) ................................................................................................................................ 315 POSITION LOOP IN-POSITION....................................................................................................................................... 154 Position switch 1 to 15 ...................................................................................................................................................... 495 POSITION SWITCH m ..................................................................................................................................................... 143 Power OFF required after parameter change................................................................................................................... 100 POWER SHUTOFF MOVEMENT OVER ......................................................................................................................... 145 POWER SHUTOFF NOTIFICATION.................................................................................................................................. 92 PROGRAM DISPLAY DURING OPERATION.................................................................................................................. 254 PROGRAM OPERATION MODE (MEMORY MODE)...................................................................................................... 234 PROGRAM RESTART ..................................................................................................................................................... 249

R

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE CODE m ....................................................................................................................... 270 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION................................................................................................. 270 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE VALID ........................................................................................................................... 291 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE VALID ........................................................................................................................... 462 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE....................................................................................................................................... 324 RAPID TRAVERSE .......................................................................................................................................................... 251 Ready OFF ....................................................................................................................................................................... 481 RECALCULATION REQUEST ......................................................................................................................................... 253 Reference position reached.............................................................................................................................................. 490 REFERENCE POSITION RETRACT ............................................................................................................................... 266 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE...................................................................................................................... 233 Reference position return mode ....................................................................................................................................... 482 REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION CODE m............................................................................................................. 256 REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION METHOD ........................................................................................................... 257 RESET & REWIND........................................................................................................................................................... 241 Rotation direction.............................................................................................................................................................. 485

S

S CODE DATA 1 to 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 180 S CODE DATA 5 to 7 ....................................................................................................................................................... 180 S COMMAND GEAR NO. ILLEGAL ................................................................................................................................. 146

S COMMAND MAX./MIN. COMMAND VALUE OVER..................................................................................................... 146 S COMMAND NO GEAR SELECTED.............................................................................................................................. 146 S COMMAND OVERRIDE ............................................................................................................................................... 342 S FUNCTION STROBE m................................................................................................................................................ 142 SAVING OPERATION HISTORY DATA .......................................................................................................................... 202 SEARCH & START ERROR ............................................................................................................................................ 133 SEARCH & START SEARCH .......................................................................................................................................... 133 SEARCH & START .......................................................................................................................................................... 288 SEARCH & START PROGRAM NO ................................................................................................................................ 334 SELECTED TOOL NO. .................................................................................................................................................... 335 SERVO OFF..................................................................................................................................................................... 214 Servo OFF........................................................................................................................................................................ 480 Servo ready completion.................................................................................................................................................... 491 SERVO READY COMPLETION......................................................................................................................................... 93 SERVO READY ............................................................................................................................................................... 103 Servo ready ...................................................................................................................................................................... 488 Set position reached......................................................................................................................................................... 492 SINGLE BLOCK ............................................................................................................................................................... 237 SKIPm INPUT SIGNAL STATE.......................................................................................................................................... 92 Smoothing zero ................................................................................................................................................................ 489 SPEED DETECTION........................................................................................................................................................ 148 SPEED MONITOR DOOR OPEN POSSIBLE.................................................................................................................. 157 SPEED MONITOR MODE................................................................................................................................................ 307 Speed override 1 to 64 ..................................................................................................................................................... 487 Speed override valid......................................................................................................................................................... 487 SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED.............................................................................................................................................. 196 SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL DATA (rotation speed) ...................................................................................................... 196 SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED INPUT.......................................................................................................... 195 SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED OUTPUT...................................................................................................... 341 SPINDLE FORWARD RUN INDEX.................................................................................................................................. 300 SPINDLE FORWARD RUN START................................................................................................................................. 298 SPINDLE GEAR SELECTION CODE m .......................................................................................................................... 295 SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT COMMAND m............................................................................................................................ 147 SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT.................................................................................................................................................... 296 SPINDLE IN-POSITION ................................................................................................................................................... 151 SPINDLE MOTOR TEMPERATURE................................................................................................................................ 196 SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONITOR MODE OUTPUT m .................................................................................................. 155 SPINDLE MULTI-STEP MONITOR REQUEST ............................................................................................................... 304 SPINDLE MULTI-STEP SPEED MONITOR MODE INPUT m......................................................................................... 305 SPINDLE OFF MODE ...................................................................................................................................................... 267 SPINDLE ORIENTATION COMMAND............................................................................................................................. 302 SPINDLE ORIENTATION................................................................................................................................................. 297 SPINDLE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ................................................................................................................ 294 SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION .................................................................................................. 95 SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION ......................................................................................................................... 208 SPINDLE READY-ON ...................................................................................................................................................... 152 SPINDLE REVERSE RUN INDEX ................................................................................................................................... 301 SPINDLE REVERSE RUN START .................................................................................................................................. 299 SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION............................................................................... 94 SPINDLE SERVO-ON...................................................................................................................................................... 152 SPINDLE SPEED LOWER LIMIT OVER ......................................................................................................................... 147 SPINDLE SPEED UPPER LIMIT OVER .......................................................................................................................... 146 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE CODE m.......................................................................................................................... 294 SPINDLE STOP ............................................................................................................................................................... 296 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION BASIC SPINDLE SELECTION..................................................................................... 314 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION CANCEL....................................................................................................................... 205 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 1 ........................................................................................................ 164 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 2 ........................................................................................................ 164 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR ......................................................................................... 165 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR (lower limit)...................................................................... 165 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR (upper limit) ..................................................................... 165 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR OUTPUT ........................................................................................... 164 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE OFFSET DATA ............................................................................................... 166 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT ............................................................................................. 314 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE SELECTION ................................................................... 314 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION ...................................................................................................................................... 207 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ROTATION DIRECTION .................................................................................................... 209

SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT m............................................................................................................................................ 303 SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED................................................................................................................................................. 150 Start not possible .............................................................................................................................................................. 495 Station position 1 to 256 ................................................................................................................................................... 494 Station selection 1 to 256 ................................................................................................................................................. 487 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OPERATION METHOD.............................................................................................. 329 SYNCHRONIZATION CORRECTION MODE .................................................................................................................. 248 SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING COMMAND POLARITY REVERSAL.................................................................................. 289

T

T CODE DATA 1............................................................................................................................................................... 181 T FUNCTION STROBE 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 140 TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE .............................................................................................................................................. 144 TAP RETRACT................................................................................................................................................................. 265 TEMPERATURE WARNING CAUSE............................................................................................................................... 163 THERMAL EXPANSION COMPENSATION AMOUNT.................................................................................................... 173 THERMAL EXPANSION MAX. COMPENSATION AMOUNT .......................................................................................... 322 THERMAL EXPANSION OFFSET COMPENSATION AMOUNT..................................................................................... 321 TOOL ALARM 1................................................................................................................................................................ 402 TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1......................................................................................................................................... 277 TOOL ALARM 1/TOOL SKIP 1......................................................................................................................................... 407 TOOL ALARM 2................................................................................................................................................................ 278 TOOL ALARM 2................................................................................................................................................................ 402 TOOL CHANGE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION..................................................................................................... 139 TOOL CHANGE RESET................................................................................................................................................... 279 TOOL CHANGE RESET................................................................................................................................................... 408 TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 328 TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 404 TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION................................................................................................................................. 408 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 1 ................................................................................................................................ 246 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2 ................................................................................................................................ 247 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT INPUT................................................................................................................................. 278 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT INPUT................................................................................................................................. 403 TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 132 TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 400 TOOL LIFE OVER ............................................................................................................................................................ 405 TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 186 TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA ............................................................................................................................................... 406

U

UNCLAMP COMMAND .................................................................................................................................................... 113 UNCLAMP COMPLETION ............................................................................................................................................... 224 UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)....................................................................................................................... 339 UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (H)....................................................................................................................... 463 UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ....................................................................................................................... 339 UPPER DEAD POINT DESIGNATION (L) ....................................................................................................................... 463 USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 278 USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 403 USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ......................................................................................................................................... 407 USER MACRO INPUT #1032 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 337 USER MACRO INPUT #1033 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311 USER MACRO INPUT #1033 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338 USER MACRO INPUT #1034 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338 USER MACRO INPUT #1034 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311 USER MACRO INPUT #1035 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 311 USER MACRO INPUT #1035 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 338 USER MACRO INPUT #1032 (PLC -> Controller) ........................................................................................................... 310 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 160 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 190 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 161

USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 (Controller -> PLC) ....................................................................................................... 191

W

WAITING BETWEEN PART SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................... 134 WAITING FOR DATA TO BE DOWNLOADED................................................................................................................ 144 WORKPIECE COORDINATE OFFSET MEASUREMENT COMPENSATION NO.......................................................... 334

Z

ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION INCOMPLETE................................................................................................................ 112 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET COMPLETED......................................................................................................... 110 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET ERROR COMPLETED........................................................................................... 112 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET MODE .................................................................................................................... 223 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET START ................................................................................................................... 223 ZERO SPEED .................................................................................................................................................................. 149 Z-PHASE PASSED .......................................................................................................................................................... 154 ZR DEVICE NO. AT OCCURRENCE OF NC EXCLUSIVE INSTRUCTION (DDWR/DDRD) ERROR............................ 166

Device No. INDEX

Numbers 1st axis index .....................................................................................................................................................................R2340

1st cutting feedrate override ........................................................................ R2400,R2500,R2600,R2700,R2800,R2900,R3000

1st handle axis selection code 1...............................................................................Y740,Y820,Y900,Y9E0,YAC0,YBA0,YC80

1st handle valid.........................................................................................................Y747,Y827,Y907,Y9E7,YAC7,YBA7,YC87

1st handle/incremental feed magnification .................................................. R2408,R2508,R2608,R2708,R2808,R2908,R3008

R2409,R2509,R2609,R2709,R2809,R2909,R3009

1st handle pulse counter........................................................................................................................................................R10

1st reference position reached .........................................................................X404,X424,X444,X464,X484,X4A4,X4C4,X4E4

X504,X524,X544,X564,X584,X5A4,X5C4,X5E4

24 hours continuous operation ............................................................................................................................................X310

2nd cutting feedrate override ....................................................................... R2401,R2501,R2601,R2701,R2801,R2901,R3001

2nd cutting feedrate override valid........................................................................... Y766,Y846,Y926,YA06,YAE6,YBC6,YCA6

2nd handle axis selection code 1..............................................................................Y748,Y828,Y908,Y9E8,YAC8,YBA8,YC88

2nd handle feed magnification..................................................................... R2410,R2510,R2610,R2710,R2810,R2910,R3010

R2411,R2511,R2611,R2711,R2811,R2911,R3011

2nd handle pulse counter ......................................................................................................................................................R11

2nd handle valid...................................................................................................... Y74F,Y82F,Y90F,Y9EF,YACF,YBAF,YC8F

2nd M function data 1 ................................................................................................ R128,R228,R328,R428,R528,R628,R728

R129,R229,R329,R429,R529,R629,R729

2nd M function strobe 1 .............................................................................................X654,X6D4,X754,X7D4,X854,X8D4,X954

2nd reference position reached ........................................................................X405,X425,X445,X465,X485,X4A5,X4C5,X4E5

X505,X525,X545,X565,X585,X5A5,X5C5,X5E5

2nd reference position return interlock .....................................................................Y7B0,Y890,Y970,YA50,YB30,YC10,YCF0

3rd handle axis selection code 1 ..............................................................................Y750,Y830,Y910,Y9F0,YAD0,YBB0,YC90

3rd handle feed magnification...................................................................... R2412,R2512,R2612,R2712,R2812,R2912,R3012

R2413,R2513,R2613,R2713,R2813,R2913,R3013

3rd handle pulse counter .......................................................................................................................................................R12

3rd handle valid ........................................................................................................Y757,Y837,Y917,Y9F7,YAD7,YBB7,YC97

3rd reference position reached .........................................................................X406,X426,X446,X466,X486,X4A6,X4C6,X4E6

X506,X526,X546,X566,X586,X5A6,X5C6,X5E6

4th reference position reached .........................................................................X407,X427,X447,X467,X487,X4A7,X4C7,X4E7

X507,X527,X547,X567,X587,X5A7,X5C7,X5E7

A Absolute position warning.........................................................................................X66F,X6EF,X76F,X7EF,X86F,X8EF,X96F

Active tool: Auxiliary data...................................................................................................................................................R6753

Active tool: Group No............................................................................................................................................. R6748,R6749

Active tool: Length compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6756,R6757

Active tool: Life data ..........................................................................................................................................................R6754

Active tool: Radius compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6758,R6759

Active tool: Tool data flag/status........................................................................................................................................R6752

Active tool: Tool No................................................................................................................................................ R6750,R6751

Active tool: Usage data ..................................................................................................................................................... R6755

All axes in-position ......................................................................................................X619,X699,X719,X799,X819,X899,X919

All axes smoothing zero ........................................................................................... X61A,X69A,X71A,X79A,X81A,X89A,X91A

APLC input data 1 to 10 ............................................................................................................................................ R60 to R69

APLC input signal 1 to 32.......................................................................................................................................X380 to X39F

APLC output data 1 to 10 .................................................................................................................................. R2380 to R2389

APLC output signal 1 to 32.....................................................................................................................................Y380 to Y39F

ATC control parameter ...................................................................................................................................................... R4700

Automatic initialization mode.................................................................................... Y705,Y7E5,Y8C5,Y9A5,YA85,YB65,YC45

Automatic interlock - ..........................................................................................Y406,Y436,Y466,Y496,Y4C6,Y4F6,Y526,Y556

Y586,Y5B6,Y5E6,Y616,Y646,Y676,Y6A6,Y6D6

Automatic interlock + .........................................................................................Y405,Y435,Y465,Y495,Y4C5,Y4F5,Y525,Y555

Y585,Y5B5,Y5E5,Y615,Y645,Y675,Y6A5,Y6D5

Automatic machine lock ....................................................................................Y409,Y439,Y469,Y499,Y4C9,Y4F9,Y529,Y559

Y589,Y5B9,Y5E9,Y619,Y649,Y679,Y6A9,Y6D9

Automatic operation "pause" command (Feed hold) ................................................ Y711,Y7F1,Y8D1,Y9B1,YA91,YB71,YC51

Automatic operation "start" command (Cycle start).................................................. Y710,Y7F0,Y8D0,Y9B0,YA90,YB70,YC50

Automatic restart .................................................................................................. Y71C,Y7FC,Y8DC,Y9BC,YA9C,YB7C,YC5C

AUX data ........................................................................................................................................................................... R4748

Axis selection ................................................................................................... X401,X421,X441,X461,X481,X4A1,X4C1,X4E1

X501,X521,X541,X561,X581,X5A1,X5C1,X5E1

Axis switching invalid status ............................................................................. X416,X436,X456,X476,X496,X4B6,X4D6,X4F6 X516,X536,X556,X576,X596,X5B6,X5D6,X5F6

B Battery alarm ....................................................................................................................................................................... X32F

Battery drop cause ................................................................................................................................................................ R40

Battery warning ...................................................................................................................................................................X32E

Block start interlock .................................................................................................. Y713,Y7F3,Y8D3,Y9B3,YA93,YB73,YC53

C Chamfering............................................................................................................ Y71B,Y7FB,Y8DB,Y9BB,YA9B,YB7B,YC5B

Chuck close......................................................................................................................................................................... Y331

Chuck close confirmation ....................................................................................................................................................X32D

Chopping ............................................................................................................... Y7BA,Y89A,Y97A,YA5A,YB3A,YC1A,YCFA

Chopping status ........................................................................................................ R180,R280,R380,R480,R580,R680,R780

Chopping error No..................................................................................................... R181,R281,R381,R481,R581,R681,R781

Chopping axis............................................................................................................ R182,R282,R382,R482,R582,R682,R782

Chopping axis selection .............................................................................. R2481,R2581,R2681,R2781,R2881,R2981,R3081

Chopping override ....................................................................................... R2480,R2580,R2680,R2780,R2880,R2980,R3080

Chopping parameter valid ..................................................................................... Y7BB,Y89B,Y97B,YA5B,YB3B,YC1B,YCFB

CNC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time................................................................................................. R2183

CNC side dual signall compare status............................................................................................................................... R2181

CNC side dual signal compare status 2 ........................................................................................................................... R2179

CNC side dual signal error Module 1(H)...........................................................................................................................R2161

CNC side dual signal error Module 1(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2160

CNC side dual signal error Module 2(H)...........................................................................................................................R2163

CNC side dual signal error Module 2(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2162

CNC side dual signal error Module 3(H)...........................................................................................................................R2165

CNC side dual signal error Module 3(L) ...........................................................................................................................R2164

CNC side dual signal head device No. 1 ...........................................................................................................................R2184

CNC side dual signal head device No. 2 ...........................................................................................................................R2185

CNC side dual signal head device No. 3 ...........................................................................................................................R2186

CNC side dual signall output error Module 1 .....................................................................................................................R2174

CNC side dual signall output error Module 2 ....................................................................................................................R2175

CNC side dual signall output error Module 3 .....................................................................................................................R2176

CNC side dual signal output Module 1 ..............................................................................................................................R2170

CNC side dual signal output Module 2 ..............................................................................................................................R2171

CNC side dual signal output Module 3 ..............................................................................................................................R2172

CNC side dual signal Module 1(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2151

CNC side dual signal Module 1(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2150

CNC side dual signal Module 2(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2153

CNC side dual signal Module 2(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2152

CNC side dual signal Module 3(H) ....................................................................................................................................R2155

CNC side dual signal Module 3(L) .....................................................................................................................................R2154

CNC side head G No. ........................................................................................................................................................R2182

CNC side safety compare activity check information.........................................................................................................R2180

CNC software version code ............................................................................................................................R32,R33,R34,R35

Common variable No. at occurrence of ZR device error .......................................................................................................R82

Compensation method selection ..........................................................................Y7BC,Y89C,Y97C,YA5C,YB3C,YC1C,YCFC

Contactor shutoff test signal ................................................................................................................................................Y310

Control axis detach ........................................................................................... Y400,Y430,Y460,Y490,Y4C0,Y4F0,Y520,Y550

Y580,Y5B0,Y5E0,Y610,Y640,Y670,Y6A0,Y6D0

Control axis detach 2 ..................................................................................... Y40E,Y43E,Y46E,Y49E,Y4CE,Y4FE,Y52E,Y55E

Y58E,Y5BE,Y5EE,Y61E,Y64E,Y67E,Y6AE,Y6DE

Controller ready completion.................................................................................................................................................X320

Counter zero ................................................................................................. Y59A,Y5CA,Y5FA,Y62A,Y65A,Y68A,Y6BA,Y6EA

CRT changeover completion .............................................................................................................................................. Y31D

CRT display information .................................................................................................................................R16,R17,R18,R19

Current detection .....................................................................................................X991,X9C1,X9F1,XA21,XA51,XA81,XAB1,

Current limit changeover................................................................................... Y410,Y440,Y470,Y4A0,Y4D0,Y500,Y530,Y560

Y590,Y5C0,Y5F0,Y620,Y650,Y680,Y6B0,Y6E0

Current limit mode 1 ............................................................................................ Y77D,Y85D,Y93D,YA1D,YAFD,YBDD,YCBD

Current limit mode 2 ..............................................................................................Y77E,Y85E,Y93E,YA1E,YAFE,YBDE,YCBE

Current limit reached ...................................................................................... X40F,X42F,X44F,X46F,X48F,X4AF,X4CF,X4EF

X50F,X52F,X54F,X56F,X58F,X5AF,X5CF,X5EF

Cutting block start interlock.......................................................................................Y714,Y7F4,Y8D4,Y9B4,YA94,YB74,YC54

Cutting feedrate override code 1 ............................................................................. Y760,Y840,Y920,YA00,YAE0,YBC0,YCA0

Cutting feedrate override method selection..............................................................Y767,Y847,Y927,YA07,YAE7,YBC7,YCA7

D Data No. ...................................................................................................... R2487,R2587,R2687,R2787,R2887,R2987,R3087

Data protect key 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... Y318

Data protect key 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... Y319

Data protect key 3 ...............................................................................................................................................................Y31A

Display changeover $1........................................................................................................................................................Y31E

Display changeover $2........................................................................................................................................................ Y31F

Door open enable................................................................................................................................................................ X329

Door open I.......................................................................................................................................................................... Y328

Door open II......................................................................................................................................................................... Y329

Download error .................................................................................................................................................................... X352

Download completed........................................................................................................................................................... X351

Download in progress.......................................................................................................................................................... X350

Download request ............................................................................................................................................................... Y350

Droop release request ...................................................................................... Y411,Y441,Y471,Y4A1,Y4D1,Y501,Y531,Y561

Y591,Y5C1,Y5F1,Y621,Y651,Y681,Y6B1,Y6E1

Dry run...................................................................................................................... Y715,Y7F5,Y8D5,Y9B5,YA95,YB75,YC55

Droop release invalid axis ........................................................................... R2433,R2533,R2632,R2733,R2833,R2933,R3033

Dual signals check start ...................................................................................................................................................... Y311

Dual signals unconfirmed after compare error .................................................................................................................... X311

E Each axis reference position selection ........................................................ R2433,R2533,R2633,R2733,R2833,R2933,R3033

Edited data error..................................................................................................................................................................X33C

Edited data in processing ....................................................................................................................................................X33B

Edited data recovery confirmation....................................................................................................................................... Y323

EDIT mode ............................................................................................................ Y70A,Y7EA,Y8CA,Y9AA,YA8A,YB6A,YC4A

Emergency stop cause.......................................................................................................................................................... R21

Error cause at occurrence of ZR device error ....................................................................................................................... R83

Error code output....................................................................................................... R156,R256,R356,R456,R556,R656,R756

R157,R257,R357,R457,R557,R657,R757

R158,R258,R358,R458,R558,R658,R758

Error code output extension ...................................................................................... R160,R260,R360,R460,R560,R660,R760

R161,R261,R361,R461,R561,R661,R761

R162,R262,R362,R462,R562,R662,R762

Error detection.......................................................................................................... Y717,Y7F7,Y8D7,Y9B7,YA97,YB77,YC57

Error temporary cancel ........................................................................................................................................................ Y337

External axis speed clamp ....................................................................................YD4F,YD7F,YDAF,YDDF,YE0F,YE3F,YE6F

External deceleration - ......................................................................................Y404,Y434,Y464,Y494,Y4C4,Y4F4,Y524,Y554

Y584,Y5B4,Y5E4,Y614,Y644,Y674,Y6A4,Y6D4

External deceleration +......................................................................................Y403,Y433,Y463,Y493,Y4C3,Y4F3,Y523,Y553

Y583,Y5B3,Y5E3,Y613,Y643,Y673,Y6A3,Y6D3

External deceleration speed selection ..............................................R3104,R3114,R3124,R3134,R3144,R3154,R3164,R3174

R3184,R3194,R3204,R3214,R3224,R3234,R3244,R3254

External machine coordinate system compensation data ................R3100,R3110,R3120,R3130,R3140,R3150,R3160,R3170

R3180,R3190,R3200,R3210,R3220,R3230,R3240,R3250

External search block No............................................................................. R2466,R2566,R2666,R2766,R2866,R2966,R3066

R2467,R2567,R2667,R2767,R2867,R2967,R3067

External search device No........................................................................... R2461,R2561,R2661,R2761,R2861,R2961,R3061

External search finished ......................................................................................... X61D,X69D,X71D,X79D,X81D,X89D,X91D

External search program No........................................................................ R2462,R2562,R2662,R2762,R2862,R2962,R3062

R2463,R2563,R2663,R2763,R2863,R2963,R3063

External search sequence No...................................................................... R2464,R2564,R2664,R2764,R2864,R2964,R3064

R2465,R2565,R2665,R2765,R2865,R2965,R3065

External search status ............................................................................................... R100,R200,R300,R400,R500,R600,R700

External search strobe..........................................................................................Y71D,Y7FD,Y8DD,Y9BD,YA9D,YB7D,YC5D

F F 1-digit commanded ...............................................................................................X62A,X6AA,X72A,X7AA,X82A,X8AA,X92A

F 1-digit No. code 1 ................................................................................................... X638,X6B8,X738,X7B8,X838,X8B8,X938

F 1-digit No. code 2 ................................................................................................... X639,X6B9,X739,X7B9,X839,X8B9,X939

F 1-digit No. code 4 .................................................................................................X63A,X6BA,X73A,X7BA,X83A,X8BA,X93A

Feed axis selection -.....................................................................................Y40C,Y43C,Y46C,Y49C,Y4CC,Y4FC,Y52C,Y55C

Y58C,Y5BC,Y5EC,Y61C,Y64C,Y67C,Y6AC,Y6DC

Feed axis selection + ..................................................................................... Y40B,Y43B,Y46B,Y49B,Y4CB,Y4FB,Y52B,Y55B

Y58B,Y5BB,Y5EB,Y61B,Y64B,Y67B,Y6AB,Y6DB

Feedback machine position n-th axis ..................................R804,R805,R814,R815,R824,R825,R834,R835,R844,R845,R854

R855,R864,R865,R874,R875,R884.R885.R894,R895,R904.R905

R914.R915.R924.R925,R934,R935.R944.R945.R954.R955

Feedrate least increment code 1 ..............................................................................Y778,Y858,Y938,YA18,YAF8,YBD8,YCB8

Feedrate least increment code 2 ..............................................................................Y779,Y859,Y939,YA19,YAF9,YBD9,YCB9

FTP mode .................................................................................................................Y709,Y7E9,Y8C9,Y9A9,YA89,YB69,YC49

G Gear shift completion..............................................................................................YD26,YD56,YD86,YDB6,YDE6,YE16,YE46

GOT window Data changeover completion ................................................................................................................... R90,R91

GOT window Data changeover request................................................................................................................. R2390,R2391

Group in tool life management................................................................................... R139,R239,R339,R439,R539,R639,R739

H Handle mode ............................................................................................................Y701,Y7E1,Y8C1,Y9A1,YA81,YB61,YC41

Handle/incremental feed magnification code 1.........................................................Y780,Y860,Y940,YA20,YB00,YBE0,YCC0

Handle/incremental feed magnification code 2.........................................................Y781,Y861,Y941,YA21,YB01,YBE1,YCC1

Handle/incremental feed magnification code 4.........................................................Y782,Y862,Y942,YA22,YB02,YBE2,YCC2

Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection ........................................Y787,Y867,Y947,YA27,YB07,YBE7,YCC7

Hypothetical axis command mode............................................................................Y7B8,Y898,Y978,YA58,YB38,YC18,YCF8

I Illegal axis selected ....................................................................................................X637,X6B7,X737,X7B7,X837,X8B7,X937

In "reset" ......................................................................................................................X615,X695,X715,X795,X815,X895,X915

In automatic initial set mode........................................................................................X605,X685,X705,X785,X805,X885,X905

In automatic operation "pause"....................................................................................X614,X694,X714,X794,X814,X894,X914

In automatic operation "run" ........................................................................................X612,X692,X712,X792,X812,X892,X912

In automatic operation "start" ......................................................................................X613,X693,X713,X793,X813,X893,X913

In axis minus motion......................................................................................... X403,X423,X443,X463,X483,X4A3,X4C3,X4E3

X503,X523,X543,X563,X583,X5A3,X5C3,X5E3

In axis plus motion............................................................................................ X402,X422,X442,X462,X482,X4A2,X4C2,X4E2

X502,X522,X542,X562,X582,X5A2,X5C2,X5E2

In constant surface speed ..........................................................................................X625,X6A5,X725,X7A5,X825,X8A5,X925

In current limit ................................................................................................X40E,X42E,X44E,X46E,X48E,X4AE,X4CE,X4EE

X50E,X52E,X54E,X56E,X58E,X5AE,X5CE,X5EE

In cutting feed.............................................................................................................X621,X6A1,X721,X7A1,X821,X8A1,X921

In handle mode............................................................................................................X601,X681,X701,X781,X801,X881,X901

In high-speed synchronous tapping ......................................................................... X63F,X6BF,X73F,X7BF,X83F,X8BF,X93F

In hypothetical axis command mode .......................................................................X63E,X6BE,X73E,X7BE,X83E,X8BE,X93E

In inch unit selection...................................................................................................X628,X6A8,X728,X7A8,X828,X8A8,X928

In incremental mode....................................................................................................X602,X682,X702,X782,X802,X882,X902

In jog mode..................................................................................................................X600,X680,X700,X780,X800,X880,X900

In L coil selection...................................................................................................... X997,X9C7,X9F7,XA27,XA57,XA87,XAB7

In manual arbitrary feed ..............................................................................................X616,X696,X716,X796,X816,X896,X916

In manual arbitrary feed mode ....................................................................................X603,X683,X703,X783,X803,X883,X903

In MDI mode............................................................................................................. X60B,X68B,X70B,X78B,X80B,X88B,X90B

In memory mode .........................................................................................................X608,X688,X708,X788,X808,X888,X908

In multi-step speed monitor .............................................................................. X412,X432,X452,X472,X492,X4B2,X4D2,X4F2

X512,X532,X552,X572,X592,X5B2,X5D2,X5F2

In PLC axis control ........................................................................................... X417,X437,X457,X477,X497,X4B7,X4D7,X4F7

X517,X537,X557,X577,X597,X5B7,X5D7,X5F7

In rapid traverse .........................................................................................................X620,X6A0,X720,X7A0,X820,X8A0,X920

In reference position return ........................................................................................X627,X6A7,X727,X7A7,X827,X8A7,X927

In reference position return mode ...............................................................................X604,X684,X704,X784,X804,X884,X904

In rewind......................................................................................................................X617,X697,X717,X797,X817,X897,X917

In skip .........................................................................................................................X626,X6A6,X726,X7A6,X826,X8A6,X926

In spindle alarm ........................................................................................................ X993,X9C3,X9F3,XA23,XA53,XA83,XAB3

In spindle forward run............................................................................................ X99B,X9CB,X9FB,XA2B,XA5B,XA8B,XABB

In spindle multi-step speed monitor......................................................................... X9A9,X9D9,XA09,XA39,XA69,XA99,XAC9

In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 1........................................................ X9AA,X9DA,XA0A,XA3A,XA6A,XA9A,XACA

In spindle multi-step speed monitor output 2........................................................ X9AB,X9DB,XA0B,XA3B,XA6B,XA9B,XACB

In spindle reverse run...........................................................................................X99C,X9CC,X9FC,XA2C,XA5C,XA8C,XABC

In spindle synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................X32A

In spindle torque limit ..............................................................................................X99F,X9CF,X9FF,XA2F,XA5F,XA8F,XABF

In synchronous feed ...................................................................................................X624,X6A4,X724,X7A4,X824,X8A4,X924

In tapping ................................................................................................................... X622,X6A2,X722,X7A2,X822,X8A2,X922

In thread cutting ......................................................................................................... X623,X6A3,X723,X7A3,X823,X8A3,X923

In tool life management ...........................................................................................X62B,X6AB,X72B,X7AB,X82B,X8AB,X92B

In zero point initialization .............................................................................X40C,X42C,X44C,X46C,X48C,X4AC,X4CC,X4EC

X50C,X52C,X54C,X56C,X58C,X5AC,X5CC,X5EC

Incremental mode .....................................................................................................Y702,Y7E2,Y8C2,Y9A2,YA82,YB62,YC42

Insulation degradation monitor: limitation value alarm output................................................................................................R99

Insulation degradation monitor: warning................................................................................................................................R98

In-position .........................................................................................................X411,X431,X451,X471,X491,X4B1,X4D1,X4F1

X511,X531,X551,X571,X591,X5B1,X5D1,X5F1

Integration time input 1 ........................................................................................................................................................Y314

Integration time input 2 ........................................................................................................................................................Y315

J Jog handle synchronous........................................................................................Y77B,Y85B,Y93B,YA1B,YAFB,YBDB,YCBB

Jog mode ..................................................................................................................Y700,Y7E0,Y8C0,Y9A0,YA80,YB60,YC40

Jog synchronous feed valid ...................................................................................Y77A,Y85A,Y93A,YA1A,YAFA,YBDA,YCBA

K KEY IN .....................................................................................................................................................................................R8

KEY OUT ...........................................................................................................................................................................R2312

L L coil selection .......................................................................................................YD3F,YD6F,YD9F,YDCF,YDFF,YE2F,YE5F

Lower dead point designation (L) ................................................................ R2484,R2584,R2684,R2784,R2884,R2984,R3084

Lower dead point designation (H)................................................................ R2485,R2585,R2685,R2785,R2885,R2985,R3085

M Machine position n-th axis ...R802,R803,R812,R813,R822,R823,R832,R833,R842,R843,R852,R853,R862,R863,R872,R873

R882.R883.R892,R893.R902.R903.R912.R913.R922.R923,R932,R933.R942.R943.R952.R953

Magnification valid for each handle ..........................................................................Y786,Y866,Y946,YA26,YB06,YBE6,YCC6

M code data 1 ............................................................................................................ R104,R204,R304,R404,R504,R604,R704

R105,R205,R305,R405,R505,R605,R705

M code independent output M00 ...............................................................................X640,X6C0,X740,X7C0,X840,X8C0,X940

M function finish 1.................................................................................................. Y71E,Y7FE,Y8DE,Y9BE,YA9E,YB7E,YC5E

M function finish 2....................................................................................................Y71F,Y7FF,Y8DF,Y9BF,YA9F,YB7F,YC5F

M function strobe 1 ....................................................................................................X644,X6C4,X744,X7C4,X844,X8C4,X944

Macro interrupt..........................................................................................................Y725,Y805,Y8E5,Y9C5,YAA5,YB85,YC65

Macro single valid ................................................................................................................................................................X339

Magazine tool data ............................................................................................................................................................R4750

Magazine tool data (Aux. D) ..............................................................................................................................................R4910

Manual absolute .......................................................................................................Y728,Y808,Y8E8,Y9C8,YAA8,YB88,YC68

Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 1........................................................Y790,Y870,Y950,YA30,YB10,YBF0,YCD0

Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount............................................... R2414,R2514,R2614,R2714,R2814,R2914,R3014

R2415,R2515,R2615,R2715,R2815,R2915,R3015

Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid.......................................................................... Y797,Y877,Y957,YA37,YB17,YBF7,YCD7

Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC ............................................................................Y7AD,Y88D,Y96D,YA4D,YB2D,YC0D,YCED

Manual arbitrary feed axis independent ................................................................... Y7A9,Y889,Y969,YA49,YB29,YC09,YCE9

Manual arbitrary feed completion ............................................................................X61C,X69C,X71C,X79C,X81C,X89C,X91C

Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F................................................................... Y7AA,Y88A,Y96A,YA4A,YB2A,YC0A,YCEA

Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1................................................................................. Y7AB,Y88B,Y96B,YA4B,YB2B,YC0B,YCEB

Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK ..............................................................................Y7AC,Y88C,Y96C,YA4C,YB2C,YC0C,YCEC

Manual arbitrary feed mode ..................................................................................... Y703,Y7E3,Y8C3,Y9A3,YA83,YB63,YC43

Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off ......................................................................... Y7A8,Y888,Y968,YA48,YB28,YC08,YCE8

Manual arbitrary feed stop..................................................................................... Y7AE,Y88E,Y96E,YA4E,YB2E,YC0E,YCEE

Manual arbitrary feed strobe ...................................................................................Y7AF,Y88F,Y96F,YA4F,YB2F,YC0F,YCEF

Manual feedrate .......................................................................................... R2404,R2504,R2604,R2704,R2804,R2904,R3004

R2405,R2505,R2605,R2705,R2805,R2905,R3005

Manual feedrate code 1............................................................................................Y770,Y850,Y930,YA10,YAF0,YBD0,YCB0

Manual feedrate method selection ...........................................................................Y777,Y857,Y937,YA17,YAF7,YBD7,YCB7

Manual interlock - ..............................................................................................Y408,Y438,Y468,Y498,Y4C8,Y4F8,Y528,Y558

Y588,Y5B8,Y5E8,Y618,Y648,Y678,Y6A8,Y6D8

Manual interlock + .............................................................................................Y407,Y437,Y467,Y497,Y4C7,Y4F7,Y527,Y557

Y587,Y5B7,Y5E7,Y617,Y647,Y677,Y6A7,Y6D7

Manual machine lock..................................................................................... Y40A,Y43A,Y46A,Y49A,Y4CA,Y4FA,Y52A,Y55A

Y58A,Y5BA,Y5EA,Y61A,Y64A,Y67A,Y6AA,Y6DA

Manual numerical command ..................................................................................... X649,X6C9,X749,X7C9,X849,X8C9,X949

Manual override method selection............................................................................ Y759,Y839,Y919,Y9F9,YAD9,YBB9,YC99

Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid ..........................................................Y40D,Y43D,Y46D,Y49D,Y4CD,Y4FD,Y52D,Y55D

Y58D,Y5BD,Y5ED,Y61D,Y64D,Y67D,Y6AD,Y6DD

MDI mode.............................................................................................................. Y70B,Y7EB,Y8CB,Y9AB,YA8B,YB6B,YC4B

Mirror image ......................................................................................................Y402,Y432,Y462,Y492,Y4C2,Y4F2,Y522,Y552

Y582,Y5B2,Y5E2,Y612,Y642,Y672,Y6A2,Y6D2

Miscellaneous function lock................................................................................... Y75A,Y83A,Y91A,Y9FA,YADA,YBBA,YC9A

Motion command completion.......................................................................................X618,X698,X718,X798,X818,X898,X918

Multi-point orientation position data............................................................. R3911,R3941,R3971,R4001,R4031,R4061,R4091

Multi-step speed monitor request ..................................................................... Y416,Y446,Y476,Y4A6,Y4D6,Y506,Y536,Y566

Y596,Y5C6,Y5F6,Y626,Y656,Y686,Y6B6,Y6E6

Multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 ............................................................ Y417,Y447,Y477,Y4A7,Y4D7,Y507,Y537,Y567

Y597,Y5C7,Y5F7,Y627,Y657,Y687,Y6B7,Y6E7

Multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 ............................................................ Y418,Y448,Y478,Y4A8,Y4D8,Y508,Y538,Y568

Y598,Y5C8,Y5F8,Y628,Y658,Y688,Y6B8,Y6E8

Multi-step speed monitor mode output 1 .......................................................... X413,X433,X453,X473,X493,X4B3,X4D3,X4F3

X513,X533,X553,X573,X593,X5B3,X5D3,X5F3

Multi-step speed monitor mode output 2 .......................................................... X414,X434,X454,X474,X494,X4B4,X4D4,X4F4

X514,X534,X554,X574,X594,X5B4,X5D4,X5F4

N NC alarm 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................... X330

NC alarm 2 (Servo alarm).................................................................................................................................................... X331

NC alarm 3 (Program error)....................................................................................... X632,X6B2,X732,X7B2,X832,X8B2,X932

NC alarm 4 (Operation error) ..................................................................................... X633,X6B3,X733,X7B3,X833,X8B3,X933

NC axis up-to-speed .........................................................................................X409,X429,X449,X469,X489,X4A9,X4C9,X4E9

X509,X529,X549,X569,X589,X5A9,X5C9,X5E9

NC data sampling completed...............................................................................................................................................X33E

NC data sampling trigger .....................................................................................................................................................Y321

NC reset 1.................................................................................................................Y718,Y7F8,Y8D8,Y9B8,YA98,YB78,YC58

NC reset 2.................................................................................................................Y719,Y7F9,Y8D9,Y9B9,YA99,YB79,YC59

Near reference position ....................................................................................X408,X428,X448,X468,X488,X4A8,X4C8,X4E8

X508,X528,X548,X568,X588,X5A8,X5C8,X5E8

Near reference position (per reference position) ....................................................... R142,R242,R342,R442,R542,R642,R742

R143,R243,R343,R443,R543,R643,R743

Near-point dog ignored ................................................................................ R2421,R2521,R2621,R2721,R2821,R2921,R3021

New tool change ....................................................................................................X64C,X6CC,X74C,X7CC,X84C,X8CC,X94C

No. of dual signal modules on CNC side ...........................................................................................................................R2188

No. of dual signal modules on PLC side............................................................................................................................R4488

No. of work machining (current value) ....................................................................... R140,R240,R340,R440,R540,R640,R740

R141,R241,R341,R441,R541,R641,R741

No. of work machining (maximum value)................................................................... R146,R246,R346,R446,R546,R646,R746

R147,R247,R347,R447,R547,R647,R747

No. of work machining over .....................................................................................X66E,X6EE,X76E,X7EE,X86E,X8EE,X96E

Number of tool parameter..................................................................................................................................................R4710

Number of cycles designation...................................................................... R2486,R2586,R2686,R2786,R2886,R2986,R3086

O Operation mode selection...................................................................................... Y7BE,Y89E,Y97E,YA5E,YB3E,YC1E,YCFE

Optional block skip 1.............................................................................................Y72D,Y80D,Y8ED,Y9CD,YAAD,YB8D,YC6D

OT ignored................................................................................................... R2420,R2520,R2620,R2720,R2820,R2920,R3020

Output OFF check not complete..........................................................................................................................................X312

Output OFF check ...............................................................................................................................................................Y312

Override cancel.........................................................................................................Y758,Y838,Y918,Y9F8,YAD8,YBB8,YC98

P Phase offset request............................................................................................................................................................Y336

Phase shift calculation request ............................................................................................................................................Y335

PLC axis 1st handle valid ................................................................................................................................................... Y32D

PLC axis 2nd handle valid ...................................................................................................................................................Y32E

PLC axis 3rd handle valid ....................................................................................................................................................Y32F

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Axis designation ...............................................................................................................R4200

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Control signals .................................................................................................................R4206

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis External deceleration speed selection/Multi-step speed monitor signal input ..................R4207

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Feedrate............................................................................................................... R4202,R4203

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Movement data .................................................................................................... R4204,R4205

PLC Axis Control 1st PLC axis Operation mode ...............................................................................................................R4201

PLC Axis Control Data A Axis designation........................................................................................................................ R4256

PLC Axis Control Data A Control signals .......................................................................................................................... R4262

PLC Axis Control Data A Feedrate........................................................................................................................ R4258,R4259

PLC Axis Control Data A Movement data ............................................................................................................. R4260,R4261

PLC Axis Control Data A Operation mode ........................................................................................................................ R4257

PLC axis control buffering mode valid .................................................................................................................................Y32B

PLC axis control valid 1st axis............................................................................................................................................. Y340

PLC axis droop release invalid axis................................................................................................................................... R2310

PLC axis near point detection 1st axis ................................................................................................................................ Y338

PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Alarm details ....................................................................................................................... R1901

PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Machine position ..................................................................................................... R1902,R1903

PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Remaining distance................................................................................................. R1904,R1905

PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Status.................................................................................................................................. R1900

PLC Axis State 1st PLC axis Multi-step speed monitor signal output ............................................................................... R1906

PLC Axis State Data A Alarm details................................................................................................................................. R1957

PLC Axis State Data A Machine position .............................................................................................................. R1958,R1959

PLC Axis State Data A Remaining distance.......................................................................................................... R1960,R1961

PLC Axis State Data A Status ........................................................................................................................................... R1956

PLC axis switching ........................................................................................ Y41B,Y44B,Y47B,Y4AB,Y4DB,Y50B,Y53B,Y56B

Y59B,Y5CB,Y5FB,Y62B,Y65B,Y68B,Y6BB,Y6EB

PLC axis position switch 1................................................................................................................................................... X360

PLC axis position switch 2................................................................................................................................................... X361

PLC axis position switch 3................................................................................................................................................... X362

PLC axis position switch 4................................................................................................................................................... X363

PLC axis position switch 5................................................................................................................................................... X364

PLC axis position switch 6................................................................................................................................................... X365

PLC axis position switch 7................................................................................................................................................... X366

PLC axis position switch 8................................................................................................................................................... X367

PLC axis position switch 9................................................................................................................................................... X368

PLC axis position switch 10................................................................................................................................................. X369

PLC axis position switch 11.................................................................................................................................................X36A

PLC axis position switch 12.................................................................................................................................................X36B

PLC axis position switch 13.................................................................................................................................................X36C

PLC axis position switch 14.................................................................................................................................................X36D

PLC axis position switch 15.................................................................................................................................................X36E

PLC axis position switch 16................................................................................................................................................. X36F

PLC emergency stop........................................................................................................................................................... Y327

PLC side dual signal compare mismatch allowance time.................................................................................................. R4483

PLC side dual signal compare status ................................................................................................................................ R4481

PLC side dual signal error Module 1(H) ............................................................................................................................ R4461

PLC side dual signal error Module 1(L) ............................................................................................................................. R4460

PLC side dual signal error Module 2(H) ............................................................................................................................ R4463

PLC side dual signal error Module 2(L) ............................................................................................................................. R4462

PLC side dual signal error Module 3(H).............................................................................................................................R4465

PLC side dual signal error Module 3(L) .............................................................................................................................R4464

PLC side dual signal head device No. 1 ............................................................................................................................R4484

PLC side dual signal head device No. 2 ............................................................................................................................R4485

PLC side dual signal head device No. 3 ............................................................................................................................R4486

PLC side dual signal output error Module 1.......................................................................................................................R4474

PLC side dual signal output error Module 2.......................................................................................................................R4475

PLC side dual signal output error Module 3.......................................................................................................................R4476

PLC side dual signal output Module 1 ...............................................................................................................................R4470

PLC side dual signal output Module 2 ...............................................................................................................................R4471

PLC side dual signal output Module 3 ...............................................................................................................................R4472

PLC side dual signal Module 1(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4451

PLC side dual signal Module 1(L)......................................................................................................................................R4450

PLC side dual signal Module 2(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4453

PLC side dual signal Module 2(L)......................................................................................................................................R4452

PLC side dual signal Module 3(H) .....................................................................................................................................R4455

PLC side dual signal Module 3(L)......................................................................................................................................R4454

PLC side head G No..........................................................................................................................................................R4482

PLC side safety compare activity check information .........................................................................................................R4480

PLC side safety operation status .......................................................................................................................................R4490

PLC skip 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A0

PLC skip 2 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A1

PLC skip 3 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A2

PLC skip 4 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A3

PLC skip 5 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A4

PLC skip 6 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A5

PLC skip 7 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A6

PLC skip 8 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A7

PLC skip 9 ...........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A8

PLC skip 10 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3A9

PLC skip 11 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AA

PLC skip 12 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AB

PLC skip 13 ........................................................................................................................................................................Y3AC

PLC skip 14 ........................................................................................................................................................................Y3AD

PLC skip 15 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AE

PLC skip 16 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3AF

PLC skip 17 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B0

PLC skip 18 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B1

PLC skip 19 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B2

PLC skip 20 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B3

PLC skip 21 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B4

PLC skip 22 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B5

PLC skip 23 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B6

PLC skip 24 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B7

PLC skip 25 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B8

PLC skip 26 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3B9

PLC skip 27 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BA

PLC skip 28 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BB

PLC skip 29 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BC

PLC skip 30 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BD

PLC skip 31 ........................................................................................................................................................................ Y3BE

PLC skip 32 .........................................................................................................................................................................Y3BF

PLC version code ............................................................................................................................ R2332R2333,R2334,R2335

PLC version code (method 2)...................................................................... R2360,R2361,R2362,R2363,R2364,R2365,R2366

Pointer designation............................................................................................................................................................ R4715

Position loop in-position ........................................................................................ X99E,X9CE,X9FE,XA2E,XA5E,XA8E,XABE

Position switch 1.........................................................................................................X660,X6E0,X760,X7E0,X860,X8E0,X960

Power OFF required after parameter change......................................................................................................................X33A

Power shutoff movement over.................................................................................. X66F,X6EF,X76F,X7EF,X86F,X8EF,X96F

Power shutoff notification .................................................................................................................................................... X313

Program display during operation.........................................................................Y72C,Y80C,Y8EC,Y9CC,YAAC,YB8C,YC6C

Program operation mode (Memory mode) ............................................................... Y708,Y7E8,Y8C8,Y9A8,YA88,YB68,YC48

Program restart ....................................................................................................... Y723,Y803,Y8E3,Y9C3,YAA3,YB83,YC63

R Rapid traverse .......................................................................................................... Y726,Y806,Y8E6,Y9C6,YAA6,YB86,YC66

Rapid traverse override ............................................................................... R2402,R2502,R2602,R2702,R2802,R2902,R3002

Rapid traverse override valid...................................................................................Y7BF,Y89F,Y97F,YA5F,YB3F,YC1F,YCFF

Rapid traverse override code 1 ................................................................................Y768,Y848,Y928,YA08,YAE8,YBC8,YCA8

Rapid traverse override code 2 ................................................................................Y769,Y849,Y929,YA09,YAE9,YBC9,YCA9

Rapid traverse override method selection.............................................................. Y76F,Y84F,Y92F,YA0F,YAEF,YBCF,YCAF

Read control window 1 Control signal ............................................................................................................................... R8507

Read control window 1 Data No. ....................................................................................................................................... R8503

Read control window 1 Number to be read ....................................................................................................................... R8505

Read control window 1 Read method................................................................................................................................ R8504

Read control window 1 Section No.................................................................................................................................... R8500

Read control window 1 Section sub-ID No. ....................................................................................................................... R8501

Read control window 1 Sub-section No............................................................................................................................. R8502

Read result 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... R9000

Read window data 1 1st Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9040

Read window data 1 1st Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9041

Read window data 1 2nd Read data ................................................................................................................................. R9042

Read window data 1 2nd Read data ................................................................................................................................. R9043

Read window data 1 3rd Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9044

Read window data 1 3rd Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9045

Read window data 1 4th Read data .................................................................................................................................. R9046

Read window data 1 4th Read data...................................................................................................................................R9047

Recalculation request ............................................................................................Y72B,Y80B,Y8EB,Y9CB,YAAB,YB8B,YC6B

Reference position retract.....................................................................................Y75D,Y83D,Y91D,Y9FD,YADD,YBBD,YC9D

Reference position return mode ...............................................................................Y704,Y7E4,Y8C4,Y9A4,YA84,YB64,YC44

Reference position selection code 1.........................................................................Y730,Y810,Y8F0,Y9D0,YAB0,YB90,YC70

Reference position selection code 2.........................................................................Y731,Y811,Y8F1,Y9D1,YAB1,YB91,YC71

Reference position selection method........................................................................Y737,Y817,Y8F7,Y9D7,YAB7,YB97,YC77

Reset & rewind ...................................................................................................... Y71A,Y7FA,Y8DA,Y9BA,YA9A,YB7A,YC5A

S Saving operation history data ..............................................................................................................................................Y322

S code data 1............................................................................................................. R112,R212,R312,R412,R512,R612,R712

R113,R213,R313,R413,R513,R613,R713

S command gear No. illegal......................................................................................X984,X9B4,X9E4,XA14,XA44,XA74,XAA4

S command max./min. command value over............................................................X985,X9B5,X9E5,XA15,XA45,XA75,XAA5

S command no gear selected ...................................................................................X986,X9B6,X9E6,XA16,XA46,XA76,XAA6

S command override.................................................................................... R3910,R3940,R3970,R4000,R4030,R4060,R4090

S function strobe 1.....................................................................................................X658,X6D8,X758,X7D8,X858,X8D8,X958

Search & start ...........................................................................................................Y7B2,Y892,Y972,YA52,YB32,YC12,YCF2

Search & start (error) ................................................................................................. X635,X6B5,X735,X7B5,X835,X8B5,X935

Search & start (search).............................................................................................. X636,X6B6,X736,X7B6,X836,X8B6,X936

Search & start program No. ......................................................................... R2438,R2538,R2638,R2738,R2838,R2938,R3038

R2439,R2539,R2639,R2739,R2839,R2939,R3039

Selected tool No. ......................................................................................... R2448,R2548,R2648,R2748,R2848,R2948,R3048

R2449,R2549,R2649,R2749,R2849,R2949,R3049

Servo OFF ........................................................................................................ Y401,Y431,Y461,Y491,Y4C1,Y4F1,Y521,Y551

Y581,Y5B1,Y5E1,Y611,Y641,Y671,Y6A1,Y6D1

Servo ready ......................................................................................................X400,X420,X440,X460,X480,X4A0,X4C0,X4E0

X500,X520,X540,X560,X580,X5A0,X5C0,X5E0

Servo ready completion .......................................................................................................................................................X321

Single block ..............................................................................................................Y712,Y7F2,Y8D2,Y9B2,YA92,YB72,YC52

SKIP1...................................................................................................................................................................................X318

SKIP2...................................................................................................................................................................................X319

SKIP3...................................................................................................................................................................................X31A

SKIP4...................................................................................................................................................................................X31B

Spare tool: Auxiliary data...................................................................................................................................................R6729

Spare tool: Group No............................................................................................................................................. R6724,R6725

Spare tool: Length compensation amount ............................................................................................................. R6732,R6733

Spare tool: Life data...........................................................................................................................................................R6730

Spare tool: Radius compensation amount............................................................................................................. R6734,R6735

Spare tool: Tool data flag/status ........................................................................................................................................R6728

Spare tool: Tool No................................................................................................................................................ R6726,R6727

Spare tool: Usage data ......................................................................................................................................................R6731

Speed detection........................................................................................................X992,X9C2,X9F2,XA22,XA52,XA82,XAB2

Speed monitor door open possible.......................................................................................................................................... R9

Speed monitor mode ......................................................................................................................................................... R2309

Spindle actual speed ................................................................................... R1606,R1636,R1666,R1696,R1726,R1756,R1786

R1607,R1637,R1667,R1697,R1727,R1757,R1787

Spindle command final data (Rotation speed)............................................. R1602,R1632,R1662,R1692,R1722,R1752,R1782

R1603,R1633,R1663,R1693,R1723,R1753,R1783

Spindle command final data (12-bit binary) ................................................. R1604,R1634,R1664,R1694,R1724,R1754,R1784

R1605,R1635,R1665,R1695,R1725,R1755,R1785

Spindle command rotation speed input ....................................................... R1600,R1630,R1660,R1690,R1720,R1750,R1780

R1601,R1631,R1661,R1691,R1721,R1751,R1781

Spindle command rotation speed output ..................................................... R3900,R3930,R3960,R3990,R4020,R4050,R4080

R3901,R3931,R3961,R3991,R4021,R4051,R4081

Spindle forward run index................................................................................... YD3C,YD6C,YD9C,YDCC,YDFC,YE2C,YE5C

Spindle forward run start ........................................................................................ YD38,YD68,YD98,YDC8,YDF8,YE28,YE58

Spindle gear selection code 1 ................................................................................ YD30,YD60,YD90,YDC0,YDF0,YE20,YE50

Spindle gear selection code 2 ................................................................................ YD31,YD61,YD91,YDC1,YDF1,YE21,YE51

Spindle gear shift.................................................................................................... YD35,YD65,YD95,YDC5,YDF5,YE25,YE55

Spindle gear shift command 1..............................................................................X98D,X9BD,X9ED,XA1D,XA4D,XA7D,XAAD

Spindle gear shift command 2............................................................................... X98E,X9BE,X9EE,XA1E,XA4E,XA7E,XAAE

Spindle in-position .................................................................................................... X996,X9C6,X9F6,XA26,XA56,XA86,XAB6

Spindle multi-step monitor request ......................................................................... YD49,YD79,YDA9,YDD9,YE09,YE39,YE69

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 1 .................................................. YD4A,YD7A,YDAA,YDDA,YE0A,YE3A,YE6A

Spindle multi-step speed monitor mode input 2 .................................................. YD4B,YD7B,YDAB,YDDB,YE0B,YE3B,YE6B

Spindle motor temperature.......................................................................... R1611,R1641,R1671,R1701,R1731,R1761,R1791

Spindle OFF mode ..................................................................................................Y75F,Y83F,Y91F,Y9FF,YADF,YBBF,YC9F

Spindle orientation.................................................................................................. YD36,YD66,YD96,YDC6,YDF6,YE26,YE56

Spindle orientation command.............................................................................. YD3E,YD6E,YD9E,YDCE,YDFE,YE2E,YE5E

Spindle override code 1.......................................................................................... YD28,YD58,YD88,YDB8,YDE8,YE18,YE48

Spindle override code 2.......................................................................................... YD29,YD59,YD89,YDB9,YDE9,YE19,YE49

Spindle override code 4....................................................................................... YD2A,YD5A,YD8A,YDBA,YDEA,YE1A,YE4A

Spindle override method selection ........................................................................YD2F,YD5F,YD8F,YDBF,YDEF,YE1F,YE4F

Spindle phase synchronization............................................................................................................................................ Y333

Spindle phase synchronization completion .........................................................................................................................X32C

Spindle ready-ON..................................................................................................... X998,X9C8,X9F8,XA28,XA58,XA88,XAB8

Spindle reverse run index................................................................................... YD3D,YD6D,YD9D,YDCD,YDFD,YE2D,YE5D

Spindle reverse run start ........................................................................................ YD39,YD69,YD99,YDC9,YDF9,YE29,YE59

Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion ............................................................................................................X32B

Spindle servo-ON ..................................................................................................... X999,X9C9,X9F9,XA29,XA59,XA89,XAB9

Spindle speed lower limit over..............................................................................X98C,X9BC,X9EC,XA1C,XA4C,XA7C,XAAC

Spindle speed upper limit over .............................................................................. X98B,X9BB,X9EB,XA1B,XA4B,XA7B,XAAB

Spindle stop............................................................................................................ YD34,YD64,YD94,YDC4,YDF4,YE24,YE54

Spindle synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................... Y332

Spindle synchronization Basic spindle selection ............................................................................................................... R2357

Spindle synchronization cancel ........................................................................................................................................... Y330

Spindle synchronization phase error 1 ..................................................................................................................................R48

Spindle synchronization phase error 2 ..................................................................................................................................R49

Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor ........................................................................................................................R56

Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (lower limit).....................................................................................................R57

Spindle synchronization Phase error monitor (upper limit) ....................................................................................................R58

Spindle synchronization phase error output ..........................................................................................................................R55

Spindle synchronization Phase offset data............................................................................................................................R59

Spindle synchronization Phase shift amount .....................................................................................................................R2359

Spindle synchronization Synchronous spindle selection ...................................................................................................R2358

Spindle synchronous rotation direction................................................................................................................................Y334

Spindle tool ........................................................................................................................................................................R4720

Spindle torque limit 1 ..............................................................................................YD45,YD75,YDA5,YDD5,YE05,YE35,YE65

Spindle torque limit 2 ..............................................................................................YD46,YD76,YDA6,YDD6,YE06,YE36,YE66

Spindle torque limit 3 ..............................................................................................YD47,YD77,YDA7,YDD7,YE07,YE37,YE67

Spindle up-to-speed..................................................................................................X995,X9C5,X9F5,XA25,XA55,XA85,XAB5

Standby 1 tool....................................................................................................................................................................R4721

Synchronization control operation method .................................................. R2432,R2532,R2632,R2732,R2832,R2932,R3032

Synchronization correction mode .............................................................................Y722,Y802,Y8E2,Y9C2,YAA2,YB82,YC62

Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal .....................................................Y7B9,Y899,Y979,YA59,YB39,YC19,YCF9

T T code data 1............................................................................................................. R120,R220,R320,R420,R520,R620,R720

R121,R221,R321,R421,R521,R621,R721

T function strobe 1 .....................................................................................................X650,X6D0,X750,X7D0,X850,X8D0,X950

T life mgmt Spindle tool No.................................................................................................................................... R6720,R6721

T life mgmt Standby tool No. ................................................................................................................................. R6722,R6723

Tap retract ............................................................................................................Y75C,Y83C,Y91C,Y9FC,YADC,YBBC,YC9C

Tap retract possible ............................................................................................... X66D,X6ED,X76D,X7ED,X86D,X8ED,X96D

Temperature warning cause ..................................................................................................................................................R41

Thermal displacement compensation amount ..................................................R800,R810,R820,R830,R840,R850,R860,R870

R880,R890,R900,R910,R920,R930,R940,R950

Thermal expansion max. compensation amount ..............................R3103,R3113,R3123,R3133,R3143,R3153,R3163,R3173

R3183,R3193,R3203,R3213,R3223,R3233,R3243,R3253

Thermal expansion offset compensation amount .............................R3102,R3112,R3122,R3132,R3142,R3152,R3162,R3172

R3182,R3192,R3202,R3212,R3222,R3232,R3242,R3252

Tool alarm 1/Tool skip 1 ...........................................................................................Y788,Y868,Y948,YA28,YB08,YBE8,YCC8

Tool alarm 2..............................................................................................................Y789,Y869,Y949,YA29,YB09,YBE9,YCC9

Tool change position return completion..................................................................X64B,X6CB,X74B,X7CB,X84B,X8CB,X94B

Tool change reset .................................................................................................Y78C,Y86C,Y94C,YA2C,YB0C,YBEC,YCCC

Tool group No. designation.......................................................................... R2430,R2530,R2630,R2730,R2830,R2930,R3030

Tool length measurement 1 ......................................................................................Y720,Y800,Y8E0,Y9C0,YAA0,YB80,YC60

Tool length measurement 2 ......................................................................................Y721,Y801,Y8E1,Y9C1,YAA1,YB81,YC61

Tool life management input ...................................................................................Y78B,Y86B,Y94B,YA2B,YB0B,YBEB,YCCB

Tool life over ............................................................................................................X62E,X6AE,X72E,X7AE,X82E,X8AE,X92E

Tool life usage data ................................................................................................... R144,R244,R344,R444,R544,R644,R744

R145,R245,R345,R445,R545,R645,R745

Tool No...................................................................................................................... R136,R236,R336,R436,R536,R636,R736

U Unclamp command .......................................................................................... X410,X430,X450,X470,X490,X4B0,X4D0,X4F0

X510,X530,X550,X570,X590,X5B0,X5D0,X5F0

Unclamp completion......................................................................................... Y415,Y445,Y475,Y4A5,Y4D5,Y505,Y535,Y565

Y595,Y5C5,Y5F5,Y625,Y655,Y685,Y6B5,Y6E5

Usage data count valid.......................................................................................... Y78A,Y86A,Y94A,YA2A,YB0A,YBEA,YCCA

Upper dead point designation (L) ................................................................ R2482,R2582,R2682,R2782,R2882,R2982,R3082

Upper dead point designation (H) ............................................................... R2483,R2583,R2683,R2783,R2883,R2983,R3083

User macro input #1032(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2324,R2325

User macro input #1032(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2470,R2570,R2670,R2770,R2870,R2970,R3070

R2471,R2571,R2671,R2771,R2871,R2971,R3071

User macro input #1033(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2326,R2327

User macro input #1033(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2472,R2572,R2672,R2772,R2872,R2972,R3072

R2473,R2573,R2673,R2773,R2873,R2973,R3073

User macro input #1034(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2328,R2329

User macro input #1034(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2474,R2574,R2674,R2774,R2874,R2974,R3074

R2475,R2575,R2675,R2775,R2875,R2975,R3075

User macro input #1035(PLC -> Controller).......................................................................................................... R2330,R2331

User macro input #1035(PLC -> Controller)................................................ R2476,R2576,R2676,R2776,R2876,R2976,R3076

R2477,R2577,R2677,R2777,R2877,R2977,R3077

User macro output #1132(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R170,R270,R370,R470,R570,R670,R770

R171,R271,R371,R471,R571,R671,R771

User macro output #1132(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R24,R25

User macro output #1133(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R172,R272,R372,R472,R572,R672,R772

R173,R273,R373,R473,R573,R673,R773

User macro output #1133(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R26,R27

User macro output #1134(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R174,R274,R374,R474,R574,R674,R774

R175,R275,R375,R475,R575,R675,R775

User macro output #1134(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R28,R29

User macro output #1135(Controller -> PLC)............................................................ R176,R276,R376,R476,R576,R676,R776

R177,R277,R377,R477,R577,R677,R777

User macro output #1135(Controller -> PLC)................................................................................................................ R30,R31

W Waiting between part systems............................................................................... X63C,X6BC,X73C,X7BC,X83C,X8BC,X93C

Waiting for data to be downloaded........................................................................ X66C,X6EC,X76C,X7EC,X86C,X8EC,X96C

Workpiece coordinate offset measurement compensation No. ................... R2446,R2546,R2646,R2746,R2846,R2946,R3046

R2447,R2547,R2647,R2747,R2847,R2947,R3047

Write control window 1 Control signal ............................................................................................................................... R8675

Write control window 1 Data No. ....................................................................................................................................... R8671

Write control window 1 Number to be written.................................................................................................................... R8673

Write control window 1 Section No.................................................................................................................................... R8668

Write control window 1 Section sub-ID No. .......................................................................................................................R8669

Write control window 1 Sub-section No. ............................................................................................................................R8670

Write control window 1 Write method ................................................................................................................................R8672

Write data 1 1st Write data .................................................................................................................................... R8660,R8661

Write data 1 2nd Write data ................................................................................................................................... R8662,R8663

Write data 1 3rd Write data.................................................................................................................................... R8664,R8665

Write data 1 4th Write data .................................................................................................................................... R8666,R8667

Write result 1......................................................................................................................................................................R9020

Z Zero point initialization incomplete...............................................................X40D,X42D,X44D,X46D,X48D,X4AD,X4CD,X4ED

X50D,X52D,X54D,X56D,X58D,X5AD,X5CD,X5ED

Zero point initialization set completed............................................................X40A,X42A,X44A,X46A,X48A,X4AA,X4CA,X4EA

X50A,X52A,X54A,X56A,X58A,X5AA,X5CA,X5EA

Zero point initialization set error completed ...................................................X40B,X42B,X44B,X46B,X48B,X4AB,X4CB,X4EB

X50B,X52B,X54B,X56B,X58B,X5AB,X5CB,X5EB

Zero point initialization set mode ...................................................................... Y412,Y442,Y472,Y4A2,Y4D2,Y502,Y532,Y562

Y592,Y5C2,Y5F2,Y622,Y652,Y682,Y6B2,Y6E2

Zero point initialization set start ........................................................................ Y413,Y443,Y473,Y4A3,Y4D3,Y503,Y533,Y563

Y593,Y5C3,Y5F3,Y623,Y653,Y683,Y6B3,Y6E3

Zero speed................................................................................................................X994,X9C4,X9F4,XA24,XA54,XA84,XAB4

Z-phase passed ....................................................................................................X99D,X9CD,X9FD,XA2D,XA5D,XA8D,XABD

ZR device No. at occurrence of NC exclusive instruction (DDWR/DDRD) error .......................................................... R80, R81

Revision History

Date of revision

Manual No. Revision details

Dec. 2006 IB-1500263(ENG)-A First edition created.

Jan. 2007 IB-1500263(ENG)-B

- "Device No. Index" was added. - The following sections were added. 4.23 Each Application: Safety Observation 7. Exclusive Instructions - The following explanations of signals were added. 4.1 Bit Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC) - 24 hours continuous operation X310 - Safety signal unconfirmed after compare error X311 4.5 Data Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC) - Speed monitor door open possible R9 4.9 Bit Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC) - Contactor shutoff test Y310 4.13 Data Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC) - Speed monitor mode R2309 - The device No. of "No. of work machining (maximum value) was changed to R146. - The shared G device Nos. of safety observation signals were changed. - Mistakes were corrected.

May 2007 IB-1500263(ENG)-C

- The following sections were added. 2.1.3 Shared Device CNC Internal Device Correspondence Table 4.24 Each Application : GOT Window - Mistakes were corrected.

Jun. 2007 IB-150263(ENG)-D

- The following sections were added. 3.3.5 Precautions 3.5.8 PLC Constants 3.5.9 PLC Bit Selection 3.6 Special Relay/Register Signals 4.25 Each Application : PLC Constants - The following explanations of signals were added. 4.2 Bit Type Input Signals : Axis State (CNC->PLC) - In current limit X40E 4.3 Bit Type Input Signals : Part System State (CNC->PLC) - In inch unit selection X628 - Waiting between part systems X63C 4.5 Data Type Input Signals: System State (CNC->PLC) - KEY IN R8 4.11 Bit Type Output Signals : Part System Command (PLC->CNC) - Program display during operation Y72C - Inclined axis control: no Z axis compensation Y7B6 4.13 Data Type Output Signals: System Command (PLC->CNC) - KEY OUT R2312 - Mistakes were corrected.

Mar. 2010 IB-1500263(ENG)-F

- Corrections are made corresponding to C70 S/W version B2. - The following sections were added. 2.1.3 Data update program with NC 4.26 Each application : PLC bit selection 4.27 Each application :Chopping 7.3 D(P).DDWR command 7.4 D(P).DDRD command Appendix 1.1 Section No. List Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data - Following chapter is revised. 4.17 Each Application: PLC Axis Control - Mistakes were corrected.

Date of revision

Manual No. Revision details

Dec. 2010 IB-1500263(ENG)-G

Corrections are made corresponding to C70 S/W version C5. - Following chapters are added 4.28 Each Application : PLC Axis Indexing - Type to line-wrap the currently executed program is added to "4.24.3 Details of Command" - Following signal explanations are added. X33E SMPFIN(NC data sampling completed) X33A PARACHG(Power OFF required after parameter change) X33B EDITDO(Edited data processing) X33C EDITERR(Edited data error) Y323 EDITOK(Edited data recovery confirmation) Y41B to Y6EBCHGPLCn(PLC axis switching) X416 to Y5F6 AXCHGISn(Axis switching invalid status) X417 to X5F7 PLCMODn(In PLC axis control) X313 PSDNTF(Power shutoff notification) YD4F to YE6F ESSCn(External axis speed clamp) R2310 PLC axis droop release invalid axis R60 to R69 APLC input data 1 to 10 R2380 to R2389 APLC output data 1 to 10 R2000 to R2047 PLC axis indexing control status 1 to 4 R4300 to R4347 PLC axis indexing control command 1 to 4 R2179 CNC side dual signal compare status 2(SU_NST2) R4479 PLC side dual signal compare status 2(SU_PST2) R160 to R163/R260 to R263/R360 to R363/R460 to R463/R560 to R563/R660 to R663/ R760 to R763 Error code output extension, Parameter 1, 2 output area - Following signal names are changed X66F to X96F: Absolute position warning is changed to Power shutoff movement over R1906/R1914/R1922/R1930/R1938/R1946/R1954/R1986: Multi-step speed monitor signal output is changed to Status 2 - Followings are added to "Appendix 1.3 Explanation of Read/Write Data" 2-50Rapid traverse time constant G0tL 2-52Rapid traverse time constant G0t1 2-55Axis name 2-56Cutting feed clamp speed 2-57Soft limit IB+ 2-58Soft limit IB- 2-59: Soft limit IB type 21-34: Current position of program command 21-35: Remaining command 26-36Spindle Position within one rotation (Z-phase standard) - Following signals are deleted. R98 Insulation degradation monitor: warning R99 Insulation degradation monitor: limitation value alarm output - Mistakes are corrected.

Feb. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-H - Added "Handling of our product" - Mistakes are corrected.

Sep. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-J

Corrections were made corresponding to C70 S/W version D5. - The following chapter was added. 5.13 Switching between NC Axis / PLC Axis - The following signal explanations were added. X63F to X93F HSST (In high-speed synchronous tapping) R82 ZRECVNO (Common variable No. at occurrence of ZR device error) R83 ZRECVFC (Error cause at occurrence of ZR device error) R802/R803 to R952/R953 (Machine position n-th axis) R804/R805 to R954/R955 (Feedback machine position n-th axis) Y3A0 to Y3BF PSKIPn (PLC skip 1 to 32) Y723 to YC63 SRN (Program restart) Y75F to YC9F SPOFFMn (Spindle OFF mode) Y7B9 to YCF9 (Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal) - The following signal descriptions were deleted. R801 to R951 Servo motor temperature (Continued on the following page)

Date of revision

Manual No. Revision details

Sep. 2012 IB-1500263(ENG)-J

(Continued from the previous page) - The followings were updated to the latest version. "Appendix 1 List of PLC Window Data" "Appendix 1.1 Section No. List" "Appendix 1.2 Sub-section No. List" "Appendix 1.3.3 Explanation of data details" - Mistakes were corrected.

Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (EUROPE FA CENTER) Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650

Germany Service Center Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-121 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-269-673-4092

France Service Center Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 CLEVELAND, OHIO 44114, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE

TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Minnesota Service Satellite ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI 7-PALAZZO SIRIO CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI,

20864 AGRATE BRIANZA MILANO ITALY West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A. TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite

VIA SAVELLI 24 - 35129 PADOVA ITALY Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A. TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Service Center

TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. East Region Service Center TEL: +44-1707-282-846 / FAX: +44-1707-27-8992 200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NEW JERSEY 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center

CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420 Pennsylvania Service Satellite 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA 16510, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579 TEL: +1-814-897-7820 / FAX: +1-814-987-7820

Poland Service Center South Region Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND 1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701 TEL +1-678-985-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519

Turkey Service Center Texas Service Satellites ERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775 GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. MRANIYE / ISTANBUL, TURKEY TEL: +1-817-251-7468 / FAX: +1-817-416-5000 TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A. TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 Czech Republic Service Center

TECHNOLOGICKA 374/6,708 00 OSTRAVA-PUSTKOVEC, CZECH REPUBLIC Florida Service Satellite TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199 WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A. TEL: +1-321-610-4436 / FAX: +1-321-610-4437 Russia Service Center

213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Canada Region Service Center TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192 4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Sweden Service Center

STRANDKULLEN, 718 91 FRVI , SWEDEN Canada Service Satellite TEL: +46-581-700-20 / FAX: +46-581-700-75 EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Bulgaria Service Center

4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA Mexico City Service Center TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061 MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center

APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE Monterrey Service Satellite TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721 MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 / FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366

BRAZIL Belarus Service Center

MELCO CNC do Brasil Comrcio e Servios S.A Nezavisimosti pr.177, 220125 Minsk, Belarus Brazil Region Service Center TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081 ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 South Africa Service Center

P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625 SOUTH AFRICA TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513

ASEAN CHINA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER) Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU, TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA

TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-2830 Indonesia Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer THE PLAZZA OFFICE TOWER, 28TH FLOOR JL.M.H. THAMRIN KAV.28-30, JAKARTA, INDONESIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer TEL: +62-21-2992-2333 / FAX: +62-21-2992-2555 China (Jinan) Service Dealer

China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite 60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Beijing) Service Center

9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA NO. 16, JALAN SHAH BANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-3907 TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Dealer

Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center China (Tianjin) Service Center UNIT 2408~11, 24TH FLOOR, SAIGON TRADE CENTER, 37 TON DUC THANG STREET, B-2 801/802, YOUYI BUILDING, NO.50 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT, DISTRICT 1, HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM TIANJIN 300061, CHINA TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5947 TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017

China (Shenyang) Service Satellite Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET, HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM China (Chengdu) Service Center TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD,

JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA Philippines Service Center TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630 UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Shenzhen) Service Center TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417 ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,

FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. (THAILAND FA CENTER) TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776 BANG-CHAN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE NO.111 SOI SERITHAI 54 China (Xiamen) Service Dealer T.KANNAYAO, A.KANNAYAO, BANGKOK 10230, THAILAND China (Dongguan) Service Dealer TEL: +66-2906-8255 / FAX: +66-2906-3239

Thailand Service Center KOREA 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1, FLOOR 7 RAMA III RD., BANGPONGPANG, YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120, THAILAND MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER) TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-9750 Korea Service Center

1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668

INDIA Korea Taegu Service Satellite

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA India Service Center TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411 2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY, DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399 TAIWAN Ludhiana satellite office Jamshedpur satellite office MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)

Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center India (Pune) Service Center NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST., EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA TAICHUNG CITY 407, TAIWAN R.O.C. TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 Baroda satellite office Mumbai satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center

10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 111, TAIWAN R.O.C. India (Bangalore) Service Center TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433 PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2, LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 710, TAIWAN, R.O.C. Chennai satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031 Coimbatore satellite office

OCEANIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD. Australia Service Center 348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245

Notice Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoid- able cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C70 PLC Interface Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric C70 PLC Interface User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.